PROJECT M ANUAL Project No.: 11-0123
I ssue Date: January 15, 2013
ARCHITECT: Cuningham Group Architecture, I nc. 201 Main Street SE - Suite 325 Minneapolis, Minnesota 55414
Akin Road Elementary School Renovation 5231 195th Street West Farmington, Minnesota55024
Volume I : General Construction
OWNER: Farmington Area Public Schools I SD 192 421 Walnut Street Farmington, Minnesota 55024
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 000101 - PROJECT TITLE PAGE DATE:
January 15, 2013
PROJECT:
AKIN ROAD ELEMENTARY SCHOOL REMODELING AND MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT 5231 195TH STREET WEST FARMINGTON, MINNESOTA 55024
PROJECT NO.:
11-0122 - Volumes One and Two Volume One - General Construction Specifications Volume Two - Mechanical and Electrical Specifications
BID DATE:
February 6, 2013
BID TIME:
11:00 A.M., Local Time
OWNER:
FARMINGTON AREA PUBLIC SCHOOLS ISD 192 421 WALNUT STREET FARMINGTON, MINNESOTA 55024
ARCHITECT:
Cuningham Group Architecture, Inc. 201 Main Street SE - Suite 325 Minneapolis, Minnesota 55414 Telephone: (612) 379-3400 Facsimile: (612) 379-4400
CONSULTING CIVIL/ STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS:
BKBM 5930 Brooklyn Boulevard Minneapolis, Minnesota 55429 Telephone: (763) 843-0420 Facsimile: (763) 843-0421
CONSULTING MECHANICAL/ ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS:
Hallberg Engineering 1750 Commerce Court White Bear Lake, Minnesota 55110 Telephone: (651) 748-1100 Facsimile: (651) 748-9370
PROJECT TITLE PAGE
S:\11\0123\frontend\000101CGA.doc
000101 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
HARDWARE CONSULTANT: (ARCHITECT’S CONSULTANT)
INGERSOLL-RAND 6230 Bury Drive Eden Prairie, MN 55346 Telephone: (952) 674-4942 Facsimilie: (952) 674-4962 Cell: (612) 749-4125
KITCHEN EQUIPMENT CONSULTANT:
Robert Rippe & Associates 6117 Blue Circle Drive, Suite 100 Minneapolis, Minnesota 55343 Telephone: (952) 933-0313 Facsimile: ((52) 933-9661
END OF DOCUMENT
000101 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
PROJECT TITLE PAGE
S:\11\0123\frontend\000101CGA.doc
11 0123
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER'S CERTIFICATION:
Akin Road Elementary School
I hereby certify that Sections From Divisions 1 and 5 of this Specification were prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Minnesota. Engineering Firm: BKBM.
Engineer’s Signature: Tina Wyffels, P.E. Date: January 15, 2013 License No. 42758
000105 2 of 3 Printed on 1/15/2013
CERTIFICATIONS AND SEALS F:\11\11378\Specifications\000105CGA.Akin BKBM 2013 01 15.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
MECHANICAL ENGINEER'S CERTIFICATION:
ELECTRICAL ENGINEER'S CERTIFICATION:
11-0123
I hereby certify that Divisions 21-25 of this Specification was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Minnesota. Engineering Firm: Hallberg Engineering. Engineer’s Signature: Richard L. Lucio, P.E. ______________________________________ Date: January 15, 2013 License No. 42852
I hereby certify that Divisions 26-28 of this Specification was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Minnesota. Engineering Firm: Hallberg Engineering. Engineer’s Signature: Paul J. Fettinger, P.E. ______________________________________ Date: January 15, 2013 License No. 43079
CERTIFICATIONS AND SEALS I:\Projects\Cuningham\R11-1036.000\Correspondence\000105CGA.docx
000105 - 3 of 4 Printed on 1/15/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 000110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS Note: Items Written in Italics are intended to indicate author of Specification section ONLY and are NOT intended to exclude work from Contractors Scope of Work.
VOLUME ONE: INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION ***** 000101 000105 000110 000115
Cover Sheet Project Title Page Certifications and Seals Table of Contents List of Drawing Sheets
PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS 001113
Advertisement for Bids
INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROCUREMENT 002100 002213 002513
Instructions to Bidders (AIA Doc. A701-97) Supplementary Instructions to Bidders Pre-Bid Meeting
PROCUREMENT FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS 004113 004325 004343
Bid Proposal Form (Stipulated Sum) Substitution Request Form Wage Rate Requirements Attachment: Dakota County Wage Rates
CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 006000
007200 007313 007350
Project Forms Bonds Release of Liens Certificates (Contractor’s Affidavits) Certificate of Substantial Completion Certificate or Final Completion General Conditions (AIA Document A201-2007) Supplementary General Conditions (Stipulated Sum-2007) Project Labor Agreement Attachment: A, B and C
TABLE OF CONTENTS
S:\11\0123\frontend\000110CGA.doc
007380
Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Time of Completion & Liquidated Damages
SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011100 012200 012300 013113 014100 014200 014300 014400 014500 014523 014533 015000 016000 017123 017300 017400 017500 017700 017800 017823 017836 017839 017900
Summary of Work Unit Prices Alternates Project Coordination Regulatory Requirements Reference Quality Assurance Existing Utilities Quality Control Testing and Inspection Services Structural Testing and Inspection Temporary Facilities and Controls Product Requirements Field Engineering Execution Requirements Cleaning Starting and Adjusting Closeout Procedures Closeout Submittals Operation and Maintenance Data Warranties and Bonds Project Record Documents Demonstrations and Training
DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 024119
Minor Demolition for Remodeling
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 031510
Post-Installed Anchors
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY (Not Used) DIVISION 5 - METALS 051200 055000
Structural Steel Framing Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTIC 061000 062000
Rough Carpentry Finish Carpentry 000110 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/17/2013
11-0123
064000
Akin Road Elementary School
Architectural Woodwork
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK (Not Used) DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
071050 072100 075310 076200 078400 079200
Preparation for Re-Roofing Building Insulation Elastomeric Membrane Roofing - Fully Adhered Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Fire-Stopping Joint Sealers
(Not Used) DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES (Not Used)
DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS
VOLUME TWO:
081100 087100 088100
DIVISIONS 21-29 – Mechanical, Plumbing, Electrical
Steel Doors and Frames Door Hardware Glass and Glazing
Table of Contents will be included in each division. DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 092116 093000 095100 096500 096800 099000
Gypsum Board Systems Tiling Suspended Acoustical Ceilings Resilient Flooring and Base Carpeting Paints and Coatings
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 101100 Visual Display Boards 102113.19 Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments 102600 Wall and Corner Guards 102810 Toilet and Bath Accessories 105100 Lockers DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT (Not Used)
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 122000
Window Treatment
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (Not Used)
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS (Not Used)
000110 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/17/2013
TABLE OF CONTENTS
S:\11\0123\frontend\000110CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 000115 - LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS
The Drawing Sheets on G-001 are included as part of the Contract Documents. See Drawings.
END OF LIST OF DRAWINGS
LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS
S:\11\0123\frontend\000115CGA.doc
000115 - 1 of 1
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 001113 - ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
NOTICE TO BIDDERS A. The FARMINGTON AREA PUBLIC SCHOOLS will receive sealed Bids for a Stipulated Sum Single Prime Contract for General Construction; including Mechanical and Electrical Work for the AKIN ROAD ELEMENTARY SCHOOL RENOVATION at 11:00 a.m. local time, on February 6, 2013, at the DISTRICT SERVICE CENTER, 421 WALNUT STREET, FARMINGTON, MINNESOTA, 55024 at which time Bids will be opened publicly and read aloud. Proposals shall be made in duplicate on the Bid Proposal Form (Document 004113) furnished in the Project Manual with the Bidder's signature in longhand. No oral or electronically transmitted proposals or modifications will be considered. B. Project includes air handling unit upgrades and remodeling Media Center, Lockers, Restrooms and Office.
1.2
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS A. A certified check or acceptable Bidder's Bond payable to the PROJECT OWNER in an amount equal to five percent (5%) of the Total Base Bid shall be submitted with each Bid in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. The successful Bidder[s] will be required to furnish a Performance Bond and Payment Bond (Document 006100). B. Bids must be typewritten or written legibly in ink on forms provided herein, and all applicable spaces on the forms shall be filled out. Unsigned bids will not be considered. C. The PROJECT OWNER reserves the right to accept or to reject any or all Bids, and waive formalities or irregularities in Bidding. No Bidder may withdraw his Bid within sixty (60) days after the scheduled time of Bid Opening, without the written consent of the OWNER. D. Mandatory Pre-Bid Meeting: Refer to Section 002513.
1.3
St. Paul, Minnesota 55103 Telephone: (651) 224-7545
BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Bidding Documents will be available for examination and distribution on or after January 16, 2013. Documents may be examined at:
Minneapolis Builder’s Exchange 1123 Glenwood Avenue Minneapolis, Minnesota 55405 Telephone: (612) 381-2620 Reed Construction www.reedplans.com Telephone: (800) 424 -3996 McGraw-Hill Construction 1401 Glenwood Avenue North Minneapolis, Minnesota 55405 Telephone: (612) 381-2290 National Council of Minority Contractors Plan Room 4801 Fourth Avenue South Minneapolis, Minnesota 55403 Telephone: (612) 827-2211 Albert Lea Builder’s Exchange 701 Marshall Albert Lea, Minnesota 56007 Telephone: (507) 373-0344 Austin Builder’s Exchange 329 North Main Street, Suite 102 Austin, Minnesota 55912 Telephone: (507) 437-4561 Builders Exchange of Rochester 108 Elton Hills Lane NW Rochester, Minnesota 55901 Telephone: (507) 282-6531 St. Cloud Builders Exchange 1106th Avenue South St. Cloud, Minnesota 56301-3621 Telephone: (320) 251-0081 Mankato Builders Exchange 75 Navaho Avenue, Suite 1 Mankato, Minnesota 56001 Telephone: (507) 387-3001 B. Bidders may obtain copies of the Contract Documents at the printer:
St. Paul Builder’s Exchange 445 Farrington Street ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS S:\11\0123\frontend\001113CGA.doc
001113 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
ARC 3005 Ranchview Lane North Plymouth, Minnesota 55447 Phone: 763-694-5900 Fax: 763-694-0216 Email:
[email protected]
C. If complete sets of Bidding Documents are to be delivered by mail or UPS, Bidders shall include a separate, non-refundable check in the amount of twenty-five dollars ($25.00) per complete set to cover cost of shipping and handling. Partial sets of Bidding Documents will not be made available. D. Contracts for work under this bid will obligate the Contractor and subcontractors to maintain policies of employment under provisions of applicable Federal and State laws against discrimination, including, but not limited to, Civil Rights Act of 1964 and Minnesota Statue 363 (These documents may be reviewed at the Office of the Architect).
D. NO EXTRAS WILL BE ALLOWED BECAUSE OF THE BIDDER’S MISUNDERSTANDING AS TO THE AMOUNT OF WORK INVOLVED, THE CONTRACTORS OWN ERROR OR NEGLIGENCE, OR FAILURE TO EXAMINE THE SITE. Lack of knowledge of the conditions pertaining to the Work shall not relieve the Contractor from performing all the Work required to complete performance of the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF DOCUMENT
E. The accepted Bidder will be required to enter into a Contract with the PROJECT OWNER on the Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor (005200). 1.4
SITE REVIEW A. Prior to submitting a Bid for the Work, the Contractor is required and expected to have examined the project site and premises, and be thoroughly familiarized with the existing conditions under which the Contractor will be obligated to operate or which will in any way affect the Work under this Contract. B. Bidders and sub-bidders are further cautioned to familiarize themselves with the contents, alternates, revisions, addenda, General Conditions, Special Conditions, technical provisions of the Specifications, Drawings and the Work of other Contractors. Should the Bidder find discrepancies, or omissions in the Bidding Documents, or should there be doubt as to the intent, the Architect should be notified at once, who may, if necessary, issue written instructions to all Bidders. C. Any apparent variance in Bidding Documents from conditions as they exist at the site shall be called to the attention of the Architect before bids are received. Failure to comply with the above shall be at the Contractor’s risk.
001113 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
S:\11\0123\frontend\001113CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 002100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Instructions to Bidders - AIA Document A701, 1997 Edition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
END OF SECTION
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS S:\11\0123\frontend\002100CGA.doc
002100 - 1 of 1
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 002213 - SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
3.3.6. Substitution requests shall be submitted on a duplicate of the form provided in the Contract Documents.
The following supplements modify, change, delete, from or add to the "Instructions to Bidders", AIA Document A701, 1997 Edition. Where Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered provisions of the Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall remain in effect.
ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS Add the following new Subparagraph 1.10 as follows:
3.4
ADDENDA
Subparagraph 3.4.3. in the first line; delete “four days” and substitute “seven (7) days”.
1.10 "Sub-subbidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a sub-bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of the Work."
ARTICLE 4 - BIDDING PROCEDURES 4.1
FORM AND STYLE OF BIDS
ARTICLE 3 - BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.2
INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS Add the following new Subparagraph:
Delete all of Subparagraph 4.1.1 and substitute the following: 4.1.1 “Bids shall be submitted on a duplicate of the Bid Proposal Form (Document 004113) bound in the Project Manual. Any modification of the Bid Form except providing the requested information shall be grounds for rejection of the Bid.”
3.2.4 Architect will not be responsible in any way for verbal answers to inquiries regarding meaning of Drawings and Project Manual. 3.3
SUBSTITUTIONS
Add to Subparagraph 4.1.5 the following: “Failure to bid an Alternate may result in rejection of the Bid.”
Add the following new Subparagraph 3.3.2.1: 3.3.2.1 The Architect’s review shall be based on the Drawings and Specifications. With regard to products exposed to view at completion of the Project, the aesthetics of the proposed product substitution shall be a “salient feature” of the Architects review.
Delete Subparagraph 4.1.6 in its entirety, and substitute: 4.1.6 “Where separate Prime Contract Bids have been requested for two or more portions of the Work, a Bidder may submit a Combined Bid for several of the designated portions of the Work. The Bidder is not required to submit individual Bids on those portions of work contained within the Combined Bid.”
Add the following new Subparagraph 3.3.5: 3.3.5 Substitution of materials, equipment and systems indicated in the Project Manual as “NO SUBSTITUTIONS ALLOWED” will not be considered by the Architect. Add the following new Subparagraph 3.3.6: SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS S:\11\0123\frontend\002213CGA.doc
4.2
BID SECURITY
Delete the first and second sentences of Subparagraph 4.2.1. and substitute the following: 002213 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
4.2.1 "Each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the form of a certified check or acceptable Bid Bond payable without conditions to the Owner in an amount equal to five percent (5%) of the Total Bid (Base Bid and Alternates). The certified check or Bid Bond is a guarantee that the Bidder will enter into a Contract with the Owner for the Work described in the Contract Documents, and that the Contractor will furnish a Performance Bond and Payment Bond (Document 006100), and Certificates of Insurance as specified." Add subparagraph 4.2.3.1 as follows: 4.2.3.1 The Bid Security of the two (2) lowest Bidders will be retained until the Contract has been awarded and executed, but not longer than sixty (60) days. Other deposits will be returned within ten (10) days after the Bid opening. 4.4
MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID
Delete Subparagraph 4.4.1 and substitute the following: 4.4.1 "A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder for a period of sixty (60) days following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting his Bid."
Delete Subparagraph 6.1.1and substitute the following: 6.1.1 "Bidders to whom award of Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect upon request, evidence satisfactory to the Architect that Contractor has, the experience necessary to perform the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. Failure to provide satisfactory evidence shall be cause for disqualification of the Bidder."
Add new Article 9 as follows:
ARTICLE 9 - ALTERNATES 9.1
REINSTATEMENT OF ALTERNATE BID PROPOSAL 9.1.1 "The Owner reserves the right to reinstate any Alternate, rejected or accepted, at time of Contract award at the sum proposed by the successful Contractor, provided such reinstatement is made within sixty (60) days after the Bid Opening."
END OF SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
ARTICLE 5 - CONSIDERATION OF BIDS: 5.3
ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD)
Add the following new Subparagraph: 5.3.3 "The Owner reserves the right to award Contracts for a period of sixty (60) days after receipt of the Bids."
ARTICLE 6 - POST-BID INFORMATION 6.1
CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT
002213 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
QUALIFICATION
SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
S:\11\0123\frontend\002213CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 002513 - PRE-BID MEETING 1.1
PURPOSE A. A Mandatory Pre-Bid Meeting will be held prior to the date required for the submission of Bids. All General Contractors and First-Tier Mechanical Subcontractors are required to attend one meeting in order to better understand the Project, and for the dissemination of information and clarification of the intent of the Bidding Documents. Responses to questions that result in a change in the Contract Documents will be published in an Addendum following the conference.
1.2
PRE-BID MEETING-MANDATORY A. The Mandatory Pre-Bid Meetings will be conducted by the Architect at AKIN ROAD ELEMENTARY SCHOOL, 5231 195TH STREET WEST, FARMINGTON, MINNESOTA 55024. The Owner will have a representative at the meeting. B. The Pre-Bid Meetings will be held on: January 21, 2013 at 11:15 a.m. and January 28, 2013 at 11:15 a.m.
1.3
SITE VISITATION A. Bidders may visit the Project site to familiarize themselves with the local conditions. The Owner shall have continuous occupancy, and Contractors shall check in with Owner at the Administration Office prior to visiting site.
END OF SECTION
PRE-BID MEETING
S:\11\0123\frontend\002513CGA.doc
002513 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
002513 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
PRE-BID MEETING
S:\11\0123\frontend\002513CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 004113 - BID PROPOSAL FORM Bid Proposal Form of ____________________________________________________________ hereafter called “Bidder” a* _______________________________________________________ organized and existing under the Laws of the State of [____________________]. and doing business as ____________________________________________________________ (* Insert Corporation, Partnership, or Individual as applicable) To:
FARMINGTON AREA PUBLIC SCHOOLS DISTRICT SERVICE CENTER 421 WALNUT STREET FARMINGTON, MINNESOTA 55024
Project:
AKIN ROAD ELEMENTARY SCHOOL REMODELING AND MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT 5231 195TH STREET WEST FARMINGTON, MINNESOTA 55024 Project Number: 11-0123
Date:
________________________
Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with the Instructions to Bidders and Supplementary Instructions to Bidders for the AKIN ROAD ELEMENTARY SCHOOL REMODELING AND MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT, 5231 195TH STREET WEST, FARMINGTON, MINNESOTA 55024, having examined the Contract Documents, issued on January 16, 2013, within the Project Manuals, the Drawings and all Addenda prepared by Cuningham Group Architecture, PA, the Architect, and being familiar with the site of the proposed Project and the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, machinery, equipment rental, transportation, superintendence, perform all work, provide all services, and to construct all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the Sum stated below.
BASE BID The Bidder agrees to perform all of the Work for the amount shown in both words and figures. Bidder agrees that this Base Bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) calendar days after the receipt of the Bid. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern. Bids shall be submitted in duplicate. The envelope containing a Bid shall be identified on the front with the Bidder’s name and address. BID PROPOSAL FORM S:\11\0123\frontend\004113CGA.doc
004113 - 1 of 4 Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
Base Bid for the Sum of: ______________________________________________________ ($___________________)
ALTERNATES AND UNIT PRICES The Bidder agrees to modify the Contract for the Alternates stated below, if accepted by the Owner, and as described in Section 012300 - Alternates. 1.
Alternate No. 1: Media Center Remodeling
(ADD) (DEDUCT) ______________________________________________ Dollars. 2.
Alternate No. 2: Locker Replacement and Finishes
(ADD) (DEDUCT) ______________________________________________ Dollars. 3.
Alternate No. 3: New Staff Restroom
(ADD) (DEDUCT) ______________________________________________ Dollars. 4.
Alternate No. 4: Main Office Remodeling
(ADD) (DEDUCT) ______________________________________________ Dollars. The Bidder agrees to modify the Contract for the Unit Prices stated below, if accepted by the Owner, and as described in Section 012200 - Unit Prices. 1.
Unit Price #E1: Normal Power Receptacle Per Each Cost: _____________________ Dollars.
2. Unit Price #E2: Voice/Data Oultet 0-150 Feet Per Each Cost:______________________Dollars. 3. Unit Price #E3: Voice/Data Outlet 150-250 Feet Per Each Cost:______________________Dollars.
004113 - 2 of 4 Printed on 1/16/2013
BID PROPOSAL FORM S:\11\0123\frontend\004113CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
ACCEPTANCE If this Bid is accepted by the Owner within the time period stated, Bidder will furnish the required bonds and insurance coverage and execute the Contract within seven (7) calendar days of receipt of acceptance of this Bid by the Owner. A cashier’s check, certified check or Bid Bond (AIA A310) payable to the Owner as a Bid Security, in an amount equal to five percent (5%) of the Total Base Bid shall be submitted with each Bid in accordance with the Instruction to Bidders (AIA Document A701). If this Bid is accepted within the time stated, and Bidder fails to commence the Work or Bidder fails to provide the required Bond(s), the Bid Security shall be forfeited as damages to the Owner by reason of Bidder’s failure, limited in amount to the lesser of the face value of the Bid Security or the difference between this Bid and the Bid upon which the Contract is signed. In the event our Bid is not accepted within the time stated, the required Bid Security shall be returned to the undersigned, in accordance with the provisions of the Supplementary Instructions to Bidders. CONTRACT TIME The Work of this Contract shall commence upon execution of the Contract, and is to be Substantially Complete no later than the following date: August 23, 2013. ADDENDA The Bidder hereby acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda. The modifications to the Bid Documents noted therein have been considered and all costs thereto are included in the Base Bid Sum. Addendum # ______ Dated ____________________ Addendum # ______ Dated ____________________ Addendum # ______ Dated ____________________ ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The Bidder, in submitting this Bid, certifies that the Bid is based upon careful examination of the Project Manual and Drawings and waives all rights to plead any misunderstanding. The Bidder, in submitting this Bid, understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, to waive any informality or irregularity in any Bid received, and to accept any Alternate (s) in any order or combination.
BID PROPOSAL FORM S:\11\0123\frontend\004113CGA.doc
004113 - 3 of 4 Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
The Bidder acknowledges that he has executed and included the Affidavit of Non-Collusion Form (004519) with this Bid Form and that the Equal Opportunity Employment Form (007336) shall be executed and submitted within 10 days of award of the contract.
THE UNDERSIGNED operates as a: ___
Sole Owner
___
Partnership
___
Corporation, incorporated in the State of -________________
___
Other (Specify) _______________________________________
LEGAL NAME OF PERSON, FIRM OR CORPORATION Legal Name: _______________________________________________________________ Address: __________________________________________________________________ Telephone: ________________________________ Facsimile: _______________________ By: _________________________________________ Title: ________________________ (Signature of Authorized Signing Officer) Corporate Seal:
END OF DOCUMENT
004113 - 4 of 4 Printed on 1/16/2013
BID PROPOSAL FORM S:\11\0123\frontend\004113CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 004325 - SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM TO:
CUNINGHAM GROUP ARCHITECTURE, Inc, 201 Main Street SE, Suite 325 Minneapolis, Minnesota, 55414
DATE: __________________
PROJECT: _____________________________________________________ Project No.________________ We hereby submit for your consideration the following product in lieu of the specified item for the above-mentioned Project. Submitting party shall verify substitutions are allowed for the product in the Construction Documents. Section: _____________________________________ Paragraph: Specified Item: Proposed Substitution: (Attach complete technical data, including laboratory test, if applicable.) Include complete information, including changes to Drawings and/or Specification, which proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. Fill in blanks below: A.
Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings?
B.
Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detailing costs caused by the requested substitution?
C.
What affect does substitution have on other trades?
D.
Differences between proposed substitution and specified item?
E.
Manufacturer’s guarantees of the proposed and specified items are: Same Different (explain on attachment)
The undersigned states that the function, appearance and quality are equivalent or superior to the specified item. Submitted by:
_____________________________________________________Date: _____________ (Signature)
Name/Title (print) Firm Name Address Phone No./FAX No. ************************************************************ For use by CGA, PA only: Accepted; Date:
Accepted as noted; By
Not Accepted;
Received too late
Remarks: END OF DOCUMENT
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM S:\11\0123\frontend\004325CGA.doc
004325 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
004325 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
S:\11\0123\frontend\004325CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 004343 - WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Modifications to the General Conditions for requirements unique to a specific project. 1. Wage Rate projects.
1.2
Requirements
for
Minnesota
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 007200 - General Conditions (AIA Document A201).
1.3
WAGE RATE MINNESOTA
REQUIREMENTS-
A. Current rates to be found at www.doli.state.mn.us for Dakota County, Minnesota, a copy of which is attached following this section. 1.4
POSTING OF WAGE DETERMINATION SCHEDULES A. The Contractor shall post and maintain at least one copy of the schedule of Prevailing Wage Determination Schedule in a conspicuous location on the construction site until Substantial Completion of the Project.
1.5
ENFORCEMENT AND COMPLIANCE A. Contractor is solely responsible for enforcement of, and compliance with, the Wage Rate Determination Schedule for persons employed directly by Contractor and persons in the employ of its subcontractors, including settlement of claims made by persons found to have received wages lower than rate classification included in said schedule. B. Provide, upon request by Owner, written documentation verifying compliance with Wage Rate requirements. Documentation may be in the form of a certified payroll or another form as directed by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS S:\11\0123\frontend\004343CGA.doc
004343 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
004343 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS
S:\11\0123\frontend\004343CGA.doc
MINNESOTA DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRY PREVAILING WAGES FOR STATE FUNDED CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS
THIS NOTICE MUST BE POSTED ON THE JOBSITE IN A CONSPICUOUS PLACE
Construction Type: Commercial County Number: 19 County Name: DAKOTA Effective: 2012-12-24 This project is covered by Minnesota prevailing wage statutes. Wage rates listed below are the minimum hourly rates to be paid on this project. All hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours per day or forty (40) hours per week shall be paid at a rate of one and one half (1 1/2) times the basic hourly rate. Violations should be reported to: Department of Labor and Industry Prevailing Wage Section 443 Lafayette Road N St Paul, MN 55155 (651) 284-5091
[email protected] * Indicates that adjacent county rates were used for the labor class listed. County: DAKOTA (19)
LABOR CODE AND CLASS
EFFECT DATE
BASIC FRINGE TOTAL RATE RATE RATE
LABORERS (101 - 112) (SPECIAL CRAFTS 701 - 730)
101
LABORER, COMMON (GENERAL LABOR WORK)
2012-12-24
28.46
15.82
44.28
102
LABORER, SKILLED (ASSISTING SKILLED CRAFT JOURNEYMAN)
2012-12-24
28.46
15.82
44.28
01/16/13
1
103* LABORER, LANDSCAPING (GARDENER, SOD LAYER AND NURSERY OPERATOR)
2012-12-24
17.49
12.04
29.53
2013-05-01
18.00
12.43
30.43
104* FLAG PERSON
2012-12-24
28.46
15.82
44.28
105
WATCH PERSON
2012-12-24
24.83
15.47
40.30
106
BLASTER
2012-12-24
29.46
15.82
45.28
107
PIPELAYER (WATER, SEWER AND GAS)
2012-12-24
28.82
15.72
44.54
2013-05-01
28.77
16.02
44.79
2012-12-24
27.52
15.72
43.24
2013-05-01
27.47
16.02
43.49
2012-12-24
27.52
15.72
43.24
2013-05-01
27.47
16.02
43.49
SURVEY FIELD TECHNICIAN (OPERATE TOTAL STATION, GPS RECEIVER, LEVEL, ROD OR RANGE POLES, STEEL TAPE MEASUREMENT; MARK AND DRIVE STAKES; HAND OR POWER DIGGING FOR AND IDENTIFICATION OF MARKERS OR MONUMENTS; PERFORM AND CHECK CALCULATIONS; REVIEW AND UNDERSTAND CONSTRUCTION PLANS AND LAND SURVEY MATERIALS). THIS CLASSIFICATION DOES NOT APPLY TO THE WORK PERFORMED ON A PREVAILING WAGE PROJECT BY A LAND SURVEYOR WHO IS LICENSED PURSUANT TO MINNESOTA STATUTES, SECTIONS 326.02 TO 326.15.
2012-12-24
20.25
0.00
20.25
111* TRAFFIC CONTROL PERSON (TEMPORARY SIGNAGE)
2012-12-24
28.46
15.82
44.28
108
109
110
TUNNEL MINER
UNDERGROUND AND OPEN DITCH LABORER (EIGHT FEET BELOW STARTING GRADE LEVEL)
SPECIAL EQUIPMENT (201 - 204)
201
01/16/13
ARTICULATED HAULER
FOR RATE CALL 651-284-5091 OR EMAIL
[email protected]
2
202* BOOM TRUCK
2012-12-24
32.38
16.34
48.72
203* LANDSCAPING EQUIPMENT, INCLUDES HYDRO SEEDER OR MULCHER, SOD ROLLER, FARM TRACTOR WITH ATTACHMENT SPECIFICALLY SEEDING, SODDING, OR PLANT, AND TWO-FRAMED FORKLIFT (EXCLUDING FRONT, POSIT-TRACK, AND SKID STEER LOADERS), NO EARTHWORK OR GRADING FOR ELEVATIONS
2012-12-24
17.49
12.04
29.53
2013-05-01
18.00
12.43
30.43
204
OFF-ROAD TRUCK
205* PAVEMENT MARKING OR MARKING REMOVAL EQUIPMENT (ONE OR TWO PERSON OPERATORS); SELF-PROPELLED TRUCK OR TRAILER MOUNTED UNITS.
FOR RATE CALL 651-284-5091 OR EMAIL
[email protected]
2012-12-24
31.45
17.95
49.40
2012-12-24
31.27
15.85
47.12
HIGHWAY/HEAVY POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR
GROUP 2 * 306
GRADER OR MOTOR PATROL
308
TUGBOAT 100 H.P. AND OVER WHEN LICENSE REQUIRED (HIGHWAY AND HEAVY ONLY)
GROUP 3 *
2012-12-24
31.42
16.70
48.12
2013-05-01
31.67
16.70
48.37
309
ASPHALT BITUMINOUS STABILIZER PLANT
310
CABLEWAY
312
DERRICK (GUY OR STIFFLEG)(POWER)(SKIDS OR STATIONARY) (HIGHWAY AND HEAVY ONLY)
314
DREDGE OR ENGINEERS, DREDGE (POWER) AND ENGINEER
316
LOCOMOTIVE CRANE OPERATOR
320
TANDEM SCRAPER
322
TUGBOAT 100 H.P AND OVER (HIGHWAY AND HEAVY ONLY)
01/16/13
3
GROUP 4
2012-12-24
31.12
16.70
47.82
2013-05-01
31.37
16.70
48.07
323
AIR TRACK ROCK DRILL
324
AUTOMATIC ROAD MACHINE (CMI OR SIMILAR) (HIGHWAY AND HEAVY ONLY)
327
BITUMINOUS ROLLERS, RUBBER TIRED OR STEEL DRUMMED (EIGHT TONS AND OVER)
328
BITUMINOUS SPREADER AND FINISHING MACHINES (POWER), INCLUDING PAVERS, MACRO SURFACING AND MICRO SURFACING, OR SIMILAR TYPES (OPERATOR AND SCREED PERSON)
329
BROKK OR R.T.C. REMOTE CONTROL OR SIMILAR TYPE WITH ALL ATTACHMENTS
330
CAT CHALLENGER TRACTORS OR SIMILAR TYPES PULLING ROCK WAGONS, BULLDOZERS AND SCRAPERS
331
CHIP HARVESTER AND TREE CUTTER
332
CONCRETE DISTRIBUTOR AND SPREADER FINISHING MACHINE, LONGITUDINAL FLOAT, JOINT MACHINE, AND SPRAY MACHINE
334
CONCRETE MOBIL (HIGHWAY AND HEAVY ONLY)
335
CRUSHING PLANT (GRAVEL AND STONE) OR GRAVEL WASHING, CRUSHING AND SCREENING PLANT
336
CURB MACHINE
337
DIRECTIONAL BORING MACHINE
338
DOPE MACHINE (PIPELINE)
340
DUAL TRACTOR
341
ELEVATING GRADER
345
GPS REMOTE OPERATING OF EQUIPMENT
347
HYDRAULIC TREE PLANTER
348
LAUNCHER PERSON (TANKER PERSON OR PILOT LICENSE)
349
LOCOMOTIVE (HIGHWAY AND HEAVY ONLY)
350
MILLING, GRINDING, PLANNING, FINE GRADE, OR TRIMMER MACHINE
352
PAVEMENT BREAKER OR TAMPING MACHINE (POWER DRIVEN) MIGHTY MITE OR SIMILAR TYPE
354
PIPELINE WRAPPING, CLEANING OR BENDING MACHINE
356
POWER ACTUATED HORIZONTAL BORING MACHINE, OVER SIX INCHES
357
PUGMILL
359
RUBBER-TIRED FARM TRACTOR WITH BACKHOE INCLUDING ATTACHMENTS (HIGHWAY AND HEAVY ONLY)
360
SCRAPER
361
SELF-PROPELLED SOIL STABILIZER
362
SLIP FORM (POWER DRIVEN) (PAVING)
363
TIE TAMPER AND BALLAST MACHINE
367
TUB GRINDER, MORBARK, OR SIMILAR TYPE
01/16/13
4
GROUP 5 *
2012-12-24
13.50
2.39
15.89
370
BITUMINOUS ROLLER (UNDER EIGHT TONS)
371
CONCRETE SAW (MULTIPLE BLADE) (POWER OPERATED)
372
FORM TRENCH DIGGER (POWER)
375
HYDRAULIC LOG SPLITTER
376
LOADER (BARBER GREENE OR SIMILAR TYPE)
377
POST HOLE DRIVING MACHINE/POST HOLE AUGER
379
POWER ACTUATED JACK
381
SELF-PROPELLED CHIP SPREADER (FLAHERTY OR SIMILAR)
382
SHEEP FOOT COMPACTOR WITH BLADE . 200 H.P. AND OVER
383
SHOULDERING MACHINE (POWER) APSCO OR SIMILAR TYPE INCLUDING SELF-PROPELLED SAND AND CHIP SPREADER
384
STUMP CHIPPER AND TREE CHIPPER
385
TREE FARMER (MACHINE)
GROUP 6 *
2012-12-24
26.87
16.70
43.57
2013-05-01
27.12
16.70
43.82
387
CAT, CHALLENGER, OR SIMILAR TYPE OF TRACTORS, WHEN PULLING DISK OR ROLLER
389
DREDGE DECK HAND
391
GRAVEL SCREENING PLANT (PORTABLE NOT CRUSHING OR WASHING)
393
LEVER PERSON
395
POWER SWEEPER
396
SHEEP FOOT ROLLER AND ROLLERS ON GRAVEL COMPACTION, INCLUDING VIBRATING ROLLERS
COMMERCIAL POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR
GROUP 1
2012-12-24
35.19
501
HELICOPTER PILOT (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
502
TOWER CRANE 250 FEET AND OVER (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
503
TRUCK CRAWLER CRANE WITH 200 FEET OF BOOM AND OVER, INCLUDING JIB (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
GROUP 2 504
01/16/13
2012-12-24
34.85
15.95
51.14
15.95
50.80
CONCRETE PUMP WITH 50 METERS/164 FEET OF BOOM AND OVER (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 5
505
PILE DRIVING WHEN THREE DRUMS IN USE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
506
TOWER CRANE 200 FEET AND OVER (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
507
TRUCK OR CRAWLER CRANE WITH 150 FEET OF BOOM UP TO AND NOT INCLUDING 200 FEET, INCLUDING JIB (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
GROUP 3
2012-12-24
33.44
15.95
49.39
508
ALL-TERRAIN VEHICLE CRANES (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
509
CONCRETE PUMP 32-49 METERS/102-164 FEET (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
510
DERRICK (GUY & STIFFLEG) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
511
STATIONARY TOWER CRANE 200 FEET AND OVER MEASURED FROM BOOM FOOT PIN (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
512
SELF-ERECTING TOWER CRANE 100 FEET AND OVER MEASURED FROM BOOM FOOT PIN (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
513
TRAVELING TOWER CRANE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
514
TRUCK OR CRAWLER CRANE UP TO AND NOT INCLUDING 150 FEET OF BOOM, INCLUDING JIB (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
GROUP 4 *
2012-12-24
33.10
15.95
49.05
515
CRAWLER BACKHOE INCLUDING ATTACHMENTS (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
516
FIREPERSON, CHIEF BOILER LICENSE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
517
HOIST ENGINEER (THREE DRUMS OR MORE) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
518
LOCOMOTIVE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
519
OVERHEAD CRANE ( INSIDE BUILDING PERIMETER) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
520
TRACTOR . BOOM TYPE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
GROUP 5
2012-12-24
32.93
15.95
48.88
521
AIR COMPRESSOR 450 CFM OR OVER (TWO OR MORE MACHINES) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
522
CONCRETE MIXER (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
523
CONCRETE PUMP UP TO 31 METERS/101 FEET OF BOOM
524
DRILL RIGS, HEAVY ROTARY OR CHURN OR CABLE DRILL WHEN USED FOR CAISSON FOR ELEVATOR OR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
525
FORKLIFT (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
526
FRONT END, SKID STEER 1 C YD AND OVER
527
HOIST ENGINEER ( ONE OR TWO DRUMS) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
528
MECHANIC-WELDER (ON POWER EQUIPMENT) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
529
POWER PLANT (100 KW AND OVER OR MULTIPLES EQUAL TO 100KW AND OVER) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
01/16/13
6
530
PUMP OPERATOR AND/OR CONVEYOR (TWO OR MORE MACHINES) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
531
SELF-ERECTING TOWER CRANE UNDER 100 FEET MEASURED FROM BOOM FOOT PIN (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
532
STRADDLE CARRIER (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
533
TRACTOR OVER D2 (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
534
WELL POINT PUMP (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
GROUP 6
2012-12-24
31.42
15.95
535
CONCRETE BATCH PLANT (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
536
FIREPERSON, FIRST CLASS BOILER LICENSE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
537
FRONT END, SKID STEER UP TO 1 C YD
538
GUNITE MACHINE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
539
TRACTOR OPERATOR D2 OR SIMILAR SIZE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
540
TRENCHING MACHINE (SEWER, WATER, GAS) EXCLUDES WALK BEHIND TRENCHER
GROUP 7
2012-12-24
30.30
15.95
47.37
46.25
541
AIR COMPRESSOR 600 CFM OR OVER (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
542
BRAKEPERSON (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
543
CONCRETE PUMP/PUMPCRETE OR COMPLACO TYPE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
544
FIREPERSON, TEMPORARY HEAT SECOND CLASS BOILER LICENSE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
545
OILER (POWER SHOVEL, CRANE, TRUCK CRANE, DRAGLINE, CRUSHERS AND MILLING MACHINES, OR OTHER SIMILAR POWER EQUIPMENT) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
546
PICK UP SWEEPER (ONE CUBIC YARD HOPPER CAPACITY) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
547
PUMP AND/OR CONVEYOR (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
GROUP 8 *
2012-12-24
28.29
15.95
548
ELEVATOR OPERATOR (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
549
GREASER (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
550
MECHANICAL SPACE HEATER (TEMPORARY HEAT NO BOILER LICENSE REQUIRED) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY)
44.24
TRUCK DRIVERS
GROUP 1 *
01/16/13
2012-12-24
25.50
1.84
27.34
7
601
MECHANIC . WELDER
602
TRACTOR TRAILER DRIVER
603
TRUCK DRIVER (HAULING MACHINERY INCLUDING OPERATION OF HAND AND POWER OPERATED WINCHES)
GROUP 2 * 604
2012-12-24
22.00
5.85
27.85
2012-12-24
25.00
0.00
25.00
2012-12-24
35.82
8.18
44.00
2012-12-24
41.17
18.59
59.76
2013-06-01
41.67
18.59
60.26
2012-12-24
31.87
24.40
56.27
2013-01-01
33.52
24.40
57.92
FOUR OR MORE AXLE UNIT, STRAIGHT BODY TRUCK
GROUP 3 * 605
BITUMINOUS DISTRIBUTOR DRIVER
606
BITUMINOUS DISTRIBUTOR (ONE PERSON OPERATION)
607
THREE AXLE UNITS
GROUP 4 608
BITUMINOUS DISTRIBUTOR SPRAY OPERATOR (REAR AND OILER)
609
DUMP PERSON
610
GREASER
611
PILOT CAR DRIVER
612
RUBBER-TIRED, SELF-PROPELLED PACKER UNDER 8 TONS
613
TWO AXLE UNIT
614
SLURRY OPERATOR
615
TANK TRUCK HELPER (GAS, OIL, ROAD OIL, AND WATER)
616
TRACTOR OPERATOR, UNDER 50 H.P.
SPECIAL CRAFTS 701
702
HEATING AND FROST INSULATORS
BOILERMAKERS
703
BRICKLAYERS
2012-12-24
32.20
17.96
50.16
704
CARPENTERS
2012-12-24
31.69
17.45
49.14
705
CARPET LAYERS (LINOLEUM)
2012-12-24
33.27
14.15
47.42
01/16/13
8
706
CEMENT MASONS
2012-12-24
32.39
16.60
48.99
707
ELECTRICIANS
2012-12-24
35.79
23.92
59.71
2013-05-01
37.19
23.92
61.11
2012-12-24
43.21
28.33
71.54
2013-01-01
43.21
29.98
73.19
2012-12-24
35.69
14.55
50.24
710* LATHERS
2012-12-24
31.89
17.27
49.16
712
IRONWORKERS
2012-12-24
34.15
21.20
55.35
714
MILLWRIGHT
2012-12-24
30.18
20.24
50.42
715
PAINTERS (INCLUDING HAND BRUSHED, HAND SPRAYED, AND THE TAPING OF PAVEMENT MARKINGS)
2012-12-24
31.45
17.95
49.40
716
PILEDRIVER (INCLUDING VIBRATORY DRIVER OR EXTRACTOR FOR PILING AND SHEETING OPERATIONS)
2012-12-24
32.29
17.78
50.07
2013-05-01
32.79
17.78
50.57
708
709
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS
GLAZIERS
717
PIPEFITTERS . STEAMFITTERS
2012-12-24
39.70
22.99
62.69
718
PLASTERERS
2012-12-24
34.40
14.62
49.02
719
PLUMBERS
2012-12-24
39.63
20.71
60.34
720
ROOFER
2012-12-24
34.12
14.91
49.03
721
SHEET METAL WORKERS
2012-12-24
39.37
20.56
59.93
2013-06-01
40.29
20.21
60.50
01/16/13
9
722
2012-12-24
39.74
20.79
60.53
723* TERRAZZO WORKERS
2012-12-24
31.58
17.53
49.11
724
TILE SETTERS
2012-12-24
27.91
18.63
46.54
725
TILE FINISHERS
2012-12-24
22.87
14.98
37.85
726
DRYWALL TAPER
2012-12-24
30.17
19.12
49.29
727
WIRING SYSTEM TECHNICIAN
2012-12-24
32.09
12.39
44.48
728
WIRING SYSTEMS INSTALLER
2012-12-24
22.46
10.61
33.07
729
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT WORKER
2012-12-24
27.33
14.94
42.27
2013-01-01
27.53
15.34
42.87
2012-12-24
25.39
10.78
36.17
730
01/16/13
SPRINKLER FITTERS
SIGN ERECTOR
10
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 006000 - PROJECT FORMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Bond Forms: 1. Bid Bond (AIA Document A310). 2. Performance Bond (AIA Document A312). 3. Payment Bond AIA Document A312). B. Certificates and Other Forms: 1. Application and Certificate for Payment (AIA Document G702-1992). C. Closeout Forms: 1. Statutory Declaration Forms Used With Application for Payments or With Final Payment. a. Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims (AIA Document G706-1994). b. Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens (AIA Document G706A-1994). c. Consent of Surety to Final Payment (AIA Document G707-1994). d. Consent of Surety to Reduction in/or Partial Release of Retainage (AIA Document G707A-1994). e. Certification of Substantial (AIA Document G704-1992).
Completion
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used) END OF SECTION
PROJECT FORMS
S:\11\0123\frontend\006000CGA.doc
006000 - 1 of 1
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 007200 - GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Single Prime Contract General Conditions to a Construction Contract (AIA Document A201-2007).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
END OF SECTION
GENERAL CONDITIONS
S:\11\0123\frontend\007200CGA.doc
007200 - 1 of 1
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 007313 - SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AIA Document A201, 2007 Edition. Where any Article of the General Conditions is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered provisions of the Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph, or Clause of the General Conditions shall remain in effect.
2.2
Delete Subparagraph 2.2.5 in its entirety, and substitute: 2.2.5 “Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2. Contractor may procure additional complete sets from the Architect at the cost of reproduction, shipping and handling.”
ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1
BASIC DEFINITIONS
Add the following New Subparagraphs, 1.1.9 and 1.1.10 as follows: 1.1.9 ADDENDA Addenda shall be either written and/or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract that modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications, or corrections. Addenda shall become part of the Contract Documents when the Construction Contract is executed. 1.1.10 WRITING A writing shall include any communication reduced to a written form, including letters, facsimiles, e-mails, text messages, memorandums, meeting minutes, Project website postings, or other written forms generally accepted for communication purposes on the Project and transmitted electronically or delivered hardcopy. 1.2
CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Add the following New Subparagraphs, 1.2.4 and 1.2.5: 1.2.4. “Subject to the requirements of Section 01110 – Summary of Work, paragraph, In case of discrepancy, figured dimensions shall govern over scaled dimensions, and the greater quantity or greater quality shall be provided.” 1.2.5. “Unless otherwise noted, where a reference in the Contract Documents is made to a standard, the edition of the standard current as of the date of this Project Manual with amendments shall apply.”
ARTICLE 2 - OWNER SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS S:\11\0123\frontend\007313CGA2007rev.doc
INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER
2.4
ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR 3.2
REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR
Delete Subparagraph 3.1.1 in its entirety, and substitute: 3.1.1 “The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. If the Contractor fails to designate a Representative, the Contractor’s Project superintendent shall serve as the Contractor’s Representative. The term “Contractor” means the Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative.” Add the following New Subparagraph 3.2.1.1: 3.2.1.1 “The Architect shall have no liability to the Contractor, any Subcontractor, material and equipment suppliers, their agent or employees, or other persons performing portions of the Work or supplying materials, for damages or delay resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents. If the Contractor, any Subcontractor, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons performing portions of the Work, performs any 007313 - 1 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
construction activity without knowing it involves an error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents, their sole remedy shall be the procedures and terms for Contractor’s claims against the Owner provided under Article 15.”
taxes in accordance with State Statute. The Contractors may be appointed by the Owner as its purchasing agent. If the Owner elects, Contractors shall not pay sales or use taxes on materials and equipment which are affixed and made part of the real estate or which are purchased for the project and become the property of the Owner. The Owner’s sales and use tax exemption certificate number, which the Contractors shall use as agent of the Owner, shall be provided at the appropriate time. Contractors shall pay all other taxes required by law.”
Add the following New Subparagraph 3.2.5: 3.2.5 “The Owner shall be entitled to deduct from the Contract Sum, amounts paid to the Architect for the Architect to evaluate and respond to the Contractor’s requests for information, where such information was available to the Contractor from a reasonably careful study and comparison of the Contract Documents, field conditions, other Owner-provided information, Contractor-prepared coordination drawings, or prior Project correspondence or documentation.”
Delete Subparagraph 3.7.5 in its entirety, and substitute: 3.7.5 “If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers, archeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15. Claims under 15.1.2, shall be initiated within 21 days of occurrence of the event giving rise to a claim, however, as claims may be ongoing past 21 days, final determination of the claim will be suspended and any time restrictions tolled pending completion of such event and resumption of work in the affected area.”
Add the following new Subparagraph 3.3.4 and subordinate Clauses: 3.3.4 “The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, submittals approved pursuant to Paragraph 3.12, and general design intent reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents.” .1 “The Contractor shall review specified construction and installation procedures (including those recommended by manufacturers) prior to implementation and shall advise the Architect in writing if the Contractor should have knowledge of any of the following: (1) the specified products deviate from good construction practice, (2) following the procedures will affect warranties, and (3) objections the Contractor may have to the procedures.” 3.5
WARRANTY
In the third sentence of Subparagraph 3.5.1, substitute the words "shall at Owner's option" for the word "may". Add the following new Subparagraph 3.5.2: 3.5.2 “Manufacturer’s product warranty shall not relieve the Contractor of general warranty obligations.” 3.6
TAXES
3.9
SUPERINTENDENT
Add new sentence at end of 3.9.1, as follows: “…Where no other Contractors Representative has been appointed per 3.1.1, the superintendent shall serve in the capacity of Project Representative capacity with corresponding authority.”
3.10 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
Add the following New Subparagraph 3.6.1: 3.6.1 “The Owner is a public school district which is exempt from the payment of Minnesota sales and use 007313 - 2 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Delete the first sentence in Subparagraph 3.10.2 in its entirety, and substitute:
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
S:\11\0123\frontend\007313CGA2007rev.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
3.10.2 “The Contractor shall prepare a submittal schedule, promptly after being awarded the Contract and shall update it thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, and shall submit the schedule(s) for the Architect’s approval. 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES Add Subparagraph 3.12.11 as follows: 3.12.11 “The Architect’s review of Contractor’s submittals will be limited to examination of an initial submittal and one re-submittal. The Architect’s review of additional submittals will be made only with the consent of the Owner after notification by the Architect. The Owner shall be entitled to deduct from the Contract Sum, amounts paid to the Architect for evaluation of such additional re-submittals.” 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION Delete Subparagraph 3.18.1 in its entirety, and substitute: 3.18.1 “To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify, defend, protect and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and any other person or entity designated in the Contract Documents, and the officers, directors, shareholders, partners, representatives, agents and employees of each of them (collectively, the "Indemnitees") from and against all claims, demands, causes of action, damages, liabilities, losses and expenses, including, without limitation, attorney's and consultants' fees and expenses, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work or the acts or omissions of the Contractor, its Subcontractors, subsubcontractors, suppliers or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, demand, cause of action, damage, liability, loss or expense is caused in part by an Indemnitee. Such obligation shall not extend to claims, demands, causes of action, damages, liabilities, losses or expenses to the extent they result from the gross or sole negligence or willful misconduct of an Indemnitee. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18” Add the following new Subparagraphs 3.18.3, 3.18.4, 3.18.5 and 3.18.6:
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
S:\11\0123\frontend\007313CGA2007rev.doc
11-0123
3.18.3 “The Contractor shall defend each Indemnitee in any action, proceeding or arbitration brought against the Indemnitee by reason of any such claim described in this Paragraph 3.18. The Contractor's obligation to defend an Indemnitee shall not extend to any action, proceeding or arbitration that asserts or alleges only that the injury to the claimant resulted solely from the negligence or misconduct of the Indemnitee and from no other cause or to the extent caused by the gross negligence or willful misconduct of the Indemnitee provided that a final judgment is obtained establishing that injury to the claimant resulted solely from the negligence or misconduct of the Indemnitee or to the extent caused by the gross negligence or willful misconduct, in which latter event Contractor's obligation to defend the Indemnitee shall cease upon the date the judgment becomes final, and the Indemnitee shall thereupon reimburse Contractor for its reasonable attorney's fees and court costs in so defending the gross or sole negligence or willful misconduct of an Indemnitee.” 3.18.4 “If any claim of lien or stop-notice or any other demand for payment or security thereof, including claims or demands upon performance and payment bond sureties for this Contract, is made or filed with the Owner or the Project by any person claiming that Contractor or any Subcontractor or supplier or any other person claiming under any of them has failed to perform its contractual obligations or to make payment for any labor, services, trust fund contributions, materials, equipment, taxes or other item furnished or obligation incurred for, or in connection with, the Work, or if at any time there should be evidence of such nonperformance or nonpayment of any claim or lien or stop-notice or other demand for which, if established, the Owner or the Project might become liable, then the Owner shall have the right to retain from any payment then or thereafter due under the Contract or to be reimbursed by Contractor for an amount sufficient to (i) satisfy, discharge and defend against any such claim of lien or stop-notice or other demand, or any action or proceeding therein that may be brought to judgment or award; (ii) make good any such nonpayment, nonperformance, damage, failure or default; and (iii) compensate the Owner for, and indemnify it against, any and all loss, liability, damage, cost and expense (including attorneys' and consultants' fees and costs) sustained or incurred in connection therewith.” 3.18.5 “If any Subcontractor, supplier or other person or Contractor or any of them makes, records or files, or maintains any action on or respecting a claim of mechanic's lien, stop-notice, equitable lien, 007313 - 3 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
or claim against any Project, payment or performance bond or a lis pendens, relating to the Work, the Contractor shall immediately at its own expense procure, furnish and record appropriate statutory release bonds, which will extinguish or expunge said claim, stop-notice, or lis pendens or immediately take such actions to contest the claims as shall be acceptable to Owner.” 3.18.6 “Contractor shall, at its own cost, defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Architect, Owner, its officers, agents, employees, assigns, and successors in interest, from and against any and all liability, damages, losses, claims, demands, actions, causes of action, and costs including attorney's fees and expenses, or any of them, arising from or attributable to a lien or stop notice filed and/or severed in connection with the Work.”
Akin Road Elementary School
performance or administration of the obligations under this construction Contract shall be made or confirmed in writing, with copies to the Architect.”
ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS 5.3
SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS
Add New Subparagraph 5.3.1 as follows: 5.3.1 “If requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall promptly supply copies of each subcontract agreement to the Owner.” 5.4
CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS
Delete from Clause 5.4.1.1 the words "for cause pursuant to Paragraph 14.2". ARTICLE 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1
Delete Subparagraph 5.4.2 in its entirety and substitute the following:
ARCHITECT “ If the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days and the subcontract is re-assigned under Article 5.4, the Subcontractor’s compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increase in costs resulting from the suspension.”
Add New Subparagraph 4.1.4 as follows: 4.1.4. “The Architect shall have no liability to the Contractor, any Subcontractor, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons performing portions of the Work or supplying materials, for damages resulting from delays, defects or deficiencies in the Work.” 4.2
ARCHITECTS ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.2
CHANGE ORDERS
Add New Subparagraph 7.2.2 as follows: 7.2.2 “The Architect’s signature on a Change Order indicates only that the Architect acknowledges the Owner’s and Contractor’s mutual acceptance of the items outlined in Subparagraph 7.2.1 and its subsequent Clauses.”
Add to the end of first sentence of Subparagraph 4.2.1 as follows: “…Payment, or until 60 days after substantial completion, whichever occurs later.” 7.3
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES
Add to the end of Subparagraph 4.2.2 as follows: Delete Clause 7.3.3.3 in its entirety and substitute: “The Contractor may not rely upon the Architect's site observations or related reports to the Owner as confirmation that the Work is being performed in accordance with the Contract Documents or for any other purpose.” Add to the end of Subparagraph 4.2.4 as follows: “To the extent they occur, any direct communications between the Owner and the Contractor regarding the 007313 - 4 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
.3
“cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and an allowance for overhead and profit combined, included in the total cost to the Owner, based on the following schedule: 1. For the Contractor, for any portion of the Work performed by the Contractor’s own forces, ten (10) percent of the cost. 2. For the Contractor, for any portion of the Work performed by the Contractor’s SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
S:\11\0123\frontend\007313CGA2007rev.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
3.
4.
5.
6.
Subcontractor’s, five (5) percent of the amount due the Subcontractor. For each Subcontractor or Subsubcontractor involved, for any portion of the Work performed by the Subcontractor’s or Sub-subcontractor’s own forces, ten (10) percent of the cost. For each Subcontractor, for any portion of the Work performed by the Subcontractor’s Sub-subcontractor, five (5) percent of the amount due the Subsubcontractor. Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with Subparagraph 7.3.6. In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed in 7.3.3.2 above. Where major cost items are Subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. In no case will a change involving over $300 be approved without such itemization.”
Near the end of the first sentence in Subparagraph 7.3.6, delete the words “…a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit.” and substitute “…an allowance for overhead and profit not to exceed that stated in Clause 7.3.3.3”.
11-0123
8.1
DEFINITIONS
Add to the end of Subparagraph 8.1.2 the following: “If no date for commencement is established in the Agreement or by the Project Manual, the date of commencement is the date of the notice to proceed, if one is issued or if no notice to proceed is issued, the date of commencement is five (5) calendar days after the date of the Agreement.” 8.3
DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME
Add to the end of Subparagraph 8.3.1the following: “A time extension shall be Contractor's sole remedy and compensation for all such delays other than those resulting from the willful acts or gross negligence of Owner, the Architect, or Owner's separate contractors (collectively, "Owner-Caused Delays"). For such compensatory Owner-Caused Delays, Contractor shall be entitled to reimbursement for its reasonable additional costs resulting from such delays in accordance with Article 7.3”. Delete Subparagraph 8.3.3 in its entirety:
ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.3
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
Delete Subparagraph 9.3.1 in its entirety, and substitute: Delete second to the last sentence in Subparagraph 7.3.7 in its entirety and substitute the following: “…In such case the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. …” Add New Clauses .6 and .7 to Subparagraph 7.3.7 as follows: “.6 An allowance for overhead and profit as determined in accordance with Section 7.3.3.3. .7 Other reasonable and proper cost items normally included in the cost of the Work as reasonably approved by the Architect.”
ARTICLE 8 - TIME
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
S:\11\0123\frontend\007313CGA2007rev.doc
9.3.1 “No later than the 25th day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect and the Owner an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values during the prior month. Such Application shall be notarized, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting retainage as provided for elsewhere in the Contract Documents”. Add new Clause 9.3.1.3 as follows: 9.3.1.3 “Until Substantial Completion, the Owner will pay ninety-five percent (95%) of the amount of rogress payments. The Owner, in making partial payments, will retain five percent (5%) of the duly approved value of the Work performed under the 007313 - 5 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
Contract as of the date of the Application for Payment until final completion and acceptance of all Work covered by the Contract. Add Clauses 9.3.3.1, 9.3.3.2, 9.3.3.3 and 9.3.3.4 to Subparagraph 9.3.3: .1
.2
.3
.4
“Contractor shall observe provisions in the lien laws of the state where the Project is located and furnish papers, when necessary, for the protection of the interests of the Owner.” “Contractor shall furnish to the Architect, along with each progress Application for Payment conditional partial lien waiver covering the full current requested payment amount, and final (as the case may be) lien waivers or releases covering all material used and subcontracts performed in connection with this Contract through the date of the prior billing.” “Should the Contractor fail to submit required lien waivers or releases, the Application for Payment by the Contractor may not be certified.” Before final payment will be made, the Contractor shall furnish waivers of lien conditioned on final payment, covering all materials used and subcontracts performed in connection with this Contract. Show all conditional and final lien waivers or releases in actual amounts. No waivers for $1.00 or such token amounts will be accepted".
Add a new Subparagraph 9.3.4 as follows: 9.3.4 "Out-of-State Contractors and their subcontractors performing Work in the State of Minnesota shall be subject to withholding laws set forth in Minnesota Statutes 290.9705.” 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Add Clause 9.10.1.1 to Subparagraph 9.10.1: .1 “If the status of completion of the Work requires re-inspection by the Architect prior to issuance of final Certificate for Payment due to failure of the Work to comply with the Contractor’s written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the Owner will deduct the additional Architect’s compensation amount for re-inspection services from the final payment to the Contractor.” Insert at the end of the First sentence of Subparagraph 9.10.2 the following: “and (6) Construction Record Documents as described in the Division 1 of the Contract Documents.” ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Add to the end of Subparagraph 10.2.4 the following sentence: “…and shall comply with applicable codes and regulations. The Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable advance written notice.” 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS Add new Subparagraph 10.3.2.1 as follows: 10.3.2.1 “The Owner and Contractor agree that the Architect shall not have any obligation to discover, detect or investigate the presence of any Hazardous Materials at or near the site of the Project at any time.”
Add Clause 9.8.2.1 to Subparagraph 9.8.2: ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS .1
“If the status of completion of the Work requires re-inspection by the Architect prior to issuance of Certificate of Substantial Completion, due to failure of the Work to comply with the Contractor’s claim of readiness for Substantial Completion on initial inspection, the Owner will deduct the additional Architect’s compensation amount for re-inspection services from progress or final payment to the Contractor.”
9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
007313 - 6 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE Delete Subparagraph 11.1.1 in its entirety, and substitute the following: 11.1.1 “The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
S:\11\0123\frontend\007313CGA2007rev.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:” Insurance requirements for the Work of This Project shall be determined by the Owner at a later date. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner all insurance prior to beginning Work of the Project. Contractor shall NOT begin work on the Project until insurance requirements are fulfilled to the Owners satisfaction, including providing Owner requested documentation. .1
.2
.4
WORKERS’ COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS LIABILITY .1
Coverage A:
.2
Coverage B: $500
Each Accident.
$500
Disease - Each Employee
$500
Disease, Policy Limit
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY .1
$2,000,000
General Aggregate
.2
$2,000,000
Products – Completed Operations Aggregate
.3
$500,000
Each Occurrence
.4
$500,000
Personal Injury
COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY .1 $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit Bodily Injury and Property Damage.
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
S:\11\0123\frontend\007313CGA2007rev.doc
UMBRELLA LIABILITY .1 $5,000,000 Each Occurrence $5,000,000 Annual Aggregate .2
State Statute
THE COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIBILITY SHALL PROVIDE AT A MINIMUM THE FOLLOWING COVERAGES: .5 Operations of the Contractor. .6 Operations of Subcontractor. (Contingent Liability). .7 Products/Completed Operations (To be carried for one year after completion of Contract). .8 Personal injury, including employee related claims. .9 Employees as Additional insured. .10 Property Damage Hazards of Explosion, Collapse and Underground. .11 Contractual Liability (To insure the provisions of 3.18). .12 Owner, Architect and Architect’s Consultants shall be named as Additional insured. .3
THE COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIBILITY SHALL PROVIDE COVERAGE FOR THE FOLLOWING AUTOMOBILES: .2 All Owned Automobiles. .3 All Non-Owned Automobiles. .4 All Hired Automobiles. .5 Owner, Architect and Architect’s Consultants shall be named as Additional insured.
.5
THE UMBRELLA LIABILITY SHALL PROVIDE EXCESS LIMITS OVER AND ABOVE THE COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY, EMPLOYERS LIABILITY AND COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY LIMITS AS STATED IN THIS ARTICLE.
The insurance set forth in these documents is the minimum insurance required. Any additional coverage that may be necessary to further protect the Contractor is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
Add to the end of 11.1.3 as follows: “The Contractor shall promptly furnish to the Owner copies of endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits.” 11.3
PROPERTY INSURANCE
Delete the last sentence of Subparagraph 11.3.1, and substitute the following: “This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, Architect, and Architect’s Consultants, lower tier subcontractors and all suppliers at the job site.” Delete Clause 11.3.1.1 in its entirety, and substitute: 11.3.1.1 “Property insurance shall be on an “all-risk” or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, false-work, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, resultant damage from 007313 - 7 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
faulty work and faulty materials, resultant damage from errors and omissions in design, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect’s and Contractor’s services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss.” 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
.6
.7
If the Contractor becomes insolvent, files a petition in Bankruptcy, shall be adjudicated bankrupt, shall made a general assignment to the benefit of its creditors, or shall be unable to pay its debts as they generally become due. The Contractor shall suspend its business operations or otherwise fail to operate its business in the ordinary course.”
Delete Subparagraph 11.4.1 in its entirety, and substitute: 11.4.1 “The Contractor shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations thereunder. Bonds may be obtained through the Contractor's usual source and the cost thereof shall be included in the Contract Sum. The amount of each bond shall be equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Sum. .1
The Contractor shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner prior to entering into the Agreement, or if the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Contractor shall, prior to the commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished.”
In Subparagraph 14.2.2 delete the words "upon certification by the Initial Decision Maker that sufficient cause exists to justify such action," 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE Delete Subparagraph 14.4.1 in its entirety, and Substitute the following: 14.4.1 “Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract in whole or in part for Owner's convenience and without cause. Termination by Owner under this Paragraph shall be by written notice of termination given to Contractor, specifying the extent of termination and the effective date.” Delete Subparagraph 14.4.2 in its entirety, and Substitute the following:
ARTICLE 12 - UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK In Subparagraph 12.1.1, Insert “or the Owner” after “Architect” in all locations. In Subparagraph 12.1.2, Insert “or the Owner” after “Architect” in all locations.
ARTICLE 14 - TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
14.4.2 “Upon receipt of the notice of termination, Contractor shall immediately, in accordance with Owner's instructions proceed as follows: .1 Cease operations as specified; .2 Place no further orders and enter into no further subcontracts for materials, labor, services or facilities; .3 Unless otherwise specified, terminate all subcontracts and orders to the extent that they relate to Work so terminated; .4 Complete the performance of Work not terminated; and .5 Take such other actions as may be necessary or requested by Owner for the protection and preservation of the terminated Work.
14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE Add the following new Clauses 14.2.1.5, 14.2.1.6 and 14.2.1.7 to Subparagraph 14.2.1:
END OF SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
“.5 If the Contractor fails to make satisfactory progress in performing the Work for a period of thirty (30) days.
007313 - 8 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
S:\11\0123\frontend\007313CGA2007rev.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 007350 - PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SCOPE A.
1.2
REFERENCES A.
1.3
Articles I through XIII of the Project Labor Agreement along with its Attachments ”A”, “B”, and “C” are hereby made a part of this Project Manual and have been included in this Project Manual in their entirety for reference.
The “Schedule A” referred to in the Project Labor Agreement is comprised of the Local Collective Bargaining Agreements. For copies of the individual agreements, contact the local collective bargaining groups directly, or the St. Paul Building and Trades Council at Labor Center, Room 206, 411 Main St. St. Paul, MN 55102, telephone (651) 224-9445.
ACCEPTANCE A.
The Contractor shall sign Attachment “A”, the Letter of Assent
B.
The Contractor shall sign Attachment “B”, the Health Reimbursement Account Employer Subscriber Agreement
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3 Not Used
Project Labor Agreement
S:\11\0123\frontend\007350.DOC
007350 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
END OF SECTION
007350 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Project Labor Agreement
S:\11\0123\frontend\007350.DOC
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT Independent School District No. 192 (Farmington Area Public Schools) Farmington Elementary School and Akin Road Elementary School Construction Projects
This Agreement is entered into this ________ day of _________________, 2013, by and between _________________________________ (herein referred to as “Project Manager/General Contractor”), the ST. PAUL BUILDING AND CONSTRUCTION TRADES COUNCIL, (hereinafter referred to as “Council”), and all Building Trades Unions affiliated with the Council. ARTICLE I PURPOSE Section 1. The term "Contractor" shall include all construction contractors and subcontractors of whatever tier engaged in onsite construction work within the scope of this Agreement, including the Project Manager/General Contractor when it performs construction work within the scope of this Agreement. Where specific reference to alone is intended, the term [insert name of Project Manager/General Contractor] "Project Manager/General Contractor" is used. Section 2. The Parties to this Project Labor Agreement acknowledge that the construction of the Project is important to the development of Farmington Elementary and Akin Road Elementary Schools. The Parties recognize the need for the timely completion of the Project without interruption or delay. This Agreement is intended to enhance this cooperative effort through the establishment of a framework for labor management cooperation and stability. Section 3. The Contractor(s) and the Unions agree that the timely construction of this Project will require substantial numbers of employees from construction and supporting crafts possessing skills and qualifications that are vital to its completion. They will work together to furnish skilled, efficient craftworkers for the construction of the Project. Section 4. Further, the parties desire to mutually establish and stabilize wages, hours and working conditions for the craftworkers on this construction project, to encourage close cooperation between the Contractor(s) and the Unions to the end that a satisfactory, continuous and harmonious relationship will exist between the parties to this Agreement. Section 5. Therefore, in recognition of the special needs of this Project and to maintain a spirit of harmony, labor-management peace, and stability during the term of this Agreement, the parties agree to abide by the terms and conditions in this Agreement, and to establish effective and binding methods for the settlement of all misunderstandings, disputes or grievances which may arise. Further, the Contractor(s) and all contractors of PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 1
whatever tier, agree not to engage in any lockout, and the Unions agree not to engage in any strike, slowdown, or interruption or other disruption of or interference with the work covered by this Agreement. ARTICLE II SCOPE OF AGREEMENT Section 1. This Agreement shall apply and is limited to the recognized and accepted historical definition of construction work under the direction of and performed by the Contractor(s), of whatever tier, which may include the Project Manager/General Contractor, who have contracts awarded for such work on the Project. Such work shall include site preparation work and dedicated off-site work. The Project is defined as: Owner: Independent School District No. 192 (Farmington Area Public Schools). Project: The 2005 Bond Referendum and Alternative Facility Health & Safety Funding, which involve general remodeling and additions to school buildings. There are two buildings which will be undergoing renovation of various degrees. There will be at least two bid packages that will include both single and multiple building sites. All projects will be bid as single prime – general contractor packages. The parties anticipate the following work to be included in the projects: See ATTACHMENT C It is agreed that the Project Manager/General Contractor shall require all Contractors of whatever tier who have been awarded contracts for work covered by this Agreement, to accept and be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement by executing the Letter of Assent (Attachment A) prior to commencing work. The Project Manager/General Contractor shall assure compliance with this Agreement by the Contractors. It is further agreed that, where there is a conflict, the terms and conditions of this Agreement shall supersede and override terms and conditions of any and all other national, area, or local collective bargaining agreements, except that the work of the International Union of Elevator Constructors on this Project shall be performed under the terms of its National Agreements, with the exception of Article VIII (Work Stoppages and Lockouts), IX (Disputes and Grievances), and X (Jurisdictional Disputes) of this Agreement, which shall apply to such work. It is understood that this is a self-contained, stand alone Agreement and that by virtue of having become bound to this Agreement, neither the Project Manager/General Contractor nor Contractors will be obligated to sign any other local area, or national agreement. Section 2. Nothing contained herein shall be construed to prohibit, restrict or interfere with the performance of any other operation, work, or function which may occur at the Project site or be associated with the development of the Project. PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 2
Section 3. This Agreement shall only be binding on the signatory parties hereto and shall not apply to their parents, affiliates or subsidiaries. Section 4. The Owner and/or the Project Manager/General Contractor have the absolute right to select any qualified bidder for the award of contracts on this Project without reference to the existence or non-existence of any agreements between such bidder and any party to this Agreement; provided, however, only that such bidder is willing, ready and able to become a party to and comply with this Agreement, should it be designated the successful bidder. Section 5. Items specifically excluded from the scope of this Agreement include but are not limited to the following: The Project is defined as individual construction projects related solely to the 2005 bond referendum and alternative facility health & safety funding for the repair, renovation and remodeling of schools. See Article II, Section 1 for the definition of the Project. All employees (full/part-time) and volunteers involved in normal school district operations, repair and maintenance are exempt from this agreement. All consultants and contractors providing ongoing services and operations related to normal school district operations, repair and maintenance are also exempt from this agreement. The project scope exempts the following labor and services: • • • • • • •
Owners Representative and their personnel Design teams (architects, engineers, consultants, etc..) Surveyors, commissioning agents, and other testing services Fabricators and vendors producing materials off-site Job site security provided by the District Post-occupancy cleaning services Moving of existing or District provided furniture/equipment by employees
Section 6. The provisions of this Agreement shall not apply to ISD 192 (Owner), and nothing contained herein shall be construed to prohibit or restrict ISD 192 (Owner) or its employees from performing work not covered by this Agreement on the Project site. As areas and systems of the Project are inspected and construction tested by the Project Manager/General Contractor or Contractors and accepted by the Owner, the Agreement will not have further force or effect on such items or areas, except when the Contractors are directed by the Owner to engage in repairs, modifications, check-out, and warranty functions required by its contract with the Owner during the term of this Agreement. Section 7. It is understood that the Owner, at its sole option, may terminate, delay and/or suspend any or all portions of the Project at any time. Section 8. It is understood that the liability of any employer and the liability of the separate unions under this Agreement shall be several and not joint. The unions agree that PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 3
this Agreement does not have the effect of creating any Joint employer status between or among the Owner, Contractor(s) or any employer. Section 9. It is understood and agreed that all project work must be performed by employees of employers bound by the terms of this Agreement. Section 10. Nothing in this Agreement shall negate, abridge or alter any laws, rights or responsibilities of the Owner, including, but not limited to, laws relating to public bidding and laws relating to public construction involving school districts. Section 11. The Contractors agree to pay contributions to the established employee benefit funds in the amounts designated in the Local Area Labor Agreements identified in Schedule A. Contractors that are not signatory to a collective bargaining agreement beyond the scope of this Agreement (“PLA contractor”) may select to participate in the legally established Industry Health Reimbursement Arrangement ("HRA") plan, in lieu of contributing to the respective bona fide benefit funds as designated in Schedule A. The amount of the contribution is based on the difference between the contribution amount of the bona fide Schedule A benefit funds and the cost of the PLA contractors' bona fide nondiscretionary plans. Contributions must be made on behalf of named employees. Participating contractors will submit to the Trustees of the HRA trust and plan a copy of their plan, summary plan description, and the premium structure for workers covered under the PLA contractor's bona fide, non-discretionary plans. The value of the PLA contractor's benefit plans are subject to confirmation by the Trustees of the HRA trust and plan. This may include an independent audit according to a policy as established by the Trustees. Contractors are required to submit certified payroll reports to the Trustees or authorized administrator in order to confirm compliance with the terms of the HRA trust and plan. The Contractors adopt and agree to be bound by the written terms of the legallyestablished Trust Agreements (or in lieu thereof, the aforementioned HRA plan and trust including any policies) specifying the detailed basis on which payments are to be made into, and benefits paid out of, such Trust Funds. The Contractors authorize the parties to such Trust Agreements to appoint trustees and successor trustees to administer the Trust funds and hereby ratify and accept the Trustees so appointed as if made by the Contractors. ARTICLE III UNION RECOGNITION Section 1. The Contractors recognize the signatory Unions as the sole and exclusive bargaining representatives of all craft employees within their respective jurisdictions working on the Project within the scope of this Agreement.
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 4
Section 2. The hiring of employees shall be governed by the procedures set forth in the Agreements which form Schedule A, except that employers not party to any Agreements which form Schedule A will be entitled to retain up to 15% of the employer’s core employees when commencing work on the project. Section 3. All employees covered by this Agreement shall be subject to the union security provisions contained in the applicable Agreement in Schedule A. Section 4. Referral. Applicants for the various classifications covered by this Agreement required by the Employer or Contractors on the Project shall be referred to the Contractors by the Unions. The Unions represent that its local unions administer and control their referrals and it is agreed that these referrals will be made in a nondiscriminatory manner and in full compliance with Federal and State laws. ARTICLE IV UNION REPRESENTATION Section 1. Authorized representatives of the Union shall have access to the Project, provided they do not interfere with the work of employees and further provided that such representatives fully comply with posted visitor and security and safety rules of the Project. Section 2. Stewards. Each signatory Local Union shall have the right to designate a working journeyman as a steward, and shall notify the Construction Manager in writing of the identity of the designated steward prior to the assumption of his or her duties as steward. Such designated steward shall not exercise any supervisory functions. There will be no non-working stewards. Stewards will receive the regular rate of pay of their respective crafts. ARTICLE V WAGES AND BENEFITS Section 1. All employees covered by this Agreement shall be classified in accordance with work performed and paid the base hourly wage rates for those classifications as specified in the attached Schedule A. ARTICLE VI HOURS OF WORK, OVERTIME, SHIFTS AND HOLIDAYS Section 1. The work week and work day shall be determined as set forth in the applicable Schedule A agreement. Section 2. Overtime pay shall be established by reference to the applicable Schedule A agreement.
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 5
Section 3. It shall not be a violation of this Agreement if the Project Manager/General Contractor considers it necessary to suspend all or portion of the Project to protect the life and safety of an employee. In such cases, employees will be compensated only for the actual time worked; provided, however, that where the employer requests employees to remain at the site and available for work, the employees will be compensated for the standby time at their base hourly rate of pay. Section 4. Shift work will be performed in accordance with the currently existing Schedule A agreement. Section 5. Recognized holidays on this Project shall be those in the local collective bargaining agreements in existence for the appropriate Local Unions on the date of this Agreement as contained in the attached Schedule A. There shall be no change in the established holiday schedules and the days upon which those holidays are celebrated, except by mutual agreement. ARTICLE VII MANAGEMENT'S RIGHTS The Project Manager/General Contractor and Contractors of whatever tier retain full and exclusive authority for the management of their operations. Except as otherwise limited by the terms of this Agreement, the Contractors shall direct their working forces at their prerogative, including, but not limited to hiring, promotion, transfer, lay-off or discharge for just cause. No rules, customs, or practices shall be permitted or observed which limit or restrict production, or limit or restrict the working efforts of employees. The Contractors shall utilize the most efficient method or techniques of construction, tools, or other labor saving devices. There shall be no limitations upon the choice of materials or design, nor shall there be any limit on production by workers or restrictions on the full use of tools or equipment. There shall be no restriction, other than may be required by safety regulations, on the number of employees assigned to any crew or to any service. ARTICLE VIII WORK STOPPAGES AND LOCKOUTS Section 1. During the term of this Agreement there shall be no strikes, picketing, work stoppages, slow downs or other disruptive activity for any reason by the Council, a Local Union or by any employee, and there shall be no lockout by the Contractor. Failure of the Council, Local Union or employee to cross any picket line established at the Project site is a violation of this Article. Section 2. The Council and Local Unions shall not sanction, aid or abet, encourage or continue any work stoppage, strike, picketing or other disruptive activity at the Contractor's project site and shall undertake all reasonable means to prevent or to terminate any such activity. No employee shall engage in activities which violate this Article. Any employee who participates in or encourages any activities which interfere with the normal operation of the Project shall be subject to disciplinary action, including PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 6
discharge, and if justifiably discharged for the above reasons, shall not be eligible for rehire on the Project for a period of not less than ninety (90) days. Section 3. Neither the Council nor any Local Union shall be liable for acts of employees for whom it has no responsibility. The Building Trades Council Business Manager will immediately instruct, order and use the best efforts of his office to cause the Local Union or Unions to cease any violations of this Article. By complying with this obligation the Building Trades Council shall not be liable for unauthorized acts of a Local Union. The principal officer or officers of a Local Union will immediately instruct, order and use the best efforts of his or her office to cause the employees the Local Union represents to cease any violations of this Article. A Local Union complying with this obligation shall not be liable for unauthorized acts of employees it represents. The failure of the Contractor to exercise its right in any instance shall not be deemed a waiver of its right in any other instance. Section 4. Any party alleging a breach of this Article shall have the right to petition a court for temporary and permanent injunctive relief. The moving party need not show the existence of irreparable harm, and shall be required to post bond only to secure payment of court costs and attorney fees as may be awarded by the Court. ARTICLE IX DISPUTES AND GRIEVANCES Section 1. This Agreement is intended to provide close cooperation between management and labor. Each of the Unions will assign a representative to this Project for the purpose of completing the construction of the Project economically, efficiently, continuously, and without interruptions, delays, or work stoppages. Section 2. The Contractors, Unions, and the employees, collectively and individually, realize the importance to all parties to maintain continuous and uninterrupted performance of the work of the Project, and agree to resolve disputes in accordance with the grievance-arbitration provisions set forth in this Article. Section 3. Any question or dispute arising out of and during the term of this Agreement (other than trade jurisdictional disputes) shall be considered a grievance and subject to resolution under the following procedures: Step 1. (a) When any employee subject to the provisions of this Agreement feels he or she is aggrieved by a violation of this Agreement, he or she, through his or her local union business representative or job steward, shall, within five (5) working days after the occurrence of the violation, give notice to the work-site representative of the involved Contractor stating the provision(s) alleged to have been violated. The business representative of the local union or the job steward and the work-site representative of the involved Contractor and the Project Manager/General Contractor shall meet and endeavor to adjust the matter within three (3) working days after timely notice has been given. The representative of the Contractor shall keep the meeting minutes and shall respond to the PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 7
Union representative in writing (copying the Project Manager/General Contractor) at the conclusion of the meeting but not later than twenty-four (24) hours thereafter. If they fail to resolve the matter within the prescribed period, the grieving party may, within forty-eight (48) hours thereafter, pursue Step 2 of the Grievance Procedure, provided the grievance is reduced to writing, setting forth the relevant information concerning the alleged grievance, including a short description thereof, the date on which the grievance occurred, and the provision(s) of the Agreement alleged to have been violated. (b) Should the Local Union(s) or the Project Manager/General Contractor or any Contractor have a dispute with the other party and, if after conferring, a settlement is not reached within three (3) working days, the dispute may be reduced to writing and proceed to Step 2 in the same manner as outlined herein for the adjustment of an employee complaint. Step 2. The Business Manager of the Council and the involved Contractor shall meet within seven (7) working days of the referral of a dispute to this second step to arrive at a satisfactory settlement thereof. If the parties fail to reach an agreement, the dispute may be appealed in writing in accordance with the provisions of Step 3 within seven (7) calendar days thereafter. Step 3. (a) If the grievance has been submitted but not adjusted under Step 2, either party may request in writing, within seven (7) calendar days thereafter, that the grievance be submitted to an Arbitrator mutually agreed upon by them. The Contractor and the involved Union shall attempt mutually to select an arbitrator, but if they are unable to do so, they shall request the Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service to provide them with a list of seven (7) arbitrators residing in the state of Minnesota from which the Arbitrator shall be selected by the parties alternatively striking names from the list. The first strike shall be determined by the toss of a coin. The decision of the Arbitrator shall be final and binding on all parties. The fee and expenses of such Arbitration shall be borne equally by the Contractor and the involved Local Union(s). (b) Failure of the grieving party to adhere to the time limits established herein shall render the grievance null and void. The time limits established herein may be extended by written consent of the parties involved at the particular step where the extension is agreed upon. The Arbitrator shall have the authority to make decisions only on issues presented to him or her. and he or she shall not have authority to change, amend, add to or detract from any of the provisions of this Agreement. Section 4. The Project Manager/General Contractor and Owner shall be notified of all actions at Steps 2 and 3 and shall, upon their request, be permitted to participate in all proceedings at these steps. ARTICLE X JURISDICTIONAL DISPUTES
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 8
Section 1. The assignment of work will be solely the responsibility of the Contractor performing the work involved; and such work assignments will be in accordance with the Plan for the Settlement of Jurisdictional Disputes in the Construction Industry (the "Plan") or any successor Plan. Section 2. All Jurisdictional disputes on this Project between or among Building and Construction Trades Unions and employees parties to this Agreement shall be settled and adjusted according to the present Plan established by the Building and Construction Trades Department or any other plan or method of procedure that may be adopted in the future by the Building and Construction Trades Department. Decisions rendered shall be final, binding and conclusive on the Contractors and Unions parties to this Agreement. Section 3. All jurisdictional disputes shall be resolved without the occurrence of any strike, work stoppage, or slow-down of any nature, and the Contractor's assignment shall be adhered to until the dispute is resolved. Individuals violating this section shall be subject to immediate discharge. Section 4. Each Contractor will conduct a pre-job conference with the appropriate representative of the Council and local union prior to commencing work. The Project Manager/General Contractor and the Owner will be advised in advance of all such conferences and may participate if they wish. ARTICLE XI SUBCONTRACTING The Project Manager/General Contractor agrees that neither it nor any of its contractors or subcontractors will subcontract any work to be done on the Project except to a person, firm or corporation who is or agrees to become party to this Agreement. Any contractor or subcontractor working on the Project shall, as a condition to working on said Project, become signatory to and perform all work under the terms of this Agreement.
ARTICLE XII SAVINGS AND SEPARABILITY It is not the intention of Owner, Contractors, or the Union parties to violate any laws governing the subject matter of this Agreement. The parties hereto agree that in the event any provisions of the Agreement are finally held or determined to be illegal or void as being in contravention of any applicable law, the remainder of the Agreement shall remain in full force and effect unless the part or parts so found to be void are wholly inseparable from the remaining portions of this Agreement. Further, the Contractors and Union agree that if and when any and all provisions of this Agreement are finally held or determined to be illegal or void by Court or competent jurisdiction, the parties will promptly enter into negotiations concerning the substance affected by such decision for the purpose of achieving conformity with the requirements of an applicable law and the intent of the parties hereto. PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 9
ARTICLE XIII LABOR HARMONY Section 1. The Contractor shall furnish labor that can work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed on the Project and shall submit a labor harmony plan to demonstrate how this will be done. "Harmony" shall include the provision of labor that will not, either directly or indirectly, cause or give rise to any work disruptions, slow downs, picketing, stoppages, or any violence or harm to any person or property while performing any work, or activities incidental thereto at the Project. The labor harmony plan should include the company's labor management policies, collective bargaining agreements if any and their expiration dates, past labor relations history, a listing of activities anticipated under this contract that may potentially cause friction with on-site workers, and procedures the company will undertake to eliminate this friction. Section 2. The Contractor agrees that it shall require every lower-tier subcontractor to provide labor that will work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed in the work, and will include the provisions contained in the paragraph above, in every lowertier subcontract let for work under this contract. Section 3. The requirement to provide labor that can work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed in the work throughout the contract performance is a material element of this Agreement. Failure by the contractor or any of its lower-tier subcontractors to comply with this requirement shall be deemed a material breach of this Agreement which will subject the Contractor to all rights and remedies the Owner or Project Contractor may have, including without limitation the right to terminate the contract. ARTICLE XIV NO DISCRIMINATION Section1. The Contractor and Union agree that they will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of his or her membership or nonmembership in a Union or based upon race, color, religion, sex, national origin or age in any manner prohibited by law or regulation. Section 2. Any complaints regarding application of the provisions of Section 1, should be brought to the immediate attention of the involved Contractor for consideration and resolution. Section 3. The use of the masculine or feminine gender in this Agreement shall be construed as including both gender. ARTICLE XV DURATION OF THE AGREEMENT
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 10
Section 1. This Agreement shall be effective ______________ , and shall continue in effect for the duration of the Project construction work described in Articles I and II hereof. Construction of any phase, portion, section or segment of the Project shall be deemed complete when such phase, portion, section or segment has been turned over to the Owner and has received the final acceptance from the Owner’s representative. Section 2. Schedule A attached to this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect until the Contractor and/or Union parties to the Collective Bargaining Agreements, which are the basis for such Schedule A, notify the Project Manager/General Contractor in writing of the mutually agreed upon changes in those provisions of such Agreements which are applicable to the Project and their effective date(s), which shall become the effective date(s) under this Agreement. Section 3. The Union agrees that there will be no strikes, work stoppages, sympathy actions, picketing, slowdowns or other disruptive activity affecting the Project by any Union involved in the negotiations of such Local Collective Bargaining Agreements and the resulting Schedule A’s, nor shall there be any lock-out on this Project affecting the Union during the course of such negotiations. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have caused this Agreement to be executed and effective as of the day and year above written.
ST. PAUL BUILDING AND CONSTRUCTION TRADES COUNCIL
PROJECT MANAGER CONTRACTOR
/
GENERAL
By:_________________________________ By:_________________________________ Its: ________________________________
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
Its: ________________________________
JANUARY 2013 11
SCHEDULE A LOCAL COLLECTIVE BARGAINING AGREEMENTS The Local Collective Bargaining Agreements are incorporated herein by reference. For copies of individual agreements, contact the Local Unions directly or the St. Paul Building and Construction Trades Council at Labor Centre, Room 206, 411 Main St., St. Paul, Minnesota 55102 (Telephone: 651-224-9445). SCHEDULE A TRADE AGREEMENT between THERMAL INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION and the INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF HEAT & FROST INSULATORS AND ASBESTOS WORKERS LOCAL NO. 34 of MINNEAPOLIS & ST. PAUL, MN Expiration May 31, 2015 GREAT LAKES ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT between the INTERNATIONAL BROTHERHOOD OF BOILERMAKERS, IRON SHIP BUILDERS, BLACKSMITHS, FORGERS and HELPERS, AFL-CIO, CFL and FIRMS LISTED HEREIN Expiration: December 31, 2013 AGREEMENT BETWEEN ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS of MINNESOTA and MINNESOTA CONCRETE & MASONRY CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION and BRICKLAYERS & ALLIED CRAFTWORKERS LOCAL UNION NO. 1 MINNESOTA / NORTH DAKOTA And INDEPENDENT EMPLOYERS MINNESOTA STATEWIDE AGREEMENT Chapters 1, 3, 4, 6, 8, 11 and 15 Expires April 30, 2013 AGREEMENT BETWEEN MINNESOTA TILE CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION And MINNESOTA CONCRETE & MASONRY CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION And BRICKLAYERS & ALLIED CRAFTWORKERS LOCAL UNION 1 MINNESOTA / NORTH DAKOTA TILE LAYERS AND FINISHERS, CHAPTER #18 Expiration April 30, 2013 ______________________________________________________________________________ _____
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 12
AGREEMENT BETWEEN BUILDERS DIVISION OF ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF MINNESOTA and CARPENTRY CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (CCA) and GYPSUM DRYWALL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (GDCA) and NORTH CENTRAL STATES REGIONAL COUNCIL OF CARPENTERS Expires April 30, 2013 AGREEMENT BETWEEN CARPET, LINOLEUM, RESILIENT TILE LAYERS LOCAL UNION #596 OF THE NORTH CENTRAL STATES REGIONAL COUNCIL OF CARPENTERS AND MININESOTA FLOOR COVERING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION Expires May 31, 2011 METRO AGREEMENT BETWEEN MINNEAPOLIS & ST. PAUL BUILDERS DIVISION OF ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF MINNESOTA and MINNESOTA CEMENT MASONS, PLASTERERS, AND SHOPHANDS LOCAL NO. 633 AFFILIATED WITH O.P.&C.M.I.A. of U.S. Expires April 30, 2013 AGREEMENT BY AND BETWEEN ST. PAUL CHAPTER OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION And IINTERNATIONAL BROTHERHOOD of ELECTRICAL WORKERS LOCAL UNION 110, AFL-CIO Expiration April 30, 2012 MINNESOTA LIMITED ENERGY AGREEMENT (Statewide) Between NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NECA), Minneapolis, St. Paul, and Twin Ports-Arrowhead Chapters And INTERNATIONAL BROTHERHOOD of ELECTRICAL WORKERS (IBEW), AFL-CIO LOCAL UNIONS #110, #242, #292, #294, #343 Expiration June 30, 2012 ______________________________________________________________________________ ____ STANDARD AGREEMENT between the NATIONAL ELEVATOR BARGAINING ASSOCIATION And THYSSEN KRUPP ELEVATOR And ELEVATOR CONTRACTOS OF AMERICA (Independent Companies)
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 13
and th INTERNATIONAL UNION OF ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS Expiration 7/8/2012 ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN BROTHERHOOD OF PAINTERS AND ALLIED TRADES, AFL-CI0 DISTRICT CL 82 (LOCAL UNION NO. 1324) and IT’S INDIVIDUAL CONTRACTORS Expiration 6/03/2013
AGREEMENT BETWEEN TWIN CITY IRON WORKERS LOCAL UNION 512 and ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF MINNESOTA Expires April 30, 2013 MINNESOTA LABORERS METROPOLITAN BUILDERS AGREEMENT WITH ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF MINNESOTA April 30, 2013 WORKING AGREEMENT NORTH CENTRAL STATES REGIONAL COUNCIL OF CARPENTERS MINNESOTA INTERIOR SYSTEMS LOCAL 68 and MINNESOTA WALL & CEILING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION April 30, 2013 AGREEMENT BETWEEN INDEPENDENT MILLWRIGHT CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION OF SOUTHERN MINNESOTA, WESTERN WISCONSIN AND SOUTH DAKOTA and MILLWRIGHT & MACHINERY ERECTORS LOCAL UNION NO. 548 and NORTH CENTRAL STATES REGIONAL COUNCIL OF CARPENTERS Expires April 30, 2013 AGREEMENT BETWEEN ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS of MINNESOTA, BUILDERS DIVISION and INTERNATIONAL UNION of OPERATING ENGINEERS LOCAL NO. 49 Expires April 30, 2013 AGREEMENT BETWEEN ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF MINNESOTA HIGHWAY, RAILROAD & HEAVY CONSTRUCTION DIVISION
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 14
and INTERNATIONAL UNION OF OPERATING ENGINEERS LOCAL NO. 49 Expires April 30, 2013 AGREEMENT BETWEEN MINNESOTA PAINTING & WALLCOVERING EMPLOYERS ASSOCIATION and PAINTERS & ALLIED TRADES UNION LOCAL NO. 61 Expiration 4/30/2013 WORKING AGREEMENT BETWEEN PIPEFITTERS LOCAL UNION NO. 455 and MINNESOTA MECHANICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION Expiration 4/30/2013 WORKING AGREEMENT PLASTERERS LOCAL UNION NO. 265 and MINNESOTA WALL & CEILING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION Expiration May 31, 2013 WORKING AGREEMENT BETWEEN PLUMBERS LOCAL UNION NO. 34 and MINNESOTA MECHANICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION Expiration 4/30/2015 ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE ROOFING CONTRACTORS OF THE TWIN CITIES METROPOLITAN AREA and the UNITED UNION OF ROOFERS, WATERPROOFERS AND ALLIED WORKERS LOCAL UNION NO. 96 Expiration April 30, 2015 LABOR AGREEMENT BETWEEN TWIN CITIES DIVISION SMARCA, INC. and SHEET METAL WORKERS LOCAL NO. 10, Maplewood, MN Expiration April 30, 2014 AGREEMENT BETWEEN MASTER SIGN INDUSTRY and INTERNATIONAL UNION OF PAINTERS & ALLIED TRADES DISTRICT COUNCIL 82/LOCAL UNION 880 SIGN, DISPLAY SCREEN PROCESS & ALLIED TRADES
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 15
Expiration April 30, 2014
AGREEMENT BETWEEN NATIONAL FIRE SPRINKLER ASSOCIATION, INC. and SPRINKLERFITTERS & APPRENTICES UNION NO. 417 MINNEAPOLIS-ST. PAUL, MINNESOTA OF THE UNITED ASSOCIATION OF JOURNEYMEN & APPRENTICES OF THE PLUMBING & PIPEFITTING INDUSTRY OF THE UNITED STATES AND CANADA Expiration May 31, 2015 HIGHWAY, RAILROAD & HEAVY CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT BETWEEN ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF MINNESOTA AND MN CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE OF TEAMSTERS LOCAL 120 Expiration 4/30/2014
________________________________________________________________________
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 16
ATTACHMENT A
LETTER OF ASSENT
_________________[Name of Contractor]________________ hereby agrees to accept and be bound by the terms and conditions of the Project Labor Agreement between _______________[Name of Project Manager/General Contractor]___________________ and the ST. PAUL BUILDING AND CONSTRUCTION TRADES COUNCIL, dated and effective _________[Project Start Date]_______________, with respect to all construction work at the site of the construction and during the course of the construction as those terms are used or defined in the Project Labor Agreement.
_________[Contractor Name & Address]________ _________________________________________ _________________________________________ _________________________________________ By: ______________________________________ Its:_______________________________________ Dated:____________________________________
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 17
ATTACHMENT B HEALTH REIMBURSEMENT ARRANGEMENT EMPLOYER SUBSCRIBER AGREEMENT
The undersigned hereby adopt the Trust Agreement known as the Minnesota State Building Trades Health Reimbursement Trust Fund, hereinafter referred to as “Trust” and agree to be bound by the terms thereof. The undersigned Employer Subscriber and Unions hereby grant Powers of Attorney to the Board of Trustees now holding office, or to the successors, to administer the Trust as representatives of the Employer Subscriber and Unions respectively, with full power and authority to act for the Employer Subscriber and Unions in all matters of administration of the Trust. In no event shall the Unions or Employer Subscriber be responsible for any act or omission of the Trustees nor shall the Unions or Employer Subscriber have any liability for any debt or liability of the Trust or its Trustees. Commencing on the first day of work under the attached Project Labor Agreement, and payable not later than the 15th day of each month thereafter, the Employer Subscriber shall pay to the Trust the amount specified by the Project Labor Agreement for all hours worked under the Project Labor Agreement by the employees of the Employer Subscriber for which contributions to the Trust are required by the Project Labor Agreement. The undersigned Employer Subscriber acknowledges that the failure by the Employer Subscriber to timely remit required contributions will result in liquidated damages being payable under the Trust Agreement to which the Employer Subscriber is hereby bound. The undersigned represents and warrants that he/she/they is (are) authorized to execute this Employer Subscriber Agreement on behalf of the Employer Subscriber and that by he/she/their respective execution of this Subscriber Agreement his/her/their organization is fully bound hereto and the provisions of the Trust Agreement.
____________________________ Employer/Subscriber
_____________________ Date
By:____________________________ Name and Title
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 18
ATTACHMENT C
ISD 192 Farmington Elementary School and Akin Road Elementary School The projects include general remodeling and additions to school buildings. There will be two bid packages that will include both single and multiple building sites. All projects will be bid as single prime – general contractor packages. It is anticipated the following work to be included in the projects: DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 024113 Selective Site Demolition 024116 Building Demolition 024119 Minor Demolition for Remodeling DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 031000 Concrete Forms and Accessories 032000 Concrete Reinforcement 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete 034113 Precast Concrete Hollow Core Planks 035300 Concrete Toppiing DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 042000 Unit Masonry Systems DIVISION 5 - METALS 051200 Structural Steel 052100 Steel Joists 052500 Aluminum Joists 053100 Steel Deck 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 055000 Metal Fabrications 055100 Metal Stairs and Railings DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTIC 061000 Rough Carpentry 061600 Sheathing ( Plywood, etc.) 061643 Exterior Sheathing Board (Dens-Glas) 062000 Finish Carpentry 064000 Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071050 Preparation for Re-Roofing 072100 Building Insulation 072726 Weather Resistant Barriers 074616 Preformed Metal Siding 075100 Built-Up Bituminous Roofing (Polyiso) 075310 Elastomeric Membrane Roofing - Fully Adhered 075320 Elastomeric Membrane Roofing - Loose Laid/Ballasted 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076300 Manufactured Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 077100 Manufactured Roof Specialties 077200 Roof Accessories 078100 Spray-Applied Fireproofing
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 19
078150 Replacement Fireproofing 078400 Fire-Stopping 078700 Smoke Containment Systems for Elevator Doors 079200 Joint Sealers 079513 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS 081100 Steel Doors and Frames 081416 Wood Doors 083300 Coiling Doors and Grilles 083613 Sectional Doors 084100 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 086250 Tubular Skylights 087100 Door Hardware 088100 Glass and Glazing 089100 Wall Louvers DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 092116 Gypsum Board Systems 092400 Portland Cement Plaster 093000 Tiling 095100 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 096500 Resilient Flooring and Base 096800 Carpeting 097750 Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels 099000 Paints and Coatings DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 101100 Visual Display Boards 101400 Identifying Devices 102113.20 Phenolic Toilet Compartments 102600 Wall and Corner Guards 102810 Toilet and Bath Accessories 104400 Fire Protection Specialties DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 111300 Loading Dock Equipment 114000 Food Service Equipment (by consultant) DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 122000 Window Treatment 123500 Plastic Laminate Casework DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (Not Used) DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS (Not Used) DIVISION 21 – FIRE-SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION 21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 11 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION WATER SERVICE PIPING 21 13 00 FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 19 GAGES AND METERS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 29 HANGER & SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 20
EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 19 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 11 23 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 22 13 19 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 14 13 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 14 23 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 34 46 GAS DOMESTIC WATER HEATER 22 42 00 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES DIVISION 23 - HVAC 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 29 HANGER AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION 23 07 16 EQUIPMENT INSULATION 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 20 13 HYDRONIC PIPING 23 20 19 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 23 21 23 HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 22 13 STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING 23 22 19 STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES 23 23 13 REFRIGERANT PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES 23 25 31 WATER TREATMENT FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS 23 31 13 METAL AND NON-METAL DUCTWORK, CASINGS AND PLENUMS 23 33 13 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 34 13 FANS 23 36 00 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 37 13 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 51 16 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, STACKS AND ACCESSORIES 23 52 38 CONDENSING BOILERS 23 57 16 STEAM TO WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS 23 64 23 AIR COOLED WATER CHILLER 23 72 13 ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT 23 73 13 MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 74 13 PACKAGED OUTDOOR ROOFTOP UNITS
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 21
23 82 16 AIR COILS 23 82 36 FINNED TUBE RADIATION HEATERS 23 82 39 UNIT HEATERS DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 25 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 25 10 00 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION EQUIPMENT 25 35 00 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION INSTRUMENTATION AND TERMINAL DEVICES FOR HVAC 25 95 00 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR HVAC ELECTRICAL 26 01 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 01 05 SUBMITTALS, CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS, TRANING AND SPARE PARTS 26 01 10 SELECTIVE ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 26 01 20 TESTING AND ADJUSTMENTS TO ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 19 600 VOLT CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 26 05 24 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 05 33 RACEWAY, FITTINGS, AND BOXES 26 05 50 FLOORBOXES AND POKETHRUS 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 60 CONCRETE PADS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 26 09 21 CONTACTORS 26 09 23 OCCUPANCY SENSORS 26 24 13 SWITCHBOARDS 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 26 27 13 ELECTRICITY METERING CABINETS 26 27 16 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 26 28 13 LOW VOLTAGE FUSES 26 28 16 SAFETY SWITCHES 26 29 13 MOTOR CONTROL 26 43 13 TVSS 26 51 13 LIGHTING 26 52 00 EMERGENCY LIGHTING 26 53 00 EXIT SIGNS DIVISION 28 – FIRE ALARM SECTION NUMBER SECTION NAME 28 31 00 FIRE ALARM DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 310000 Earthwork (Broad Scope) 311000 Site Clearing 312316 Excavation and Backfill for Structures DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321216 Asphalt Concrete Paving 321313 Exterior Concrete Paving 321723 Pavement Markings
PROJECT LABOR AGREEMENT
JANUARY 2013 22
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 007380 SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION TIME OF COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
A. In the event that Substantial Completion of the Work for the Full Scope of Each Phase has not occurred on or before August 23, 2013, then commencing on August 24, 2013, and continuing for each day or fraction thereof until Substantial Completion of the Work is established, the Contractor shall pay to the Owner, at the sole option of the Owner, the amount of One Thousand and No/100 Dollars ($1,000.00) per diem (“Damage Amount”). B. The Contractor and the Owner agree that in the event the Substantial Completion of the Work does not occur on or prior to August 23, 2013, the Owner will suffer damages in an amount which may, due to the special nature of the Project, the Owner’s business and the Owner’s reliance upon the Substantial Completion date, be impractical or extremely difficult to ascertain. The Owner and the Contractor agree that the Damage Amount is a reasonable estimate of the damages that the Owner will suffer in the event that Substantial Completion of the Work does not occur on or prior to the Substantial Completion Date. C. Payment of liquidated damages shall be in the form of a Change Order reducing the Contractor’s Contract Sum by the amount of the liquidated damages. If the Contractor refuses to sign the Change Order for liquidated damages, the Owner reserves the right to unilaterally reduce the Contract Sum by the amount of the liquidated damages. If the amount of the liquidated damages exceeds the remaining unpaid balance of the Contract, the Contract Sum shall be reduced by the amount of the unpaid balance and the Contractor shall pay the Owner the difference between the liquidated damages and the unpaid balance. END OF SECTION
Special Conditions for the Contract for Construction Time of Completion and Liquidated Damages S:\11\0123\frontend\007380.doc
007380 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
007380 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
Special Conditions for the Contract for Construction Time of Completion and Liquidated Damages S:\11\0123\frontend\007380.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 011100 - SUMMARY OF WORK governing regulations, natural phenomenon, including weather conditions and other forces outside the Contract Documents.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Description of Construction Delivered Under a Single Prime Contract. 1. Work Covered Documents.
by
the
1.3
A. The Owner shall award a Stipulated Sum Single Prime Contract (AIA Document A101) for the total Work of the Project. 1.4
1. The Contract has been fully executed; and the Owner has issued a Notice to Proceed.
3. Commencement of the Work. 4. Work by Owner.
2. The Owner has approved the Contractor's Performance Bond and Payment Bond (AIA A312).
5. Owner Furnished/ Contractor Installed Products.
3. The Owner has approved evidence of the Contractor's Liability Insurance, Owner's Protective Liability Insurance and any other required insurance to be purchased by the Contractor.
6. Future Work. 7. Contractor’s Duties. 8. Overlapping & Conflicting Requirements. 9. Contractor’s Use of Site and Premises.
4. On-site work is to commence June 7, 2013.
10. Owner Occupancy.
5. Date of Substantial Completion is to be no later than August 23, 2013.
WORK COVERED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Project shall consist of REMODELING AND MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT at the AKIN ROAD ELEMENTARY SCHOOL located at 5231 195TH STREET WEST, FARMINGTON, MINNESOTA 55024. B. Work of the Contract shall consist of all General Construction; including Mechanical and Electrical Work (Volumes One and Two). C. Work of the Contract can be summarized by references to the Contract, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections, Drawings, Addenda and modifications to the Contract Documents issued subsequent to the initial printing of this Project Manual, including, but not necessarily limited to, printed material referenced by any of these. D. It is recognized that Work of the Contract, is also unavoidably affected or influenced by
SUMMARY OF WORK
S:\11\0123\frontend\011100CGA.doc
COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK A. The Contractor shall neither commence the Work, nor allow any Subcontractor or Subsubcontractor to commence the Work until:
Contract
2. Contract Method.
1.2
CONTRACT METHOD
1.5
WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner will award a separate Contract for performance of certain Construction operations. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with Work under this contract. Work of the separate contract will commence on or about June 7, 2013. Work by the Owner includes: 1. Owner’s Commissioning Agent for the work under this Contract. B. Items noted “NIC” (Not in Contract), including movable cabinets, furnishings and minor equipment will be furnished and installed by Owner. C. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract.
011100 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
D. Items furnished by the Owner for final connection by the Contractor are:
materials, articles, equipment, incidentals, items, tools, services, supplies, methods, operations, skills in such quantities as may be necessary to complete the project within the intent of the Contract Documents.
1. Interactive Whiteboard. 1.6
OWNER FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED PRODUCTS
1.8
A. Products furnished to the site and paid for by the Owner are:
2. Soap Dispensers. B. Owner’s Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data and samples to Contractor. 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to the site according to Contractor’s Construction Schedule.
B. Bidding Stage: Notify Architect in writing of overlapping and conflicting requirements for clarification by Addenda.
3. Upon delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor.
C. Construction Stage: Refer to Architect for resolution conflicting requirements and uncertainties as to which level of quality is more stringent, and receive written clarification from Architect before proceeding with questioned Work.
4. Submit claims for transportation damage, and replace damaged, defective or deficient products.
C. Contractor’s Responsibilities: 1. Review Owner furnished shop drawings, product data and samples and return them to Architect noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of products. 2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage, jointly with Owner. 3. Handle, store, protect, install and finish products. 4. Repair or replace items or products damaged after receipt. 1.7
CONTRACTOR’S DUTIES A. The intent is for the Contractor to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. Work shall cover all portions of the Contract Documents, and all Work necessary to produce the intended results. B. Work Included: Provide construction administration and supervision, labor,
011100 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
CONFLICTING
A. Where compliance with two or more standards or requirements is indicated in the documents or where overlapping requirements establish different or conflicting levels of quantity or quality within the documents; the most stringent, (and generally the most expensive), requirement is intended, and will be enforced unless written approval is granted otherwise by the Architect.
1. Towel Dispensers.
5. Arrange for manufacturer’s warranties, inspections and service.
OVERLAPPING AND REQUIREMENTS
1.9
CONTRACTOR PREMISES
USE
OF
SITE
&
A. Limit use of site and premises to allow: 1. Owner occupancy. 2. Use of site and premises by public. 3. Construction operations and activities. B. Confine the Work, including all construction operations and activities, within the "Construction Limits" and limit Contractor activities outside the areas under construction. C. Utility Outages and Shutdown: Contractor shall obtain written permission from the Owner at least forty-eight (48) hours in advance of any such occurrence. Provide and maintain proper shoring and bracing for existing underground utilities and sewers encountered during excavation work, protect them from collapse or movement, or other types of damage until such time as they are to be removed, incorporated into the new Work or can be properly backfilled upon completion of new Work. SUMMARY OF WORK
S:\11\0123\frontend\011100CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
1. All such disruptions of services shall be limited to a maximum of one (1) hour. Prior to beginning any excavation, contact Gopher State One (1-800-252-1166) and utility companies for the location of existing underground services. D. Protect pavements, curbs, trees, landscaping and existing construction during the course of the Work, and repair or replace all parts of same which become damaged. E. Failing to adequately clean vehicles or otherwise causing dirt or debris to be deposited on any public street or highway shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, and he shall be liable for all costs levied by public authorities having jurisdiction in connection with the cleaning thereof. F. Assume full responsibility for the protection of and safekeeping of products and materials under his contract, stored on the site. G. Provide and maintain access roads for delivery of all materials and services to the site. H. Keep driveways and entrances serving the site clear and available to the Owner and the Owner's employees and agents at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site. I. All employees shall be properly and completely clothed while working; minimum attire is long pants, T-shirt and sturdy work shoes. Sneakers and tank tops are not permitted. The use of “hard hats” which meet or exceed Federal Standards are required to be worn at all times by every person who works or visits the site. J. Schedule Work that will result in reduction of noise and disruption of normal classroom operations with the school Principal. Noisy and disruptive work of long duration should be scheduled during non-school hours. K. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of the entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes.
11-0123
1.10
OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Full Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and existing facilities during entire period of construction for the conduct of normal operations. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner's operations; especially in the Owner's use during normal school hours. C. Schedule the Work to accommodate this requirement. 1. A Certificate of Substantial Completion will be executed for the Work prior to Owner occupancy. 2. Contractor shall obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from local building officials prior to Owner occupancy. D. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to occupy, and to place and install equipment in completed areas of the building, prior to Substantial Completion provided that such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. A Certificate of Substantial Completion will be executed for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner occupancy. 2. Contractor shall obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from local building officials prior to Owner occupancy. 3. Prior to partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational. Required inspections and tests shall have been successfully completed. Upon occupancy the Owner will provide operation and maintenance of mechanical and electrical systems in occupied portions of the building.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
SUMMARY OF WORK
S:\11\0123\frontend\011100CGA.doc
011100 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
END OF SECTION
011100 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
SUMMARY OF WORK
S:\11\0123\frontend\011100CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES D. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Procedures Associated With Unit Prices and Measurement of Payment; Including Lists and Descriptions of Unit Price Items.
1.2
A. Document 007200- General Conditions: General Conditions (AIA Document A201). -
Supplementary General
C. Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures. D. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product substitutions and options. E. Section 017300 - Execution Requirements: F. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. G. Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals. 1.3
DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.
1.4
PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit. B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.
UNIT PRICES
S:\11\0123\frontend\012200CGA.doc
UNIT PRICES A. Unit prices quoted on the Bid Proposal Form shall be reviewed, and accepted or rejected at the Owner’s option. Only the accepted unit prices will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. 1. Unit Price #E1: Not Used. 2. Unit Price #E2: Normal Power Receptacle
RELATED SECTIONS
B. Document 007313 Conditions.
1.5
a. ADD or DEDUCT on a unit price basis for each receptacle to be installed in addition to those shown on Drawings. Unit price to include all labor and material for each normal power receptacle (50’-0” run), conduit, wire and all parts and accessories required to energize the receptacle. b. Unit Measurement: Per power receptacle. 3. Unit Price #E-3: Voice/Data Outlet 0-150 Feet a. ADD on a unit price basis one Voice/Data Outlet complete with 0 to 150 feet of Category 6 cable, Category 6 jacks, faceplate and all labor required for a complete voice/data location as described in Specification Section 271300. b. Unit Measurement: Per Voice/Data Outlet. 4. Unit Price #E-4: Voice/Data Outlet 151-250 feet a. ADD on a unit price basis one Voice/Data Outlet complete with 151 to 250 feet of Category 6 cable, Category 6 jacks, faceplate and all labor required for a complete voice/data location as described in Specification Section 271300. b. Unit Measurement: Per Voice/Data Outlet.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
(not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
012200 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
END OF SECTION
012200 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
UNIT PRICES
S:\11\0123\frontend\012200CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Submission and Acceptance Procedures for Alternate Bids; Including Lists and Descriptions of Each Alternate.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 007200- General Conditions: General Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 007313 Conditions.
-
Supplementary General
C. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures. D. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. 1.3
ALTERNATES A. Alternates quoted on the Bid Proposal Form will be reviewed, and accepted or rejected at the Owner's option. Accepted alternates will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. B. Perform work required for complete execution of each accepted alternate designated in the OwnerContractor Agreement. Amount of alternate prices shall include cost of modifications made necessary including overhead and profit. C. Comply with applicable provisions of the Contract Documents for work of alternates, except as otherwise specified. D. Definition: An Alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Proposal Form for certain construction activities defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems or installation methods described in Contract Documents. E. Coordination: Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary to ensure that Work affected by each accepted Alternate is complete and fully integrated into the
ALTERNATES
S:\11\0123\frontend\012300CGA.doc
project. Cost of alternate shall include, costs of related coordination, modification or adjustment. F. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, Architect shall prepare and distribute to each party involved, notification of the status of each Alternate. Indicate whether Alternates have been accepted, rejected or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete description of negotiated modification to Alternates. G. Schedule: A “Schedule of Alternates” is included as part of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve the Work described under each Alternate. 1. Include as part of each Alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate. H. Coordinate pertinent related work and modify surrounding work as required to complete the project under each accepted alternate designated in the Owner-Contractor agreement. I. Schedule of Alternates: 1. Alternate No. 1: Media Center Remodeling Base Bid Items: No Work. Alternate Bid Items: ADD the amount to add to the Base Bid to remodel the Media Center. 2. Alternate No. 2: Locker Replacement and Finishes Base Bid Items: No Work. Existing lockers to remain. Alternate Bid Items: ADD the amount to add to the Base Bid to remove existing lockers and install new. Replace finishes at locker demolition locations. 3. Alternate No. 3: Add Staff Restroom Base Bid Items: No Work. Alternate Bid Items: ADD the amount to add to the Base Bid to add one staff restroom.
012300 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
4. Alternate No. 4: Main Office Remodeling Base Bid Items: No Work. Alternate Bid Items: ADD the amount to add to the Base Bid to remodel the Main Office.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used) END OF SECTION
012300 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
ALTERNATES
S:\11\0123\frontend\012300CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 013113 - PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Administration of Sub-Contractors, and Coordination With Other Contractors and Owner. Supervisory Requirements Necessary for Project Coordination. 1. Project Coordination. 2. Openings, Blocking, Backing and Grounds. 3. Request for Information. C. Project Meetings. 1. Pre-Construction Conference. 2. Coordination Meetings. 3. Progress Meetings. 4. Pre-Installation Conferences. D. Owner Installed Products. E. Contractor’s Daily Log.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 007200- General Conditions: General Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 007313 Conditions.
-
Supplementary General
C. Section 011100 - Summary of Work. D. Section 017300 - Execution Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. E. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents. 1.3
PROJECT COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction operations included in various sections of these specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection and operation. B. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures
PROJECT COORDINATION
S:\11\0123\frontend\013113CGA.doc
with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Installation facilities.
and
removal
of
temporary
3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Progress meetings. 5. Project closeout activities. C. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water and materials. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated in, the Work. Refer to other sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner’s property. D. Verify that utility requirements of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. E. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. F. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction occurring in finished areas, except as otherwise indicated. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. G. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate Contractors where coordination of their Work is required.
013113 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
H. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion.
conferences for portions of the work that will significantly impact the design should be specified in the applicable specification sections, in addition to the general requirements described in Division 1. Roofing pre-application conferences, for example, bring numerous trades together to help ensure a project’s success.
I. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 1.4
E. Contractor-prepared pre-construction photos of condition of interior finishes and elements exposed to view of the building in areas affected by the Work and access by the Contractor. Submit digital copies prior to commencement of the Work.
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Coordination Drawings: Submit coordination drawings where close and careful coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated off-site by separate entities, and where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components.
1.5
A. Contractor shall be responsible for providing openings, blocking, backing and grounds in all walls and above ceilings necessary for the installation of all contracted Work.
1. Show the interrelationship of components shown on separate shop drawings.
B. Make suitable preparations for the installation of contracted work including all piping, conduit, hangers, inserts, anchors, grounds and supports that are to be embedded in concrete, masonry, floors, precast concrete, partitions or structural members, or that are to pass through or be attached thereto. Receive and install proper sleeves, boxes, receptacles or chases for all openings or recesses to receive work occurring in or passing through any such members, all of which shall be located accurately and secured firmly in place before any such masonry has been erected, concrete poured or walls/ceilings enclosed.
2. Indicate required installation sequences. 3. Comply with requirements Section “Submittals”.
contained
in
4. Refer to Divisions 21-23 for “Basic Mechanical Requirements”, and Divisions 2529 for “Basic Electrical Requirements” for specific coordination Drawing requirements for mechanical and electrical installations. C. Staff Names: Within fifteen (15) days of Notice to Proceed, submit a list of the Contractor’s principal staff assignments, including the Superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the site; identify individuals, their duties and responsibilities. D. Basic Coordination Schedules: 1. Submit project schedules showing the relationship of the various contractors and subcontractors in a chronological sequence. Regular updating and reporting on the project schedule will indicate the level of coordination that the Prime Contractor has achieved at critical stages in the Work. 2. Submit coordination meeting minutes which will be held on a regular basis, the frequency of which should be determined by the Contractor, and as required for successful coordination. 3. Submit schedules of pre-application conferences for portions of work that require special coordination efforts. Pre-application
013113 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
OPENINGS, BLOCKING, BACKING AND GROUNDS
1.6
REQUEST FOR INFORMATION A. Request for Information (RFI) are encouraged as a documented means of communication between Contractor and Architect. Plan, schedule, coordinate and sequence Work so RFI, if necessary, may be submitted to the in a timely manner so as not to delay progress of the Work. Submission of and responses to RFI, with copies to Owner, shall be transmitted via "FACSIMILE" equipment. B. Limit RFI to one specific topic, question, or issue, and if at all possible, limited to one or two sentences. Submit RFI on a standard form on the Contractor's letterhead, sequentially. RFI must be submitted through the Contractor. Include the following on each RFI: 1. RFI number, date of issue, Architect's project name and job number. Attachments, if any PROJECT COORDINATION
S:\11\0123\frontend\013113CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
(sketches, sub-contractor documentation, supporting information, etc.), must also show this information on each separate page.
Subcontractors, Architect.
4. Designation of responsible personnel. 5. Contract Documents, including distribution of required copies of original Documents and revisions.
4. Space for a hand-printed response (one-third to one-half of the page). 5. Space for respondent signature and date.
6. Processing of shop drawings, and other data submitted to the Architect for review.
C. Architect will have the same time period to respond to an RFI as "shop drawing review period".
7. Preparation of Record Documents. Contractor’s photo documentation of preconstruction existing conditions.
D. No damages for delay due to RFI response beyond allotted time will be allowed, unless Contractor can show that RFI was not foreseeable with proper planning, scheduling, coordination, and sequencing, and that the Architect's late response delayed timely purchase or delivery of equipment or materials, or limited construction personnel from proceeding with their task(s) within previously listed "Progress Schedule" activity period(s).
8. Use of premises, equipment deliveries and priorities. 9. Parking availability. 10. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. 11. Processing of bulletins, field decisions, RFI's, and Change Orders.
E. When the Architect is required to respond to an RFI that requires the Architect or Engineers to redesign or re-engineer an aspect of the Work due to a desire of the Contractor for an alternate means of construction, or to allow a deviation from the Work due to Contractor error, Contractor shall reimburse the Architect or Consultant. Time spent in obtaining approvals from regulatory agencies for the change shall also be reimbursed in like manner.
12. Rules and regulations governing performance of the Work. 13. Procedures for safety and first aid, security, quality control, housekeeping and related matters. 14. Procedures for processing pay applications. 15. Progress cleaning.
PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
16. Other significant items that may affect progress of the Work.
A. Architect shall schedule a pre-construction conference to be held within fifteen (15) days after the Owner has issued the Notice to Proceed. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
C. All participants in attendance shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work D. Tentative Agenda: 1. Organizational arrangement of Contractor's forces and personnel, and those of
PROJECT COORDINATION
S:\11\0123\frontend\013113CGA.doc
and
3. Construction schedule, including sequence of critical work.
3. Indication if the topic in question may have a possible impact on Contract Amount or Contract Time.
B. Attendance Required: Owner Representative, Architect and their Consultants, Contractor and its Superintendent, major Subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers and other concerned parties.
suppliers
2. Channels and procedures for communications.
2. Text on RFI.
1.7
materials
17. Scheduling Engineer. 1.8
activities
of
Geotechnical
COORDINATION MEETINGS A. Conduct project coordination meetings, in addition to specific meetings, at regularly scheduled times convenient for all parties involved. B. Request representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in coordination or planning for the construction activities involved. C. Meeting Agenda may include, but is not limited to; review of Construction Schedule; a determination of whether work is on schedule; means to expedite work to get back on schedule, if behind; schedule revision, if necessary; present and future needs of 013113 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
contractors; and other issues necessary to ensure Project is completed within the Contract Time. D. Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance, and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. 1.9
PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum weekly intervals. B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings, record minutes, and distribute copies within three (3) days to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. C. Attendance Required: Contractor's Superintendent, Major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner's Representative, Architect, Independent Laboratory representative and as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Tentative Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress and coordination requirements.
1.10
PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES
A. When required in individual specification Sections, convene a pre-installation conference at work site prior to commencing work of the Section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific Section. C. Notify Architect and affected parties a minimum of four (4) days in advance of meeting date, unless specified in individual specification sections. D. Prepare agenda, preside at conference, record minutes, and distribute copies within two (2) days after conference to participants, with two copies to Architect. Agenda may include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Contract Documents. 2. Options. 3. Related Change Orders. 4. Purchases. 5. Deliveries. 6. Submittals. 7. Review of mockups.
3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.
8. Possible conflicts.
4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress.
9. Conditions of installation.
5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Review of Change Orders and effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to the Project.
10. Preparation and installation procedures. 11. Coordination with related work and related trades. 12. Compatibility problems. 13. Time schedules. 14. Weather limitations. 15. Manufacturer's written recommendations. 16. Warranty requirements. 17. Compatibility of materials. 18. Acceptability of substrates. 19. Temporary facilities and controls. 20. Space and access limitations. 21. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 22. Testing and inspecting requirements. 23. Required performance results. 24. Protection of construction and personnel.
013113 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
PROJECT COORDINATION
S:\11\0123\frontend\013113CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
1.11
11-0123
OWNER INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A. Provide access to the Project site for Owner’s construction forces. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces. Include Owner's construction forces at pre-installation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. 1.12
CONTRACTOR’S DAILY LOG
A. Prepare and distribute to the Architect daily, a comprehensive daily log and maintain it during the entire Project. Take action to specifically alert the Architect to items which could result in claims. Include the following data: 1. Date. 2. Manpower by trade. 3. Weather. 4. List of Visitors. 5. Work being performed with locations. 6. Situations or circumstances which could delay work or give cause for claims for extension of time or added costs. 7. Other information as appropriate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
END OF SECTION
PROJECT COORDINATION
S:\11\0123\frontend\013113CGA.doc
013113 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
013113 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
PROJECT COORDINATION
S:\11\0123\frontend\013113CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 014100 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.4
A. Familiarity with Pertinent Codes and Standards: Verify that requirements of the specifically named codes and standards as well as requirements mandated by law, ordinance and authority. Verify that the items procured and installed in this Work meet or exceed the specified requirements.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to this Section.
B. Rejection or Non-Complying Items: The Architect reserves the right to reject items incorporated into the Work which fail to meet such minimum requirements.
B. Throughout the Contract Documents, reference is made to codes and standards which establish qualities and types of workmanship and materials, and methods for testing and reporting on the pertinent characteristics. C. Provide materials and workmanship which meet or exceed the specifically named code or standard.
1.5
B. Contractors shall conform to Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Requirements for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Disabled People. C. Asbestos Abatement: Prior to beginning building demolition work, including demolition work related to remodeling, it shall be the Contractors responsibility to determine all jurisdiction requirements for inspection for, proper remove procedures and disposal of Asbestos and materials containing asbestos. Submit copy of applicable requirements for asbestos removal and handling to Owner for Owner’s review.
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Specific naming of codes or standards occurs on the Drawings and in other Sections of these Specifications. Comply with laws, ordinances, and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Proof of compliance shall be signed approval by the respective authorities having jurisdiction.
1.3
1. Comply with requirements inspection and handling.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 007200- General Conditions: General Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 007313 Conditions.
-
Supplementary General
C. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submission of manufacturers' instructions and certificates. D. Section 014520 - Roofing Inspection Services. E. Section 014523 - Testing and Inspection Services. F. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. G. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. H. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS S:\11\0123\frontend\014100CGA.doc
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Contractors shall conform to procedures applicable when discovering hazardous or contaminating materials as outlined under provisions of Section 013500.
D. Deliver to the Architect required proof that the materials or workmanship, or both, meet or exceed the requirements of the specifically named code or standard. Such proof shall be in the form requested by the Architect and will generally be required to be copies of the certified report of tests conducted by a testing agency acceptable for that purpose to the Architect. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6
for
asbestos
APPLICABLE CODES A. Work of the Project shall conform to the following Codes, copies of which shall be maintained at the job site by the Contractor throughout the duration of the Work: 1. Minnesota State Building Code; Standards and Regulations. 2. Life Safety Code, Latest Edition. 3. National Electrical Code, Latest Edition. 4. All other applicable codes and regulations attributable to fire and life safety conditions. 5. Local ordinances and regulations affecting Work of this project.
014100 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
1.7
Akin Road Elementary School
APPLICABLE REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Standards referenced in the Specifications are usually referred to by the abbreviation of the organization's name and the designation of the document (e.g., ASTM A 36). Documents in common use may be referred to by their own designation (e.g., the National Electrical Code is published by the National Fire Protection Association as NFPA-70 but is referred to as NEC and is part of a series of documents or standards referred to as the National Fire Code). B. References are to the latest issue of the publication available on the date of issue of the Project Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
END OF SECTION
014100 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
S:\11\0123\frontend\014100CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to this Section. B. References; Including Lists of Reference Standards Cited in the Contract Documents, The Organizations Whose Standards are Cited, or Both. 1. Reference Standards. 2. Definitions. 3. Industry Standards. 4. Jurisdictional Agencies.
1.2
REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Where a reference in the Contract Documents to a Federal Specification, American National Standards Institute Standard, American Society of Testing Materials Standard or other standard does not include the edition or date of the standard, the edition of the standard current as of the date of this Project Manual with amendments shall apply. B. Where a reference in the Contract Documents to any industry, trade, organization, governing or legal standard does not include the edition or date of the standard, the edition, including amendments, current as of the date of the Project Manual shall apply. C. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current as of the date of Contract Documents. D. Obtain copies of reference standards when required by Contract Documents. E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. F. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.
1.3
DEFINITIONS A. The Definitions of this Section shall apply throughout the Contract Documents. B. : (Colon): Means the same as “shall be.”
REFERENCES
S:\11\0123\frontend\014200CGA.doc
C. Approved: When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. D. Directed: A command or instruction by the Architect. Terms such as “directed”, “requested”, “authorized”, “selected”, “required”, and “permitted” mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar phrases. E. Furnish: The term “furnish” means supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. F. Herein: The term “Herein” shall refer to the contents of the Construction Documents including, but not limited to, any or all of the parts of Specification sections, or the contents within any or all of the parts and sections of Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary Conditions) and Division One - General Requirements. G. Indicated: The term “indicated” refers to graphic representations, notes or schedules on the Drawings, or other Paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as “shown”, “noted”, “scheduled”, and “specified” are used to help the reader locate the reference. There is no limitation on location. H. Install: The term “install” describes operations at the Project site including the actual unloading, proper storage, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. I. Installer: An Installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform. J. Project Site: Project site is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of the Project site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the
014200 - 1 of 11
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
description of the land on which the Project is to be built.
Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
K. Provide: The term provide means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated.
L. Regulations: The term “regulations” includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.
C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified and where the standards may establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, refer requirements that are different but apparently equal and other uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.
M. Trades: Using terms such as carpentry is not intended to imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as carpenter. It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name.
D. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.
N. Testing Agencies: A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests. O. Workmanship: The quality of work in manufacturing, assembly, fabrication of a product or materials either in the factory, on the job site or at a separate location. P. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name of a particular manufacturer or vendor, and it is accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal", the specific item mentioned shall be understood as establishing type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, including appearance and other characteristics identified in the specification sections are salient features against which the Architect will evaluate the equivalents of any proposed substitutions. Where ever the specified products are viewable in the finished work, the aesthetic qualities of the product are salient features of such products and the Architect will be the sole judge in determining whether to approve the proposed substitute product based on salient features, including the proposed products aesthetic equivalents. 1.4
E. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source. F. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. The following acronyms or abbreviations, as referenced in Contract Documents, are defined to mean the associated names. Names and addresses are subject to change and are believed, but not ensured, to be accurate and up to date as of the date of Contract Documents. 1.5
GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS
STANDARDS
AND
INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract
014200 - 2 of 11
Printed on 1/16/2013
ADAAG
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) www.access-board.gov (800) 872-2253/ (202) 272-5434
REFERENCES
S:\11\0123\frontend\014200CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr (888) 293-6498/ (202) 512-1530
ABAA
Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888 www.airbarrier.org
FS
Federal Specification Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil (215) 697-6257 Available from General Services Administration www.gsa.gov (202) 619-8925 Available from National Institute of Building Sciences www.nibs.org (202) 289-7800 Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil
ABMA
American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.abma-dc.org
ACI
American Concrete Institute/ACI International www.aci-int.org (248) 848-3700
ACIL
American Council of Independent Laboratories www.acil.org (202) 887-5872
ACPA
American Concrete Pipe Association www.concrete-pipe.org (214) 506-7216
ADC
Air Diffusion Council www.flexibleduct.org (312) 201-0101
ADSC
International Association of Foundation Drilling www.adsc-iafd.com (214) 681-5994
AEIC
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. www.aeic.org (205) 257-2530
AF & PA
American Forest & Paper Association www.afandpa.org (800) 878-8878
AGA
American Gas Association (202) 8247000 www.aga.org
AGC
Associated General Contractors of America (The) www.agc.org (703) 548-3118
AHA
American Hardboard Association www.hardboard.org (847) 934-8800
AHAM
Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers www.aham.org (202) 872-5955
AI
Asphalt Institute www.asphaltinstitute.org (859) 288-4960
AIA
American Institute of Architects (The)
MILSPEC
Military Specification and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point (above)
UFAS
Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 www.access-board.gov
1.6
ORGANIZATIONS LISTED BY NAME AA
Aluminum Association, Inc. www.aluminum.org (202) 862-5100
AAADM
American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers www.aaadm.com (216) 241-7333
AABC
Associated Air Balance Council www.aabchq.com (202) 737-0202
AAMA
American Architectural Manufacturers Association www.aamanet.org (847) 303-5664
AASHTO
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials www.aashto.org (202) 624-5800
AATCC
American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) www.aatcc.org (919) 549-8141
REFERENCES
S:\11\0123\frontend\014200CGA.doc
014200 - 3 of 11
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
www.aia.org (800) 242-3837/ (202) 626-7300 AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction www.aisc.org (800) 644-2400/ (312) 670-2400
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute www.steel.org (202) 452-7100
AITC
American Institute of Timber Construction www.aitc-glulam.org (303) 792-9559
ALCA
ALI
Associated Landscape Contractors of America www.alca.org (800) 395-2522/ (703) 736-9666 Associated Laboratories, Inc. www.associatedlabs.org (214) 565-0593
ALSC
American Lumber Standard Committee www.alsc.org (301) 972-1700
AMCA
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. www.amca.org (847) 394-0150
ANLA
American Nursery & Landscape Association (Formerly: AAN American Association of Nurserymen) www.anla.org (202) 789-2900
ANSI
American National Standards Institute www.ansi.org (202) 293-8020
AOSA
Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (505) 522-1437 www.aosaseed.com
APA
APA - The Engineered Wood Association www.apawood.org (253) 565-6600
APA
Architectural Precast Association www.archprecast.org (941) 454-6989
API
American Petroleum Institute www.api.org (202)682-8000
ARI 014200 - 4 of 11
Printed on 1/16/2013
Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration
Institute www.ari.org (703) 524-8800 ARMA
Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org
ARRA
Asphalt Recycling and Reclaiming Association www.arra.org (410) 267-0023
ASC
Adhesive and Sealant Council www.ascouncil.org (301) 986-9700
ASCA
Architectural Spray Coaters Association www.ascassoc.com (609) 848-6120
ASCE
American Society of Civil Engineers www.asce.org (800) 548-2723/ (703) 295-6300
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org (800) 527-4723/ (404) 636-8400
ASME
ASME International (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) www.asme.org (800) 843-2763/ (212) 591-7722
ASSE
American Society of Sanitary Engineering www.asse-plumbing.org (440) 835-3040
ASTM
ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org (610) 832-9585
AWCI
AWCI International (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International) www.awci.org (703) 534-8300
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute www.awinet.org (571) 323-3636/ (571) 323-3630
AWPA
American Wood-Preservers' Association www.awpa.com (205) 733-4077 REFERENCES
S:\11\0123\frontend\014200CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
CGSB
Canadian General Standards Board www.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb (819) 956-0425
CIMA
Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association www.cellulose.org (888) 881-2462/ (937) 222-2462
CISCA
Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association www.cisca.org (630) 584-1919
CISPI
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute www.cispi.org (423) 892-0137
CLFMI
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute www.chainlinkinfo.org (301) 596-2583
CPA
Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 www.pbmdf.com
CPPA
Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association www.cppa-info.org (800) 510-2772/ (202) 462-9607
CRI
Carpet & Rug Institute www.carpet-rug.com (800) 882-8846/ (706) 278-3176
CRSI
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute www.crsi.org (847) 517-1200
CSA
Copper Development Association Inc. www.copper.org (800) 232-3282/ (212) 251-7200
CSA International (Formerly: IAS International Approval Services) www.csa-international.org (800) 463-6727/ (416) 747-4000
CSI
Cast Stone Institute (770) 972-3011 www.caststone.org
Canadian Electricity Association www.canelect.ca (613) 230-9263
CSI
Construction Specifications Institute www.csinet.org (800) 689-2900/ (703) 684-0300
CSSB
Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau www.cedarbureau.org (604) 820-7700
CTI
Cooling Technology Institute (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org (281) 583-4087
AWS
American Welding Society www.aws.org (800) 443-9353/ (305) 443-9353
AWWA
American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711
BHMA
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association www.buildershardware.com (212) 297-2122 Brick Industry Association www.bia.org (703) 620-0010
BIA
BICSI
BICSI (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991
BIFMA
BIFMA International (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) www.bifma.com (616) 285-3963
BISSC
CCC
CCFSS
CDA
CEA
CFFA
CGA
REFERENCES
11-0123
Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 www.bissc.org
Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312 www.carpetcushion.org Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures www.ccfssonline.org (573) 341-4471
Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com (216) 241-7333 Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com
S:\11\0123\frontend\014200CGA.doc
014200 - 5 of 11
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
DASMA
Akin Road Elementary School
Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association International www.dasma.com (703) 241-7333
(785) 271-0208 GS
Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org
DHI
Door and Hardware Institute www.dhi.org (703) 222-2010
GSI
Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 www.geosynthetic-institute.org
EIA
Electronic Industries Alliance www.eia.org (703) 907-7500
HI
Hydraulic Institute www.pumps.org (888) 786-7744/ (973) 267-9700
EIMA
EIFS Industry Members Association www.eifsfacts.com (800) 294-3462/ (770) 968-7945
HI
Hydronics Institute www.gamanet.org (908) 464-8200
HMMA
Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM)
HPVA
Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association www.hpva.org (703) 435-2900
HPW
H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. www.hpwhite.com (410) 838-6550
EJCDC
Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000 http://content.asce.org/ejcdc/
EJMA
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. www.ejma.org (914) 332-0040
ESD
ESD Association (315) 339-6937 www.esda.org ICC
FCI
Fluid Controls Institute www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org (216) 241-7333
International Code Council www.iccsafe.org (703) 931-4533
ICEA
FM Global (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) www.fmglobal.com (401) 275-3000
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. www.icea.net (770) 830-0369
ICRI
International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. www.icri.org (847) 827-0830
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission www.iec.ch
FMG
FRSA
Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. (407) 671-3772 www.floridaroof.com
FSA
Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. www.ieee.org (212) 419-7900
FSC
Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 www.fsc.org
IESNA
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America www.iesna.org (212) 248-5000
GA
Gypsum Association www.gypsum.org (202) 289-5440
IGCC
Insulating Glass Certification Council www.igcc.org (315) 646-2234
GANA
Glass Association of North America (Formerly: FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association) www.glasswebsite.com
IGMA
Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance www.igmaonline.org (613) 233-1510
014200 - 6 of 11
Printed on 1/16/2013
REFERENCES
S:\11\0123\frontend\014200CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
ILI
Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. www.iliai.com (812) 275-4426
ISO
International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org
11-0123
MIA
Marble Institute of America www.marble-institute.com (614) 228-6194
MPI
Master Painters Institute www.paintinfo.com (888) 674-8937
MSS
Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com (703) 281-6613
ISSFA
International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (702) 567-8150
NAA
National Arborist Association www.natlarb.com (800) 733-2622/ (603) 673-3311
I3A
International Imaging Industry Association (Formerly: PIMA Photographic & Imaging Manufacturers Association) www.i3a.org (914) 698-7603
NAAMM
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers www.naamm.org (312) 332-0405
NACE
NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) www.nace.org (281) 228-6200
NADCA
National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com
NAIMA
North American Insulation Manufacturers Association www.naima.org (703) 684-0084
NAMI
National Accreditation and Management Institute, Inc. www.namicertification.com (304) 258-5100
NASFM
National Association for Retail Environments www.nasfm.org (954) 893-7300
ITS
Intertek Testing Services www.intertek.com (800) 345-3851/ (607) 753-6711
KCMA
Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association www.kcma.org (703) 264-1690
LMA
Laminating Materials Association (Formerly: ALA - American Laminators Association) www.lma.org (201) 664-2700
LPI
Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864/(804) 314-8955 www.lightning.org
MBMA
Metal Building Manufacturers Association www.mbma.com (216) 241-7333
MFMA
Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association www.maplefloor.org (847) 480-9138
NBGQA
National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. www.nbgqa.com (800) 557-2848
MFMA
Metal Framing Manufacturers Association www.metalframingmfg.org (312) 644-6610
NCCA
National Coil Coating Association www.coilcoating.org
NCMA
National Concrete Masonry Association www.ncma.org (703) 713-1900
NCPI
National Clay Pipe Institute www.ncpi.org (414) 248-9094
MHIA
REFERENCES
Material Handling Industry of America www.mhia.org (800) 345-1815/ (704) 676-1190
S:\11\0123\frontend\014200CGA.doc
014200 - 7 of 11
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
www.nofma.org (901) 526-5016 NCTA
NEBB
National Cable & Telecommunications Association www.ncta.com (202) 775-3550
NPCA
National Paint and Coatings Association www.paint.org (202) 462-6272
National Environmental Balancing Bureau www.nebb.org (301) 977-3698
NPCA
National Precast Concrete Association www.precast.org (317) 571-9500
NRCA
National Roofing Contractors Association www.nrca.net (800) 323-9545/ (847) 299-9070
NRMCA
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association www.nrmca.org (888) 846-7622/ (301) 587-1400
NSF
NSF International (National Sanitation Foundation International) www.nsf.org (800) 673-6275/ (734) 769-8010
NSPI
National Spa and Pool Association www.nspi.org (703) 838-0083
NSSGA
National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (Formerly: NSA - National Stone Association) www.nssga.org (800) 342-1415/ (703) 525-8788
NTMA
National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc. www.ntma.com (800) 323-9736/ (703) 779-1022
NUCA
National Utility Contractors Association www.nuca.com (703) 358-9300
OPL
Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (Acquired by ITS - Intertek) (800) 966-5253/ (210) 635-8100 www.opl.com
NECA
National Electrical Contractors Association www.necanet.org (301) 657-3110
NEII
National Elevator Industry, Inc. www.neii.org (201) 944-3211
NELMA
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association www.nelma.org (207) 829-6901
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association www.nema.org (703) 841-3200
NETA
International Electrical Testing Association www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association www.nfpa.org (800) 344-3555/ (617) 770-3000
NFRC
National Fenestration Rating Council www.nfrc.org (301) 589-6372
NGA
National Glass Association www.glass.org (703) 442-4890
NHLA
National Hardwood Lumber Association www.natlhardwood.org (800) 933-0318/(901) 377-1818
NIBS
National Institute of Building Science www.nibs.org (202) 289-7800
NLA
National Lime Association www.lime.org (703) 243-5463
PCA
Portland Cement Assoc. www.portcement.org (847) 966-6200
NLGA
National Lumber Grades Authority www.nlga.org (604) 524-2393
PCI
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute www.pci.org (312) 786-0300
NOFMA
National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association
PDCA
Painting and Decorating Contractors of America
014200 - 8 of 11
Printed on 1/16/2013
REFERENCES
S:\11\0123\frontend\014200CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
www.pdca.com (800) 332-7322/ (703) 359-0826 PDI
Plumbing & Drainage Institute www.pdionline.org (800) 589-8956/ (508) 230-3516
11-0123
SIGMA
Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association www.sigmaonline.org (312) 664-6610
SJI
Steel Joist Institute www.steeljoist.org (843) 626-1995 Screen Manufacturers Association www.smainfo.org (561) 533-0991
PGI
PVC Geomembrane Institute www.pgi-tp.cee.uiuc.edu (217) 333-3929
SMA
PLANET
Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522 (Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of America) (703) 736-9666 www.landcarenetwork.org
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association www.smacna.org (703) 803-2980
PTI
RCSC
RFCI
RIS
SMPTE
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 www.smpte.org
SPFA
Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (Formerly: SPI/SPFD) www.sprayfoam.org (800) 523-6154
SPIB
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) www.spib.org (850) 434-2611
SPRI
Single Ply Roofing Institute www.spri.org (781) 444-0242
Resilient Floor Covering Institute www.rfci.com
SSINA
Redwood Inspection Service www.calredwood.org (888) 225-7339/ (415) 382-0662
Specialty Steel Industry of North America www.ssina.com (800) 982-0355/ (202) 342-8630
SSMA
Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (Formerly: ML/SFA - Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association) www.ssma.com (312) 456-5590
SSPC
SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings www.sspc.org (877) 281-7772/ (412) 281-2331
STI
Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com
SWI
Steel Window Institute www.steelwindows.com (216) 241-7333
Safety Glazing Certification Council www.sgcc.org (315) 646-2234
SWRI
Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075 www.siaonline.org
Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute www.swrionline.org (816) 472-7974
TCNA
Tile Council of North America, Inc. www.tileusa.com (864) 646-8453
Post Tensioning Institute www.post-tensioning.org (602) 870-7540 Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org (800) 644-2400/ (312) 670-2400
SAE
SAE International www.sae.org (724) 776-4841
SDI
Steel Deck Institute www.sdi.org (847) 462-1930
SDI
Steel Door Institute www.steeldoor.org (440) 899-0010
SEFA
SGCC
SIA
REFERENCES
Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association www.sefalabfurn.com (516) 294-5424
S:\11\0123\frontend\014200CGA.doc
014200 - 9 of 11
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
TIA/EIA
TMS
Akin Road Elementary School
www.wdma.com (800) 223-2301/ (847) 299-5200
Telecommunications Industry Association/ Electronic Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org (703) 907-7700 The Masonry Society www.masonrysociety.org (303) 939-9700
WH
Intertek Testing Services Warnock Hersey Listing Services www.intertek-etlsemko.com (916) 678-7820
WI
Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC Woodwork Institute of California) (916) 372-9943 www.wicnet.org
WIC
Woodwork Institute of California www.wicnet.org (916) 372-9943
WMMPA
Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association www.wmmpa.com (800) 550-7889/ (530) 661-9591
TPI
Truss Plate Institute (608) 833-5900 www.tpinst.org
TPI
Turfgrass Producers International www.turfgrasssod.org (800) 405-8873/ (847) 705-9898
TRI
Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 (Formerly: RTI - Roof Tile Institute) www.tileroofing.org
UL
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. www.ul.com (800) 704-4050/ (847) 272-8800
WSRCA
Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441
UNI
Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association www.uni-bell.org (972) 243-3902
WWPA
Western Wood Products Association www.wwpa.org (503) 224-3930
USGBC
U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422 www.usgbc.org
USITT
United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. www.culturenet.ca/usitt (800) 938-7488/ (315) 463-6463
WASTEC
Waste Equipment Technology Association www.wastec.org (800) 424-2869/ (202) 244-4700
WCLIB
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau www.wclib.org (800) 283-1486/ (503) 639-0651
WCSC
WDMA
014200 - 10 of 11
Printed on 1/16/2013
Window Covering Safety Council (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Assoc.) www.windowcoverings.org (800) 506-4636/ (212) 661-4261 Window & Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association)
1.7
JURISDICTIONAL AGENCIES A. Federal Government Agencies: Names and titles of federal government standard- or Specificationproducing agencies are often abbreviated. The following acronyms or abbreviations referenced in the Contract Documents indicate names of standard- or Specification-producing agencies of the federal government. Names and addresses are subject to change but are believed to be, but are not assured to be, accurate and up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE
Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil
CPSC
Consumer Product Safety Commission www.cpsc.gov (800) 638-2772/ (301) 504-0990
DOC
Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.commerce.gov
DOE
Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 REFERENCES
S:\11\0123\frontend\014200CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
www.energy.gov EPA
Environmental Protection Agency www.epa.gov (202) 260-2090
FCC
Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov
GSA
General Services Administration www.gsa.gov (202) 708-5082
HUD
Department of Housing and Urban Development www.hud.gov (202) 708-1112
NIST
National Institute of Standards and Technology www.nist.gov (301) 975-6478
OSHA
Occupational Safety & Health Administration www.osha.gov (800) 321-6742 /(202) 693-1999
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
END OF SECTION 014200
REFERENCES
S:\11\0123\frontend\014200CGA.doc
014200 - 11 of 11 Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 014300 - QUALITY ASSURANCE complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.4
A. When requested by the Owner or Architect or indicated in specification section, the qualifying party shall provide written information, including, but not limited to, past project lists, affidavits, certification or other evidence to verify the party’s qualifications.
A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Quality Assurance; Includes Prerequisites and Procedures to Assure the Quality of Construction, Field Observations and Tests Performed by Manufacturer’s Representatives During Installation.
1.5
2. Installer Qualifications. 3. Professional Engineer Qualifications 1.6
6. Manufacturer’s Certificates. 7. Manufacturer’s Field Services. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Specific naming of codes or standards occurs on the Drawings and in other Sections of these Specifications. Comply with laws, ordinances, and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Proof of compliance shall be signed approval by the respective authorities having jurisdiction.
1.7
1.3
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
S:\11\0123\frontend\014300CGA.doc
ENGINEER
MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
DEFINITIONS A. Experienced: Except as otherwise defined in individual specification sections, "experienced" means an entity having successfully completed a minimum of five (5) previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having
PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATIONS
A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
B. Familiarity with Pertinent Codes and Standards: Verify that requirements of the specifically named codes and standards as well as requirements mandated by law, ordinance and authority. Verify that the items procured and installed in this Work meet or exceed the specified requirements. C. Rejection or Non-Complying Items: The Architect reserves the right to reject items incorporated into the Work which fail to meet such minimum requirements.
INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful inservice performance.
5. Manufacturer’s Instructions.
1.2
FABRICATOR QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful inservice performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
1. Fabricator Qualifications.
4. Manufacturer Qualifications.
QUALIFICATIONS, GENERALLY
1.9
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, adjusting and finishing in quantities specified for Product Data. 014300 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. 1.10
MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATES
A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' certificate to Architect for review in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference date, affidavits and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect. 1.11
MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES
A. Submit qualifications of manufacturer’s observer to Architect thirty (30) days in advance of required observations. Observer subject to approval of Architect. B. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. C. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. D. Submit report in duplicate within thirty (30) days of observation to Architect for review.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
END OF SECTION
014300 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
QUALITY ASSURANCE
S:\11\0123\frontend\014300CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 014400 - EXISTING UTILITIES known, Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner thereof and the Architect/Engineer.
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
D. Do not commence construction operations adjacent to utility property until arrangements satisfactory to the utility owner have been made for the protection of said property and continuation of service. Contractor shall assume responsibility and pay for cost for which the Owner may be liable.
A. Conditions of the Contract (General,. Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Existing Utilities:
E. Should any of the Contractor's equipment come in contact with or damage utility property in any way, even though there may be no apparent evidence of breakage or harm, promptly notify the proper authorities and cooperate with them in determining damage and restoring interrupted services as may be needed. Where contact is made with a utility, operations shall be suspended immediately, and the area vacated, until it has been determined by the utility owner that it is safe to resume operations.
1. Utility Location. 2. Notification of Utility. 3. Compensation. 4. Care and Responsibility. 1.2
UTILITY LOCATION A. Prior to beginning any excavation, contact Gopher State One (1-800-252-1166) and utility companies for the location of existing underground services.
F. The Contractor shall locate all private utilities (such as electric lines, irrigation, conduits, fiber optic lines, cable lines, telephone lines, water pipes, sewers and tile lines). The Contractor will be required to confirm all utilities which must be removed or relocated to complete the work. No additional compensation will be paid to the Contractor for utilities shown on the drawings or which otherwise may have been anticipated prior to the construction. The Contractor may request, [through the Construction Manager,] the assistance of Owner personal in locating existing private lines.
B. Private Utility Location: Prior to the start of construction, the Contractor shall employ a Utility Location Contractor to identify any private utilities on the site that a call to Gopher State One may not have identified. 1.3
NOTIFICATION OF UTILITY A. Notify public utility companies and municipalities as to which of their properties (such as pole lines, conduits, gas pipes, water pipes, sewers, fiber optics lines, TV lines, cable lines, telephone lines and tile lines) must be removed or relocated to complete the Work of this Contract. This notice shall note the locations where the properties could be relocated. However, no warranty is made or implied that the utility owners will remove or relocate their properties prior to commencement of construction operations or in sufficient time or manner to prevent interference with the Contractor's operations. B. Notify the Owner of proposed construction activities and request information on existing utilities that may be present on the site that are not shown on the plans and/or identified by public utility companies and municipalities. C. Verify the amount of time required to give sufficient notice to the Owner of all known utilities. The Contractor shall give such notice before starting any operations affecting those properties. If during the course of operations, the Contractor discovers utility property whose existence was not
EXISTING UTILITIES
S:\11\0123\frontend\014400CGA.doc
1.4
COMPENSATION A. It is understood and agreed that the Bidder has considered in his bid the relative locations of existing utilities, as shown on the Plans and that no additional compensation will be allowed for any delays, inconveniences or damages sustained due to interference which may result from those utilities or the operations of moving them. B. If the Contractor is required to perform any special work or use special construction methods in prosecuting work adjacent to underground utility property whose existence was not indicated in the Contract, equitable compensation will be made for the additional costs incurred. C. The Contractor shall contact the Owner and Architect/Engineer prior to performing the special work or special construction methods. Any special work or special construction methods performed
014400 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
without the approval by the Owner shall not be compensated. 1.5
CARE AND RESPONSIBILITY A. Employ special equipment or construction methods (including hand labor, if necessary) to accomplish the work as planned adjacent to utility properties without damage thereto. At no time shall the Contractor interfere with any persons engaged in protecting or moving utility property or in the operation of the utility. B. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for reimbursing the utility owners for any damages caused to utility properties whose existence and approximate locations were made known to him before the damage was done. Nothing in this Section shall make the Contractor liable for damage to utility property located below the ground surface, in the absence of negligence, if the owner of the utility, after reasonable notice from the Contractor, fails to advise the Contractor of its location and approximate depth below the ground surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (not used)
END OF SECTION
014400 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
EXISTING UTILITIES
S:\11\0123\frontend\014400CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 014500 - QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.4
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions and workmanship to produce Work of specified quality.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to this Section.
B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
B. Quality Control; Includes Procedures to Measure and Report the Quality and Performance of Construction.
C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.
1. Quality Assurance and Control of Installation.
D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work, except when more stringent tolerances, codes or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.
2. Field Samples. 3. Mock-Up Requirements. 1.2
E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Document 007200- General Conditions: General Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 007313 Conditions.
-
F. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.
Supplementary General
C. Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures: Submission of manufacturers' instructions and certificates.
1.5
FIELD SAMPLES A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications Sections for review by the Architect.
D. Section 016000 – Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.
B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work.
E. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures.
C. Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after field sample has been accepted by Architect.
F. Individual Specification Sections - Inspection and testing required and standards for testing. 1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
REFERENCES A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents. B. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents. C. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification for Architect before proceeding. D. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.
1.6
MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS A. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work unless indicated otherwise in the relevant specification section: 1. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals and finishes in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect [seven] [_____] days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.
QUALITY CONTROL
S:\11\0123\frontend\014500CGA.doc
014500 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Where mock-up is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after mockup has been accepted by Architect. B. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in the relevant specification section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
END OF SECTION
014500 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
QUALITY CONTROL
S:\11\0123\frontend\014500CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 014523 - TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.3
A. ASTM C1077-00 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to this Section.
B. ASTM C1093-95 - Standard Practice for the Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry.
B. Administrative and Procedural Requirements for Quality Control Testing and Inspection Services.
C. ASTM D3740-01 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction.
C. Conventional Testing and Inspection Services. D. Special Structural Testing and Inspection.
D. ASTM E329-00b - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction.
E. Testing Laboratory Services. 1. Selection and Payment.
E. ASTM E543-99 - Standard Practice for Evaluating Agencies that Perform Nondestructive Testing.
2. Laboratory Responsibilities. 3. Laboratory Reports.
F. ASTM E548-94e1 - Standard Guide for General Criteria Used for Evaluating Laboratory Competence.
4. Limits on Testing Laboratory Authority. 5. Contractor’s Responsibilities. F. Conventional Inspections and Testing. 1. Testing Schedule Requirements. 2. Schedule of Conventional Inspections and Testing. G. Special Structural Testing and Inspection. 1. Special Structural Testing and Inspection Schedule. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 003100 - Information Available to Bidders: Geo-technical data (Soil Borings). B. Document 007200- General Conditions: General Conditions (AIA Document A201). C. Document 007313 Conditions.
-
Supplementary General
D. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures. E. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures: Closeout requirements. F. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents: Requirements for testing reports. G. Individual Specification Sections: Inspection and testing required and standards for testing.
TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES S:\11\0123\frontend\014523CGA.doc
REFERENCES
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and inspection shall comply with the requirements of the International Building Code (IBC), 2006 Edition, as amended by the 2007 Minnesota State Building Code. B. Testing and inspection shall comply with requirements of ASTM E329 and ASTM D3740. C. Testing Laboratory: Must be authorized to operate in the State in which project is located, and must maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services. D. Testing and inspection services are intended to assist in determining probable compliance of the Work with requirements specified. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. E. If inspection of fabricators work is required, the Architect may require testing and inspection of the work at the plant, before shipment. The Architect reserves the right to reject materials not complying with the Contract Documents. F. Work shall be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect any defective work or materials shall in no way prevent later rejection if defective work or
014523 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
materials are discovered, nor shall it obligate Architect to accept such work. 1.5
DEFINITIONS A. Testing: Evaluation of systems, primarily requiring physical manipulation and analysis of materials in accordance with approved standards. B. Inspection: Evaluation of systems, primarily requiring observation and judgment. C. Conventional Testing and Inspection: Work herein described as those items not specifically required by the International Building Code (IBC), 2006 Edition, as amended by the 2007 Minnesota State Building Code but are considered essential to the proper performance of the building systems. D. Special Structural Testing and Inspection: Work herein described include items required by the International Building Code (IBC), 2006 Edition, as amended by the 2007 Minnesota State Building Code, and other items which in the professional judgment of the Structural Engineer are critical to the integrity of the building structure.
1.6
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. Selection and Payment: 1. Owner shall employ and pay for services of an Independent Testing Laboratory to perform specified inspection and testing. 2. Employment of testing laboratory shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 3. The Owner shall submit, prior to start of Work, Independent Testing Laboratory name, address, telephone number and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer. B. Laboratory Responsibilities: 1. Take field specimens and samples for testing according to provisions of paragraph 3.2 of this section and as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 3. Perform specified inspection, sampling and testing of Products in accordance with specified standards.
014523 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor in writing of observed irregularities or nonconformance of Work or Products. 6. Perform additional inspections required by Architect. 7. Attend pre-construction progress meetings.
and
tests
conferences
and
C. Laboratory Reports: 1. Testing agency and/or special inspectors shall submit a report in accordance with the Special Structural Testing and Inspection Schedule and shall conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether; (1) test specimens and observations comply with Contract Documents, and specifically state any deviations, (2) record types and locations of defects found in Work, and (3) record Work required and performed, to correct deficiencies. 2. Reports for conventional testing and inspection shall be submitted in a timely manner to the Architect, Structural Engineer, and Contractor. 3. After each inspection and test, promptly submit copies of laboratory report as follows: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification of product and Specifications Section. f. Location in the Project. g. Type of inspection or test. h. Date of test. i. Results of tests. j. Conformance with Contract Documents. 4. When requested by Architect, interpretation of test results.
provide
D. Limits on Testing Laboratory Authority: 1. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
S:\11\0123\frontend\014523CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
3. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor.
C. Submit a final signed report stating whether the Work was, to the best of their knowledge, in conformance with the approved plans, specifications and the applicable workmanship provisions of the code.
4. Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. E. Contractor’s Responsibilities:
D. Contractor shall cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mixes, equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested.
1. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Coordinate scheduling of required testing with testing laboratory and prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services according to provisions of Part 3 of this section and as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.
E. Schedule of Conventional Inspections and Tests: 1. Schedule of Tests: Contractor shall prepare a Testing Schedule in tabular form and include the following:
2. Coordinate Work such that all specified testing and inspections are accomplished.
a. Specification Section number and title.
3. Deliver as needed by the Testing Laboratory, materials and construction related documents necessary for the Testing Laboratory to complete testing.
b. Identification of test designation and type. c. Test frequency required. d. Estimated total number of tests by type required.
4. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturer's facilities.
e. Estimated time schedule or time span for tests.
5. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, storage and curing of test samples.
f. Entity responsible for performing tests if other than Owner’s Testing Agent. 2. Submit Testing Schedule under provisions of Section 013300.
6. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services.
3. Schedule of Conventional Inspections and Tests, includes, but is not limited to: a. Section 031510 – Post-Installed Anchors.
7. Upon completion of testing, sample taking, or inspection, the Contractor shall repair damaged work and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in the visual qualities of exposed surfaces, as judged solely by the Architect. 8. Protect work exposed by or for testing and/or inspection and protect repaired work. Repair and protection is the Contractor’s responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for testing and/or inspection. 1.7
CONVENTIONAL INSPECTION:
TESTING
AND
A. Provide conventional inspection and testing as required by the International Building Code, Section 109, and as scheduled below.
b. Section 051200 - Structural Steel Framing. c. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications. d. Section 075322 - Elastomeric Membrane Roofing - Fully Adhered e. Section 078400 - Firestopping. 1.8
SPECIAL STRUCTURAL TESTING AND INSPECTION: 1. Refer to Section 014533.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Independent Testing Agency shall indicate compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents.
TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
S:\11\0123\frontend\014523CGA.doc
014523 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
3.1
COORDINATION WITH TESTING LABORATORY AND INSPECTORS A. Inspectors and representatives of the testing laboratory firm shall have access to the Work. Contractor shall provide facilities for such access in order that the testing, inspection and the obtaining of samples may be done properly. B. Coordination: Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with Testing Agency the sequence of activities necessary to accommodate required testing and inspection with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. C. Deliver material specimens to the Owner's testing lab, which must by terms of the Contract be tested prior to inclusion in the Project, at least forty-five (45) days prior to scheduled delivery to the job site. D. Materials shipped by the Contractor from the source of supply prior to having satisfactorily passed such testing and inspection or prior to the receipt of notice from said representative that such testing and inspection will not be required shall not be incorporated in the job.
3.2
TAKING SPECIMENS
Akin Road Elementary School
specification. Monitor progress of testing to ensure that proper number and types of testing required are being accomplished. Provide copies of schedules documenting types and numbers of tests required with corresponding information showing types and numbers of actual tests conducted monthly after commencement of testing and within five (5) days of completion of testing under each section of the Work. 5. Submit Testing and Inspection schedule, prior to commencement of the Work, to the Owner, Architect/Engineer, Construction Manager, testing agencies, and other parties who’s Work may be affected by the Testing and Inspection Schedule. B. Adherence to Schedule: When the testing laboratory is ready to test according to the determined schedules, but is prevented from testing or taking specimens due to incompleteness of the work, extra charges for testing attributable to the delay may be back-charged to the Contractor and will be deducted by the Owner from the Contract Sum.
END OF SECTION
A. Field specimens and samples for testing, unless otherwise provided in these Contract Documents, shall be selected and taken by the testing laboratory or Inspector and not the Contractor. Sampling equipment and personnel will be provided by the testing laboratory. Deliveries of specimens and samples to the testing laboratory will be performed by the testing laboratory. 3.3
SCHEDULES FOR TESTING A. Establishing Schedule of Tests and Inspections: 1. By advance discussion with the testing laboratory selected by the Owner, determine the time required for the laboratory to perform its tests and to issue each of its findings. 2. Provide required time within the construction schedule. 3. Revising Schedule: When changes of construction schedule are necessary during construction, coordinate such changes of schedule with the testing laboratory as required. 4. Numbers of Testing: Determine with the Testing Laboratory the total number of each type of test required in accordance with
014523 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
S:\11\0123\frontend\014523CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School Renovation
do not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility to complete the work in accordance with the approved drawings and specifications.
SECTION 014533 STRUCTURAL TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
INTENT AND CONDITIONS
6. Testing agents and/or special inspectors may not waive or alter contract requirements, or approve or accept any portion of the work unless specifically authorized by the Architect or SER. They may not assume any duties of the Contractor, and they have no authority to stop or reject work.
A. Intent 1. Define and coordinate structural testing and special inspection services. 2. Provide a greater level of confidence that the specified work is constructed in compliance with the contract documents and the intent of applicable codes including Sections 106 and 1704 of the 2006 International Building Code (IBC) as adopted by the current Minnesota State Building Code. 3. Structural testing and special inspection services are intended to assist in determining probable compliance of the work with requirements specified. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the requirements of the contract documents. B. Conditions 1. If inspection of a fabricator's work is required, the Owner's representative may require testing and inspection of the work at the plant, before shipment. Owner and Architect reserve the right to reject material not complying with the Contract Documents. 2. Refer to individual technical specification sections for specific qualifications, inspections, tests, frequency and standards required. Testing and inspection shall be performed in accordance with the referenced standard for the specific material or procedure unless other criteria are specified. In the absence of a referenced standard, tests shall be performed in accordance with generally accepted industry standards. 3. Work shall be checked as it progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or materials shall not prevent later rejection if defective work or materials are discovered, nor shall it obligate Owner to accept such work. 4. Structural testing, special inspection, and periodic inspections by the Building Official do not preclude the normal field involvement and site observations by Architect or SER. 5. Structural testing, special inspection, and periodic inspections by the Building Official STRUCTURAL TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION
1.2
RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications apply to this section.
1.3
DEFINITIONS A. Testing: Evaluation of systems, primarily requiring physical manipulation and analysis of materials, in accordance with approved standards. B. Inspection: Evaluation of systems, primarily requiring observation and judgment. C. Structural Special Inspections: Structural special inspections include inspections of structural items required by the 2006 IBC Section 1704, as adopted by the 2007 Minnesota State Building Code, and other items, which in the professional judgment of the Structural Engineer of Record, are critical to the integrity of the building structure and are indicated to be performed under the requirements of this section. They do not include special inspections for non=structural items such as fireproofing, EIFS, and smoke control systems. D. Structural Testing: Structural testing includes those tests of structural items required by the 2006 IBC, as adopted by the 2007 Minnesota State Building Code, or its referenced standards, and other tests, which in the professional judgment of the Structural Engineer of Record, are critical to the integrity of the building structure and are indicated to be performed under the requirements of this section. E. Architect of Record: The prime consultant in charge of overall design and coordination of the project. F. Structural Engineer of Record (SER): The licensed professional engineer in responsible charge of the structural design for the project.
014533 $ 1 of 5 Printed on 01/15/2013
Akin Road Elementary School Renovation
G. Licensed Structural Engineer: A professional engineer with education and experience in the design of structures similar to this project licensed to practice in Minnesota.
4. Provide individuals performing tests and taking samples with appropriate certifications for work performed. B. Special Inspector: Either an appropriately certified inspector or a civil/structural engineer performing under the direct supervision of a licensed structural engineer (as defined earlier in this section) and acceptable to the SER and Building Official. Unique special inspector requirements, for specific materials and systems, are noted in related technical specification sections.
H. Testing Agency (TA): The properly qualified firm performing testing services. I. Special Inspector (SI): A properly qualified individual or firm performing special inspections. J. Building Official: The officer or his duly authorized representative charged with the administration and enforcement of the building code for the project. 1.4
REFERENCES A. ASTM C1077=02 – Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation. B. ASTM C1093=95 = Practice for the Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry. C. ASTM D3740=01 = Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. D. ASTM E329=02 = Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction. E. ASTM E543=02 = Practice for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing. F. International Building Code (IBC), 2006. G. Minnesota State Building Code 2007.
1.5
QUALIFICATIONS A. Testing Agency: An approved independent testing agency acceptable to the Owner, Architect, and SER and meeting the following: 1. Authorized to operate in the State in which the project is located and experienced with the requirements and testing methods specified in the Contract Documents. 2. Meet applicable requirements of references stated in paragraph 1.4. 3. Have available testing equipment that is calibrated, at reasonable intervals, by devices of accuracy traceable to either the National Bureau of Standards, or to accepted values of natural physical constants.
1.6
RESPONSIBILITIES A. Special Inspectors: 1. Inspect the work assigned for conformance with the building department approved plans, specifications, and applicable material and workmanship provisions of the code. Perform inspection in a timely manner to avoid delay of work. 2. Bring nonconforming items to the immediate attention of the contractor for correction. If not corrected within 24 hours or if inspector will not be on site the following day, bring to the attention of the SER by the end of the business day. If uncorrected after a reasonable period of time, bring to the attention of the Building Official, and to the Architect. Notify SER immediately if non=conforming items are enclosed, embedded, or obscured prior to verification of correction. 3. Submit inspection reports to the Building Official, Contractor, the Architect, the SER, and other designated persons in accordance with the structural testing and special inspection schedule. 4. Submit a final signed report stating whether the work requiring special inspection was, to the best of his/her knowledge, in conformance with the approved plans, specifications and the applicable workmanship provisions of the code. 5. Sign the structural testing and special inspection schedule in conjunction with other responsible parties. 6. Attend preconstruction meeting to review scope of special inspection. B. Testing Agency: 1. Test the work assigned for conformance with
STRUCTURAL TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION
014533 $ 2 of 5 Printed on 01/15/2013
Akin Road Elementary School Renovation
the building department approved plans, specifications, and applicable material provisions of the documents. Perform tests in a timely manner to avoid delay of work.
inspection schedule in conjunction with other responsible parties prior to commencing construction. D. Fabricator:
2. Submit test reports to the Building Official, Contractor, the Architect, the SER, and other designated persons in accordance with the structural testing and special inspection schedule.
1. Submit a Certificate of Compliance to the Building Official, Special Inspector, and SER that the work was performed in accordance with the approved plans and specifications.
3. Sign the structural testing and special inspection schedule in conjunction with other responsible parties.
2. Sign the structural testing and special inspection schedule in conjunction with other responsible parties prior to commencing construction.
4. Attend a preconstruction meeting to review scope of structural testing.
E. Owner:
C. Contractor:
1. Establish direct funding to provide for cost of structural testing and special inspection services.
1. Attend a preconstruction meeting to review scope of structural testing and special inspection.
2. Provide special inspector with approved plans, specifications and approved shop drawings.
2. Post or make available the structural testing and special inspection schedule within its office at the job site. Also, provide adequate notification to those parties designated on the schedule so they may properly prepare for and schedule their work.
3. Provide special inspectors and testing agencies with full access to the site at all times. 4. Sign the Structural testing and special inspection schedule in conjunction with other responsible parties.
3. Provide special inspectors access to the approved plans and specifications at the job site. 4. Review all reports issued by special inspectors. 5. Retain, at the job site, all reports submitted by the special inspectors for review on the Building Official's request. 6. Correct deficiencies identified in inspection or testing reports in a timely manner. 7. Provide safe access to the work requiring inspection or testing. 8. Provide labor and facilities to provide access to the work, to obtain, handle and deliver samples, to facilitate testing and inspection and for storage and curing of test samples. 9. Verify conformance of the work with specified construction tolerances. 10. Inspections by Building Official: Provide adequate notice for inspections performed by the building official, as required by IBC Section 109, the Minnesota State Building Code, and local ordinances.
1.7
PAYMENT A. Owner or Architect/SER, acting as the Owner's agent, will employ and pay for services of the special inspectors and testing agency to perform required structural testing and special inspection. B. Unless noted otherwise, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, samples, mock=ups, and assemblies required for testing and inspection and shall pay for shipping costs related to delivery of such items. Testing agency will pay for shipping costs of samples transported from site to lab. C. If items requiring testing or inspection are enclosed, embedded or obscured prior to testing or inspection or if such items are placed without tests or inspections, the Contractor shall pay for the costs of any exploratory work deemed necessary by the Architect/SER to verify compliance with the Contract Documents.
11. Sign the structural testing and special
STRUCTURAL TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION
014533 $ 3 of 5 Printed on 01/15/2013
Akin Road Elementary School Renovation
D. Contractor shall pay for the costs of any retests or re=inspections caused by work that does not comply with the Contract Documents based on initial tests or inspections, or work that is later revised or replaced by the Contractor. This does not include revisions requested by the Owner. 1.8
INSPECTION NOTICE A. Provide minimum of 24 hours notice for all items requiring testing or inspection. Items requiring testing and inspection services prior to or during placement shall not be placed until testing and inspection services are available. Items requiring testing and inspection services after placement shall not be enclosed or obscured until testing and inspection services are performed.
1.9
REPORTS A. Testing agency and special inspectors shall submit reports for structural testing and special inspection in a timely manner to the Contractor, Building Official, SER, and Architect of Record. Provide reports of daily activities to the SER and Contractor. Submit reports to the Contractor on a daily basis and to the SER on a daily or weekly basis. Provide summary reports to the Building Official and Architect on a monthly basis unless they request otherwise. B. Provide reports for ongoing work, containing the following information: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Firm name and address. 4. Name and signature of tester or inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling, test, or inspection. 6. Identification of product and specification section. 7. Location in project, including elevations, grid location and detail. 8. Type of test or inspection. 9. Whether test specimens, test results or observations indicate compliance with Contract Documents. Specifically state any discrepancies 10. Types and locations of discrepancies found in work 11. Work required performed to correct discrepancies and work performed to correct
STRUCTURAL TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION
previously noted discrepancies. Discrepancies corrected during an inspection need not be reported 12. Submit certified final special inspection report stating that, to the best of the special inspector's knowledge, the work requiring special inspection conformed to the Construction Documents. 1.10 FREQUENCY OF TESTING AND INSPECTION A. For detailed requirements, see individual technical specification sections and the structural testing and special inspection schedule. 1.11 PROTECTION AND REPAIR A. Upon completion of testing, sample=taking, or inspection, the Contractor shall repair damaged work and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in the visual qualities of exposed surfaces, as judged solely by the Architect/SER. Protect work exposed by or for testing and/or inspection and protect repaired work. Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for testing and/or inspection. 1.12 TESTS TO DEMONSTRATE QUALIFICATION A. Any tests required to qualify the Contractor or the workers for any phase of the work, shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. B. If the Contractor proposes a product material, method, or other system that has not been pre=qualified, the Architect/SER may require applicable tests to establish a basis for acceptance or rejection. The Contractor shall pay for these tests. C. The Architect/Engineer of Record reserves the right to require certification or other proof that the system proposed is in compliance with specified tests, criteria or standards. A representative of an independent testing agency shall sign the certificate. 1.13 STRUCTURAL TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE A. The parties involved shall complete and sign the structural testing and special inspection schedule. Schedule to be complete at time of permit issuance. B. The completed schedule is an element of the construction documents and after permit issuance, becomes part of the building
014533 $ 4 of 5 Printed on 01/15/2013
Akin Road Elementary School Renovation
department approved plans and specifications
END OF SECTION
STRUCTURAL TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION
014533 $ 5 of 5 Printed on 01/15/2013
STRUCTURAL TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE Project Name Akin Road Elementary School Renovation Project No. Location 5231 195th Street West, Farmington, MN Permit No. __________________________________________________________________________________________ STRUCTURAL TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTION Specification Section/Article
Description (2)
Type of Inspector (3)
Report Frequency
031510
Post2Installed Anchors
SI2T or SI2S
Each Visit
051200
Structural Metal Framing
SI2T
Each Visit
Note:
Assigned Firm (4)
This schedule is to be filled out when applying for a building permit.
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Permit No. to be provided by the Building Official. Use descriptions per IBC Section 1704, as adopted by Minnesota State Building Code. Special Inspector 2 Technical, Special Inspector – Structural, Testing Agency. Firm contracted to perform services.
Each appropriate representative shall sign below: Owner:
Firm:
Contractor:
Firm:
Architect:
Firm:
Cuningham Group Architecture
Date:
SER:
Firm:
BKBM Engineers
Date:
SI2S:
Firm:
Date:
TA:
Firm:
Date:
SI2T:
Firm:
Date:
F:
Firm:
Date:
Legend:
SER = Structural Engineer of Record TA = Testing Agency
ISD #192
Date: Date:
SI2T = Special Inspector 2 Technical SI2S = Special Inspector – Structural
F = Fabricator
Accepted for the Building Department by: _____________________________________Date: ________________
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS having jurisdiction, including but not limited to, the following:
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1. Building Code Requirements.
SECTION INCLUDES
2. Health and Safety Regulations.
A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to this Section.
3. Utility Company Regulations. 4. Police, Fire Department and Rescue Squad Rules.
B. Temporary Facilities and Controls; Including Requirements for Installation, Maintenance and Removal of Temporary Facilities, and Construction Aids During Construction.
5. Environmental Protection Regulations. 6. Occupational Safety and Health Administration. B. Standards: Comply with NFPA Code 241, “Building Construction and Demolition Operations”, ANSI-A10 Series standards for “Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition”, and NECA Electrical Design Library, “Temporary Electrical Facilities”.
C. Project Conditions. D. Cold Weather Protection. E. Materials and Equipment. 1. Temporary Utilities: Installation, Electricity, Lighting, Heating and Cooling, Ventilation, Fire Protection, Protection of Existing Facilities, Telephone/Facsimile, Water Service.
1. Refer to “Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Service”, prepared jointly by AGC and ASC, for industry recommendations.
2. Construction Facilities: Sanitary Facilities, First Aid, Construction Aids, Barriers, Barricades, Fences, Field Offices and Sheds, Project Identification.
2. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA and UL standards and regulations for temporary electrical service. Install service in compliance with National Electric Code (NFPA 70).
3. Temporary Controls: Pollution Control, Surface Water Control, Access Roads, Parking, Traffic Control, and Snow Removal. 4. Temporary Enclosures: Exterior Enclosures, Interior Enclosures, Security Measures, Tree and Plant Protection, Protection of Installed Work,. F. Removal of Temporary Utilities, Facilities and Controls. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 007200- General Conditions: General Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 007313 Conditions.
-
Supplementary General
C. Section 013113 - Project Coordination. D. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures. 1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS S:\11\0123\frontend\015000CGA.doc
C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary utility. At the earliest feasible time, when acceptable to the Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities, or permit them to interfere with progress. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on the site. C. When disruption of the existing service is required, do not proceed without the Owner's and Architect's
015000 - 1 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
review. Provide alternate temporary service, when required. D. Environmental Requirements: Provide and maintain heat, fuel, materials and services necessary to protect work and materials against injury from extreme heat, cold, dry winds, dust or dampness as follows:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
A. General: Provide new materials; if acceptable to the Architect, undamaged previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used. Provide materials suitable for the use intended.
1. During the placing, setting and curing of concrete and cement work, provide sufficient heat to ensure the heating of spaces involved do not fall to less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C). 2. Suspend operations on Work when subject to damage by climatic conditions, flooding or because of insufficient curing or drying of surfaces or materials. 3. Take necessary action to protect site and Work from wind, flood and storm damage. 1.5
COLD WEATHER PROTECTION A. Construction heating required during the construction period prior to building enclosure shall be classified as “Cold Weather Protection”. B. Provide temporary enclosures, fuel and equipment, in accordance with all applicable codes and ordinances, for heating materials incorporated in the Work and for the protection of the Work before the building is enclosed and the temporary heating system described in this Section can be operated. Fuel, equipment and method of heating shall be approved by the Architect. C. Heaters shall be smokeless UL approved portable units, using fuel of types and kinds approved by the Fire Marshall. Provide fuel, power, maintenance, and attendant required for operation of portable heaters. When used in enclosed areas provide combustion air and vent direct-fired units to the exterior. “Salamander” and similar type heaters will not be permitted. D. In areas of the building where work is being performed, the temperature shall be maintained as specified under the “Project Conditions” paragraph in this Section. Temperatures shall not be allowed to reach a level (high or low) that will cause damage to any portion of the Work, including materials stored in the building.
MATERIALS
1. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities. 2.2
EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide equipment suitable for the use intended and acceptable to the Architect, undamaged previously used equipment in serviceable condition may be used. Provide equipment suitable for the use intended. B. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured NEMA polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110-120 volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with groundfault circuit interrupters, reset button and pilot light, for connection of power tools and equipment. C. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords; use “hard-service” cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords, if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. D. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered glass enclosures, where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture. E. Heating Units: Provide temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by UL, FM or another recognized trade association related to the type of fuel being consumed. F. Temporary Offices: Provide prefabricated or mobile units, or similar job-built construction with lockable entrances, operable windows and serviceable finishes. Provide heated and air conditioned units on foundations adequate for normal loading. G. Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self-contained, single occupant toilet units of the chemical, aerated re-circulation, or combustion type, properly vented
015000 - 2 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
S:\11\0123\frontend\015000CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
and fully enclosed with a glass fiber reinforced polyester shell or similar non-absorbent material. H. First Aid Supplies: governing regulations.
Comply with local and
I. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable UL-rated, Class “A” fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand-carried portable, UL rated, Class “ABC” dry chemical extinguishers, or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA recommended classes for the exposures. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and 241 for classifications, extinguishing agent and size required by location and class of fire exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Locate facilities where they serve the project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed, or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary services, or connect to existing services. Where the utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment; comply with the utility company’s recommendations. 1. Arrange with the utility company and existing users for a time when service can be interrupted, where necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity for each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utility availability, provide trucked-in services. 3. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Owner, or Architect, and will not be accepted as a basis of claims for a Change Order. B. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
S:\11\0123\frontend\015000CGA.doc
for construction until permanent water service is in use. 1. Sterilization: Sterilize temporary water piping prior to use. 3.3
TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Contractor may connect to Owner's existing power service. Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. B. Owner shall pay for cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. C. Electrical Contractor shall provide temporary electric feeder from existing service to locations as directed by the Construction Manager. Provide temporary power to the Elevator for use during the construction period. 1. Owner shall pay for the cost of energy used during the construction period. Exercise measures to conserve energy. 2. Electrical Contractor shall provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located at each floor. Each Contractor shall provide flexible power cords as required for his area of operation. 3. Electrical Contractor shall provide main service disconnect and over-current protection at convenient locations and feeder switch at source distribution equipment. 4. Electrical Contractor shall provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting. D. Power Distribution System: Install wiring overhead, and rise vertically where least exposed to damage. Where permitted, wiring circuits not exceeding 125 volts, AC 20 ampere rating, and lighting circuits may be non-metallic sheathed cable where overhead and exposed for surveillance. E. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located at each floor. Provide flexible power cords as required. F. Provide artificial lighting adequate for the proper execution of the Work in all areas of the project. G. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting.
015000 - 3 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
3.4
Akin Road Elementary School
C. Prior to building enclosure, the source of heating, and the cost of energy shall be solely the responsibility of the Contractors.
TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Wherever overhead floor or roof deck has been installed, provide temporary lighting with local switching.
D. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Contractors shall provide and pay for operation, maintenance and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protection requirements, without operating the entire system, and will provide adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions.
E. Clean filters, ducts and motors as required to restore building equipment to the operational condition equal to the condition prior to use for temporary heating.
B. Provide and maintain adequate lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security purposes. C. Provide and maintain adequate lighting to interior work areas after dark for security purposes.
3.6
D. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps.
A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors or gases.
E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.
B. Contractor shall provide and the Owner shall pay for the cost of energy for the temporary ventilation devices. Enclose building prior to activating temporary ventilation in accordance with Exterior Enclosures in this Section.
F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. G. Electrical Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate lighting for construction operations, with minimum foot-candle readings to meet or exceed OSHA regulations and requirements, but as a minimum one light fixture per room. 1. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails and lamps.
C. Upon completion of the project, return the existing ventilation system to operating conditions equal to pre-construction conditions. Clean all ducts, fans and terminals as necessary. 3.7
3. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. If utilized, Contractor shall install all new lamps in fixtures prior to Substantial Completion.
1. Comply with NFPA 10 and 241 for classifications, extinguishing agent and size required by location and class of fire exposure.
TEMPORARY HEATING AND COOLING A. Prior to enclosure of the building, Contractor shall keep the Work heated as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B. Contractor may utilize Owner’s existing heating and cooling plant as a source. The Owner shall pay for the cost of energy used from the Owner’s heating and cooling plant during construction operations. Contractors shall supplement with temporary heating and cooling devices as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations.
015000 - 4 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Fire Extinguishers: Install and maintain temporary fire protection of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Locate fire extinguishers in a visible location where convenient and effective for their intended purpose.
2. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.
3.5
TEMPORARY VENTILATION
3.8
PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES A. Contractor, subcontractors or any employee under their jurisdiction will be responsible for damages to roofing, sheet metal and roof structure while performing work on the roof. 1. Contractor shall be responsible for carefully supervising all work to prevent injury to trees and plants that are to remain on the property, and to replace trees and plants which are damaged or destroyed due to construction operations.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
S:\11\0123\frontend\015000CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
2. Provide construction aids and equipment required by personnel and to facilitate execution of the Work; provide staging, runways, platforms, railings, trash containers and other such equipment. 3.9
11-0123
3.13
A. Elevators, Hoists and Cranes: 1. Construction Elevators, Hoists and Cranes: A temporary elevator or material hoist for the new structure will not be provided in this Contract.
TEMPORARY TELEPHONE/FACSIMILE A. Contractor shall provide, maintain, and pay for secure telephone with voice mail system, and facsimile service to field office at time of Project mobilization. Maintain systems until time for Substantial Completion.
2. Hoisting, chutes or conveying equipment shall be provided as required by the Contractor, and placement and scheduling of equipment shall be coordinated with the Architect. B. Scaffolding and Platforms: 1. Contractor shall provide and maintain scaffolding and platforms. The placement and scheduling of equipment shall be coordinated by the Contractor.
1. Record long distance telephone calls on job-site log, and pay for by person making the call. 3.10
TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE
A. Plumbing Contractor may connect to existing building water source required for construction operations.
C. Temporary Stairs and Ladders: 1. Contractor shall be responsible to provide and maintain all necessary temporary stairs and ladders to facilitate conveyance of workmen, materials, tools, and equipment for proper execution of the Work. All protection and safety stair and ladder devices shall be provided as it relates to the safe conduct of work in accordance with OSHA requirements and regulations.
1. Owner will pay cost of water used. Exercise measures to conserve water. B. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing at areas where required. C. Drinking Water: Provide containerized, tapdispenser bottled water type drinking water units, including paper supply. 3.11
TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide, maintain and pay for temporary sanitary facilities, including temporary toilets, wash facilities and drinking water fixtures. B. Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. C. Install where facilities will best serve the project’s needs. D. Existing building permanent facilities may not be used during construction operations. 3.12
FIRST AID
A. Contractor shall provide complete first aid kit and supplies for emergency purposes, and have a qualified person on staff capable of rendering basic first aid requirements.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
S:\11\0123\frontend\015000CGA.doc
CONSTRUCTION AIDS
3.14
TEMPORARY BARRIERS
A. Provide temporary barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to allow for Owner’s use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage by construction operations and demolition. B. Provide barricades and covered walkways as required by governing authorities for public rightof-way and for public access to existing buildings. C. Provide protection for existing plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life. D. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials and existing structures from damage. 3.15
BARRICADES
A. Temporary Barricades: Contractor shall be responsible for providing and maintaining all necessary temporary barricades to facilitate proper execution of the Work. All protection and safety barricades, devices, covers, etc. shall be provided as it relates to the safe conduct of work in accordance with OSHA requirements and regulations.
015000 - 5 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
3.16
TEMPORARY FENCES
A. Construction Limits: Minimum six (6) foot high temporary chain link fence, new or used, commercial grade, with line posts at 10 foot on center maximum. B. Provide a fence around the construction site to separate construction operations from school and public functions; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. C. Completely remove fence and gates from the site on the date of Substantial Completion, unless Architect directs otherwise. 3.17
FIELD OFFICES AND STORAGE SHEDS
Akin Road Elementary School
B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. 3.21
A. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas to withstand construction traffic. Keep roads clear of dust, dirt, mud, snow and other materials. B. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all site access roads within the “construction limits”; including all areas to receive hoists and cranes, scaffolds, platforms, etc. Inclement weather may require additional grading, fill, rock base, or other measures.
A. Field Offices: Provide, maintain and pay for a weather-tight field office, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling and ventilating equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture drawing rack and drawing display table. 1. Provide space for project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate a minimum of 10 persons. 2. Locate field office a minimum distance of 40 feet from existing and new structures. B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Install storage and fabrication sheds, sized, furnished and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility service. Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within the building or elsewhere on the site. 3.18
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
A. Any project sign must be prior approved by the Owner. B. No other signs are allowed on site without the Owner’s permission, except those required by law. 3.19
POLLUTION CONTROL
A. Provide methods, means and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious and toxic substances and pollutants produced by construction operations. 3.20
1. Coordinate location of temporary roads, storage areas and parking areas with the Owner. 2. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. 3. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering public streets. C. Provide temporary traffic control at junction of temporary roads with public roads, including warning signs for public traffic and STOP signs at access to public roads. D. Maintain existing sidewalks on school and public property; remove snow as required by local ordinance. E. Site parking may be utilized at locations as directed by the Owner to accommodate construction personnel. F. When site space is not adequate, Contractor shall provide additional off-site parking. 3.22
015000 - 6 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
SNOW REMOVAL
A. Contractor performing work under exterior exposed conditions shall be responsible for the removal of snow and ice for the protection and execution of their work as determined by the Owner. 1. The School District will perform snow and ice removal of those established access roads as shown on the Site Utilization Plan.
SURFACE WATER CONTROL
A. Grade site to drain and maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate and maintain pumping equipment, if necessary.
ACCESS ROADS, PARKING & TRAFFIC CONTROL
3.23
EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES
A. Provide temporary insulated weather-tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for products, to
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
S:\11\0123\frontend\015000CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. 1. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. 3.24
INTERIOR ENCLOSURES:
A. Provide temporary interior partitions and ceilings as required to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. B. Construction: Steel framed and reinforced polyethylene, gypsum board and plywood sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces. 1. Seal spaces above ceilings to prevent construction dust from migrating to nonconstruction areas. 2. Contractor is responsible to protect and cover existing finishes to remain with poly and hardboard where exposed to construction activities. Existing materials and finishes damaged in the construction activities are to be repaired or replaced by the Contractor with new to match existing at no expense to the Owner. Demolition and construction protection of existing materials for the duration of the Work to include but not limited to: • Existing Doors-cover with cardboard • Hollow metal frame jambs-cover with cardboard • Carpet-cover in layer of polypropylene sheeting and hardboard • Existing paint surfaces to remain. C. Isolate the construction areas from the occupied portions of the building. This isolation may include, but is not limited to, the construction, rerouting, capping-off, removal of, and exhausting of all construction contaminants into the occupied portions of the building. 1. Schedule work and construct noise barriers so as not to adversely affect the daily delivery of school instruction and business operations. Immediate corrective action by the Contractor is required when a complaint is made by the building Principal.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
S:\11\0123\frontend\015000CGA.doc
11-0123
D. Correct temperature control problems associated with occupied spaces affected by construction actions, such as the removal of an exterior wall, rerouting or removal of heating or cooling sources. Provide auxiliary heating, cooling, ventilating, and construction of insulated barriers, or whatever other action is necessary to correct the deficiency. A forty-eight (48) hour response time from the Owner shall be given to the Contractor in writing to correct such deficiencies after which time the Owner may choose to take his own corrective action. All associated materials and labor costs for such corrective action will be the responsibility of the Contractor. 3.25
SECURITY MEASURES
A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism or theft. 1. Coordinate with Owner's security program. 3.26
TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
A. Protect trees and plants from damage unless specifically noted to be removed. Protection shall be placed before any work is started at the site and shall be maintained in good repair until the Work is completed. Trees which are to remain shall not be used for crane stays, guy anchors or other fastenings. Do not light fires, store materials, stock pile, pile debris, dump or pour waste material or park motorized equipment within 40 feet or within the spread of the branches, whichever is greater, of any tree. B. Protection shall consist of boxing, armoring or fencing as described herein and/or as designed on the Drawings: 1. Trees with low hanging branches shall be fenced around the outer perimeter of the spread of the branches with standard forty eight (48) inch high snow fence mounted on steel posts spaced at six (6) feet on center. 2. Trees, either individual or in groups, where all branches occur above construction traffic, shall be boxed, using 4 x 4 posts (or equivalent) six (6) feet on center maximum set three (3) feet into the ground and extending five (5) feet high above ground with two (2) - 2 x 6 horizontal walers and 1 x 6 vertical boards not over six (6) inches apart. For individual trees the box shall be square in plan, twenty four (24) feet on a side, with the tree in the center. For groups of trees, set posts not over six (6) feet apart with 015000 - 7 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
boxing at least twelve (12) feet from any tree trunk. 3. Where boxing is impractical and so approved by the Architect, or where so designated, tree trunks shall be armored by wrapping with burlap and applying vertical 2 x 4 planks spaced not over two (2) inches apart and securely wired in place to at least six (6) feet above ground.
B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work areas to minimize damage. 1. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, ceilings and soffits of openings. 2. Protect finished floors, stairs and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage or movement of heavy objects by protecting with durable sheet materials.
C. Shore or brace trees adjacent to open excavations to maintain soil around the root system. Repair damage to crowns or root systems immediately by a qualified and approved tree surgeon. Roots exposed or damaged during grading shall be cut off cleanly inside the exposed or damaged area, paint cut surfaces with an approved tree paint and recover all exposed roots with topsoil. Thoroughly water at ten day intervals during remainder of growing season. D. Replace trees that are severely injured or should die because of contract operations, replace it with the same caliper and species. If a replacement is not available, reimburse the Owner in an amount equal to $400.00 per caliper inch of diameter of the tree injured or lost. E. Verify with the Architect in the field that all existing trees and plants, to remain within the construction limits, are appropriately marked, identified, and protected. All existing trees to remain will be fenced not closer than fifteen (15) feet from the tree trunk or within the spread of branches, whichever is greater. All trees and other vegetation to be removed, including root crowns; and the root crowns of previously removed trees, will be removed and hauled, including debris to an appropriate approved landfill or burn site. Do not damage existing trees to remain.
3. Prohibit traffic or storage on waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. 4. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 3.28
REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY UTILITIES, FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities and materials prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of two (2) feet. Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
END OF SECTION
F. Verify with the Architect in the field all trees and plants that will be removed, temporarily placed in other areas, then relocated to a new location at a later date. All such trees shall be appropriately marked, identified and protected. Once the trees have been relocated, they shall be protected as outlined in item E. above. 3.27
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.
015000 - 8 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
S:\11\0123\frontend\015000CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 2. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges for interchangeability.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
3. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical and by the same manufacturer.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to this Section.
C. Supplementary materials not specifically described in each Section, but required for a complete and proper installation of the Work, shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds, and subject to review and acceptance by the Architect.
B. Basic Product Requirements. C. Product Options.
1.4
D. Product Substitution Procedures. E. Owner Furnished Products. F. Product Transportation & Handling Requirements. G. Product Storage & Protection Requirements. H. Repair/Replacement of Damaged Work. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 004325 – Substitution Request Form. B. Document 007200- General Conditions: General Conditions (AIA Document A201). C. Document 007313 Conditions.
-
Supplementary General
D. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures. E. Section 014500 - Quality Control: assurance.
Quality
F. Section 017300 - Execution Requirements. G. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. H. Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals. I. Division 23 - Mechanical: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. 1.3
GENERAL A. Material and Equipment Incorporated into the Work: 1. Conform to standards.
applicable
specification
and
2. Comply with size, make, type, and quality specified. B. Manufactured and Fabricated Products: 1. Design, fabricate and assemble in accordance with the best engineering and shop practices.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
S:\11\0123\frontend\016000CGA.doc
DEFINITIONS A. Products: are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term “product” includes the terms material, equipment, system and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: are items identified by manufacturer’s product name, including make or model designation, indicated in the manufacturer’s published product literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. B. Materials: are products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed or installed to form a part of the Work. C. Equipment: is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections such as wiring or piping. D. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor during the bidding period or after award of the Contract are considered requests for “substitutions”. The following are not considered substitutions: 1. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. 2. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract Documents. 3. The Contractor’s determination to comply with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. 016000 - 1 of 5
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
1.5
Akin Road Elementary School
B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Include within the Contractor's quality assurance program such procedures as are required to assure full protection of materials and Work. B. Source Limitations: Provide products of the same kind, from a single source, to the fullest extent possible.
C. Provide interchangeable components from the same manufacturer, for similar components. 1.7
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description.
C. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between two or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.
D. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer’s or producer’s nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products, which will be exposed to view in occupied spaces, or on the exterior. 1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface, or where required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface that is not conspicuous. 2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface, which is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential operating data: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial numbers. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings. E. Prior to requesting final testing, adjusting and balancing, use adequate means to assure that the Work is completed in accordance with the specified requirements and is ready for the requested testing, adjusting and balancing. 1.6
BASIC PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Products: Shall be “new products” unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Products do not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work.
016000 - 2 of 5
Printed on 1/16/2013
PRODUCT OPTIONS
C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers With a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 1.8
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Substitution Procedures During Bidding: 1. Comply with substitution requirements indicated in the Instructions to Bidders (AIA Document A701). 2. The aesthetics of the proposed product substitutions exposed to view in the completed Work shall be a “salient feature” of the Architects review. Therefore, the Architect reserves the right to reject products that, in the opinion of the Architect, do not meet the Project aesthetic requirements. 3. Substitutions may be considered when allowed under the Contract Documents or when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. 4. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents. 5. A substitution request constitutes representation that the Contractor:
a
a. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. b. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified product.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
S:\11\0123\frontend\016000CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
c. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work, which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.
10. Equipment, material and articles installed or used without required acceptance shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection. 11. Failure to place orders for specified equipment or material sufficiently in advance of the scheduled installation date will not be considered a valid reason upon which the Contractor may base his request for substitutions or for deviations from the Drawings and Specifications.
d. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. 6. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without prior written approval from the Architect, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents.
12. Products listed “No Substitutions Allowed” will not be considered for substitution by the Architect.
7. Substitution Submittal Procedure: a. All substitutions shall be submitted on a completed Architect approved form, Document 004325 - Substitution Request Form. b. Submit three (3) copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution. c. Substitution requests shall include the name of the materials or equipment for which it is being substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution. d. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. 1) Samples: If requested by the Architect, submit samples as indicated in the specification section or in a manner as directed by the Architect. e. Provide additional information when directed by the Architect and as required by the Contract Documents. f. The Architect will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request. 8. The burden of proof of the merits of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. The Architect’s decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final. 9. The Architect at the Contractor’s expense may require testing of a proposed substitute material to assure compliance with the Specifications. When so directed, submit samples for acceptance.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
S:\11\0123\frontend\016000CGA.doc
B. Substitution Procedures During Construction: 1. Substitution procedures during construction shall be the same as during bidding except that substitutions shall only be allowed when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. ********************************************** Coordinate Owner Furnished Products with Section 011100 - Summary of Work. Paragraph duplicated there. ********************************************** 1.9
OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Products furnished by the Owner to the site and paid for by the Owner are: 1. [____________________________]. 2. [____________________________]. B. Owner’s Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data and samples to the Contractor. 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to the site. 3. Upon delivery to the site, inspect products jointly with the Contractor. 4. Submit claims for transportation damage, and replace damaged, defective or deficient products. 5. Arrange for manufacturer’s inspections and service.
warranties,
C. Contractor’s Responsibilities: 1. Review Owner furnished product data and samples.
shop
drawings,
2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage, jointly with Owner. 016000 - 3 of 5
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
1.10
Akin Road Elementary School
3. Handle, store, protect, install and finish products.
3. Containers and packages are intact and labels are legible.
4. Repair or replace items or products damaged after receipt.
4. Products are undamaged and properly protected.
PRODUCT TRANSPORTATION HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
AND
J. The Architect reserves the right to observe delivered materials, to review the accompanying bills of lading, and to reject the following: 1. Materials not identifiable as accepted products of the accepted manufacturer.
A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Materials exhibiting shelf lives in excess of those stipulated by the manufacturer.
B. Before making a shipment of materials to the Project site, Contractor shall ascertain that the project site is in a condition to receive the shipment.
3. Materials not bearing the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories (UL), where applicable.
1. If materials are delivered to the Project site and the site is not in condition to receive the materials, the materials shall be removed from the site and properly stored offsite at the expense of the Contractor or his Subcontractor. C. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. D. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or damage. E. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction schedules and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation. F. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with work and conditions at site, taking into consideration: 1. Work of the Contractor or Owner. 2. Limitations of Storage Space 3. Availability of equipment and personnel for handling products. 4. Owner's use of premises. G. Deliver products in undamaged condition in original containers or packaging, and with identifying labels intact and legible.
4. Materials in opened or excessively damaged containers. 5. Materials exhibiting evidence of moisture, organic matter, or other adulterants. K. In the event of damage or rejection by the Architect for stipulated cause, immediately make repairs and replacements necessary to the acceptance of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.11
PRODUCT STORAGE AND PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures. B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. C. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. Provide Architect with complete inventory of all off-site stored items, and provide certificate of insurance for all stored items. D. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation.
H. Partial deliveries of component parts of equipment shall be clearly marked to identify the equipment, to permit easy accumulation of parts, and to facilitate assembly.
E. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter.
I. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipment to ensure:
F. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or damage.
1. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents and reviewed submittals. 2. Quantities are correct. 016000 - 4 of 5
Printed on 1/16/2013
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
S:\11\0123\frontend\016000CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
G. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions. 1.12
REPAIR/REPLACEMENT PRODUCTS
OF
D. Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and “Allowances” provisions for control product selection, and for procedures required for processing such selections.
DAMAGED
A. Protection of products shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to repair or replace any products damaged by the elements or by any subsequent construction operation. B. The decision on whether a damaged product is to be repaired or replaced is be based on the requirement that ALL products shall meet the requirements specified for the Work as covered in the applicable sections of the Contract Documents; i.e., if a damaged product cannot be repaired so that it matches new, undamaged, products, then it must be replaced. C. In REFINISHING repaired or replaced products, refinish entire surfaces, as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes:
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. B. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at the time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect. B. Standard Products: Provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects and fully comply with all requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase “as selected from manufacturer’s standard colors, patterns, textures“ or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that comply with other specified requirements. The Architect will select the color, pattern and texture from the product line selected.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
S:\11\0123\frontend\016000CGA.doc
016000 - 5 of 5
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 017123 - FIELD ENGINEERING 3. Submit certified surveys and survey logs as for the project record.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Basic Requirements for Determining Conditions and Preparing to Install, Erect or Apply Products. 1. Layout of the Work.
C. Submit evidence of Land Surveyor’s E & O insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. 1.5
QUALIFICATIONS
A. For field engineering or survey work employ a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer of the discipline required for specific service on project legally qualified to practice in Minnesota, and acceptable to the Architect.
2. Field Engineering. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
A. Document 007200- General Conditions: General Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 007313 Conditions.
-
Supplementary General
C. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures. D. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. 1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. In preparing data required by this Section, use only personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of the described items, completely familiar with the requirements of this Section, and skilled in technical writing to the extent needed for communicating the essential data. B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work. 1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Survey Work: Submit name, address, telephone number and license or registration number of Land Surveyor or Engineer before starting any survey work. 1. On request by the Architect, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing and certificate signed by the Land Surveyor or Engineer that the elevations and locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents. Field Engineering
S:\11\0123\frontend\017123CGA.doc
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems, points of connection of utility services and other construction affecting the Work. 3.2
LAYOUT OF THE WORK
A. All layout of the Work will be provided by the Contractor as a part of the Work. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy with respect to layout of its Work. Immediately report any perceived discrepancies or errors in the Contract Documents, or the Work to the Architect. Make adjustments in accordance with instructions given by the Architect. C. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out Work, verify layout information shown Drawings, in relation to the property survey existing benchmarks. If discrepancies discovered, notify Architect promptly.
the on and are
D. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.
017123 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
E. Locate and protect survey control and reference points. F. 3.3
deliver to the Contractor's Record Documents Recorder current, "as-built" data of the work, for inclusion into the Project Record Documents. Clearly indicate differences between original drawings and completed work within specified tolerances.
Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Survey Reference Points:
2. Show as-built locations by coordinates of utilities on-site with top of pipe elevations at major grade and alignment changes.
1. Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the Project are those designated on the Drawings. 2. Locate and protect control points prior to starting site work, and preserve permanent reference points during construction. Identify and protect survey monuments on the site discovered during construction, which are not referenced on the project Drawings. Tie out such monuments and notify Architect prior to allowing them to be disturbed. 3. Replace permanent boundary markers disturbed during construction with new permanent monuments and file the required Record of Survey or Corner Record in accordance with applicable State and County laws, at no addition cost to the Owner. B. Maintain a complete, accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. Submit one (1) copy to the Architect on a weekly basis, with proper identification, including copies of all cut sheets and field notes. C. Prior to the first Application for Payment, submit name and address of Licensed Surveyor or Civil Engineer to Architect, including changes as they may occur. Obtain approval of any changes from the Architect. D. Upon request of the Architect, submit: 1. Data demonstrating qualifications of persons proposed to be engaged for field engineering services. 2. Documentation to verify accuracy of the field engineering Work. 3. Certification, signed by the Contractor's retained field engineer, certifying in writing that elevations and locations of improvements are in conformance or non-conformance with requirements of the Contract Documents.
3. Clearly locate final locations of plumbing and electrical lines which are only shown on the drawings in a diagrammatic way. 4. Completed as-built transparencies shall be signed and certified as correct by the licensed Land Surveyor or Civil Engineer. 5. Furnish any required Engineering Survey information for all utility easements for any required document recording. ********************************************** Use Paragraphs below only if required by the Owner ********************************************** F.
[Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.]
G. [Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by [land surveyor] [professional engineer], that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.] 3.4
PROTECTION OF WORK
A. Protect work and provide special protection where required or specified in individual specification sections. B. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent disruption of field survey work.
END OF SECTION
E. Project Record Drawings (Section 017839 - Project Record Documents) further requirements: 1. At the appropriate times during the Project, Licensed Surveyor or Civil Engineer shall
017123 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Field Engineering
S:\11\0123\frontend\017123CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Basic Requirements for Determining Conditions and Preparing to Install, Erect or Apply Products.
C. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. D. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.
1. Cutting and Patching.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. Protection of Installed Work. 1.2
2.1
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Document 007200- General Conditions: General Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 007313 Conditions.
-
Supplementary General
C. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures. D. Section 017423 - Cleaning.
PATCHING MATERIALS
A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. If specified materials are no longer available, submit substitution proposal to the Architect for approval. Propose materials similar to existing and that match the visual and functional performance of existing materials.
E. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. F.
G. Individual Specification Sections: Specific requirements for contract closeout, product warranties and project maintenance data. 1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. In preparing data required by this Section, use only personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of the described items, completely familiar with the requirements of this Section, and skilled in technical writing to the extent needed for communicating the essential data. B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work. 1.4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Section 017823 - Operation and Maintenance Data.
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures that will be performed. Include the following information: The extent of the work, changes to existing construction, products to be used, dates work will be performed, and utilities that will be affected. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS S:\11\0123\frontend\017300CGA.doc
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems, points of connection of utility services and other construction affecting the Work. 3.2
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Structural Work Requirements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would reduce their load-carrying capacity or loaddeflection ratio. B. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or safety related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety. 017300 - 1 of 3
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces, in a manner that would, in the Architect’s opinion, reduce the building’s aesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace Work cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. D. Each trade will be responsible for cutting and patching required for their portion of the Work. E. Submit written request to Architect a minimum of forty-eight (48) hours in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of the Project. 2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. 3. Efficiency, maintenance or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. F.
Execute cutting, fitting and patching, including excavation and backfill, to complete Work, and to:
1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. 2. Uncover Work to install ill-timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work. 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. G. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. H. After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of Work. I.
Beginning of cutting and patching means acceptance of existing conditions affecting performance of the Work.
J.
Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings; and devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.
K. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering Work; maintain excavations free of water.
017300 - 2 of 3
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
L. Execute Work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. M. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools are not allowed without prior written approval. N. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. O. Fit work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces. P. At penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings or floor construction, completely seal voids with firerated materials, full thickness of the construction element. 3.3
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. F. 3.4
Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. REPAIR/REPLACEMENT WORK
OF
DAMAGED
A. Protection of finished work shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to repair or replace any work damaged by the elements or by any subsequent construction operation. B. Repair or remove and replace defective and damaged Work. C. Comply with requirements for cutting and patching. D. The decision on whether damaged work is to be repaired or replaced is to be based on the requirement that ALL finished work shall meet the requirements specified for the Work as covered in the applicable sections of the Contract Documents;
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
S:\11\0123\frontend\017300CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
i.e., if damaged work cannot be repaired so that it matches new, undamaged, work, then it must be replaced. E. In REFINISHING repaired or replaced work, refinish entire surfaces, as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: 1. For continuous intersection.
surfaces
- refinish to
nearest
2. For an assembly - refinish entire unit.
END OF SECTION
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
S:\11\0123\frontend\017300CGA.doc
017300 - 3 of 3
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 017400 - CLEANING 1.4
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
A. The Architect reserves the right to withhold certification of payment requests for failure on the part of the Contractor to regularly clean the Project in conformance with the Requirements of this Section.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Cleaning for Single Prime contracts 1. Quality Assurance.
2.1
2. Daily Clean-Up.
4. Final Cleaning. 5. Cleaning During Owner's Occupancy.
B. Subcontractors shall be responsible for depositing their rubbish in the containers. It shall be the responsibility of Subcontractors generating bulky materials (e.i.; crates, cartons, ductwork, etc.) to break these materials down to minimum volume before depositing them in the trash containers. Segregate materials in accordance with the requirements of the trash container service. In the event that any Subcontractor fails to segregate their materials in accordance with those requirements, then the additional cost of the non-segregated containers will be back-charged to that Subcontractor.
C. Related Work Described Elsewhere: In addition to standards specified herein, comply with requirements for cleaning up as described in other sections of these Specifications. RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 007200- General Conditions: General Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 007313 Conditions.
-
Supplementary General
C. Document 007340 - Special Project Requirements.
C. Disposal of waste materials not permitted in trash containers, such as tires, paints, etc., shall be performed by the Subcontractor responsible for that waste and shall be done in accordance with the applicable laws and regulations of the regulatory agency having jurisdiction.
D. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures. E. Section 017419 Management:
-
Construction
Waste
F. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. G. Individual Specification Sections: requirements for cleaning and adjusting. 1.3
Specific
D. The burning of refuge on the site shall not be permitted. E. Protruding nails or screws in boards, planks, timbers, etc. shall be removed, hammered in or bent over flush.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inspection: Contractor shall conduct daily inspections, and more often if necessary, to verify that requirements of cleanliness are being met. B. Codes and Standards: In addition to the requirements specified herein, Contractor shall comply with pertinent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Contractor shall use only a professional cleaning company experienced in commercial cleaning for final cleaning.
CLEANING
S:\11\0123\frontend\017400CGA.doc
TRASH CONTAINERS A. Contractor shall provide a trash container service to remove rubbish from the site at no cost to the Subcontractors. The locations of the trash containers will be determined by the Contractor.
3. Progress Cleaning.
1.2
PAYMENT WITHHELD
2.2
CLEANING UP A. All trades, even the so called “clean trades”, contribute to the accumulation of debris through the use of drinking cups, lunch wrappers, dirt or mud tracked into the Work site etc. Therefore, all trades will be required to participate in the clean-up procedures.
017400 - 1 of 3
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
2.3
Akin Road Elementary School
2. Inspect storage arrangement of materials stored at site weekly, and more often if necessary. Restack, tidy or otherwise service arrangement to meet the requirements specified above.
CLEANING MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall provide required personnel, equipment and materials needed to maintain the specified standard of cleanliness.
2.4
3. Maintain the site in a neat and orderly condition.
COMPATIBILITY A. Contractor shall use cleaning materials and equipment which are compatible with the surfaces being cleaned, as recommended by the manufacturer of the material to be cleaned.
C. Structures: 1. [Contractors] [Subcontractors] shall inspect the structures and pickup weekly, and more often if necessary, scrap, debris and waste material. Remove items to the place designated for their storage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
2. Sweep interior spaces clean weekly, and more often if necessary.
DAILY CLEANUP
a. "Clean", for the purpose of this subparagraph, means free from dust and other material capable of being removed by use of reasonable effort and a handheld broom, i.e., "broom clean".
A. General: Clean work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 3.2
3. As required preparatory to installation of succeeding materials, Subcontractors shall clean the structures of pertinent portions thereof to the degree of cleanliness recommended by the manufacturer of the succeeding material, using equipment and materials required to achieve the required cleanliness.
PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: 1. Subcontractors shall retain stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing maximum access, not impeding drainage or traffic, and providing the required protection of materials.
4. Following the installation of finish floor materials, clean the finish floor daily, and more often if necessary, and while work is being performed in the space in which finish materials have been installed.
2. Do not allow the accumulation of scrap, debris, waste material and other items not required for construction of this work. 3. Weekly, and more often if necessary, remove scrap, debris and waste material from the job site.
a. "Clean", for the purpose of this subparagraph, means free from foreign material which, in the opinion of the Architect, may be injurious to the finish floor material, i.e., "vacuum clean".
4. Provide adequate storage for items awaiting removal from the job site, observing requirements for fire protection and protection of the ecology. B. Site: 1. Inspect the site daily, and more often if necessary, and pick up all scrap, debris and waste material. Remove items to the place designated for their storage. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris from the site. Store flammable waste in sealed metal containers until removed from the site.
017400 - 2 of 3
Printed on 1/16/2013
3.3
FINAL CLEANING A. Final cleaning of the project, site and structure, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Definition: Except as otherwise specifically provided, "clean", for the purpose of the Article, means the level of cleanliness generally provided by skilled cleaners using commercial quality building maintenance equipment and materials, i.e., "scrub and polish clean".
CLEANING
S:\11\0123\frontend\017400CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
C. General: Remove from the job site all tools, surplus materials, equipment, scrap, debris, and waste prior to completion of Work. Conduct final progress cleaning as described above. D. Site: Water and broom clean paved areas on the site and public paved areas directly adjacent to the site, unless otherwise directed by the Architect. Remove resultant debris. E. Structures:
11-0123
3.4
CLEANING OCCUPANCY
DURING
OWNER’S
A. Should the Owner occupy the work or any portion thereof prior to its completion by the Contractor and acceptance by the Owner, responsibilities for interim and final cleaning of the occupied spaces shall be the responsibility of the Owner.
END OF SECTION
1. Exterior: Visually inspect exterior surfaces and remove traces of soil, waste material, smudges, and other foreign matter in areas affected by the Work of this Contract. Remove traces of splashed material from adjacent surfaces. Hose down the exterior of the structure if necessary to achieve a uniform degree of exterior cleanliness. In the event of stubborn stains not removable with water, the Architect may require other cleaning at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Interior: Visually inspect interior surfaces and remove traces of soil, waste material, smudges, and other foreign matter in areas affected by the Work of this Contract. Remove traces of splashed materials from adjacent surfaces. Remove paint drippings, spots, stains, and dirt from finished surfaces. Use only the cleaning materials and equipment instructed by the manufacturer of the surface material. 3. Glass: Clean glass inside and outside. 4. Polished Surfaces: On surfaces requiring the routine application of buffed polish, apply the polish recommended by the manufacturer of the material being polished. Glossy surfaces shall be cleaned and shined as intended by the manufacturer. 5. Carpet: Use only dry-chemical method for cleaning carpeting. Steam cleaning or water based cleaning shall not be used on carpeting. Use only dry-chemical materials and methods fully approved by the carpet manufacturer, as instructed in the manufacturer's published literature. F. Timing: Schedule final cleaning as accepted by the Architect to enable the Owner to accept a completely clean project.
CLEANING
S:\11\0123\frontend\017400CGA.doc
017400 - 3 of 3
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 017500 - STARTING AND ADJUSTING G. When specified in individual specification sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to this Section.
H. Submit a written report to the Engineer/Architect in accordance with the relevant Section that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.
B. Initial Checkout and Start-Up Procedures, and Initial Adjusting to ensure Safe Operation During Acceptance Testing and Commissioning. 1.4
1. Start-Up Procedures.
A. Perform initial adjusting of all equipment and systems prior to the date of start-up.
2. Initial Adjusting. 3. Final Adjusting. 1.2
1. Verify with Divisions 21-28 - Mechanical, for all items requiring adjustment.
RELATED SECTIONS
B. Adjust all movable parts of equipment and systems to insure smooth and unhindered operation.
A. Document 007200- General Conditions: General Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 007313 Conditions.
-
Supplementary General
C. Section 017823 Operations and Maintenance Data. D. Section 017836 - Warranties and Bonds. E. Section 017900 - Demonstration and Training. F. Divisions 21-28 - Mechanical: Sections related to start-up and adjusting of systems. 1.3
INITIAL ADJUSTING
1.5
FINAL ADJUSTING A. Perform final adjusting of all equipment and systems prior to the date of Substantial Completion. 1. Verify with Divisions 21-28 - Mechanical, for all items requiring adjustment. B. Adjust all movable parts of equipment and systems to insure smooth and unhindered operation.
START-UP PROCEDURES A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify in writing the Architect and Owner a minimum of seven (7) days prior to start-up of each item of equipment or system. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence or other conditions which may cause damage or malfunction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
END OF SECTION
D. Verify that tests, meter readings and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify wiring and support components equipment are complete and tested.
for
F. Execute start-up procedures under supervision of responsible [manufacturer’s representative] [Contractor’s personnel] in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
S:\11\0123\frontend\017500CGA.doc
017500 - 1 of 1
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 1.4
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Administrative Procedures for Substantial Completion and Final Completion of the Work. 1. Contract Closeout Procedures. 2. Substantial Completion. a. Final Project Review and Acceptance. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Document 007200- General Conditions: General Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 007313 Conditions.
-
Supplementary General
D. Section 017123 – Field Engineering. E. Section 017300 - Execution Requirements Section 017423 - Cleaning.
G. Section 017500 - Starting and Adjusting. H. Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals. I. J.
Section 017823 - Operations and Maintenance Data. Section 017836- Warranties and Bonds.
K. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents. L. Individual Specification Sections: requirements for contract closeout. 1.3
Specific
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Prior to requesting inspection by the Architect, use adequate means to assure that the Work is completed in accordance with the specified requirements and is ready for the requested inspection. B. In preparing data required by this Section, use only personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of the described items, completely familiar with the requirements of this Section, and skilled in technical writing to the extent needed for communicating the essential data. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
S:\11\0123\frontend\017700CGA.doc
A. Contract Date: The Contract Date is the day established by the Agreement, the Special Conditions, and the Notice to Proceed as the calendar date by which all Work must be completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Once established, the Contract Date can only be adjusted by Change Order. If Work is not complete in accordance with the Contract Documents by the Contract Date, Contractor is obligated to pay liquidated damages to the Owner. B. Substantial Completion: The Date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect upon which construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, that the Owner has provided written acceptance of the portions of the Work over which they have jurisdiction, and a Certificate of Occupancy is issued. C. Final Acceptance: The Architect will accept completion of the Contract after the entire Work has been completed to the satisfaction of the Architect and after issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion. Acceptance of the Project by the Architect establishes the formal and official Completion Date for the Project, to be compared against the Contract Date. Completion Date must occur prior to Contract Date to preclude assessment of Liquidated Damages.
C. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.
F.
DEFINITIONS
1.5
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Preliminary Procedures: Prior to requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following (List exceptions in the request): 1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, showing 100% completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. a. If 100% completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 017700 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
3. Obtain and submit releases permitting the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities; include occupancy permits, operating certificates and similar releases. 4. Make final change-over of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the Owner’s personnel of change-over in security provisions. 5. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of the Owner’s operating and maintenance personnel. 6. Discontinue or change-over and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with construction tools, mock-ups and similar elements. B. Contractor shall prepare a comprehensive and complete list of corrective items for himself and his subcontractors, and verify that these items have been corrected prior to notifying the Architect of completion. Copies of the Contractor's list(s) shall be available to the Architect upon request. 1.6
Akin Road Elementary School
1. After the Contractor has received the “Punch List” from the Architect, he has thirty (30) calendar days in which to complete all items. D. After completion of "Punch List" work, Contractor shall notify Architect in writing to perform an acceptance inspection. Issue notification at least seven (7) days in advance of the time the acceptance inspection is to be performed. E. Contractor and his principal superintendent, authorized to act on behalf of the Contractor, as well as principal subcontractors that Architect may request to be present, shall accompany Architect on acceptance inspection. 1. If work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents, and no further corrective measures are required, Architect will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion, and recommend that Owner accept Project and file Notice of Completion. F.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Submit written certification to the Architect that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work, in the opinion of the Contractor, is 100% complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's inspection. Architect shall then commence the construction review and prepare a "Punch List", or list of minor corrective items to be issued to Contractor. For convenience, reviews may be phased for various portions of the Work, as each distinct portion becomes one hundred percent (100%) complete. B. Architect will arrange for Engineering Consultants to make their construction reviews, to be complete before Architect will make a construction review. Contractor and his principal superintendent, authorized to act in be half of the Contractor, as well as principal subcontractors that the Architect may request to be present, shall accompany the Architect/Engineers during the construction reviews. C. Excessive amounts of corrective ("punch list") items, as judged by the Architect, shall be grounds to terminate the construction review until such time as the Contractor is deemed sufficiently complete to once again start the review. As a rough rule of thumb, more than four minor items per typical room will be considered excessive. 017700 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Contractor shall provide "Certificate of Occupancy" from jurisdiction or municipality where project is located at time of Substantial Completion Inspection.
G. Architect shall develop the Certificate of Substantial Completion Form (AIA Document G704), for the signatures of the Architect, Contractor and Owner. The date of Substantial Completion starts the warranty period for the entire project. H. Owner shall occupy the entire project and premises on the date of Substantial Completion. I.
Final Project Review and Acceptance: 1. Comply with all requirements of the Substantial Completion Document, make final submittals and notify the Architect in writing when all punch list items have been completed, and a final inspection can be scheduled. 2. Architect shall accompany Contractor on Final Completion Inspection. 3. Complete additional Work identified in previous inspections and request re-inspections as required by the Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used) END OF SECTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
S:\11\0123\frontend\017700CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 017800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Procedures for Closeout Procedures, Revised Project Documents, and Delivery and Distribution of Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials. 1. Contract Closeout Submittals. 2. Spare Parts. 3. Maintenance Materials.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Document 007200- General Conditions: General Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 007313 Conditions.
-
Supplementary General
C. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.
F. Section 017123 – Field Engineering.
H. Section 017423 - Cleaning.
6. Submit complete, signed Warranties and Bonds to Architect as specified in General Conditions and in Section 017836.
I. Section 017500 - Starting and Adjusting. J. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. K. Section 017823- Operation and Maintenance Data. L. Section 017836 - Warranties and Bonds. M. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents. N. Section 017900 - Demonstration and Training. Specific
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of 013300. B. As a part of the final Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit a lien waiver covering the total amount of the Contract.
S:\11\0123\frontend\017800CGA.doc
2. Remove temporary facilities and materials from site and building as specified in Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
5. Submit complete, signed Operation and Maintenance Data to Architect as specified in Section 017823.
G. Section 017300 - Execution Requirements.
O. Individual Specification Sections: requirements for contract closeout.
1. Deliver certifications to Architect that no new materials containing asbestos or other hazardous materials have been included in the Work.
4. Submit complete, signed Record Documents to Architect as specified in Section 017839.
E. Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
E. Contractor shall submit Final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. Contractor shall have executed the "Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment" (AIA Document G707).
3. Thoroughly clean entire site of all construction debris as specified in Section 017423.
D. Section 014500 - Quality Control.
1.3
D. Contractor shall execute "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims" (AIA Document G706), and "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens" (AIA Document G706A).
F. Contractor Requirements Preparatory to Project Acceptance:
4. Extra Materials. 1.2
C. Contractor shall submit lien waivers from every entity who may lawfully be entitled to file a mechanics lien arising out of the Contract, including Suppliers, Subcontractors, and/or Subsubcontractors.
7. Upon Project completion, the contractor shall certify in writing to the Owner and Architect that the no “Hazardous Substances” have been incorporated into or utilized in the construction of the Project, except in accordance with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations, including: (1) any “hazardous waste” as defined by the Resource, Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976 (42 U.S.C. Section 6901 et seq.), as amended, and regulations promulgated thereunder; (2) any “hazardous, toxic or dangerous waste, substance or material” specifically defined as such in (or for the purposes of) the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and 017800 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
Liability Act of 1980 (42 U.S.C. Section 9601 et seq.), as amended, and regulations promulgated thereunder; (3) any “hazardous waste” or “hazardous substance” as defined by applicable state law, as amended, and regulations promulgated thereunder; and (4) asbestos and asbestos containing materials; (5) lead-based paint; and (6) any “hazardous, toxic or dangerous waste, substance, product, or material as defined in any so-called “superfund” or “superlien” law or in any other federal or state law, ordinance, code, rule, regulation, order or decree regulating, relating to or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning such waste, substance, product, or material. 1.4
END OF SECTION
SPARE PARTS A. Provide spare parts to the Owner in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver spare parts to the Owner’s designated area on or prior to the date of Substantial Completion. Provide the Owner and Architect with a complete transmittal of inventory of all items delivered.
1.5
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide maintenance materials to the Owner in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver maintenance materials to the Owner’s designated area on or prior to the date of Substantial Completion. Provide the Owner and Architect with a complete transmittal of inventory of all items delivered.
1.6
EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide extra products and materials to the Owner in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver extra products and materials to the Owner’s designated area on or prior to the date of Substantial Completion. Provide the Owner and Architect with a complete transmittal of inventory of all items delivered.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION
017800 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
S:\11\0123\frontend\017800CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Procedures for Developing and Operation and Maintenance Data.
Delivering
1. Submittal Procedures. 2. Format and Content of Manuals. 3. Manual for Materials and Finishes. 4. Manual for Equipment and Systems. 5. Submittals. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 007200- General Conditions: General Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 007313 Conditions.
-
Supplementary General
C. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures. D. Section 016000 - Product Requirements. E. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. F. Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals. G. Section 017836 - Warranties and Bonds. H. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents. I. Individual Specification Sections: Specific requirements for operations and maintenance data. 1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In preparing data required by this Section, use only personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of the described items, completely familiar with the requirements of this Section, and skilled in technical writing to the extent needed for communicating the essential data.
1.4
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1. Initial Procedures: Prior to first Pay Application, submit a blank, tabbed binder in the proper format for review and approval by the Architect. Approved binder will be returned for collection of information during the course of construction. 2. Preliminary Procedures: Submit one (1) copy of proposed manuals to Architect at least fifteen (15) days prior to final inspection for acceptance. 3. Final Procedures: Following the indoctrination and instruction of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel, review proposed revisions to the manual with the Architect. a. Submit two (2) copies of accepted data in final form ten (10) days after final inspection. Approval of submittal is a prerequisite at Substantial Completion. B. Format and Content of Manuals: 1. Binders: Submit two (2) Commercial quality, 8-1/2 x 11 inch size, three-ring binders in portfolio form, neatly edited, with similar equipment grouped, tabbed and indexed. Materials shall be printed or typewritten. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. 2. Covers: Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, identity of separate structures as applicable, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. 3. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. 4. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified, typed on 30 pound white paper. 5. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
A. Submittal Procedures:
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA S:\11\0123\frontend\017823CGA.doc
017823 - 1 of 3 Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
6. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 7. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. 8. Submit to the Architect, one (1) copy of completed volumes in final form fifteen (15) days prior to final inspection. This copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. 9. Submit to the Architect, final volumes revised, within ten (10) days after final inspection. C. Manual for Materials and Finishes: 1. Building Products, Applied Materials and Finishes: Include product data with catalog number, size, composition, color and texture designations. Provide information for reordering custom manufactured products. 2. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer’s recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
3. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance and repair. 4. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. 5. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed flysheet and space for insertion of data. D. Manual for Equipment and Systems: 1. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 2. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls and communications. a. Include color-coded wiring diagrams as installed. 3. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, breakin, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. 4. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair and re-assembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing and checking instructions. 5. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. 6. Provide manufacturer’s printed operations and maintenance instructions. a. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. 7. Provide original manufacturer’s parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. 8. Provide control diagrams manufacturer as installed.
017823 - 2 of 3 Printed on 1/16/2013
by
controls
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA S:\11\0123\frontend\017823CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
9. Provide Contractor’s coordination drawings, with color-coded piping diagrams as installed.
11-0123
END OF SECTION
10. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. 11. Provide list of original manufacturer’s spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 12. Include test and balancing reports as specified in Section 016000. 13. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections and as recommended by the Manufacturer for the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment or system. 14. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed flysheet and space for insertion of data. E. Submittals: 1. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. 2. Submit to the Architect, two (2) copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one (1) copy with comments. 3. For equipment, or component parts of equipment, put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit documents within ten (10) days after acceptance. 4. Submit to the Architect, one (1) copy of completed volumes in final form fifteen (15) days prior to final inspection. Copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. 5. Submit to the Architect, two (2) copies of revised volumes of data in final form within ten (10) days after final inspection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA S:\11\0123\frontend\017823CGA.doc
017823 - 3 of 3 Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 017836 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS B. Section 006000 – Project Forms: Bonds.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
C. Document 007200- General Conditions: General Conditions (AIA Document A201).
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to this Section.
D. Document 007313 Conditions.
B. General Administrative and Procedural Requirements for Warranties and Bonds Required by the Contract Documents, Including Manufacturer’s Warranties on Products and Special Warranties.
F. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures.
1. Refer to the Owner/Contractor Agreement and General Conditions for terms of the Contractor’s special warranty of workmanship and materials.
G. Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals. H. Section 017823 - Operation and Maintenance Data. I. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents. J. Individual Specification Sections: requirements for warranties and bonds. 1.3
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 002100 - Instructions to Bidders (AIA A701): Bid Bonds.
WARRANTIES AND BONDS S:\11\0123\frontend\017836CGA.doc
DEFINITIONS
B. Special Warranties: Written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties, or to provide greater rights for the Owner.
3. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installations that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 49.
D. WHERE SPECIAL WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS INDICATED IN INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATION SECTIONS EXCEED SUPPLIER’S, MANUFACTURER’S OR SUBCONTRACTOR WARRANTIES, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING THE SPECIAL WARRANTY COVERAGE THAT EXCEEDS THE SUPPLIER’S, MANUFACTURER’S OR SUBCONTRACTORS WARRANTY.
Specific
A. Standard Product Warranties: Pre-printed written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products, and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner.
a. Closeout submittals are included in Section 017800.
C. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer’s disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.
Supplementary General
E. Section 013300- Submittal Procedures.
2. General closeout requirements are included in Section 017700 - “Closeout Procedures”.
4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
-
1.4
WARRANTY AND BOND REQUIREMENTS A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure, or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work. B. Re-Instatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacements or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. 017836 - 1 of 3 Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
D. Owner’s Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights and remedies. 1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. E. The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the Project where a special warranty, certification or similar commitment is required on such Work, or part of the Work, until evidence is presented that entitles required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. 1.5
SUBMITTALS A. Submittals under provisions of Section 013300. B. Where special warranties are required or where copies of warranties are indicated as a submittal requirement, submit copies of warranties to Architect for Architects review prior to beginning Work of the specific section. C. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Architect for approval prior to final execution. 1. Refer to individual Sections of Division 2 through 49 for specific content requirements, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties. D. Form of Submittals: 1. Bind in commercial quality, 8-1/2 x 11 inch, three-ring side binders with hardback, cleanable, plastic covers. 2. Label cover of each binder with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS", with title of Project; name, address, and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible principal.
Akin Road Elementary School
3. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number, and title of the specification Section in which specified, and the name of the product or work item. 4. Separate warranties and bonds with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide complete information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principle. E. Preparation of Submittals: 1. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten (10) days after completion of the applicable item or work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial Completion is determined. 2. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. 3. Co-Execute submittals when required. 4. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. F. Time of Submittals: 1. Submit warranties and bonds for equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, within ten (10) days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within ten (10) days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work when acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within ten (10) days after acceptance, list the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. 4. Deliver to the Architect, manufacturer's warranties, guaranties and bonds required by Contract Documents, with the Owner named as beneficiary. Where manufacturer's warranty or guarantee extends for a longer time period than the Contractor's warranty or guarantee, deliver manufacturer's warranties and guaranties in the same manner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) 017836 - 2 of 3 Printed on 1/16/2013
WARRANTIES AND BONDS S:\11\0123\frontend\017836CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used) END OF SECTION
WARRANTIES AND BONDS S:\11\0123\frontend\017836CGA.doc
017836 - 3 of 3 Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS B. Accuracy of Records: Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Record Documents. Make adequate and proper entries in Specifications and Drawings and other documents where such entry is required to properly show the change. Include “asbuilt” locations of site utilities shown on the Drawings in a diagrammatic way. Accuracy of records shall be such that future search for items shown in the Contract Documents may reasonably rely on information obtained from the accepted Record Documents.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to this Section. B. Requirements for Project Record Documents: 1. Throughout progress of the Work of the Contract, Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of changes and modifications in the Contract Documents, as described below.
C. Timing of Entries: Make entries onto a Job Set, as described below, within twenty-four (24) hours after receipt of information. Make entries onto a Record Documents Set, as described below, at least weekly.
2. The purpose of the Record Documents is to provide factual information regarding the Work, both concealed and visible, which will enable future modification of design to proceed without lengthy, and expensive site measurement, investigation and examination. 1.2
D. The Record Documents will be reviewed by the Architect at the regular weekly job meetings. Record Documents will be a regular agenda item. 1.4
RELATED SECTIONS
A. The Architect reserves the right to withhold certification of payment request for failure on the part of the Contractor to maintain Record Drawing in the conformance with this Section.
A. Document 007200- General Conditions: General Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 007313 Conditions.
-
Supplementary General
C. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
D. Section 017700 - Close-Out Procedures.
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
E. Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals.
B. General: The Architect's review and approval of the current status of Record Documents will be a prerequisite to the Architect's review of requests for progress payment and request for final payment under the Contract.
F. Individual Specification Sections: Specific requirements for project record documents. 1.3
PAYMENT WITHHELD
QUALITY ASSURANCE
C. Progress Submittals: Secure the Architect's review and approval of the Record Documents as currently maintained prior to submitting each request for progress payment.
A. General: Delegate the responsibility for maintenance of Record Documents to one person on the Contractor's staff, to be designated as the Record Documents Recorder, as accepted in advance by the Architect. The Record Documents Recorder may not be changed without the Architect's written approval.
D. Final Submittal: Submit the final Record Documents to the Architect, and secure Architect’s acceptance prior to submitting request for final payment. 1.6
PRODUCT HANDLING A. Maintain Record Documents in a secure place in the Contractor's job trailer. Protect Record Documents from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of the Work.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS S:\11\0123\frontend\017839CGA.doc
017839 - 1 of 3
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
B. In the event of loss of recorded data, use means necessary to again secure the data to the Architect's acceptance; such means shall include, if necessary in the opinion of the Architect, removal and replacement of concealing materials and, in such case, replacements shall be to the standards originally specified in the Contract Documents.
2. Do not use the Job Set for purposes other than entry of new data and for review by the Architect upon request. 3. Allow only the Record Documents Recorder and Architect to have access to the Record Documents. Record Document Recorder shall not remove the Record Documents from the Contractor's trailer without expressed written permission of the Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
C. Making Entries on Drawings: 2.1
RECORD DOCUMENTS
1. Job Set: Contractor shall record information in a clear and legible manner. Maintain the Job Set on an ongoing basis. Record pertinent information and changes as they occur. Subcontractors shall be responsible for making entries as may be required under the supervision of the Contractor. Subcontractors shall date and sign their entries.
A. Contractor's Job Set: Secure from the Architect at the beginning of the Work, at no charge to the Contractor, one (1) complete set of Contract Documents. This Job Set shall be for the Contractor's own use to collect and record all pertinent information on a daily basis. B. Record Documents Set: Secure from the Architect at the beginning of the Work, at no charge to the Contractor, one (1) complete set of Contract Documents. The Contractor's Record Documents Recorder shall transfer all information to this set in final form on a weekly basis. This Record Documents Set will also be turned in as the Final Record Documents.
D. Making Entries on Other Documents: 1. Where changes are caused by directives issued by the Architect, Contractor shall clearly indicate the change by note, and reference approved addenda and change orders. 2. Where changes are caused by Contractororiginated proposals reviewed by the Architect, including inadvertent errors by the Contractor which have been accepted by the Architect, Contractor shall clearly indicate the change by note.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
MAINTENANCE OF JOB SET
3. Contractor shall make entries in the pertinent documents as reviewed by the Architect.
A. Identification: 1. Upon receipt of the Job Set, Contractor shall identify the documents with the title "TEMPORARY RECORD DOCUMENTS: CONTRACTOR'S JOB SET". 2. Upon receipt of the Record Documents Set, Contractor shall identify appropriate to mylar media with the title "RECORD DOCUMENTS" on each sheet of the drawings and on the cover sheet of other documents. B. Preservation: 1. Contractor shall devise a suitable method for protecting the Job Set. Consider the Contract completion time, the probable number of occasions upon which the Job Set must be taken out for new entries and for examination, and the conditions under which these activities will be performed.
017839 - 2 of 3
Printed on 1/16/2013
E. Accuracy of Entries: Contractor shall use proper instruments or tools for measurement as necessary, to determine actual locations of the installed items. 3.2
FINAL RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Contractor shall submit Job Set Drawings as supporting documentation to the Final Record Document drawings. If the Job Set drawings have been damaged during course of the Work, secure a new copy of the document from the Architect. Carefully transfer the change data to the new copy and obtain the acceptance of the Architect. Additional copies of Contract Documents will be charged to the Contractor at the Architect’s cost of reproduction plus handling.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
S:\11\0123\frontend\017839CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
B. If the documents other than drawings have been kept clean successfully during progress of the Work, and if entries have been sufficiently orderly thereon and reviewed by the Architect, they will be accepted by the Architect as the final portion of the Record Documents. If any such document is not so accepted by the Architect, secure a new copy of that document from the Architect at the Architect's usual charge for reproduction, and carefully transfer the change data to the new copy and obtain the acceptance of the Architect. C. Review and Approval: Contractor shall submit the completed total set of Record Documents to the Architect, as described above. Participate in review meetings as required by the Architect, make required changes in the Record Documents, and promptly deliver the final Record Documents to the Architect. 3.3
CHANGES ACCEPTANCE
SUBSEQUENT
TO
A. The Contractor is not responsible for recording changes in the Work subsequent to acceptance of the Work by the Architect, except for changes resulting from replacements, repairs, and alterations made by the Contractor as a part of his guarantee. No additional changes will be allowed without approval of the Architect.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
S:\11\0123\frontend\017839CGA.doc
017839 - 3 of 3
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to this Section. B. General Requirements and Procedures for Demonstration of the Products and Systems of the Facility, and Training of the Owner’s Operating and Maintenance Personnel. 1. Demonstration and Training.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 007200- General Conditions: General Conditions (AIA Document A201). B. Document 007313 Conditions.
-
Supplementary General
C. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures. D. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. 1.3
SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit two copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.
1.4
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Prior to Final Completion instruct Owner’s designated personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment and systems on project site at agreed upon times. 1. Provide 16 hours of training on-site of building control systems with the Owner’s personnel in multiple sessions. B. Demonstrate project equipment and instruct in a classroom environment located at the project site and instructed by a qualified manufacturer’s representative who is knowledgeable about the project. 1. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other seasons within six (6) months. C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manuals with Owner’s personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, maintenance, servicing and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled times, at designated location. E. Prepare and insert additional data in “Operations and Maintenance Manuals” when needed for additional data becomes apparent during instructions and demonstrations.
1. At completion of training, submit one complete training manual for Owner's use. B. Qualification Data: Submit qualifications demonstrating a record of successful learning performance of instructors. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners. C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used)
D. [Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test. END OF SECTION
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING S:\11\0123\frontend\017900CGA.doc
017900 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
017900 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
S:\11\0123\frontend\017900CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 024119 - MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING C. At areas of general demolition of the entire spaces, the Mechanical and Electrical shall make removals or work normal to their trades or may be called for, for reuse or relocation, make any relocations and shut-off, terminate, cap or otherwise discontinue services that will be abandoned or removed in the space. Demolish or remove all abandoned or unwanted electrical or mechanical materials, items or elements in the area.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Unsalvageable Material.
D. Use mechanics skilled in the trade to perform cutting, removal, demolition, relocation, patching and other restoration. If necessary, sublet the work to skilled contractors or subcontractors.
C. Salvageable Materials to be Reused in the Work. 1. ACT Ceiling Tile. 2. Hallway Lockers.
E. Coordinate Work of this Section so Work progresses without interruption and minimum delays. Coordinate and schedule Work with the Owner where disturbance may occur and where relocations or other potential disruptions of the Owners functions and services may occur.
D. Salvageable Materials to be Stored by Owner. 1. Interactive Whiteboard. E. Minor Demolition for Remodeling; Including Cutting, Patching, Remodeling, Replacements and Restoration.
F. Maintain the safety of the existing buildings and personnel, as well as new construction as a result of work, procedures, operations or activities of this Section.
F. Mechanical and Electrical Work. G. Work of Each Contract. 1.2
G. Exercise extreme care where the work of removals, demolition, cutting and similar work involves structural consideration to avoid damage and preserve the safety of the structure and all personnel. Utilize (employing if necessary) competent and qualified technical assistance to develop safe methods and techniques to accomplish the work, including for temporary shoring and supports, methods of removal and other considerations. Design and place permanent or temporary supports to meet all loads.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings generally indicate the extent of demolition, removals, relocations and cutting or indicate conditions or details which might be encountered in performing the Work. Examine the spaces themselves to determine the actual conditions and requirements. Accomplish removals, demolition, cutting, restoration, new installations and other work as required to transform the existing spaces and conditions to the new conditions indicated on the Drawings, as well as to accomplish all tie-in work of new to existing.
H. Exercise extreme care to avoid damage where the Work of removals, demolition, cutting and similar work involves possible hazardous substances and/or harmful physical agents, such as asbestos fibers, PCB's or other EPA recognized health hazards. Notify Owner before making removals or cutting such material so that tests may be taken in order to ascertain whether materials exist.
B. Except for general demolition of entire areas it is the intent that at each area, or space, the Contractor and each subcontractor shall make the removals, perform cutting or demolition and accomplish relocation of work normal to his trade (i.e., Electrical Subcontractor removes or relocates panelboards, conduit lighting and similar).
1. Comply with jurisdictional requirements for the inspection, removal, handling and disposal of asbestos and asbestos containing materials. Confirm jurisdictional requirements prior to beginning demolition work. 1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Communications:
MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING S:\11\0123\div2-33\024119CGA.doc
024119 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
1. Communicate demolition schedule and on-going Work with school staff, students and parents, through the Construction Manager. The communications may include:
3. Be aware of the potential for mold in existing walls and roof systems. 4. Take all necessary precautions to avoid moisture damage when “tying-in” the new additions to the existing walls and roofs.
a. Flyers or written notices explaining the process and the precautions being taken to minimize potential problems. Provide occasional update.
a. If moisture occurs, take measures to immediately dry out the areas. b. Anticipate mold problems if building materials are wet longer than twenty four (24) hours.
b. Being receptive to input and expressions of concern by others. c. Addressing the individual concerns of sensitive students or staff.
1.4
2. Respond quickly when problems occur and communicate to Owner, Owner’s staff, students and parents explaining the problem and the proposed solution.
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Schedule: Submit proposed sequence of operations for demolition work to Architect for review prior to start of Work. Include coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services as required, together with details for dust and noise control protection.
B. Isolate Construction Areas: 1. Use physical barriers to separate construction areas from occupied spaces.
1. Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner's on-site operations.
2. Do not allow the central HVAC system to operate in the construction areas. 3. Maintain a positive pressure in the occupied areas.
2. Coordinate with Owner's continuing occupation of portions of existing building and with Owner's partial occupancy of completed work.
4. Install separate heating/ventilating systems in the construction areas. Operate systems with a negative pressure, or use a temporary system of ducts and fans. 5. Locate air exhausted from the construction zones a significant distance from the building make-up air vents. a. Consider prevailing winds in planning this exhaust air system. b. Provide exhaust system with sorbents for VOC’s, and fabric filters to capture particulate matter. 6. Minimize the exhaust fumes associated with heavy equipment operating around existing building. C. Demolition and “Tying-In” to Existing Building: 1. Verify Owner’s asbestos abatement procedures, if any, have been carried out prior to any demolition. 2. Owner shall test to determine the presence of lead and take the necessary measures to avoid lead dust.
024119 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - DISPOSITION OF MATERIALS 2.1
SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS TO BE REUSED IN THE WORK A. Remove salvageable materials and items designated for reuse or relocation to the new location. If the new location is not ready to receive the relocated item, store and protect the items from damage until incorporated into the new work or remodeled area. If the Owner is unable to forego the use of any existing items at the normal time for relocation until other facilities are available to the Owner, make all preparations for the item and delay relocation until a time approved by the Owner. B. Carefully remove, salvage, clean and preserve materials, equipment and other items indicated to be reused, or which will be needed for reuse to match existing work. Exercise extreme care in removals to prevent damage or to make materials unsuitable to reuse. For materials shown or called for to be reused and which are damaged, replace with equivalent and matching work. MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\024119CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
2.2
SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS STORED BY THE OWNER
11-0123
TO
C. Provide protective coverings and enclosures necessary to prevent damage to existing spaces and materials to remain. Protect openings in exterior walls and roofs to prevent weather damage and prevent excessive heat loss from the existing buildings. Coordinate Work and removals at exterior, including roof, by scheduling and performing Work in a manner to maintain watertight installation. Seal areas left temporarily unfinished to prevent damage to existing roof or other materials and furnishings of existing building.
BE
A. The Owner will mark or tag existing materials, equipment or other items he wishes to retain. Carefully remove salvageable materials and items designated or marked to remain the property of the Owner. Protect from damage and store adjacent to the removal area as directed by the Owner. B. Consult the Architect for any salvage the Owner may wish to retain and the salvagability of all items. Carefully remove and salvage any materials the Owner wishes to retain. Remove finish hardware from the item or material taken out of the building and turn over to Owner. Cleaning or restoration of the Owner's salvage materials is not required.
D. Provide dustproof temporary enclosures (including above ceilings) separating areas under demolition and remodeling from the remainder of the building as well as temporary filters at duct work. Provide temporary hinged doors in temporary enclosures where necessary. Completely seal temporary and permanent doors with tape or other suitable material during demolition work. Maintain seal until dust has settled.
C. Removal from the area and the site to the Owner's storage will be by the Contractor. 2.3
UNSALVAGEABLE MATERIALS
E. Provide protection from elements for that portion of the Project, which may be exposed by cutting and patching work.
A. Remove unsalvageable materials in a manner that will avoid damage to materials or equipment which will remain. Completely remove materials and legally dispose away from the site.
F. Maintain excavations free from water. 3.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of work. C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2
TEMPORARY PROTECTION
DEMOLITION AND CUTTING A. Demolish and remove existing construction as indicated in the Contract Documents or as is required to be removed to accomplish the Work. Where new Work is to be installed in or adjacent to existing construction or existing work is to be replaces, remove or cut the existing construction as necessary to complete the Work of the Project. B. Execute Work with care. Remove and replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, existing construction that is to remain which is loosened, cracked, or otherwise damaged or defaced as a result of the Work and is unsuitable for intended use.
A. Provide temporary bracing, shoring, needling and support during demolition, cutting, remodeling and related new construction as necessary for the execution of the Work and protection of persons and property.
C. Transport debris from upper levels to ground in covered chute or other approved means. No freefall debris removal is permitted. Moisten debris with spray where practical. Take all precautions to minimize dust.
B. Perform Work with appropriate supports, protection and methods to prevent collapse, settling or damage to property of persons. Provide adequate supports for the loads to be carried, with loads properly distributed, including to lower levels and sound bearing, if necessary.
D. Clean demolition areas and remove debris, waste and rubbish from the building at the conclusion of each day's work. Transport debris and rubbish in such a manner so as to prevent spread of dust. Keep adjacent areas unencumbered and clean. Keep walks and similar areas broom clean. E. Do not store or permit debris storage at site.
MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\024119CGA.doc
024119 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
F. Do not burn debris, rubbish, or waste at the site. 3.4
Akin Road Elementary School
3.6
PATCHING, REMODELING, REPLACEMENTS AND RESTORATION
A. Where unknown mechanical piping, ductwork or electrical conduit is exposed during removal of partitions, walls or floors and ceilings, have Mechanical or Electrical Subcontractors accomplish the removal or rerouting, as applicable. Locate mechanical and electrical work where directed and connect to maintain all functions in proper operation. Abandoned piping may be left in place where it is concealed in the floors or walls, providing that it is disconnected from its source and capped. No "dead end" water, sewer, gas, or vent piping existing in the completed work are allowed.
A. Patch or otherwise restore disturbed existing construction as indicated on the drawings and schedules, or as otherwise required to restore the work and surfaces. Carry out patching or restoration to natural breaks (i.e., corners) wherever possible. Where existing construction is removed, cut or otherwise disturbed by Work of the Project, patch defective and incomplete surfaces. Repair damage to existing construction which is to remain. B. Perform patching work using skilled mechanics experienced in the particular type of work involved. Perform patching work to the standards of the Specifications where applicable, where not specified, complete work to the highest standards of the trade. C. Patch existing construction to match existing work (unless otherwise called for) except provide new materials and accomplish as for new work. Examine existing surfaces to be patched before proceeding with the work. Report all conditions where existing materials, colors and finishes cannot be matched to the Architect and Owner, and do not proceed until instructions have been given. D. Repair existing construction that has been damaged as a result of the Work to an extent and as required to match adjacent existing undamaged construction. E. Thoroughly clean and prepare all surfaces to receive new finish or covering. Completely remove dirt, dust, grease, oil, paint, loose materials and soil. Clean, etch where necessary, and place surfaces in most suitable condition for the finish. 3.5
ADJUSTMENTS A. Where partitions are removed, patch floors, walls, and ceilings, with materials to match existing.
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK EXPOSED
B. Accomplish removals, capping or otherwise terminating services which are abandoned or need to be abandoned, and rerouting of mechanical and electrical work without addition cost to the Owner, whether shown or noted on drawings or otherwise encountered. 3.7
WORK OF EACH CONTRACT A. Carefully review the Contract Documents, including those primarily for other trades with respect to the coordination of the demolition, removal and remodeling work and perform such removals normal to their trades as may be shown, noted or otherwise required. B. Cutting and patching incidental to demolition, removal and /or remodeling of general construction work is included in the work of the Contractor when shown or indicated on the general construction drawings or schedules or specially noted or called for on documents primarily for other trades as being accomplished by the Contractor. 1. Mechanical and Electrical subcontractors are responsible for such other cutting, demolition, patching, replacement and restoration as may be required to accomplish their part of the Work.
1. Where removal of partitions results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors and ceilings to provide smooth planes without breaks, steps, or bulkheads. 2. Where extreme change of plane to two inches or more occurs, request instructions from Architect as to method of making transition. B. Trim and refinish existing doors as necessary to clear new floors.
024119 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\024119CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
3.8
11-0123
PAINTING A. Major Subcontractors (Mechanical, Electrical) are responsible for painting or repainting of patched or remodeled areas where they have performed work, except for those areas shown or required to be remodeled under the General Construction Drawings, Specifications or Schedules, in which case, the new, patched and remodeled paintable surfaces shall be repainted by the Contractor. It is the intent that the Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors are responsible for painting or repainting surfaces at locations where demolition, cutting and patching has been accomplished only for their work. B. Perform painting, including preparation, materials, workmanship and number of coats under Section 099000 - Painting. Extend painting of surfaces patched to natural breaks, such as corners, as approved by the Architect and Owner.
3.9
CLEANING A. Perform periodic and final cleaning as specified in Section 017400 - Cleaning. 1. Clean Owner-occupied areas daily. B. At completion of work of each trade, clean area and make surfaces ready for work of successive trades. C. At completion of alterations work in each area, provide final cleaning and return space to a condition suitable for use by Owner.
END OF SECTION
MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\024119CGA.doc
024119 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
024119 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\024119CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School Renovation
B. The contractor shall submit for Engineer$of$Record’s review, calculations that are prepared & sealed by a registered Professional Engineer demonstrating that the substituted product is capable of achieving the pertinent equivalent performance values of the specified product using the appropriate design procedure and/or standard(s) as required by the Building Code. In addition, the calculations shall specify the diameter and embedment depth of the substituted product.
SECTION 031510 POST INSTALLED ANCHORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
CONTRACT CONDITIONS A. Drawings, Details of Construction, and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division $ 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES A. Requirements pertaining to post$installed anchors for materials and equipment. This section pertains to Divisions 5 of these specifications that require post$installed anchors, unless specified otherwise.
1.3
C. Any increase in material costs for such submittal shall be the responsibility of the contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Concrete and Masonry Screw Anchors
A. Division 1 – General Requirements
1. Masonry Screw Anchors: (Grouted Masonry Only) a. Carbon steel heat$treated or hardened. b. Zinc$plated per ASTM B 633, Class SC1, Type I, mechanically galvanized per ASTM B 695, or equivalent coating. c. Evaluation report issued by ICC$ES required. d. Tested per ICC$ES AC106 for all mandatory tests (and seismic tests): e. Acceptable products include: 1) Simpson Strong$Tie: Titen HD (ICC$ES ESR$1056). 2) Hilti: HUS$H (ICC$ES ESR$2369). 3) Powers Fasteners: Wedge$Bolt+ (ICC$ES ESR$1678).
B. Division 5 – Metals 1.4
REFERENCES A. ASTM B 633 – Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel; 2007 B. ASTM B 695 – Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel; 2004 C. ICC$ES AC106 – Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Concrete or Masonry Elements; 2006
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Post$Installed anchors and related materials shall be listed by one or more of the following agencies, as applicable: 1. ICC Evaluation Service 2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and/or Factory Mutual (FM)
1.6
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit data for proprietary materials, manufacturer’s specifications (including finishes and/or materials), Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and installation procedures. B. Test Reports: ICC$ES listings.
1.7
MATERIALS
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install anchors in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and, where required, requirements of ICC$ES evaluation reports. B. Conform to manufacturer's requirements for, but not limited to, hole drilling methods, hole size, hole cleaning, moisture presence in holes, and required edge distance and spacing.
SUBSTITUTIONS A. Only manufacturers with an ICC$ES listing will be considered for substitution requests.
POST INSTALLED ANCHORS
031510 1 of 2 Printed on 01/15/2013
Akin Road Elementary School Renovation
C. Use special tools when recommended by manufacturer for installation of anchors unless otherwise permitted specifically by the Engineer or Architect of Record. D. Drill holes in masonry in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer shall, on request, provide the services of a field representative to demonstrate to and train installers in proper installation techniques.
type and dimensions, concrete type and compressive strength, pre$drilled hole dimensions and cleaning, embedment, spacing, edge distances, slab thickness, tightening torque, and any other items requiring inspection by product's ICC approval report. Qualifications: Technical II or Structural I.
END OF SECTION
B. Structural Testing and Special Inspection 1. Structural Special Inspection shall be performed by qualified parties as specified herein, and in accordance with the provision of Section 014533. 2. Special Inspection, periodic or continuous, of post$installed anchors shall be provided as specified herein, but not less than as required by ICC$ES evaluation reports. 3. Definitions: ASNT $ American Society for Non$Destructive Testing 4. Personnel Qualifications a. Special Inspector Technical I: ASNT Level I, employed by a testing agency and supervised by an ASNT Level III with a minimum of 10 years experience. b. Special Inspector Technical II: ASNT Level II, employed by a testing agency and supervised by an ASNT Level III with a minimum of 10 years experience. c. Special Inspector – Structural I: Graduate civil/structural engineer, or other personnel acceptable to the SER, with experience in design of structural systems of the project type. Inspections shall be performed under the direct supervision of a licensed structural engineer, as defined in Section 014533. The licensed engineer shall review and approve all inspection reports. 5. The Owner will provide the following tests and inspections: a. Continuous special inspection during installation to verify materials delivered to site comply with contract documents, bolt
POST INSTALLED ANCHORS
031510 2 of 2 Printed on 01/15/2013
Akin Road Elementary School Renovation
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010a.
SECTION 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
K. ASTM A992/A992M $ Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2011.
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
CONTRACT CONDITIONS
L. ASTM F959 $ Standard Specification for Compressible$Washer$Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners; 2009.
A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division $ 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2
M. ASTM F1852 $ Twist Off Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2002
SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural steel framing members.
1.3
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
N. AWS A2.4 $ Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 2012.
A. Section 014533 $ Structural Testing and Special Inspection.
O. AWS D1.1/D1.1M $ Structural Welding Code $ Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
B. Section 031510 $ Post$Installed Anchors. C. Section 055000 $ Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work. 1.4
REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISC (MAN) $ Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005. B. AISC 360 $ Specification for Steel Buildings; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005. C. AISC S303 $ Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005. D. AISC S348 (Research Council on Structural Connections) $ Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; 2004. E. ASTM A36/A36M $ Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008. F. ASTM A53/A53M $ Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot$Dipped, Zinc$Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012. G. ASTM A307 $ Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2010. H. ASTM A325 $ Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010. I. ASTM A325M $ Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric); 2009. J. ASTM A500/A500M $ Standard Specification for Cold$Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
1.5
SUBMITTALS A. See Division 1 for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Review the Contract Documents prior to preparing shop drawings to determine if the structure is in conflict with OSHA requirements or any other safety regulation. Notify the Architect if any conflicts are noted. Do not prepare shop drawings affected by the conflict until the conflict is resolved. 2. Prepare complete shop and setting drawings based on referenced AISC Specifications. 3. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners. 4. Indicate type and location of shop and field connections. Detail all required field welds. 5. Indicate cambers. 6. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 7. If shop drawings are resubmitted after the original review, identify all changes made to the shop drawings after the original submittal with clouds or similar markings. C. Submit AISC Quality Certification Program certificates (for reduction in shop special inspections only if the fabricator is so certified) and welder qualifications to the Special Inspector$Technical.
051200 " 1 of 5 Printed on 01/15/2013
Akin Road Elementary School Renovation
D. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.6
assure proper elevations. Be fully responsible for accuracy of all measurements and laying out of the work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Manual of Steel Construction".
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
A. Steel Angles, Plates, and Channels: ASTM A36/A36M.
B. Fabrication plant shall be certified in category I or II according to the requirements of the AISC Quality Certification Program and shall be acceptable to the structural engineer, Architect, and building official.
B. Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A992/A992M. C. Cold$Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B.
C. A fabricator without AISC certification may be acceptable subject to the following.
D. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B, Finish black. E. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade A.
1. The fabrication plant shall be acceptable to the Structural Engineer, Architect, and Building Official.
F. High$Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, medium carbon, plain.
2. The fabrication plant shall maintain written, detailed fabrication and quality control procedures that provide a basis for inspection control of the workmanship and for the fabricator's ability to conform to the construction documents.
1. Tension control bolts meeting ASTM F1852 are also acceptable. G. Load Indicator Washers: Provide washers complying with ASTM F 959 at all connections requiring high$strength bolts. Not required if tension control bolts are used.
3. The Contractor shall pay for inspection during steel fabrication. This inspection shall be conducted by the Owner's inspection company at the fabrication plant.
H. Welding Materials: AISC Specification A35 and referenced AWS specifications, type required for materials being welded, E70 electrodes.
D. Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in Minnesota.
I. Shop and Touch$Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, compatible with finish coatings, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Codes and Standards:
J. Post$installed anchors: See Section 031510
1. AISC $ Manual of Steel Construction. 2. AISC 360 $ Specification for Structural Steel Buildings 3. AISC $ Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges 4. AWS D1.1. 5. AISC S348 $ Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts 6. SSPC $ SSPC Painting Manual $ Volume 2 F. Provide personnel qualified according to AWS D1.1 for all shop and field welding. 1.7
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Verify all dimensions given on the Drawings and make such field measurements as are necessary to lay out the work properly and
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
MATERIALS
2.2
FABRICATION A. Fabricate according to referenced AISC publications. B. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible. C. Do not substitute sections or modify details without written approval of the Structural Engineer. Provide full$length pieces between connections or splices indicated on the drawings. Do not permit built$up lengths. Do not use warped or damaged sections. D. Design shop and field connections unless detailed on the Drawings. Use standard connections as shown in Part 9 of the AISC Manual where possible. Bolt field connections, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
051200 " 2 of 5 Printed on 01/15/2013
Akin Road Elementary School Renovation
E. Perform bracing, blocking, cutting, fitting, drilling, tapping, welding, punching, etc., as required to complete work and to join work of others. Weld clip angles and plates to beams and punch holes for fastening work of other trades as shown on the Drawings. 2.3
using an ordinary spud wrench. Verify that all parts are in contact. Use self$locking nuts or upset bolt threads to prevent nuts from bracing off. H. Where A325 bolts are used, tighten bolts and provide washers in accordance with "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". Use tension control bolts or direct tension indicators for slip$critical (SC) and fully tensioned bolts (FT).
FINISH A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 3 unless otherwise indicated.
I. Pre$heat material to be welded and maintain interpass temperatures as required. Do not weld below 0 degrees F.
B. Shop prime structural steel members to a DFT of 2.0 $ 3.5 mils. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed or field welded. 2.4
J. Do not cut steel or enlarge holes without written approval of the Structural Engineer.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. If Fabricator is not a Category I AISC certified fabricator, see field quality control section of Part 3 for special inspection requirements of shop fabricated work.
K. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect/Engineer and Structural Engineer. L. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete or specified to be unprimed.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may properly proceed.
3.2
ERECTION
M. Repair or replace structural steel damaged during shipment, unloading, or erection at no cost to the Owner. 3.3
A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges".
A. After erection and welding of steel, remove clay, mud or other foreign materials from all members.
B. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Exercise care in handling structural steel during unloading, storage, and erection to prevent bends, twists, or other damage. D. Place structural steel stored at the site on substantial shores or blocking. Provide shores or blocking of sufficient size and strength to prevent any part of the steel from touching the ground. E. Remove dirt, oil, loose scale, burrs, pits, paint and other defects that would prevent solid seating of parts. F. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. G. Where A307 bolts are used, tighten to a snug tight fit as obtained with the full effort of a man
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
CLEANING AND REPAIR
B. Apply a field touch$up coat of paint on all welded connections and damaged areas using the same color and type of paint used on the shop coat. 3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Structural Testing and Special Inspection 1. Structural Special Inspection shall be performed by qualified parties as specified herein, and in accordance with the provision of Section 014533. 2. If special inspection of Fabricator's work is required, special inspector may test and inspect structural steel at plant before shipment. 3. Definitions: a. ASNT $ American Society for Non$Destructive Testing b. CAWI $ American Welding Society Certified Associate Weld Inspector
051200 " 3 of 5 Printed on 01/15/2013
Akin Road Elementary School Renovation
c.
CWI $ American Welding Society Certified Weld Inspector
4. Personnel Qualifications a. Special Inspector Technical I: CAWI or ASNT Level I, employed by a testing agency and supervised by a CWI or ASNT Level III with a minimum of 10 years experience. b. Special Inspector Technical II: CAWI with minimum 3 years experience or ASNT Level II, employed by a testing agency and supervised by a CWI or ASNT Level III with a minimum of 10 years experience. c. Special Inspector – Structural I: Graduate civil/structural engineer, or other personnel acceptable to the SER, with experience in design of structural systems of the project type. Inspections shall be performed under the direct supervision of a licensed structural engineer, as defined in Section 014533. The licensed engineer shall review and approve all inspection reports. d. Individuals performing welding inspection must be AWS certified. 5. The Owner will provide the following tests and inspections: a. Perform tests and inspections required below. Bolt and welding inspections for shop fabricated work may be reduced or deleted if fabrication shop satisfies AISC Quality Certification Program $ Category I, or more stringent criteria. Any reduction in tests or inspections is subject to approval of Building Official and SER. b. Test high strength bolted connections according to the requirements of RCSC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts", and as follows: 1) Preparation: Visually inspect mating surfaces and bolt type for all bolted connections for general conformance with the contract documents prior to bolting. Qualifications:
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
Technical II. Slip Critical Bolts and Fully Tensioned Bolts: Visually observe all connections. Verify that all plies of connected elements have been brought into contact. Verify all tips are removed from "twist$off" bolts or direct tension indicators show fully tensioned bolts. Qualifications: Technical II. 3) Bearing Bolts: Visually observe all connections to confirm all plies of connected elements have been brought into contact. (Applies only to bolts designed with threads included in failure plane; all other bolts require testing as for fully tensioned bolts.) Qualifications: Technical II. Welding Procedures and Preparation: Qualifications: Technical II. Verify the following: 1) Qualifications of all welders as AWS certified. 2) Proposed welding procedures and materials. 3) Adequate preparation of fraying surfaces. 4) Preheat and interpass temperatures of steel, proper technique and sequence of welding, and cleaning and number of passes. Test and inspect welding as follows 1) Fillet Welds: Visually inspect 100% of all fillet welds, for size, length, and quality, per AWS D1.1. Qualifications: Technical II. 2) Partial Penetration Welds: Test 100% of all partial penetration welds exceeding 5/16 inch, using Ultrasonic Testing per AWS D1.1, Section 6. Visually inspect 100 % and test 25% of all penetration welds less than 5/16 inch using Magnetic Particle Testing per ASTM E 709 performed on root pass and on finished weld. Qualifications: Technical II. 2)
c.
d.
051200 " 4 of 5 Printed on 01/15/2013
Akin Road Elementary School Renovation
3)
e.
f.
g.
Full Penetration Welds: Test 100% of all full penetration welds exceeding 5/16 inch, using Ultrasonic Testing per AWS D1.1 Section 6. Visually inspect 100% and test 25% of all full penetration welds less that 5/16 inch, using Magnetic Particle Testing per ASTM E 709 performed on root pass and on finished weld. Qualifications: Technical II. Submittals: Verify mill test reports and other submitted documentation for compliance with contract documents. Qualifications: Structural I Materials: Verify materials delivered to site comply with contract documents and approved shop drawings. Qualifications: Technical I Detail Compatibility: On a periodic basis, inspect the following to verify member orientation, configuration, type, and size comply with details indicated on the contract documents and shop drawings. Qualifications: Structural I. 1) Permanent bracing and stiffening members. 2) Proper applications of joint details and conditions. Observations need not exceed 25% at standard connections. 3) Other work critical to the integrity of the building structure.
END OF SECTION
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 " 5 of 5 Printed on 01/15/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS B. Design requirements specified herein are in addition to applicable building code requirements; the more stringent requirements shall govern.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
C. Structural calculations prepared and certified for the entire stair assembly, ladders and railings by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Minnesota.
A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Shop Fabricated Ferrous Metal Fabrications Manufactured to Conventional Details From Standard Metal Shapes and Plates; as Indicated on the Drawings, Specified Herein; Including All Related Fittings, Connections, Attachments and Accessories; Prime Painted and Galvanized.
1.5
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate detailed fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication; Include profiles, sizes, plans, elevations, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories.
C. Metal Fabrications, including but not limited to the following:
1. Design Calculations: Submit shop drawings showing design calculations and data with structural engineer’s certification.
1. Angles, Channels and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing.
C. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
2. Steel framing and supports mechanical and electrical equipment and for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections.
D. Welder's Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section 014300. Manufacturer's certificates, certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualifications within the previous 12 months.
D. Schedule of Items at End of This Section. 1.2
PRODUCT FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
NOT
A. Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete. B. Section 042000 - Unit Masonry System: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry. 1.3
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 014523 - Testing and Inspection Services. B. Section 051200 - Structural Steel: Structural steel anchor bolts. C. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Treated wood blocking. D. Section 099000 - Paints and Coatings: Paint touchup and finish.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Railing assembly designed to withstand a minimum concentrated load of 250 lb. applied in any direction at any point on the top rail, or 50 lb./lin. ft., whichever is greater.
METAL FABRICATIONS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\055000CGA.doc
SUBMITTALS
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Prepare Shop Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Minnesota. B. Perform Work in accordance with AISC Specifications for Architectural Exposed Structural Steel. C. Perform all welding operations under provisions of AWS, D1.1 - "Structural Welding Code Steel"; AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code-Aluminum"; AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel" and AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code--Stainless Steel" as applicable D. Welders’ Certificates: Submit under provision of Section 014300, certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. E. SSPC, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications, "Steel Structures Painting Manual".
055000 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
1. Metal primers shall be chromate free and VOC compliant. 1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle and protect products to the site under provisions of Section 016000. B. Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction to site in time for installation. C. Store steel members above ground on platforms, skids or other acceptable supports. Protect steel from corrosion. D. Store other materials in a watertight and dry place until ready for incorporation into the Work.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work. 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabrication of products without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
FERROUS METAL MATERIALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the work, provide new materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness, and, for steel sheet, variation in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet. All steel tubing and plate shall have sharp edging, unless shown otherwise. B. Steel Sections: ASTM A36. C. Steel Tubing: Cold-Formed, ASTM A500, Grade C.
055000 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
D. Plates: ASTM A283. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B. 1. Galvanized: Exterior locations, and other areas where indicated. 2. Interior Type F, standard weight (schedule 40), unless indicated otherwise. F. Anchors-Inserts: 1. Threaded Type: ASTM A27; hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. 2. Slotted Type: ASTM A283; hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. 3. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. a. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn5. b. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 or 2 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F593 and nuts complying with ASTM F594. G. Fasteners: Zinc coated, galvanized for exterior use or when used in exterior walls, in accordance with ASTM A153. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required for the installation of miscellaneous metal items. 1. Standard Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon type, ASTM A307, Grade A. 2. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561. 3. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FFS-92. 4. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S111. 5. Plain Washers: Round, general assembly grade carbon steel, FS FF-W-92. 6. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84. 7. Other Fastener Types: application.
As required to suit
METAL FABRICATIONS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\055000CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
H. Welding Electrodes: Appropriate type for the metal to be welded; comply with AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 2.2
buckling, opening up of joints, and over-stressing of welds and fasteners. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
E. Welding:
A. Non-Shrink Metallic Grout: Premixed, factorypackaged, ferrous aggregate grout complying with CE CRD-C 621, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy duty loading applications of type specified in this section.
1. Weld all shop connections and all field connections, unless noted or specified otherwise. 2. Weld corners and seams, continuously and in accordance with the requirements of the AWS Code.
B. Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C 621. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this section.
3. Employ welders qualified in accordance with the requirements of the AWS Code. F. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
C. Interior Anchoring Cement: Premixed, factorypackaged, non-shrink, non-staining, hydraulic controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Use for interior applications only.
G. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.
D. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-shrink, non-staining, hydraulic controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without need for protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and is recommended for exterior use by manufacturer. 2.3
H. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. I. Ease exposed edges to a radius of 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work,
FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated on the Drawings, but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication. B. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. C. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. D. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication and installation of metal assemblies to prevent
METAL FABRICATIONS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\055000CGA.doc
J. Shop Assembly: Pre-assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for re-assembly and coordinate installation. 2.4
FINISHES A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. C. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metals: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead-free, universal modified alkyd primer selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated,
055000 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for re-galvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P21035 or SSPC-Paint-20.
completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2
A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates, to appropriate sections.
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187. 2.5
B. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers. 2.6
MISCELLANEOUS SUPPORTS
FRAMING
AND
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated on the Drawings, or which are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete the work. B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated on the Drawings, and required to receive adjacent other construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connections. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware, hangers and similar items. 1. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
C. Coordinate and furnish anchorage; setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.
ROUGH HARDWARE A. Provide bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring and securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in Division 6.
EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper
055000 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
PREPARATION
3.3
INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to inplace construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, throughbolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. C. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded due to shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following:
METAL FABRICATIONS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\055000CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
E. Inspect and test special finish primer outlined above.
3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent and has the appearance of a weld free butt jointed connection at inside and outside corners, or the appearance of a continuous piece at straight butt joints. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint or zinc chromate primer. G. Obtain Architects written approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. H. Install Strut System Components into final position true to line, level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3.4
ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm)
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports in accordance with the provisions of Section 014523 B. Conventional testing and inspection services herein describe those items not specifically required by the 2006 International Building Code as amended by the 2007 Minnesota State Building Code but are considered essential to the proper performance of the building systems.
3.6
CLEANING A. Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Section 099000 - Painting and Coatings. B. For galvanized surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.
3.7
SCHEDULE A. The Schedule is a list of principal items only. Refer to Drawing details for items not specifically scheduled. B. Ledge and Shelf Angles, Channels and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: Steel for support of metal decking, joists, masonry and miscellaneous items; galvanized to G90 requirements, and prime paint finish. C. Steel Framing and Supports: Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. D. All other miscellaneous metal fabrications supplied on a project of this type, and indicated on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
C. Special structural testing and inspection services herein described include items required by the 2006 IBC as amended by the 2007 Minnesota State Building Code, and other items which in the professional judgment of the Structural Engineer of Record are critical to the integrity of the building structure. METAL FABRICATIONS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\055000CGA.doc
055000 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
055000 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
METAL FABRICATIONS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\055000CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY B. Wood Treatment Data: Submit chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installation and finishing of treated materials.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1. Preservative Treatment: For each type specified, include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained and conformance with applicable standards.
A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Rough Carpentry; as Indicated on the Drawings, Specified Herein; Including But Not Limited To: 1. Treated Wood Blocking, Shims, Grounds, Nailers, Equipment Bases, Furring and Curbs.
2. Water-Borne Treatment: Include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated prior to shipment to project site.
2. Concealed Treated Wood Blocking for Support of Hardware, Toilet Accessories, and Miscellaneous Equipment.
3. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Include certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with specified standard and other requirements.
3. Medium Density Fiberboard as Core Material for Plastic Laminate Construction.
1.4
A. Rough Carpentry Lumber: Visible grade stamp, of agency certified by American Forest & Paper Association (AF&PA).
4. Treated Plywood Backing Panels for Electrical and Telephone Equipment. 5. Treated Wood Framing for Metal Locker Bases. 6. All Related Adhesives.
Fasteners,
Attachments
B. Perform work in accordance with the following agencies:
and
1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC.
7. All Related Preservative and Fire-Retardant Wood Treatments. 1.2
2. Plywood and OSB Grading Agency: Certified by APA.
RELATED SECTIONS
C. In addition to other legal requirements, comply with the following:
A. Section 055000 Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous item requiring backing materials. B. Section 062000 - Finish Carpentry: Miscellaneous items requiring concealed backing materials.
1. Pressure Treated Wood: Treatment plant and preservative acceptable to governing building code.
C. Section 064000 - Architectural Woodwork: Miscellaneous items requiring concealed backing materials.
2. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Testing agency UL label rating acceptable to governing building code.
D. Section 075310 – Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: Patching existing roof. E. Section 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Requirements for wood nailers and blocking. F. Section 102810 Toilet Accessories: Miscellaneous items requiring backing materials. 1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0123\div2-33\061000CGA.doc
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle and protect Products to site under provisions of Section 016000. B. Do not deliver shop fabricated carpentry items until site conditions are adequate to receive the work. Protect items from weather while in transit. C. Store indoors, in ventilated areas with a constant, minimum temperature of 60 degrees F, maximum relative humidity of 25 to 55 percent.
061000 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
D. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces.
1. Fire-Retardant Treated. 2.3
E. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. 1.6
A. Lumber: Standard light framing grade, Douglas Fir, #3 Southern Pine or #2 Western Hemlock, sound and thoroughly seasoned with maximum 19 percent moisture content at time roofing is installed.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
1. Preservative Treated.
A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow attachment of other work. 1.7
2. Fire treated where exposed to concealed spaces. B. Wood Structural Panels (Plywood): APA rated sheathing, Exposure 1, Structural 1, and thickness as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Fire treated where exposed to concealed spaces.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual locations of rough carpentry and other construction to which rough carpentry must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
2.4
LUMBER - GENERAL
2.5
B. Maximum 19 percent moisture content for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment.
B. Grade Stamps: Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing and mill.
C. Grade: Standard grade light framing size lumber of any species or board size lumber as required. No. 3 Common or Standard Grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules or No. 3 boards per SIB rules.
C. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS-20, for moisture content specified for each use.
D. All interior wood blocking and furring, including all 1x or 2x members shall be fire-retardant, treated wood with a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
D. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. CONCEALED WOOD BLOCKING A. Lumber: Standard light framing grade, Douglas Fir, #3 Southern Pine or #2 Western Hemlock, sound and thoroughly seasoned with maximum 19 percent moisture content at time roofing is installed. 061000 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. Provide wood for support or attachment of other work, including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes indicated on the Drawings, and worked into shapes shown.
A. Lumber Standards: Manufacture lumber to comply with "PS 20"; American Softwood Lumber Standard graded in accordance with established grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC); maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
2.2
DIMENSION LUMBER A. Light Framing: Provide “Stud” or “Standard” grade lumber for stud framing (2 - 4 inch thick, 2 6 inch wide, ten (10) feet and shorter) and “Standard” grade for other light framing (2 - 4 inch thick, 2 - 4 inch wide, and species, construction grade).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ROOF BLOCKING
2.6
CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Plywood Backing Panels: Mounting electrical and telephone equipment, provide fire-retardant treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D Plugged INT with exterior type moisture resistant glue, in thickness indicated on the Drawings, or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than 5/8 inches. ROUGH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0123\div2-33\061000CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
2.7
11-0123
7. Screw-Holding Capacity: Force required to pull one (1) inch long No. 10 sheet metal screw from material:
MEDIUM DENSITY FIBERBOARD A. Exterior Grade, Medium Density Fiberboard: Wood based panel product, manufactured from softwood fibers, minimum 90 percent of which obtained from wood residuals, bonded under heat and pressure with formaldehyde free synthetic resin binders, meeting requirements of ANSI A208.2 Product Class MD-EXTERIOR, and having the following properties for sheet material thickness up to, and including, 3/4 inch: 1. Acceptable Product: “MEDEX”.
a. Face: Minimum 325 lbf (1445 N). b. Edge: Minimum 275 lbf (1223 N). 8. Moisture Content: Maximum six (6) percent. 9. Panel Thickness Tolerance: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm), plus or minus. C. Fire Retardant, Medium Density Fiberboard: Wood based panel product, manufactured from softwood fibers, minimum 90 percent of which obtained from wood residuals, saturated with fire retardant additives, then bonded under heat and pressure with formaldehyde free synthetic resin binders, meeting requirements of ANSI A208.2 Product Class MD, and having the following properties for sheet material thickness up to, and including, 3/4 inch:
Medite Corporation;
2. Density: Minimum 46 PCF. 3. Internal Bond Strength: Minimum 130 PSI. 4. Modulus of Rupture: Minimum 5,600 PSI. 5. Modulus of Elasticity: Minimum 575,000 PSI. 6. Hardness: Minimum 1,000 lb. (4400 N), Janka modified.
1. Acceptable Product: “MEDITE-FR”.
7. Screw-Holding Capacity: Force required to pull one (1) inch long No. 10 sheet metal screw from material:
2. Density: Minimum 45 PCF. 3. Internal Bond Strength: Minimum 100 PSI.
a. Face: Minimum 325 lbf (1445 N).
4. Modulus of Rupture: Minimum 3,500 PSI.
b. Edge: Minimum 275 lbf (1223 N).
5. Modulus of Elasticity: Minimum 375,000 PSI.
8. Moisture Content: Maximum six (6) percent.
6. Hardness: Minimum 1,000 lb. (4400 N), Janka modified.
9. Panel Thickness Tolerance: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm), plus or minus.
7. Screw-Holding Capacity: Force required to pull one (1) inch long No. 10 sheet metal screw from material:
B. Interior Grade, Medium Density Fiberboard: Wood based panel product, manufactured from softwood fibers, minimum 90 percent of which obtained from wood residuals, bonded under heat and pressure with formaldehyde free synthetic resin binders, meeting requirements of ANSI A208.2 Product Class MD, and having the following properties for sheet material thickness up to, and including, 3/4 inch: 1. Acceptable Product: “MEDITE II”.
Medite Corporation;
a. Face: Minimum 300 lbf (1334 N). b. Edge: Minimum 225 lbf (1000 N). 8. Moisture Content: Maximum six (6) percent. 9. Panel Thickness Tolerance: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm), plus or minus.
Medite Corporation;
10. Fire Resistance: Class 1 surface flame spread when tested in accordance with UL 723.
2. Density: Minimum 46 PCF. 3. Internal Bond Strength: Minimum 115 PSI. 4. Modulus of Rupture: Minimum 5,200 PSI. 5. Modulus of Elasticity: Minimum 520,000 PSI.
2.8
WOOD LOCKER BASES A. Provide concealed fire-treated, 2 by wood framing at locker bases as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Verify details with Section 105100.
6. Hardness: Minimum 1,150 lb. (5115 N), Janka modified.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0123\div2-33\061000CGA.doc
061000 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
2.9
Akin Road Elementary School
2. All fire retardant wood must have a flame spread of less than 25 when tested in an extended 30 minute tunnel test in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255 or UL 723.
LUMBER SEASONING A. Allow lumber to attain a state of equilibrium with the local atmosphere prior to incorporating into the Work.
3. All lumber must be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent after treatment. All plywood must be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent after treatment.
B. If wood treatment specifications state the maximum percentage of moisture content at the time of treatment, comply with those requirements. 2.10
4. All fire retardant wood must comply with the requirements of AWPA Standard C-20 for lumber and C-27 for plywood.
WOOD TREATMENT
A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is specified herein to be treated or is indicated on the Drawings as "Treated Wood" or "Treated Plywood", comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood). Mark each treated item with the AWPA Quality Mark Requirements.
5. Carbon steel, galvanized steel, aluminum, copper and red brass in contact with the fire retardant treated wood must exhibit corrosion rates less than one mil per year when tested in accordance with FS MIL-L-19140, Paragraph 4.6.5.2.
1. Pressure-Treated Above Ground Items: Provide with water-borne preservatives to comply with AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood). After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent respectively. Treat indicated items and the following: a. Blocking, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing. Note: The following items should not be treated if using built-up roofing system, Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, treat these items only as recommended by the roofing manufacturer or roofing consultant. b. Interior wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. c. Wood framing members less than eighteen (18) inches above grade. d. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. B. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. The fire retardant chemical shall provide protection against termites and fungal decay and must be registered for use as a wood preservative by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
6. The fire retardant chemicals used to treat the lumber must be free of halogens, sulfates and ammonium phosphate. 7. Testing on the fire performance, strength and corrosive properties of the fire retardant treated wood shall be recognized by issuance of a National Evaluation Services Report. C. All interior dressed lumber shall be S4S, unless indicated otherwise. Interior studs, blocking, shim material and plywood shall be performance rated and give grade and species. 2.11
ACCESSORIES
A. Nails, Spikes and Staples: Galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity locations, and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations; size and type to suit applications. B. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Medium carbon steel; sized to suit application, galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity locations, and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations. C. Fasteners: Electro-hot-dipped galvanized steel for exterior, high humidity, and treated wood locations; plain finish elsewhere; Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolts or power activated type for anchorage to steel. D. Building Paper: 30 lb. asphalt felt type.
061000 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
ROUGH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0123\div2-33\061000CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
E. Concealed Metal Strap Backing: Minimum 18 gauge sheet metal by twelve (12) inches wide, continuous and fastened to metal studs for length indicated on the Drawings.
C. Provide treated wood curbs at all roof openings, unless noted as prefabricated curbs by equipment supplier. Form wood curbs corners by lapping side members alternately.
1. Behind all wall cabinets for support.
D. Place horizontal members laid flat, crown side up. E. Provide fire retardant treated plywood (with exterior glue) at all electrical and telephone backing panels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
F. Securely attach carpentry work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as indicated and as required by recognized industry standards. Comply with all installation instructions as recommended by manufacturers for installation of their products.
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
G. Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to lines and cut and fitted.
B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work.
H. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2
I. Wood Grounds, Nailers, Blocking and Sleepers: Provide wherever indicated and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as indicated and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate locations with other work involved.
PREPARATION A. Coordinate with all specification sections that might require concealed wood blocking for surface mounted materials or equipment. B. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints, or optimum joint arrangement.
3.3
3.5
A. Install in straight lines, level planes and at proper elevation. B. Top surface of horizontal blocking is to match the surface elevation of the roof insulation.
FRAMING, FURRING AND STRIPPING A. Erect wood furring, stripping and nailing members true to lines and levels. Do not deviate from true alignment more than 1/4 inch.
C. Do not use warped wood members unless they can be adequately fastened to permanently hold them in their required alignment.
B. Space members as indicated on Drawings.
D. At vertical roof edge blocking, provide staggered joints for all layers and minimum twelve (12) inch laps.
C. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths. 3.4
INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Workmanship: Perform all Work in accordance with the best Standards of Practice relating to the trade and carefully plan and lay out the Work as required on the Drawings. Properly accommodate the Work of other trades. B. Treated wood shall not be installed in direct contact with light metal framing or light metal decking. Provide #30 asphalt felt or similar barrier material between treated wood and metal framing.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0123\div2-33\061000CGA.doc
ROOF BLOCKING
3.6
SITE TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIAL A. Brush apply two (2) coats of preservative treatment for wood in contact with cementitious materials, roofing and related metal flashing. B. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Re-dry to 19 percent moisture content. C. Treat all site-sawn ends. Allow preservative to cure prior to placing members.
061000 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
3.7
Akin Road Elementary School
FIRE RETARDANT SITE TREATMENT A. Field Cuts: 1. Do not rip or mill fire retardant treated lumber. Only end cuts, drilling holes and joining cuts are permitted unless the material carries a ULI approved milling after treatment classification. All cuts on plywood are considered end cuts due to the nature of the product. B. Application: 1. Fire retardant treated wood used in structural applications shall be graded or span-rated material that has been applied using the design adjustments provided in NER-303. A corrosion resistant fastener, such as hot-dipped galvanized nails or better, shall be used. C. Fastening: 1. Nailing Schedules and Panel Spacing: In accordance with the APA- The Engineered Wood Association’s “Design and Construction Guide for Residential and Commercial Uses” (E030). The use of ply-clips is also required where specified by the APA. It should be noted that APA does not permit the use of staples for untreated plywood. Fire retardant treated plywood shall be nailed, and not stapled.
3.8
CONCEALED WOOD BLOCKING A. Install concealed wood blocking within stud wall spaces at all locations indicated on the Drawings, and dimensions required by the various specification sections. B. Install wood blocking structurally sound to carry all imposed loads.
3.9
CONCEALED METAL STRAP BACKING A. Attach sheet metal strap backing directly to stud framing with minimum two (2) self-tapping screws per each stud behind all casework wall cabinets, and other locations indicated on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
061000 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
ROUGH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0123\div2-33\061000CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 062000 - FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Finish Carpentry Items, Other Than Shop Prefabricated Casework; as Indicated on the Drawings, Specified Herein; Including Related Hardware, Attachments and Accessories. 1. Wood Treatment, Including Fire Retardant and Preservative Treatment. C. Finish Carpentry Items; Including, But Not Limited To: 1. Hardwood Trim; to Receive Transparent Finish. 2. Hardwood Veneer Plywood Panels; to Receive Transparent Finish. 3. Hardwood Wall Caps. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Treated wood blocking, grounds and wood support framing. B. Section 064000 - Architectural Woodwork: Custom cabinets, countertops and hardware. C. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Interior metal stud framing and gypsum board finish. D. Section 099000 – Paints and Coatings: Field painting and finishing of carpentry items. 1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component elevations and dimensions, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, accessories and finishes. C. Product Data: Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials, wood preservative treatment materials and application instructions. D. Samples: Submit samples of finish wood and prefinished items illustrating specified finish.
FINISH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0123\div2-33\062000CGA.doc
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Premium Quality Standard Requirements. B. Factory mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency identification; except omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent finish, and submit mill certificate that material has been inspected and graded in accordance with requirements it cannot be marked on a concealed surface. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fireretardant materials are indicated, provide materials with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation. D. Fabricator: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience. 1.5
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to the International Building Code for fire retardant requirements for the following specific items: 1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 016000. B. Do not deliver shop fabricated carpentry items until site conditions are adequate to receive the Work. Protect items from weather while in transit. C. Store finished items indoors, in ventilated areas with a constant, minimum temperature of 60 degrees F, maximum relative humidity of 25 to 55 percent. D. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. E. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials.
062000 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
1.7
Akin Road Elementary School
1. Hardwood Trim: Plain sliced Maple, field transparent finish under provisions of Section 099000.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify actual locations of finish carpentry items and other construction to which carpentry items must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. 1.8
2. Hardwood Wall Caps: Solid hardwood lumber, sizes and profiles as detailed on the Drawings, plain sliced Maple graded in accordance with AWI Premium Standards, and field transparent finish under provisions of Section 099000.
COORDINATION
3. Hardwood Edge at Hardwood Plywood Shelves and Paneling: Solid hardwood lumber, plain sliced Maple graded in accordance with AWI Premium Standards, profile and sizes as indicated on the Drawings, and field transparent finish under provisions of Section 099000.
A. Coordinate the work with plumbing and electrical rough-in, installation of associated and adjacent components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.2 2.1
LUMBER MATERIALS
A. General: Nominal sizes as indicated, except as shown by detailed dimensions. Provide dressed, or worked and dressed lumber, as applicable, manufactured to the actual sizes as required by Department of Commerce (DOC) PS-20 or to actual sizes and pattern as shown, unless otherwise indicated. B. Moisture Content of Softwood Lumber: Provide kiln-dried lumber having a moisture content from time of manufacturer until time of installation not greater than values required by the applicable grading rules of the respective grading and inspecting agency for the species and product indicated. C. Moisture Content of Hardwood Lumber: Provide kiln-dried lumber having a moisture content from time of manufacturer until time of installation within the ranges required in the referenced woodworking standard. D. Lumber for Transparent Finish (Stained or Clear): Use pieces made of solid lumber stock. E. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; Graded in accordance with APA Standards; moisture content of 6 - 8 percent. F. Hardwood Lumber: Graded in accordance with AWI Premium Standards; Grade I for transparent finishes, Grade II for opaque finishes; moisture content of 6 - 8 percent; sizes and profiles as indicated on the Drawings, unless indicated otherwise below; and quality suitable for transparent finish under provisions of Section 09900, for the following items:
062000 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
SHEET MATERIALS
A. Softwood Plywood: PS 1, Graded in accordance with AWI Premium Standards; particleboard and veneer core. B. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA, HP-1 Grade in accordance with AWI Standards; particleboard and veneer core; type of adhesive recommended for application. 1. Hardwood veneer plywood paneling, plain sliced Maple veneer grade in accordance with AWI Premium Standards, thickness as indicated on the Drawings, hardwood edge, and field transparent finish under provisions of Section 099000. C. Interior Grade, Medium Density Fiberboard: Wood based panel product, manufactured from softwood fibers, minimum 90 percent of which obtained from wood residuals, bonded under heat and pressure with formaldehyde free synthetic resin binders, meeting requirements of ANSI A208.2 Product Class MD, and having the following properties for sheet material thickness up to, and including, 3/4 inch (19 mm): 1. Acceptable Product: “MEDITE II”.
Medite Corporation;
2. Density: Minimum 46 PCF (737 kg/cu m). 3. Internal Bond Strength: (792 kPa).
Minimum 115 PSI
4. Modulus of Rupture: Minimum 5,200 PSI (35 Mpa). 5. Modulus of Elasticity: Minimum 520,000 PSI (3584 Mpa).
FINISH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0123\div2-33\062000CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
6. Hardness: Minimum 1,150 lb. (5115 N), Janka modified. 7. Screw-Holding Capacity: Force required to pull one (1) inch (25 mm) long No. 10 sheet metal screw from material:
2.4
FASTENERS
A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; Galvanized finish in concealed locations and Plain finish in exposed locations. B. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
a. Face: Minimum 325 lbf (1445 N). b. Edge: Minimum 275 lbf (1223 N).
2.5
ACCESSORIES
8. Moisture Content: Maximum six (6) percent.
A. Lumber for Shimming, and Blocking: Softwood lumber.
9. Panel Thickness Tolerance: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm), plus or minus.
B. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer type.
D. Fire Retardant, Medium Density Fiberboard: Wood based panel product, manufactured from softwood fibers, minimum 90 percent of which obtained from wood residuals, saturated with fire retardant additives, then bonded under heat and pressure with formaldehyde free synthetic resin binders, meeting requirements of ANSI A208.2 Product Class MD, and having the following properties for sheet material thickness up to, and including, 3/4 inch (19 mm): 1. Acceptable Product: “MEDITE-FR”.
Medite Corporation;
2. Density: Minimum 45 PCF (725 kg/cu m).
C. Wood Filler: Non-solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color. 2.6
WOOD TREATMENT PROCESSES
A. Fire Retardant (FR-S Type): Chemically treated and pressure impregnated; providing a maximum flame spread/smoke development rating of less than 25 in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Wood Preservative by Pressure Treatment (PT Type): AWPA Treatment C2 (Lumber) or C9 (Plywood) using water borne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage.
Minimum 100 PSI
C. Wood Repellent Preservative Treatment by Dipping Method: NWWDA I.S.4, with 0.25 percent retainage.
4. Modulus of Rupture: Minimum 3,500 PSI (24 Mpa).
D. Wood Preservative (Surface Application): Clear type, manufacturer’s standard to suit application.
3. Internal Bond Strength: (689 kPa).
5. Modulus of Elasticity: Minimum 375,000 PSI (2585 Mpa). 6. Hardness: Minimum 1,000 lb. (4400 N), Janka modified. 7. Screw-Holding Capacity: Force required to pull one (1) inch (25 mm) long No. 10 sheet metal screw from material: a. Face: Minimum 300 lbf (1334 N).
2.7
SHOP TREATMENT MATERIALS
OF
WOOD
A. Shop pressure treatment to wood materials requiring preservatives to concealed wood blocking. B. Provide UL approved identification on fire retardant treated material. C. Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Minimize field cutting.
b. Edge: Minimum 225 lbf (1000 N). 8. Moisture Content: Maximum six (6) percent. 9. Panel Thickness Tolerance: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm), plus or minus. 10. Fire Resistance: Class 1 surface flame spread when tested in accordance with UL 723. 2.3
ADHESIVE
A. Adhesive: Non-solvent; type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application. FINISH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0123\div2-33\062000CGA.doc
2.8
FABRICATION
A. Fabricate to AWI Premium Quality Standards. B. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. C. Fit exposed sheet material edges with matching veneer edging. Use one piece for full length only. D. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. 062000 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
2.9
Akin Road Elementary School
SHOP FINISHING
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. D. Finish work to meet AWI Premium Quality standards. 2.10
FIELD FINISHING
A. Painting or transparent finishes shall be as specified in Section 099000.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. C. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2
PREPARATION
A. Condition wood materials to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. 3.3
INSTALLATION
A. Install work in accordance with AWI Premium Quality Standards, in particular, comply with AWI section 1700 for woodwork installation. B. Discard units of material which are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly treated, not adequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate work with minimum of joints or optimum joining arrangements, or which are of defective manufacturer with respect to surfaces, sizes or patterns.
062000 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
C. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8’-0” for plumb and level countertops; and with 1/16 inch maximum off-set in flush adjoining 1/8 inch maximum off-sets in revealed adjoining surfaces. D. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. E. Install components and trim with fasteners of type and size to suit application. F. Avoid exposed nailing as far as possible; when necessary to nail, use blind nailing methods and set all nail heads. G. Install running woodwork in single lengths whenever material is obtainable in required lengths; otherwise install in as long lengths as obtainable with joints between adjacent members staggered. Make joints only where solid fastening can be provided. H. Cope molded Work at returns and interior angles. Miter at corners. I. Kerf backs at wide flat members. J. Anchor finish carpentry work to anchorage devices or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. K. Except where pre-finished matching fasteners heads are required, use fine finishing nail for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with finished surface, and matching final finish where transparent is indicated. 3.4
SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Brush apply one (1) coat of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials and roofing and related metal flashing. Treat site-sawn cuts. C. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. 3.5
PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING
A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth.
FINISH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0123\div2-33\062000CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
B. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials. 3.6
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. 3.7
CLEANING
A. Clean and remove all temporary coverings and stickers from finish materials. B. Clean and polish all glass materials and surfaces.
END OF SECTION
FINISH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0123\div2-33\062000CGA.doc
062000 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
062000 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
FINISH CARPENTRY
S:\11\0123\div2-33\062000CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 064000 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK F. Section 099000 - Paints and Coatings: finishing.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
G. Division 22 - Mechanical: Plumbing utilities and fixtures.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Pre-Finished Custom Fabricated Transparent Finish, Architectural Woodwork Cabinets; as Indicated on the Drawings, Specified Herein; Including Related Hardware, Attachments and Accessories.
H. Division 26 - Electrical: Conduit and electrical power to equipment, fire and smoke detection devices and connection of equipment. 1.3
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate component elevations, dimensions and location of each assembly; thickness, materials and core materials, component profiles and edge treatment, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location, and schedule of finishes.
C. Plastic Laminate Countertops, Back-Splashes and End-Splashes. D. Preparation for Installing Utilities.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s data on material description and installation instructions for each type of product, fire retardant treatment materials and finish instructions.
E. Simulated Wood Ornaments. F. Standing and Running Trim: 1. Door and Window Wood Casings.
D. Certificates: Provide product certificates by woodwork provider certifying that products comply with specified requirements.
2. Wood Aprons. 3. Wood Base and Shoe Molding. 4. Wood Chair Rail.
7. Wood Handrails and Guardrails.
E. Fire-Retardant Treatment Data: Submit data for material impregnated by pressure process to reduce combustibility. Include certification by treating plant stating that treated materials comply with all Federal, State and Local requirements.
8. Wood Stops, Stools and Sills.
F. Samples:
5. Wood Cornices. 6. Wood Fascia and Soffits.
1.2
Field
G. Simulated Wood Trim.
1. Submit samples illustrating cabinet finish.
H. Custom Wood Screens, Blinds and Shutters.
2. Submit samples illustrating counter top finish. 3. Submit one sample for each type of pull, hinge, drawer support, lock and other exposed cabinet hardware and accessories illustrating hardware finish.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Countertop brackets for support of open Computer countertops and Circulation Desk. B. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: blocking, grounds and support framing.
Wood
C. Section 062000 - Finish Carpentry: Related wood trim not specified in this Section. D. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Interior metal stud framing and gypsum board finish. E. Section 096500 - Resilient Flooring and Base: Vinyl base at cabinet toe spaces.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK S:\11\0123\div2-33\064000CGA.doc
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform architectural woodwork in accordance with AWI Premium Quality Standards. B. Fabricator: Firm experienced in successfully producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated on the Drawing, with minimum ten (10) years documented experience, and with sufficient production capability to produce required units without delay in the Work.
064000 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
C. Installer: Arrange for installation of architectural woodwork by a firm that can demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type and quality to those required of this project.
Akin Road Elementary School
whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions". 1.7
A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with Woodwork Manufacturer's and Installer's coordinated instructions for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its storage and installation. Do not install woodwork until these conditions have been attained and stabilized so that woodwork is within plus or minus 1.0 percent of optimum moisture content from date of installation through remainder of construction period.
D. Base Cabinets: Overall height, thirty six (36) inches. Including, four (4) inch high base; cabinet at thirty five (35) inches and the epoxy tops at one (1) inch. E. Base Cabinets (ADA): Overall height, thirty four (34) inches. Cabinets may either be built by making custom cabinets two (2) inches shorter. F. Upper Cabinets: Depth, between twelve (12) and fourteen (14) inches, and the height shall be two (2) feet, leaving two (2) feet between the countertop and the bottom of the upper cabinet.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated on the Drawings to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before manufacturing woodwork; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
G. All plastic laminate surfaces shall be encapsulated with plastic laminate, including, but not limited to, underside and ends of shelves, backs, bottoms of cabinets, and all cut edges. 1. Phenolic backer boards are not to be used over particleboard to reduce formaldehyde fumes, as they also contribute to the problem.
1.8
1.5
COORDINATION A. Coordinate the Work with plumbing and electrical rough-in, and all adjacent and related trades.
2. The above procedure for encapsulating the formaldehyde emissions from cabinets applies to all subsequent information in this Section. H. Single Source Responsibility: Arrange for production by a single firm for Architectural Woodwork with sequence matched wood veneers.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
ACCEPTABLE FABRICATORS ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
-
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following fabricators:
A. Convene one (1) week prior to commencing Work of this Section.
1. Aaron Carlson Millwork.
B. Coordinate all parties that have work affecting this Section.
2. Northland Cabinets, Inc. 3. Pioneer Custom Cabinets.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
4. Wilkie Sanderson.
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 016000. B. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. C. Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations that could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas
064000 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
5. Paul’s Architectural Woodcraft. B. Substitutions: 016000. 2.2
Under provisions of Section
WOOD MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI Woodworking Standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated, and where the following products are part of woodwork, the requirements of the
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
S:\11\0123\div2-33\064000CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
2. No Substitutions Allowed.
referenced product standards, that apply to product characteristics indicated: 1. Hardboard:
AHA A135.4
2. High Pressure Laminate:
NEMA LD-3
3. Medium Density Fiberboard:
ANSI A208.2
4. Softwood Plywood:
DOC PS-1.
B. Formaldehyde Emission Levels: Comply with formaldehyde emission requirements of HUD standard 24 Part 3280 and each voluntary standard referenced below: 1. Medium Density Fiberboard:
FPA-987.
2. Hardwood Plywood:
HPMA-FE-86.
B. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD-3; High pressure plastic laminate, 0.050 inch thickness, color, pattern and gloss as selected by the Architect from manufacturer’s full color range. C. Laminate Backing Sheet: NEMA LD-3, unfinished backing sheet, 0.020 inch thick. 2.5
A. Adhesive: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application. B. Fasteners: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with “Architectural Woodwork Institute Quality Standards Illustrated”, Current Edition.
C. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; graded in accordance with AWI Premium quality standards; moisture content of 6 - 8 percent; species as follows: ITEM 1. Internal Construction 2.3
1. Provide stainless steel fasteners at exterior applications.
SPECIES
C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide non-ferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage.
Douglas Fir
SHEET MATERIALS A. Hardwood Plywood: PS 1; graded in accordance with AWI Premium quality standards, core materials of lumber, type of glue recommended for application; face veneer and cuts as follows: ITEM 1. Media Center Shelving
SPECIES
CUT
Maple
Plain Sliced
Top and End Panels B. Hardboard: Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered grade, 1/4 inch thick, smooth one side, located as follows: ITEM 1. Gables and Backs of Base Cabinets 2.4
PLASTIC LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturer’s of Plastic Laminate: 1. Plastic laminate, manufactured by one of the following: a. Arborite, b. Formica, c. Laminart, d. Nevamar, e. Pionite f. Wilson Art;
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK S:\11\0123\div2-33\064000CGA.doc
ACCESSORIES
2.6
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where indicated, use materials impregnated with fire-retardant chemical formulations indicated by a pressure process or other means acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to produce products with fire-testresponse characteristics specified. 1. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated material from untreated material. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood), for woodwork items indicated as fire-retardant treated. Use the following treatment type: 1. Exterior Type: Organic-resin-based formulation thermally set in wood by kiln drying. 2. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying 064000 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork. 3. Kiln-dry material before and after treatment to levels required for untreated material. 2.7
HARDWARE A. Hinges: 1. Heavy duty, 2-3/4 inches, five knuckle, tempered steel, 0.072 inch minimum thickness, institutional, full wrap around, mill ground, hospital tip, and tight pin feature with all edges eased. 2. Provide one pair per door to 48 inch height. One and one-half pair over 48 inches in height. Allow 270 degree swing. 3. Brushed chrome finish. B. Pulls: Metal wire pull design, four (4) inch projecting type. Finish: Brushed Chrome. C. [Drawer Slides: Cold rolled steel, zinc plated, steel ball bearing rollers with Minimum 100 lb. load rating, Hold-in detent to prevent drawer roll-out and bounce back, full extension. Provide adjuster cam to regulate body side sway. 1. Provide Accuride, Inc., model 3832[SC] for Drawers up to 16” wide and 7432 for Drawers 16” to 24 “ wide, or equivalent. D. Catches: Spring return metal lever type, minimum seven pound pull. Two catches for doors over 48 inches high. E. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Recessed, side mounted heavy-duty metallic shelf support clips with positive locking pin, anti-tip-up shelf restraints, minimum 300 pound load rating. F. Locks: Disc tumbler type, [key by group with master] [key alike with master], brushed chrome finish. Lock all cabinet doors and drawers, unless noted otherwise. G. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Provide specific finishes as indicated above or on the Drawings. Where no finish is indicated, brushed chrome finish.
064000 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
H. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.8
FABRICATION A. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated on the Drawings. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. C. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. D. Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with matching veneer edging. Use one piece for full length only. E. Cap exposed plastic laminate countertop edges with material of same finish and pattern unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. F. Door and Drawer Fronts: style.
3/4 inch thick; flush
G. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. H. Apply plastic laminate countertops in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. I. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. J. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches (407 mm) on center. K. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Seal contact surfaces of cut edges. L. Countertops: Fabricate countertops, 1-1/8” minimum thickness, with edge treatment and design profile as indicated on the Drawings. Provide tops in as long as practical continuous lengths. Provide field glued splines at joints. No joints closer than twenty-four (24) inches either side of sink cutout.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
S:\11\0123\div2-33\064000CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
2.9
11-0123
E. Locate backing devices required for installation of wall-supported units. Verify that back-plates, extra studs, sheet metal backing, etc., are properly located to accept woodwork items.
FINISHING MATERIALS A. Transparent Finishing Materials: As specified in Section 099000.
2.10
FINISHING
3.3
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. D. Finish work in accordance with AWI Premium Quality Standards; finish as selected from stain samples. E. Seal, stain and varnish internal exposed to view and semi-concealed surfaces. Brush apply only. F. Seal surfaces materials.
in
contact
with
cementitious
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing. B. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in advance of time substrates are to be built. C. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. D. Coordinate with other trades to ensure that items supplied by others, but required to fit into casework or other fabricated items, will fit.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK S:\11\0123\div2-33\064000CGA.doc
INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install architectural woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for same grade specified in Part 2 of this section for type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8'-0" for plumb and level (including tops) and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. E. Standing and Running Trim and Rails: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using fulllength pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns and miter at corners. F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operations. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated on the Drawings. Maintain veneer sequence matching (if any) of cabinets with transparent finish. G. Countertops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. H. Verify size and location of openings for mechanical and electrical installed items prior to cutting openings.
064000 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
3.4
Akin Road Elementary School
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings and fixtures. C. Remove all cartons, debris, sawdust, and scraps, and leave spaces clean and casework ready for Owner’s use.
3.5
PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Architect that ensures that woodwork is being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
END OF SECTION
064000 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
S:\11\0123\div2-33\064000CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 071050 - PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING amount of deck directed by the Architect, and replace with a matching material under provisions of Section 053100.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General,. Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Partial Removal of Existing Roofing System and Related Components in Preparation for a New Roof Membrane System at Locations as Indicated on the Drawings.
1.2
1.4
A. Materials Removal Firm: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience. 1.5
B. Maintain continuous temporary protection, inside and outside, prior to and during removal of existing roofing and components.
A. Section 014523 - Testing and Inspection Services. B. Section 024119 - Minor Demolition for Remodeling: Removal of existing exterior construction to receive new Work.
1.3
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not remove existing roofing membrane when weather conditions threaten the integrity of the building contents or intended continued occupancy.
RELATED SECTIONS
C. Section 075300 - Elastomeric Sheet Roofing Mechanically Attached: Roofing system.
QUALIFICATIONS
C. Coordinate all roofing demolition with the school Principal as to time and areas to be worked on during the school hours. 1.6
SCHEDULING
D. Section 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashings and Trim: Pre-finished flashings.
A. Schedule work to coincide with commencement of installation of new roofing system.
E. Section 099000 – Paints and Coatings: Rust inhibitive primer for recoating rusted steel decking.
B. Remove only existing roofing materials that can be replaced with new materials the same day.
WORK SCOPE DESCRIPTION A. Existing Roof Areas: At areas indicated on the Drawings, remove existing roofing gravel, perimeter metal flashings, base flashings, counter flashings, vent stack flashings, roofing membrane, insulation, vapor retarder, and all other related items down to the existing roof deck.
1.7
A. Coordinate the work with other affected mechanical and electrical work associated with roof penetrations. 1.8
C. Architect will inspect existing roofing insulation for moisture content, and existing metal decking for rust and structural integrity.
E. If existing metal roof deck is rusted slightly, wire brush the metal down to a clean surface. Apply one coat of rust-inhibitive primer. F. If existing metal roof deck is badly rusted or structurally unsound, the Contractor shall remove PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING S:\11\0123\div2-33\071050CGA.doc
WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Perform all Work in a manner that shall not void existing roofing system warranties. Notify Warrantor of existing roof prior to beginning Work.
B. Remove existing roof mounted mechanical equipment and electrical equipment as indicated on Drawings.
D. If existing roof insulation is too wet with moisture, then the Architect shall instruct the Contractor to remove as much insulation as necessary to provide dry materials.
COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
TEMPORARY ROOFING MATERIALS A. Contractor shall provide all materials necessary for the protection of existing roof and exposed substrate from inclement weather during removal and re-roofing. B. Contractor shall be responsible for selection of materials and design of temporary roof.
071050 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
2.2
Akin Road Elementary School
G. Repair existing steel deck surface to provide smooth working surface for new roof system.
CONSTRUCTION TRAFFIC PROTECTION A. Contractor to provide temporary protection from construction traffic over existing roof surface.
1. Wire brush slightly rusted metal down to a clean surface. Apply one coat of rust-inhibitive primer.
B. Construction Traffic Walkway Protection: Provide 3/4 inch exterior plywood over 2 inch extruded polystyrene. Sandbag corners of walkway against wind uplift.
2. Remove badly rusted or structurally unsound, steel decking as directed by the Architect, and replace with matching material under provisions of Section 053100.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.4 3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Provide temporary protective uncovered deck surfaces.
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
sheeting
over
B. Turn sheeting up and over parapets and curbing. Retain sheeting in position with weights. C. Provide for surface drainage from sheeting to existing drainage facilities.
B. Verify that existing roof surfaces indicated on the Drawings are ready for work of this Section. 3.2
TEMPORARY PROTECTION
D. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or repaired deck surface.
PREPARATION A. Protect existing membrane roofing system as indicated on the Drawings to remain in place. B. Sweep only existing roof surfaces indicated on the Drawings, clean of loose matter. Remove loose refuse and dispose off site.
3.5
DISPOSAL A. Promptly and legally dispose of demolished materials.
END OF SECTION
C. Coordinate with Owner to shut down air intake equipment in the vicinity of the Work. Prior to beginning Work, Cover air intake louvers that may affect indoor air quality. 3.3
MATERIALS REMOVAL A. Remove metal counter flashings at areas indicated on Drawings. B. Scrape roofing gravel from membrane surface without causing serious damage to membrane felts at areas indicated on Drawings. C. Remove roofing membrane, perimeter base flashings, flashings around roof protrusions, pitch pans and pockets, insulation vents, and other related items at areas indicated on Drawings. D. Cut and lay flat any membrane blisters. E. Remove insulation and fasteners, cant strips, and blocking. F. Remove vapor retarder, sheathing paper, and underlay.
071050 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\071050CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 072100 - BUILDING INSULATION 1.4
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Thermal Resistivity: Where thermal resistivity properties of insulation materials are designated by r-values they represent the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly one (1) inch (25 mm) thick, measured by test method include in referenced material standard or otherwise indicated. They are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F, between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Building Insulation; as Indicated on the Drawings, Specified Herein, Including Related Accessories and Attachments.
B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials which are identical to those whose fire performance characteristics, as listed for each material or assembly of which insulation is a part, have been determined by testing, per methods indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Insulation Types: 1. Thermal Insulation at Exterior Roof Curbs and Framing. 2. Sound Attenuation Insulation for Sound Control Within Interior Wall Partitions. 3. Safing Insulation.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84.
4. Acoustical Insulation for Above Ceiling Spaces Where Partitions Do Not Extend to the Structure Above.
2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E136.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 062000 – Rough Carpentry: sheathing board.
C. Maximum Allowable Asbestos Content of Inorganic Insulation: Provide insulation composed of mineral fibers or mineral ores which contain less than 0.25% by weight of any type or mixture of types occurring naturally as impurities as determined by polarized light microscopy test per Appendix A of 40 CFR 763.
Exterior
B. Section 078400 - Fire-Stopping. C. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Interior metal stud framing and gypsum board finish. D. Section 095100 - Suspended Acoustical Ceilings: Suspended ceilings to receive insulation for sound attenuation. 1.3
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for each type of insulation and vapor barrier material required. C. Certified Test Reports: With product data, submit copies of certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance values, including rvalues (aged values for plastic insulation), densities, compression strengths, fire performance characteristics, perm ratings, water absorption ratings and similar properties.
BUILDING INSULATION
S:\11\0123\div2-33\072100CGA.doc
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle and protect products to site under provisions of Section 016000. B. Deliver materials to the site in manufacturer’s original packages, unopened, and correctly labeled. C. General Protection: Protect insulation from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation. D. Protection for Plastic Insulation: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.
072100 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to project site ahead of installation time.
insulation, panel width to fit stud space by three (3) inch thickness, and flame spread/smoke developed of 25/50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Sound absorption per ASTM C423:
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of work.
1. Type E-over 16” air space; STC: 49 or greater. 2.3
1.6
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Sound Attenuation Insulation: ASTM C665, Type 1, with a glass fiber mat septum for one (1) hour rated partitions; non-faced glass fiber acoustical insulation, panel width to fit stud space by three (3) inch thickness, UL labeled, fire hazard classification of 25/50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. STC required: 50.
A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation. 1.7
COORDINATION A. Coordinate the Work with all related sections for placement of insulation materials.
1.8
2.4
WARRANTY
1. Provide galvanized steel safing clips, UL labeled. 2.5
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS BUILDING INSULATION
B. Insulation Fasteners: Impale clip of galvanized steel, to be mechanically fastened to surface to receive board insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place.
-
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed Insulation Systems. 2. Dow Chemical Company. 3. DiversiFoam Products. 4. Fibrex, Inc. 5. Johns Manville Company 6. Owens-Corning Company. 7. Thermafiber, Inc. B. Substitutions: 016000. 2.2
Under provisions of Section
ACCESSORIES A. Adhesives: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for specific application.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
INSULATION - SAFING A. Safing Insulation: USG Thermafiber Mineral Fiber Safing insulation; non-combustible, non-asbestos, regular color, non-faced.
A. Provide one (1) year manufacturer’s written warranty under provisions of Section 017836. B. Warranty: All materials and workmanship provided are guaranteed against defects after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
INSULATION - FIRE-RATED SOUND ATTENUATION
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation boards are dry and ready to receive insulation. C. Verify substrate irregularities.
surface
is
flat,
free
of
INSULATION - SOUND ATTENUATION A. Sound Attenuation Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I and ASTM E136; non-faced glass fiber acoustical
072100 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
BUILDING INSULATION
S:\11\0123\div2-33\072100CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
3.2
PREPARATION
11-0123
END OF SECTION
A. Require Installer to examine substrates and conditions under which insulation work is to be performed. A satisfactory substrate is one that complies with requirements of the section in which substrate and related work is specified. Obtain Installer's written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of work in this section. Do not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor barriers, including removal of projections which might puncture vapor barriers. 3.3
INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with work. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections which interfere with placement. D. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.4
INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's recommendations. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
3.5
PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor barriers from harmful weather exposures from possible physical abuses, where possible by non-delayed installation of concealing work or, where that is not possible, by temporary covering or enclosure.
BUILDING INSULATION
S:\11\0123\div2-33\072100CGA.doc
072100 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
072100 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
BUILDING INSULATION
S:\11\0123\div2-33\072100CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 075310 - ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING - FULLY ADHERED PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conditions of the Contract (General,. Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Patching Fully Adhered Elastomeric Membrane Roofing Over Existing Sloped Metal Roof Decks. C. Preparation of Metal Roof Deck Surfaces. D. Provide Perlite Rigid Roof Insulation Over Metal Roof Deck Surfaces. E. Existing (Sloped Substrate) Elastomeric Membrane Roofing Fully Adhered System; Insulation, Reinforced EPDM Membrane, Base Flashing, Counter Flashing and Accessories. F. Roof Walkway Membrane Pads. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 014523 - Testing Laboratory Services. B. Section 052100 – Structural Steel: Steel roof deck support. C. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Treated Wood blocking, curbs and cant strips, and plywood roof deck. D. Section 071050 - Preparation for Re-Roofing: Tearing back existing roofing and related components in preparation for blending into new roofing.
B. A reinforced EPDM membrane is utilized at the perimeter of the roof, and field membrane sheets are a maximum of ten (10) feet wide depending upon wind load requirements or type of roof deck. Walkway pads are to be installed at traffic concentration points. C. The fully adhered roofing system shall comply with all requirements for a UL-90 Wind Uplift Rating to meet the manufacturer’s warranty requirements. 1.4
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate setting plan for tapered insulation areas, joint or termination detail conditions, conditions of interface with other materials, and roof walkway pad pattern. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s data on membrane materials, flashing materials, insulation and walkway precast pads. D. Submit test reports or Manufacturer’s certification demonstrating roofing materials conform to specified performance requirements. E. Submit samples illustrating quality of insulation, membrane, ballast and walkway material. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special precautions required for seaming the membrane. G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit under provision of Section 014300: 1. Indicate proceeding followed; ambient temperatures, humidity, wind velocity during application, supplementary instructions given, and all other pertinent information.
E. Section 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Prefinished roof metal and wall flashing membrane. F. Division 23 - Mechanical: Flashing collars, roof drains and prefabricated curbs for mechanical equipment. G. Division 26 - Electrical: Flashing collars. 1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The Fully Adhered Roofing System incorporates a Black, 60 mil thick reinforced EPDM membrane. Mechanically fasten the acceptable roof insulation to the roof deck at a minimum rate of one (1) fastener and plate every two (2) square feet. The EPDM membrane is fully adhered to the insulation with manufacturer’s recommended bonding adhesive. Adjoining sheets of EPDM membrane are sealed together using manufacturer’s recommended method. Elastomeric Sheet Roofing - Fully Adhered S:\11\0123\div2-33\075310CGA.doc
SUBMITTALS
H. Roofing Installer’s Certification: Roofing Manufacturer shall provide to the Architect, one month prior to any roof activity on the site, written certification for the roof installer as referenced below. I. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Prior to beginning Work, submit for Owner’s approval, a copy of the Manufacturer’s Warranty, including special warranties, as specified in this Section. 1.5
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Work of this Section with minimum ten (10) years documented experience.
075310 - 1 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
B. Roofing Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience, and certified in writing by the roofing system manufacturer. 1.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing shall be performed by qualified parties as specified herein and in accordance with the provisions of Section 014523.
Akin Road Elementary School
D. Roof assembly Requirements: State of Minnesota to meet State Energy Code Requirements. E. Install roofing system in a manner that roofing system shall pass the roofing system manufacturer’s warranty inspection. Repair or replace all work required to obtain roofing system manufacturer’s warranty at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Environmental Requirements: 1. All roofing applications must be done when the existing School Building is not occupied.
B. Perform testing in accordance with NRCA guidelines and ASTM D3617
2. Observe precautions in tying-in new roof to the existing building in order to prevent moisture and air quality problems.
C. Take additional samples as directed by the Owner’s Roof Inspection Service when deficiencies are found or to document performance with Project specifications prior to installation of flood coat and gravel.
3. Maintain a negative pressure in the construction areas to prevent fumes from entering the existing building.
D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no additional cost to the Owner.
4. Make certain that there are no make-up air vents open in the area where roofing work is taking place.
E. Repair of Test Cuts:
5. Workers should take the necessary precautions in handling the toxic materials used in this roofing system.
1. Immediately repair test cuts per Manufacturer’s recommendations. F. After installation of the new roofing system, and prior to the final inspection and acceptance, perform water testing to check the integrity of the roofing system and to check for ponded water. An infrared scan (by Owner) may also be performed after water testing. All leaks, wet insulation, or ponded water areas (after 48 hour period) shall be properly and promptly repaired. G. Provide for roofing system inspection and certification by Manufacturer’s technical representative when roof is completed. H. Consultation: Manufacturer’s Technical Service Department shall be available for consultation with respect to all deviations from current manufacturer’s standards and specifications. 1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, Latest Edition, Volumes 1 and 2.
1.8
A. Roofing System: Materials that are compatible with one and other under conditions of service and application required that result in a watertight system that does not allow the passage of water and that resists uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. B. Conform to applicable building code for roof assembly fire hazard requirements and wind load uplift. C. Underwriters Laboratory (UL): Roofing System shall comply with UL Class A Fire Hazard Classification and UL class 90 Wind Uplift according to UL 1897. D. Performance: Provide roofing system that complies with requirements in FMG 4450, FMG 4470 and FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28 and that has materials listed in FMG's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction. 1. Fire, ASTM E108:
B. Conform to International Building Code for roof assembly fire hazard requirements. C. Source Limitations: Provide materials from single Manufacturer or from sources approved by roofing system manufacturer. Do not use materials that may prevent or void manufacturer’s warranty.
075310 - 2 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Class A.
2. Windstorm Classification: Class 1-90. 3. Hail Resistance: Severe Hail. 1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle Products to site under provisions of Section 016000. Elastomeric Sheet Roofing - Fully Adhered
S:\11\0123\div2-33\075310CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels intact.
C. Protect all components of the fully adhered system from discharges, such as petroleum products, greases, oils (mineral and vegetable), and animal fats.
C. Store and protect materials in dry weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.
D. Protect the fully adhered system from direct contact with steam or heat sources when the in-service temperature is in excess of 180 degrees F.
D. Store all roll materials on end. E. Store adhesives, primers and sealant at temperatures above 40 degrees F (4 degrees C). Adhesives and sealant are extremely flammable, and all ignition sources should be kept away from these materials while in use.
1.12
F. Solvents in adhesive and sealant are heavier than air, and will accumulate in low areas (such as valleys) and in places where ventilation is poor. Avoid prolonged breathing of vapors.
1.13
G. Protection: Use all necessary means to protect the materials in this Section before, during and after installation, and to protect the Work and materials of all other trades. H. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements as necessary for the approval of the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.10
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather, when ambient temperature is above or below that recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer or other weather conditions exist that may violate the membrane manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is occurring. C. The total insulation/membrane assembly must be completed in one operation. Phased roof construction is not acceptable. 1.11
JOB SITE CONSIDERATIONS
A. Retrofit - Recover Projects: Existing roofing materials must be investigated and wet materials must be removed. Existing sprayed-in-place urethane roofs and Phenolic insulation must be removed. B. Fresh asphalt (that which is less than 30 days old), coal tar base, oil base or plastic roof cements, and resaturated roof products are NOT to be used in direct contact with rubber based components of the fully adhered system.
Elastomeric Sheet Roofing - Fully Adhered
S:\11\0123\div2-33\075310CGA.doc
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the Work with installation of associated counter flashings installed by other sections as the work of this Section proceeds. PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene a pre-installation conference a minimum of one (1) week prior to commencing work of this Section. B. Require attendance of Contractor, Roofing Installer and other parties directly affecting the Work of this Section. C. Review preparation, installation procedures and details, and coordination with related work. 1.14
WARRANTY
A. Exisating Total System Warranty from the Roofing Manufacturer is in place. B. Provide two (2) year written warranty from the Roofing Installer under provisions of Section 017836 and in conformance with warranty requirements below. C. Warranty: All materials and workmanship provided are guaranteed against defects, including damage to work resulting from failure to resist the penetration of moisture when exposed to non-catastrophic conditions, after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or workmanship developed during the no dollar limit guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced, including materials and labor, at no expense to the Owner. 1. Warranty shall not be prorated during the warranty period. 2. Warranty shall not restrict other legal rights the Owner has under the law. 3. Warranty shall contain no jurisdictional restrictions on where the Owner may bring legal action.
075310 - 3 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
2.5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ROOFING SYSTEM
-
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - ROOF INSULATION
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers:
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers:
1. Apache Products Company. 2. Atlas Energy Products.
1. CARLISLE Sure Seal Roofing System.
3. Carlisle Roofing Systems.
2. FIRESTONE Rubber Gard.
4. Firestone Rubber Guard.
3. Johns Manville Roofing Systems.
5. Johns Manville Roofing Systems.
B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 016000. 2.2
MEMBRANE & ASSOCIATED MATERIALS
A. Membrane: EPDM 60 mils thick, reinforced, which meets ASTM D4637 and ANSI/RMA IPR-2, conforming to the following minimum criteria: Properties Breaking Str. Elongation Tear Strength Brittleness
Test ASTM D751 ASTM D751 ASTM D751 ASTM D2137
Results 210 lbf 500% min. 50 lbf -75 degrees
B. Related Materials: Bonding adhesive, splice cleaner, splicing cement, in-seam sealant, lap sealant, uncured flashing, seam fastening plates, and all other related components required for use with this roofing system shall be as recommended by the roofing membrane manufacturer. 2.3
FLASHING ACCESSORIES
A. EPDM Molded Pipe Flashing: A black, cured, premolded base flashing for pipes up to six (6) inches in diameter installed with splicing cement and in-seam sealant. B. Pressure-Sensitive Flashing: A nominal 40 mil black, semi-cured EPDM membrane laminated to a nominal 30 mil cured, pre-applied adhesive.
2.6
ROOF INSULATION MATERIALS
A. (Sloped Substrate) Roof Insulation: ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, felt or glass-fiber faced, non-tapered foam roof insulation shall be thermally efficient polyisocyanurate core bonded between organic/glass asphalt facers. UL Class A fire rating construction, approximate foam density of two (2) lb./cu ft, square edges, minimum total R-Value of 22.2, total roof insulation thickness as indicated on the Drawings, and tapered crickets at 1/2 inch per foot sloped where shown. B. Roofing insulation must be compatible other roofing materials and approved by the membrane manufacturer. C. Top Layer: High density wood fiberboard, 1/2 inch thick. 2.7
EDGING AND TERMINATION
A. Fascias, Copings, and Counter Flashing: Pre-finished metal as specified in Section 076200. B. Control or Expansion Joint Flashing: Sheet metal counter flashing and wood materials as detailed on the Drawings.
C. Clean Cured Flashing: A clean cured 0.060 inch thick non-reinforced (seamless) black EPDM membrane used to flash gravel stops, metal edgings, wall/curbs and Seam Fastening Plates.
2.8
2.4
B. Under no circumstances will treated wood be allowed to be in direct contact with any metal.
FASTENING COMPONENTS
A. Use Roofing Manufacturer’s recommended fastening system in conformance with specified warranty requirements.
075310 - 4 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
CANTS
A. Wood Cant Strips: Wood cant strips to profiles indicated on the Drawings, and provided under provisions of Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry.
Elastomeric Sheet Roofing - Fully Adhered
S:\11\0123\div2-33\075310CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
2.9
EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Separate building units from adjacent units by expansion joints to allow for structural expansion and contraction. Although requirements may vary depending on structural and climatic conditions, expansion joints are required:
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
2. Where steel framing, structural steel, or deck materials change direction.
A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
4. Throughout the roofing system wherever control, expansion or contraction joints are provided in the structural steel, deck material, or deck system. 5. Whenever “additions” are connected to existing buildings. 6. At junctions of canopies, exposed overhangs, or loading docks to accommodate movement caused by changing temperatures. B. Expansion joints shall be continuous along the break in the building structure and shall not end short of the edge of the roof deck. Expansion joints should never be bridged with insulation or built-up roofing. C. For expansion joints to function properly, remove construction ties. Elevate expansion joints at least eight (8) inches above the roof surface. Expansion joint locations and details shall be as indicated on the Drawings. WALKWAY SURFACING
A. Membrane Walkway: Walkway membrane pads, black, molded rubber with slip resistant surface and factory rounded corners, 30 x 30 inch pads, 3/16 inch thickness. 2.11
D. Provide additional materials as recommended by the roofing manufacturer and as necessary for proper installation of the roofing system.
1. Every 200 to 300 linear feet of building length.
3. Where separate wings of L, U, T or similar configuration exist.
2.10
11-0123
ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by roofing manufacturer; sufficient length to penetrate metal roof deck by 3/4 inches and obtain an uplift resistance to conform to FM 1-60 requirements. B. Roofing Sealant: Type recommended by membrane manufacturer. C. Vent Stacks: Heavy-duty, rust-resistant metal, soldered joints, sealed metal, sizes and profiles as required by roof piping dimensions.
Elastomeric Sheet Roofing - Fully Adhered
S:\11\0123\div2-33\075310CGA.doc
EXAMINATION
B. Verify roof deck is supported and secure. C. Verify roof deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped to drains, valleys, or leaves, and suitable for installation of roof system. D. Verify roof deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. E. Verify roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and reglets are in place. F. At no time shall the Roofing Contractor leave the building open or exposed to interior damage. 3.2
PREPARATION OF METAL ROOF DECK
A. Insulation fasteners used must have a minimum pullout of 360 pounds per fastener. B. Remove all rust areas and prime exposed areas with rust-inhibiting primer. 3.3
INSTALLATION OF WOOD NAILERS
A. Install wood nailers at all locations indicated on the Drawings. B. The wood nailer must be installed so that the top of the wood nailer is relatively flush with the top surface of the membrane underlayment and the width of the wood nailer exceeds the width of the metal flange (where applicable at edgings, scuppers, etc.). 3.4
INSULATION APPLICATION
A. (Metal Deck) Install one (1) layer of polyisocyanurate roof insulation, minimum 1-1/2 inch thick, with all joints butted and staggered. B. (Metal Deck) Install second layer of tapered polyisocyanurate roof insulation loose laid over the first layer with joints butted and staggered from the previous layer.
075310 - 5 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
C. Secure both layers of roof insulation to metal roof deck with mechanical fasteners in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions; and assembly must be FM 1-60 rated and respective manufacturer must verify in writing their requirements meet all fastening density, pattern, spacing and criteria. All joints butted and staggered. D. Install single layer of high-density wood fiberboard over the top layer of tapered polyisocyanurate insulation with adhesive recommended by the roofing manufacturer. E. Cut boards to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof. F. Apply no more roof insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day. 3.5
MEMBRANE APPLICATION
A. Install perimeter membrane sheet at the perimeter of each roof level. Install either seven (7) or ten (10) feet wide membrane sheet over the field of the roof. Fully adhere all membrane sheets to the insulation substrate with Bonding Adhesive. B. Overlap adjacent EPDM membrane sheets a minimum of three (3) inches. C. The membrane may be either Adhesive Spliced or Tape Spliced at the manufacturer’s option. D. Membrane Splicing (Adhesive Splice): 1. Clean the splice area with Splice Cleaner. 2. Apply Splice Cement at the rate of approximately 150 linear feet per one (1) gallon, or as otherwise recommended by the membrane manufacturer. 3. Roll the top membrane sheet onto the mating surface and roll the splice with a two (2) inch steel roller. 4. After adjoining membrane sheets have been spliced together, wait a minimum of two (2) hours and clean exposed edge of splice with Splice Cleaner. Apply a 5/16 inch diameter bead of Lap Sealant. Feather Lap Sealant to completely cover the splice edge.
2. Apply Splice Tape to bottom membrane sheet with the edge of the release paper along a line marked 1/2 inch out from the top sheet. Press tape onto sheet using hand pressure, overlapping tape roll ends a minimum of one (1) inch. 3. Remove the release paper and press top sheet onto tape using hand pressure. Roll the splice with a two (2) inch steel roller. F. Secure EPDM membrane at the perimeter of each roof level, roof section, expansion joint, curb, skylight, interior wall, penthouse, etc., at any angle change which exceeds two (2) inches in one horizontal foot, and at all penetrations in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Additional membrane securement shall be provided by reinforced strips. 3.6
MEMBRANE FLASHING
A. Flash all penetrations and walls with cured EPDM membrane. Uncured elastofoam flashing shall be limited to overlay vertical seams or to flash inside and outside corners, scuppers, pourable sealer pockets, prefabricated curbs, and other penetrations or unusually shaped walls where the use of cured membrane flashing is not practical. B. Manufacturer's prefabricated accessories (pre-molded pipe seals and pourable sealer pockets) should be used, when feasible, in lieu of uncured elastofoam flashing. C. Terminate the flashing in accordance manufacturer's termination recommendations.
with
D. Coordinate installation of roof drains, sumps and related flashing. 3.7
METAL FLASHING
A. Pre-finished metal flashing and counter flashing are provided under provisions of Section 076200. B. Fabricate roof control and expansion joints to isolate roof into areas indicated on the Drawings. C. Install pre-finished components in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
E. Membrane Splicing (Tape Splice): 1. Clean the splice area with Primer.
075310 - 6 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Elastomeric Sheet Roofing - Fully Adhered
S:\11\0123\div2-33\075310CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
3.8
TERMINATION
A. Where a counter flashing is required, run the flashing up behind the counter flashing and install a bead of cut-off mastic behind the membrane at the top of the termination, and fasten the membrane using an appropriate fastener spaced twelve (12) inches on center, maximum.
11-0123
B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by Work of this Section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions. C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by Work of this Section. 3.12
3.9
WALKWAYS
A. Provide manufacturer's standard walkway pads adhered to the EPDM membrane with splicing cement B. Walkway pads are required for all traffic concentration points regardless of traffic frequency. 3.10
MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES
A. Provide manufacturer’s field services under provisions of Section 014300
PROTECTION
A. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work. B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect roof surfaces with minimum 1/2 inch thick exterior grade plywood set on a minimum 3/8 inch thick extruded recovery board as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
END OF SECTION
B. Require site attendance of a representative of the roofing and insulation material manufacturers a minimum of once each during installation of the Work. 1. Each representative must certify in writing, to the Architect, that the materials installed are as specified and meet the manufacturer’s requirements for the specified warranty. C. It is the Roofing Contractor’s responsibility to notify and coordinate with the manufacturers in a timely manner in order for them to conduct their required inspections. D. The Architect or the Owner, without prior notice, shall have the right to audit all work being performed. E. Although not a standard quality control procedure for this application, the Architect may require test cuts in areas where quality is in question. The cost of these test cuts will be the responsibility of the Roofing Contractor. F. If defects are detected, it will be the responsibility of the Roofing Contractor to take corrective procedures. Any corrective procedure must have prior written approval of the Architect, and the roof materials manufacturers. If, in the opinion of the Architect, or the materials manufacturers, the corrective procedures are not appropriate, the installation in question must be removed and replaced. 3.11
CLEANING
A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces.
Elastomeric Sheet Roofing - Fully Adhered
S:\11\0123\div2-33\075310CGA.doc
075310 - 7 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
075310 - 8 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
Elastomeric Sheet Roofing - Fully Adhered
S:\11\0123\div2-33\075310CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM C. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, dimensions, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashing, termination, and installation details.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General,. Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
D. Samples: Submit samples, minimum 12 x 12 inches, illustrating typical seam, external corner, internal corner, junction to vertical dissimilar surface, material and finish.
B. Shop Formed Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim; PreFinished Zinc-Coated Steel Where Exposed to View, and Zinc-Coated Steel Where Not Exposed to View; as Indicated on the Drawings, Specified Herein; Including Related Accessories and Attachments.
E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. F. Warranty: Submit to the Architect the written warranties specified in this Section and under provisions of Section 017836. 1.4
1. Low-Slope Roof Sheet Metal Fabrications:
A. Fabricate and install all sheet metal work, including flashing and sheet metal items not particularly indicated on the Drawings, but required for finish work in accordance with the “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA).
a. Base Flashing. b. Counterflashing and Flashing Receivers. c. Roof-Penetration Flashing. C. Membrane Flashing. 1.2
B. Factory shall have capability to show conformance with National Coil Coating Association Technical Bulletins for factory color-coated metal.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Treated wood blocking.
1. Provide factory-applied protection for finished color-coated metal by means of a strippable plastic film.
B. Section 075310 – Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: Roofing system, including flashing and accessories directly associated with roofing.
C. Roof sheet metal shall be resistant to corrosion.
C. Section 079200 - Joint Sealers: Sealant in conjunction with metal reglets and counter flashing.
D. Protect all metals in contact with dissimilar metals or materials from galvanic action.
D. Division 23 - Mechanical: Roof curbs for mechanical equipment, and flashing sleeves and collars for mechanical items protruding through roofing membrane. E. Division 26 - Electrical: Roof curbs for electrical equipment, and flashing sleeves and collars for electrical items protruding through roofing membrane. 1.3
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data for product characteristics, joint and fastening requirements, and factory finishing.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM S:\11\0123\div2-33\076200CGA.doc
QUALITY ASSURANCE
E. Fabricator and Installer: Companies specializing in sheet metal flashing work with five (5) years documented experience. 1.5
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fabricate and install roof flashing and counterflashing capable of resisting the following forces according to the International Building Code. B. Thermal Movement: Provide sheet metal roofing that allows for thermal movement resulting from a temperature change of 120 deg. F., ambient with no buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, joint sealant failure, or other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and shear stress as a result of movement.
076200 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
C. Water Penetration: Sheet metal flashing and trim shall not allow water into the building interior. 1.6
Akin Road Elementary School
1.10
A. Provide five (5) year manufacturer’s written warranty covering all sheet metal work specified herein under provisions of Section 017836.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 016000.
B. Provide ten (10) year coil-coating supplier’s written warranty for KYNAR 500 color coated metal finish covering color fading, chalking and film integrity under provisions of Section 017836.
B. All materials shall be delivered to the site in cartons with manufacturer’s identification labels in tact, including storage recommendations.
C. Warranty: All materials and workmanship provided are guaranteed against defects, include coverage for degradation of metal finish, water tightness and integrity of seals, after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no cost to the Owner.
C. Stack pre-formed and pre-finished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. D. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. E. Flammable materials shall be stored in conformance with applicable fire codes and regulations in a manner that will not create a potential fire hazard.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
1.7
WARRANTY
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual locations of sheet metal flashing and trim and other construction to which sheet metal flashing and trim must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS PREFINISHED METAL
-
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Ryerson Metals – “Color-Klad” 2. Peterson Aluminum. – “Pac-Clad” 3. Metal-Era Roof Edge Systems. 4. Modern Metal Systems Corporation.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection: Prevent damage to the new or existing roof, including protection from damage by ladders and other equipment. Potentially damaging materials, such as metal scraps, nails and screws, acid flux, and other debris shall not be permitted to come into contact with the roof surface. B. Construction Schedule: Install sheet metal as soon as possible after roof work has been completed. Sheet metal work shall be fully completed by the given completion date.
1.9
COORDINATION A. Coordinate the Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining construction for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of Work, and protection of materials and finishes.
076200 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
5. Copper Sales, Inc. – “Una-Clad” B. Substitutions: 016000. 2.2
Under provisions of Section
SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim (Not Exposed to View): 1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Commercial quality with 0.20% copper, ASTM A653/A653M, G90 hotdip galvanized, minimum 24 gauge except as otherwise indicated. B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim (Exposed to View From Grade Level or Upper Floors):
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
S:\11\0123\div2-33\076200CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
1. Pre-Finished Zinc-Coated Steel: Provide minimum 24 gauge, hot-dip galvanized steel, commercial quality A1 S1 G90 extra smooth, primed on both sides and finished on one (1) side with 70% KYNAR based fluorocarbon coating of minimum 0.70 mils total dry film thickness. Finish shall conform to all tests for adhesion, flexibility and longevity as specified by KYNAR 500 finish supplier.
G. Adhesive: Type recommended by sheet metal fabricator for waterproof/weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application. H. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape. I. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices and similar accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed, noncorrosive, size and gauge required to suit application.
a. Color: Selected by the Architect from manufacturer’s [standard] [full] color range. b. Strippable coating shall be liquid applied in the shop to the front side of the pre-finished metal to protect the finish during fabrication, shipment and field handling. This strippable coating shall be removed prior to installation.
J. Elastic Flashing Filler: Closed cell polyethylene or other soft closed cell material recommended by elastic flashing manufacturer as filler under flashing loops to ensure movement with minimum stress on flashing sheet.
C. Keeper Strips: Zinc coated steel, continuous strips, minimum 18 gauge thickness, G90 hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A653/A653M, slotted holes at maximum ten (10) inches on center and profiled as indicated on the Drawings. 2.3
MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
MATERIALS
K. Roofing Cement: ASTM D2822, compatible with material being installed.
L. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
AND 2.4
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation.
C. Pop Rivets: Closed end type, used for metal-tometal connections where future disassembly is not required. D. Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent type bituminous mastic (chromate free), free of sulfur, compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness per coat. E. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; non-hardening, non-skinning, non-drying, non-migrating sealant, for use at moving sheet metal joints. F. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by fabricator of sheet metal and fabricator of components being sealed; comply with ASTM C920. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
MEMBRANE FLASHING A. Membrane Flashing: Fully self-adhering, selfhealing, composite flexible flashing, total 40 mil membrane consisting of 36 mils of pliable, highly adhesive rubberized asphalt, completely and integrally bonded to a 4 mil, high density, crosslaminated polyethylene film; “Perm-A-Barrier” Wall Membrane by W. R. Grace, Inc., “CCW TWF” by Carlisle Coating and Waterproofing; or approved equal
B. Fasteners: Same material as flashing on which they are used, type and size indicated on the Drawings, or specified herein, unless noted otherwise. Fasteners exposed to the weather shall have neoprene washer under heads to ensure watertightness. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.
S:\11\0123\div2-33\076200CGA.doc
asphalt,
1. Flashing joints shall be lapped a minimum of four (4) inches, and cemented with a suitable product as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.5
FABRICATED UNITS A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop fabricate work to the greatest extent possible. Comply with details indicated on the Drawings, and with applicable requirements of SMACNA - “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weatherresistant performance; with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of the Work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil-canning, buckling and tool 076200 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
marks, true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
G. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. For tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
H. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, non-corrosive metal, and in thickness not less than that of metal being secured.
C. Expansion and Contraction: 1. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction, and building movement in completed Work, without over-stressing the material, breaking connections or producing wrinkles and distortion in finished surfaces. Make watertight and weather-resistive.
2.6
C. Roof-Penetration Flashing:
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
1. Clean material and tin prior to soldering. Solder with heavy coppers of blunt design, properly tinned before use. 2. Solder slowly with well heated coppers; heat the seams thoroughly and completely fill with solder. Exposed soldering with finish surfaces shall be neatly made full flowing and smooth.
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located.
D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion type joints are indicated, or required for proper performance of the Work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA standards.
F. Solder: ASTM B32, 50 - 50 tin/lead solder with rosin flux.
METAL
B. Counterflashing and Flashing Receivers:
a. Flat lock seams, and lap seams where soldered, shall lap according to pitch, but in no case less than three (3) inches. Make seams in direction of flow.
E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from non-compatible metal, or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
SHEET
A. Base Flashing:
2. Where subject to thermal expansion and contraction, attach members with clips to permit movement without damage, or provide slotted or oversize holes with washers only, as acceptable by the Architect. 3. Make lock seam work flat and true to line, and sweat full of solder, except where installed to permit expansion and contraction.
LOW-SLOPE ROOF FABRICATIONS
C. Verify roofing termination and base flashing is in place, sealed, and secure. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2
PREPARATION A. Contact between dissimilar metals shall receive a protective coating of asphalt paint for the prevention of electrolytic action and corrosion. B. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. C. Install starter and edge strips, and continuous keeper strips before starting installation. D. Install flexible flashing membrane over top of fascia, coping areas, and other locations required in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Wash acid flux with soda solution after soldering and remove soldering flux on exposed and painted surfaces.
076200 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
S:\11\0123\div2-33\076200CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
3.3
11-0123
4. Stainless Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
H. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction. I. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work.
1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals. C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks in conformance with SMACNA guidelines. D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric sealant. E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. 1. Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Aluminum: fasteners.
1. Do not solder prepainted, metallic-coated steel sheet. 2. Pretinning is not required for zinc-tin alloycoated stainless steel. 3.4
ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight. B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces in accordance with specified Performance Requirements. 1. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at 24inch on centers. C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Secure in a waterproof manner. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with elastomeric sealant. D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows: 1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing. 2. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for lead flashing on vent piping.
Use aluminum or stainless steel
3. Copper: Use copper or stainless steel fasteners.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
S:\11\0123\div2-33\076200CGA.doc
076200 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
3.5
Akin Road Elementary School
INSTALLATION A. Membrane: Cover parapet walls and treated nailers with roofing membrane. Follow membrane manufacturer’s recommendations 1. Install roofing membrane up and over the top of the wall and down outside face of wall, covering nailer completely. Allow 1/2 inch excess membrane below the nailer, trimming membrane if necessary. 2. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams which will be permanently weathertight and waterproof. 3. Install membrane flashing in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.6
CLEANING A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances which might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes.
3.7
PROTECTION A. Protection: Protect flashing and sheet metal work during construction to ensure that Work will be without damage or deterioration, other than natural weathering at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
076200 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
S:\11\0123\div2-33\076200CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 078400 - FIRESTOPPING C. Fire-Rated Construction Joints: International Building Code, 2000 Edition, Section 713 - “FireResistant Joint Systems”.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Fire-Stopping Systems Used For Sealing All Penetrations Through Fire-Rated Assemblies or at Periphery of Fire-Rated Construction; Including Pipes, Ducts, Conduits, Cable Trays, Structural Members, Intersections Between Walls and Floors, and All Other Openings as Required by the 2006 International Building Code With Minnesota Amendments. C. Fire-Stopping Sealant For All Construction Joints in Fire-Rated Walls and Partitions as Required by International Building Code. D. Labeling Fire-Stop Penetrations.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 014523 - Testing and Inspection Services. B. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete floor openings requiring fire-stopping. C. Section 042000 - Unit Masonry Systems: Concrete masonry units walls requiring firestopping, and fire-stopping sealant at all construction joints in fire-rated walls. D. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Interior metal stud partitions and gypsum board requiring firestopping, and firestopping sealant at all construction joints in fire-rated partitions. E. Division 23-25, 27-28 - Mechanical: Mechanical work requiring firestopping. F. Division 26 - Electrical: Electrical work requiring firestopping.
1.3
D. Inspections per ASTM E2174, “Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Firestops.” 1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate each condition and location requiring penetration seals, UL systems material, reinforcement, anchorage, fastenings, and methods of installation. C. Submit a copy of UL illustration of each proposed system indicating manufacturer-approved modifications. D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data for all materials and prefabricated devices, providing descriptions sufficient for identification at Project Site. Provide data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria. E. Installer Certification: Provide certification by manufacturer that installer is certified, trained and/or approved by manufacturer to install its products. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation procedures for each type of product. G. Submit material safety data sheets (MSDS) for each firestop product. H. Certification: Submit manufacturer’s letter of certification that the materials or combination of materials meet the requirements specified in ASTM E814 - Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire-Stop Systems. 1. Provide directory listing number and number of each system to be used according to location types.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fireproofing Materials: ASTM E119 and ASTM E814 to achieve a fire rating as noted on Drawings. B. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84. 1. Flame Spread of less then 25. 2. Smoke Development Rating of less then 450.
FIRESTOPPING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\078400CGA.doc
078400 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Firestopping materials shall conform to Flame (F) and Temperature (T) ratings as required by International Building Code and as tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E814 or UL 1479 fire tests. The F rating must be a minimum of one (1) hour but not less than the fire resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated. T rating, when required by code authority, shall be based on measurement of the temperature rise on the penetrating item(s). The fire test shall be conducted with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inches of water column.
Akin Road Elementary School
1.7
A. Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F. B. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for three (3) days after installation of materials. C. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials. 1.8
1.9
1.10
B. Warranty: All materials and workmanship provided are guaranteed against defects, include coverage for firestopping to remain free from cracking, checking, dusting, flaking, spalling, separation and blistering, after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
G. Engineering Judgment: For special situations not covered by existing UL systems, require engineering judgment to meet fire code requirements. Engineering Judgment to have approval of local code official before installation. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle and protect products under provisions of Section 016000. B. Deliver materials in the manufacturer’s original, unopened containers or packages with manufacturer’s name, product identification, lot numbers, UL labels, and mixing and installation instructions, as applicable.
WARRANTY
A. Provide five (5) year manufacturer's written warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
F. Equipment used shall be in accordance with firestopping manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
1.6
PROTECTION A. Where fire-stopping is installed at locations which will remain exposed in the completed work, provide protection as necessary to prevent damage to adjacent surfaces and finishes, and protect as necessary against damage from other construction activities.
D. Single Source Limitations: Obtain all fire-stopping systems for the Project through one source from a single manufacturer. E. Contractor performing Firestopping shall be trained and certified or approved by the firestopping manufacturer. Contractor shall specialize in firestop application, and have experience in similar applications and projects. Installation shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s detailed installation procedures.
SEQUENCING A. Sequence work to permit firestopping materials to be installed after adjacent and surrounding work is complete.
B. Fire-stopping material shall be asbestos free, free of any PCB’s, and lead free. C. Do not use any product containing solvents or that requires hazardous waste disposal.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FIRESTOPPING A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. RectorSeal, Inc. 2. 3M Fire Protection Products.
C. Store materials in the original, unopened containers or packages, and under conditions recommended by the manufacturer.
3. Grace Construction, Fire-Stopping Systems.
D. All fire-stop materials shall be installed prior to expiration date of shelf life.
5. Nelson Fire-Stop Products.
078400 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
4. Johns Manville, Fire Stopping Products.
FIRESTOPPING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\078400CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
6. Hilti Corporation, Fire-Stopping Systems.
B. Primer, Sealant and Solvent Cleaner: recommended by manufacturer.
7. TREMCO Fire-Stopping Systems. B. Substitutions: 016000. 2.2
Under provisions of Section
PART 3 - EXECUTION
MATERIALS
3.1
A. Fire-stopping materials shall be asbestos-free and capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of ASTM E814.
B. Verify with mechanical and electrical for all openings and penetrations required to be sealed.
B. Fire-Stopping Systems: Material systems required for sealing fire-rated wall and floor penetrations greater than one (1) inch in size.
C. Examine penetrations, all surfaces and openings to receive fire-stopping, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for configurations, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting fire-stopping performance. Do not proceed with installation of fire-stopping until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Seal tops of walls, including the space between the flutes of the metal roof deck. C. Fire-Stopping Sealant: One-part elastomeric sealant formulated for use as part of a throughpenetration fire-stop system for sealing openings around cables, conduit, pipes and similar penetrations through rated walls and floors, TCA listed by UL. 1. Use at penetrations through floors and other fire-rated assemblies where voids are one (1) inch or less in size. 2. Use at construction joints at fire-rated walls and partitions at concrete masonry unit walls and gypsum board partitions. D. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces. E. Intumescent Fire-Stop Sealant: One part, acrylic sealant, virtually odorless, contains no volatile solvents, non-sag, gun grade, expands when exposed to heat and protects combustible penetrations. F. Provide all fire-stop mortars, caulks, sealant, putty, collars, mastic, wrap strips and other products as recommended by the Manufacturer necessary to complete the project in an approved manner. ACCESSORIES A. Dam Material: Mineral fiber matting permanent, or other type recommended by manufacturer. 1. Retainers: matting. FIRESTOPPING
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
1. The rating of the fire-stops shall be in no case less than the rating of the time-rated floor, roof or wall assembly.
2.3
Types
3.2
CONDITIONS REQUIRING FIRE-STOP A. General: 1. Provide fire-stopping for conditions specified whether or not fire-stopping is indicated, and, if indicated, whether such material is designated as insulation, safing, or otherwise. 2. Insulation types specified in other Sections shall not be installed in lieu of fire-stopping material specified herein. B. Building Exterior Perimeters: 1. Where exterior facing construction is continuous past a structural floor, and a space would otherwise remain open between the inner face of the wall construction and the outer perimeter edge of the structural floor, provide fire-stopping to equal the fire resistance of the floor assembly. Mineral wool by itself is not an acceptable fire-stop, neither is mineral wool used with beads of caulking applied along length of mineral wool/curtain wall or mineral wool/floor slab junctures. If mineral wool is part of fire-stop system, the mineral wool must be completely covered by appropriate thickness of UL listed Fire-Stop Sealant.
Clips to support mineral fiber
S:\11\0123\div2-33\078400CGA.doc
078400 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
2. Fire-stopping shall be provided whether or not there are any clips, angles, plates or other members bridging or interconnecting the facing and floor systems, and whether or not such items are continuous.
4. Where penetrations occur at fire-rated walls or partitions of hollow type construction, provide fire-stopping to completely fill spaces around the penetration, on each side of the wall or partition, in accordance with ASTM E814.
3. Where an exterior wall of composite type construction passes a perimeter structural member, such as a girder, beam, or strut, and the finish on the interior wall face does not continue up too close with the underside of the structural floor above, thus interrupting the fireresistive integrity of the wall system, and a space would otherwise remain open between the interior face of the wall and lower edge of the structural member, provide fire-stopping to continuously fill such open space.
5. These requirements for penetrations shall apply whether or not sleeves have been provided, and whether or not penetrations are to be equipped with escutcheons or other trim. If penetrations are sleeved, firestop annular space - if any between sleeve and wall of opening. E. Provide fire-stopping to fill miscellaneous voids and openings in fire-rated construction in a manner essentially the same as specified herein before. 3.3
C. Interior Walls and Partitions:
A. Surface Cleaning of Fire-Stopping: Clean out joints and other areas of application immediately before installing fire-stopping to comply with recommendations of manufacturers and the following requirements:
1. Where a wall or partition is continuous past a structural floor, such as a stairwell or vertical shaft, and a space would otherwise remain open between the wall face and perimeter edge of the adjoining structural floor, provide fire-stopping.
1. Remove all foreign material from joint and opening substrates which could interfere with adhesion of fire-stopping, including dust; paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion an compatibility by manufacturer; old joint sealers; oil; grease; waterproofing; water repellents; water; surface dirt and frost.
2. Provide fire-stopping whether or not there are any clips, angles, plates, or other members bridging or interconnecting the wall and floor systems, and whether or not such items are continuous. 3. Where the top edge of a fire-rated wall or partition abuts and is at right angles to flutedtype metal decking, the construction is such that would otherwise leave the flute spaces open, provide fire-stopping.
2. Clean porous joint and opening substrate surfaces, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
D. Penetrations: 1. Penetrations include conduit, cable, wire, pipe, duct, or other elements which pass through one or both outer surfaces of a fire-rated floor, wall or partition. 2. Except for floors on grade, where a penetration occurs through a structural floor or roof and a space would otherwise remain open between the surfaces of the penetration and the edge of the adjoining structural floor or roof, provide firestopping to fill such spaces in accordance with ASTM E814 and UL 2079 for dynamic movement. 3. Where penetrations occur at fire-rated walls or partitions of solid type construction, provide firestopping to completely fill spaces around the penetration in accordance with ASTM E814.
078400 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
PREPARATION
3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 3.4
PROTECTION OF ADJACENT SURFACES A. Protect surfaces not scheduled for fire-stopping and equipment from damage by fall-out and dusting. B. Close off and seal ductwork in areas where firestopping is being applied.
3.5
INSTALLATION A. General:
FIRESTOPPING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\078400CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
1. Apply fire-stops in accordance with fire test reports, fire resistance requirements, acceptable sample installations, and manufacturer’s recommendations.
11-0123
3.6
A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides of each firestop system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Include the following information on labels:
2. Coordinate with plumbing, mechanical, electrical and other trades to assure that all pipe, conduit, cable, and other items which penetrate fire related construction have been permanently installed prior to installation of fire-stops, schedule and sequence the work to assure that partitions and other construction which would conceal penetrations are not erected prior to the installation of fire-stops.
1. The words: "Warning--Through-Penetration Firestop System--Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Follow safety procedures recommended in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
B. Procedures and Preparations:
4. Date of installation.
1. Verify that substrates to receive fire-stopping are prepared in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and are free of materials which may prevent adequate adhesion. 2. Manufacturer’s representative must make periodic visits to verify proper materials.
5. Through-penetration manufacturer's name.
3.7
1. Field testing and inspection shall be performed by the applicable Code authorities. 2. Conventional testing and inspection services herein describe those items not specifically required by 2006 IBC as amended by the 2007 Minnesota State Building Code, but are considered essential to the proper performance of the building systems.
system
CLEANING A. Clean off excess firestopping and firestopping smears as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of products in which firestopping occurs.
C. Dam Construction:
D. Field Quality Control:
firestop
6. Installer's name.
3. Certification: Manufacturer’s representative must provide written report to the Architect that all materials have been installed in accordance with specification requirements.
1. Install dams when required to properly contain fire-stopping materials within openings and as required to achieve fire-resistance rating. Combustible damming material must be removed after appropriate curing. Incombustible damming materials may be left as a permanent component of the fire-stop system.
IDENTIFICATION
B. Leave finished work in neat, clean condition with no evidence of spill-over or damage to adjacent surfaces. 3.8
PROTECTION A. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately an reseal joints with new materials to produce firestopping installations with repaired areas indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION
3. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no additional cost to the Owner.
FIRESTOPPING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\078400CGA.doc
078400 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
078400 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
FIRESTOPPING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\078400CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALERS I. Section 321313 - Exterior Concrete Pavement: Sealant used in conjunction with exterior concrete.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General,. Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Preparing Substrate Surfaces to Receive Sealant and Joint Backing Materials. C. Exterior and Interior Joint Sealant and Gaskets; as Indicated on the Drawings, Specified Herein; Including Joint Backing Materials and Accessories. D. Sealant Types:
2. Acrylic Latex Sealant. 3. Silicone Rubber Sealant. 4. Silicone Building Sealant. 5. Silicone Elastomeric Restoration/Coating Sealant Strip.
Sealant
6. Polyurethane Sealant. 7. Acoustical Sealant E. Joint Gasket Types: 1. Pre-Compressed Foam Gasket/Sealant. RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Sealant used in conjunction with concrete. B. Section 034500 - Architectural Precast Concrete: Sealant used in conjunction with precast concrete. C. Section 042000 - Unit Masonry System: Sealant used in conjunction with unit masonry. D. Section 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sealant used in conjunction with metal flashing for roofing. E. Section 078400 – Firestopping: Sealants for firestopping penetrations. F. Section 081100 - Steel Doors and Frames: Sealant used in conjunction with steel doorframes. G. Section 088100 - Glass and Glazing: Sealant used in conjunction with glazing. H. .Section 093000 - Tiling: conjunction with tile finishes. JOINT SEALERS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\079200CGA.docx
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability for each joint sealer product required, including instructions for joint preparation and joint sealer application. 1. Provide product test reports for each type of joint sealer indicated, evidencing compliance with specified requirements. C. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Manufacturer's standard bead samples consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view.
1. Butyl Sealant.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Sealant used in
D. Samples for verification purposes of each type and color of joint sealer required. Install joint sealer samples in 1/2 inch wide joints formed between two (2) six (6) inch long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealers. E. Installer Qualifications: Submit data indicating compliance with requirements specified below. Include list of completed projects with project name and address, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified. F. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: Where sealant will be applied between dissimilar materials, non-typical materials, under unusual conditions or under conditions not normally recommended by the sealant manufacturer, submit the following: 1. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealers attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. 2. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports from elastomeric sealant manufacturer indicating that materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealant. 3. Stain Test Report from sealant manufacturer indicating that sealants have been tested and comply with specifications and industry standards for non-staining sealants.
079200 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
4. Sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion to the intended substrates.
5. Testing will not be required when joint sealer manufacturer is able to submit joint preparation data required above which is acceptable to Architect and is based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.
G. Submit pre-construction field test reports indicating which products and joint preparation methods demonstrated acceptable adhesion to joint substrates. 1.4
E. Product Testing: Provide comprehensive test data for each type of joint sealer based on tests conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory on current product formulations within a twenty-four (24) month period preceding date of Contractor's submittal of test results to Architect.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Joint sealers are required to establish and maintain waterproof continuous seals during the specified warranty period within recognized limitations of wear and aging indicated for each application.
1. Test elastomeric sealant for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C920. Include test results for hardness, stain resistance (per ASTM C1248), adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement (per ASTM C719), low-temperature flexibility, modulus of elasticity at 100 percent strain, effects of heat aging, and effects of accelerated weathering (ASTM C793).
B. Installer Qualifications: Installer who has successfully completed within the last five (5) years at least five (5) joint sealer applications similar in type and size to that of this Project. C. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials: Obtain each type of joint sealer material from a single manufacturer.
F. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
D. Pre-Construction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit sample of all materials that will contact or affect joint sealers to joint sealer manufacturers for compatibility and adhesion testing, as indicated below:
G. Paintability: Where painting of sealant is required, verify with sealant manufacturer, that sealant is compatible with the specific paint.
1. Use manufacturer’s standard test methods to determine if priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealers to joint substrates.
H. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids: Where sealants are indicated to be immersed in liquids, provide products that have been tested in accordance with ASTM C1247 and are suitable for immersion in intended liquids.
a. Perform tests under normal environmental conditions that will exist during actual installation.
I. At Contractors option, provide sealants of contrasting color for concealed joints in CMU for verification of work completion. Other locations will be considered by the Architect upon written request.
2. Submit not less than nine (9) pieces of each type of materials, including joint substrates, shims, joint sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analysis of results to prevent delay in the progress of the Work. 4. Investigate materials failing compatibility or adhesion tests and obtain joint sealer manufacturer's written recommendations for corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers.
079200 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle and protect products to site under provisions of Section 016000. B. Deliver materials to site in original unopened containers of bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.
JOINT SEALERS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\079200CGA.docx
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
C. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturers' recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
B. Warranty: All materials and workmanship provided are guaranteed against defects, include coverage for installed sealant and accessories which fail to achieve air tight seal, and water tight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure, after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
D. Damaged or otherwise unsuitable materials, when so ascertained, shall be immediately removed from the job site, and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
1. Provide two (2) year warranty for Acrylic Latex.
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits recommended by joint sealer manufacturer’s published recommendations or when joint substrates are wet due to rain, snow, frost, condensation or other causes except as provided below: 1. Installation of joint sealants in temperature conditions outside the limits of the Manufacturer’s published recommendations may occur only if the Installer provides a letter to the Architect from the Manufacturer authorizing installation under revised ambient and substrate temperature limits. The letter shall indicate the date the letter is effective, the specific accepted revised ambient and substrate temperature conditions, and certification that the sealant warranty will remain in effect if installation is performed within the revised limits.
3. Provide five (5) year warranty for Polyurethane Sealant.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - JOINT SEALANT A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. BOSTIK Sealant Systems. 2. Carlisle QSC. 3. Dow Corning Silicone Sealant. 4. General Electric Silicone Sealant.
B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated.
5. PECORA Corporation.
C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
8. TREMCO Sealant Systems.
1. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers when substrates are wet. 1.7
2. Provide twenty (20) year warranty for Silicone Sealant and Adhesive.
WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's written warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
JOINT SEALERS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\079200CGA.docx
6. SIKA Sealant Systems. 7. BASF.
9. TREMCO - VULKEM. B. Substitutions: 016000. 2.2
Under provisions of Section
JOINT SEALANT A. Butyl Sealant: ASTM D2377 and ASTM D1311; Type S, non-sag, non-hardening, solvent release cure, polymerized butyl sealant meeting FS TT-S001657 for Type I and formulated with minimum 75% solids; non-staining, paintable and permanently tacky. [Use for polyethylene vapor retarder seals, wood, concrete, metals and roof drains where movement is great and also where acoustical sound reduction required. Excellent in shear walls where there is continuous movement.]
079200 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
1. PECORA – BC-158 (skinning butyl)
E. Silicone Elastomeric Restoration/Coating Sealant Strip: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS; Ready to use, single component, water based silicone sealant. Color selected by Architect from standard colors. [Use for concrete block, fluted block, brick, stucco, synthetic stucco, EIFS, (including surface repair of EIFS joints) and previously coated masonry joints. Used in conjunction with DOW 795 or 791.]
2. PECORA – BA-98 (non-skinning butyl). 3. TREMCO-Butyl Sealant. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 016000. B. Acrylic Latex Sealant: ASTM C834-86, non-sag, gun-grade, single component acrylic latex sealing compound, mildew-resistant. Color as selected by Architect from standard colors. [Use for sealing interior joints that are to receive paint and not subject to movement.]
1. BASF – SONOLASTIC 150 VLM (hybrid, low VOC, non-sag, non-staining) 2. DOW CORNING 123.
1. BASF - SONOLASTIC SONOLAC.
3. PECORA – SIL-SPAN.
2. BOSTIK - CHEM-CALK 600.
4. TREMCO – Simple Seal.
3. PECORA AC-20.
5. Substitutions: 016000.
4. TREMCO - TREMFLEX 834. 5. Substitutions: 016000.
Under provisions of Section
F. Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25; non-sag, gun-grade, low modules, chemical curing, non-staining, twocomponent polyurethane sealant with movement capability of +/- 50 percent. Color as selected by Architect from standard colors. [Use for exterior joints exposed to view where normal movement is anticipated; such as masonry control joints, window and door perimeters, louvers, relief angles, slip joints, copings, joints in wall sheathing, etc.]
Under provisions of Section
C. Silicone Rubber Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, non-sag, exposure class NT, one part silicone, mildew-resistant, acid-curing, +/- 50 percent movement. 1. BASF-Sonneborn Omni-Plus. 2. DOW CORNING 786. 3. GE Sanitary Silicone 1700.
1. PECORA - DYNATROL II.
4. PECORA – 898 or 860.
2. SIKA - SIKAFLEX 2C NS.
5. TREMCO-Tremsil 200.
3. BASF - SONOLASTIC NP 2.
6. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 016000.
4. TREMCO – DyMeric 240/240FC.
D. Silicone Building Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; one part silicone formulation, can accommodate +/- 50 percent movement, Hardness Shore A of 30, special twenty (20) year limited warranty. Color selected by Architect from standard colors. 1. DOW CORNING 795. 2. PECORA 895 NST.
5. Substitutions: 016000. 2.3
Under provisions of Section
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - JOINT ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant: Non-skinning, non-hardening, non-staining, permanently flexible sealant designed specifically for sealing drywall partitions to limit the transmission of sound. To be used in concealed areas only.
3. TREMCO - SPECTREM 2.
1. PECORA - AC-20. FTR.
4. Substitutions: 016000.
2. SHEETROCK Acoustical Gypsum Comp.
Under provisions of Section
Sealant –
U.S.
3. PECORA - BA-98 (for concealed joints only). 4. TREMCO ACOUSTICAL SEALANT. 5. Substitutions: 016000. 079200 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Under provisions of Section
JOINT SEALERS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\079200CGA.docx
Akin Road Elementary School
2.4
ACCESSORIES A. Generally: Provide sealant accessories that are non-staining and compatible with specific sealants as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, as recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Primer: Non-staining type. For all Sealants, prime surfaces according to Manufacturer’s recommendations for substrate and sealant application. D. Joint Backer Rod: Designed for use with cold applied joint sealant complying with ASTM C1330. Provide backer rod of size and type as approved by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint design. 1. Type C: Closed cell polyethylene rod, where off gassing is acceptable. 2. Type O: Open cell material where no off gassing is allowed. Not suitable for horizontal surfaces. 3. Type B: Bi-cellular material with surface skin. E. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. F. Provide other materials as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for proper sealant installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joints sealers, with Installer present for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealer performance. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. B. Do not proceed width installation of joint sealers until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, for all sealants, verify with Sealant Manufacturer that sealant is compatible with each substrate where sealant is to be applied. B. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joints sealer manufacturers and the following requirements:
JOINT SEALERS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\079200CGA.docx
11-0123
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with adhesion of joint sealer, including dust; paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer; old joint sealers; oil; grease; waterproofing; water repellents; water; surface dirt and frost. 2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile and similar porous joint substrates, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealers. Remove loose particle remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces or ceramic tile and other nonporous surfaces by chemical cleaners or other means which are not harmful to substrates or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealers. C. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer based on pre-construction joint sealer-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. D. Masking tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. E. Back-Up Material: 1. Verify compatibility of back-up material with sealant before installation. 2. Use back-up material 25 percent wider than width of joint to provide substantial resistance to displacement. F. Release Agent: Apply release agent or bond breaker strip to joint to be sealed on top of back-up material to prevent adhesion of sealant to back-up material per manufacturer’s recommendations.
079200 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
G. Prior to beginning installation of sealant, Installer shall identify all weeps and drainage ways in areas where sealant is to be applied. Installer shall be responsible to ensure that weeps and drainage ways remain open after completion of installation of sealants. 3.3
F. Tooling of Non-Sag Sealant: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealant to form smooth, uniform beads of concave configuration, to eliminate air pockets and to ensure contact an adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealant or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.
INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Elastomeric Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealant as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated. C. Solvent-Release-Curing Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with requirements of ASTM C804 for use of solvent-release-curing sealant. D. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: 1. Install joint-fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealant during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealant relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability a. Do not leave gaps between ends of jointfillers. b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear joint fillers.
1. Provide appropriate concave joint configuration as indicated in ASTM C1193, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4
CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealers and of products in which joints occur.
3.5
PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealer immediately and reseal joints with new materials to produce joint sealer instructions with repaired areas indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION
c. Remove absorbent joint-fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. 2. Install bond breaker tape between sealant and joint fillers, compression seals or back of joints where adhesion of sealant to surfaces at back of joints would result in sealant failure. E. Installation of Sealant: Install sealant by proven techniques that result in sealant directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration and providing uniform, crosssectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability.
079200 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
JOINT SEALERS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\079200CGA.docx
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 081100 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 1.4
PART 1 - GENERAL
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
1.1
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data substantiating that products comply with requirements; including, but not limited to, details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles and finishes.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Steel Doors and Frames; as Indicated on the Drawings, Specified Herein; Including Related Accessories and Attachments.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames; including details of each door and frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints at connections. Show all anchorage and accessory items.
1. Interior, Non-Rated, Seamless Standard Steel Doors. 2. Exterior and Interior, Non-Rated, Pressed Standard Steel Frames, Welded Unit Type for Doors, Transoms, Sidelights, Mullions, and Other Openings.
1. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
C. Installation of Steel Door and Frame Glazing and Door Hardware.
2. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.
D. Provide Factory Primed Steel Doors and Frames to be Field Paint Finished. 1.2
1.3
A. Section 087100 - Door Hardware: Finish hardware templates and hardware for installation by this Section.
D. Label Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated and exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, submit manufacturer's certification for that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to design, materials and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction.
B. Section 088100 - Glass and Glazing: Glass and glazing for installation by this Section.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: special installation instructions.
PRODUCTS INSTALLED, BUT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
NOT
F. Obtain all steel doors and frames from a single source manufacturer.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: framing, partitions, blocking and shims.
Wood 1.5
B. Section 079200 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and joint backing at steel frames. C. Section 081416 - Wood Doors: Flush wood doors in steel frames. D. Section 087100 - Finish Hardware: hardware and templates.
Finish
E. Section 088100 - Glass and Glazing: Glazing in steel doors and frames. F. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Interior metal stud framing and gypsum board finish.
Indicate
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide standard doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames" ANSI A250.8 (formerly ANSI/SDI-100) and as herein specified. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated or required, provide fire-rated door and frame assemblies that comply with UL 10C. C. Fire-Rated Door and Frame Assemblies: Require assemblies and components to comply with positive pressure and S-Label requirements.
G. Section 099000 - Paints and Coatings: Field painting of steel doors and frames.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES S:\11\0123\div2-33\081100CHQ.DOC
081100 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
D. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated and exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certificate or label from an approved independent testing and inspection agency, indication that door and frame assembly conforms to the requirements of design, materials and construction as established by individual listings for tested assemblies.
Akin Road Elementary School
1.9
A. Provide two (2) year manufacturer’s written warranty under provisions of Section 017836. B. Warranty: All materials and workmanship provided are guaranteed against defects; including delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified tolerances, defective materials and telegraphing core construction, after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
E. Temperature Rise Rating: At stair well enclosures, provide doors that have Temperature Rise Rating of 450 degrees F maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure. 1.6
WARRANTY
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 016000. B. Deliver hollow metal work carton or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional sealed plastic wrapping for factory finished doors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers:
C. Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery from damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. D. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum four (4) inch high wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4 inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. 1.7
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual locations of steel doors and frames with and other construction to which steel doors and frames must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
1.8
COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work of this Section with door and frame opening construction, including door hardware installation.
081100 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
1. The CECO Corporation. 2. Curries Manufacturing, Inc. 3. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company. B. Substitutions: 016000. 2.2
Under provisions of Section
STEEL DOORS A. General: 1. Provide door types and sizes as indicated on the Door Schedule. 2. Provide steel doors rigid and neat in appearance, no buckles or warpage. All forming bends, straight with a minimum radius for the gauge of metal used. 3. Provide doors continuously seam welded full height of the door with vertical edge seams formed by the face sheets. Edges ground, filled and sanded smooth to provide a seamless edge surface. 4. Top and bottom edges of all steel doors, closed with a continuous recessed steel channel not less than 14 gauge, extending the full width of the door and spot welded to both faces. Provide exterior steel doors with an additional flush closing channel at their top edge and, where required for attachment of weather-stripping, a flush closure also at their bottom edge.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES S:\11\0123\div2-33\081100CHQ.DOC
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
5. Door Thickness: Minimum 1-3/4 inches thick or as indicated with a beveled lock edge 1/8 inch in two (2) inches. 6. Door Hardware Reinforcement: Provide doors mortised and reinforced for field application of hinges and locks in accordance with the approved hardware schedule and templates as furnished by the hardware supplier. Provide all surface mounted hardware with appropriate internal reinforcement plates for field drilling and tapping by the installation contractor. 7. After fabrication, chemically treat steel doors to insure maximum paint adhesion and paint with a rust-inhibitive primer in accordance with ANSI A224.1-87 procedures, oven dried and fully cured before packaging and shipment. 8. Provide steel doors of the following types per ANSI A250.8: a. Level II - Heavy Duty. b. Model 2 - Seamless Design. No visible seams on face or door edges c. Core Design F - Vertical Steel Stiffeners. B. Interior Doors (Non-Rated): ANSI/SDI-100, Level II, Model 2; minimum 18 gauge face sheets, 1-3/4 inches thick; cold rolled steel with full flush construction conforming to ASTM A1008. 1. Seamless composite construction. 2. Core Design F, with stiffeners not less than 22 gauge, maximum six (6) inches spacing, spotwelds maximum five (5) inches on center. 3. Sound deaden and insulate spaces between stiffeners the full height of the door with expanding polyurethane foam-in-place insulation. 4. If required, provide door provisions of Section 088100.
glazing under
C. Maximum Area of Door Glazing with UL Ratings per IBC, Section 714: Verify ratings and sizes with Door Manufacturer. 1. 60 Minute Rating and B Label: 1-1/2 hour rating, maximum 100 square inch glass per door leaf. 2. 3/4 hour Rating: Maximum 1296 square inch glass per door leaf. (IBC) 2.3
1. Steel frames: Jamb depth, profile and size as indicated on the Door Schedule. a. Typical: 5-3/4 inch by two (2) inch. 2. Rigid and neat in appearance, no buckle or warpage. Forming bends: Straight and have a minimum radius for the gauge of metal used. 3. Frame corners: Saw mitered, full profile welded and ground smooth. Double rabbet face profile as indicated on the Drawings, unless noted otherwise. NO KNOCKDOWN FRAMES ALLOWED. Refer to ANSI/SDI A250.8 for further explanation. 4. Minimum depth of stops: 5/8 inch. 5. Frames for multiple or special openings: Provide mullion and/or rail members that are closed shapes having no visible seams or joints. Securely weld and finish smooth joints between faces of abutting members. 6. Frame Hardware Reinforcement: Provide frame reinforcement for all hardware. Frames mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for fully template mortised hardware only, in accordance with approved hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. Where surface mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall have reinforcing plates only; with drilling and tapping done in the field by the hardware installer. 7. Floor anchors: 14 gauge, securely welded inside each jamb, with two (2) holes provided at each jamb for floor anchorage. 8. Provide frames with a steel spreader temporarily attached to the feet of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. 9. After fabrication, chemically treat frames to insure maximum paint adhesion and paint with a rust-inhibitive primer in accordance with ANSI A224.1 procedures, including oven drying and fully curing before packaging and shipment. 10. Provide high frequency hinge reinforcement on all hinges. 11. Provide frames with continuous hinges with twelve (12) gauge reinforcing full height of frame.
STEEL FRAMES A. General:
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
S:\11\0123\div2-33\081100CHQ.DOC
081100 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
B. Exterior Frames: ANSI/SDI-100; minimum 14 gauge thick material, pressed steel frames, capped and butted stops with face corners mitered, welded and ground smooth; hot-dipped galvanized A60 zinc coating per ASTM A653.
6. Angle Floor Clips: 16 gauge welded to frames or shipped loose, and each drilled for two (2) 3/8 inch anchors. B. Galvanized steel doors and frames shall have galvanized hardware reinforcements.
1. Sound deaden spaces inside frames. 2. If required, provide glass and glazing in accordance with Section 088100 with manufacturer’s standard glazing stops.
2.5
A. Provide steel frames for installation in masonry walls with adjustable jamb anchors of type recommended by frame manufacturer. Anchors: not less than 16 gage steel or 0.156 inch diameter steel wire. Stirrup straps: not less than 2 x 10 inch in size, corrugated and/or perforated. Provide anchors on each jamb as follows:
C. Interior Frames (Fire-Rated): ANSI/SDI-100; 16 gauge thick material, pressed steel frames, capped and butted stops with face corners mitered, welded and ground smooth. 1. Sound deaden spaces inside frames.
1. Frames up to 7’-6” height: Three (3) anchors.
2. If required, provide glass and glazing in accordance with Section 088100 with fire-rated glazing stops; and UL labels as indicated on the Door Schedule.
2. Frames 7’-6” to 8’-0” height: Four (4) anchors. 3. Frames over 8’-0” height: One (1) anchor for each two (2) feet or fraction thereof in height.
D. Interior Frames (Non-Rated): ANSI/SDI-100; 16 gage thick material, pressed steel frames, capped and butted stops with face corners mitered, welded and ground smooth.
B. Provide steel frames for installation in stud partitions with steel anchors of suitable design, not less than 18 gage thickness, securely welded inside each jamb as follows:
1. Sound deaden spaces inside frames.
1. Frames up to 7’-6” height: Four (4) anchors.
2. If required, provide glass and glazing in accordance with Section 088100 with manufacturer's standard glazing stops.
2. Frames 7’-6” to 8’-0” height: Five (5) anchors. 3. Frames over 8’-0” height: Five (5) anchors plus one (1) additional anchor for each two (2) feet or fraction thereof over 8’-0”.
3. If required, provide glass and glazing in accordance with Section 088100 with fire-rated glazing stops; "UL or Warnock-Hersey 20minute label". 2.4
FRAME ANCHORS
C. Provide steel frames to be anchored to previously placed concrete, unit masonry or structural steel with anchors of suitable design as shown on approved shop drawings.
HARDWARE REINFORCEMENT
D. Steel frames for installation in masonry wall openings more than 4’-0” in width shall have an angle or channel stiffener factory welded into the head of the frame. Stiffeners: not less than 12 gage steel and not longer than the opening width. Do not use stiffeners as lintels or load bearing members.
A. Reinforce steel doors and frames adequately for all hardware; as a minimum provide the following reinforcing: 1. Cover Boxes: Provide for hardware cut-outs. 2. Lock Strike Reinforcement: 12 gage by template requirements.
E. Dust cover boxes (mortar guards) of not less than 26 gage steel, provided at all hardware mortises on frames to be set in masonry or plaster partitions.
3. Hinge and Pivot Reinforcement (Each Location): Minimum 7 gauge, 1-5/8 inch x 10 inches long welded to frame. 4. Lock Edge Reinforcement, Flush Bolts, Concealed Holders, Concealed or Surface Mounted Closer: Minimum 12 gauge x 14 inches long x full frame width welded to frames. 5. Other Surface Mounted Hardware: 16 gauge.
081100 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
2.6
ACCESSORIES A. Provide removable steel spreaders attached to the bottom of three-sided frames. B. Mark frame number on the jamb of each frame in butt recess for identification at the job site. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES S:\11\0123\div2-33\081100CHQ.DOC
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
C. Non-Rated Glazing Stops and Moldings: Rolled steel channel shape, minimum 18 gauge, prepared for counter sink style tamper proof screws.
1. For concealed overhead door closer, provide space, cutouts, reinforcing and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable.
D. Fire-Rated Glazing Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, stop height 5/8 inch minimum; prepared for countersunk style tamperproof screws, and conforming to UL 10C.
2. For magnetic locks provided under Division 16, prepare doors and frames with templates provided by magnetic lock supplier.
E. Frames Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into factory drilled hole.
G. Reinforce door and frames to receive surfaceapplied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surfaceapplied finish hardware may be done at project site.
F. Mortar Guards: Provide minimum 26 gage steel mortar guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cut-outs where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. 2.7
H. Locate finish hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware:" by the Door and Hardware Institute. I. Fire-Rated Doors and Frames:
FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel door and frame units rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warping or buckling. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Provide stiffeners where indicated.
1. In addition to other requirements for steel doors and frames specified herein, comply with the label requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories (UL), positive pressure and S-label requirements, and approval of applicable local authority having jurisdiction.
1. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site.
2. Fabricate steel doors and frames in accordance with the requirements of UL 10C for the class of door opening scheduled.
B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non-flush units, from cold-rolled steel.
a. Provide steel doors and frames with the appropriate UL and S labels indicating required fire protection rating and maximum temperature rising rating.
C. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings from cold-rolled steel.
1) Maximum temperature rise rating is required for doors and frames protecting exit enclosures.
D. Fabricate exterior doors, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet steel. Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 16-gauge inverted steel channels. E. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips heads for exposed screws and bolts. F. Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule, with templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
S:\11\0123\div2-33\081100CHQ.DOC
b. Where pairs of doors are scheduled, provide door manufacturer’s standard astragal identical in performance to the astragal used in the approved test assembly for the fire rating indicated or required. 2.8
FINISH A. After fabrication, fill and sand tool marks and imperfections as required to make face sheets, vertical edges and weld joints free from irregularities. B. Shop Painting: 1. Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel doors and frame units, including galvanized surfaces.
081100 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
2. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt and other foreign materials before application of paint.
1. Except for frames located at in-place concrete or masonry and at drywall installations, place frames prior to construction at enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
3. Apply shop coat of rust inhibitive prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint. 4. Exterior Doors: Hot-dipped galvanized in the 0.6 ounce coating class (G60), to conform to ASTM A653.
2. In masonry construction, located three (3) wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels.
C. Field Painting: Touch-up and finish painting under provisions of Section 099000.
a. Countersink exposed fasteners, fill in and sand smooth where masonry anchor locations are visible on door frames.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3. At in-place concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices.
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
4. Install fire-rated frames in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80. 5. In metal stud partitions, install at least three (3) wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In open steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie. In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping screws.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Verify all hardware reinforcing conforms with templates furnished under Section 087100. 3.2
E. Hardware Installation: Refer to Section 087100 for hardware installation requirements.
INSTALLATION A. General: Install standard steel doors and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified.
3.3
A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
B. Door Installation: 1. Fit steel doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI/SDI-100. 2. Place fire-rated steel doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80. C. Install steel doors with uniform margin at jambs and heads. Upon complete erection, verify all items are in perfect operating condition with all doors swinging free and not rattling when closed. D. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI105, “Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames", unless otherwise indicated.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
3.4
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, fill in and sand smooth any tool marks, surface imperfections, rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. B. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition.
END OF SECTION
081100 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES S:\11\0123\div2-33\081100CHQ.DOC
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE 1.5
PART 1 - GENERAL
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submittals under provisions of Section 017823.
1.1
B. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.
PROJECT INFORMATION A. Owner: Farmington Schools B. Project: Akin Elementary
1. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component.
C. Comminsion Number: 11-0123 D. Submission Date: 12-14-2012 1.2
2. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
1.6
A. Provide under provisions of Section 014300. B. Perform Work in accordance with the following requirements:
B. Door Hardware; as Indicated on the Drawings and Door Schedule, Specified Herein; Including Related Accessories and Attachments.
1. ADA - Requirements for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Disabled People.
1. Steel Frames, Wood Doors.
2. NFPA 80.
C. Hardware Schedule at End of Section. 1.3
PRODUCT FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
3. UL 10C.
NOT
A. Furnish hardware templates to Sections 062000, 081100, and 084100 for door and frame preparation.
C. Fire Rated Door and Frame Assemblies, Including Hardware: Assemblies and components to comply with positive pressure and B-Label requirements. 1.7
B. Furnish cylinders to Section 083300. 1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Submittals under provisions of Section 013300.
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, electrical characteristics and connection requirements, and schedule for all hardware groups.
B. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial and institutional door hardware with minimum five (5) years documented experience.
C. Hardware Schedule: Hardware submittal shall be in the recognized DHI vertical format. Horizontal schedules will be rejected.
C. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to assist in the Work of this Section.
SUBMITTALS
D. Submit manufacturer's parts lists and templates. E. Samples: Submit one sample of hinge, latch-set, and closer illustrating style, color, and finish.
1.8
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
F. Samples: Will be returned to supplier.
A. Conform to International Building Code, Latest Edition for requirements applicable to fire-rated doors, frames and hardware.
G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
DOOR HARDWARE
S:\11\0123\div2-33\087100kb1218.doc
087100 - 1 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
C. Handicap Requirements: Doors to stairs (other than exit stairs), loading platforms, boiler rooms, stages, and doors serving other hazardous locations shall have knurled or other similar approved marking on door lever handles or cross bars in accordance with local building codes. D. Fire Rated Door and Frame Assemblies: Require assemblies and components to comply with positive pressure and S-Label requirements. 1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
conditions, verifying that closer has been properly installed and adjusted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
BUTT HINGES A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Bommer.
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 016000.
2. Hager.
B. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule.
4. Stanley. B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed.
C. Deliver keys to Owner by certified mail or direct hand carry direct from hardware supplier.
C. Acceptable manufacturers with their respective catalog numbers are as follows:
D. Deliver hardware required to be installed during fabrication of hollow metal, wood, aluminum or stainless steel doors prepaid to manufacturer. 1.10
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work of this Section with other directly affected Sections involving manufacturer of any internal reinforcement for door hardware. Furnish a copy of the approved hardware schedule and all pertinent templates or template information to each fabricator of material factory-prepared for the installation of hardware. 1.11
WARRANTY
A. Provide five (5) year manufacturer's written warranty under provisions of Section 017836. B. Warranty: All materials and workmanship provided are guaranteed against defects, including coverage for operation of all hardware specified, after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner. C. Replace shortages and incorrect items with correct materials at no additional cost to the Owner. D. At completion of project, qualified factory representative shall inspect door closer installations. After this inspection, a certified letter shall be sent to the Architect reporting on
087100 - 2 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
3. Ives.
Hager BB1279 BB1191 BB1168 BB1199
Stanley FBB179 FBB191 FBB168 FBB199
Bommer BB5000 BB5002 BB5004 BB5006
Ives 5BB1 5BB1ss 5BB1HW 5BB1HWss
D. Furnish butt hinges for each door leaf as follows: 1. Two (2) hinges per leaf for openings through 60 inches (1830 mm) high. 2. One (l) additional hinge per leaf for each additional 30 inches (730 mm) in height, or fraction thereof. 3. Standard weight, ball bearing hinge 5BB1 for interior openings through 36 inches (910 mm) wide. 4. Heavy weight, four ball bearing hinge 5BB1HW for interior openings over 36 inches (910 mm) wide. 5. Heavy weight, four ball bearing hinge 5BB1HWss x NRP for exterior out swinging openings. 6. Size: Thickness 2-1/4” Doors 1-3/4” Doors 1-3/8” Doors
Size 5 inch by 5 inch 4-1/2 inch by 4-1/2 inch 3-1/3 inch by 3-1/2 inch
7. Provide NRP (Non-Removable Pins) for outswinging lockable doors.
DOOR HARDWARE
S:\11\0123\div2-33\087100kb1218.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
2.2
11-0123
8. All parallel arm mounted closer shall be installed with 5th hole spacer block with fifth screw. Shoe support must be used where frames are 5-3/4 inch (146 mm) or less.
CYLINDERS AND LOCKS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Schlage
9. Pressure relief valve operation is not acceptable in any condition.
B. Provide cylinders for Sections [083300, 083600, and 102226.13]. C. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed. Manufacturer Schlage
Series L9000
2.4
A. Where protective kick-plates (KP) are specified in the Hardware Schedule, furnish plates 2 inches (51 mm) less than door width and 10 inches (250 mm) in height. Where bottom rail dimension of the door is too small to accommodate 10 inch height, provide kick-plate one (1) inch less than rail height.
Design Match existing
D. Cylinders: Match existing type and keyway. E. Back-Sets: 2-3/4 inches. F. Strikes: Provide wrought boxes and strikes with proper lip length to protect trim but not to project more than 1/8 inch beyond trim, frame, or inactive leaf. Where required, provide open back strike, protected to allow practical and secure operation. 2.3
B. Provide 0.050 inch thick material, countersunk for screws, and beveled four edges. 2.5
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers:
1. Burns 2. Hager.
1. LCN - 4010/4110-EDA Series.
3. Ives.
B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed.
B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed.
C. General Requirements:
C. Where wall stops are not applicable, furnish overhead stops.
1. Closer for Exterior Doors: Equip closer for exterior doors, and all doors over 36 inches (910 mm) wide with coil spring power adjustment and reversible foot to increase latching power and 70 degrees adjustable back check.
D. Ives products are listed in Hardware Schedule. Other acceptable manufacturers with their respective catalog numbers are as follows: Ives WS406CCV WS406CCV 2.6
3. Closer Accessories: Provide parallel arms, corner brackets, and drop plates as required to suit details.
6. Closer Location: Mount closer on room side of corridor doors, unless otherwise noted in hardware groups. 7. Closer shall have all weather fluid, powder coat finish, and a ten (10) year warranty. DOOR HARDWARE
S:\11\0123\div2-33\087100kb1218.doc
Hager 232W 236W
Burns 570 575
ACCESSORIES & ATTACHMENTS A. Furnish all necessary hardware accessories such as wood or machine screws, bolts, nuts, anchors, toggle bolts, and other fasteners, each of the type, size, material and finish for its intended purpose and each according to the material to which the hardware is being applied.
4. Closer for Labeled Doors: Provide closer for all labeled and 20-minute doors, including inactive leaf and pair of doors. 5. Door Swing: Where all conditions permit, all doors shall swing 180 degrees.
WALL AND FLOOR STOPS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers:
CLOSER
2. Furnish non-sized door closer, adjustable to meet maximum opening force requirements of ADA.
PROTECTIVE PLATES
2.7
KEYING A. Master key or Grand master key cylinders and key in groups, unless otherwise specified. Factory master-key with manufacturer retaining permanent keying records. B. Provide six (6) master-keys for each master-key set. Provide three (3) change keys for each lock. 087100 - 3 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
Provide two (2) control keys for core removal. Stamp keys "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
install hardware after finishing operations are complete.
C. Submit proposed keying schedule to Architect. If requested, meet with Owner and Architect to review schedule.
E. Mounting Heights: 1. Install hardware at mounting heights conforming to the recommended mounting locations of the Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association.
D. Provide removable core cylinders for each lock with construction master-keying. Permanent cores shall be installed upon completion of the project.
2. Install wall stops to engage knobs, levers or pulls. 3. Install wall and magnetic holders near top of doors, but not more than 78 inches from the finish floor line.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
F. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyiso-butylene mastic sealant, forming a tight seal between threshold and surface to which set. Secure and permanently anchor thresholds, using countersunk non-ferrous screws to match color of threshold (stainless steel screws at aluminum thresholds).
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive Work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
3.4
C. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics. 3.2
3.3
A. Architectural Hardware Consultant to inspect installation and certify that hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and this specification. Letter stating compliance shall be sent to the Architect upon completion of the project.
PREPARATION A. Prior to hardware installation, Contractor shall coordinate a hardware installation seminar with a minimum of two (2) weeks notice to all parties involved. The seminar is to be conducted on the installation, specifically lock-sets, closer, continuous hinges, exit devices and overhead stops. Manufacturer’s representative for the above listed products will be present at the seminar. Seminar will be held at the job-site and attended by hardware installers (including low voltage hardware) for aluminum, steel doors and frames, and wood doors. Training to include use of installation manuals, hardware schedule, templates and physical product samples.
3.5
B. Use templates manufacturer.
provided
by
hardware
item
C. Mortise and cut to close tolerance and conceal evidence of cutting in the finished Work. D. Remove, cover or protect hardware after fitting until paint or other finish is applied; permanently 087100 - 4 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. B. Clean all hardware and remove all tags and wrappings from the site. C. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes.
3.6
PROTECTION A. Do not permit adjacent Work to damage hardware or finish.
INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.7
HARDWARE SCHEDULES A. The following manufacturers catalog numbers are listed in finish hardware groups: 1. Hinges
Ives
2. Cylinders/Locks
Schlage
3. Closer
LCN DOOR HARDWARE
S:\11\0123\div2-33\087100kb1218.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
4. Stops 3.8
Ives
FINISHES A. Hardware finishes shall be as follows:
3.9
1. Interior Hinges
US26D
2. Locks
US26D
3. Door Closer
Powder Coat Alum.
4. Protective Plates
US32D
5. Miscellaneous Items
US26D
HARDWARE GROUP A. The following schedule of hardware groups shall be considered a guide only, and the supplier is cautioned to refer to general conditions, special conditions, and the preamble to this Section. It shall be the hardware supplier's responsibility to furnish all required hardware. B. Refer to the door schedule for hardware group required at each door opening. Ignore hardware groups not used on the door schedule.
GROUP 035
1 2 1 1 1
Hinges Hotel lock Emergency rel key Surface closer Kick plate Wall stop
AS SPECIFIED L9486 As required 4011/4111-E 8400 10" X 2" LDW WS406
FUNCTION: L9486 WITH "OCCUPIED" INDICATOR LATCHBOLT RETRACTED BY KEY OUTSIDE OR BY LEVER INSIDE. OUTSIDE LEVER ALWAYS FIXED. DEADBOLT THROWN OR RETRACTED BY INSIDE THUMBTURN. WHEN DEADBOLT IS THROWN, "OCCUPIED" PLATE IS DISPLAYED AND ALL KEYS BECOME INOPERATIVE EXCEPT EMERGENCY KEYS. TURNING INSIDE LEVER SIMULTANEOUSLY RETRACTS BOTH DEADBOLT AND LATCHBOLT. AUXILIARY LATCH DEADLOCKS LATCHBOLT WHEN DOOR IS CLOSED. SPECIFY PER L583-375.
END OF SECTION
DOOR HARDWARE
S:\11\0123\div2-33\087100kb1218.doc
087100 - 5 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
087100 - 6 of 6
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
DOOR HARDWARE
S:\11\0123\div2-33\087100kb1218.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 088100 - GLASS AND GLAZING D. Provide glass and glazing that has been produced, fabricated and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading and impact loading (where applicable), without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealant or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glass and glazing materials, and other defects in the Work.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
1. Normal Thermal Movement is defined as that resulting from an ambient temperature range of 120 degrees F and from a consequent temperature range within glass and glass framing members of 180 degrees F.
B. Glass and Glazing; as Indicated on the Drawings, Specified Herein; for the Following Building Systems: 1. Steel Doors and Frames, Wood Doors.
2. Deterioration of Laminated Glass is defined as the development of manufacturing defects including edge separation or delamination that materially obstructs vision through glass.
C. Provide the following glass types 1. Flat Glass Types: a. GL-02: Safety (Tempered) Glass.
3. Deterioration of Coated Glass is defined as the development of manufacturing defects including peeling, cracking or other indications of deterioration in metallic coating due to normal conditions of use.
D. Sealant for Glass and Glazing Shall be a Part of This Section. E. Framed Mirrors. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 079200 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and backup material. B. Section 081100 - Steel Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and frames. C. Section 0821416- Wood Doors: Glazed doors.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Glass and glazing materials of this Section shall provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier: 1. In conjunction with materials described in Section 079200. 2. To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for the continuity of the air and vapor seal. 3. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass as calculated in accordance with International Building Code, Exposure “C”. C. Limit glass deflection to flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less.
GLASS AND GLAZING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\088100CGA.doc
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Product Data on Glass Types Specified: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Samples: Submit minimum twelve (12) inch square samples of each type of glass indicated (including assembled insulating glass types) illustrating color and finish. E. Samples: Submit minimum twelve (12) inch long bead of glazing sealant and/or gasket, illustrating color as selected. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: special precautions required.
Indicate
G. Certification: Submit certificates from respective manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing materials provided for project comply with requirements. 1. Separate Certification are not required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's 088100 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program involving a recognized certification agency or independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Architect. H. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: Submit written statement from sealant manufacturer indicating that glass and glazing materials have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealant and interpreting test results relative to material performance, including recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion. 1.5
condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass obtained from a single source for each type and class required. 1.7
A. Do not install glazing or glazing materials when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.8
A. Deliver, store, handle and protect products to site under provisions of Section 016000.
C. Protect glass and glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage to glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture including condensation, of temperature changes, of direct exposure to sun, and from other causes. 1.6
1.9
1.10
D. Single Source Responsibility for Glass: To ensure consistent quality of appearance and performance, provide materials produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for each kind and 088100 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
WARRANTY
A. Provide ten (10) year manufacturer's written warranty under provisions of Section 017836. B. Warranty: All materials and workmanship provided are guaranteed against defects; including coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, inter-pane dusting or misting, and replacement of same, after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section.
C. Safety Glazing Standard: Where safety glass is indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide type of products indicated which comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials.
COORDINATION A. Coordinate the Work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal to adjacent Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
B. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Glass Association of North America (GANA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual", except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or other referenced standards.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual locations of glazing and other construction to which glazing must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final submittal. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
B. During storage and handling of glass products, provide cushions at edges to prevent impact damage.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS OR FABRICATORS - GLASS AND GLAZING A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Advanced Glass Systems. 2. Guardian Industries. 3. Oldcastle Glass Pilkington 4. PPG Architectural Glass.
GLASS AND GLAZING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\088100CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
5. SAFTI - Superlite.
selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
6. VIRACON, Inc.
B. One-Part Non-Acid Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and as applicable to uses indicated, and O; and complying with the following requirements for modulus and additional joint movement capability.
7. Visteon B. Substitutions: 016000. 2.2
Under provisions of Section
FLAT GLASS MATERIALS
1. Medium Modulus: Tensile strength of not less than 45 nor more than 75 psi at 100 percent elongation when tested per ASTM D412 after 14 days at 77 degrees F and 50 percent relative humidity.
A. Safety Glass (GL-2): ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (non-coated), Type 1 (transparent flat), quality q3 glazing select; conforming to ANSI Z97.1; and minimum 1/4 inch thick. 2.3
2. Additional Capability: When tested per ASTM C719 for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement, to withstand the maximum 40 percent increase and decrease of joint width, as measured at time of application, and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C920.
FRAMED MIRRORS A. No. 1 quality, minimum 1/4 inch thick float glass mirror, beveled edges, guaranteed for ten (10) years against silver spoilage; sizes and locations as indicated on Drawings.
C. Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape: Provide manufacturer's standard solvent-free butylpolyisobutylene formulation with a solids content of 100 percent; complying with AAMA A-804.1; in extruded tape form; non-staining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; packaged on rolls with a release paper on one side; with or without continuous spacer rod as recommended by manufacturers of tape and glass for application indicated.
1. Backing: Shatter-proof mirror backing tape, ASTM D1709, ANSI Z97.1; applied full width of mirror without gaps. 2. Frame: 3. Mounting: Full length mechanically fastened Jtracks, top and bottom, and adhesive. 2.4
ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANT AND GLAZING TAPES A. General: Provide products of type indicated and 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealant and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials with which they will come into contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with recommendations of sealant and glass manufacturers for selection of glazing sealant and tapes which have performance characteristics suitable for applications indicated and conditions at time of installation. 3. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C920 requirements, including those for type, grade, class and uses. 4. Colors: Provide color of exposed sealant indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, as
GLASS AND GLAZING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\088100CGA.doc
2.5
GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Compatibility: Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Extruded Type II silicone rubber, ASTM D2240, Type A, 80-90 Shore A Durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum four (4) inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area; color black. D. Spacer Shims: Silicone, 50 - 60 Shore A Durometer hardness, minimum three (3) inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. E. Edge Blocks: Silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealant, of size and
088100 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
hardness required to limit lateral movement (sidewalking) of glass.
3.4
A. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located one quarter of glass width from each corner, but with edge nearest corner not closer than six (6) inches from corner unless otherwise required. Set blocks in this coarse of sealant which is acceptable for heel bead use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances except where gaskets or glazing tapes with continuous spacer rods used for glazing. Provide 1/8 inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
B. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. C. Clean glazing channels, stops and rabbets to receive the glazing materials, making free from obstructions and deleterious substances which might impair the Work.
C. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing standard, except where otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer. D. Provide compressible filler rods or equivalent back-up material, as recommended by sealant and glass manufacturers.
1. Remove protective coatings which might fail in adhesion or interfere with bond of sealant. 2. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for final wiping of surfaces immediately prior to application of primer and glazing compounds or tapes. 3.2
E. Force sealant into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. F. Tool exposed surface of sealant to provide a substantial "wash" away from glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets.
PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces to receive glazing compounds in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.3
3.5
B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation; use a foiling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Remove from project and dispose of glass units with edge damage or other imperfections of kind that, when installed, weakens glass and impairs performance and appearance. C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealant. 088100 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
MIRRORS A. Install mirrors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
GLAZING - GENERAL A. Comply with combined printed recommendations of glass manufacturers, of manufacturers of sealant, gaskets and other glazing materials, including those of referenced glazing standards.
GLAZING
3.6
CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after work is complete. C. Clean glass.
3.7
PROTECTION A. Protect glass from breakage after installation by promptly installing streamers or ribbons, suitably attached to the framing and held free from glass. Do not apply warning markings, streamers, ribbons or other items directly to the glass, except as specifically directed in writing by the Architect.
END OF SECTION
GLASS AND GLAZING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\088100CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 092116 - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 1.4
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen, thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section.
B. Interior, Non-Load Bearing, Metal Framing and Gypsum Board Systems; as Indicated on the Drawings, Specified Herein; Including Related Accessories and Attachments.
C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of gypsum board and related joint treatment materials from a single manufacturer. D. Fire-Resistive Rating: Where indicated on the Drawings, provide materials and construction identical to those assemblies whose fire resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E119 by a testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Interior Gypsum Board Types: 1. (GB-1) Non-Rated Gypsum Board. 2. (GB-2) Fire-Rated Gypsum Board. 3. (GB-9) Fire-Rated Cement Board-Substrate for Ceramic Tile.
E. Wall and ceiling assemblies shall meet or exceed the fire resistance requirements outlined under provisions of the GA-600 Fire Resistance Design Manual.
D. Taped and Sanded Joint Treatment. E. Gypsum Board Assemblies: 1. Gypsum Board Area Separation Walls. 1.5 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Non-load bearing steel stud partitions, 20 gauge minimum required, with deflections conforming to L/360 at 15 psf for veneer plaster walls, and L/240 at 5 psf typical.
A. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood blocking. B. Section 072100 - Building Insulation: Thermal and sound insulation.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
C. Section 078400 - Fire-Stopping: Sealing penetrations through fire-rated partitions.
A. Deliver, store, handle and protect products to site under provisions of Section 016000.
D. Section 093000 - Tiling: Cement board substrate.
B. Deliver all materials in manufacturer's unopened original packages showing manufacturers and product brand names.
E. Section 099000 - Paints and Coatings: Surface finish. 1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s data on metal framing, gypsum board systems and components, joint tape; and finish. C. Provide manufacturers instructions.
written
installation
C. Store products inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging. D. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. E. Protect metal framing, metal studs and accessories from bending. F. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces.
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS S:\11\0123\div2-33\092116CGA.doc
092116 - 1 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
1.7
Akin Road Elementary School
B. Main Runner Channels: 1-1/2 inch cold rolled steel channel, 475 lb./linear foot with minimum base steel of 0.054 inches; galvanized.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General Environmental Requirements: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840, and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Cross Furring Channels: 3/4 inch cold rolled steel channel, 300 lb./linear foot with minimum base steel of 0.054 inches; galvanized.
B. Minimum Room Temperatures: For non-adhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 degrees F. For adhesive attachment of gypsum board maintain not less than 50 degrees F for forty-eight (48) hours prior to application and continuously thereafter until drying is complete.
D. Rigid Furring Channels: 7/8 inch hat shaped channels, 287 lb./linear foot with minimum base steel of 0.0179 inches; galvanized and complying with ASTM C645. E. Furring Channels: 1-1/2 inch Z shaped channels, 236 lb./linear foot with minimum base steel of 0.0179 inches; galvanized and complying with ASTM C645.
C. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent materials from drying too rapidly. 1.8
WARRANTY
F. Resilient Furring Channels: 7/16 inch thick, base metal thickness 25 gauge, galvanized and complying with ASTM C645. 2.3
A. Provide one (1) year manufacturer’s written warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS GYPSUM MATERIALS
-
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers:
B. Warranty: All materials and workmanship provided are guaranteed against defects after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
1. American Gypsum Co. 2. CertainTeed Gypsum. 3. Georgia-Pacific Corporation. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. 5. National Gypsum - Gold Bond Building Products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
6. United States Gypsum Company (USG). 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS INTERIOR METAL FRAMING
-
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Clark /Dietrich Building Systems. 2. National Gypsum. 3. Marino Ware. B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed 2.2
FRAMING MATERIALS A. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 20 gauge thick (0.0341 inches (minimum thickness galvanized), C shape studs with knurled faces; widths as indicated on Drawings.
092116 - 2 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed. 2.4
GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. (GB-1) Standard Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M; gypsum core wall panel surfaced with paper on front, back and long edges; [1/4] [3/8] [1/2] inch thickness, maximum permissible lengths, ends square cut, tapered edges. B. (GB-2) Fire-Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M; gypsum core wall panel with additives to enhance fire resistance of the core; surfaced with paper on front, back and long edges; Type X, UL rated; 5/8 inch thickness, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges.
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\092116CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
C. (GB-9) Fire-Rated Cement Board: ANSI A118.9; Cement board formed in a continuous process of aggregated Portland cement slurry with polymer coated glass fiber mesh completely encompassing edges, back and front surfaces; UL fire-rated; ½ and 5/8 inch thickness, edges cut square. Note: Use with vapor retarder.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. 3. For fastening gypsum board in place on wood, use 1-1/4 inch type W bugle-head screws, or use annular ring type nails complying with ASTM C514, and of lengths required to suit substrate.
1. USG - DUROCK (SA932). 2. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. 3. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. 4. National Gypsum – “Permaflex” “Permabase.” good for curved applications.
G. Laminating Adhesive: Compound specifically recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for laminating gypsum board to unit masonry substrates.
and wall
H. Provide other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
5. Maximum framing spacing is sixteen (16) inches on center. D. Joint Treatment and Compound: Types recommended by manufacturer to suit applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 2.5
ACCESSORIES A. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 079200 - Joint Sealants. Non-hardening, nondrying, non-skinning, non-staining, non-bleeding, gun grade, capable of spanning 1/2” wide x 3/8” deep gaps, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for use with gypsum board.
3.1
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Corner Beads: USG Sheetrock Brand Paper Faced Beads and Trim.
B. Examine substrates to which gypsum board construction attaches or abuts, pre-set hollow metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of gypsum board construction.
C. Casing Bead: ASTM C1047; formed galvanized steel trim, minimum base steel 0.014 inch (0.355 mm) thick, sizes as required to suit substrate. D. Control Joints: ASTM C1047; extruded vinyl formed with V shaped slot covered with removable flexible vinyl strip.
C. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
E. Jointing System: 1. Provide a jointing system, including reinforcing tape and compound, designed as a system to be used together and as recommended for this use by the manufacturer of the gypsum board approved for use on this Work. 2. Jointing compound may be used for finishing if so recommended by its manufacturer. F. Fasteners: indicated.
ASTM C1002, unless otherwise
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\092116CGA.doc
EXAMINATION
D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2
PREPARATION A. Ceiling Anchorage: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension with installation of overhead structural systems to ensure that inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive ceiling anchors in a manner that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support ceiling.
092116 - 3 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
1. Provide concrete inserts, steel deck devices indicated, to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination with other construction. 3.3
METAL FRAMING GENERAL
INSTALLATION
C. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surface do not vary more than 1/8 inch from plane of faces of adjacent framing. D. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.
-
A. Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C754 and with ASTM C840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at termination in the Work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, and similar construction to comply with details indicated on the Drawings, and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, or if none available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Company.
E. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated on the Drawings. F. Install steel studs in sizes and spacing indicated on the Drawings, but not less than that required by referenced steel framing installation standards. G. Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and gypsum boards can be installed in the direction opposite to that of the flanges.
C. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement, at locations indicated below to comply with details indicated on Drawings:
H. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated on the Drawings, with GA-216 and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
1. Where edges of suspended ceilings abut building structure horizontally at ceiling perimeters or penetrations of structural elements. 2. Where partitions and wall framing abuts overhead structure.
1. Extend vertical jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above.
3. Provide slip type joint as detailed to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading.
I. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated on the Drawings, or if none is indicated, in same manner as required for door openings; and install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.
D. Provide rosen paper or similar material to prevent pressure treated wood from being in direct contact with light metal framing or light metal decking. E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring members; independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members. 3.4
METAL FRAMING INSTALLATION WALLS AND PARTITIONS
J. Blocking: Bolt or screw steel channels to metal studs. Install concealed wood blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, hardware, and all other related items that require backing for support under provisions of Section 061000.
-
A. Install runners (track) at floors, ceilings and structural walls and columns where gypsum board stud system abuts other construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips between studs and wall.
3.5
APPLICATION AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD - GENERAL
OF
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840 and GA-216.
B. Metal Stud Spacing: Maximum 16 inches on center, unless noted otherwise. 092116 - 4 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\092116CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
B. Install sound attenuation insulation (072100) where indicated on the Drawings, prior to gypsum board unless readily installed after board has been installed.
1. Except where concealed application is indicated, or required for sound, fire, air or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 square feet area, and may be limited to not less than 75 percent of full coverage.
C. Locate exposed end-butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, and stagger not less than twenty-four (24) inches in alternate courses of board.
2. Fit gypsum board around ducts, pipes and conduits.
D. Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner which minimizes the number of end-butt joints, and which will avoid end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least twenty-four (24) inches.
3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, cut gypsum board to fit profile of coffers and allow 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide joint for sealant. L. Isolate perimeter of non-load bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch space and trim edge with "U" bead edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant.
E. Install wall and partition boards vertically. F. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch open space between boards. Do not force into place.
M. Where sound-rated drywall construction is indicated on the Drawings, seal construction at perimeters, control and expansion joints, openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim, and close off sound-flanking paths around or through construction, including sealing of partitions above acoustical ceilings.
G. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications or where intermediate supports or gypsum board backblocking is provided behind end joints. Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill-cut or field-cut ends against mill-cut or field-cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions.
1. For double-layer partition systems, construction above acoustical plaster ceilings may be installed with base layer only.
H. Attach gypsum board to steel studs so that leading edge or end of each board is attached to open (unsupported) edge of stud flange first.
N. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations.
I. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support at openings and cut-outs. J. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated on the Drawings, or as required, with space between edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories. Maximum distance between control joints shall be 30 linear feet. K. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum board in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chase walls which are properly braced internally.
O. Curved Gypsum Partitions and Surfaces: 1. Install gypsum board panels horizontally with wrapped edges perpendicular to metal framing in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.6
APPLICATION GENERAL
OF
CEMENT BOARD -
A. Install per manufacturer’s installation instructions for substrate and according to Tile Council of North America Handbook for Tile Installation B. Install interior cement board, and treat joints to comply with manufacturer's recommendations for type of application indicated on the Drawings.
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\092116CGA.doc
092116 - 5 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
3.7
Akin Road Elementary School
METHODS OF APPLICATIONS
GYPSUM
C. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semiexposed, and except where plastic trim is indicated on the Drawings. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound except where "U" bead (semi-finishing type) is indicated.
DRYWALL
A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum board as follows: 1. On ceilings apply gypsum board prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible.
D. Install control joints at locations indicated on the Drawings, or if not indicated, at spacing and locations required by referenced gypsum board application and finish standard, and approved by the Architect for visual effect.
2. On walls/partitions apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints. B. Wall Tile Base: Where drywall is base for thinset ceramic tile and similar rigid applied wall finishes, install cement board. 1. In "dry areas" install gypsum backing board finished to produce a flat surface. C. Double-Layer Application: 1. On walls/partitions apply base layer and face layers vertically or horizontally (parallel) with joints of base layer over supports and face layer joints off-set a minimum of ten (10) inches with base layer joints. a. For fire rated systems, install boards vertically or horizontally and as otherwise required by the approved UL rating. 2. On ceilings apply base layer prior to application of base layer on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Off-set joints between layers a minimum of ten (10) inches. Apply base layers at right angles to supports, unless otherwise indicated. D. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Fasten gypsum board to supports with screws. E. Double-Layer Fastening Methods: Fasten both base and face layers to supports with screws. 3.8
INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES A. General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install metal corner beads at external corners.
3.9
JOINT TREATMENT A. General: 1. Apply Joint treatment per ASTM C840 and Manufacturer’s written instructions. 2. Inspect areas to be joint treated, verifying that the gypsum board fits snugly against supporting framework. 3. In areas where joint treatment and compound finishing will be performed, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 degrees F for 24 hours prior to commencing the treatment, and until joint and finishing compounds have dried. 4. Apply the joint treatment and compound by machine or hand tool.
finishing
5. Apply additional coats of compound, as required, after previous coat has set but before it dries. B. Embedding Compounds: 1. Apply to gypsum board joints and fastener heads in a thin uniform layer. 2. Spread the compound not less than three (3) inches wide at joints, center the reinforcing tape in the joint, and embed the tape in the compound. Then, spread a thin layer of compound over the tape. 3. After this treatment has dried, apply a second coat of embedding compound to joints and fastener heads, spreading in a thin uniform coat to not less than six (6) inches wide at joints, and feather edges. 4. Sandpaper between coats as required. 5. When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to eliminate ridges and high points. C. Finishing Compounds:
092116 - 6 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\092116CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
1. After embedding compound is thoroughly dry and has been completely sanded, apply a coat of finishing compound to joints and fastener heads.
Embed tape in joint compound in all joints and interior angles and immediately wipe with joint knife leaving thin coating over all joints and interior angles. Two separate coats of jont compound to be applied over all flat joints and one separate coat of joint compound to be applied over interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories to be covered with three separate coats of joint compound. All joints to be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Trowel apply to entire surface a thin skim coat of joint compound, or apply a material recommended and applied in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation for high quality prepared surface. Then coat prepared surface with drywall primer prior to application of final finishes.
2. Feather the finishing compound to not less than twelve (12) inches wide. 3. When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to obtain a uniform smooth surface, taking care to not scuff the paper surface of the board. 4. Finish gypsum board in accordance with GA214to the following criteria: a. Level 1: Concealed areas only; such as attics, plenums above ceiling spaces. Tape all joints and interior angles in joint compound. Surface to be free of excess joint compound. b. Level 3: Areas to receive heavy or medium grade textured surfaces before final painting or where heavy grade wall coverings will be applied in a non-light heavy area. Embed tape in joint compound in all joints and interior angles and immediately wipe with joint knife leaving thin coating over all joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories to be covered with two separate coats of joint compound. All joints to be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Coat prepared surface with drywall primer prior to application of final finishes. c. Level 4: All areas to receive flat paints, light textures, not to be used for high sheen level paint surfaces. Embed tape in joint compound in all joints and interior angles and immediately wipe with joint knife leaving thin coating over all joints and interior angles. Flat joints to be covered with two separate coats of joint compound, and fastener heads and accessories to be covered with three separate coats of joint compound. All joints to be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Coat prepared surface with drywall primer prior to application of final finishes.
3.10
TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in ten (10) feet in any direction.
3.11
PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, which ensure gypsum board construction being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.12
CLEANING A. In addition to other requirements for cleaning, use necessary care to prevent scattering gypsum board scraps and dust, and to prevent tracking gypsum and joint finishing compound onto floor surfaces. B. At completion of each segment of installation in a room or space, promptly pick up and remove from the working area all scraps, debris and surplus materials of this Section.
END OF SECTION
d. Level 5: All areas to receive wall coverings and paint finishes. Includes all walls in heavily lit areas, such as those near windows, skylights, well-lit atria or strong light fixtures.
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\092116CGA.doc
092116 - 7 of 8
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
092116 - 8 of 8
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
Printed on 1/16/2013
S:\11\0123\div2-33\092116CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 093000 - TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.4
A. Conform to Tile Council of North America (TCNA) Handbook, current edition, for Ceramic Tile Installation.
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
B. Conform to "Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines" (ADAAG) criteria for the following: 1. Static Coefficient of Friction: Appendix to the ADAAG, in Section A4.5 defines slip-resistant as a static coefficient of friction of 0.6 for floor areas and 0.8 for ramps. ASTM C1028 (The Slip Meter), test procedures shall be used for both wet and dry readings, and all manufacturers shall certify that their products meet or exceed these requirements.
B. Interior Porcelain Tile Floor and Finish Using the Thin-Set Application Method. C. Interior Ceramic Wall Tile and Base and Finish Using the Thin-Set Application Method. D. Related Waterproof Membrane, Mortar, Grout, Trim and Accessories. E. Tile and Grout Sealer. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 079200 - Joint Sealers: joints.
Sealant at control
B. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Interior metal stud wall framing and gypsum board finish. Cement Board and tile backer board installation. 1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Product Data: Submit data indicating material specifications and characteristics, for each type of product indicated. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. D. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on one 12 x 12 inch plywood panel, to indicate pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type composition and variety of ceramic tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. Obtain ingredients for setting and grouting materials of a uniform quality from one manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. When ordering tile for patterns, order tiles from the same caliber for the patterned installations. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of products specified in this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience. E. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience. 1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, handle and protect products to site under provisions of Section 016000.
E. Submit maintenance data, including recommendations for cleaning and stain removal methods, and cleaning materials under provisions of Section 017823.
B. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.
F. Submit manufacturer's written certification that all ADAAG Requirements have been met for this project.
C. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
G. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section.
D. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, foreign matter and other causes.
TILING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\093000CGA.doc
E. Handle ceramic tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units.
093000 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
1.6
Akin Road Elementary School
A. Submit manufacturer’s complete maintenance data under provisions of Section 017823. B. Provide two (2) copies of the manufacturer’s Maintenance Manual for the complete care of the porcelain tile units. Submit to the Owner, through the Architect, for review and approval. 1. Provide porcelain tile manufacturer’s and supplier’s name, address and telephone numbers. Include for each product; the product name, serial or model numbers and colors. 1.7
B. Vent temporary heaters to the exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide build-up. C. Maintain temperatures at 50 degrees F or more in tiled areas during installation and seven (7) days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions.
WARRANTY
A. Provide one (1) year manufacturer’s written warranty under provisions of Section 017836. B. Warranty: State that all materials and workmanship provided are guaranteed against defects after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
2.2
PORCELAIN FLOOR TILE MATERIAL
A. Porcelain Floor Tile: ANSI/TCNA A137.1-1992; unglazed and non-slip, frost proof and stain resistant, alkali and acid: 093000 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
CERAMIC WALL MATERIAL
AND
BASE
TILE
A. Ceramic Wall and Base Tile: ANSI/TCNA A137.11992; base to match wall tile for moisture absorption, surface finish, and color, conforming to the following: 1. Internal Corner:
Coved.
2. Top Edge:
Bull Nosed.
3. Height:
6 inches.
B. Provide products from manufacturers as indicated in the Color and Finish Schedule, See Drawings. 2.3
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS MEMBRANE, MORTAR, AND GROUT
-
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. DAP, Inc. 2. Hydroment from Bostik. 3. Laticrete International, Inc. 4. Mapei Corporation.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify actual locations of tile finish and other construction to which tile finish must fit by accurate field measurements before installation. Coordinate installation schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. 1.9
B. Provide products from manufacturers as indicated in the Color and Finish Schedule, See Drawings.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect Work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.
1.8
1. Floor Tile: 12 x 12 inches.
MAINTENANCE
5. TEC by H.B. Fuller Company. 6. C-Cure Corp. 7. Custom Building Products. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 016000. C. Provide products from manufacturers as indicated in the Color & Finish Schedule, See Drawings. 2.4
WATERPROOF MEMBRANE
A. Waterproof Membrane: Thin, load-bearing waterproofing system, complying with ANSI A118.10. Cold-applied, self curing, liquid rubber polymer, and an integral reinforcing fabric which, together, form a seamless waterproof membrane with a minimum uniform thickness of 1/16 inch, non-flammable, nontoxic, and compatible with thin-set or mortar-set application methods. Laticrete 9235, or approved equal. 2.5
SETTING MATERIALS
A. Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in the Tile Council of North America, current Edition, "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation". TILING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\093000CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set):
11-0123
2.8
THRESHOLDS – SEE 087100
1. Provide a commercially prepared prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive to which only water must be added, for use as a bond coat for setting tile. Comply with ANSI A118.4
A. General: Sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes.
2. Comply with ANSI A118.1; except where specifically indicated on the Drawings, or approved in writing in advance by the Architect.
3.1
a. For wall applications, provide non-sagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F-4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. C. Special tile setting mortars will be considered by the Architect when complete technical data is submitted in advance. 2.6
GROUT MATERIALS
A. Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in the Tile Council of America, current Edition, "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation", in colors selected by the Architect from standard colors available from the approved manufacturers. B. Polymer Modified Unsanded Tile Grout: for joints of 1/8” wide or less and Polymer Modified Sanded Tile Grout: for joints 1/8" wide or greater. 1. Provide a commercially prepared mixture. 2. Secure the Architect's written approval of the proposed material prior to use. C. Provide other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. 2.7
ACCESSORIES
A. Sealants: As indicated under Section 079200. B. Transition Strips: Existing quarry tile to ceramic tile: Schluter “Reno-T Transition Strip.” See Color and Finish Schedule. C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or appearance of grout. D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts condition of existing surfaces. 3.2
PREPARATION
A. Protect surrounding disfiguration.
work
from
damage
or
B. Vacuum clean existing surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. 3.3
WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION
MEMBRANE
A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate. B. Install crack-suppression membrane to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate. C. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight. 3.4
INSTALLATION
A. General: 1. Comply with ANSI A108.1, ANSI A108.2 and the "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" of the Tile Council of North America. 2. Install adhesive, tile, and grout to TCNA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, Handbook Number: a. Floor Tile installations: b. F-113 and F-115. c. Wall Tile Installations:
TILING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\093000CGA.doc
093000 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
d. W-244F with vapor barrier. 3. Maintain minimum temperature limits and installation practices recommended by materials manufacturers. 4. Do not install tile floors over membrane until the membrane has been tested and approved. B. Except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings, Finish schedules or as directed by the Architect, provide latex modified Portland cement mortar applications for walls and floors. 1. Provide modified latex Portland Cement mortar and grout in kitchen applications unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide waterproof membranes in bathrooms and kitchens where there is finished space in the floor below. C. Limits of Tile: 1. Extend tile into recesses and under equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions and terminate tile neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners, without disruption of pattern or joint alignment. D. Joining Pattern: 1. Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or directed by the Architect. 2. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, trim and walls are the same size. 3. Lay tile work, and center the tile fields both directions in each space or on each wall area.
E. Provide expansion and control joints where shown on the Drawings, and where otherwise recommended by the "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" of the TCNA, sealing in accordance with Section 079200 of these Specifications. F. Sound tile after setting. units.
Replace hollow sounding
G. Allow tile to set for a minimum of forty-eight (48) hours prior to grouting. Grout tile joints and apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and at junction of dissimilar planes. 3.5
CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of Section 017400. B. Upon completion of placing and grouting, clean the Work of this Section in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturers or the materials used. C. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron and vitreous items from effects of acid cleaning. D. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. E. Provide tile surfaces clean and free from cracked, broken, chipped, unbonded and otherwise defective units. 3.6
PROTECTION
A. Protection of finished work under provisions of Section 017000. Provide required protection to tile surfaces to prevent damage and wear prior to acceptance of the Work at Substantial Completion.
4. Adjust to minimize tile cutting and provide uniform joint widths. END OF SECTION
093000 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
TILING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\093000CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 095100 - SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 1. Provide acoustical suspension system and acoustical panel manufacturer’s and supplier’s names, address and telephone numbers. Include for each product: the product name, serial or model number and colors.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Non-Rated Acoustical Panel Assemblies; Suspended Exposed Metal Grid Ceiling Systems and Perimeter Trim. C. Recycle Existing/Used Acoustical Ceiling Panels.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board System: Interior metal framing and gypsum board systems. B. Division 22 and 23 - Mechanical: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system, air outlets and inlets, and air diffusion devices in ceiling system. C. Division 26 - Electrical: light fixtures and fire alarm components in ceiling system.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Suspended Grid Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience. B. Acoustical Panel Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience. C. Installer: Company specializing in the installation of products specified in this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience. 1. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section.
C. Product Data: Provide data on metal grid system components and acoustical units.
D. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAPaccredited laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated. NVLAP-accredited laboratories must document accreditation, based on a "Certificate of Accreditation" and a "Scope of Accreditation" listing the test methods specified.
D. Samples: Submit two (2) samples full size illustrating material, color, pattern, texture and finish for each type acoustical tile specified.
E. Suspended acoustical panel ceiling systems shall be installed in accordance with ASTM C635 and ASTM C636.
E. Samples: Submit two (2) samples each of suspension system main runner, cross runner and edge trim.
F. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile and supporting suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
G. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical tile ceilings that comply with the following requirements:
G. Submit manufacturer’s complete maintenance data under provisions of Section 017823.
1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical tile ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other work or ceiling finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to system.
H. Provide two (2) copies of the manufacturer’s Maintenance Manual for the complete care of the acoustical tile ceilings and trim. Submit to the Owner, through the Architect, for review and approval. SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS S:\11\0123\div2-33\095100CGA.doc
095100 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
a. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.
1.7
A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust-generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.
b. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical tiles with the following surfaceburning characteristics complying with ASTM E1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E84:
B. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry. 1.8
3. ASTM C635 and ASTM C636.
1.9
B. Warranty: State that all materials and workmanship provided are guaranteed against defects after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle and protect Products to site under provisions of Section 016000. B. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
1.10
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
C. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.
2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
D. Handle acoustical tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.6
WARRANTY A. Provide one (1) year manufacturer’s written warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual locations of suspended acoustical ceilings and other construction to which finish suspended acoustical ceilings must fit by accurate field measurements before installation. Coordinate installation schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
H. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
SEQUENCING
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS SUSPENSION SYSTEM
-
A. Subject to conformance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries. 2. Chicago Metallic Corp.
095100 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\095100CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
3. USG Interiors, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed. 2.2
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ACOUSTIC UNITS
3.1 -
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries.
B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
2. USG Interiors, Inc. 3. CertainTeed Corporation. B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed. 2.3
MATERIALS AND SYSTEMS A. CEILING TYPE 1 1. Exposed Grid Suspension System (Non-Rated): Chicago Metallic No. 200 Snap-Grid System; color of all exposed grids and trim - "White"; install grid in a 2 x 2 foot module. 2. Lay-In Acoustical Boards: USG “Frost” #415, beveled tegular edge; NRC range of 0.70; CAC of 38; Class A per ASTM E1264, 24 x 24 x 5/8 inch units; color - “White”. B. CEILING TYPE 2
2.4
EXAMINATION
3.2
INSTALLATION SYSTEM
-
GRID
SUSPENSION
A. Install suspension system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. B. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum. C. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. D. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. E. Provide hanger clips during steel deck erection. Provide additional hangers and inserts as required.
1. Exposed Grid Suspension System (Non-Rated): Chicago Metallic No. 200 Snap-Grid System; color of all exposed grids and trim “White”; install grid in a 2 x 2 foot module.
F. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
2. Lay-In Acoustical Boards: USG “Radar ClimaPlus #2207, sag resistant and antimicrobial; square lay-in edge; NRC range of 0.55; CAC of 35; Class A per ASTM E1264, 24 x 24 x 3/4 inch units; color - “White”.
G. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
ACCESSORIES A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to approval of the Architect.
H. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner; or support components independently. I. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. J. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. K. Form expansion joints as detailed. Form to accommodate plus or minus 1inch movement. Maintain visual closure.
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\095100CGA.doc
095100 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
3.3
Akin Road Elementary School
INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in manufacturer's instructions.
accordance
with
B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Lay directional patterned units one way with pattern parallel to longest room axis. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above ceiling work is complete. E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. F. Cut tile to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. Double cut and field paint exposed edges of tegular units. G. Where bullnose concrete block corners occur, provide preformed closers to match edge molding. H. Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system within 20 feet of an exterior door. 3.4
ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3050 mm). B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.
3.5
CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge moldings. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. B. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
3.6
PROTECTION A. Protection of finished work shall be under provisions of Section 017300.
END OF SECTION
095100 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\095100CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 096500 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 1. Provide resilient flooring and base manufacturer’s and supplier’s name, address and telephone numbers. Include for each product; the product name, serial or model number and colors.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Concrete Floor Preparation and Leveling for Resilient Flooring. C. Resilient Vinyl Base, as Indicated on the Drawings, Specified Herein; Including All Related Accessories and Adhesives.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer/Installer: Company specializing in the manufacture and installation of products specified in this Section with a minimum of five (5) years documented experience. B. All primers, adhesives, sealers and wax shall be VOC compliant.
D. Resilient Vinyl Reducer Strips. 1.5 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: materials to receive application of base. 1.3
Wall
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data on specified products describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, accessories, patterns and colors available. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate required C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout showing seaming plan and terminations for sheet flooring. D. Samples: Submit two samples, 24 x 24 inches in size illustrating color and pattern for each floor material for each color specified. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. F. Submit manufacturer's written certification that all ADAAG Requirements have been met for this project. G. Submit manufacturer’s complete maintenance data under provisions of Section 017923. H. Provide two (2) copies of the manufacturer’s Maintenance Manual for the complete care of each type of resilient flooring and base. Submit to the Owner, through the Architect, for review and approval.
RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE S:\11\0123\div2-33\096500CGA.doc
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 016000. B. Deliver and store materials in manufacturer's original unopened containers with brands, names and production lot numbers clearly marked thereon. C. Areas where materials are to be stored should be maintained at 55 degrees F with a maximum relative humidity of 50 percent. D. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. E. Resilient floor coverings shall not be delivered or installed at the job site until all masonry, plastering, and other finish operations including painting have been completed. 1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Store the resilient flooring materials, adhesives and accessories in areas where they are to be installed for a minimum of 48 hours prior to installation to achieve temperature stability. B. Maintain temperature and humidity in areas to receive the resilient flooring with a balance HVAC system in permanent operating condition. Maintain conditions at 65 degrees F minimum to 80 degrees F maximum with the relative humidity not to exceed 75 percent for at least 72 hours prior to, during and after the installation. C. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs or topping until the latter has been cured and is sufficiently dry to achieve bond with adhesive as determined by manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test.
096500 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
D. The extended temperature range after the installation shall be from 50 degrees F minimum to 85 degrees F maximum to maintain manufacturer's product warranty. 1.7
2.3
-
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following manufacturer: 1. ROPPE, Inc.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify actual locations of resilient flooring and base and other construction to which resilient flooring and base must fit by accurate field measurements before installation. Coordinate installation schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS RESILIENT REDUCER STRIPS
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 016000. 2.4
MATERIALS
A. Transition Between Carpet and Resilient Flooring: 1. ROPPE #177.
1.8
WARRANTY
a. Color: Selected by the Architect.
A. Provide two (2) year manufacturer's written warranty under provisions of Section 017836. B. Warranty: All materials and workmanship provided are guaranteed against defects after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFATURERS - BASE MATERIALS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers:
2. Adhesive: VOC compliant, manufacturer’s type to suit application. B. Transition Between Carpet and Concrete: 1. ROPPE #174. a. Color: Selected by the Architect. 2. Adhesive: VOC compliant, manufacturer’s type to suit application. 2.5
ACCESSORIES
A. Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer to be compatible with adhesive, and VOC compliant. B. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer to suit application, and VOC compliant.
1. ARMSTRONG World Industries. 2. AZROCK Commercial Flooring.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3. JOHNSONITE, Inc. 4. VINYL PLASTICS, Inc. 5. ROPPE, Inc. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 016000. 2.2
MATERIALS
A. Vinyl Base (VB): ASTM F-1861, Type TV, vinyl; four (4) inches high; 1/8 inch thick; top set cove; premolded external corners. B. Colors: Two colors as selected by the Architect. 1. Colors as Outlined on the Color and Finish Schedule. C. Adhesive: VOC compliant, base manufacturer’s type to suit application.
096500 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Installer is required to inspect surfaces to determine that they are satisfactory to receive resilient base. Sub-floors shall be clean, dry, free from dust, grease, wax, soap and other foreign materials. Concrete subfloors shall be dry, cured and free from crazing, dusting, spalling and shall not be coated with any curing compound, hardener or sealer. Ensure that subfloor is free from hydrostatic water pressure. B. Verify floor and lower wall surfaces are free of substances that may impair adhesion of new adhesive and finish materials. 3.2
INSTALLATION - RESILIENT BASE
A. Install base and components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE
S:\11\0123\div2-33\096500CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
B. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of twenty four (24) inches between joints. C. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use pre-molded units. D. Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces. E. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.3
1. Protect resilient flooring against damage from rolling loads for initial period following installation by covering with plywood or hardboard. Use dollies to move stationary equipment or furnishings across floors. Do not move any heavy loads across the new floor areas for a minimum period of 72 hours. 2. Cover resilient flooring and base with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion.
INSTALLATION - ACCESSORIES
A. Install all accessories in accordance manufacturer's written instructions.
with
END OF SECTION
B. Install resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. Install edge strips at edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed. 3.4
CLEANING
A. Perform the following cleaning operations immediately upon completion of resilient flooring: 1. Sweep and vacuum floor thoroughly. 2. Do not wash floor until time period recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer has elapsed to allow resilient flooring to become well sealed in adhesive. Wait a minimum of 72 hours after the seams have been heat welded for all resilient sheet flooring. 3. Scrub floor with mechanical scrubber being careful to remove black marks and excessive soil. 4. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using appropriate cleaner recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer. B. Clean resilient flooring and base not more than 4 days prior to date of Substantial Completion Inspection in each area of the project. Clean resilient flooring and base by methods recommended by resilient flooring and base manufacturers. 3.5
PROTECTION
A. Protect resilient flooring and base against damage during construction period to comply with resilient flooring and base manufacturer's directions.
RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE
S:\11\0123\div2-33\096500CGA.doc
096500 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
096500 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE
S:\11\0123\div2-33\096500CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 096800 - CARPETING D. Samples: Submit full size samples illustrating color and pattern for each carpet tile material specified.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. New and Existing Concrete Floor Leveling and Preparation to Receive Carpeting.
F. Certification: Submit manufacturer’s certification as outlined under Article 1.7 below. 1.6
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet with minimum five (5) years documented experience.
C. Commercial Carpeting Installed with the Glued Down Application Method. 1. Adhesives and Accessories. 1.2
PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
B. Installer: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum five (5) years documented experience.
NOT
1. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section.
A. Division 22 - Mechanical: Plumbing floor cover plate with recess for carpet. B. Division 26 - Electrical: Electrical and telephone floor cover plate with recess for carpet. 1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
C. Single Source Responsibility: Provide materials produced by a single manufacturer for each carpet type.
A. Section 017419 Construction Waste Management: Removal and disposal of existing carpeting materials.
D. Carpet material shall be off-gassed, off-site as much as possible.
B. Section 096500 - Resilient Flooring and Base: Vinyl base at carpeting areas. 1.4
DEFINITIONS
1.7
SUBMITTALS
1.8
A. Submittals under provisions of Section 013300.
CARPETING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\096800CGA.doc
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to International Building Code for flame rating requirements of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate carpeting layout and seaming diagrams, show carpet direction, method of joining seams and types of edge strips. C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data on specified products describing physical and performance characteristics; durability, resistance to fading and flame resistance characteristics. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate required.
TESTING A. Certification: Submit manufacturer’s certification stating that materials provided comply with specified requirements. Include supporting certified laboratory testing data indicating that materials meet specified test requirements.
A. Commercial Carpet: Carpet intended for use in commercial and public spaces, with construction, fire-ratings, static control and appearance appropriate for this use. 1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
B. Conform to ASTM D2859 for surface flammability ignition test. 1.9
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials for three (3) days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability.
096800 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature three (3) days prior to, during and twenty four (24) hours after installation. 1.10
B. Warranty: All materials and workmanship provided are guaranteed against defects, including carpet edge raveling, delamination and resiliency, after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, handle and protect products to the site under provisions of Section 016000. B. Deliver materials to the site in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled and unopened with identification of manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade, fire hazard classification, and lot number.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
C. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well-ventilated areas protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures and humidity.
1.11
-
1. Mohawk Group – “Faculty Remix.” 2. Mannington Commercial B. Substitutions: 016000. 2.2
Under provisions of Section
CARPET MATERIALS A. Carpet: "Mohawk Group" – Faculty Remix”, No. DK166, Broadloom Carpet; Antimicrobial, contains no arsenic or heavy metals, nonhalogenated, and conforming to the following criteria:
MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit manufacturer’s complete maintenance data under provisions of Section 017823. B. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s printed instructions for maintenance of installed work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance.
1. Construction: Tufted 2. Surface Texture: Performance Loop Pile 3. Gauge: 1/8 inch 4. Stitches per inch: 8.3 5. Face Yarn: Antron Legacy Nylon 6.6 with DuraTech Soil Protection
C. Replacement Materials: After completion of work, deliver not less than two percent (2%) of each type, color and pattern of carpeting, exclusive of material required to properly complete installation. Provide accessory components as required, and replacement materials from same production run as materials installed. Package replacement materials with protective coverings, identified with appropriate labels. 1.12
MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following manufacturer:
D. Lay goods flat, blocked off ground to prevent sagging and warping. Maintain temperature in storage areas above 68 degrees F. E. Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for special delivery, storage, and handling requirements.
ACCEPTABLE CARPETING
6. Dye System: Yarn Dyed Duracolor by Lees 7. Yarn Weight: 26 oz/sq yd 8. Backing Materials: Unibond Flex 9. Color: TBD. 10. Meets CRI Green Label Plus 11. Meets NFPA Class 1 when tested under ASTM E648 glue down
WARRANTY
A. Provide lifetime manufacturer’s written warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
096800 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
2.3
ACCESSORIES A. Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer to suit application.
CARPETING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\096800CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
1. (TEP-1, TEP-2, TEP-3, TEP-4) Transitions: Refer to Color and Finish Schedule.
11-0123
3.3
A. Comply with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations for carpet tile installation, and direction of carpet. Maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile.
B. Provide other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
B. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
C. Double cut carpet, to allow intended seam and pattern match. Make cuts straight, true and unfrayed.
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
D. Extend carpet under open-bottomed obstructions and under removable flanges and furnishings, and into alcoves and closets of each space. E. Join seams by hot adhesive tape method. Form seams straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps.
B. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/4 inch in 10 feet, and are ready to receive Work.
F. Lay carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform appearance. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area.
C. Verify concrete floors are dry to maximum moisture content, exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting. Perform tests required by carpet manufacturer and do not install until manufacturer requirements are met.
G. Do not change run of pile in any room where carpet is continuous through a wall opening into another room. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.
D. Verify with adhesive manufacturer, ph requirements and underlayment or sealer requirements for concrete substrates.
H. Cut and fit carpet around interruptions.
E. Beginning of Work means acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2
I. Bind cut edges where not concealed by edge strips. J. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.
PREPARATION
K. Where wall bases are scheduled, cut carpet tight to walls. Fit carpet tight to vertical interruptions, leaving no gaps.
A. Immediately prior to installation of the Work of this Section, thoroughly clean substrata and remove oil, grease, paint, varnish, hardeners, and other foreign matter which would adversely affect the bond of adhesive. B. Make substrata level and free of irregularities. Assure one constant floor height after carpet is installed, filling low spots and grinding high spots as required. C. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler. D. Apply, trowel and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. E. Vacuum clean substrate.
CARPETING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\096800CGA.doc
INSTALLATION
L. Install carpet edge guard at the termination of carpet to dissimilar materials, secure guards to substrate. 3.4
CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive without damage from floor, base, and wall surfaces. B. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps from the site. C. Vacuum carpet surfaces using commercial machine with face-beater elements. Remove spots and replace carpet where spots cannot be removed. Remove any protruding face yarn using sharp scissors.
096800 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
3.5
Akin Road Elementary School
PROTECTION A. Provide a heavy non-staining paper or plastic walkway as required over carpeting in direction of traffic, maintaining intact until time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
096800 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
CARPETING
S:\11\0123\div2-33\096800CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 099000 - PAINTS AND COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.3
A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D16 apply to this Section. B. Paint: As used herein, shall mean coating system materials, including primers, emulsions, epoxy, enamels, sealers, fillers and other applied materials whether used as primer, intermediate or finished coats.
B. Surface Preparation and Field Application of Paints and Coatings; as indicated on the Drawings, Specified Herein; Including Surface Finish Schedule. C. New Construction: Paint all new construction, including, but not limited to, exposed sprinkler piping, ductwork, conduit and miscellaneous mechanical and electrical equipment. D. Existing Construction: No painting required, except as indicated on the Drawings. Where new construction interfaces with existing construction on the same plane, such as the installation of a new opening in an existing wall; the Contractor shall paint the existing surfaces o the extent of the wall plane and terminate at inside corner or control joint. E. Paint existing painted surfaces damaged in the process of the Work as described in D above. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: finish work.
Field
B. Section 042731 - Unit Masonry Systems: Field finish Work. C. Section 051200 - Structural Steel: primer.
Touch up
D. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications: finishing.
Field
E. Section 081100 - Steel Doors and Frames: Field finishing. F. Section 081416 – Existing Wood Doors: finishing.
Field
G. Section 083100 - Access Doors: Field finishing. H. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board System: Field finishing.
PAINTS AND COATINGS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\099000CGA.doc
DEFINITIONS
1.4
QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products as specified in this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing products as specified in this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to 2006 International Building Code for flame rating requirements of less than 25 for finishes in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts, and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section. C. Paint Coordination: 1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime coats actually used. 2. Review other sections of these Specifications as required, verifying the prime coats to be used and assuring compatibility of the total coating system for the various substrata. 3. Upon request by the Architect, provide information on the characteristics of the specific finish materials to assure that compatible prime coats are used. 4. Provide barrier coats over non-compatible primers, previously painted surfaces or remove the primer and re-prime as required.
099000 - 1 of 10
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
5. Notify the Architect in writing of anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems over prime coatings supplied under other Sections.
c. Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate.
D. When painting over the top of any existing paint, the painter shall be responsible for analyzing the existing paint for type and composition to determine the exact preparation and primer to be used with the new paint product specified.
1) Provide stepped samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color and texture is achieved and approved by the Architect.
E. Provide Low VOC paint to the greatest extent possible, consistent with color and sheen indicated in the Color and Finish Schedule. 1.6
2) Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample as to location and application.
SUBMITTALS
d. If so directed by the Architect, submit samples during the progress of the Work in the form of actual application of the approved materials on actual surfaces to be painted.
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Submittal Timing: Provide all product data and samples to the Architect no later than sixty (60) days before any operations of this Section will commence.
2. Revise and resubmit each Sample as requested by the Architect until the required gloss, color and texture is achieved. Such samples, when approved by the Architect, will become standards of color and finish for accepting or rejecting the Work of this Section.
C. Product Data: Submit for each paint system specified, including block fillers and primers: 1. Provide the manufacturer’s technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storage, and application of each materials proposed for use.
3. Do not commence finish painting until approved samples are on file at the job site.
2. Provide material safety data sheets to the Architect, Owner and Contractor. 3. List each material and cross-reference to specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer’s catalog number and general classification. 4. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC). D. Samples: 1. Following the selection of colors and glosses by the Architect, and provide samples for the Architect’s review and approval. a. Provide two (2) samples of each color and each gloss for each material on which the finish is specified to be applied. b. Except as otherwise directed by the Architect, provide sample size of 8 x 10 inches.
E. Submit manufacturer's application instructions. 1.7
I DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle and protect products to site under provisions of Section 016600. B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance. C. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. D. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. F. Provide lighting level of minimum 80 foot-candles measured mid-height of substrate surface.
Akin Road Elementary School
1.8
11-0123
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following manufacturer as Scheduled at the End of this Section:
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Apply paint according to Manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures according to Manufacturer’s recommendations.
1. ICI DuLux DeVoe. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products are:
B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity exceeds Manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Benjamin Moore Company. 2. Pittsburgh Paint Company.
1.9
MAINTENANCE DATA
3. Sherwin-Williams Company.
A. Provide manufacturer’s complete maintenance data under provisions of Section 017800. B. Provide two (2) copies of the manufacturer’s Maintenance Manual for the complete care of the painted areas. Submit to the Owner, through the Architect, for review and approval. 1. Provide paint manufacturer’s and supplier’s name, address and telephone numbers. Include for each product; the product name, serial or model number, and colors, clearly label each with content and locations where used. 1.10
WARRANTY
A. Provide one (1) year manufacturer’s written warranty. B. Warranty: All materials and workmanship provided are guaranteed against defects after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner. 1.11
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide extra materials under provisions of Section 017800. B. Provide a one gallon container of each color and surface texture to Owner. C. Label each container with color. texture, and room locations, in addition to the manufacturer’s label. D. Store in Owner’s designated storage area.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
C. Substitutions: 012500.
Under provisions of Section
D. Substitutions must be prior approved by specific paint formula in the bidding phase. 2.2
MATERIALS A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer’s best quality trade sale paint materials of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying paint manufacturer’s product identification will NOT be accepted. C. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer’s proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Provide the manufacturer’s material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. D. Undercoats and Thinners: 1. Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coat. 2. Use only the thinners recommended by the paint manufacturer, and use only to the recommended limits. 3. Insofar as practicable, use undercoat, finish coat, and thinner material as parts of a unified system of paint finish.
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
E. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating.
D. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. F. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality.
1. Veneer Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: percent.
2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
G. All coatings and materials shall conform to applicable Federal, State and Local Regulations, including VOC/VOS rules at the time of application. 2.3
3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. F. Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request by the Architect, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
FINISHES A. Refer to Schedule at End of Section for Surface Finish Schedule.
2.4
1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others.
APPLICATION EQUIPMENT A. For application of the approved paint, use only such equipment as is recommended for application of the particular paint by the manufacturer of the particular paint, and as approved by the Architect.
3.2
1. Mix and prepare paint materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations as approved by the Architect. 2. When materials are not in use, store in tightly covered container. 3. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free from foreign materials and residue.
OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor and subject to the approval of the Architect.
B. Stirring: 1. Stir materials before application, producing a mixture of uniform density.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
2. Do not stir into the material any film which may form on the surface, but remove the film and, if necessary, strain the material before using.
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application.
MATERIALS PREPARATION A. General:
B. Prior to the use of application equipment, verify that the proposed equipment is actually compatible with the material to be applied, and that integrity of the finish wall will not be jeopardized by use of the proposed equipment. 2.5
12
3. Use only thinners approved by Paint Manufacturer and only within recommended limits. 3.3
SURFACE PREPARATION A. Exterior and Interior Surfaces - New Construction and Previously Painted Surfaces:
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
1. Follow all recommended procedures outlined by the paint manufacturer for surface preparation of applicable specified surfaces and substrates.
N. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs.
B. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, fittings and other items installed but are not to be painted prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
O. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Prime metal items including shop primed items.
C. Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove existing coatings that exhibit loose surface defects. D. Set nails, staples and putty holes after prime coat or sealer is applied.
P. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats.
E. Seal marks that may bleed through surface finishes with shellac. F. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
Q. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats.
G. Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning. H. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.
R. Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer. 3.4
A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
I. Concrete Floors: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Verify required acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to cure and dry.
B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section. C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other surfaces.
J. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. K. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. L. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. M. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces to meet pH value requirements recommended by paint manufacturer.
PROTECTION
D. Remove empty paint containers from site. 3.5
PAINT APPLICATION A. General: 1. Apply paint coatings in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of materials being applied. 2. Touch-up shop applied prime coats which have been damaged, and touch-up bare areas prior to start of finish coats application. 3. Slightly vary the color of succeeding coats.
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
4. Do not apply additional coats until the completed coat has been inspected and approved by the Architect.
a. Finish electric panels, access doors, conduits, pipes, ducts, grilles, registers, vents and items of similar nature to match adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces, or as directed by the Architect.
5. Only the inspected and approved coats of paint will be considered in determining the number of coats applied.
b. Paint visible duct surfaces behind vents, registers and grilles “Flat Black”.
6. Sand and dust between coats to remove defects visible to the unaided eye from the distance of five feet.
c. Wash metal with solvent, prime and apply two coats of alkyd enamel.
7. On removable panels and hinged panels, paint the back sides to match the exposed sides.
2. Exposed Pipe and Duct Insulation: a. Apply one coat of latex paint on insulation which has been sized or primed under other Sections; apply two (2) coats on such surfaces when unprepared.
B. Drying: 1. Allow sufficient drying time between coats, modifying the period as recommended by the material manufacturer to suit adverse weather conditions.
b. Match color of adjacent surfaces. c. Remove band before painting, and replace after painting.
2. Consider oil-base and oleo-resinous solvent type paint as dry for re-coating when the paint feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate pressure of the thumb, and when the application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
3. Hardware: a. Paint prime coated hardware to match adjacent surfaces. b. Paint metal portions of head seals, jamb seals, and astragal seals to match the color of the door frame unless otherwise directed by the Architect.
C. Brush Applications: 1. Brush out and work the brush coats onto the surface in an even film.
G. All exposed interior steel and concrete surfaces in areas of new construction shall be prepped, primed and finish painted.
2. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, and other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. D. Spray Applications: 1. Except as specifically otherwise approved by the Architect in writing, confine spray application to metal framework and similar surfaces where hand brush work would be inferior. 2. Where spray application is used, apply each coat to provide the hiding equivalent of brush coats. 3. Do not double back with spray equipment to build up film thickness of two (2) coats in one pass. E. For completed work, match the approved samples as to texture, color and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with the specified requirements. F. Miscellaneous Surfaces and Procedures: 1. Exposed Mechanical Items:
3.6
CLEANING A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. D. Upon completion of the job, the painting contractor shall remove all surplus materials, scaffolds, etc. that relate to his trade, from the premises. He shall clean all window glass free of excess paint and splatters, and remove paint that has been misplaced on other surfaces.
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
Dry Film Thickness (mils)
Paint Material FINISH 1 Primer: Devflex 4020 DTM Primer
2.5
Finish: 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel FINISH 2 Primer: Devflex 4020 DTM Primer
FINISH 3 Primer: 3010 Prep and Prime Block Filler
FINISH 4 Primer: 3210 Prep and Prime Gripper Multi-Purpose Sealer
Brush or Roller
Interior exposed metals, including exposed structure, decking, diffusers, registers, grilles, steel plates and shapes, exposed mechanical and electrical items, including ducts. Interior hollow metal doors and frames. (Omit primer on factory primed items).
Spray, Brush, or Roller
Concrete masonry units where “paint” is indicated.
Spray, Brush, or Roller
Brick where “paint” is indicated.
3.6
3.0 Primer
Finish: 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel
Exterior galvanized hollow metal doors and frames. (Omit primer on factory primed items). All new ferrous exterior metal including items of mechanical and electrical work, (roof, ventilators, etc.) if ferrous or aluminum.
3.4
8.0
Finish: 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel
Spray, Brush, or Roller
5.0
2.5
Finish: 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel
Application Location
3.6
Akin Road Elementary School
FINISH 5 Primer: 1000 Prep and Prime Hi-Hide Wall Interior Primer Sealer Finish: 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel FINISH 6 Primer: 1000 Prep and Prime Hi-Hide Wall Primer Sealer Finish: 4216HP High Performance Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel FINISH 7 Primer: 1000 Prep and Prime Hi-Hide Wall Primer Sealer Finish: 1210 Ultra-Hide Latex Flat
FINISH 8 Primer: 1000 Prep and Prime Hi Hide Wall Primer Sealer Finish: 4508 Tru-Glaze Chemical Resistant Epoxy FINISH 9 Filler: 3010 Prep and Prime Block Filler Finish: 4508 Tru-Glaze Chemical Resistant Epoxy
11-0123
2.0
Spray, Brush, or Roller
Plaster where "paint" is indicated.
Spray, Brush, or Roller
Gypsum wallboard where “paint” is indicated.
Spray, Brush, or Roller
Gypsum and plaster ceilings where “paint” is indicated.
Spray, Brush, or Roller
Gypsum wallboard where “epoxy” is indicated.
Spray, Brush, or Roller
Concrete masonry units where "epoxy" is indicated.
3.6
1.1
3.6
1.1
4.0
1.1
8.0
10.0-12.0
8.0
Akin Road Elementary School
FINISH 10 1700 Woodpride Oil Finishing Stain
11-0123
NA
Brush
1916 Woodpride Quick Dry Sanding Sealer
2.0
Brush
Glidden Professional Quick Dry Varnish
1.0
Brush
6.0
Spray, Brush, or Roller
FINISH 11 Primer: Devoe Coatings Devflex 4020PF Direct to Metal Primer Finish: 1280-1200 Waterborne Interior Flat Dry Fall
3.7
2.0
COLOR SCHEDULE
A. Architect shall provide Color Schedule on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
Interior hardwood including doors, millwork, etc.
Prime only metal surfaces where rust has been removed.
Ceiling Areas: Roof deck, Airless Spray joists, beams, conduit, piping, ductwork, and where indicated.
Akin Road Elementary School
099000 - 10 of 10
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
PAINTS AND COATINGS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\099000CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 101100 - VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 1.6
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
A. Manufacturer and Installer: Company specializing in manufacturing and installing the Products specified in this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
1.7
1. Porcelain Enamel Markerboards. RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: blocking and grounds.
Wood
1.8
B. Warranty on Porcelain Enamel Markerboards: Provide written warranty from manufacturer that for lifetime of installation, surface finish under normal conditions of use shall not exhibit crazing, flaking, or fading. Warranty is limited to replacement of material only.]
SUBMITTALS A. Submittals under provisions of Section 013300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations, dimensions, joint locations, and special anchor details.
C. Warranty on Assembled Units: Provide five (5) year written warranty from supplier/installer providing labor and material coverage on any units found to have manufacturing or installation defects.
C. Product Data: Provide data on markerboards, trim and accessories. D. Samples: Submit [two samples] [samples] illustrating materials and finish, color and texture of markerboards, and trim. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.4
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MAINTENANCE DATA
B. Maintenance Data: Provide manufacturer’s complete maintenance recommendations, including data on regular cleaning and stain removal.
2. Ghent Manufacturing, Inc. 3. Polyvision. 4. Lake Country Resources, Inc.
A. Conform to International Building Code, Latest Edition, for flame spread rating and smoke development for wall finish materials in accordance with ASTM E84.
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\101100CGA.doc
-
1. Claridge Products & Equipment, Inc.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
B. Conform to International Building Code, 2006 Edition, for safety glazing requirements for hazardous locations.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS MARKERBOARDS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers:
A. Submit data under provisions of Section 017823.
1.5
WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s written warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
B. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Interior metal stud framing and gypsum board finish. 1.3
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual locations of visual display systems and other construction to which visual display systems must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
B. Visual Display Systems; as Indicated on the Drawings, Specified Herein; Including All Related Trim, Accessories and Attachments.
1.2
QUALIFICATIONS
5. W.E. Neal Slate Company. B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed. 2.2
MARKERBOARD MATERIAL A. Porcelain Enamel Markerboards: Maximum four (4) feet height, minimum 28 gauge enameling steel 101100 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
with porcelain/ceramic finish fused to steel sheet at a temperature of 1500 degrees F. Finish shall be Type A acid resistant, no seams allowed, and color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. 1. Core Material: Units up to 16 x 4 feet shall be one single piece of 1/2 inch thick gypsum board core. Larger units requiring spline joints shall have 1/2 inch thick particleboard core, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
2.5
A. Aluminum Frame: Extruded of slip-trim profile with concealed fasteners; map rail with cork insert over marker-board and tack-board surfaces. B. Aluminum Chalkrail: J-11 low profile with closed ends by Neal Slate, one piece full length of markerboard, and concealed fasteners. 2.6
FINISHES A. Porcelain Enamel: Glass fiber enamel, baked to vitreous surfaces; Porcelain Enamel Institute, Type A, low gloss; White.
2. Backing Sheet: 0.001 inch aluminum foil for gypsum board, and 0.015 inch aluminum sheet for particleboard.
B. Aluminum Frame, Chalkrail, and Accessories: Heavily anodized on all exposed surfaces with natural satin finish, “Clear”.
3. Markerboard sizes, profiles and location from finished floor shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 2.3
FABRICATION - FRAME AND TRIM
C. Map Rail with Cork Insert (Tack-Strip): Neal Slate J-2, or approved equivalent by the Architect. Provide over all marker-boards and tack-board surfaces, and at all other locations indicated on the Drawings.
CORE MATERIALS A. Particleboard: NPA A208.1, wood chips, set with waterproof resin binder, sanded faces. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-M-1 made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
D. Magnetic Tacks: Provide full set of magnetic tacks for each marker-board.
C. Gypsum Board: ASTM C36, foil faced type.
PART 3 EXECUTION 2.4
BOARD TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Board Trim: Extruded aluminum (6063-T5 Alloy), heavily anodized on all exposed surfaces, with natural satin finish. Series "C" trim 0.060 inches thick anodized aluminum "J" trim #25.
3.1
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Board Tray: Chalk Tray shall be provided full length of the board. Ends of tray shall have rounded edges.
B. Verify that internal wall blocking is ready to receive work and positioning dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
C. Magnetic Marker Holder: 18 inches long, Neal Slate No. M-11. Provide one unit for each markerboard. D. Map Rail: Standard two (2) inch wide anodized aluminum map rail with cork insert and map hooks. 1. Map Rail with Cork Insert: Neal Slate MT-2. E. Adhesives: manufacturer.
Type
as
recommended
by
F. Temporary Protective Cover: Sheet polyethylene, 8 mil thick. G. Cleaning Instruction Plate: Provide instructions for chalkboard cleaning.
101100 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
EXAMINATION
C. Verify flat wall surface for frameless adhesive applied type. 3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install markerboards in manufacturer's instructions.
accordance
with
B. Establish bottom of perimeter frame at dimension indicated on Drawings above finished floor. C. Install individual sections of map rail with cork insert as indicated on Drawings. D. Secure units level and plumb.
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\101100CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
3.3
11-0123
CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of Section 017423. B. Clean board surfaces in manufacturer's instructions.
accordance
with
C. Cover surfaces with protective cover, taped to frame. D. Remove temporary protective cover at date of Substantial Completion. 3.4
PROTECTION A. Protection of finished work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor until the date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\101100CGA.doc
101100 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
101100 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\101100CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 102113.19 - SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS recorded field measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments; Floor Mounted, Overhead Braced; as Indicated on the Drawings, Specified Herein; Including Accessories, Fittings and Attachments.
1.2
1.6
A. Coordinate the work with placement of concealed support framing and anchors in wall construction. 1.7
B. Warranty: State that all materials and workmanship provided are guaranteed against defects, including breakage, corrosion and delamination, after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
A. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood framing and plates within walls for partition panel support. B. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Interior metal stud framing and gypsum board finish. C. Section 093000 - Tiling: Ceramic tile floor and wall finish materials.
1.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
1. Scranton Products (Santana/Comtec/Capitol).
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall and floor supports, and door swings.
B. Substitutions: 016000. 2.2
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI A117.1 and ADA requirements for access for the disabled. FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual locations of solid plastic toilet compartments and other construction to which solid plastic toilet compartments must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show
SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS S:\11\0123\div2-33\102113.19CGA.doc
MATERIALS
B. Panels, Doors and Pilasters: Fabricated from High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) containing a minimum of 50% recycled material manufactured under high pressure forming a single component section which is waterproof, non-absorbent and has a self-lubricating surface. Provide protective plastic covering on all panels, doors and pilasters.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
1.5
Under provisions of Section
A. Toilet Compartments: Floor mounted, overhead braced with non-corrosive doors, panels and pilasters.
D. Samples: Submit samples of partition panels illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen.
1.4
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers:
SUBMITTALS
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s data on panel and door construction, hardware, and accessories.
WARRANTY A. Provide ten (10) year manufacturer’s written warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
RELATED SECTIONS
D. Section 102810 - Toilet and Bath Accessories.
COORDINATION
C. Aluminum Extrusions: 6463-T5 alloy. 2.3
CHARACTERISTICS A. Dual component compression molded High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) of solid virgin resin materials in colors that extend throughout the
102113.19 - 1 of 4 Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
surface; the panels, doors and pilasters shall have recycled material (HDPE) as the core material.
1. Hinges: 8” aluminum wrap-around hinge on door openings of 30” or larger.
B. Doors, Panels and Pilasters: Minimum one (1) inch thick, all edges machined to a radius of 0.250 inch and all exposed surfaces to be free of saw marks. 2.4
2.
FABRICATION A. Fabricate partitions, pilasters and doors of single component construction of solid polymer resin in colors that extend from the surface throughout the entire thickness of the panels.
3. Provide two (2) door pulls (inside and outside), and one (1) wall stop with each handicapped door.
C. Dividing Panels: 55 inches high and mounted at 14 inches above finished floor.
4. Fabricate door strike and keeper from heavy aluminum extrusion with clear anodized finish with wrap around flange surface mounted and thru-bolted to pilaster with one-way sex bolts. Strike: heavy duty six (6) inch plate.
D. Pilasters: 82 inches high, mounted within a one piece plastic shoe with one-way theft-proof, stainless steel sex bolts.
5. Provide doors with one (1) coat hook/bumper of heavy chrome plated Zamack with rubber bumper.
E. Aluminum edging strips to be fastened to the bottom edge of all doors and panels using vandal proof stainless steel fasteners.
6. Fabricate door latch housing from heavy aluminum extrusion with clear anodized finish, surface mounted and thru-bolted to door with one-way sex bolts. Slide bolt and button: heavy aluminum.
B. Doors: 55 inches high and mounted at 14 inches above finished floor.
2.5
Door closures to be factory set to accommodate all conditions and allow for a positive opening and closing action free of impediment.
ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoes: Solid color plastic shoes anchored to finished floor with plastic anchors and No. 14 x 1-1/2 inch stainless steel Phillips head screws. B. Wall Brackets: Full length continuous plastic brackets, solid color weighing not less than 0.822 lb. per lineal foot. Provide brackets for all panels to pilasters, pilaster to wall and panel to wall connections. Thru-bolt wall brackets panels and pilasters with one-way sex bolts. Attach brackets to adjacent wall construction with No. 14 x 1-1/2 inch stainless steel Phillips head screws anchored directly behind the vertical edge of panels and pilasters at 12 inch intervals along the full length of bracket and at each 12 inch interval alternately spaced between anchor connections.
2.6
A. Doors, Panels and Pilasters Finish: Equal to Santana - "Plastic-Glaze 280"; colors selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
E. Hardware:
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures.
C. Headrails: Heavy aluminum extrusion with mill finish in anti-grip configuration weighing not less than 1.188 lb. per lineal foot. Fasten headrail to tops of pilasters and headrail brackets by thrubolting with one-way stainless steel sex bolts. D. Headrail Brackets: 18 gauge stainless steel.
FINISHING
C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters.
102113.19 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\102113.19CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
C. Attached panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. D. Attach panels to brackets with tamper proof through bolts and nuts. E. Anchor urinal screen panels to walls with fasteners as recommended by the manufacturer. F. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster. Conceal floor fastenings with pilaster shoes. G. Install accessories per manufacturer's instructions. H. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged finish will not be permitted. I. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. J. No evidence of drilling, cutting, or patching shall be visible in the finished work. K. Clearance of vertical edges of doors shall be uniform top to bottom and shall not exceed 3/16 inch. 3.3
CLEANING A. Cleaning work under provisions of Section 017423. B. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. C. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out-swinging handicapped doors to closed position. D. Clean all finished surfaces to be free of imperfections.
3.4
PROTECTION A. Protect finished Work until the date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\102113.19CGA.doc
102113.19 - 3 of 4 Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
102113.19 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\102113.19CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 102600 - WALL AND CORNER GUARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.5
A. Verify actual locations of corner guards and other construction to which corner guards must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Stainless Steel Corner Guards; Including All Related Attachments.
1.2
1.6
1.7
B. Warranty: State that all materials and workmanship provided are guaranteed against defects after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Corner Guards: Resist lateral impact force of 100 lbs. at any point without damage or permanent set.
1.4
WARRANTY A. Provide one (1) year manufacturer’s written warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
B. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Interior metal stud framing and gypsum board wall substrate construction. 1.3
COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with wall or partition sections for installation of concealed blocking or anchor devices.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood support blocking for corner guard anchors.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate all corner guard locations, dimensions, and anchorage details.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
C. Product Data: Submit data for product characteristics, special features, fire resistive requirements, special anchoring requirements, and product limitations.
1. InPro Corporation (IPC). B. Subject to compliance with requirements, other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products are:
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
1. Balco, Inc. 2. Construction Specialties, Inc.
F. Submit recent (Within One Year) system performance testing data from an Independent Testing Agency for the following items:
3. Koroseal Wallcoverings – RJF International 4. Pawling Corporation.
1. Fire Performance Characteristics.
3. Impact Strength.
-
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following manufacturer:
D. Samples: Submit two (2) sections of corner guard, 24 inches long, illustrating component design, configuration, color and finish.
2. Flammability.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS CORNER GUARDS
C. Substitutions: Under Provisions of section 016000. 2.2
STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARDS A. Stainless Steel Corner Guards: Type 304 Stainless Steel with #4 Satin finish. 1. Thickness: 0.05" (16 gauge)
WALL AND CORNER GUARDS S:\11\0123\div2-33\102600CGA.doc
102600 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
2. Radius: 1/8”. 3. Sizes/Weights: 2" x 2" B. Corner Guard Height: Full wall height, measured from the top of the base 48". C. Provide all mounting systems accessories appropriate for substrates indicated on the Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify that rough-in for components are correctly sized and located.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. General: Locate corner guards as indicated on the Drawings, using mounting methods as indicated on approved shop drawings for the appropriate substrate, and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Install corner guards level, plumb and at the height indicated on the Drawings, with surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance. C. Provide corner guards and components at all locations indicated on the Drawings. D. Corner Guard Installation:
3.3
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Clean and adjust corner guards under provisions of Section 017300. B. Clean all corner guards, and clean adjacent surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. C. Adjust all corner guards as necessary.
3.4
PROTECTION A. Protection of finished work under provisions of Section 017300.
END OF SECTION
102600 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\102600CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 102810 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES D. Samples: Submit samples of each component, illustrating color and finish.
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section. B. Commercial Toilet and Bath Accessories; as Indicated on the Drawings, Specified Herein; and Including Hardware and Attachments. Provide Items as Follows:
F. Schedule: Submit schedule listing all toilet accessory items, model numbers, finish, and cut sheets showing particular items. 1.4
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ADA safety standards for access requirements for the disabled.
C. Provided by Owner/Installed by Contractor: 1. Soap Dispensers.
1.5
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual locations of toilet accessories and other construction to which toilet accessories must fit by accurate field measurements before installation. Coordinate installation schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
2. Paper Towel Disposal. D. Provided and Installed by contractor: 1. Handicap Grab Bars. 2. Framed Mirrors. 3. Toilet Paper Roll Dispensers.
1.6
A. Coordinate the work with the placement of concealed wall reinforcement to receive anchor attachments.
4. Napkin/Tampon Disposal - Wall Mounted. 5. Utility Shelf. 1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
1.7
WARRANTY A. Provide two (2) year manufacturer’s written warranty under provisions of Section 017836.
A. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood blocking and plates for support of accessories.
B. Warranty: State that all materials and workmanship provided are guaranteed against defects after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
B. Section 088100 - Glass and Glazing: Unframed mirror glass. C. Section 093000 - Tiling: Tile wall finish. D. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Metal stud wall framing and gypsum board substrate construction. 1.3
COORDINATION
1. Provide minimum ten (10) year manufacturer’s written warranty for silver spoilage on all mirrors.
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of all toilets accessories; including locations, mounting heights, method of fastening, and back-up requirements. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS TOILET ACCESSORIES
-
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following manufacturer: 1. BOBRICK Washroom Equipment, Inc.
TOILET and BATH ACCESSORIES S:\11\0123\div2-33\102810CGA.doc
102810 - 1 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
B. Subject to compliance with requirements, other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products are:
2.5
A. Galvanizing: ASTM A123 to 1.25 oz/sq yd. Galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices.
1. American Specialties, Inc.
B. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pre-treat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake.
2. Bradley Corporation. 3. General Accessory (GAMCO). C. Substitutions: 016000. 2.2
FINISHES
Manufacturing
C. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, satin finish.
Co.
D. Stainless SteelNo. 4 satin luster finish.
Under provisions of Section
E. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.
MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A366.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304.
3.1
C. Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel.
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
D. Projecting Parts: Virgin zinc alloy conforming to ASTM B86. E. Adhesive: waterproof.
Two
component
epoxy
type,
F. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof.
B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.2
G. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate.
FABRICATION
B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. 3.3
B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain surfaces without scratches or dents.
D. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.
INSTALLATION A. Install bath toilet accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ADA requirements.
A. Weld and grind joints of fabricated components, smooth.
C. Fabricate grab bars [and towel bars] of tubing, free of visible joints, return to wall with end attachment flanges.
PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.
H. Grab Bars: Stainless steel satin finish with peen gripping surface. 2.3
EXAMINATION
3.4
SCHEDULE (ITEMS ON SCHEDULE ARE BOBRICK) A. Owner shall provide and Contractor shall install the following: Soap Dispensers
E. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 2.4
KEYING
Paper Towel Disposals B. Contractor shall furnish and install the following items:
A. Supply four (4) keys for each accessory to Owner. B. Master key all accessories. ITEM 102810 - 2 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
MODEL
FINISH
TOILET and BATH ACCESSORIES
S:\11\0123\div2-33\102810CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
Grab Bars (1-1/2 Dia.)
B-6806.99 Peened Grip
Stainless Steel
Grab Bars (1-1/4 Dia.)
B-5806
Stainless Steel
Framed Mirrors Series B-165 (Sizes Noted On Drwgs) Channel frame
Stainless Steel
Toilet Paper Dispensers Double roll
Stainless Steel
B-6867
Napkin/Tampon Disposal B-270 Surfaced Mounted
Stainless Steel
Utility Shelf
B-298-24”
Stainless Steel
Electric Hair/ Hand Dryers
B-7317
Color White
END OF SECTION
TOILET and BATH ACCESSORIES
S:\11\0123\div2-33\102810CGA.doc
102810 - 3 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
102810 - 4 of 4
Printed on 1/16/2013
Akin Road Elementary School
TOILET and BATH ACCESSORIES
S:\11\0123\div2-33\102810CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 105100 - LOCKERS 2.2
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
A. Prime grade mild cold rolled sheet steel, free from imperfections, and capable of taking a high grade enamel finish. Gauges as indicated below.
SECTION INCLUDES A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
2.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Student Lockers: Standard Duty Knock-Down
2.4
1. Width: 12 inches.
3. Height: 48 inches. 4. Configuration: Single Tier, Three Tier and Five Tier.
B. Cross Frame Members: 16 gauge steel, channel shapes including intermediate cross frame on double and triple tier lockers securely welded to vertical framing members to ensure rigidity.
5. Base: Metal Z Shape. 6. Top: Sloped Metal. 7. Filler Panels: Metal. 8. Locking: Recessed for padlocks by Student.
2.5
9. ADA Compliant Recessed handles with Multipoint Latching. Provide one (1) column per 50 for the full quantity of lockers.
BODY A. Locker Body Components: Cold rolled steel specially formed for added strength and rigidity and to ensure tight joints at fastening points; coil coated per ASTM A1008. Bolt spacing in locker body construction not to exceed nine (9) inches on center.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS METAL LOCKERS
DOOR FRAMES A. Door Frame Members: 16 gauge steel, formed to a channel shape. Provide vertical members with an additional flange for a continuous door strike. Inter-member parts to be mortised and tenoned, and electrically welded together in a rigid assembly capable of resisting strains.
2. Depth: 12 inches.
2.1
CONSTRUCTION A. Construct lockers on the unit principle - each locker shall have an individual door and frame, individual top, bottom, back and shelves with common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Fabricate lockers square, rigid and without warp, doors flat and free of distortion.
B. Prefinished Metal Locker Units with Hinged Doors; Including Metal Closures, Metal Sloped Tops and Self-Curb; Accessories and Hardware. 1.2
MATERIAL
1. Tops and Sides 24 gauge, Bottoms 16 gauge, with three (3) sides formed ninety (90) degrees and the front offset formed to be flush with the horizontal frame member.
-
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers:
2. Shelves: 16 gauge with four (4) sides formed to ninety (90) degrees, the front edge shall have a second bend.
1. Penco. 2. Republic Storage Systems – “Heavy Duty Corridor Lockers”
3. Backs: 18 gauge.
3. List Industries, Inc.
4. ADA Bottom: Minimum 9” off the floor.
4. Superior. 5. Lyon B. Substitutions: No Substitutions Allowed.
LOCKERS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\105100CGA.doc
2.6
DOORS A. Doors: Twenty (20) inches or higher, formed from one-piece 16 gauge steel. Formations consist of full channel shape on the lock side of adequate depth to fully conceal the lock bar, channel formation on the hinge side, and right angle 105100 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
formations across the top and bottom. Lockers include 18 gauge steel welded full height channel door stiffener. Doors ventilated by louvers on face of each door, top and bottom with mini-louvers. 2.7
HINGES A. Hinges: Two (2) inches high minimum, 0.074 inches thick, double spun, five-knuckle, full loop, tight pin style, securely welded to door frame and securely fastened to the door with two (2) steel rivets. Locker doors forty-two (42) inches high and less shall have two (2) hinges. Doors over fortytwo (42) inches high shall have three (3) hinges.
2.8
2.10
B. Lifting Piece: 14 gauge formed steel, attached to the latching channel with one (1) concealed retaining lug and one (1) rivet assuring a positive two-point connection. Handle finger lift shall have a padlock eye for use with a 9/32 inch diameter padlock shackle and a sound deadening molded comfortable finger lift attached with a rivet. The bottom of the pocket shall have holes for attaching the number plate with two (2) aluminum rivets, and angled to facilitate visibility of the number plate. C. Doors to have latch clip engaging the door frame at three (3) points on doors over forty two (42) inches high and two (2) points on all other doors. Locking device to be positive, automatic type, whereby locker door may be locked when open, then closed without unlocking. One (1) rubber silencer firmly secured in the frame for each latch hook. Glass filled nylon latch clips for long life and low friction and sill hold doors shut by engaging the latch clip. NUMBER PLATES A. Provide one (1) polished aluminum number plate for each locker with a black numerals not less than 3/8 inch high. Plates to be attached with aluminum rivets to the lower surface within the recess handle pocket. Do not mount number plates on door surface.
105100 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
ACCESSORIES
A. Locker Closed Base: Provide a four (4) inch high, 18 gauge steel base enclosed on front and sides secure to locker bottom. Finish to match lockers. 2.11
CONTINUOUS SLOPED TOPS
A. Continuous Sloped Tops: 16 gauge steel slope rise equal to 1/3 locker depth plus 1” vertical rise at front. Finish to match lockers. 2.12
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
A. Hooks: All lockers shall have one double prong rear hook and two single prong side hooks in each compartment. All hooks to be made of steel, formed with ball points, zinc-plated and attached with two bolts or rivets.
DOOR HANDLE AND LATCHING A. Handles: Multipoint Latching: Recessed in the door with finger lift control. 22 gauge recessed pocket, brushed stainless steel securely fastened to the door with two (2) tabs plus a positive tamper resistant fastener. Pocket depth sufficiently deep to prevent a combination padlock from protruding beyond the face of the door. Provide a lock hole cover plate for use with padlocks.
2.9
Akin Road Elementary School
2.13
FINISHES
A. Electrostatically sprayed with one coat of highgrade alkyd paint enamel and baked to durable finish. Dry thickness: 2-2.2. mils rust-inhibitive powder coating. Color to be selected by Architect from the manufacturer’s full line of colors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install metal lockers and components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install lockers level, plumb and square with flush surfaces and rigid attachment to anchoring surfaces. C. Space substrate fasteners at 36 inches on center, or less as recommended by the manufacturer. Use fasteners appropriate to load and anchoring substrate. D. Use reinforcing plates wherever fasteners could distort metal. E. Install various trim accessories where shown such as bases, fillers, sloping tops, etc. using concealed fasteners. F. Provide flush, hairline joints at all abutting trim parts and at adjoining surfaces.
END OF SECTION
LOCKERS
S:\11\0123\div2-33\105100CGA.doc
Akin Road Elementary School
11-0123
SECTION 122000 - WINDOW TREATMENT 1.5
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
A. Deliver, store, handle and protect products at the site under provisions of Section 016000.
SECTION INCLUDES
B. Materials shall be delivered to the site in original, unopened packaging with proper labels intact.
A. Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and Other Conditions), the General Requirements (Sections of Division One) and the Drawings Apply to the Work of this Section.
C. Materials shall be stored in a clean and dry area which should be free of corrosive fumes, dust and away from construction activities.
B. Roll-Up Window Shades With Blackout Shading Fabric. 1.2
D. Materials shall be stacked horizontally using plastic or wood shims such that drainage and ventilation are provided for, and such that water cannot accumulate in, about or upon the containers.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: wood support blocking.
Concealed
E. Stacks shall be covered with tarpaulins or plastic such that ventilation is provided for, and such that contaminants are prevented from contacting surfaces.
B. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board System: Interior metal stud framing and gypsum board finish. 1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.6
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
B. Roofing must be tight, windows and frames installed, and interior doors hung.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics, and operating features.
C. Ceilings, window pockets, electrical and mechanical work above the product shall be complete.
D. Samples: Submit samples illustrating slat materials and finish, color, cord type and color. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
1.7
B. Installer: Company specializing in the installation of Products specified in the Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience, and certified in writing by the manufacturer. C. Job Mock-Up: Prior to starting window treatment work, install one (1) complete vertical blind unit; including caulking interior perimeter where directed by the Architect. Architect’s review and approval will be for selected color, installation method and window coverage. When approved, this unit may remain as part of the completed work. WINDOW TREATMENT
S:\11\0123\div2-33\122000CGA.doc
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify actual locations of window treatment and other construction to which horizontal blinds must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Wet work; including concrete, masonry, plaster, sheetrock, spackling, taping and sanding shall be complete and dry.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening sizes, tolerances required, method of attachment, clearances, and operation.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.8
COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with window installation and placement of concealed blocking to support blinds.
1.9
WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s written warranty under provisions of Section 017836. 1. Headrail Lifetime Warranty. B. Warranty: State that all materials and workmanship provided are guaranteed against defects after completion and final acceptance of the Work. Defects due to faulty materials or 122000 - 1 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
11-0123
Akin Road Elementary School
workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
H. Fabric: Blackout shading fabric shall be 14 mils thick PVC coated fiberglass, totally opaque, with 64 threads per square inch, breaking strength of 160 x 140 pounds and weight of 14 ounces per square yard. Fabric must be made of only first quality materials with no pinholes, breaks or cracks and must be washable and colorfast.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS WINDOW SHADES
-
1. Color: As selected by the Architect from manufacturers full color selection.
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following manufacturer:
I. Fire Resistance: The woven fabrics must have been tested by an approved laboratory and must meet the minimum requirements established by the National Fire Protection Association Test #701.
1. Ecoshade. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products are:
PART 3 EXECUTION
1. Draper - Flex-Shade Systems. 2. Kirsch Roller Shades. C. Substitutions: 016000. 2.2
3.1
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Under provisions of Section
WINDOW SHADE MATERIALS A. Roll-Up Window Shades: The manual shade system shall be a ball chain operated roller shade system utilizing a bi-directional wrap spring clutch which will smoothly raise and lower the shade to any desired height with zero slippage. B. Clutch: The bi-directional wrap spring clutch shall never require any adjustment and may be mounted on either right or left end of the roller tube with fabric forward or reverse rolled. The clutch shall be made of high strength fiberglass reinforced polyester with high carbon steel springs.
B. Ensure structural blocking and supports are correctly placed. 3.2
E. Mounting Brackets: 0.060 inch galvanized steel, inside mount, with the clutch on the right side of the roller.
INSTALLATION A. Install blinds and brackets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure in place with flush countersunk fasteners.
3.3
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch.
C. Control Loop: #10 nickel-plated steel ball chain. D. End Roller: Two-piece unit consisting of an outside sleeve and center-bearing shaft made of high strength fiberglass reinforced polyester. The outside sleeve shall be free to rotate on the center shaft, providing the bearing surfaces on which the roller rides.
EXAMINATION
B. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8 inch. 3.4
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust blinds for smooth operation. B. Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy.
3.5
WINDOW TREATMENT SCHEDULE A. Refer to plan and window elevations.
F. Roller Tube: Enameled roll-formed steel. G. Hem Bar: Either 1/8 x 1 inch or 1/8 x 1-1/2 inch extruded aluminum bar depending on size of shade, pocketed in lower end of fabric by thermal seal.
122000 - 2 of 2
Printed on 1/16/2013
END OF SECTION
WINDOW TREATMENT
S:\11\0123\div2-33\122000CGA.doc
PROJECT M ANUAL Project No.: 11-0122
I ssue Date: January 15, 2013
ARCHITECT: Cuningham Group Architecture, I nc. 201 Main Street SE - Suite 325 Minneapolis, Minnesota 55414
Akin Road Elementary School Renovation 5231 195th Street West Farmington, Minnesota55024
Volume I I : Mechanical Plumbing & Electrical
OWNER: Farmington Area Public Schools I SD 192 421 Walnut Street Farmington, Minnesota 55024
INDEX TO SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 21 – FIRE-SUPPRESSION SECTION NUMBER
SECTION NAME
21 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION
21 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
21 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
21 11 00
FIRE SUPPRESSION WATER SERVICE PIPING
21 13 00
FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
22 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 05 29
HANGER & SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 07 19
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
22 11 16
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 11 19
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 13 16
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
22 42 00
COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES
DIVISION 23 - HVAC 23 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
23 05 13
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
23 05 16
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
23 05 19
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
Index to Specification-1
January 15, 2013
R11-1036.000
23 05 29
HANGER AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 48
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 07 13
DUCT INSULATION
23 07 19
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 08 00
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
23 20 13
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 20 19
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
23 21 23
HYDRONIC PUMPS
23 25 31
WATER TREATMENT FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
23 31 13
METAL AND NON-METAL DUCTWORK, CASINGS AND PLENUMS
23 33 13
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
23 34 13
FANS
23 37 13
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
23 74 13
PACKAGED OUTDOOR ROOFTOP UNITS
DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 25 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
25 10 00
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION EQUIPMENT
25 35 00
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION INSTRUMENTATION AND TERMINAL DEVICES FOR HVAC
25 95 00
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR HVAC END OF INDEX
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
Index to Specification-2
January 15, 2013
R11-1036.000
SECTION 21 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
WORK INCLUDES A. Furnishing labor, materials, equipment and services required for the remodeling of existing fire protection shown on the Drawings and specified in Division 21. B. All work shall be complete and shall be left in operating condition. C. Include all parts and labor, which are incidental and necessary for a complete and operable installation even though not specifically mentioned in the Contract Documents. D. Some equipment and materials provided under Division 21, 22, or Division 26 may require composite work crews because of trade jurisdiction. Where this occurs, include in the bid this portion of the composite crew labor costs. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to review Division 21, 22, and Division 26 Contract Documents to determine where these composite crews are required. E. Obtain all temporary and permanent permits and licenses required in connection with this Division’s work. Pay all fees and expenses required for such permits and licenses. F. Request inspections as required by regulating agencies and/or regulations. Pay all charges for inspections by regulating agencies of installations of plans specifications. G. Include State and Local sales taxes in the bid. Keep accurate records of these taxes and furnish such records to the Owner upon request. H. Provide the Owner with a certificate of final inspection and approval by enforcement authorities. I. Furnish labor, equipment, and materials required for cutting, demolition, removal, patching, and restoration work necessary to accomplish and complete all demolition, including any relocation or reuse of existing materials, equipment, systems, as well as the disposition of salvaged materials or debris.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. General Provisions are specifically applicable to all Division 21 Sections. B. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to all work of Division 21 and are an integral part of this Section. Where the conditions specified are at variance with other Divisions, Section 21 05 00 takes precedence. Section 21 05 00 specifies conditions, procedures, equipment and material particular to the mechanical work and applies to all mechanical work of the Contract Documents. C. Division 0 and 1 and Section 21 05 00 and all Addenda form a part of and apply to all contracts or sub-contracts relating to Division 21 work. Copy these documents to all Sub-contractors receiving other Sections of Division 21.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 00-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
D. Where a Specification Section refers to other Sections under the Article on “Related Sections”, this is done for Contractor’s convenience only. It shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibilities stated in other Sections of the Specifications, even though these Sections are not specifically referenced. The Contractor is responsible for all information contained in this Division’s Specifications as well as for information contained in all other Divisions. 1.3
WORK SEQUENCE A. Install work in phases during the construction period coordinate mechanical schedule and operations with Owner and Architect/Engineer.
1.4
ALTERNATES A. Alternates: Refer to Bid Form and Instruction to Bidders.
1.5
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Meet or exceed all current applicable codes, ordinances and regulations for all installations. Promptly notify the Engineer, in writing, if the contract documents appear to conflict with governing codes and regulations. Contractor assumes all responsibility and costs for correcting non-complying work installed without notifying the Engineer. B. Higher quality of workmanship and materials indicated in the Contract Documents takes precedence over that allowed in referenced codes and standards. C. Perform all work in compliance with the currently adopted version of the following codes and standards for this project: Municipal Water and Sewer Regulations National Electric Code NFPA 101 Life Safety Code Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations State and Local Building Codes State and Local Electrical Codes State and Local Fire Codes and Regulations State Industrial Commission Regulations
1.6
REFERENCES A. Use the Standard where referenced in the specifications by the following abbreviations: ANSI - American National Standards Institute ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM - American Society of Testing and Materials AWWA - American Water Works Association EPA - Environmental Protection Agency FM - Factory Mutual IRI - Industrial Risk Insurance NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau NBFU - National Bureau of Fire Underwriters NBS - National Bureau of Standards NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA - National Fire Protection Association NSC - National Safety Council
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 00-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration UL - Underwriter's Laboratories 1.7
DEFINITIONS A. Contract Documents: References to Contract Documents refers to a complete set of Drawings and Specifications for the entire Project. Drawings and Specifications are intended to supplement one another. Provide items shown on the Drawings but not mentioned in the Specifications and items mentioned but not shown the same as if they were both mentioned and shown. Bid the most expensive interpretation of a conflict between Drawings and Specifications so the conflict can be resolved with a deduct rather than an add to the contract amount. B. Dimensions: Arrangement of equipment, accessories, piping and ductwork on the Drawings is generally diagrammatic unless the Drawings include dimensions. Do not scale the Drawings. Field verify all dimensions at the site to locate new and existing work. C. Furnish: To obtain, coordinate, submit the necessary drawings, deliver to the job site in new condition ready for installation, unload and unpack, and guarantee. D. Install: To receive at the job site, store, assemble, erect, set in place, anchor, apply, finish, protect, clean, test, start-up, and make ready for Owner’s use. E. Provide: To furnish and install. F. Responsibility: Where verbs such as “furnish”, “provide”, “install”, or “use” appear in the Contract Documents, they mean, “The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish, provide, install, or use…..” unless the requirement is introduced by a phrase, sentence or heading specifically identifying the requirement as the responsibility of someone else.
1.8
SUBMITTALS A. Substitutions 1. Submit written requests to use products not listed in the Specifications to the Engineer no later than ten (10) calendar days prior to the bid opening. Submit detailed information for proposed material or equipment. 2. Accepted substitutions will be incorporated in an Addendum to the Contract Documents. 3. Contractor is responsible for dimensional differences, weights, electrical requirements and any other resulting changes, when using equipment other than that scheduled on the Drawings. Contractor is responsible for any additional costs incurred as a result of substitutions, including other Contractors and Architect/Engineer fees. 4. Material and equipment not listed in the Specifications or accepted in an Addendum will be removed and replaced at no cost or inconvenience to the Owner. B. List of Materials, Equipment and Sub-Contractors 1. Submit a complete list of all materials, equipment, and sub-contractors, proposed to be used on this project, to the Engineer within seven (7) calendar days of the award of contract or written notice to proceed. 2. Acceptance of items on the list are considered final, unless additional information or submissions are required by the Engineer. Unacceptable items will be rejected and resubmitted. C. Pay Request Cost Breakdown
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 00-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1. Provide Schedule of Values for the utilization of submitting a “Pay Request”. Allocate appropriate share of overhead and profit to each item. Separate each item into labor and material. D. Submittals for Review 1. Submit in accordance with Division 0 and Division 1. Submit drawings to the Engineer for review within 30 calendar days after award of Contract. 2. Include project name, name of Architect, name of Engineer, contractor, sub-contractor, manufacturer, supplier and sales representative, include name, address, and phone number for the sales representative. Clearly identify section number and description of equipment submitted. Shop drawings not including all of this information will be returned without review. 3. Examine all shop drawings noting capacity, arrangement and physical dimensions. Clearly mark all relevant items on catalog data and cross-out unrelated information. Review and stamp shop drawing prior to submitting to the Engineer. 4. Submit a minimum of six (6) sets of shop drawings. The Engineer will distribute as follows: a. Engineer - One (1) copy. b. Architect - One (1) copy. c. Prime Contractor - Remaining copies (two copies to be incorporated into the O&M Manuals. 5. All shop drawings must be reviewed and accepted by the Engineer prior to fabrication and installation. 6. Submittals will be reviewed with the following actions: a. NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN—Indicates the Submittal appears to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation. b. MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED—Indicates that the Submittals, after noted corrections are made, would appear to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without an increase in Contract Sum or Time. c. REJECTED—Indicates that the Submittal does not appear to conform to the specifications, and that a complete resubmittal is required. The Contractor shall not proceed with fabrication or procurement. d. NO ENGINEER ACTION REQUIRED—Indicates the Contractor may proceed without review of the Submittal based on provisions of the Contract Documents. 7. Allow a minimum of fourteen (14) calendar days for the Engineer to review the shop drawings. Time is from the receipt of drawings in the Engineers office until they are shipped out of the office.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 00-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
8. If the Engineer rejects (Make corrections noted/Submit corrected copy, Rejected/Submit specified item) two (2) times for the same section the Engineer will be compensated for the additional reviews. Compensation will be incorporated by Change Order and deducted from the Contractor’s application for payment. Contractor is responsible for delays caused by the resubmittal process. 9. Submit shop drawings for the following equipment and systems: Section 21 13 00 1.9
Description Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems
CAD DRAWING FILES A. The mechanical CAD drawing files prepared by Hallberg Engineering, Inc. for this project are Instruments of Service of Hallberg Engineering, Inc. for use solely with respect to this project and will not be made available to the Contractor. B. Request CAD drawing files of Architectural floor plans, elevations, sections, etc directly from the Architect.
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Initiate, maintain and supervise all safety precautions required with this work in accordance with the regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and other governing agencies. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not remove or disturb any asbestos containing materials from the project. Immediately stop work and notify the Owner if asbestos containing materials are suspected. C. Accomplish all work of cutting, removal, demolition, relocation, patching, and restoration by using only mechanics skilled in the trade required. Provide for the safety of the existing building and personnel, as well as for new construction as a result of work, procedures, operations or activities under this Contract. D. Where the work of removals, demolition, cutting and similar work involves structural considerations, consult with Engineer. Exercise extreme care to avoid damage and preserve the safety of the structure and of all personnel. Particular care must be taken where the demolition or removals occur adjacent to occupied areas. E. Utilize competent and qualified technical assistance to develop safe methods and techniques to accomplish the work, including temporary shoring and supports, methods of removal and other considerations. Design and place all permanent or temporary supports to carry all loads down to sound bearing. 1.11 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Inspections: 1. Before submitting a proposal on the work contemplated, examine the site of the proposed work and become thoroughly familiar with existing conditions and limitations. No extra compensation will be allowed because of misunderstanding as to the amount of work involved nor bidders lack of knowledge of existing conditions which could have been discovered or reasonably anticipated prior to bidding.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 00-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2. Mechanical equipment and systems shown on the drawings as existing, have been based on existing plans, and may not be installed as originally shown. It is the contractors responsibility to visit the site and make exact determination of the existence, location and condition of such facilities prior to submitting a bid. B. Correlation of Work: 1. Consult the drawings and specifications of Division 26 and other trades for correlating information and lay out work so that it will coordinate with other trades. Verify dimensions and conditions (i.e., finished ceiling heights, footing and foundation elevations, beam depths, etc.) with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Notify the Architect/Engineer of any conflicts that can not be resolved, in the field, by affected trades. Replacement of work due to lack of coordination and failure to verify existing conditions will be completed at no cost to the Owner. 2. Drawings may not show every rise and offset required for the work. Install piping to accommodate the building structure and the work of other trades, with all required offsets and without extra cost to the Owner. 3. Where work must be replaced due to the failure of the Contractor to verify the conditions existing on the job, such replacement must be accomplished at no cost to the Owner. This applies to shop fabricated work as well as to work fabricated in place. 4. Throughout the course of the work, minor changes and adjustments to the installation may be requested by the Engineer. The Contractor shall make adjustments without additional cost to the Owner, where such adjustments are necessary to the proper installation and operation within the intent of the Contract Documents. This does not include work already completed. 5. Equipment outlines shown on detail plans of 1/4"=1'-0" scale or larger and/or dimensions indicated on the plans are limiting dimensions. Do not install any equipment that exceeds the equipment outlines shown or reduces indicated clearances. 6. Obtain exact location of connection to equipment, furnished by others, from the person furnishing the equipment. 7. Drawings and Specifications are complementary and what is called for in either is as binding as if called for in both. 8. Include the better quality, greater quantity or higher cost for an item or arrangement where a disagreement exists in the Drawings and Specifications. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Guarantee and maintain the stability of work and materials and keep same in perfect repair and condition for the period of one (1) year after the final completion of the work as evidenced by issuance of the final certificate by the Architect. B. Defects of any kind due to faulty work or materials appearing during the above mentioned period must be immediately made good by the Contractor at his own expense to the entire satisfaction of the Owner and Architect and Engineer. Include damage to the finish or the building resulting from the original defect or repairs. C. Guarantee does not apply to injuries occurring after final acceptance and due to wind, fire, violence, abuse or carelessness or other Contractors or their employees or the agents of the Owner. Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 00-6
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
D. Guarantee does not apply where other guarantees for different lengths of time are specified in other Sections. 1.13 ELECTRICAL A. Control and interlock wiring provided by this Contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER’S A. Provide only products from manufacturer’s with local representation that can provide complete coverage, parts and labor, for replacement and service of their products. Provide only equipment that will fit in the space available and be completely serviceable. Bring any conflicts to the Engineer’s attention prior to ordering the equipment.
2.2
DEMOLITION A. Remove salvageable materials and other items designated for reuse or relocation by the applicable trades and relocated to the new location. B. If the new location is not ready to receive the relocated materials, store and protect from damage until they can be incorporated into the new work. C. If the Owner is unable to forego the use of any existing items at the normal time for relocation, make all preparations for that work and then delay relocation until a time approved by the Owner or until other facilities are available to the Owner. D. Carefully remove, clean, salvage and preserve all materials indicated to be reused, or which will be needed for reuse to match existing work. E. Exercise extreme care in removals to prevent damage which would make materials unsuitable for reuse. F. Replace all damaged materials, which were shown, tagged or needed for reuse, with equivalent.
2.3
UNSALVAGEABLE MATERIALS A. Remove all unsalvageable materials in a manner that will avoid damage to materials or equipment which will remain. Completely remove from the site as approved by and scheduled with the Owner. B. Legally dispose of all unsalvageable materials away from the site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Continuity of Service: 1. Coordinate/schedule all work with the Owner to minimize any disruptions. Confine all interruptions to the smallest possible area. Provide temporary connections if required to provide continuity of service. 2. Inspect all areas affected by the interruptions and return all automatically controlled equipment, electrically operated equipment to the same operating condition prior to the interruption. B. Use of Facility:
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 00-7
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1. Do not disturb normal use of the facility, except within the immediate construction area. Keep walks, driveways, entrances, etc. free and clear of equipment, material and debris. 2. Store all equipment and material in a place and manner that minimizes congestion and is approved by the Owner. 3.2
INSTALLATION A. Material and Workmanship 1. Provide new material and equipment, unless noted otherwise. Protect equipment and material from damage, dirt and the weather. 2. Provide the highest quality workmanship and perform all work only by skilled mechanics. Install material and equipment in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations, instructions and current standards. 3. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or workmanship not in accordance with the Contract Documents, before or after installation. B. Piping 1. All piping shall be run in the most direct and straight manner possible maintaining proper grading. 2. It is the intent of these plans and specifications that most piping be concealed. Where exposed, run as close to ceiling and/or wall as possible parallel with adjacent structural or architectural elements. 3. Do not install piping in any switchgear, transformer, elevator equipment, telephone, or electrical equipment room, unless it is a branch serving that room. 4. Do not install piping above switchboards, panelboards, control panels, motor control centers, etc. 5. Arrange work to facilitate maintenance, repair or replacement of equipment. Provide access for devices that require maintenance. For concealed devices, verify that access panels are properly located and labeled. C. Equipment: 1. Install material and equipment in accordance with the Manufacturer’s written instructions. D. Cutting and Patching: 1. Perform all cutting and patching necessary to work, unless specifically delegated to the General Contractor. Obtain special permission from the engineer before cutting structural members or finished material. Perform all patching in such a manner as to leave no visible trace and return the area affected to the condition of undisturbed work. Perform all patching by workers experienced, skilled, and licensed for the particular type of work involved. Inferior work will not be accepted. 2. Patch all holes left as a result of demolition of mechanical equipment and devices. 3. Drill all holes in masonry with rotary drill. Impact tools are not allowed. Core drill all holes in masonry and concrete for mechanical penetrations. Provide and dispose of all water required for core drilling. Coordinate with other trades to prevent damage from water. 4. Prevent the spread of dust, debris, and other material into adjacent areas.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 00-8
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
5. Replace all ceiling tiles damaged during installation of work, with new tile. E. Paint all exposed pipng and equipoment in occupied areas with one (1) prime coat and two (2) final coats. Coordinate final color with Architect. F. Record Drawings: 1. Provide Record Drawings in accordance with the requirements of Division 0 and Division 1. 2. Maintain a complete set of Record Drawings showing all modifications to the Contract Documents. Drawings will be stamped “Record Drawings” and used only for that purpose. 3. As work progresses, record all changes or deviations from the contract drawings in a neat and legible manner as follows: a. Record exact location and elevation of underground mechanical systems including changes in direction, cleanouts etc., by reference to building lines, curbs, walks, and other permanent reference points. b. Record routing of concealed and exposed above ground mechanical systems where it varies from the Contract Documents. 4. The Engineer may recommend withholding payment if Record Drawings are not being maintained. 5. Submit Record Drawings to the Engineer for review at completion of the Work. Submit final record drawings as part of the Operation and Maintenance Manual package after the completion of the project. 3.3
PROTECTION A. Protect openings and equipment from obstruction, breakage, misuse, damage or blemishes. Protect materials and equipment immediately upon receipt at the job site or immediately after they have been removed from their shipping containers. Unless noted otherwise, keep them clean and undamaged until final acceptance of the entire Project by the Owner. When a portion of the building is occupied by the Owner before substantial completion of the entire Project, make arrangements to transfer responsibility for protection and housekeeping for the occupied portion. B. Protect pipe and equipment openings with temporary plugs or caps. Keep openings covered until permanent connections are complete. C. Contractor is responsible for any damage to mechanical equipment, materials or work until final acceptance of the entire project by the Owner.
3.4
CLEAN UP A. Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish, caused by his employees or work, at all times. Remove rubbish, tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials from and about the building, and leave work areas "broom clean" or its equivalent upon completion of the work. Clean mechanical equipment and remove temporary identification. B. In case of dispute, the Owner will remove the rubbish and charge the cost to the Contractor.
3.5
START-UP A. Before start-up, charge, and fill systems as specified and according to Manufacturer’s instructions. B. Test fire protection systems as specified in Sections governing their installation.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 00-9
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. Perform testing, adjusting and balancing in accordance with that Section. D. Operate equipment and systems in all their operating modes, to verify proper operation, prior to final field observation and Owner instructions. Notify the Engineer, in writing, that all systems have been tested and are functioning and operating properly. 3.6
FINAL FIELD OBSERVATION A. A final field observation of the mechanical systems will be required before Contract Closeout. Request a final observation by the Engineer after all systems are fully completed and operational. The Engineer will schedule a field observation and generate a list of items to be corrected or completed before Contract Closeout. B. If the Engineer is requested to make a final field observation by the Contractor, and the Engineer finds the work is not complete enough to perform that observation, the Contractor will compensate the Engineer for their time. The Contractor will then perform the necessary work to complete the project and again request a Final Field Observation.
3.7
TRAINING A. Fully instruct the Owner's designated personnel in the operation of each mechanical system at the time it is put into service. Provide instruction using competent instructors and factory trained personnel. B. Include documentation of instructions in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. C. Obtain a written statement from the Owner that his designated personnel have been instructed.
3.8
PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Submit to the Engineer two (2) Operating and Maintenance manuals. Submit in portfolio form neatly edited with similar equipment grouped, tabbed and indexed. Provide printed or typewritten materials. Provide the following in each manual: 1. Shop drawings, approved manufacturer's bulletins, and other appropriate data from specific manufacturer of each piece of equipment furnished and/or installed. Shop drawings, manufacturer's bulletin, and other data shall be appropriate marked to reflect the "as-built" condition. Cross out or delete all information shown on shop drawings or literature not applying to this specific project. 2. Copies of manufacturer’s warranties 3. Operating instruction for equipment. 4. Wiring and installation instructions for equipment. 5. Recommended maintenance schedules and procedures for equipment. 6. Recommended trouble shooting procedures for equipment. 7. Equipment parts list. 8. Settings/adjustments/calibrations for systems as required. 9. Local equipment suppliers/reps names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 10. Equipment manufacturers names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 11. Sub-contractors names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 00-10
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
12. Test reports. 13. Certifications. 14. Test and balance reports. 15. System validation reports. 16. Statement from Contractor that all incomplete items noted in Engineer’s Final Field Observation Report have been completed. 17. Statement from Owner confirming completion of Training. 18. Refer to individual Sections in Division 21 for additional requirements. B. Record Drawings: Submit Record Drawings. C. Extra Materials: Refer to individual Specification Sections for extra materials to be provided to the Owner. D. System Startup: Refer to individual Specification Sections for system startup requirements. 3.9
ELECTRONIC AS-BUILTS AND OPERATOIN AND MANTENANCE MANUAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide an electronic copy on a CD of an approved copy of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. CD to be book marked per specification section and equipment format to be a PDF file. B. Provide an electronic copy on a CD of the approved as-builts. CD to be book marked per sheet and in PDF form. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 00-11
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 21 05 29 HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and equipment hangers and supports.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 21 05 00 – Common Work Results for Fire-Suppression. B. Section 21 13 00 – Fire-Suppression Sprinkler System.
1.3
REFERENCES A. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. B. UL 203 - Pipe Hanger Equipment for Fire Protection Service
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with locations and details of all types of hangers. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. C. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: components.
1.5
Indicate special procedures and assembly of
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Supports for Sprinkler Piping: In conformance with NFPA 13.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Anvil. 2. B-Line Systems. 3. Michigan. 4. Tolco. 5. Hilti. 6. Substitutions: None. B. Fire Protection Piping: 1. Conform to NFPA 13. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1 to 8 inch: Carbon steel adjustable swivel hanger. 3. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 29-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 2-1/2 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 5. Vertical Support: Carbon steel riser clamp. 6. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, cast iron, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 2.2
HANGER RODS A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.
2.3
SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel. C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed. D. Sleeves for Pipes in building walls below grade: modular wall seal. E. Stuffing and Fire stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible. F. Sealant: Acrylic.
2.4
FIRESTOP SYSTEMS A. Manufacturer: 1. 3M (Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co.). 2. Hilti. 3. Substitutions: None. B. Firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gasses, and maintain original fireresistance rating of construction assembly. C. Certificate of conformance for through-penetration requirements of ASTM E814 and UL1479. D. Systems or devices listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory under category XHCR (firestop devices) and XHEZ (firestop systems) may be used, providing that they conform to the construction type, penetrant type, annular space requirements and fire rating involved in each separate instance, and that the system in symmetrical for wall applications. E. Accessories include, but are not limited to; permanent forming/damming/backing materials, temporary forming materials, substrate primers, and collars and steel sleeves.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.2
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 29-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support vertical piping at every floor. F. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. G. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. H. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. I. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. J. Support piping from building structure. Do not support piping from other mechanical or electrical components. K. Do not support piping with wire or metal stripping hangers. 3.3
SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. C. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Sleeves in mechanical room floor slabs shall extend 6 inches above finished floor level. Calk sleeves. D. Where piping penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe and adjacent work with stuffing insulation and calk air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. E. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
3.4
FIRE STOP SYSTEMS A. Provide firestop systems for pipe and duct through-penetrations of the following fire-resistancerated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items: floor and ceilings, walls and partitions, smoke barriers, and construction enclosed compartmentalized areas. B. Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
3.5
SCHEDULES A. Fire Protection Piping: 1. Provide proper hangers and spacing according to the most current adopted N.F.P.A. 13 Standard. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 29-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 21 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. Pipe Markers.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 21 05 00 – Common Work Results for Fire-Suppression.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. B. NFPA 13 – Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 21 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: installation.
1.5
Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 21 05 00: Procedures for submittals.
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 13 requirements for labeling and identification of fire sprinkler systems and accessories.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Seton. 2. Brady. 3. Substitutions: None. B. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color.
2.2
TAGS A. Plastic Tags: 1. Manufacturers:
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 53-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
a. Seton. b. Brady. c. Substitutions: None. 2. Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter. 2.3
PIPE MARKERS A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Pipe Markers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brady. b. Seton. c. Substitutions: None. 2. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. No tape or adhesive necessary. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting. B. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. C. Install tags and signs using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location. D. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. E. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. F. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic. G. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers . Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
3.3
SCHEDULES A. Identification; Piping: Use pipe service description and color schemes that are standard to the manufacturer. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 05 53-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 21 11 00 FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler systems.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 21 05 00 – Common Work Results for Fire-Suppression. B. Section 21 13 00 – Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME B36.10 - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe. B. ASTM A135 - Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe. C. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless. D. ASTM A795 - Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use. E. AWS D10.9 - Specifications for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing. F. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. G. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code. H. FM - Factory Mutual Approval Guide. I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. J. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. K. UL 199 - Automatic Sprinklers. L. Warnock Hersey - Certification Listings.
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide system to NFPA 13 hazard occupancy requirements as shown in the schedule on the drawings. B. Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply from water flow test data. If not available assume latest flow test data by city. Revise design when test data available prior to submittals. C. Maximum water velocity in piping: 20 feet per second. D. Provide 5 psi or 10 percent minimum (whichever is greater) safety factor on all hydraulically calculated piping systems.
1.5
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 21 05 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings:
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 11 00-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1. Submit preliminary layout of finished ceiling areas indicating only sprinkler locations coordinated with ceiling installation. 2. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers, components and accessories. Indicate system controls. 3. Sprinkler system design documents to be prepared and signed by technician certified with N.I.C.E.T., Level IV. 4. Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, hanger locations, mounting and support details, and piping connections. C. Submit shop drawings, product data, and hydraulic calculations to authority having jurisdiction, and Owner's insurance underwriter for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect/Engineer. 1.6
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 21 05 00 Project Closeout. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds specified requirements and code requirements. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements, record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers of service depot. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall be responsible for designing and hydraulically calculating the piping systems, including location of all valves, devices, and sprinkler heads. The standpipes and main feed piping design shall not be revised by the Contractor except where conflicts may exist with other trades and as reviewed by the Engineer. Design sprinkler system piping based on hazard rating as determined by the most stringent of the regulating agencies responsible for this facility, for the occupancy of the areas being sprinklered, Owner insurance company requirements, requirements of the governing authorities, and as indicated on the contract documents. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum ten years documented experience. D. Design system under direct supervision of a technician certified by N.I.C.E.T., Level IV. E. Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State of Minnesota.
1.8
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to UL, FM, or Warnock Hersey. B. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 11 00-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. Equipment and Components: Bear UL, FM, or Warnock Hersey label or marking per NFPA 13. 1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
Provide
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
ABOVE GROUND PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, ASTM A135, ASTM A135 UL listed, threadable, light wall, ASTM A795 or ASME B36.10, Schedule 10, 40 black or galvanized. Schedule 5, 7 and copper pipe or tube are not acceptable. 1. All black steel piping must be preoxidized with a suitable protective coating. 2. Piping exposed to the weather, in high humidity areas, or used in a corrosive atmosphere, shall be galvanized. 3. Steel Fittings: Wrought steel, buttwelded, buttweld ends, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel, steel flanges and fittings, forged steel socket welded and threaded, U.L. listed and F.M approved. 4. Cast Iron Fittings: Flanges and flanged fittings, threaded fittings. 5. Malleable Iron Fittings: Threaded fittings. 6. Plain end, pressfit, and snap-let fittings are not acceptable. 7. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Ductile iron housing clamps with a protective orange enamel coating conforming to ASTM A-536, or ASTM A-153 for a galvanized coating, track head bolt conforming to ASTM A-183 a minimum tensile strength of 110,000 psi with a grade ‘E’ gasket. (All mechanical grooved couplings on this project shall be of the same manufacturer.) 8. Mechanical Formed Fittings: Cast of durable ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-526 with a protective coating of orange enamel, or ASTM A-153 for a galvanized coating. (All mechanical formed fittings on this project shall be of the same manufacturer.)
2.2
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Refer to Section 21 05 29 - Hangers and Supports.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with grooved couplings, flanges or unions.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 11 00-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions. D. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient. E. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work. F. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. G. Install piping as high as possible, and to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. H. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Refer to Section 21 05 29 - Hangers and Supports. I. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use reducing fittings for changes in piping. Bushings are not acceptable. J. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. K. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. L. Provide sleeves when penetrating floors and walls. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. Indicate on the drawings of sleeve locations. M. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided. N. Die cut threaded joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only. O. Do not install piping in any electrical equipment, transformer, elevator equipment, switch gear or telephone room, unless it is serving the sprinklers in that room. 3.3
COORDINATION A. Coordinate piping with structural, mechanical piping and ductwork, and electrical within the building. Piping conflicts between system shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the Owner.
3.4
TESTING A. Conduct all applicable tests as referenced in NFPA Standard 13 for "The Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and for "The Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping". All necessary tests shall be conducted in conformance with requirements of NFPA, and a Contractor's Certificate covering materials and test outlined in NFPA Standard 13 shall be completed and submitted in triplicate to the Engineer. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 11 00-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 21 13 00 FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Wet-pipe sprinkler system.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 21 05 00 – Common Work Results for Fire-Suppression.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. B. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. C. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code. D. FM - Factory Mutual Approval Guide. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. F. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. G. UL 199 - Automatic Sprinklers.
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System to provide coverage for entire building. B. Provide system to NFPA 13 hazard occupancy requirements as shown in the schedule on the drawings. C. Interface system with building fire and smoke alarm system. D. Provide 5 psi or 10 percent minimum (whichever is greater) safety factor on all hydraulically calculated piping systems.
1.5
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 21 05 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide data on fire protection piping, sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections. C. Submit shop drawings, product data, and hydraulic calculations to authority having jurisdiction, and Owner's insurance underwriter for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect/Engineer.
1.6
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 21 05 00 Project Closeout. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 13 00-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds specified requirements and code requirements. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements, record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers of service depot. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall be responsible for designing and hydraulically calculating the piping systems, including location of all valves, devices, and sprinkler heads. The standpipes and main feed piping design shall not be revised by the Contractor except where conflicts may exist with other trades and as reviewed by the Engineer. Design sprinkler system piping based on hazard rating as determined by the most stringent of the regulating agencies responsible for this facility, for the occupancy of the areas being sprinklered, Owner insurance company requirements, requirements of the governing authorities, and as indicated on the contract documents. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum ten years documented experience. D. Design system under direct supervision of a technician certified by N.I.C.E.T., Level IV. E. Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State of Minnesota.
1.8
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to UL, FM, or Warnock Hersey. B. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13. C. Equipment and Components: Bear UL, FM, or Warnock Hersey label or marking per NFPA 13. D. Sprinkler Systems: Conform to NFPA 13. E. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and AWS D10.9. F. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
Provide
B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 21 05 00 - Project Closeout. B. Provide extra sprinklers under provisions of NFPA 13. C. Provide suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type. Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 13 00-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
D. Provide metal storage cabinet for extra sprinklers located adjacent to the valve assembly. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
SPRINKLERS A. Manufacturers: Reliable Model GFR (solder type) or Model F1FR (glass bulb type), with Model FP chrome semi-recessed threaded type escutcheon or approved equal by: (all sprinklers on this project shall be of the same manufacturer): 1. Automatic Sprinkler of America. 2. Tyco (Central and Gem). 3. Viking Corporation. 4. Substitutions: None. B. Suspended Ceiling: 1. Type: Standard, semi-recessed, concealed, pendent type with matching screw on escutcheon plate as noted in schedule on drawings. 2. Finish: Chrome plated. 3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated. 4. Fusible Link: Temperature rated for specific area hazard. C. Exposed Area Type: 1. Type: Standard upright type. 2. Finish: Chrome plated. 3. Fusible Link: Temperature rated for specific area hazard. D. Sidewall Type: 1. Type: Standard, semi-recessed, horizontal sidewall type with matching screw on escutcheon plate. 2. Finish: Chrome plated. 3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated. 4. Fusible Link: Temperature rated for specific area hazard. E. Dry Sprinklers: 1. Type: Standard, recessed, exposed, pendant type with matching push on escutcheon plate. 2. Finish: Chrome plated. 3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated. 4. Fusible Link: Temperature rated for specific area hazard. F. Guards: Fabricated of heavy gauge wire welded to steel mounting plates complying with the latest UL Standards. G. Spray Nozzles: 1. Brass with solid cone discharge, 140 degrees of arc.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 13 00-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with grooved couplings, flanges or unions.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions. C. The use of ½” extension coupling are not acceptable. D. Miscellaneous Appurtenances: 1. Drain and test connections for each sprinkler riser, including an angle valve, pressure gauge and inspector's test. Auxiliary drains shall be provided as required by NFPA 13. 2. Chrome plated escutcheons on all exposed pipes passing through walls, floors and ceilings. 3. Sprinkler heads shall be installed at the top and under the lowest landing of each stairway. 4. Provide extra sprinkler heads of each style, enclosed in head cabinet, and one head wrench for each type. The number of extra sprinkler heads to be supplied is to be determined according to NFPA Standard 13. Cabinet shall be mounted where directed by Owner. 5. Provide guards on sprinkler heads where heads are within 7'-0" of floor or in any location where heads might be subject to mechanical injury. 6. Install sprinkler heads at the top and bottom of all shafts per NFPA Standard 13. 7. Install NFPA Standard 13 required signs on all control valves with jack chain. Install hydraulic information signs at each sprinkler system control valve. E. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. F. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. G. Center sprinklers in one direction only in ceiling tile with location in other direction variable, dependent upon spacing and coordination with ceiling elements. H. Apply a paper covering to ensure that sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler escutcheons are concealed and do not receive field paint finish. Remove after painting. Remove and replace painted sprinklers. I. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. J. Install guards on sprinklers where indicated. K. Hydrostatically test entire system. L. Require test be witnessed by Fire Marshall.
3.3
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Ensure required devices are installed and connected as required to fire alarm system.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 13 00-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3.4
COORDINATION A. Coordinate piping with structural, mechanical piping and ductwork, and electrical within the building. Piping conflicts between system shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the Owner.
3.5
TESTING A. Conduct all applicable tests as referenced in NFPA Standard 13 for "The Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and for "The Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping". All necessary tests shall be conducted in conformance with requirements of NFPA, and a Contractor's Certificate covering materials and test outlined in NFPA Standard 13 shall be completed and submitted in triplicate to the Engineer. B. Test sprinkler system for a period of two hours at hydrostatic pressure of 200 psig (or 50 PSI above static pressure in excess of 150 psig for a period of two (2) hours.) All piping, valves, heads and other components shall be watertight. If a drop in system pressure is noted during the test, the contractor shall repair the system as required and reschedule the test as specified hereinafter. All retests of systems shall be performed at no cost to the owner.
3.6
ELECTRICAL WIRING A. Wiring for flow switches, valve supervisory switches, supervisory pressure switches, and power to air compressors will be provided under Division 26. Coordinate location of these devices with the Electrical Contractor. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
21 13 00-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 22 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
WORK INCLUDES A. Furnishing labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation of new and remodel of existing plumbing shown on the Drawings and specified in Division 22. B. All work shall be complete and shall be left in operating condition. C. Include all parts and labor, which are incidental and necessary for a complete and operable installation even though not specifically mentioned in the Contract Documents. D. Some equipment and materials provided under Division 21, 22, 23, 25 or Division 26 may require composite work crews because of trade jurisdiction. Where this occurs, include in the bid this portion of the composite crew labor costs. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to review Division 21, 22, 23, 25 and Division 26 Contract Documents to determine where these composite crews are required. E. Arrange with appropriate utility companies to provide temporary and permanent utility services as required and coordinate their installation with construction progress of this project. Pay all fees and costs charged by utility companies for utility services. F. Obtain all temporary and permanent permits and licenses required in connection with this Division’s work. Pay all fees and expenses required for such permits and licenses. G. Request inspections as required by regulating agencies and/or regulations. Pay all charges for inspections by regulating agencies of installations of plans specifications. H. Include State and Local sales taxes in the bid. Keep accurate records of these taxes and furnish such records to the Owner upon request. I. Provide the Owner with a certificate of final inspection and approval by enforcement authorities. J. Furnish labor, equipment, and materials required for cutting, demolition, removal, patching, and restoration work necessary to accomplish and complete all demolition, including any relocation or reuse of existing materials, equipment, systems, as well as the disposition of salvaged materials or debris.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS: A. General Provisions are specifically applicable to all Division 22 Sections. B. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to all work of Division 22 and are an integral part of this Section. Where the conditions specified are at variance with other Divisions, Section 22 05 00 takes precedence. Section 22 05 00 specifies conditions, procedures, equipment and material particular to the mechanical work and applies to all mechanical work of the Contract Documents. C. Division 0 and 1 and Section 22 05 00 and all Addenda form a part of and apply to all contracts or sub-contracts relating to Division 22 work. Copy these documents to all Sub-contractors receiving other Sections of Division 22.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
D. Where a Specification Section refers to other Sections under the Article on “Related Sections”, this is done for Contractor’s convenience only. It shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibilities stated in other Sections of the Specifications, even though these Sections are not specifically referenced. The Contractor is responsible for all information contained in this Division’s Specifications as well as for information contained in all other Divisions. 1.3
ALTERNATES A. Alternates: Refer to Bid Form and Instruction to Bidders.
1.4
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Meet or exceed all current applicable codes, ordinances and regulations for all installations. Promptly notify the Engineer, in writing, if the contract documents appear to conflict with governing codes and regulations. Contractor assumes all responsibility and costs for correcting non-complying work installed without notifying the Engineer. B. Higher quality of workmanship and materials indicated in the Contract Documents takes precedence over that allowed in referenced codes and standards. C. Perform all work in compliance with the currently adopted version of the following codes and standards for this project: Americans with Disabilities Act Municipal Water and Sewer Regulations National Electric Code NFPA 101 Life Safety Code Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations State and Local Building Codes State and Local Electrical Codes State and Local Fire Codes and Regulations State and Local Mechanical Codes State and Local Plumbing Codes State Industrial Commission Regulations State Elevator Code State Energy Code Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards AIA Guidelines
1.5
REFERENCES A. Use the Standard where referenced in the specifications by the following abbreviations: AIA - American Institute of Architects ANSI - American National Standards Institute ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM - American Society of Testing and Materials AWWA - American Water Works Association EPA - Environmental Protection Agency FM - Factory Mutual IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IES - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America ICEA - International Cable Engineers Association IRI - Industrial Risk Insurance
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau NBFU - National Bureau of Fire Underwriters NBS - National Bureau of Standards NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA - National Fire Protection Association NSC - National Safety Council OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration PDI - Plumbing and Drainage Institute SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association UL - Underwriter's Laboratories 1.6
DEFINITIONS A. Contract Documents: References to Contract Documents refers to a complete set of Drawings and Specifications for the entire Project. Drawings and Specifications are intended to supplement one another. Provide items shown on the Drawings but not mentioned in the Specifications and items mentioned but not shown the same as if they were both mentioned and shown. Bid the most expensive interpretation of a conflict between Drawings and Specifications so the conflict can be resolved with a deduct rather than an add to the contract amount. B. Dimensions: Arrangement of equipment, accessories, piping and ductwork on the Drawings is generally diagrammatic unless the Drawings include dimensions. Do not scale the Drawings. Field verify all dimensions at the site to locate new and existing work. C. Furnish: To obtain, coordinate, submit the necessary drawings, deliver to the job site in new condition ready for installation, unload and unpack, and guarantee. D. Install: To receive at the job site, store, assemble, erect, set in place, anchor, apply, finish, protect, clean, test, start-up, and make ready for Owner’s use. E. Provide: To furnish and install. F. Responsibility: Where verbs such as “furnish”, “provide”, “install”, or “use” appear in the Contract Documents, they mean, “The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish, provide, install, or use…..” unless the requirement is introduced by a phrase, sentence or heading specifically identifying the requirement as the responsibility of someone else.
1.7
SUBMITTALS A. Substitutions 1. Submit written requests to use products not listed in the Specifications to the Engineer no later than ten (10) calendar days prior to the bid opening. [Requests must be submitted by a bidding Contractor]. Submit detailed information for proposed material or equipment. 2. Accepted substitutions will be incorporated in an Addendum to the Contract Documents. 3. Contractor is responsible for dimensional differences, weights, electrical requirements and any other resulting changes, when using equipment other than that scheduled on the Drawings. Contractor is responsible for any additional costs incurred as a result of substitutions, including other Contractors and Architect/Engineer fees. 4. Material and equipment not listed in the Specifications or accepted in an Addendum will be removed and replaced at no cost or inconvenience to the Owner.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
B. List of Materials, Equipment and Sub-Contractors 1. Submit a complete list of all materials, equipment, and sub-contractors, proposed to be used on this project, to the Engineer within seven (7) calendar days of the award of contract or written notice to proceed. 2. Acceptance of items on the list are considered final, unless additional information or submissions are required by the Engineer. Unacceptable items will be rejected and resubmitted. C. Pay Request Cost Breakdown 1. Provide Schedule of Values for the utilization of submitting a “Pay Request”. Allocate appropriate share of overhead and profit to each item. Separate each item into labor and material. D. Submittals for Review 1. Submit in accordance with Division 0 and Division 1. Submit drawings to the Engineer for review within 30 calendar days after award of Contract. 2. Include project name, name of Architect, name of Engineer, contractor, sub-contractor, manufacturer, supplier and sales representative, include name, address, and phone number for the sales representative. Clearly identify section number and description of equipment submitted. Shop drawings not including all of this information will be returned without review. 3. Examine all shop drawings noting capacity, arrangement and physical dimensions. Clearly mark all relevant items on catalog data and cross-out unrelated information. Review and stamp shop drawing prior to submitting to the Engineer. 4. Submit a minimum of six (6) sets of shop drawings. The Engineer will distribute as follows: a. Engineer - One (1) copy. b. Architect - One (1) copy. c. Construction Manager - Remaining copies (two copies to be incorporated into the O&M Manuals. 5. All shop drawings must be reviewed and accepted by the Engineer prior to fabrication and installation. 6. Submittals will be reviewed with the following actions: a. NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN—Indicates the Submittal appears to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation. b. MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED—Indicates that the Submittals, after noted corrections are made, would appear to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without an increase in Contract Sum or Time. c. REJECTED—Indicates that the Submittal does not appear to conform to the specifications, and that a complete resubmittal is required. The Contractor shall not proceed with fabrication or procurement.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
d. NO ENGINEER ACTION REQUIRED—Indicates the Contractor may proceed without review of the Submittal based on provisions of the Contract Documents. 7. Allow a minimum of fourteen (14) calendar days for the Engineer to review the shop drawings. Time is from the receipt of drawings in the Engineers office until they are shipped out of the office. 8. If the Engineer rejects (Make corrections noted/Submit corrected copy, Rejected/Submit specified item) two (2) times for the same section the Engineer will be compensated for the additional reviews. Compensation will be incorporated by Change Order and deducted from the Contractor’s application for payment. Contractor is responsible for delays caused by the resubmittal process. 9. Submit shop drawings for the following equipment and systems: Section 22 05 19 22 05 23 22 05 29 22 05 53 22 07 19 22 11 16 22 11 19 22 42 00 1.8
Description Gages and Meters for Plumbing Piping General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Plumbing Piping Insulation Domestic Water Piping Domestic Water Piping Specialties Commercial Plumbing Fixtures
CAD DRAWING FILES A. The mechanical CAD drawing files prepared by Hallberg Engineering, Inc. for this project are Instruments of Service of Hallberg Engineering, Inc. for use solely with respect to this project and will not be made available to the Contractor. B. Request CAD drawing files of Architectural floor plans, elevations, sections, etc directly from the Architect.
1.9
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Initiate, maintain and supervise all safety precautions required with this work in accordance with the regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and other governing agencies. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not remove or disturb any asbestos containing materials from the project. Immediately stop work and notify the Owner if asbestos containing materials are suspected. C. Accomplish all work of cutting, removal, demolition, relocation, patching, and restoration by using only mechanics skilled in the trade required. Provide for the safety of the existing building and personnel, as well as for new construction as a result of work, procedures, operations or activities under this Contract. D. Where the work of removals, demolition, cutting and similar work involves structural considerations, consult with Engineer. Exercise extreme care to avoid damage and preserve the safety of the structure and of all personnel. Particular care must be taken where the demolition or removals occur adjacent to occupied areas.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
E. Utilize competent and qualified technical assistance to develop safe methods and techniques to accomplish the work, including temporary shoring and supports, methods of removal and other considerations. Design and place all permanent or temporary supports to carry all loads down to sound bearing. 1.10 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Inspections: 1. Before submitting a proposal on the work contemplated, examine the site of the proposed work and become thoroughly familiar with existing conditions and limitations. No extra compensation will be allowed because of misunderstanding as to the amount of work involved nor bidders lack of knowledge of existing conditions which could have been discovered or reasonably anticipated prior to bidding. 2. Mechanical equipment and systems shown on the drawings as existing, have been based on existing plans, and may not be installed as originally shown. It is the contractors responsibility to visit the site and make exact determination of the existence, location and condition of such facilities prior to submitting a bid. B. Correlation of Work: 1. Consult the drawings and specifications of Division 26 and other trades for correlating information and lay out work so that it will coordinate with other trades. Verify dimensions and conditions (i.e., finished ceiling heights, footing and foundation elevations, beam depths, etc.) with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Notify the Architect/Engineer of any conflicts that can not be resolved, in the field, by affected trades. Replacement of work due to lack of coordination and failure to verify existing conditions will be completed at no cost to the Owner. 2. Drawings may not show every rise and offset required for the work. Install piping and ductwork to accommodate the building structure and the work of other trades, with all required offsets and without extra cost to the Owner. 3. Where work must be replaced due to the failure of the Contractor to verify the conditions existing on the job, such replacement must be accomplished at no cost to the Owner. This applies to shop fabricated work as well as to work fabricated in place. 4. Throughout the course of the work, minor changes and adjustments to the installation may be requested by the Engineer. The Contractor shall make adjustments without additional cost to the Owner, where such adjustments are necessary to the proper installation and operation within the intent of the Contract Documents. This does not include work already completed. 5. Equipment outlines shown on detail plans of 1/4"=1'-0" scale or larger and/or dimensions indicated on the plans are limiting dimensions. Do not install any equipment that exceeds the equipment outlines shown or reduces indicated clearances. 6. Obtain exact location of connection to equipment, furnished by others, from the person furnishing the equipment. 7. Drawings and Specifications are complementary and what is called for in either is as binding as if called for in both. 8. Include the better quality, greater quantity or higher cost for an item or arrangement where a disagreement exists in the Drawings and Specifications. Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00-6
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1.11 WARRANTY A. Guarantee and maintain the stability of work and materials and keep same in perfect repair and condition for the period of one (1) year after the final completion of the work as evidenced by issuance of the final certificate by the Architect. B. Defects of any kind due to faulty work or materials appearing during the above mentioned period must be immediately made good by the Contractor at his own expense to the entire satisfaction of the Owner and Architect and Engineer. Include damage to the finish or the building resulting from the original defect or repairs. C. Guarantee does not apply to injuries occurring after final acceptance and due to wind, fire, violence, abuse or carelessness or other Contractors or their employees or the agents of the Owner. D. Guarantee does not apply where other guarantees for different lengths of time are specified in other Sections. 1.12 ELECTRICAL A. Magnetic starters, disconnects, and power wiring provided by the Electrical Contractor, unless otherwise specified. B. Control and interlock wiring provided by the Mechanical Contractor, unless otherwise specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER’S A. Provide only products from manufacturer’s with local representation that can provide complete coverage, parts and labor, for replacement and service of their products. Provide only equipment that will fit in the space available and be completely serviceable. Bring any conflicts to the Engineer’s attention prior to ordering the equipment.
2.2
DEMOLITION A. Remove salvageable materials and other items designated for reuse or relocation by the applicable trades and relocated to the new location. B. If the new location is not ready to receive the relocated materials, store and protect from damage until they can be incorporated into the new work. C. If the Owner is unable to forego the use of any existing items at the normal time for relocation, make all preparations for that work and then delay relocation until a time approved by the Owner or until other facilities are available to the Owner. D. Carefully remove, clean, salvage and preserve all materials indicated to be reused, or which will be needed for reuse to match existing work. E. Exercise extreme care in removals to prevent damage which would make materials unsuitable for reuse. F. Replace all damaged materials, which were shown, tagged or needed for reuse, with equivalent.
2.3
SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS TO BE STORED BY OWNER A. The Owner will mark or tag existing materials, equipment or other items he wishes to retain.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00-7
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
B. Carefully remove salvageable materials and items designated or marked to remain the property of the Owner. Protected from damage and store adjacent to the removal area as directed. C. Consult the Owner about any salvage he may wish to retain and about the salvageability of all items. Carefully remove and salvage any materials the Owner wishes to retain. D. Cleaning or restoration of the Owner's salvaged materials is not a part of this contract. E. Relocate salvage material from the area and the site to the Owner's storage. 2.4
UNSALVAGEABLE MATERIALS A. Remove all unsalvageable materials in a manner that will avoid damage to materials or equipment which will remain. Completely remove from the site as approved by and scheduled with the Owner. B. Legally dispose of all unsalvageable materials away from the site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Continuity of Service: 1. Coordinate/schedule all work with the Owner to minimize any disruptions. Confine all interruptions to the smallest possible area. Provide temporary connections if required to provide continuity of service. 2. Inspect all areas affected by the interruptions and return all automatically controlled equipment, electrically operated equipment to the same operating condition prior to the interruption. 3. No fire sprinkler or fire alarm systems are to remain inactive at the end of the work day. Assure that the fire sprinkler or fire alarm system is operational at the end of each work day. Coordinate with the Owner. B. Use of Facility: 1. Do not disturb normal use of the facility, except within the immediate construction area. Keep walks, driveways, entrances, etc. free and clear of equipment, material and debris. 2. Store all equipment and material in a place and manner that minimizes congestion and is approved by the Owner.
3.2
DEMOLITION A. The Drawings generally indicate the extent of demolition, removals, relocations and cutting. B. The Drawings are not to be construed as indicating all required work, nor indicating all conditions or details which might be encountered during progress of the work of this Contract. C. Examine all areas where demolition is to occur to determine the actual conditions and requirements.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00-8
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
D. Provide temporary bracing, shoring, and support for the execution of the work and the protection of persons and property during demolition, cutting, remodeling and all related new construction under this Contract. Perform all work with appropriate supports, protection and methods to prevent collapse, settling or damage to property or persons. Provide adequate supports for the loads to be carried, properly distributed, to lower levels or to sound bearing, if necessary. E. Provide all protective coverings and enclosures necessary to prevent damage to existing spaces and materials which are to remain. Protect openings in exterior walls and roofs to prevent damage from water and weather and to prevent excessive heat loss from the existing buildings. Maintain a watertight installation by scheduling the work and removals at the exterior according to weather conditions. Temporarily seal unfinished areas to the existing roof or to other exterior surfaces of the existing building. F. Provide dustproof temporary enclosures (including above ceilings) to separate the areas under demolition and remodeling from the remainder of the building. Also provide temporary air filters and ductwork to keep construction dust contained within the construction area. Provide temporary hinged doors in temporary enclosures where necessary. Temporary and permanent doors shall be completely sealed with tape or other suitable materials during demolition work and shall remain sealed until the dust has settled. G. Demolish and remove existing construction as shown or indicated or as required to accomplish the work. H. Where new work is to be installed in or adjacent to existing construction or when existing work is to be replaced, remove or cut the existing construction as necessary to complete the work under the Contract. I. Execute the work with care. Remove and replace existing construction that is to remain which is loosened, cracked, or otherwise damaged or defaced, or is rendered unsuitable for its intended use, as a result of the work at no additional cost to the Owner. J. Clean demolition areas and remove debris, waste and rubbish from the building at the conclusion of each day's work. Transport debris and rubbish in a manner that prevents the spread of dust. Do not store or permit debris storage at the site. Do not burn or permit the burning of debris, rubbish or waste at the site. Keep adjacent areas unencumbered and clean. Keep all construction areas essentially broom clean. K. Abandoned services may be left in place where they will be concealed inside floors or walls, providing they are disconnected from their sources and capped in place. No abandoned services, including piping, ductwork, tubing, etc., in ceilings or exposed. L. Assure no "dead end" water, sewer, or vent piping is left in the completed work. M. Based on a site inspection and the Contract Documents, the Contractor is responsible for the removal or rerouting of all anticipated mechanical work, exposed and concealed. N. Where unanticipated mechanical work is exposed during the removal of partitions, walls, floors or ceilings, the removal or rerouting of this work shall be accomplished by the Contractor under the direction of the Engineer. O. Patch or otherwise restore disturbed existing construction and surfaces. Patching or restoration shall be carried to natural breaks. Where existing construction is removed, cut or otherwise disturbed, patch all such disturbed and damaged surfaces.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00-9
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
P. Perform patching work by skilled mechanics experienced in the particular type of work involved. Conform to the standards of the Specifications where applicable, and where not specified, conform to the highest standards of the trade. Q. Patch existing construction to match existing work, but always provide new materials and accomplish the work according to current standards. Examine existing surfaces before proceeding with the work. Report all conditions to the engineer, architect or owner, where existing materials, colors and finishes cannot be matched, but do not proceed until receiving instructions. R. Repair existing construction that has been damaged as a result of the work to the extent required to match existing, undamaged construction. S. All holes created by removal of existing systems, piping, ductwork, control wiring, tubing, etc., shall be patched and fire caulked. 3.3
INSTALLATION A. Material and Workmanship 1. Provide new material and equipment, unless noted otherwise. Protect equipment and material from damage, dirt and the weather. 2. Provide the highest quality workmanship and perform all work only by skilled mechanics. Install material and equipment in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations, instructions and current standards. 3. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or workmanship not in accordance with the Contract Documents, before or after installation. B. Piping 1. All piping shall be run in the most direct and straight manner possible maintaining proper grading. 2. It is the intent of these plans and specifications that most piping be concealed. Where exposed, run as close to ceiling and/or wall as possible parallel with adjacent structural or architectural elements. 3. Do not install piping in any switchgear, transformer, elevator equipment, telephone, or electrical equipment room, unless it is a branch serving that room. 4. Do not install piping above switchboards, panelboards, control panels, motor control centers, etc. 5. Arrange work to facilitate maintenance, repair or replacement of equipment. Provide access for devices that require maintenance. For concealed devices, verify that access panels are properly located and labeled. C. Equipment: 1. Install material and equipment in accordance with the Manufacturer’s written instructions. D. Cutting and Patching:
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00-10
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1. Perform all cutting and patching necessary to work, unless specifically delegated to the General Contractor. Obtain special permission from the engineer before cutting structural members or finished material. Perform all patching in such a manner as to leave no visible trace and return the area affected to the condition of undisturbed work. Perform all patching by workers experienced, skilled, and licensed for the particular type of work involved. Inferior work will not be accepted. 2. Patch all holes left as a result of demolition of mechanical equipment and devices. 3. Drill all holes in masonry with rotary drill. Impact tools are not allowed. Core drill all holes in masonry and concrete for mechanical penetrations. Provide and dispose of all water required for core drilling. Coordinate with other trades to prevent damage from water. 4. Prevent the spread of dust, debris, and other material into adjacent areas. 5. Replace all ceiling tiles damaged during installation of work, with new tile. E. Painting: 1. Refinish all mechanical equipment damaged during shipping and/or installation to its original condition. Remove all rust; prime, and paint per manufacturer's recommendations for finish equal to original. F. Record Drawings: 1. Provide Record Drawings in accordance with the requirements of Division 0 and Division 1. 2. Maintain a complete set of Record Drawings showing all modifications to the Contract Documents. Contractor may purchase copies of the mechanical drawings from the Engineer for $15.00 per sheet. Drawings will be stamped “Record Drawings” and used only for that purpose. 3. As work progresses, record all changes or deviations from the contract drawings in a neat and legible manner as follows: a. Record exact location and elevation of underground mechanical systems including changes in direction, cleanouts etc., by reference to building lines, curbs, walks, and other permanent reference points. b. Record routing of concealed and exposed above ground mechanical systems where it varies from the Contract Documents. 4. The Engineer may recommend withholding payment if Record Drawings are not being maintained. 5. Submit Record Drawings to the Engineer for review at completion of the Work. Submit final record drawings as part of the Operation and Maintenance Manual package after the completion of the project. 3.4
TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Do not use heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems provided in this scope of work for temporary heating, ventilating and air conditioning during construction.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00-11
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3.5
PROTECTION A. Protect openings and equipment from obstruction, breakage, misuse, damage or blemishes. Protect materials and equipment immediately upon receipt at the job site or immediately after they have been removed from their shipping containers. Unless noted otherwise, keep them clean and undamaged until final acceptance of the entire Project by the Owner. When a portion of the building is occupied by the Owner before substantial completion of the entire Project, make arrangements to transfer responsibility for protection and housekeeping for the occupied portion. B. Protect pipe and equipment openings with temporary plugs or caps. Keep openings covered until permanent connections are complete. C. Contractor is responsible for any damage to mechanical equipment, materials or work until final acceptance of the entire project by the Owner.
3.6
CLEAN UP A. Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish, caused by his employees or work, at all times. Remove rubbish, tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials from and about the building, and leave work areas "broom clean" or its equivalent upon completion of the work. Clean mechanical equipment and remove temporary identification. B. In case of dispute, the Owner will remove the rubbish and charge the cost to the Contractor.
3.7
START-UP A. Before start-up, lubricate, charge, and fill systems as specified and according to Manufacturer’s instructions. B. Test plumbing systems as specified in Sections governing their installation. C. Perform testing, adjusting and balancing in accordance with that Section. D. Operate equipment and systems in all their operating modes, to verify proper operation, prior to final field observation and Owner instructions. Notify the Engineer, in writing, that all systems have been tested and are functioning and operating properly.
3.8
TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING A. Provide assistance to Test, Adjusting and Balancing Contractor by making adjustments to system and system components required for achieving design performance. B. If acceptable performance of any test is not achieved, make the necessary corrections and the test shall be repeated until acceptable performance is achieved.
3.9
FINAL FIELD OBSERVATION A. A final field observation of the mechanical systems will be required before Contract Closeout. Request a final observation by the Engineer after all systems are fully completed and operational. The Engineer will schedule a field observation and generate a list of items to be corrected or completed before Contract Closeout. B. If the Engineer is requested to make a final field observation by the Contractor, and the Engineer finds the work is not complete enough to perform that observation, the Contractor will compensate the Engineer for their time. The Contractor will then perform the necessary work to complete the project and again request a Final Field Observation.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00-12
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3.10 TRAINING A. Fully instruct the Owner's designated personnel in the operation of each mechanical system at the time it is put into service. Provide instruction using competent instructors and factory trained personnel. B. Include documentation of instructions in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. C. Obtain a written statement from the Owner that his designated personnel have been instructed. 3.11 UTILITY REBATES A. This Contractor shall secure on behalf of the Owner all utility rebates associated with the design. This shall include all submittals to the utility companies including substantiation where required and making all necessary arrangements on behalf of the Owner. 3.12 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Submit to the Engineer two (2) Operating and Maintenance manuals. Submit in portfolio form neatly edited with similar equipment grouped, tabbed and indexed. Provide printed or typewritten materials. Provide the following in each manual: 1. Shop drawings, approved manufacturer's bulletins, and other appropriate data from specific manufacturer of each piece of equipment furnished and/or installed. Shop drawings, manufacturer's bulletin, and other data shall be appropriate marked to reflect the "as-built" condition. Cross out or delete all information shown on shop drawings or literature not applying to this specific project. 2. Copies of manufacturer’s warranties 3. Operating instruction for equipment. 4. Wiring and installation instructions for equipment. 5. Recommended maintenance schedules and procedures for equipment. 6. Recommended trouble shooting procedures for equipment. 7. Equipment parts list. 8. Settings/adjustments/calibrations for systems as required. 9. Local equipment suppliers/reps names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 10. Equipment manufacturers names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 11. Sub-contractors names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 12. Test reports. 13. Certifications. 14. Test and balance reports. 15. System validation reports. 16. Statement from Contractor that all incomplete items noted in Engineer’s Final Field Observation Report have been completed. 17. Statement from Owner confirming completion of Training. 18. Refer to individual Sections in Division 22 for additional requirements. Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00-13
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
B. Record Drawings: Submit Record Drawings. C. Extra Materials: Refer to individual Specification Sections for extra materials to be provided to the Owner. D. System Startup: Refer to individual Specification Sections for system startup requirements. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 00-14
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 22 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Valves for plumbing piping systems. 1. Ball. 2. Check. 3. Drain.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing. B. Section 22 05 53 – Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. C. Section 22 11 16 – Domestic Water Piping.
1.3
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide data on valves, and accessories. information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
1.4
Provide manufacturers catalog
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit under provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC IX and applicable state labor regulations. C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME SEC IX.
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with State and Municipal plumbing code.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
1.8
EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Provide two repacking kits for each size valve.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 23-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
BALL VALVES - (150 PSIG) A. Up to and including 2 inches: 1. Manufacturer: Apollo 77-100/77-200 Series, or equivalent by: a. Hammond. b. Kitz. c. Milwaukee. d. Nibco. e. Watts. f. Substitutions: Refer to Section 22 05 00. 2. Construction: Class 150, 600 psig wog, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, full port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, brass blow-out proof stem, lever handle [with balancing stops], solder or threaded ends [with union]. Extended stems for use on insulated pipe.
2.2
SWING CHECK VALVES - (150 PSIG) A. Up To and Including 2 1/2 inches: 1. Manufacturers: Stockham Model B-309/B-319, or equivalent by: a. Hammond. b. Kitz. c. Milwaukee. d. Nibco. e. Watts Regulator. f. Substitutions: Refer to Section 22 05 00. 2. Class 125, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, solder or threaded ends.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verification of existing conditions before starting work.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. C. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
3.3
APPLICATION A. Use ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 23-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
B. Use 3/4 inch ball valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. Pipe to nearest floor drain. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 23-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 22 05 29 HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and equipment hangers and supports. B. Sleeves and seals. C. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing. B. Section 22 07 19 – Plumbing Piping Insulation C. Section 22 11 16 – Domestic Water Piping.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with locations and details of all types of hangers. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. C. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: components.
1.5
Indicate special procedures and assembly of
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for support of plumbing piping.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Anvil. 2. B-Line Systems. 3. Michigan. 4. Tolco. 5. Substitutions: None. B. Plumbing Piping - Water: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, and split ring.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 29-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook. 6. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 7. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 8. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 2.2
HANGER RODS A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. Stainless steel in areas of high humidity.
2.3
INSERTS A. Manufacturers: Anvil Figure 282 (8 inches and smaller). Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1. B-Line Systems. 2. Michigan. B. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
2.4
FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage thick galvanized steel. C. Lead Flashing: 1. Waterproofing: 5 lb/sq ft sheet lead 2. Soundproofing: 1 lb/sq ft sheet lead. D. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing. E. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.
2.5
SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel. C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed. D. Sleeves for Pipes in building walls below grade: modular wall seal. E. Stuffing and Fire stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible. F. Sealant: Acrylic.
2.6
FIRESTOP SYSTEMS A. Manufacturer:
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 29-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1. 3M (Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co.). 2. Hilti. 3. Substitutions: None. B. Firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gasses, and maintain original fireresistance rating of construction assembly. C. Certificate of conformance for through-penetration requirements of ASTM E814 and UL1479. D. Systems or devices listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory under category XHCR (firestop devices) and XHEZ (firestop systems) may be used, providing that they conform to the construction type, penetrant type, annular space requirements and fire rating involved in each separate instance, and that the system in symmetrical for wall applications. E. Accessories include, but are not limited to; permanent forming/damming/backing materials, temporary forming materials, substrate primers, and collars and steel sleeves. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.2
INSERTS A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.
3.3
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. I. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. J. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 29-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
K. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. L. Hangers for insulated pipe shall be large enough to encompass the insulation and the metal protective shield, except that hangers may be applied directly to the pipe for domestic hot water piping. M. Support piping from building structure. Do not support piping from other mechanical or electrical components. N. Do not support piping with wire or metal stripping hangers. 3.4
FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.
3.5
SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. C. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Sleeves in mechanical room floor slabs shall extend 6 inches above finished floor level. Calk sleeves. D. Where piping penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe and adjacent work with stuffing insulation and caulk air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. E. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
3.6
FIRE STOP SYSTEMS A. Provide firestop systems for pipe through-penetrations of the following fire-resistance-rated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items: floor and ceilings, walls and partitions, smoke barriers, and construction enclosed compartmentalized areas. B. Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
3.7
SCHEDULES A. Piping: PIPE SIZE Inches
MAX. HANGER SPACING Feet
1/2 to 1-1/4 1-1/2 to 2 2-1/2 to 3
6 8 10 END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 29-4
HANGER ROD DIAMETER Inches 3/8 3/8 1/2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Tags. B. Pipe Markers. C. Ceiling Tacks.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding proposed for plumbing identification. C. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. D. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. E. Samples: Submit two tags, 1-1/2 inches in size. F. Samples: Submit two labels, 1.9 x 0.75 inches in size. G. Manufacturer's Instructions: installation.
Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and
H. Samples: Submit two (2) signs each, 9” x 7” and 6” x 2” size. 1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 22 05 00: Procedures for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: numbers.
Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag
C. Valve Tag Chart. 1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI/OSHA.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
TAGS A. Metal Tags:
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 53-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1. Manufacturers: a. Seton. b. Brady. c. Substitutions: None. 2. Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter with smooth edges. B. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list plastic laminated. 2.2
PIPE MARKERS A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Pipe Markers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brady. b. Seton. c. Substitutions: None. 2. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. No tape or adhesive necessary. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.
2.3
CEILING TACKS. A. Manufacturer: Moore. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1. Substitutions: Refer to Section 22 05 00. C. Description: Steel with ¾ inch diameter color coded head. D. Color code as follows: 1. Plumbing (valves): Green.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting. B. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. C. Install labels with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels. D. Install tags and signs using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location. E. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. F. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 53-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
G. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic. H. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers . Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. I. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment. 3.3
SCHEDULES A. Identification: 1. Piping: Use pipe service description and color schemes that are standard to the manufacturer. 2. Equipment: Use nomenclature as noted on the drawings. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 53-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing. B. Section 22 05 53 – Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. C. Section 22 11 16 – Domestic Water Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation. B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. NAIMA National Insulation Standards. D. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to maximum flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723. B. Conform to ASTM Standards for “k” value, moisture vapor transmission, maximum moisture absorption, jacket, insulating cement, and adhesive.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 07 19-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1.8
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
GLASS FIBER A. Manufacturer: Johns Manville Micro-Lok AP-T Plus and AP. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: 1. CertainTeed. 2. Knauf. 3. Owens-Corning. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 22 05 00. C. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible. 1. ‘K’ value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: 0.02 perm-inches. E. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. F. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: 1. Compatible with insulation. 2. Hydraulic setting on mineral wool. G. Fibrous Glass Fabric: 1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight. 2. Blanket: 1.0 ob/cu ft density. 3. Weave: 10x10. H. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish: 1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight. 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color. I. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic: 1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color. J. Outdoor Breather Mastic: 1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 07 19-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
K. Insulating Cement. 2.2
JACKETS A. Canvas Jacket: UL listed. 1. Fabric: 6 oz/sq yd, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive. 2. Lagging Adhesive: a. Compatible with insulation.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. B. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. C. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. D. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers. E. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. F. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions at equipment. G. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. 3. Insulation thickness on runouts, 2 inch and smaller, to individual terminal units may be reduced to 1/2 inch, within 12 feet of the unit. H. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 07 19-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. I. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 22 05 29. J. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces less than 10 feet above finished floor: Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting. 3.3
SCHEDULES A. Plumbing Systems: 1. Domestic Hot Water Supply and Recirculation a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: 2 inch and less, 2-1/2 inch and larger. 2) Thickness: 1 inch, 1-1/2 inch. 2. Domestic Cold Water: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: all sizes. 2) Thickness: 1 inch. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 07 19-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, pipe fittings, connections, and testing for piping systems. 1. Domestic water.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing. B. Section 22 05 23 – General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping. C. Section 22 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. D. Section 22 05 53 – Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. E. Section 22 07 19 – Plumbing Piping Insulation.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. B. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, and accessories. manufacturers catalog information.
1.5
Provide
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit under provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of piping. C. Piping system cleaning reports. D. Piping system testing reports.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing of all piping systems. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC IX and applicable state labor regulations. C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME SEC IX. D. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification, potable water certification, water pressure rating.
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with State and Municipal plumbing code. B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 11 16-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices. 1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
WATER PIPING (ABOVE GRADE) A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn, ½” to 4”. 1. Fittings: Cast copper alloy or wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: 95/5 solder, except joints shall be brazed at expansion loops.
2.2
FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Pipe Size 3 inches and Under: 1. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Pipe Size Over 1 inch: 1. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verification of existing conditions before starting work.
3.2
PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.3
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Refer to Section 22 05 16.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 11 16-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 05 29. H. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. I. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. J. Install water piping to ASME B31.9. K. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. L. Inserts: Refer to Section 22 05 29. M. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Refer to Section 22 05 29. 3.4
APPLICATION A. Provide unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. B. Provide brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe. C. Provide flow controls in all branches of water recirculating systems.
3.5
ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Slope water piping minimum 0.25 percent and arrange to drain at low points.
3.6
TESTING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS A. Provide final test with fixtures in place with 1 inch water column air pressure. B. Test domestic water piping, tanks, etc. with hydraulic pressure of 125 psig for a period of 2 hours.
3.7
DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. B. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 5 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 11 16-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 22 11 19 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Backflow preventers. B. Strainers.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing. B. Section 22 11 16 – Domestic Water Piping. C. Section 22 42 00 – Commercial Plumbing Fixtures.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. B. ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventers with Immediate Atmospheric Vent. C. ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle. D. ASSE 1019 - Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-Backflow Types. E. AWWA C506 - Backflow Prevention Devices - Reduced Pressure Principle and Double Check Valve Types.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under the provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: assembly and support requirements.
1.5
Indicate
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 22 05 00 - Warranties. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of all water piping specialties. C. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documeted experience.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 11 19-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Watts Model. b. Substitutions: None. 2. ANSI/ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve that opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks.
2.2
STRAINERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong. 2. Hayward. 3. Metra-Flex. 4. Mueller. 5. Sarco. 6. Titan. 7. Watts. 8. Substitutions: None. B. Size 2 inch and Under: Threaded brass body for 200 psig wog, Y pattern with 20 mesh stainless steel perforated screen. Application: Bronze body with copper or brass pipe.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibs. C. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 11 19-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, pipe fittings, connections, and testing for system.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing. B. Section 22 05 23 – General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping. C. Section 22 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. D. Section 22 07 19 – Plumbing Piping Insulation.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. B. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. C. ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). D. ASTM C564 – Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. E. ASTM C1540 – Heavy Duty Shielded Couplings for Hubless Cast Iron. F. AWWA C151 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids. G. CISPI 301 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems. H. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, and accessories. manufacturers catalog information.
1.5
Provide
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit under provisions of Section 22 05 00. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of piping. C. Piping system cleaning reports. D. Piping system testing reports.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing of all piping systems. B. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification, water pressure rating.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 13 16-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with State and Municipal plumbing code.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING (BELOW GRADE) A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, compression type with neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Heavy duty joints: Neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies conforming to ASTM C1540. a. Manufacturers: Husky SD 4000, Clamp-All 125 or MG Coupling. C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, Schedule 40. 1. Fittings: PVS, Schedule 40. 2. Joints: Solvent weld with solvent cement. 3. Install per ASTM D2321 and Minnesota Plumbing Code.
2.2
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING (ABOVE GRADE) A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Neoprene gasket system or lead and oakum. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Heavy duty joints: Neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies conforming to ASTM C1540. a. Manufacturers: Husky SD 4000, Clamp-All 125 or MG Coupling.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verification of existing conditions before starting work.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 13 16-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3.2
PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges.
3.3
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 05 29. G. Provide access where fittings are not exposed. H. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. J. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. K. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. L. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. M. Inserts: Refer to Section 22 05 29. N. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Refer to Section 22 05 29.
3.4
ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/4 inch per foot (smaller than 3 inch pipe), and 1/8 inch per foot (3 inches and larger) minimum. Maintain gradients.
3.5
TESTING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS A. Test sanitary and vent piping with air pressure of 5 psig for a period of 15 minutes. B. Provide final test with fixtures in place with 1 inch water column air pressure. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 13 16-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 22 42 00 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Water closets. B. Lavatories.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing. B. Section 22 11 16 – Domestic Water Piping. C. Section 22 13 16 – Sanitary Waste and vent Piping.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. B. ANSI Z124.1 - Gel-Coated Glass-Fiber Reinforced Polyester Resin Bathtub Units. C. ANSI Z124.2 - Gel-Coated Glass-Fiber Reinforced Polyester Resin Shower Receptor and Shower Stall Units. D. ASME A112.6.1 - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use. E. ASME A112.18.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings. F. ASME A112.19.1 - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures. G. ASME A112.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures. H. ASME A112.19.5 - Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks, and Urinals. I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 22 05 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods and procedures.
1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 22 05 00 - Project Closeout. B. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists. C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 42 00-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
B. Fixtures shall be free from flaws and blemishes, with finished surfaces clear, smooth and bright. Surfaces coming into contact with walls, floors or surfaces of other fixtures shall be ground true. 1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use.
1.9
WARRANTY A. Section 22 05 00 - Warranties.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A. Water closets; American Standard, Kohler, Crane. 1. Flush valves; Sloan ‘Royal’. 2. Seats; Church. 3. Carriers; Josam. B. Lavatories; American Standard, Kohler, Crane. 1. Faucets; Chicago Faucets. 2. Carriers; Josam. 3. Insulation kits; Plumberex Specialty Products. 4. Faucets; Chicago Faucet. C. Substitutions; None.
2.2
WATER CLOSETS A. P-1 Water Closet - ADA: American Standard "Afwall EL", No. 2257.103, low consumption 1.6 gpf, wall mounted, vitreous china, elongated bowl, siphon jet, 1-1/2 inch top spud inlet. Refer to Architectural plans for mounting height. 1. Flush Valve: Sloan Royal No. 111, low consumption 1.6 gpf. 2. Seat: Church No. 9500, solid plastic, extra heavy duty, 100% polypropylene, white open front, elongated, combination stainless steel self-sustaining check hinge, stainless steel nut, washers and accessories, less cover. 3. Carrier: Commercial type, of appropriate configuration.
2.3
LAVATORIES A. P-2 Lavatory - ADA: American Standard "Lucerne", No. 0355.012, 20-1/2 inches x 18-1/4 inches, vitreous china, wall hung lavatory with concealed arms type carrier. Refer to Architectural plans for mounting height.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 42 00-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1. Trim: Chicago Faucets, No. 802-317CP, 4 inch chrome plated centerset faucet, 4 inch integral spout, E12 softflo aerator, 317 wristblade handles, quaturn operating cartridges. American Standard No. 7723.018, 4-1/2 inch offset 1-1/4 inch grid drain for wheelchair access. 2. Provide flexible vinyl insulation system kit, Plumberex Model No. X4444 white. 3. Carrier: Josam Series 17100, floor mounted, with concealed arms. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. B. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks.
3.2
PREPARATION A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in Plumbing Fixture Schedule on Drawings. B. Provide brackets, braces or reinforcing angles as required in all partitions not sufficient in themselves to support plumbing fixtures or other wall-hung equipment.
3.3
INSTALLATION A. Connect fixture waste to waste line with iron ferrule and threaded pipe, other than water closets and trap standard fixtures. B. Install each fixture with chrome plated, 17 gauge tubing trap with cleanout, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. C. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons. D. Install components level, plumb and secure. E. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts. F. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant, color to match fixture. G. Mount lever control for handicapped water closets on wide side of toilet stall. H. Insulate waste and supplies for all handicapped fixtures. I. Connect floor mounted water closets with cast iron floor flange with ring putty or gaskets. J. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended to hold fixture in place. K. Provide carriers with full baffle plates for back-to-back blowout water closets. L. Provide stop and waste valve on branch piping to all wall hydrants. M. Provide locking style stop valves in branch lines serving safety equipment.
3.4
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 42 00-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3.5
ADJUSTING A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.
3.6
CLEANING A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
3.7
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit use of fixtures during construction.
3.8
SCHEDULES A. Fixture Heights: Refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule on Drawings. B. Fixture Rough-In: Refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule on Drawings. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 42 00-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
WORK INCLUDES A. Furnishing labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation of new and remodel of existing heating, ventilating, and dehumidification shown on the Drawings and specified in Division 23. B. All work shall be complete and shall be left in operating condition. C. Include all parts and labor, which are incidental and necessary for a complete and operable installation even though not specifically mentioned in the Contract Documents. D. Some equipment and materials provided under Division 21, 22, 23, 25 or Division 26 may require composite work crews because of trade jurisdiction. Where this occurs, include in the bid this portion of the composite crew labor costs. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to review Division 21, 22, 23, 25 and Division 26 Contract Documents to determine where these composite crews are required. E. Obtain all temporary and permanent permits and licenses required in connection with this Division’s work. Pay all fees and expenses required for such permits and licenses. F. Request inspections as required by regulating agencies and/or regulations. Pay all charges for inspections by regulating agencies of installations of plans specifications. G. Include State and Local sales taxes in the bid. Keep accurate records of these taxes and furnish such records to the Owner upon request. H. Provide the Owner with a certificate of final inspection and approval by enforcement authorities. I. Furnish labor, equipment, and materials required for cutting, demolition, removal, patching, and restoration work necessary to accomplish and complete all demolition, including any relocation or reuse of existing materials, equipment, systems, as well as the disposition of salvaged materials or debris.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. General Provisions are specifically applicable to all Division 23 Sections. B. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to all work of Division 23 and are an integral part of this Section. Where the conditions specified are at variance with other Divisions, Section 23 05 00 takes precedence. Section 23 05 00 specifies conditions, procedures, equipment and material particular to the mechanical work and applies to all mechanical work of the Contract Documents. C. Division 0 and 1 and Section 23 05 00 and all Addenda form a part of and apply to all contracts or sub-contracts relating to Division 23 work. Copy these documents to all Sub-contractors receiving other Sections of Division 23.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
D. Where a Specification Section refers to other Sections under the Article on “Related Sections”, this is done for Contractor’s convenience only. It shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibilities stated in other Sections of the Specifications, even though these Sections are not specifically referenced. The Contractor is responsible for all information contained in this Division’s Specifications as well as for information contained in all other Divisions. 1.3
WORK SEQUENCE A. Install work in phases during the construction period coordinate mechanical schedule and operations with Construction Manager:
1.4
ALTERNATES A. Alternates: Refer to Bid Form and Instruction to Bidders.
1.5
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Meet or exceed all current applicable codes, ordinances and regulations for all installations. Promptly notify the Engineer, in writing, if the contract documents appear to conflict with governing codes and regulations. Contractor assumes all responsibility and costs for correcting non-complying work installed without notifying the Engineer. B. Higher quality of workmanship and materials indicated in the Contract Documents takes precedence over that allowed in referenced codes and standards. C. Perform all work in compliance with the currently adopted version of the following codes and standards for this project: Americans with Disabilities Act National Electric Code NFPA 90A Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems NFPA 101 Life Safety Code Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations State and Local Building Codes State and Local Electrical Codes State and Local Fire Codes and Regulations State and Local Mechanical Codes State Industrial Commission Regulations State Energy Code Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards AIA Guidelines
1.6
REFERENCES A. Use the Standard where referenced in the specifications by the following abbreviations: AABC - Associated Air Balance Council ADC - Air Diffusion Council AIA - American Institute of Architects AMCA - Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. ANSI - American National Standards Institute ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM - American Society of Testing and Materials EPA - Environmental Protection Agency FM - Factory Mutual
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
IRI - Industrial Risk Insurance NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau NBFU - National Bureau of Fire Underwriters NBS - National Bureau of Standards NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA - National Fire Protection Association NSC - National Safety Council OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association UL - Underwriter's Laboratories 1.7
DEFINITIONS A. Contract Documents: References to Contract Documents refers to a complete set of Drawings and Specifications for the entire Project. Drawings and Specifications are intended to supplement one another. Provide items shown on the Drawings but not mentioned in the Specifications and items mentioned but not shown the same as if they were both mentioned and shown. Bid the most expensive interpretation of a conflict between Drawings and Specifications so the conflict can be resolved with a deduct rather than an add to the contract amount. B. Dimensions: Arrangement of equipment, accessories, piping and ductwork on the Drawings is generally diagrammatic unless the Drawings include dimensions. Do not scale the Drawings. Field verify all dimensions at the site to locate new and existing work. C. Furnish: To obtain, coordinate, submit the necessary drawings, deliver to the job site in new condition ready for installation, unload and unpack, and guarantee. D. Install: To receive at the job site, store, assemble, erect, set in place, anchor, apply, finish, protect, clean, test, start-up, and make ready for Owner’s use. E. Provide: To furnish and install. F. Responsibility: Where verbs such as “furnish”, “provide”, “install”, or “use” appear in the Contract Documents, they mean, “The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish, provide, install, or use…..” unless the requirement is introduced by a phrase, sentence or heading specifically identifying the requirement as the responsibility of someone else.
1.8
SUBMITTALS A. Substitutions 1. Submit written requests to use products not listed in the Specifications to the Engineer no later than ten (10) calendar days prior to the bid opening. Submit detailed information for proposed material or equipment. 2. Accepted substitutions will be incorporated in an Addendum to the Contract Documents. 3. Contractor is responsible for dimensional differences, weights, electrical requirements and any other resulting changes, when using equipment other than that scheduled on the Drawings. Contractor is responsible for any additional costs incurred as a result of substitutions, including other Contractors and Architect/Engineer fees. 4. Material and equipment not listed in the Specifications or accepted in an Addendum will be removed and replaced at no cost or inconvenience to the Owner. B. List of Materials, Equipment and Sub-Contractors
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1. Submit a complete list of all materials, equipment, and sub-contractors, proposed to be used on this project, to the Engineer within seven (7) calendar days of the award of contract or written notice to proceed. 2. Acceptance of items on the list is considered final, unless additional information or submissions are required by the Engineer. Unacceptable items will be rejected and resubmitted. C. Pay Request Cost Breakdown 1. Provide Schedule of Values for the utilization of submitting a “Pay Request”. Allocate appropriate share of overhead and profit to each item. Separate each item into labor and material. D. Submittals for Review 1. Submit in accordance with Division 0 and Division 1. Submit drawings to the Engineer for review within 30 calendar days after award of Contract. 2. Include project name, name of Architect, and name of Engineer, contractor, sub-contractor, manufacturer, supplier and sales representative; include name, address, and phone number for the sales representative. Clearly identify section number and description of equipment submitted. Shop drawings not including all of this information will be returned without review. 3. Examine all shop drawings noting capacity, arrangement and physical dimensions. Clearly mark all relevant items on catalog data and cross-out unrelated information. Review and stamp shop drawing prior to submitting to the Engineer. 4. Submit a minimum of six (6) sets of shop drawings. The Engineer will distribute as follows: a. Engineer - One (1) copy. b. Architect - One (1) copy. c. Construction Manager - Remaining copies (two copies to be incorporated into the O&M Manuals. 5. All shop drawings must be reviewed and accepted by the Engineer prior to fabrication and installation. 6. Submittals will be reviewed with the following actions: a. NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN—Indicates the Submittal appears to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation. b. MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED—Indicates that the Submittals, after noted corrections are made, would appear to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without an increase in Contract Sum or Time. c. REJECTED—Indicates that the Submittal does not appear to conform to the specifications, and that a complete resubmittal is required. The Contractor shall not proceed with fabrication or procurement. d. NO ENGINEER ACTION REQUIRED—Indicates the Contractor may proceed without review of the Submittal based on provisions of the Contract Documents. Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
7. Allow a minimum of fourteen (14) calendar days for the Engineer to review the shop drawings. Time is from the receipt of drawings in the Engineers office until they are shipped out of the office. 8. If the Engineer rejects (Make corrections noted/Submit corrected copy, Rejected/Submit specified item) two (2) times for the same section the Engineer will be compensated for the additional reviews. Compensation will be incorporated by Change Order and deducted from the Contractor’s application for payment. Contractor is responsible for delays caused by the resubmittal process. 9. Submit shop drawings for the following equipment and systems: Section 23 05 13 23 05 16 23 05 19 23 05 23 23 05 29 23 05 53 23 05 93 23 07 13 23 07 19 23 20 13 23 20 19 23 21 23 23 25 31 23 33 13 23 34 13 23 37 13 1.9
Description Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Equipment Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping Hanger and Supports for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment Identification for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC Duct Insulation HVAC Piping Insulation Hydronic Piping Hydronic Specialties Hydronic Pumps Water Treatment for Heating Systems Ductwork Accessories Fans Air Outlets and Inlets
CAD DRAWING FILES A. The mechanical CAD drawing files prepared by Hallberg Engineering, Inc. for this project are Instruments of Service of Hallberg Engineering, Inc. for use solely with respect to this project and will not be made available to the Contractor. B. Request CAD drawing files of Architectural floor plans, elevations, sections, etc directly from the Architect.
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Initiate, maintain and supervise all safety precautions required with this work in accordance with the regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and other governing agencies. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not remove or disturb any asbestos containing materials from the project. Immediately stop work and notify the Owner if asbestos containing materials are suspected.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. Accomplish all work of cutting, removal, demolition, relocation, patching, and restoration by using only mechanics skilled in the trade required. Provide for the safety of the existing building and personnel, as well as for new construction as a result of work, procedures, operations or activities under this Contract. D. Where the work of removals, demolition, cutting and similar work involves structural considerations, consult with Engineer. Exercise extreme care to avoid damage and preserve the safety of the structure and of all personnel. Particular care must be taken where the demolition or removals occur adjacent to occupied areas. E. Utilize competent and qualified technical assistance to develop safe methods and techniques to accomplish the work, including temporary shoring and supports, methods of removal and other considerations. Design and place all permanent or temporary supports to carry all loads down to sound bearing. 1.11 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Inspections: 1. Before submitting a proposal on the work contemplated, examine the site of the proposed work and become thoroughly familiar with existing conditions and limitations. No extra compensation will be allowed because of misunderstanding as to the amount of work involved or bidders lack of knowledge of existing conditions which could have been discovered or reasonably anticipated prior to bidding. 2. Mechanical equipment and systems shown on the drawings as existing, have been based on existing plans, and may not be installed as originally shown. It is the contractors responsibility to visit the site and make exact determination of the existence, location and condition of such facilities prior to submitting a bid. B. Correlation of Work: 1. Consult the drawings and specifications of Division 26 and other trades for correlating information and lay out work so that it will coordinate with other trades. Verify dimensions and conditions (i.e., finished ceiling heights, footing and foundation elevations, beam depths, etc.) with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Notify the Architect/Engineer of any conflicts that can not be resolved, in the field, by affected trades. Replacement of work due to lack of coordination and failure to verify existing conditions will be completed at no cost to the Owner. 2. Drawings may not show every rise and offset required for the work. Install piping and ductwork to accommodate the building structure and the work of other trades, with all required offsets and without extra cost to the Owner. 3. Where work must be replaced due to the failure of the Contractor to verify the conditions existing on the job, such replacement must be accomplished at no cost to the Owner. This applies to shop fabricated work as well as to work fabricated in place. 4. Throughout the course of the work, minor changes and adjustments to the installation may be requested by the Engineer. The Contractor shall make adjustments without additional cost to the Owner, where such adjustments are necessary to the proper installation and operation within the intent of the Contract Documents. This does not include work already completed.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00-6
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
5. Equipment outlines shown on detail plans of 1/4"=1'-0" scale or larger and/or dimensions indicated on the plans are limiting dimensions. Do not install any equipment that exceeds the equipment outlines shown or reduces indicated clearances. 6. Obtain exact location of connection to equipment, furnished by others, from the person furnishing the equipment. 7. Drawings and Specifications are complementary and what is called for in either is as binding as if called for in both. 8. Include the better quality, greater quantity or higher cost for an item or arrangement where a disagreement exists in the Drawings and Specifications. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Guarantee and maintain the stability of work and materials and keep same in perfect repair and condition for the period of one (1) year after the final completion of the work as evidenced by issuance of the final certificate by the Architect. B. Defects of any kind due to faulty work or materials appearing during the above mentioned period must be immediately made good by the Contractor at his own expense to the entire satisfaction of the Owner and Architect and Engineer. Include damage to the finish or the building resulting from the original defect or repairs. C. Guarantee does not apply to injuries occurring after final acceptance and due to wind, fire, violence, abuse or carelessness or other Contractors or their employees or the agents of the Owner. D. Guarantee does not apply where other guarantees for different lengths of time are specified in other Sections. 1.13 ELECTRICAL A. Magnetic starters, disconnects, and power wiring provided by the Electrical Contractor, unless otherwise specified. B. Control and interlock wiring provided by the Mechanical Contractor, unless otherwise specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER’S A. Provide only products from manufacturers with local representation that can provide complete coverage, parts and labor, for replacement and service of their products. Provide only equipment that will fit in the space available and be completely serviceable. Bring any conflicts to the Engineer’s attention prior to ordering the equipment.
2.2
DEMOLITION A. Remove salvageable materials and other items designated for reuse or relocation by the applicable trades and relocated to the new location. B. If the new location is not ready to receive the relocated materials, store and protect from damage until they can be incorporated into the new work.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00-7
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. If the Owner is unable to forego the use of any existing items at the normal time for relocation, make all preparations for that work and then delay relocation until a time approved by the Owner or until other facilities are available to the Owner. D. Carefully remove, clean, salvage and preserve all materials indicated to be reused, or which will be needed for reuse to match existing work. E. Exercise extreme care in removals to prevent damage which would make materials unsuitable for reuse. F. Replace all damaged materials, which were shown, tagged or needed for reuse, with equivalent. 2.3
SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS TO BE STORED BY OWNER A. The Owner will mark or tag existing materials, equipment or other items he wishes to retain. B. Carefully remove salvageable materials and items designated or marked to remain the property of the Owner. Protect from damage and store adjacent to the removal area as directed. C. Consult the Owner about any salvage he may wish to retain and about the salvageability of all items. Carefully remove and salvage any materials the Owner wishes to retain. D. Cleaning or restoration of the Owner's salvaged materials is not a part of this contract. E. Relocate salvage material from the area and the site to the Owner's storage.
2.4
UNSALVAGEABLE MATERIALS A. Remove all unsalvageable materials in a manner that will avoid damage to materials or equipment which will remain. Completely remove from the site as approved by and scheduled with the Owner. B. Legally dispose of all unsalvageable materials away from the site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Continuity of Service: 1. Coordinate/schedule all work with the Owner to minimize any disruptions. Confine all interruptions to the smallest possible area. Provide temporary connections if required to provide continuity of service. 2. Inspect all areas affected by the interruptions and return all automatically controlled equipment, electrically operated equipment to the same operating condition prior to the interruption. B. Use of Facility: 1. Do not disturb normal use of the facility, except within the immediate construction area. Keep walks, driveways, entrances, etc. free and clear of equipment, material and debris. 2. Store all equipment and material in a place and manner that minimizes congestion and is approved by the Owner.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00-8
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3.2
DEMOLITION A. The Drawings generally indicate the extent of demolition, removals, relocations and cutting. B. The Drawings are not to be construed as indicating all required work, or indicating all conditions or details which might be encountered during progress of the work of this Contract. C. Examine all areas where demolition is to occur to determine the actual conditions and requirements. D. Provide temporary bracing, shoring, and support for the execution of the work and the protection of persons and property during demolition, cutting, remodeling and all related new construction under this Contract. Perform all work with appropriate supports, protection and methods to prevent collapse, settling or damage to property or persons. Provide adequate supports for the loads to be carried, properly distributed, to lower levels or to sound bearing, if necessary. E. Provide all protective coverings and enclosures necessary to prevent damage to existing spaces and materials which are to remain. Protect openings in exterior walls and roofs to prevent damage from water and weather and to prevent excessive heat loss from the existing buildings. Maintain a watertight installation by scheduling the work and removals at the exterior according to weather conditions. Temporarily seal unfinished areas to the existing roof or to other exterior surfaces of the existing building. F. Provide dustproof temporary enclosures (including above ceilings) to separate the areas under demolition and remodeling from the remainder of the building. Also provide temporary air filters and ductwork to keep construction dust contained within the construction area. Provide temporary hinged doors in temporary enclosures where necessary. Temporary and permanent doors shall be completely sealed with tape or other suitable materials during demolition work and shall remain sealed until the dust has settled. G. Demolish and remove existing construction as shown or indicated or as required to accomplish the work. H. Where new work is to be installed in or adjacent to existing construction or when existing work is to be replaced, remove or cut the existing construction as necessary to complete the work under the Contract. I. Execute the work with care. Remove and replace existing construction that is to remain which is loosened, cracked, or otherwise damaged or defaced, or is rendered unsuitable for its intended use, as a result of the work at no additional cost to the Owner. J. Clean demolition areas and remove debris, waste and rubbish from the building at the conclusion of each day's work. Transport debris and rubbish in a manner that prevents the spread of dust. Do not store or permit debris storage at the site. Do not burn or permit the burning of debris, rubbish or waste at the site. Keep adjacent areas unencumbered and clean. Keep all construction areas essentially broom clean. K. No abandoned services, including piping, ductwork, tubing, etc., in ceilings or exposed. L. Assure no "dead end" water piping is left in the completed work. M. Based on a site inspection and the Contract Documents, the Contractor is responsible for the removal or rerouting of all anticipated mechanical work, exposed and concealed.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00-9
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
N. Where unanticipated mechanical work is exposed during the removal of partitions, walls, floors or ceilings, the removal or rerouting of this work shall be accomplished by the Contractor under the direction of the Engineer. O. Patch or otherwise restore disturbed existing construction and surfaces. Patching or restoration shall be carried to natural breaks. Where existing construction is removed, cut or otherwise disturbed, patch all such disturbed and damaged surfaces. P. Perform patching work by skilled mechanics experienced in the particular type of work involved. Conform to the standards of the Specifications where applicable, and where not specified, conform to the highest standards of the trade. Q. Patch existing construction to match existing work, but always provide new materials and accomplish the work according to current standards. Examine existing surfaces before proceeding with the work. Report all conditions to the engineer, architect or owner, where existing materials, colors and finishes cannot be matched, but do not proceed until receiving instructions. R. Repair existing construction that has been damaged as a result of the work to the extent required to match existing, undamaged construction. S. All holes created by removal of existing systems, piping, ductwork, control wiring, tubing, etc., shall be patched and fire caulked. 3.3
INSTALLATION A. Material and Workmanship 1. Provide new material and equipment, unless noted otherwise. Protect equipment and material from damage, dirt and the weather. 2. Provide the highest quality workmanship and perform all work only by skilled mechanics. Install material and equipment in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations, instructions and current standards. 3. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or workmanship not in accordance with the Contract Documents, before or after installation. B. Piping and Ductwork 1. All piping and ductwork shall be run in the most direct and straight manner possible maintaining proper grading. 2. It is the intent of these plans and specifications that most piping and ductwork be concealed. Where exposed, run as close to ceiling and/or wall as possible parallel with adjacent structural or architectural elements. 3. Do not install piping or ductwork in any switchgear, transformer, elevator equipment, telephone, or electrical equipment room, unless it is a branch serving that room. 4. Do not install piping or ductwork above switchboards, panelboards, control panels, motor control centers, etc. 5. Arrange work to facilitate maintenance, repair or replacement of equipment. Provide access for devices that require maintenance. For concealed devices, verify that access panels are properly located and labeled.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00-10
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. Equipment: 1. Install material and equipment in accordance with the Manufacturer’s written instructions. D. Cutting and Patching: 1. Perform all cutting and patching necessary to work, unless specifically delegated to the General Contractor. Obtain special permission from the engineer before cutting structural members or finished material. Perform all patching in such a manner as to leave no visible trace and return the area affected to the condition of undisturbed work. Perform all patching by workers experienced, skilled, and licensed for the particular type of work involved. Inferior work will not be accepted. 2. Patch all holes left as a result of demolition of mechanical equipment and devices. 3. Drill all holes in masonry with rotary drill. Impact tools are not allowed. Core drill all holes in masonry and concrete for mechanical penetrations. Provide and dispose of all water required for core drilling. Coordinate with other trades to prevent damage from water. 4. Prevent the spread of dust, debris, and other material into adjacent areas. 5. Replace all ceiling tiles damaged during installation of work, with new tile. E. Painting: 1. Refinish all mechanical equipment damaged during shipping and/or installation to its original condition. Remove all rust; prime, and paint per manufacturer's recommendations for finish equal to original. Paint all exposed piping and equipment in occupied areas. Provide one (1) prime coat and two (2) finish coats. Coordinate final color with Architect. F. Record Drawings: 1. Provide Record Drawings in accordance with the requirements of Division 0 and Division 1. 2. Maintain a complete set of Record Drawings showing all modifications to the Contract Documents. Drawings will be stamped “Record Drawings” and used only for that purpose. 3. As work progresses, record all changes or deviations from the contract drawings in a neat and legible manner as follows: a. Record exact location and elevation of underground mechanical systems including changes in direction, cleanouts etc., by reference to building lines, curbs, walks, and other permanent reference points. b. Record routing of concealed and exposed above ground mechanical systems where it varies from the Contract Documents. 4. The Engineer may recommend withholding payment if Record Drawings are not being maintained. 5. Submit Record Drawings to the Engineer for review at completion of the Work. Submit final record drawings as part of the Operation and Maintenance Manual package after the completion of the project. 3.4
TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Do not use heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems provided in this scope of work for temporary heating, ventilating and air conditioning during construction.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00-11
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3.5
PROTECTION A. Protect openings and equipment from obstruction, breakage, misuse, damage or blemishes. Protect materials and equipment immediately upon receipt at the job site or immediately after they have been removed from their shipping containers. Unless noted otherwise, keep them clean and undamaged until final acceptance of the entire Project by the Owner. When a portion of the building is occupied by the Owner before substantial completion of the entire Project, make arrangements to transfer responsibility for protection and housekeeping for the occupied portion. B. Protect pipe, duct and equipment openings with temporary plugs or caps. Keep openings covered until permanent connections are complete. C. Contractor is responsible for any damage to mechanical equipment, materials or work until final acceptance of the entire project by the Owner.
3.6
CLEAN UP A. Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish, caused by his employees or work, at all times. Remove rubbish, tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials from and about the building, and leave work areas "broom clean" or its equivalent upon completion of the work. Clean mechanical equipment and remove temporary identification. B. In case of dispute, the Owner will remove the rubbish and charge the cost to the Contractor.
3.7
START-UP A. Before start-up, lubricate, charge, and fill systems as specified and according to Manufacturer’s instructions. B. Test hydronic systems and air systems as specified in Sections governing their installation. C. Perform testing, adjusting and balancing in accordance with that Section. D. Operate equipment and systems in all their operating modes, to verify proper operation, prior to final field observation and Owner instructions. Notify the Engineer, in writing, that all systems have been tested and are functioning and operating properly.
3.8
TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING A. Provide assistance to Test, Adjusting and Balancing Contractor by making adjustments to system and system components required for achieving design performance. B. If acceptable performance of any test is not achieved, make the necessary corrections and the test shall be repeated until acceptable performance is achieved.
3.9
FINAL FIELD OBSERVATION A. A final field observation of the mechanical systems will be required before Contract Closeout. Request a final observation by the Engineer after all systems are fully completed and operational. The Engineer will schedule a field observation and generate a list of items to be corrected or completed before Contract Closeout. B. If the Engineer is requested to make a final field observation by the Contractor, and the Engineer finds the work is not complete enough to perform that observation, the Contractor will compensate the Engineer for their time. The Contractor will then perform the necessary work to complete the project and again request a Final Field Observation.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00-12
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3.10 TRAINING A. Fully instruct the Owner's designated personnel in the operation of each mechanical system at the time it is put into service. Provide instruction using competent instructors and factory trained personnel. B. Include documentation of instructions in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. C. Obtain a written statement from the Owner that his designated personnel have been instructed. 3.11 UTILITY REBATES A. This Contractor shall secure on behalf of the Owner all utility rebates associated with the design. This shall include all submittals to the utility companies including substantiation where required and making all necessary arrangements on behalf of the Owner. 3.12 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Submit to the Engineer two (2) Operating and Maintenance manuals. Submit in portfolio form neatly edited with similar equipment grouped, tabbed and indexed. Provide printed or typewritten materials. Provide the following in each manual: 1. Shop drawings, approved manufacturer's bulletins, and other appropriate data from specific manufacturer of each piece of equipment furnished and/or installed. Shop drawings, manufacturer's bulletin, and other data shall be appropriate marked to reflect the "as-built" condition. Cross out or delete all information shown on shop drawings or literature not applying to this specific project. 2. Copies of manufacturer’s warranties 3. Operating instruction for equipment. 4. Wiring and installation instructions for equipment. 5. Recommended maintenance schedules and procedures for equipment. 6. Recommended trouble shooting procedures for equipment. 7. Equipment parts list. 8. Settings/adjustments/calibrations for systems as required. 9. Local equipment suppliers/reps names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 10. Equipment manufacturers names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 11. Sub-contractors names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 12. Test reports. 13. Certifications. 14. Test and balance reports. 15. System validation reports. 16. Statement from Contractor that all incomplete items noted in Engineer’s Final Field Observation Report have been completed. 17. Statement from Owner confirming completion of Training. 18. Refer to individual Sections in Division 23 for additional requirements. Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00-13
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
B. Record Drawings: Submit Record Drawings. C. Extra Materials: Refer to individual Specification Sections for extra materials to be provided to the Owner. D. System Startup: Refer to individual Specification Sections for system startup requirements. 3.13 ELECTRONIC AS-BUILTS AND OPERATOIN AND MANTENANCE MANUAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide an electronic copy on a CD of an approved copy of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. CD to be book marked per specification section and equipment format to be a PDF file. B. Provide an electronic copy on a CD of the approved as-builts. CD to be book marked per sheet and in PDF form. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 00-14
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Common requirements for electric motors furnished on equipment specified in other Division 23 Sections, including single phase and three phase electric motors. B. Power factor correction. C. Drives. D. Variable speed drives (VSD's).
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 34 13 - Fans
1.3
REFERENCES A. List reference standards that are included within the text of this section. Edit the following as required for project conditions. B. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. C. AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. D. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to UL Component Recognition for appropriate sizes. B. Conform to NFPA 70 and local energy code.
1.5
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 23 05 00 - Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include manufacturer’s product and nameplate data. 2. Include physical and performance data. 3. When used with variable frequency drive; certification that motor is compatible. 4. Include selection data for power factor correction capacitors. C. VSD: 1. Submit complete technical data sheets for each VSD showing all pertinent data including at least the following: a. Connected motor nameplate full load amperage.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 13-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
b. VSD characteristics: 1) Motor amperage capacity, power factor at full load and efficiency at full load.. 2) Electrical power input characteristics. 3) Control interface requirements. 4) Status display systems. 5) Physical dimensions and weight. 6) Options not listed in the specifications. 7) Exceptions and variations from the specifications. c. Submit Operating and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Section 23 05 00. d. Include instructions for normal operation. e. Include instructions for routine service procedures; list of major components; recommended remedial and preventive maintenance procedures; spare parts list. 2. Submit complete wiring diagrams and dimensional drawings of all equipment including at least the following information: a. Monitoring and control terminals, designations and locations. b. Power circuit diagram, including the disconnect and motor. c. Control circuit diagram. d. Wiring of options and auxiliary devices. 3. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of the Product. Include equipment installation instructions, connection diagram for external cabling, internal wiring diagram, and written instruction for all cabling, mounting, location, etc. 4. Provide computer analysis of total harmonic voltage distortion and line notching for all points of common coupling. The point of common coupling for this project will be the distribution panel that feeds the VSD-controlled motors. Provide the complete analysis to the engineer for review. 5. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed the specified requirements 1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately. B. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to the site. C. Accept controllers on site in original packing. Inspect for damage. D. Store VSDs in a clean, dry, environmentally-controlled space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris and traffic.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 13-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
E. Handle in accordance to the manufacturer’s written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosure and finish. 1.7
ENVIROMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not store or install unless temperature in maintained between 32 degrees F and 104 degrees F, at a relative humidity less than 95 percent (non-condensing). B. Maintain conditions during and after installation of Products.
1.8
WARRANTY A. Section 23 05 00 - Warranties. B. Provide a complete parts and labor warranty on the VSD system and all related accessories, commencing on the date of final acceptance and continue for a period of two (2) years. Provide all materials and labor required to correct any system malfunction or failure (determined not to be the result of negligence, abuse, or misuse) at no charge to the Owner during this time period
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
ELECTRIC MOTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Baldor. 2. General Electric. 3. Marathon. 4. Reliance. 5. Substitutions: None. B. General: 1. Motors Less Than 250 Watts, for Intermittent Service: Equipment manufacturer's standard and need not conform to these specifications. 2. Single Phase Motors: PSC for low starting torque, direct drive applications. Capacitor start for high starting torque applications. 3. Electrical Service (unless noted otherwise): a. Motors Smaller than 1/2 HP: single phase, 60 Hz. b. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: three phase, 60 Hz. c. Refer to the Schedules on Drawings for voltage. 4. Motors to be started across-the-line, unless noted otherwise, or as noted below: a. 480 Volt: Part winding start for motors 25 HP and above. 5. Open drip-proof (ODP) type except where specifically noted otherwise. 6. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC), TEAO or TENV motors when exposed to the weather. 7. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment. 8. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 13-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
9. Explosion-Proof Motors: Class I, Group D; and Class II, Group E, F and G. 10. Visible Nameplate: Indicating manufacturer's name and model number, motor horsepower, RPM, frame size, voltage, phase, cycles, full load amps, insulation system class, service factor, maximum ambient temperature, temperature rise at rated horsepower, minimum efficiency. 11. Wiring Terminations: a. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for conduit. b. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide threaded conduit connection in end frame. 12. Motor Efficiencies: NEMA Premium Efficiency (1 hp and larger). Follow NEMA Standards Publication MG 1-2003, in Tables 12-12 and 12-13. 13. Motors for use with Variable Speed Drives: a. NEMA Standard MG1 definite purpose inverter duty rated motors shall be used for all IGBT Pulse Width Modulated drive installations. Inverter duty motors shall be designed and manufactured to meet NEMA Standard MG1 for definite purpose inverter duty motors. The inverter duty motors shall be able to withstand voltages greater than 1600 volts peak and rise times of 0.1 microsecond. b. Insulated of isolated bearings shall be used for the inverter duty rated motors. c. The inverter duty motor insulation class shall be class F insulation and a class B temperature rise based on 40 degrees C. d. The inverter duty motor name plate shall indicate that the motor is an inverter duty motor. e. Provide shaft ground kit for field installation. C. Single Phase Power - Permanent Split Capacitor Motors: 1. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque. 2. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current. 3. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings. 4. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, minimum 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings, automatic reset overload protector. D. Single Phase Power - Capacitor Start Motors: 1. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque. 2. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current. 3. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque. 4. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque. 5. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds. Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 13-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
6. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve bearings. 7. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. E. Three Phase Power - Squirrel Cage Motors: 1. Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque. 2. Starting Current: Six times full load current. 3. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design B characteristics. 4. Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Design B motors. 5. Insulation System: NEMA Class F with Class B rise. 6. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts. 7. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum AFBMA 9, L-10 life of 20,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt centre line at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate. 8. Sound Power Levels: To NEMA MG 1. 9. Weatherproof TEFC Motors: Epoxy seal windings using vacuum and pressure or coat windings with rotor and starter surfaces protected with epoxy enamel; bearings double shielded with waterproof non-washing grease. 2.2
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION A. Manufacturers: 1. Cornell-Dubelier. 2. General Electric. 3. Sprague. 4. Westinghouse. 5. Zucker. 6. Substitutions: None. B. Provide power factor correction capacitors for motors 3 horsepower or larger in accordance with the following requirements. Capacitors shall be selected so that they do not overcorrect the power factor beyond 99.99% throughout the range of operation of the motor. Reference to "full load" means the rated motor horsepower not including the service factor. 1. Motors with Constant Load: Correct to a minimum 95% power factor when operating at 65% of full load. 2. Direct Expansion Refrigeration Compressors: correct compressors to a minimum of 95% power factor when operating in its least loaded condition.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 13-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. Motors connected to variable speed drives shall be excluded from the power factor correction requirements. D. If equipment is furnished with a control panel, that panel shall come with power factor correction capacitors factory installed and wired. E. For equipment that does not have a control panel, the equipment supplier shall be responsible for furnishing the capacitors and installing them at either the motor disconnect or motor control center. F. Individual capacitors shall be dry electrolytic type and enclosed in integrated dust tight enclosure. 2.3
MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. In general, motor controllers will be furnished and installed under Division 26 unless the motor controller is an integral part of a piece of equipment, or noted otherwise. B. Where control components are factory furnished, a control transformer with fused secondary shall be provided to reduce voltage to 120 volts to operate control and safety devices.
2.4
BELT DRIVES A. V-belt drives for equipment with motors smaller than 3 horsepower shall be rated for 150% of rated horsepower of the driven equipment with matched pulleys and belts. V-belt drives for equipment with motors 3 horsepower and larger shall be rated for 200%. B. Variable pitch drives shall be selected so that the fan speed at the specified operating conditions is approximately centered on the sheave adjustment range. C. Exposed belt drives shall have OSHA approved guards to completely enclose sheaves and belts. Guards shall be constructed of expanded metal and reinforced with angle iron and securely fastened to floor or base. Provide openings at motor and driven equipment shafts for taking tachometer readings. D. Except as specified otherwise, provide variable sheaves for motors 15 HP and smaller and fixed sheaves for motors 20 HP and larger. E. Where motors are used with variable frequency drive systems, provide fixed sheaves. Select sheaves at an RPM which will provide 15 percent greater capacity that called out on drawings. Final capacity adjustments will be made with the variable frequency drive system. F. Belt driven equipment shall include an adjustable motor base for adjusting belt tension.
2.5
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES (VSD) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allen Bradley. 2. Asea Brown Boveri (ABB). 3. Danfoss. 4. Gerus Industrial. 5. Square D. 6. Substitutions: None.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 13-6
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
B. Description: 1. Provide enclosed variable speed controllers suitable for operating the indicated loads. Conform to requirements of NEMA ICS 3.1. C. Rating and operating characteristics: 1. Rated Input Voltage: 480 volt +/-10%, 3 phase. 2. Motor Nameplate Voltage: 480 volts, 3 phase. 3. Input Frequency Operating Range: 60 Hz., plus 3 Hertz or minus 10 Hertz. 4. Displacement Power Factor: Between 1.0 and .95, lagging, over the entire range of operating speed and load. 5. Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: 95% 6. Harmonic Distortion of Input Voltage Waveform: 3% maximum at full load 7. Harmonic Distortion of Input Current Waveform: 10% maximum at full load. 8. Harmonic Attenuation: Provide line reactors as required to attenuate harmonic distortion. Refer to paragraph 1.3. 9. Current Limit Ratings: a. Slow Current Regulation: Adjustable to 125% (minimum) of variable torque current rating. b. Rapid Current Regulation: Adjustable to 170% (minimum) of variable torque current rating. c. Current Switch Off Limit: Fixed at 225% (minimum, instantaneous) of variable torque current rating. 10. Overload Rating: 110 percent of rated variable torque current rating for 1 minute every 10 minutes and140% of rate torque current rating for 2 seconds every 15 minutes. 11. Environmental Requirements: a. Operating Temperature: 0oC to +40oC (32oF to 104oF) without derating. b. Relative Humidity (operating and storage): 95% maximum non-condensing. c. Elevation: 3300 ft maximum without derating. d. Acoustical Noise: Do not exceed audible noise level of 85 dBA measured a 3 feet from the VSD within the VSD entire operating range. D. Design: 1. Inverter Type: Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) with variable frequency and pulse width, transistorized-type design. Construct of modular rack assemblies to facilitate maintenance. 2. Rectifier: Six pulse, solid state, full-wave bridge rectified, sufficient to supply full load to inverter. 3. Cooling: Air cooling with replaceable filters. Exhaust air from top of unit. 4. Front Access: Provide modular design for major components accessible/replaceable from the front. Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 13-7
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
E. Fabrication: 1. Enclosure: NEMA 1 enclosure with dead front construction. Designed with front access for servicing adjustments and connections. Access through hinged doors equipped with latch handle and lock. 2. Enclosure Finish: Primed and painted inside and outside with semi-gloss enamel. 3. Identify internal wiring at each end of conductor. Provide cabinet grounding lug. F. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard Features: a. Ability to operate controller with motor disconnected from output. b. Design to attempt five automatic restarts following a fault condition before locking out and requiring manual restart. c. Capable of starting a rotating load and accelerate or decelerate to setpoint without tripping safety devices or damaging components. d. Equipped with automatic extended power ride through circuit for up to 5 cycles. e. RS-485 serial communication port standard. f. Individual motor overload protection for each motor controlled. 2. Display: Provide integral digital display to indicate input current or KW (True RMS values), output voltage, output frequency, elapsed time meter. 3. Status Indicators: Provide separate indicators for input power on, input power fault, overcurrent fault, overvoltage & undervoltage faults, ground-fault, overtemperature fault. 4. Adjustments: a. Volt per Hertz Adjustment: Plus or minus 10 percent. b. Minimum Output Frequency Adjustment: Field Adjustable, 4 - 40 Hertz. c. Maximum Output Frequency Adjustment: Field Adjustable, 40 - 90 Hertz. d. Current Limit Adjustment: 60 - 110 percent of rated. e. Acceleration Rate Adjustment (0 - 100% speed): Field adjustable, .5 - 30 seconds. f. Deceleration Rate Adjustment (0 - 100% speed): Field adjustable, 1 - 30 seconds. 5. Provide HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switch and digital manual speed control located on front of door. 6. Input Signals: Provide interface with any of the following control inputs: a. D.C. Analog Voltages: 0 - 5 VDC and 0 - 10 VDC. b. D.C. Analog Currents: 0 - 5 ma and 4 - 20 ma. c. Pneumatic signal: 3- 15 psi 7. Analog Output Signals: Two (2) analog outputs proportional to frequency, output voltage or output current. 8. Digital Output Signals: Two (2) digital relay outputs, form C contacts, rated 8 amps at 24 VDC and .4 amps at 250 VAC. Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 13-8
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
9. Safety Interlocks: Provide terminals for remote contact to inhibit starting under both manual and automatic mode. 10. Control Interlocks: Provide terminals for remote contact to allow starting in automatic mode. 11. Transient Protection: Include integral protection on the input line. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
COORDINATION A. Provide the necessary control interface that will accept and understand the input from the controlling entity. Verify the interface requirements with the temperature control contractor. B. Coordinate with the driven equipment manufacturer to obtain information about any critical speeds which must be locked out in the VSD controls to avoid problems with noise or vibration caused by harmonic resonance in mechanical systems. C. Coordinate the final location of VSD with manufacturer and Mechanical Contractor.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Motors: 1. Install motors, power factor correction capacitors, and drives in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Power factor correction capacitors to wired motor starters by Division 26. 3. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any position. 4. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate. 5. Check rotation of motor driven equipment and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. 6. Align all drive systems and adjust belt tension. Remove pulley set screws, install thread locking substance on threads, and reinstall screws, torquing to manufacturer's specifications. 7. Check and adjust belt guards so that no parts are in contact with rotating equipment. 8. Install shaft ground kit on motors for use with variable frequency drives. 9. Wire shaft ground kit on motors for use with variable frequency drives. B. Variable Speed Drives (VSD): 1. Install controller where indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions and NEMA ICS 3.1. 2. Provide a insulated grounding conductor from the source of power to the VSD and from the motor to the VSD. 3. Interlock the disconnect located at each of the motors with the VSD, so that the VSD will restart the motor and ramp up, rather than trying to start the motor across the line when the disconnect is turned back on. 4. Fasten cabinets and enclosures permanently to the building structure or unistrut cage adjacent to the motors.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 13-9
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
5. Install VSD’s so as to not restrict maintenance access to coils, filters, belts, etc. Field verify locations with Owner and mechanical contractor. 6. Provide all control connections to the VSD from the Division 15 contractors. 7. Factory connect all internal wiring. Install all wiring between each VSD enclosure and verify that all internal wiring is complete. 8. Provide all power connections, including all power wiring associated with any isolation transformers, disconnect switches, and accessories. Include power wiring from drive to motor. 9. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor characteristics. 10. All control connections outside the VSD assemblies, to sensors or other control devices are provided by the temperature control contractor. 11. Install each VSD adjacent to the motor it controls. Keep lead length as short as possible from the VSD to the motor. Provide unistrut rack secured to building structure to mount VSD if necessary. Mount VSD out from under piping. 12. Provide neatly typed label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amps, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. 13. Provide separate conduit and wire from power source to VSD and from VSD to motor. Do not combine power feeds for multiple VSD’s. Do not combine input and output wiring in same conduit. Do not use wireway. 3.3
TESTING AND STARTUP A. Test each VSD at the factory and again after installation as described below: 1. Certify that each VSD used on this Project has met the following factory tests: a. The factory shall perform acceptance tests of devices supplied by outside sources to assure quality in conformance with their standards. b. The complete VSD shall be subjected to a heat stress test. While subjecting it to an ambient temperature of 122° F. for no less than 48 consecutive hours, test each unit by simulated operation. The manufacturer shall provide certification that the heat stress test was performed and each unit passed. Rebuild any unit that fails and again subject it to a complete heat stress test including simulated operation. Continue testing until the unit passes or until it has failed for the fourth time. A fourth failure of the same unit makes that entire unit unacceptable for use on the Project. c. The factory shall test each VSD to determine the acceptability of its operating control section. Power up the sensors, controllers, power supply and all other control components and then cause the inverter output frequency to vary by changing the control parameter in accordance with these specifications. d. Subject each VSD to the ANSI Standard C39.90-1978, "Guide for Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Test" procedures to demonstrate that it is capable of withstanding 3000 volt transients.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 13-10
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2. Startup and Acceptance Tests: a. Perform on-site testing and initial startup using factory trained personnel for all systems connected to a VSD. Arrange the tests with the Engineer and the Mechanical Contractor. Perform them at no additional cost to the Project. b. Perform at least the following field operation tests and write a report to the Engineer that each VSD met the stated guidelines. 1) Minimum output frequency = 4 hz ± 1 hz. 2) Maximum output frequency = 90 hz ± 1 hz. 3) Acceleration rate from dead stop to full speed tested at the maximum and the minimum rate adjustment. 4) Deceleration rate from full speed to dead stop tested at the maximum and the minimum rate adjustment. 5) Current limit = 115% ± 5% (ODP) or 100% ± 5% (TEFC or TEAO) of motor nameplate ampacity. 6) Over-temperature protection = manufacturer's rating at full motor load ± 5° F. 7) Control signal setpoint ± 10% of that specified. 8) Control setpoint offset ± 10% of that specified. 9) Simulated power outage and control system reaction. 10)Attempt starting into a rotating load to determine if self protection is adequate. 11)Testing the installation to verify the harmonic distortion factor does not exceed the criteria specified. Provide a written report to the Engineer indicating all test results. 3.4
DEMONSTRATION A. Fully instruct the Owner's personnel as to the proper operation of the equipment. B. Arrange for and conduct a user training session at the Project site to explain the operation of each type of factory assembled VSD package. Allow at least four (4) hours of on-site instructions. Schedule the training sessions with the Owner and advise the Engineer of all such arrangements. C. Provide the necessary control interface that will accept and understand the input from the controlling entity. Verify the interface requirements with the temperature control contractor. D. Coordinate with the driven equipment manufacturer to obtain information about any critical speeds which must be locked out in the VSD controls to avoid problems with noise or vibration caused by harmonic resonance in mechanical systems. E. Coordinate the final location of VSD with manufacturer and Mechanical Contractor. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 13-11
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Flexible pipe connectors.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide structural work and equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping. Verify that anchors, guides, and expansion joints provided, adequately protect system.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: 1. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, face-to-face length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per foot and per assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid structure, and total number of wires in braid. C. Design Data: Indicate selection calculations. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and external controls.
1.5
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Record actual locations of flexible pipe connectors, expansion joints, anchors, and guides.
1.6
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Maintenance Data: Include adjustment instructions.
1.7
QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept expansion joints on site in factory packing with shipping bars and positioning devices intact. Inspect for damage. B. Protect equipment from exposure by leaving factory coverings, pipe end protection, and packaging in place until installation.
1.9
WARRANTY A. Provide year warranty under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 16-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Adsco. 2. Flexonics. 3. Keflex. 4. Metra-Flex. 5. Minnesota Flexible Corp. 6. Substitutions: None. B. Steel Piping: 1. Manufacturers: Flexonics Flexon Type A. 2. Inner Hose: Stainless Steel. 3. Exterior Sleeve: Single braided stainless steel. 4. Pressure Rating for Flexon Type A, single braided: 450 psig WSP @ 70 degrees F for 2” pipe. 210 psig WSP @ 70 degrees F for 4” pipe. 150 psig WSP @ 70 degrees F for 10” pipe. 5. Joint: Flanged, threaded or welded as specified for pipe joints. 6. Size: Use pipe sized units. 7. Maximum offset: 3/4 inch on each side of installed center line. 8. Length: Flange size plus 10 inches. C. Copper Piping: 1. Manufacturers: a. Flexonics Series 301. 2. Inner Hose: Bronze 3. Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze. 4. Pressure Rating: 735 psig WSP @ 70 degrees F for 1/2” pipe. 460 psig WSP @ 70 degrees F for 1” pipe. 280 psig WSP @ 70 degrees F for 2” pipe. 5. Joint: Flanged, threaded or welded as specified for pipe joints. 6. Size: Use pipe sized units. 7. Maximum offset: 3/4 inch on each side of installed center line. 8. Length: Flange size plus 10 inches.
2.2
ACCESSORIES A. Pipe Alignment Guides.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 16-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1. Two piece welded steel with enamel paint, bolted, with spider to fit standard pipe, frame with four mounting holes, clearance for insulation thickness same as adjoining pipe, minimum 3 inch travel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.2
FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS A. Construct spool pieces to exact size of flexible connection for future insertion. B. Provide flexible connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration isolation. Provide on pumps. C. Provide line size flexible connectors. D. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end immediately adjacent to isolated equipment and anchor other end. Install in horizontal plane unless indicated otherwise. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 16-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 23 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Thermometers and thermometer wells. B. Test plugs.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element. B. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers. C. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 23 05 00 - Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers data and list which indicates use, operating range, total range, accuracy, and location for manufactured components.
1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 23 05 00: Procedures for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and instrumentation. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instructions for calibrating instruments.
1.6
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install instruments when areas are under construction, except for required rough-in, taps, supports and test plugs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturer: Trerice Model BX93000. B. Other acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Palmer. 2. Taylor. 3. Weiss. 4. Wexler 5. Substitutions: None.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 19-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. Thermometer: ASTM E1, adjustable angle, red appearing mercury, lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish, cast aluminum adjustable joint with positive locking device. 1. Size: 9 inch scale. 2. Window: Clear glass. 3. Stem: Brass, 3/4 inch NPT long. 4. Accuracy: plus-minus one scale division. 5. Calibration: Degrees F. 2.2
THERMOMETER SUPPORTS A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as required, and with cap and chain. B. Flange: 3 inch outside diameter reversible flange, designed to fasten to sheet metal air ducts, with brass perforated stem.
2.3
TEST PLUGS A. Test Plug: 1. Manufacturers: a. Pete’s Plug. b. Sisco. c. Substitutions: None. 2. 1/4 inch fitting and cap for receiving 1/8 inch outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with: a. Neoprene core for temperatures up to 200 degrees F. b. Nordel core for temperatures up to 350 degrees F. c. Viton core for temperatures up to 400 degrees F. B. Test Kit: 1. Carrying case, internally padded and fitted containing: a. Two 3-1/2 inch diameter pressure gages. 1) Scaled for each range required b. Two gage adapters with 1/8 inch probes. c. Two 1-1/2 inch dial thermometers. 1) Scale range: 25 to 125 degrees F. 2) Scale range: 50 to 500 degrees F.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 19-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install gage taps in piping. B. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than 2-1/2 inches for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets allow clearance from insulation. C. Install thermometer sockets adjacent to controls systems thermostat, transmitter, or sensor sockets. D. Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments. E. Provide the following thermometer temperature ranges unless noted otherwise: 1. Heating hot water; 30-240 degrees F. F. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale. G. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical. H. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero. I. Locate test plugs where indicated.
3.2
SCHEDULES A. Stem Type Thermometers: 1. Headers to central equipment. 2. Coils - inlets and outlets. 3. Coil banks - inlets and outlets. 4. Boilers - inlets and outlets. B. Thermometer Socket Location: 1. Control valves 1 inch & larger - inlets and outlets. 2. Reheat coils - inlets and outlets. 3. Cabinet heaters - inlets and outlets. 4. Unit heaters - inlets and outlets. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
22 05 19-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 23 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Valves for hydronic piping systems. 1. Gate. 2. Globe. 3. Ball. 4. Butterfly. 5. Check.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 53 – Identification for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment. C. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping.
1.3
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide data on valves, and accessories. information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
1.4
Provide manufacturers catalog
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC IX and applicable state labor regulations. C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME SEC IX.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Provide two repacking kits for each size valve.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 23-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
GATE VALVES - HYDRONIC (150 PSIG) A. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: 1. Manufacturers: Stockham Model G-623, or equivalent by: a. Hammond. b. Kitz. c. Milwaukee. d. Nibco. e. Watts Regulator. f. Substitutions: None. 2. Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, handwheel, solid wedge disc, flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor.
2.2
GLOBE VALVES – HYDRONIC (150 PSIG) A. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: 1. Manufacturers: Stockham Model D-512, or equivalent by: a. Hammond. b. Kitz. c. Milwaukee. d. Nibco. e. Watts Regulator. f. Substitutions: None. 2. Class 150, iron body, bronze trim, handwheel, outside screw and yoke, renewable bronze plug-type disc, renewable seat, flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor.
2.3
BALL VALVES – HYDRONIC (0 - 125 PSIG) A. Up to and including 2 inches: 1. Manufacturer: Apollo 77-100/77-200 Series, or equivalent by: a. Hammond. b. Kitz. c. Milwaukee. d. Nibco. e. Watts. f. Substitutions: None.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 23-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2. Construction: Class 150, 600 psig wog, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, full port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, brass blow-out proof stem, lever handle, solder or threaded ends. Extended stems for use on insulated pipe. 2.4
BUTTERFLY VALVES - HYDRONIC (150 PSIG) A. Manufacturer: Mueller Steam Specialties Series 65/66: 1. Centerline. 2. Crane. 3. Hammond. 4. Kitz. 5. Milwaukee. 6. Nibco. 7. Anvil Gruvlok. 8. Victaulic. 9. Substitutions: None. B. Construction 1-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP-67, 200 psig wog, cast or ductile iron body, lug or grooved ends, extended neck. C. Bronze disc. D. Resilient replaceable EPDM seat, bubble tight shut off. E. Valves 6 inches and smaller, used for shut off service, shall have a latch-lock handle. When used for throttling, valves shall have an infinite throttling handle with indicator disc adjustable stop. F. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves mounted over 8 feet above floor.
2.5
SWING CHECK VALVES HYDRONIC (150 PSIG) A. Up To and Including 2 1/2 inches: 1. Manufacturers: Stockham Model B-309/B-319, or equivalent by: a. Hammond. b. Kitz. c. Milwaukee. d. Nibco. e. Watts Regulator. f. Anvil Gruvlok. g. Victaulic. h. Substitutions: None. 2. Class 125, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, solder or threaded or grooved ends. B. 3 inches and Larger:
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 23-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1. Manufacturers: Stockham Model G-931, or equivalent by: a. Hammond. b. Kitz. c. Milwaukee. d. Nibco. e. Watts Regulator. f. Anvil Gruvlok. g. Victaulic. h. Substitutions: None. 2. Class 125, 3 percent nickel cast iron body and disc, stainless steel seat and pin, flanged or grooved connections. 2.6
NON-SLAM CHECK VALVES - HYDRONIC (150 PSIG) A. 2 inches and Larger: 1. Manufacturers: Mueller Steam Specialties Model 71AHB6-H or equivalent by: a. Mission. b. Titan. c. Anvil Gruvlok. d. Victaulic. e. Substitutions: None. 2. Class 125, bronze body, bronze swing disc with Buna-N insert seat, flanged connections.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verification of existing conditions before starting work.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. C. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
3.3
APPLICATION A. Use ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. B. Use globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. C. Use butterfly valves in heating water systems interchangeably with gate valves. D. Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when provided to isolate equipment.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 23-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
E. Use 3/4 inch ball valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. Pipe to nearest floor drain. F. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 23-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, ductwork, and equipment hangers and supports. B. Equipment bases and supports. C. Sleeves and seals. D. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 07 19 – HVAC Piping Insulation C. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping. D. Section 23 31 13 – Metal and Non-Metal Ductwork Casing and Plenums.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping B. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping C. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with locations and details of all types of hangers. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. C. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: components.
1.5
Indicate special procedures and assembly of
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for support of hydronic, steam and steam condensate, refrigerant piping and ductwork.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Anvil. 2. B-Line Systems. 3. Grinnell
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 29-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
4. Michigan. 5. Tolco. 6. Substitutions: None. B. Hydronic Piping: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, and split ring. 3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 5. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger. 6. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 7. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Over: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll. 8. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook. 9. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 10. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. 11. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 12. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 13. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 14. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. 15. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 2.2
HANGER RODS A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.
2.3
INSERTS A. Manufacturers: Grinnell Figure 282 (8 inches and smaller). Grinnell Figure 282 with Figure 66 attachment (larger than 8 inches). Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1. B-Line Systems. 2. Michigan. B. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 29-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2.4
DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers: Galvanized steel band iron or rolled angle and 3/8 inch diameter rods. Fastenings and hardware to be cadmium plated or stainless steel. B. Wall Supports: Galvanized steel band iron or fabricated angle bracket. C. Vertical Supports: Rolled angles at floor.
2.5
FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage thick galvanized steel. C. Lead Flashing: 1. Waterproofing: 5 lb/sq ft sheet lead 2. Soundproofing: 1 lb/sq ft sheet lead. D. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing. E. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.
2.6
SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel. C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed. D. Sleeves for Pipes in building walls below grade: modular wall seal. E. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel. F. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel or wood. G. Stuffing and Fire stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible. H. Sealant: Acrylic.
2.7
FIRESTOP SYSTEMS A. Manufacturer: 1. 3M (Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co.). 2. Hilti. 3. Substitutions: None. B. Firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gasses, and maintain original fireresistance rating of construction assembly. C. Certificate of conformance for through-penetration requirements of ASTM E814 and UL1479. D. Systems or devices listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory under category XHCR (firestop devices) and XHEZ (firestop systems) may be used, providing that they conform to the construction type, penetrant type, annular space requirements and fire rating involved in each separate instance, and that the system in symmetrical for wall applications.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 29-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
E. Accessories include, but are not limited to; permanent forming/damming/backing materials, temporary forming materials, substrate primers, and collars and steel sleeves. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.2
INSERTS A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.
3.3
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support vertical piping at every floor. F. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. G. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. H. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. I. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. J. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. K. Hangers for insulated pipe shall be large enough to encompass the insulation and the metal protective shield. L. Support piping from building structure. Do not support piping from other mechanical or electrical components. M. Do not support piping with wire or metal stripping hangers.
3.4
DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, Chapter 4, Hangers and Supports.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 29-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3.5
EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 4 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment. Provide for all floor mounted mechanical equipment. B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct supports of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.
3.6
FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked 1 inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and calk, metal counterflash, and seal. C. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; calk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.
3.7
SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. C. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Sleeves in mechanical room floor slabs shall extend 6 inches above finished floor level. Calk sleeves. D. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with stuffing insulation and calk air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. E. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
3.8
FIRE STOP SYSTEMS A. Provide firestop systems for pipe and duct through-penetrations of the following fire-resistancerated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items: floor and ceilings, walls and partitions, smoke barriers, and construction enclosed compartmentalized areas. B. Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 29-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3.9
SCHEDULES A. Piping: PIPE SIZE Inches
MAX. HANGER SPACING Feet
1/2 to 1-1/4 1-1/2 to 2 2-1/2 to 3 4 to 6 8 to 12
6 8 10 10 14
HANGER ROD DIAMETER Inches 3/8 3/8 1/2 5/8 7/8
END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 29-6
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Vibration isolators.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 29 - Hangers & Supports for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide vibration isolation on motor driven equipment over 0.5 HP, plus connected piping and ductwork. B. Provide minimum static deflection of isolators for equipment as indicated in schedule. C. Use concrete inertia bases for base mounted pumps over 10 HP.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate inertia bases and locate vibration isolators, with static and dynamic load on each. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and setting dimensions. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that isolators are properly installed and adjusted to meet or exceed specified requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A. Vibration Isolation 1. Flexonics 2. Korfund 3. Mason Industries. 4. Vibration Eliminator Co. 5. Vibration Mountings and Controls. 6. Substitutions: None.
2.2
VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Open Spring Isolators: 1. Spring Isolators:
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 48-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 3. Spring Mounts: Provide with leveling devices, minimum 0.25 inch thick neoprene sound pads, and zinc chromate plated hardware. 4. Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 0.05 inch; meet requirements for neoprene pad isolators. B. Restrained Spring Isolators: 1. Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 3. Spring Mounts: Provide with leveling devices, minimum 0.25 inch thick neoprene sound pads, and zinc chromate plated hardware. 4. Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 0.05 inch; meet requirements for neoprene pad isolators. 5. Restraint: Provide heavy mounting frame and limit stops. C. Restrained Closed Spring Isolators: 1. Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Type: Closed spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene rubber stabilizers. 3. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 4. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators, and neoprene side stabilizers with minimum 0.25 inch clearance. D. Spring Hanger: 1. Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Provide hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 48-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 3. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators, rubber hanger with threaded insert. 4. Misalignment: Capable of 20 degree hanger rod misalignment. E. Neoprene Pad Isolators: 1. Rubber or neoprene waffle pads. a. 30 durometer. b. Minimum ½ inch thick. c. Maximum loading 40 psi. d. Height of ribs shall not exceed 0.7 times width. 2. Configuration: 1/2 inch thick waffle pads bonded each side of ¼ inch thick steel plate. F. Rubber Mount or Hanger: Molded rubber designed for 0.5 inches deflection with threaded insert. G. Glass Fiber Pads: Neoprene jacketed pre-compressed molded glass fiber. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install isolation for motor driven equipment. C. Install spring hangers without binding. D. On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions. E. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal. F. Provide pairs of horizontal limit springs on fans with more than 6.0 inch static pressure, and on hanger supported, horizontally mounted axial fans. G. Support piping connections to isolated equipment resiliently to nearest flexible pipe connector. as follows: 1. Up to 4 inch Diameter: First three points of support. 2. 5 to 8 inch Diameter: First four points of support. 3. 10 inch Diameter and Over: First six points of support. 4. Select three hangers closest to vibration source for minimum 1.0 inch static deflection or static deflection of isolated equipment. Select remaining isolators for minimum 1.0 inch static deflection or 1/2 static deflection of isolated equipment. H. Connect wiring to isolated equipment with flexible hanging loop.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 48-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3.2
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Inspect isolated equipment after installation and submit report. Include static deflections.
3.3
EQUIPMENT ISOLATION SCHEDULE A. Floor mounted fans and factory assembled air handling units: open spring isolator with 1 1/2” deflection and thrust restraint. Use concrete inertia base for fans in excess of 3.5 inch WC or motors in excess of 40 HP. B. Suspended fans 1 HP and smaller: rubber hanger. C. Suspended fans and air handling units: open spring hanger with 1 1/2 inch deflection. D. Roof mounted fans, condensers and condensing units: restrained closed spring isolators with 1 ½ inch deflection. E. Isolated piping connected to equipment: spring hanger. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 48-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. Stencils. D. Pipe Markers.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: installation.
1.5
Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 23 05 00: Procedures for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: numbers.
Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag
C. Valve Tag Chart. 1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI/OSHA.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Seton. 2. Brady. 3. Substitutions: None.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 53-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
B. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. 2.2
TAGS A. Plastic Tags: 1. Manufacturers: a. Seton. b. Brady. c. Substitutions: None. 2. Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter. B. Metal Tags: 1. Manufacturers: a. Seton. b. Brady. c. Substitutions: None. 2. Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter with smooth edges. C. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list plastic laminated.
2.3
STENCILS A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: 1. Ductwork and Equipment: 2 inch high letters. B. Stencil Paint: Semi-gloss enamel, colors and lettering size conforming to ASME A13.1.
2.4
PIPE MARKERS A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Pipe Markers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brady. b. Seton. c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 23 05 00. 2. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. No tape or adhesive necessary. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 53-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting. B. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. C. Install labels with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. D. Install tags and signs using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location. E. Identify rooftop units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags. F. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. G. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. H. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags. I. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic. J. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers . Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. K. Identify ductwork with stenciled painting. Identify with rooftop unit identification number and area served. Locate identification at rooftop unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. L. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment.
3.3
SCHEDULES A. Identification: 1. Piping: Use pipe service description and color schemes that are standard to the manufacturer. 2. Equipment: Use nomenclature as noted on the drawings. 3. Ductwork: Use description as noted on the drawings. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 53-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of new air systems. B. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hot water heating systems. C. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 25 10 00 – Integrated Automation Network Equipment C. Section 25 35 00 – Integrated Automation Instrumentation and Terminal Devices for HVAC D. Section 25 95 00 – Integrated Automation Control Sequences for HVAC
1.3
REFERENCES A. AABC - National Standards for Total System Balance. B. ADC - Test Code for Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers. C. ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems. D. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems. E. SMACNA - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. C. Prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required. D. Prior to commencing work, submit detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms. E. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. F. Provide reports in letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. G. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance forms, forms prepared following ASHRAE 111, NEBB forms, containing information indicated in Schedules.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1.5
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Record actual locations of flow measuring stations and balancing valves and rough setting.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Services provided by independent qualified Testing and Balancing Agency. B. Provide services to Mechanical Contractor. C. Perform total system balance in accordance with AABC National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance or NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.
1.7
QUALIFICATIONS A. All work to be included under this project. B. The balancing contractor shall be certified by AABC (Associated Air Balance Council) or NEBB (National Environmental Balancing Bureau). The air and hydronic balancing work shall be completed by the following certified contractors: 1. Air Systems Engineering 2. Bal Tech, Inc. 3. Systems Management & Balancing of Minnesota, Inc. 4. Substitutions: None. C. Perform testing, adjusting and balancing of all mechanical systems and provide certified reports that all systems are in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. TAB Contractor shall work with mechanical, ventilation, and control contractors during final phase of construction to assure that all systems are performing to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer.
1.8
WORK SEQUENCE A. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work before Substantial Completion of Project. B. Temperature Control Contractor to provide copies of point verification and sequence verification to TAB Contractor. This will serve as written notification to the TAB Contractor to begin testing, adjusting and balancing.
1.9
SCHEDULING A. Schedule work under the provisions of Section 23 05 00.
PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions: 1. Air systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2. Water systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 3. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 4. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 5. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. 6. Duct systems are clean of debris. 7. Fans are rotating correctly. 8. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 9. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 10. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 11. Air outlets are installed and connected. 12. Duct system leakage is minimized. 13. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented. 14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place. 15. Service and balance valves are open. B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services which prevent system balance. C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. instruments available to Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.
3.3
Make
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems. Adjust outside air to within 0 to plus 10 percent of design. B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design.
3.4
ADJUSTING A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. E. At final field observation by the Engineer, recheck random selections of data recorded in report up to 10% of tested devices. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Engineer. F. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report. 3.5
AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, outside air, and exhaust air quantities. B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets with direct reading velocity meters or flow hoods in accordance with manufacturers instructions. D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise. E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to the extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required, including belts and pulleys. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet. H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. I. Adjust outside air, return air, relief air and exhaust dampers for design conditions. J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage. K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full heating. L. Verify operation of temperature control dampers to assure shut-off and proper position with controller. Make adjustments if necessary. M. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, relief and exhaust air systems to provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure near the building entries.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
N. For variable air volume system powered units set volume controller to air flow setting indicated. Confirm connections properly made and confirm proper operation for automatic variable air volume temperature control. 3.6
WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities. B. Use calibrated circuit balancing valves and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system. C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air balancing. D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements. E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point. F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other parts.
3.7
EXISTING WATER SYSTEMS A. Test existing water systems to be modified prior to construction. Reset existing branches serving areas of no work to conditions prior to construction. Balance branches serving remodeled areas, to new conditions.
3.8
SCHEDULES A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Air Coils Air Handling Units Air Inlets and Outlets Fans Packaged Terminal Air Conditioning Units Pumps - HVAC B. Report Forms 1. Title Page: a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency d. Project name e. Project location f. Project Architect g. Project Engineer h. Project Contractor
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
i. Project altitude j. Report date 2. Summary Comments: a. Design versus final performance b. Notable characteristics of system c. Description of systems operation sequence d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building pressurization e. Nomenclature used throughout report f. Test conditions 3. Instrument List: a. Instrument b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Range f. Calibration date 4. Electric Motors: a. Manufacturer b. Model/Frame c. HP/BHP d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load e. RPM f. Service factor g. Starter size, rating, heater elements h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 5. V-Belt Drive: a. Identification/location b. Required driven RPM c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM d. Belt, size and quantity e. Motor sheave diameter and RPM f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93-6
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
6. Pump Data: a. Identification/number b. Manufacturer c. Size/model d. Impeller e. Service f. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP g. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP h. Discharge pressure i. Suction pressure j. Total operating head pressure k. Shut off, discharge and suction pressures l. Shut off, total head pressure m. Variable flow pumps: Flow rate, pressure drop, RPM, BHP, from design flow rate to VFD minimum in 10% increments. 7. Air Cooled Condensing Unit: a. Identification/number b. Location c. Manufacturer d. Model number e. Serial number f. Entering DB air temperature, design and actual g. Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual h. Number of compressors 8. Cooling Coil Data: a. Identification/number b. Location c. Service d. Manufacturer e. Air flow, design and actual f. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual g. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual h. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual i. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93-7
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
j. Air pressure drop, design and actual 9. Heating Coil Data: a. Identification/number b. Location c. Service d. Manufacturer e. Air flow, design and actual f. Water flow, design and actual g. Water pressure drop, design and actual h. Entering water temperature, design and actual i. Leaving water temperature, design and actual j. Entering air temperature, design and actual k. Leaving air temperature, design and actual l. Air pressure drop, design and actual 10. Air Moving Equipment a. Location b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Arrangement/Class/Discharge f. Air flow, specified and actual g. Return air flow, specified and actual h. Outside air flow, specified and actual i. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual j. Inlet pressure k. Discharge pressure l. Sheave Make/Size/Bore m. Number of Belts/Make/Size n. Fan RPM 11. Return Air/Outside Air Data: a. Identification/location b. Design air flow c. Actual air flow d. Design return air flow Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93-8
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
e. Actual return air flow f. Design outside air flow g. Actual outside air flow h. Return air temperature i. Outside air temperature j. Required mixed air temperature k. Actual mixed air temperature l. Design outside/return air ratio m. Actual outside/return air ratio 12. Exhaust Fan Data: a. Location b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Air flow, specified and actual f. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual g. Inlet pressure h. Discharge pressure i. Sheave Make/Size/Bore j. Number of Belts/Make/Size k. Fan RPM 13. Duct Traverse: a. System zone/branch b. Duct size c. Area d. Design velocity e. Design air flow f. Test velocity g. Test air flow h. Duct static pressure i. Air temperature j. Air correction factor
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93-9
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
14. Duct Leak Test: a. Description of ductwork under test b. Duct design operating pressure c. Duct design test static pressure d. Duct capacity, air flow e. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor f. Test apparatus 1) Blower 2) Orifice, tube size 3) Orifice size 4) Calibrated g. Test static pressure h. Test orifice differential pressure i. Leakage 15. Flow Measuring Station (CBV, Venturi, etc.): a. Identification/number b. Location c. Size d. Manufacturer e. Model number f. Serial number g. Design Flow rate h. Design pressure drop i. Actual/final pressure drop j. Actual/final flow rate k. Station calibrated setting 16. Terminal Unit Data: a. Manufacturer b. Type, constant, variable, single, dual duct c. Identification/number d. Location e. Model number f. Size g. Minimum static pressure Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93-10
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
h. Minimum design air flow i. Maximum design air flow j. Maximum actual air flow k. Inlet static pressure 17. Air Distribution Test Sheet: a. Air terminal number b. Room number/location c. Terminal type d. Terminal size e. Area factor f. Design velocity g. Design air flow h. Test (final) velocity i. Test (final) air flow j. Percent of design air flow 18. Vibration Test: a. Location of points: 1) Fan bearing, drive end 2) Fan bearing, opposite end 3) Motor bearing, center (if applicable) 4) Motor bearing, drive end 5) Motor bearing, opposite end 6) Casing (bottom or top) 7) Casing (side) 8) Duct after flexible connection (discharge) 9) Duct after flexible connection (suction) b. Test readings: 1) Horizontal, velocity and displacement 2) Vertical, velocity and displacement 3) Axial, velocity and displacement c. Normally acceptable readings, velocity and acceleration d. Unusual conditions at time of test e. Vibration source (if non-complying) END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 05 93-11
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Ductwork insulation. B. Duct Liner.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 53 – Identification for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment. C. Section 23 31 13 – Metal and Non-Metal Ductwork Casing and Plenums: Duct liner.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. B. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. C. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber, Duct Lining Material). D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. NAIMA National Insulation Standards. F. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. G. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. H. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures which ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 13-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
B. Conform to ASTM Standards for “k” value, moisture vapor transmission, maximum moisture absorption, jacket, insulating cement, and adhesive. 1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.
1.8
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE A. Manufacturer: Schuller-Manville 800 Series Spin-Glas B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: 1. CertainTeed. 2. Knauf. 3. Owens-Corning. 4. Substitutions: None. C. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1. ‘K’ value : .24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 450 degrees F unfaced side, 150 degrees F faced side. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: less than 5 percent by weight. D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: 0.02 perm. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. E. Vapor Barrier Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.
2.2
GLASS FIBER, RIGID A. Manufacturer: Schuller-Manville 800 Series Spin-Glas. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: 1. CertainTeed. 2. Knauf.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 13-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3. Owens-Corning. 4. Substitutions: None. C. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket. 1. ‘K’ value : 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 450 degrees F unfaced side, 150 degrees F faced side. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: less than 1% by volume. 4. Density: 3.0 lb/cu ft. D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: 0.02 perm. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. E. Vapor Barrier Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. 2.3
GLASS FIBER DUCT LINER, FLEXIBLE A. Manufacturer: Schuller-Manville Permacote Linacoustic Standard. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: 1. CertanTeed. 2. Knauf 3. Owens-Corning. 4. Substitutions: None. C. Insulation: ASTM C1071; flexible, noncombustible blanket with acrylic polymer impregnated surface and edge coat. 1. ‘K’ Value: maximum 0.25 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 250 degrees F. 3. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 5,000 fpm. 4. Minimum Noise Reduction Criteria: 0.30 for 1/2 inch thickness, 0.45 for 1 inch thickness, 0.60 for 1-1/2 inch thickness, 0.70 for 2 inch thickness. D. Adhesive: 1. Waterproof, fire-retardant type. E. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with press-on head.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 13-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry. 3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. B. Insulate ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. C. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature: 1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation. D. External Duct Insulation Application: 1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket. 2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires. 3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers. 4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. 5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping. E. Duct Liner Application: 1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage. 2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. spacing.
Refer to SMACNA Standards for
3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints. 4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive. 5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness. 3.3
SCHEDULES A. Combustion Air Ducts: 1. Rigid Glass Fiber - external: 1 1/2 inches thick. B. Entire Plenum below Roof Fans: 1. Rigid Glass Fiber -external: 1 inch thick. C. Exhaust within 10 ft of Exterior:
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 13-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1. Flexible Glass Fiber Blanket - external: 1-1/2 inches thick. D. Relief Air Ducts: 1. Flexible Glass Fiber Blanket - external: 1-1/2 inches thick. E. Return Ducts and Outdoor Air Ducts: 1. Flexible Glass Fiber Blanket - external: 1-1/2 inches thick. F. Supply Ducts: 1. Flexible Glass Fiber Blanket - external: 1-1/2 inches thick. G. Transfer Ducts: 1. Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Liner: 1/2 inch thick. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 13-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 53 – Identification for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment. C. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. B. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation. C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. NAIMA National Insulation Standards. E. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. F. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to maximum flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723. B. Conform to ASTM Standards for “k” value, moisture vapor transmission, maximum moisture absorption, jacket, insulating cement, and adhesive.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 19-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness.
1.8
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
GLASS FIBER A. Manufacturer: Johns Manville Micro-Lok AP-T Plus and AP. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: 1. CertainTeed. 2. Knauf. 3. Owens-Corning. 4. Substitutions: None. C. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible. 1. ‘K’ value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: 0.02 perm-inches. E. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. F. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: 1. Compatible with insulation. 2. Hydraulic setting on mineral wool. G. Fibrous Glass Fabric: 1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight. 2. Blanket: 1.0 ob/cu ft density. 3. Weave: 10x10. H. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish: 1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight. 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color. I. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic: 1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 19-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
J. Outdoor Breather Mastic: 1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color. 2.2
HYDROUS CALCIUM SILICATE A. Manufacturer: Schuller Manville Thermo-12. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: 1. Certain Teed 2. Knauf 3. Ownes-Corning 4. Substitutions: None. C. Insulation: ASTM C533; rigid molded, asbestos free, gold color. 1. ‘K’ Value: 0.40 at 300 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 1200 degrees F. 3. Density: 15 lb/cu ft. D. Tie Wire: 0.048 inches stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. E. Insulating Cement.
2.3
CELLULAR FOAM A. Manufacturer: Armstrong AP. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: 1. Halstead. 2. IMCOA/Nomaco. 3. Rubatex. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 23 05 00. C. Insulation: ASTM C534; flexible, cellular elastomeric (or unicellular polyolefin), molded or sheet. 1. ‘K’ Value: 0.27 at 75 degrees F. 2. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F. 3. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F. 4. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 5 percent by weight. 5. Moisture Vapor Transmission: 0.10 perm-inches. 6. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. D. Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.
2.4
JACKETS A. Aluminum Jacket: 1. Thickness: .025 inch sheet.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 19-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2. Finish: Smooth. 3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. 4. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. B. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. C. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. D. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers. E. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. F. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions at equipment. G. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. 3. Insulation thickness on runouts, 2 inch and smaller, to individual terminal units may be reduced to 1/2 inch, within 12 feet of the unit. H. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 19-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. I. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07270. J. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers. 3.3
SCHEDULES A. Heating Systems: 1. Hot Water: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes. 2) Thickness: 1-1/2 inch. B. Cooling Systems: 1. Condensate Drains from Cooling Coils: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Thickness: 1/2 inch. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 07 19-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1
DEFINITION A. The Commissioning Authority will be an independent agency (separate from this Contract) selected by the Owner to perform the Work outlined in the Contract Documents. B. The Work shall include coordination and documentation of all Verification and Functional Performance Test procedures on new and modified mechanical ventilation equipment and systems to ensure operation and performance. C. Work under this contract shall conform to requirements of Division 1, General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, and Supplementary Conditions. D. Commissioning work shall be a team effort to ensure that all mechanical equipment and systems have been completely and properly installed, function together correctly to meet the design intent, and document system performance parameters for fine-tuning of control sequences and operational procedures. Commissioning shall coordinate system documentation, equipment start-up, control system calibration, testing and balancing, and Verification and Functional Performance Testing. E. The commissioning team shall be made up of representatives from the Owner, design professionals, major equipment suppliers, and construction trades. The trades represented on the commissioning team shall include, but not be limited to, sheet metal, piping and fitting, controls, test and balance, and electrical. The lead person for each trade who will actually perform or supervise the work is to be designated as the representative to the commissioning team. Responsibility for various steps of the commissioning process shall be divided among the members of the commissioning team, as described in this section. F. The Commissioning Authority shall have responsibility for coordinating and directing each step of the commissioning process. G. Mechanical system installation, start-up, testing, balancing, preparation of O & M manuals, and operator training are the responsibility of the Division 23 Contractors (under this contract), with coordination, observation, verification and commissioning the responsibility of this commissioning authority. The Commissioning process does not relieve Division 23 from the obligations to complete all portions of work in a satisfactory and fully operational manner. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 08 00-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 23 20 13 HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and pipe fittings for: 1. Heating water piping system. 2. Equipment drains and overflows. 3. Unions, flanges and couplings.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment. C. Section 23 05 53 – Identification for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment. D. Section 23 07 19 – HVAC Piping Insulation. E. Section 23 20 19 - Hydronic Specialties. F. Section 23 25 31 - Water Treatment for Heating Systems.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes, SEC 9 - Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators. B. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping. C. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. D. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless. E. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. F. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided. B. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. C. Use unions, flanges, and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment or other apparatus. D. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals. E. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with Section 23 05 29.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 20 13-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1.5
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, and accessories. manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
Provide
C. Welders Certificate: Include welders certification of compliance with ASME SEC 9. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: procedures. 1.6
Indicate hanging and support methods, joining
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Record actual routing of piping.
1.7
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.
1.8
QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum ten years documented experience. C. Welders: Certify in accordance with ASME SEC 9 and AWS D1.1.
1.9
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping system. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC 9 and applicable state labor regulations. C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of welders.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. C. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
HEATING WATER PIPING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, black.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 20 13-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1. Fittings: Malleable iron or forged steel welding type fittings. 2. Joints: Threaded or welded or grooved. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: Cast brass, or solder wrought copper. 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F. Grooved. Expanded end methods that thins the wall thickness is not acceptable. 2.2
EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40 galvanized. 1. Fittings: Galvanized cast iron, or malleable iron. 2. Joints: Threaded, or grooved mechanical couplings. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: Cast brass, or solder wrought copper or grooved ends. 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F or grooved.
2.3
UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Under: 1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig malleable iron, threaded. 2. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints. B. Flanges for Pipe Over 2 inches: 1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig forged steel, slip-on. 2. Copper Piping: Bronze. 3. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene. C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Anvil/Gruv-Lok. b. Victaulic. c. Substitutions: None. 2. Housing Clamps: Malleable iron clamps to engage and lock and provide rigidity, use a rigid design coupling. For areas designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion, use flexible style couplings; steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe. 3. Sealing Gasket: C-shape elastomer composition for operating temperature range from -30 degrees F to 230 degrees F. 4. Accessories: Steel bolts, nuts, and washers. D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, or Victaulic Clearflow dielectric waterway, water impervious isolation barrier.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 20 13-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps. E. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. Refer to Section 23 25 31
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install piping to ASME B31.9. C. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient. D. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. G. Slope piping and arrange to drain at low points. H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Provide expansion loops where shown on Drawings. Anchor pipe with U-bolt or iron bar clamps secured to building structure. Provide guides to maintain position and alignment of piping. Where space does not allow space for expansion loop, provide expansion joints. I. Install runouts from mains and risers with swing joints of sufficient length to absorb vertical expansion or contraction of risers and horizontal expansion or contraction of mains. J. Provide access where valves and fittings are concealed. K. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Provide manual drain at low points and bottom of risers. L. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. M. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals. N. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds. O. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish painting. P. Install control valves. Run piping full size to valve, use concentric increasers at valves outlets and eccentric reducers at inlets.
3.3
TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Test under hydrostatic pressure of 100 psig or 1-1/2 times normal operating pressure, whichever is greater, for a period of four hours.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 20 13-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
B. Apply tests to all piping and equipment which a part of these systems, including tanks, pumps, and valves, except for items that might be damaged because of excessive pressures. C. Start systems following a procedure that will remove all air. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 20 13-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 23 20 19 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Air vents. B. Circuit balancing valves. C. Test plugs. D. Flow meters. E. Relief valves. F. Strainers. G. Glycol specialties.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping. C. Section 23 25 31 - Water Treatment for Heating Systems.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASME - Boilers and Pressure Vessel Codes, SEC 8-D-Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide product data for manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. Include product description, model and dimensions. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: procedures.
1.5
Indicate hanging and support methods, joining
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list.
1.6
QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 20 19-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
1.8
MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of glycol system for one year from date of substantial completion. B. Visit four times during the first year to make glycol fluid concentration analysis on site with refractive index measurement instrument. Detail findings with maintenance personnel in writing of corrective actions needed including analysis and amounts of glycol or water added.
1.9
EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
AIR VENTS A. Manual Type: Short vertical sections of 2 inch diameter pipe to form air chamber, with 1/8 inch brass needle valve at top of chamber. B. Float Type: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bell and Gossett. b. Braukmann. c. Hoffman Specialty. d. Taco. e. Substitutions: None. 2. Cast iron body and cover, float, bronze pilot valve mechanism suitable for system operating temperature and pressure; with isolating valve.
2.2
CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVES (MULTI-TURN) A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco. 2. Tour & Andersson. 3. Substitutions: None. B. General: Balancing valves with provision for connecting portable differential pressure meter. Each meter connection for pressure and temperature probes. Provide precise flow measurement, precise flow balancing, and positive shut-off with no drip seat. Solder, threaded, flanged or grooved end connections. C. Construction: Nonferrous pressure diecast nonporous copper allow, or ductile iron conforming to ASTM Grade A535.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 20 19-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
D. Calibration: Control flow within 2 percent of selected rating. E. Control Mechanism: One, four, eight, twelve, or sixteen 360 degree adjustment turns with memory feature, locking feature tamper-proof setting, and digital readout. F. Accessories: 1. Drain kit for field mounting. 2. Insulation kit - preformed rigid polyurethane insulation for complete enclosure of valve. 3. Portable meter: Carrying case containing one, 3 percent accuracy pressure gage with 0-60 feet pressure range for 500 psig maximum working pressure, color coded hoses for low and high pressure connections, and connectors suitable for connection to read-out valves. 2.3
TEST PLUGS A. 1/4 inch NPT brass fitting and cap for receiving 1/8 inch outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with: 1. Neoprene core for temperatures up to 200 degrees F. B. Test Kit: 1. Carrying case, internally padded and fitted containing: a. Two 2-1/2 inch diameter pressure gages. 1) Two gage adapters with 1/8 inch probes. 2) Scale to match system. b. Two 1-1/2 inch dial thermometers. 1) Scale to match system.
2.4
RELIEF VALVES A. Pressure Relief: 1. Manufacturers: Watts Type 174A or 740, or equivalent by: a. Bell & Gossett. b. Kunkle c. Substitutions: None. 2. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, sized for application. B. Temperature and Pressure Relief: 1. Manufacturers: Watts Type 40, or equivalent by: a. Bell & Gossett. b. Kunkle c. Substitutions: None. 2. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F, capacity ASME SEC IV certified and labeled.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 20 19-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2.5
STRAINERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Metra-Flex. 2. Sarco. 3. Anvil Gruvlok. 4. Victaulic. 5. Watts. 6. Substitutions: None. B. Size 2 inch and Under: Threaded brass body for 400 psig wog or Class 250, Y pattern with 20 mesh stainless steel perforated screen. C. Size 2 inch to 4 inch: Class 125, flanged or grooved iron body, Y pattern with 1/16 inch stainless steel perforated screen. D. Size 5 inch and Larger: Class 125, flanged or grooved iron body, basket pattern with 1/8 inch stainless steel perforated screen.
2.6
GLYCOL SPECIALITES A. Mixing Tank: 55 gallon steel drum with fittings suitable for filling and hand pump for charging, rubber hose for connection of hand pump to system. B. Glycol Solution: Refer to Section 23 25 31.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Where large air quantities can accumulate, provide enlarged air collection standpipes. C. Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated. D. For automatic air vents in ceiling spaces or other concealed locations, provide vent tubing to nearest drain. E. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection. F. Provide radiator balancing valves on water outlet from terminal heating units such as radiation, unit heaters, and fan coil units. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 20 19-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 23 21 23 HYDRONIC PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Base mounted pumps.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. C. Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. D. Section 23 07 19 – HVAC Piping Insulation. E. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping. F. Section 23 20 19 - Hydronic Specialties.
1.3
REFERENCES A. UL 778 - Motor Operated Water Pumps. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Pumps shall operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation. B. Pumps shall be non-overloading in parallel or individual operation. C. Pumps shall operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. D. Pumps shall operate from zero flow to 50% above design flow without exceeding rated full load nameplate horsepower.
1.5
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide certified pump curves showing performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: recommendations.
Indicate hanging and support requirements and
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list. 1.6
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSE-OUT A. Millwright's Certificate: Certify that base mounted pumps have been aligned.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 21 23-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1.7
QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture, assembly, and field performance of pumps with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Alignment: Base mounted pumps shall be aligned by qualified millwright.
1.8
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters’ Laboratories as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.9
EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
BASE MOUNTED PUMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Bell and Gossett Model 1510. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Taco. b. Substitutions: None. B. Type: Horizontal shaft, base mounted, single stage, end suction design, radially or horizontally split casing, for 175 psig maximum working pressure. C. Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage ports, renewable bronze casing wearing rings, seal flush connection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge. D. Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed to shaft. E. Bearings: Grease lubricated roller or ball bearings. F. Shaft: Alloy steel with copper, bronze, or stainless steel shaft sleeve. G. Seal: Upgraded silicon carbide (Sic) glycol-rated seals, 225 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature. Tungsten-carbide may be substituted. Standard carbon-ceramic seals are not acceptable. H. Drive: Flexible coupling with coupling guard. I. Baseplate: Cast iron or fabricated steel with integral drain rim. J. Performance: Refer to Pump Schedule on Drawings. K. Electrical Characteristics: 1. Refer to Pump Schedule on Drawings. 2. Motor: 1750 rpm unless specified otherwise; refer to Section 15090. 3. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70. L. Provide OSHA approved coupler guard.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 21 23-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Contractor to purchase system start-up from the system supplier and supplier to perform start-up and submit written report. B. Provide access space around pumps for service. recommended by manufacturer.
Provide no less than minimum as
C. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. For close coupled or base mounted pumps, provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and over. Refer to Section 23 05 48. D. Provide line sized shut-off valve and pump suction fitting on pump suction, and line sized soft seat check valve and balancing valve or combination pump discharge valve on pump discharge. E. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings. F. Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to and discharging into floor drains. G. Check, align, and certify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up. H. Install close coupled and base mounted pumps on concrete housekeeping base, with anchor bolts, set and level, and grout in place. I. Lubricate pumps before start-up. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 21 23-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 23 25 31 WATER TREATMENT FOR HEATING SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Cleaning of piping systems. B. Water treatment system for: 1. Closed hot water heating system. C. Chemical test kits. D. Glycol protection.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping. C. Section 23 20 19 - Hydronic Piping Specialties.
1.3
REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system schematic, equipment locations, and controls schematics, electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Product Data: Provide chemical treatment materials, chemicals, and equipment including electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate placement of equipment in systems, piping configuration, and connection requirements.
1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include data on chemical feed pumps, agitators, and other equipment including spare parts lists, procedures, and treatment programs. Include step by step instructions on test procedures including target concentrations. C. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate start-up of treatment systems when completed and operating properly. Indicate analysis of system water after cleaning and after treatment. D. Submit certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of chemicals and their proposed disposal.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 25 31-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1.6
QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum ten years documented experience. Company shall have local representatives with water analysis laboratories and full time service personnel. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum ten years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with State or Municipality of standard for addition of non-potable chemicals to building systems and for discharge to public sewers. B. Conform to applicable code for addition of non-potable chemicals to building mechanical systems, and for to public sewage systems. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.8
MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of treatment systems for on] year from Date of Substantial Completion. B. Provide monthly technical service visits to perform field inspections and make water analysis on site. Detail findings in writing on proper practices, chemical treating requirements, and corrective actions needed. Submit two copies of field service report after each visit. C. Provide laboratory and technical assistance services during this maintenance period. D. Include two hour training course for operating personnel, instructing them on installation, care, maintenance, testing, and operation of water treatment systems. Arrange course at start-up of systems. E. Provide on site inspections of equipment during scheduled or emergency shutdown to properly evaluate success of water treatment program, and make recommendations in writing based upon these inspections. F. Provide sufficient chemicals for treatment and testing during warranty period. G. Provide from qualified service representatives, 12 service visits, complete with reports at the following times: 1. Visit one: Aid on installation, identification of installation points for equipment, and outline of program with contractor. 2. Visit two: Inspection and testing of cleaned and drained piping, scheduling tentative date for start-up. 3. Visit three: Start-up of system. 4. Visit 4-12: Training of operators, and beginning monthly service visits to total 12 visits over one year of operation. Each call shall include testing all systems, checking chemicals and equipment and completing field test reports. Troubleshooting and training of new operators is always included.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 25 31-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS-WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS A. Fremont Industries, Inc., Shakopee, MN (www.fremontind.com) 952 445-4121 B. Substitutions: None.
2.2
CLOSED HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEM A. Bypass pot feeder: 6 gallon with funnel, vent cock, drain cock and shutoff valves at inlet and outlet connection, designed to meet the operating pressure requirements of the system.
2.3
CHEMICAL TEST KIT A. Furnish basic water test equipment, spare reagents for maintaining control of program standards in the heating water systems. 1. Test kits shall include the following: a. Reagents and apparatus for determination of inhibitor level. b. Reagents and apparatus for determination of pH, "P" and "M" alkalinity and chlorides. c. Apparatus for determination of microbiological colony population and biocide effectiveness. d. A hand held conductivity meter shall also be included.
2.4
MANUFACTURERS - GLYCOL PROTECTION A. Fremont Industries. B. Substitutions: None.
2.5
GLYCOL PROTECTION A. Fremont Product No. 9131 ethylene glycol. B. Industrially inhibited ethylene glycol pre-mix solution. 30% glycol concentration. C. Dyed to facilitate leak detection. Must be easily analyzed for glycol concentration and inhibitor level. D. Fluid must pass ASTM D1384 (less than 0.5 mils penetration per year for all system metals). E. The reserve alkalinity of the fluid shall be at least 19.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Systems shall be operational, filled, started, and vented prior to cleaning. Use water meter to record capacity in each system. B. Place terminal control valves in open position during cleaning. C. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Provide all piping required for system operation.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 25 31-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. Provide all control wiring for system operation. 3.3
CLEANING OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Concentration: 1. Fremont precleaner product no. 8815. 2. As recommended by manufacturer. 3. One pound of trisodium phosphate per 100 gallons of water for hot systems. B. Hot Water Heating Systems: 1. Apply heat while circulating, slowly raising temperature to 160 degrees F and maintain for 12 hours minimum. 2. Remove heat and circulate to 100 degrees F or less; drain systems as quickly as possible and refill with clean water. 3. Circulate for 6 hours at design temperatures, then drain. 4. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed.
3.4
CLOSED SYSTEM A. Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by test. B. Provide 3/4 inch water coupon rack around circulating pumps with space for 4 test specimens. C. Provide feeders with shutoff valves and bypass. D. Provide sampling connection in the circulating water line including a 1/4 inch ball valve. E. Provide chemical treatment to protect closed systems from corrosion.
3.5
CHEMICALS A. After piping systems have been cleaned, treat systems with necessary chemicals to protect them from corrosion damage. Notify Owner in writing that this work has been completed and tested, with a copy to Engineer. B. Chemicals shall be acceptable to FDA, City and State PCA and shall not contain any chromates. Steam will be used for humidification. C. Water Treatment Chemicals - Closed System: 1. Provide one year's supply of the recommended formula for scale and corrosion protection for the closed recirculating system. 2. Formulation shall not contain any ingredients which are harmful to system materials of construction.
3.6
GLYCOL PROTECTION A. Provide sufficient quantity of anti-freeze fluid into the piping systems, where required, to provide a 30 percent glycol/70 percent water solution. B. Use water with low levels (less than 50 ppm) of chloride, sulfate and hard water ions (Ca++, Mg++) for filling systems that will contain the water/glycol fluid solution.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 25 31-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 25 31-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 23 31 13 METAL AND NON-METAL DUCTWORK, CASING AND PLENUMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal ductwork. B. Casing and plenums.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment: Sleeves. C. Section 23 05 93- Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. D. Section 23 07 13 - Duct Insulation: External insulation and duct liner. E. Section 23 33 13 - Ductwork Accessories. F. Section 23 37 13 - Air Inlets and Outlets.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. B. ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality. C. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. D. SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. E. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. F. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate construction methods including; duct materials, gages, reinforcing and sealing, fittings, hangers and supports. C. Fabrication Drawings: Actual duct fabrication drawings, indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration prior to start of work. Indicate any deviations from applicable SMACNA Standards. Issue copies to related trades for coordination. After all coordination is complete and acceptable to all affected trades, submit to Engineer.
1.5
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 31 13-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure, and leakage rate, following SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that installation of glass fiber ductwork meet or exceed recommended fabrication and installation requirements. 1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, unless more stringent requirements are noted herein.
1.7
QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
1.8
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 90A standards. B. Perform Work in accordance with International Mechanical Code with Minnesota Amendments. C. Perform Work in accordance with Minnesota Energy Code. D. Perform Work in accordance with State and Local Code requirements.
1.9
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. B. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealants.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 and ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having G60 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90. B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A366. C. Insulated Flexible Ducts: 1. Manufacturers: a. Flex-Aire. b. Flexmaster. c. Norflex. d. Sheet Metal Connectors. e. Thermaflex. f. Wiremold. g. Substitutions: None.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 31 13-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2. Two ply vinyl film supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film. 3. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG positive and 1.0 inches WG negative. 4. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. 5. Temperature Range: -10 degrees F to 160 degrees F. D. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. E. Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic. F. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. 2.2
DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Comply with requirements of International Mechanical Code with Minnesota Amendments, when more stringent than those contained herein. B. When operating pressures are not indicated on the drawings, construct the entire duct system for the fan outlet pressure. Variable air volume (VAV) duct systems shall be constructed for 2 inches water column or fan outlet pressure, whichever is greater. C. Duct sealing requirements: 1. SMACNA Seal Class “A”; a. Entire duct system where fan is rated at (+/-) 2 inches water column or greater external static pressure, unless noted otherwise. b. Duct system with booster coils, from fan discharge to inlet of booster coil. c. Duct system enclosed in shafts or above inaccessible ceilings where fan is rated at (+/-) 1 inch water column or greater external static pressure. 2. SMACNA Seal Class “B”; a. Entire duct system where fan is rated from (+/-) 1 inch to (+/-) 2 inches water column external static pressure, unless noted otherwise. b. Duct system enclosed in shafts or above inaccessible ceilings where fan is rated less than (+/-) 1 water column external static pressure. 3. SMACNA Seal Class “C”; a. Entire duct system where fan is rated at less than (+/-) 1 inch water column external static pressure, except gravity transfer ducts, and exhaust ducts discharging into ceiling plenum. D. Portions of duct system with width or height dimension greater than 18 inches which are required to be constructed to SMACNA Seal Class “A” or “B”, shall utilize transverse duct connection system. E. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 31 13-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
F. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide air foil turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. G. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. H. Rigidly construct ducts with joints mechanically tight, braced and stiffened to not breathe, rattle, vibrate or sag. Caulk duct joints and connections with sealant as ducts are being assembled. I. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints. J. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 degree conical tee connections may be used. K. Sheet metal duct liner; Provide perforated 22 gage galvanized steel liner of interior duct insulation. Perforations to be 3/32 inch diameter on 3/16 to 1/4 inch centers. Install 6 mil mylar or polyethylene sheet between insulation and liner. Refer to Section 23 07 13 for insulation requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible, unless more stringent requirements are noted herein. Comply with requirements of International Mechanical Code with Minnesota Amendments, when more stringent than those contained herein. C. Provide short radius 90 degree elbows with turning vanes as indicated on the drawings. Short radius elbow with turning vanes shall be constructed in accordance to SMACNA 1995 standards, appendices A-41 and A-43. Construct elbow with six (6) inch inside radius. No exceptions unless approved by the engineer. D. Install duct as high as possible to maintain headroom. E. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. F. Duct Sizes are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. G. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. H. Install round branch duct to rectangular mains with conical, bellmouth or flared spin-in fittings. I. Make tee connections with a radius tap-in unless noted otherwise.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 31 13-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
J. Lap metal ducts in direction of air flow. Hammer down edges of slips and drives with duct mastic in corners to leave smooth duct interior and a tight fitting corner. K. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow. L. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. M. Pack space between duct and wall, ceiling or floor with glasswool. Fill with 1/2 inch sealing compound. In rated walls, ceilings or floors, use fire rated sealing compound. N. Coordinate location of duct access panels with wall or ceiling access doors. O. Duct hangers shall not attach to bottom chord of steel joist or metal roof decking. Attach to top chord of steel joist. P. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes. Q. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static pressure holds door in closed position. R. Elbows and angles for spiral ductwork shall be five piece standing seam construction, 18 gauge with 1 full sweep (C.L. Radius = 1.5 x Diameter) unless physical space is not available. 3.2
FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with one foot maximum length of flexible duct. B. Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts directly or with 3 feet maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp. C. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands and additional sealing to provide air tight joint. D. Support flexible duct properly to avoid sags and crimping. E. Do not use flexible duct to change direction.
3.3
PROTECTION A. During construction, provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 31 13-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 23 33 13 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Air turning devices/extractors. B. Backdraft dampers. C. Combination fire and smoke dampers. D. Duct access doors. E. Duct test holes. F. Fire dampers. G. Flexible duct connections. H. Volume control dampers. I. Pressure gages and Pressure gage taps. J. Thermometers and thermometer wells. K. Automatic control dampers.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. C. Section 23 31 13 –Ductwork, Casings and Plenums. D. Section 23 36 00 - Air Terminal Units: Pressure regulating damper assemblies. E. Section 25 35 00 – Integrated Automation Instrumentation and Terminal Devices for HVAC: Control dampers
1.3
REFERENCES A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. C. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. D. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service. E. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers. F. ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element. G. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers. H. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 33 13-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including dampers, duct access doors and duct test holes. C. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including dampers, duct access doors, duct test holes and hardware used. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. E. Product Data: Provide manufacturers data and list which indicates use, operating range, total range, accuracy, and location for manufactured components. 1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 23 05 00: Procedures for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and instrumentation. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instructions for calibrating instruments.
1.6
QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
1.7
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install instruments when areas are under construction, except for required rough-in, taps, supports and test plugs.
1.8
MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Supply two bottles of red gage oil for static pressure gages.
1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS A. No manufactured turning vanes in square elbows are allowed. See Section 23 31 13 for short radius elbow with turning vanes. No exceptions unless approved by engineer. B. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. C. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel construction, with push-pull operator strap, ceiling mounted rotary operator knob.
2.2
BACKDRAFT DAMPERS. A. Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance. 2. Cesco. 3. Greenheck. 4. Arrow United. 5. Nailor.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 33 13-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
6. Ruskin. 7. Safe-Air. 8. Substitutions: None. B. Multi-Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers: 16 gage thick galvanized steel, or extruded aluminum, with center pivoted blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2.3
DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. B. Fabrication: Rigid and close-fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum 1 inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. 1. Less Than 12 inches Square: Secure with sash locks. 2. Up to 18 inches Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks. 3. Up to 24 x 48 inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. 4. Larger Sizes: Provide an additional hinge. C. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
2.4
DUCT TEST HOLES A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps. B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation.
2.5
FIRE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance. 2. Cesco. 3. Greenheck. 4. Nailor. 5. Arrow United. 6. Prefco. 7. Ruskin. 8. Safe-Air. 9. Substitutions: None. B. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555 (latest edition), and as indicated.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 33 13-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. Free area 90% minimum. D. Rated for 1-1/2 hour or 3 hour protection depending on partition type. E. Provide factory sleeve and collar for each damper, either break-away or rigid, based on system. F. Ceiling Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage frame and 16 gage flap, two layers 0.125 inch ceramic fiber on top side, and one layer on bottom side for round flaps], with locking clip. G. Horizontal Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage frame, stainless steel closure spring, and lightweight, heat retardant non-asbestos fabric blanket. H. Curtain Type Dampers: Galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air stream except for 1.0 inch pressure class ducts up to 12 inches in height. I. Multiple Blade Dampers: 16 gage galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock. J. Fusible Links: UL 33, separate at 212 degrees F with adjustable link straps for combination fire/balancing dampers. 2.6
AUTOMATIC CONTROL DAMPERS (OUTDOOR AIR, RETURN AIR, EXHAUST AIR AND RELIEF AIR) A. Performance: Temperature
Test in accordance with AMCA 500.
Insulated.
Low-Leakage.
Low
B. Frames: Galvanized steel or aluminum, welded or riveted with corner reinforcement, minimum 12 gage. C. Blades: Low-leak, low-temperature, insulated, galvanized steel or aluminum, maximum blade size 60 inches wide, 48 inches long, minimum 22 gage, attached to minimum ½ inch shafts with set screws. Provide parallel action. D. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl mechanically attached, field replaceable. E. Jamb Seals: Spring stainless steel. F. Shaft Bearings: Graphite impregnated nylon sleeve, with thrust washers at bearings. G. Linkage Bearings: Graphite impregnated nylon. H. Leakage: 3 CFM per square foot at 1 inch wg. I. Maximum Pressure Differential: 6 inches wg for 48” damper section. J. Temperature Limits: -50 to 250 degrees F. K. Manufacturer: Ruskin Model CD50 Low Leakage with edge seals, insulated blades, control damper. Equivalent manufacturers are as follows: 1. Greenheck 2. Nailor 3. Arrow United 4. Tamco 5. Substitutions: None. Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 33 13-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2.7
FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ventfabrics. 2. Substitutions: None. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. C. Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd. 2. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 6 wide. 3. Metal: Galvanized steel. D. Leaded Vinyl Sheet: Minimum 0.55 inch thick, 0.087 lbs per sq ft, 10 dB attenuation in 10 to 10,000 Hz range.
2.8
VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS. A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. B. Splitter Dampers: 1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches. 2. Blade: Fabricate of [single] [double] thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with continuous hinge or rod. 3. Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action, flanged bushing with set screw. 4. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch. C. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. D. End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. E. Quadrants: 1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. 2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. 3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends.
2.9
DIAL THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturer: Trerice Model L800030. B. Other acceptable Manufacturers:
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 33 13-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1. Palmer. 2. Taylor. 3. Weiss. 4. Wexler 5. Substitutions: None. C. Thermometer: ASTM E1, stainless steel case, vapor or liquid actuated with brass or copper bulb, copper or bronze braided capillary, white with black markings and black pointer glass lens. 1. Size: 3-1/2 inch diameter dial. 2. Lens: Clear glass. 3. Length of Capillary: Minimum 6 feet. 4. Accuracy: plus-minus one scale division. 5. Calibration: Degrees F. 2.10 THERMOMETER SUPPORTS A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as required, and with cap and chain. B. Flange: 3 inch outside diameter reversible flange, designed to fasten to sheet metal air ducts, with brass perforated stem. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 23 31 13 for duct construction and pressure class. B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated. C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, humidifiers, duct mounted smoke detectors, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication. D. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. E. Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and smoke dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through rated partitions. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway or rigid duct connections based on system type, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges. F. Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 92A. G. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 33 13-6
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
H. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment, and supported by vibration isolators. I. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take-off. J. Use splitter dampers only where indicated. K. Provide balancing dampers on high velocity systems where indicated. Refer to Section 23 36 00 - Air Terminal Units. L. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly. M. Install thermometers in air duct systems on flanges. N. Install thermometer sockets adjacent to controls systems thermostat, transmitter, or sensor sockets. Where thermometers are provided on local panels or duct mounted thermometers are not required. O. Locate duct mounted thermometers minimum 10 feet downstream of mixing dampers, coils, or other devices causing air turbulence. P. Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments. Q. Provide the following thermometer temperature ranges unless noted otherwise: 1. Air supply; 0-100 degrees F. R. Install static pressure gages to measure across filters and filter banks, (inlet to outlet). On multiple banks, provide manifold and single gage. S. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale. T. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical. U. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero. 3.2
SCHEDULES A. Dial Thermometer Location: 1. Outside air. 2. Return air. 3. Mixed air. B. Static Pressure and Filter Gages. 1. Built up filter banks. 2. Unitary filter sections. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 33 13-7
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 23 34 13 FANS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Power roof ventilators.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 13 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. C. Section 23 31 13 –Ductwork, Casings and Plenums.
1.3
REFERENCES A. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. B. AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. C. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook. D. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes. E. AMCA 261 - Directory of Products Licensed to Use the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. F. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices. G. AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices. H. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators. I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. J. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 23 05 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide data on axial fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly of fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions.
1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 23 05 00 - Project Closeout. B. Test Reports: Indicate performance data for adjustable axial fan blades for at least five blade settings, including maximum. C. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 34 13-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., or testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust. B. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
POWER ROOF VENTILATORS A. Manufacturers: Cook Model ACE, or equivalent by: 1. Greenheck. 2. Substitutions: None. B. Product Requirements: 1. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 2. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. 3. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705. C. Performance: Refer to Schedule on Drawings. D. Fan Unit: V-belt driven, with spun aluminum housing; resilient mounted motor; 1/2 inch mesh, 0.62 inch thick aluminum wire birdscreen; square base to suit roof curb with continuous curb gaskets. E. Bearings and Drives: 1. Bearings: Heavy duty pillow block type, self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball bearings, with life at 200,000 hours. 2. Shafts: Hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with keyway, protectively coated with lubricating oil, and shaft guard. F. Roof Curb: 24 inch high self-flashing of galvanized steel with continuously welded seams, one inch insulation and curb bottom and factory installed nailer strip. G. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non-fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected motor. NEMA 3R weatherproof. H. Motorized Motor Actuated Damper: Aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades linked and line voltage motor drive, power open, spring return.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 34 13-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
I. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at midposition; fan shaft with self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install according to Manufacturer's instructions. B. Install with resilient mountings and with flexible electrical leads; refer to Section 23 05 48. C. Install flexible connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and axial fan while running. D. Install fan restraining snubbers. Adjust snubbers to prevent tension in flexible connectors when fan is operating. E. Provide sheaves required for final air balance. F. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed. G. Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated. H. Provide access to adjustable blade axial fan wheels for varying blade angle setting. Adjust blades for varying range of volume and pressure. I. Provide spring operated or counter weighted door at the inlet and outlet duct for over-pressure protection. J. Secure roof exhausters stainless steel lag screws to roof curb. K. Extend ducts to roof exhausters into roof curb. Counterflash duct to roof opening. L. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, and bearings are lubricated. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 34 13-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 23 37 13 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Grilles, registers and diffusers.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 - Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment. B. Section 23 31 13 – Metal and Non-Metal Ductwork, Casings and Plenums. C. Section 23 33 13 - Ductwork Accessories.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ADC 1062 - Certification, Rating and Test Manual. B. AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters. C. ARI 650 - Air Outlets and Inlets. D. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets. E. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. G. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.
1.5
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ADC Equipment Test Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70.
1.7
QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 37 13-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Krueger. 2. MetalAire. 3. Nailor. 4. Price. 5. Titus. 6. Tuttle & Bailey. 7. Substitutions: None. B. Refer to Schedule on drawings for type, frame, fabrication, finish and accessories.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. Rigidly fasten grilles, registers and diffusers to duct. D. Install grilles, registers and diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. E. Adjust directional tabs in square diffusers and in linear diffusers to provide proper air distribution pattern. F. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly. G. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 37 13-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 23 74 13 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR ROOF TOP UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Packaged roof top unit. B. Roof mounting curb and base.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC Equipment B. Section 23 05 13 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. C. Section 25 10 00 – Integrated Automation Network Equipment. D. Section 25 35 00 – Integrated Automation Instrumentation and Terminal Devices for HVAC. E. Section 25 95 00 – Integrated Automation Control Sequences for HVAC.
1.3
REFERENCES A. ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. B. ABMA STD 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. C. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook. D. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating. E. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. F. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. G. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters. H. ARI 340/360 - Standard for Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air Conditioning & Heat Pump Equipment. I. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators. J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. K. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. L. UL 900 - Standard for Air Filter Units. M. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 23 05 00 - Submittals. B. Product Data: 1. Published Literature: Indicate dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, gages and finishes of materials, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 2. Filters: Data for filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly, and filter frames.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 74 13-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3. Fans: Performance and fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM. 4. Sound Power Level Data: Fan outlet, air handler inlet and outlet openings, and casing radiation at rated capacity. 5. Electrical Requirements: Power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring, clearly indicating factory-installed and field-installed wiring. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, unit dimensions and lifting lug locations, weight loading and center of gravity, required clearances, construction details, field connection details, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include installation instructions. 1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 23 05 00 - Project Closeout. B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, coil removal and replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Manufacturer shall operate each system at the factory before shipment to insure proper operation and balance.
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., E.T.L. or testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept products on site in factory-fabricated protective containers [shrink wrapped form], with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage. B. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
1.9
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide one (1) year parts and labor on entire package. B. Provide four (4) additional years parts and labor on compressor. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 23 05 00 - Project Closeout. B. Supply one set for each unit of filters.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 74 13-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A. Aaon. B. Addison. C. Annexair. D. Substitutions: None.
2.2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Packaged rooftop unit shall include compressors, evaporator coils, filters, supply fans, dampers, air-cooled condenser coils, condenser fans, reheat coil, hot water coil, exhaust fans, energy recovery wheels, and unit controls. B. Unit shall be factory assembled and tested including leak testing of the coils, pressure testing of the refrigeration circuit, and run testing of the completed unit. Run test report shall be supplied with the unit in the controls compartment’s literature pocket. C. Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate lifting and rigging, service areas and caution areas for safety and to assist service personnel. D. Unit components shall be labeled, including pipe stub outs, refrigeration system components and electrical and controls components. E. Estimated sound power levels (dB) shall be shown on the unit ratings sheet. F. Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual shall be supplied within the unit. G. Laminated color-coded wiring diagram shall match factory installed wiring and shall be affixed to the interior of the control compartment’s access door. H. Unit nameplate shall be provided in two locations on the unit, affixed to the exterior of the unit and affixed to the interior of the control compartment’s access door. I. Performance: Refer to Schedule on Drawings.
2.3
CONSTRUCTION A. All cabinet walls, access doors, and roof shall be fabricated of double wall, impact resistant, rigid polyurethane foam panels. B. Unit insulation shall have a minimum thermal resistance R-value of 13. Foam insulation shall have a minimum density of 2 pounds/cubic foot and shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D-1929 for a minimum flash ignition temperature of 610°F. C. Unit construction shall be double wall with G90 galvanized steel on both sides and a thermal break. Double wall construction with a thermal break prevents moisture accumulation on the insulation, provides a cleanable interior, prevents heat transfer through the panel, and prevents exterior condensation on the panel.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 74 13-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
D. Unit shall be designed to reduce air leakage and infiltration through the cabinet. Cabinet leakage shall not exceed 1% of total airflow when tested at 3 times the minimum external static pressure provided in AHRI Standard 340/360. Panel deflection shall not exceed L/240 ratio at 125% of design static pressure, at a maximum 8 inches of positive or negative static pressure, to reduce air leakage. Deflection shall be measured at the midpoint of the panel height and width. Continuous sealing shall be included between panels and between access doors and openings to reduce air leakage. Refrigerant piping and electrical conduit through cabinet panels shall include sealing to reduce air leakage. E. Roof of the air tunnel shall be sloped to provide complete drainage. Cabinet shall have rain break overhangs above access doors. F. Access to filters, dampers, cooling coils, reheat coil, heaters, exhaust fans, energy recovery wheels, compressors, and electrical and controls components shall be through hinged access doors with quarter turn, zinc cast, lockable handles. Full length stainless steel piano hinges shall be included on the doors. G. Exterior paint finish shall be capable of withstanding at least 2,500 hours, with no visible corrosive effects, when tested in a salt spray and fog atmosphere in accordance with ASTM B 117-95 test procedure. H. Units are to include double sloped 304 stainless steel drain pans. I. Unit shall be provided with base discharge and return air openings. All openings through the base pan of the unit shall have upturned flanges of at least 1/2 inch in height around the opening. J. Unit shall include lifting lugs on the top of the unit. 2.4
ROOF MOUNTING CURB A. Provide steel roof mounting frame for bottom discharge and return air duct connection, mating to bottom perimeter of the equipment. It shall make a unit-mounting curb and provide a weatherproof duct connection and entry into the conditioned area when flashed into the roof. B. Features: 23” tall, fully assembled, 6” counter flashing, 2” x 2” wood nailer, fully lined with insulated floor.
2.5
FANS, MOTORS, AND VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES A. Motors: Refer to Section 23 05 13 and schedule on drawings. B. Supply Fan: 1. Fan: Supply air blower shall have backward inclined airfoil blades, ball bearings, and adjustable belt drives rated at 140% of motor nameplate. Blower wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Blower(s) shall be entirely self-contained on a slide deck for service and removal from the cabinet. 2. Motor: Inverter rated. Refer to Section 23 05 13. Refer to schedule on drawings. Provide variable frequency drive. Refer to Section 23 05 13 for specification. C. Condenser Fan: 1. Fan: Direct drive propeller type condenser fans shall discharge vertically. 2. Condenser fans shall be high efficiency electrically commutated motor driven with multiple speeds which are controlled with a fan cycle switch based on head pressure and allow matching condenser airflow with cooling capacity steps.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 74 13-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3. Motor: Fan shall have ball bearings and be permanently lubricated. Refer to Section 23 05 13. D. Power Exhaust Fans: 1. Fan: Backward inclined or axial flow fan, factory wired to variable frequency drive, sized for 100% relief. Provide variable frequency drive. Refer to Section 23 05 13 for specification. Fans shall exhaust air through motorized exhaust dampers. Refer to schedule on drawings. 2. Motor: Inverter rated. Refer to Section 23 05 13. Refer to schedule on drawings. Provide variable frequency drive. Refer to Section 23 05 13 for specification. E. Blowers, drives and motors shall be dynamically balanced. F. Variable Frequency Drives: Refer to Section 23 05 13. 2.6
COILS A. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 410. B. Evaporator Coils: Copper tube, aluminum fins mechanically bonded to tubes. Refer to Section 23 82 16. Coils shall have galvanized steel end casings, equalizing type vertical tube headers, furnished with thermostatic expansion valve, double sloped 304 stainless steel drain pan. C. Condenser Coils: Slope at least 30 degrees to protect the coils from damage. Copper tube, aluminum fins mechanically bonded to tubes. Refer to Section 23 82 16. Size for a minimum of 10°F of refrigerant sub-cooling. Provide condenser hail guards. D. Hot Gas Reheat Coils: Copper tube, aluminum fins mechanically bonded to tubes. Refer to Section 23 82 16. Coils shall have galvanized steel end casings, equalizing type vertical tube headers. E. Hot Water Coils: Copper tube, aluminum fins mechanically bonded to tubes. Coils shall have galvanized steel end casings, equalizing type vertical tube headers. Factory install coil. Pitch coil down toward pipe connections. Coils to be suitable for a glycol solution. F. Coil Performance: Refer to schedule on Drawings.
2.7
FILTERS A. Filter Media: 1. 4-inch- thick, 65% (Merv 11), pleated filters in unit and a metal mesh outside air filter to provide less turbulent airflow for factory installed airflow measuring stations. All filters shall be side loading. 2. Clogged filter switch with output to remote panel. 3. Direct dial reading Magnehelic gauge mounted inside the control compartment (not outside unit exposed to weather). 4. Provide filters for mixed air (prior to the energy wheel inlet) and a filter section on the return air (prior to the energy wheel exhaust). Refer to the unit details on the drawings.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 74 13-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2.8
ECONOMIZER 1. Unit shall include 0-100% economizer consisting of a motor operated outside air damper and return air damper assembly constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core, airfoil blades with rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals. Damper blades shall be gear driven and designed to have no more than 15 CFM of leakage per sq. ft. of damper area when subjected to 2 inches w.g. air pressure differential across the damper. Damper assembly shall be controlled by spring return DDC actuator. Unit shall include outside air opening bird screen, outside air hood with rain lip and barometric relief dampers. Provide a fieldinstalled extension to serve the OA intake to allow mounting space for the OA AFMS. Refer to the drawings for detail.
2.9
DAMPERS A. General: Dampers and actuators provided by this section. Provide smooth proportional control with sufficient power for air velocities 20 percent greater than maximum design velocity and to provide tight seal against maximum system pressures. B. Outside Air Dampers: Dampers shall be constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core, air foil blades with rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals. Dampers shall be designed to operate from 0-100%. Damper blades shall be gear driven and designed to have no more than 25 CFM of leakage per square foot of damper area when subjected to 2” WG air pressure differential across the damper. Damper motor shall be spring return to insure closing of outdoor air damper during periods of unit shut down or power failure. C. Return and Exhaust Air Dampers: Dampers shall be constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core, air foil blades with rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals. Damper blades shall be gear driven and designed to have no more than 25 CFM of leakage per square foot of damper area when subjected to 2” WG air pressure differential across the damper. Exhaust air dampers are to be actuated independently and not linked to the OA or RA damper actuation/gears. Exhaust dampers are to be provided with independent linkages/gears. D. Actuators: 1. Electronic operators manufactured by Belimo. No substitutions. 2. UL 873 listed, CSA 4813-02 certified. 3. Direct coupled over shaft with “V” clamp, no connecting linkage. 4. Electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to actuator. 5. Spring return for power failure/safety application. Provide spring return for two position control and for fail safe operation. 6. Non-spring return with external manual gear release to allow manual positioning. 7. 0 to 10 VDC or 0 -to 20 mA control signal with 2 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA operating range. 2 to 10 VDC position feedback signal. 8. External built-in switch to allow reversing of direction of rotation. 9. Damper torque requirements based on information provided by damper manufacturer. 10. Factory wire dampers complete to a ‘terminal strip’ suitable for the Controls Contractor to make the connections in the field.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 74 13-6
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2.10 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM A. Refrigerant: R-410A refrigerant. B. Compressors: 1. Scroll type with thermal overload protection, independently circuited, and carry a 5 year non-prorated warranty. 2. Compressors shall be mounted in an isolated service compartment which can be accessed without affecting unit operation. Lockable hinged compressor access doors shall be fabricated of double wall, rigid polyurethane foam insulated panels. 3. Unit shall include a variable capacity scroll compressor (using ‘digital-scroll’ technology) on the lead refrigeration circuit which shall be capable of modulation from 10-100% of its capacity. 4. Isolated from the base pan with the compressor manufacturer’s recommended rubber vibration isolators. C. Refrigerant Circuits: 1. Each circuit shall be equipped with thermostatic expansion valve type refrigerant flow control. 2. Each circuit shall be equipped with automatic reset low pressure and manual reset high pressure refrigerant safety controls, Schrader type service fittings on both the high pressure and low pressure sides, and factory installed liquid line filter driers. 3. Lead circuit shall be provided with modulating hot gas reheat coil, modulating valves, electronic controller, supply air temperature sensor and a dehumidification control signal terminal which allow the unit to have a dehumidification mode of operation, which includes supply air temperature control to prevent supply air temperature swings and overcooling of the space. 2.11 ENERGY RECOVERY A. Unit shall contain a factory mounted and tested ‘sensible-only’energy recovery wheel. The energy recovery wheel shall be mounted in a rigid frame containing the wheel drive motor, drive belt, wheel seals and bearings. Frame shall slide out for service and removal from the cabinet. B. The energy recovery component shall incorporate a rotary wheel in an insulated cassette frame complete with seals, drive motor and drive belt. C. Wheels shall be wound continuously with one flat and one structured layer in an ideal parallel plate geometry providing laminar flow and minimum pressure drop-to-efficiency ratios. The layers shall be effectively captured in stainless steel wheel frames or aluminum and stainless steel segment frames that provide a rigid and self-supporting matrix. D. Wheels shall be provided with removable energy transfer matrix. Wheel frame construction shall be a welded hub, spoke and rim assembly of stainless, plated and/or coated steel and shall be self-supporting without matrix segments in place. Segments shall be removable without the use of tools to facilitate maintenance and cleaning. Wheel bearings shall be selected to provide an L-10 life in excess of 400,000 hours. Rim shall be continuous rolled stainless steel and the wheel shall be connected to the shaft by means of taper locks.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 74 13-7
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
E. All diameter and perimeter seals shall be provided as part of the cassette assembly and shall be factory set. Drive belts of stretch urethane shall be provided for wheel rim drive without the need for external tensioners or adjustment. F. The energy recovery cassette shall be an Underwriters Laboratories Recognized Component for electrical and fire safety. The wheel drive motor shall be an Underwriters Laboratory Recognized Component and shall be mounted in the cassette frame and supplied with a service connector or junction box. Thermal performance shall be certified by the manufacturer in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 84, Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers and AHRI Standard 1060, Rating Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment. Cassettes shall be listed in the AHRI Certified Products. G. Energy recovery wheel cassette shall carry a 5 year non-prorated warranty. H. Unit shall include 4 inch thick, pleated panel outside air filters with an ASHRAE efficiency of 30% and MERV rating of 7, upstream of the wheels. (Unit shall include 2 inch thick, pleated panel outside air and exhaust air filters with an ASHRAE efficiency of 30% and MERV rating of 7, upstream of the wheels.) I. Hinged service access door shall allow access to the wheel(s). J. Total energy recovery wheels shall be coated with silica gel desiccant permanently bonded by a process without the use of binders or adhesives, which may degrade desiccant performance. The substrate shall be lightweight polymer and shall not degrade nor require additional coatings for application in marine or coastal environments. Coated segments shall be washable with detergent or alkaline coil cleaner and water. Desiccant shall not dissolve nor deliquesce in the presence of water or high humidity. 2.12 CONTROLS A. Temperature controls will be provided by the temperature controls contractor. Refrigeration operating and safety controls are to be provided by this manufacturer and enabled by the temperature controls contractor. Energy recovery wheel defrost controls are to be provided and enabled by this manufacturer. Energy recovery wheel operating controls will be provided by the controls contractor. Wheel variable speed drive is to be provided by this contractor. Exhaust fan variable frequency drive provided by this section. All components and controls are to be factory-provided and wired to a terminal strip for field-connection by the controls contractor. B. Unit shall be provided with phase and brown-out protection to shut down all motors in the unit if the phases are more than 10% out of balance on voltage, or the voltage is more than 10% under design voltage or on phase reversal. C. 5 minute anti-short cycle delay timer for each stage. D. 20 second between stage delay timers for each stage. 2.13 ELECTRICAL A. Provide control panel with all fan and compressor motor starters with thermal overload protection, control transformer, controls, and safeties. B. Unit shall be provided with a factory installed and field wired 115 volt, 15 amp ground fault service receptacle C. Provide single point power connection. D. Unit disconnect is to be provided by Division 26. Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 74 13-8
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with ARI 435. C. Furnish roof curb to roofing contractor. Roofing contractor shall install and flash curb to roof. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
23 74 13-9
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 25 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR INTEGRATED AUTOMATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
WORK INCLUDES A. Furnishing labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation of an extension of the existing temperature control and building automation system as shown on the drawings and as specified in Division 25. B. All work to be complete and is to be left in operating condition. C. Include all parts and labor, which are incidental and necessary for a complete and operable installation even though not specifically mentioned in the Contract Documents. D. Some equipment and materials provided under Division 23, 25 or Division 26 may require composite work crews because of trade jurisdiction. Where this occurs, include in the bid this portion of the composite crew labor costs. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to review Division 23, 25 and Division 26 Contract Documents to determine where these composite crews are required. E. Obtain all temporary and permanent permits and licenses required in connection with this Division’s work. Pay all fees and expenses required for such permits and licenses. F. Request inspections as required by regulating agencies and/or regulations. Pay all charges for inspections by regulating agencies of installations of plans specifications. G. Include State and Local sales taxes in the bid. Keep accurate records of these taxes and furnish such records to the Owner upon request. H. Provide the Owner with a certificate of final inspection and approval by enforcement authorities. I. Furnish labor, equipment, and materials required for cutting, demolition, removal, patching, and restoration work necessary to accomplish and complete all demolition, including any relocation or reuse of existing materials, equipment, systems, as well as the disposition of salvaged materials or debris.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. General Provisions are specifically applicable to all Division 25 Sections. B. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to all work of Division 25 and are an integral part of this Section. Where the conditions specified are at variance with other Divisions, Section 25 05 00 takes precedence. Section 25 05 00 specifies conditions, procedures, equipment and material particular to the mechanical work and applies to all mechanical work of the Contract Documents. C. Division 0 and 1 and Section 25 05 00 and all Addenda form a part of and apply to all contracts or sub-contracts relating to Division 25 work. Copy these documents to all Sub-contractors receiving other Sections of Division 25.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192 99% Owner Review
25 05 00-1
December 21, 2012 R11-1036.000
D. Where a Specification Section refers to other Sections under the Article on “Related Sections”, this is done for Contractor’s convenience only. It shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibilities stated in other Sections of the Specifications, even though these Sections are not specifically referenced. The Contractor is responsible for all information contained in this Division’s Specifications as well as for information contained in all other Divisions. 1.3
WORK SEQUENCE A. Install work in phases during the construction period coordinate mechanical schedule and operations with Owner, Architect/Engineer and Prime Contractor.
1.4
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Meet or exceed all current applicable codes, ordinances and regulations for all installations. Promptly notify the Engineer, in writing, if the contract documents appear to conflict with governing codes and regulations. Contractor assumes all responsibility and costs for correcting non-complying work installed without notifying the Engineer. B. Higher quality of workmanship and materials indicated in the Contract Documents takes precedence over that allowed in referenced codes and standards. C. Perform all work in compliance with the currently adopted version of the following codes and standards for this project: National Electric Code NFPA 90A Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems NFPA 101 Life Safety Code Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations State and Local Building Codes State and Local Electrical Codes State and Local Fire Codes and Regulations State and Local Mechanical Codes State Industrial Commission Regulations State Energy Code AIA Guidelines
1.5
REFERENCES A. Use the Standard where referenced in the specifications by the following abbreviations: AABC – Associated Air Balance Council ADC – Air Diffusion Council AIA – American Institute of Architects AMCA – Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. ANSI – American National Standards Institute ASHRAE – American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME – American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM – American Society of Testing and Materials EPA – Environmental Protection Agency FM – Factory Mutual IEEE – Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IES – Illuminating Engineering Society of North America ICEA – International Cable Engineers Association IRI – Industrial Risk Insurance
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192 99% Owner Review
25 05 00-2
December 21, 2012 R11-1036.000
NEBB – National Environmental Balancing Bureau NBFU – National Bureau of Fire Underwriters NBS – National Bureau of Standards NEMA – National Electrical Manufacturers Association NSC – National Safety Council OSHA – Occupational Safety and Health Administration SMACNA – Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association UL – Underwriter’s Laboratories 1.6
DEFINITIONS A. Contract Documents: References to Contract Documents refers to a complete set of Drawings and Specifications for the entire Project. Drawings and Specifications are intended to supplement one another. Provide items shown on the Drawings but not mentioned in the Specifications and items mentioned but not shown the same as if they were both mentioned and shown. Bid the most expensive interpretation of a conflict between Drawings and Specifications so the conflict can be resolved with a deduct rather than an add to the contract amount. B. Dimensions: Arrangement of equipment, accessories, piping and ductwork on the Drawings is generally diagrammatic unless the Drawings include dimensions. Do not scale the Drawings. Field verify all dimensions at the site to locate new and existing work. C. Furnish: To obtain, coordinate, submit the necessary drawings, deliver to the job site in new condition ready for installation, unload and unpack, and guarantee. D. Install: To receive at the job site, store, assemble, erect, set in place, anchor, apply, finish, protect, clean, test, start-up, and make ready for Owner’s use. E. Provide: To furnish and install. F. Responsibility: Where verbs such as “furnish”, “provide”, “install”, or “use” appear in the Contract Documents, they mean, “The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish, provide, install, or use…..” unless the requirement is introduced by a phrase, sentence or heading specifically identifying the requirement as the responsibility of someone else.
1.7
SUBMITTALS A. Substitutions 1. Submit written requests to use products not listed in the Specifications to the Engineer no later than ten (10) calendar days prior to the bid opening. Submit detailed information for proposed material or equipment. 2. Accepted substitutions will be incorporated in an Addendum to the Contract Documents. 3. Contractor is responsible for dimensional differences, weights, electrical requirements and any other resulting changes, when using equipment other than that scheduled on the Drawings. Contractor is responsible for any additional costs incurred as a result of substitutions, including other Contractors and Architect/Engineer fees. 4. Material and equipment not listed in the Specifications or accepted in an Addendum will be removed and replaced at no cost or inconvenience to the Owner. B. List of Materials, Equipment and Sub-Contractors
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192 99% Owner Review
25 05 00-3
December 21, 2012 R11-1036.000
1. Submit a complete list of all materials, equipment, and sub-contractors, proposed to be used on this project, to the Engineer within seven (7) calendar days of the award of contract or written notice to proceed. 2. Acceptance of items on the list are considered final, unless additional information or submissions are required by the Engineer. Unacceptable items will be rejected and resubmitted. C. Pay Request Cost Breakdown 1. Provide Schedule of Values for the utilization of submitting a “Pay Request”. Allocate appropriate share of overhead and profit to each item. Separate each item into labor and material. 2. Submit cost breakdown on AIA document G703. Provide minimum breakdown as indicated below. Provide additional breakdown as required for clarity or as requested by the Engineer. D. Submittals for Review 1. Submit in accordance with Division 0 and Division 1. Submit drawings to the Engineer for review within 30 calendar days after award of Contract. 2. Include project name, name of Architect, name of Engineer, contractor, sub-contractor, manufacturer, supplier and sales representative, include name, address, and phone number for the sales representative. Clearly identify section number and description of equipment submitted. Shop drawings not including all of this information will be returned without review. 3. Examine all shop drawings noting capacity, arrangement and physical dimensions. Clearly mark all relevant items on catalog data and cross-out unrelated information. Review and stamp shop drawing prior to submitting to the Engineer. 4. Submit a minimum of six (6) sets of shop drawings. The Engineer will distribute as follows: a. Engineer – One (1) copy. b. Architect – One (1) copy. c. Prime Contractor – Remaining copies (two copies to be incorporated into the O&M Manuals. 5. All shop drawings must be reviewed and accepted by the Engineer prior to fabrication and installation. 6. Submittals will be reviewed with the following actions: a. NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN—Indicates the Submittal appears to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation. b. MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED—Indicates that the Submittals, after noted corrections are made, would appear to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without an increase in Contract Sum or Time. c. REJECTED—Indicates that the Submittal does not appear to conform to the specifications, and that a complete resubmittal is required. The Contractor shall not proceed with fabrication or procurement. Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192 99% Owner Review
25 05 00-4
December 21, 2012 R11-1036.000
d. NO ENGINEER ACTION REQUIRED—Indicates the Contractor may proceed without review of the Submittal based on provisions of the Contract Documents. 7. Allow a minimum of fourteen (14) calendar days for the Engineer to review the shop drawings. Time is from the receipt of drawings in the Engineers office until they are shipped out of the office. 8. If the Engineer rejects (Make corrections noted/Submit corrected copy, Rejected/Submit specified item) two (2) times for the same section the Engineer will be compensated for the additional reviews. Compensation will be incorporated by Change Order and deducted from the Contractor’s application for payment. Contractor is responsible for delays caused by the resubmittal process. 9. Submit shop drawings for the following equipment and systems: Section 25 10 00 25 35 00 25 95 00 1.8
Description Integrated Automation Network Equipment Instrumentation, Control Valves, Valve Actuators, Damper Actuators Control Sequences
CAD DRAWING FILES A. The mechanical CAD drawing files prepared by Hallberg Engineering, Inc. for this project are Instruments of Service of Hallberg Engineering, Inc. for use solely with respect to this project and will not be made available to the Contractor. B. Request CAD drawing files of Architectural floor plans, elevations, sections, etc directly from the Architect.
1.9
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Initiate, maintain and supervise all safety precautions required with this work in accordance with the regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and other governing agencies. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not remove or disturb any asbestos containing materials from the project. Immediately stop work and notify the Owner if asbestos containing materials are suspected. C. Accomplish all work of cutting, removal, demolition, relocation, patching, and restoration by using only mechanics skilled in the trade required. Provide for the safety of the existing building and personnel, as well as for new construction as a result of work, procedures, operations or activities under this Contract. D. Where the work of removals, demolition, cutting and similar work involves structural considerations, consult with Engineer. Exercise extreme care to avoid damage and preserve the safety of the structure and of all personnel. Particular care must be taken where the demolition or removals occur adjacent to occupied areas. E. Utilize competent and qualified technical assistance to develop safe methods and techniques to accomplish the work, including temporary shoring and supports, methods of removal and other considerations. Design and place all permanent or temporary supports to carry all loads down to sound bearing.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192 99% Owner Review
25 05 00-5
December 21, 2012 R11-1036.000
1.10 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Inspections: 1. Before submitting a proposal on the work contemplated, examine the site of the proposed work and become thoroughly familiar with existing conditions and limitations. No extra compensation will be allowed because of misunderstanding as to the amount of work involved nor bidder’s lack of knowledge of existing conditions which could have been discovered or reasonably anticipated prior to bidding. 2. Mechanical equipment and systems shown on the drawings as existing, have been based on existing plans, and may not be installed as originally shown. It is the contractor’s responsibility to visit the site and make exact determination of the existence, location and condition of such facilities prior to submitting a bid. B. Correlation of Work: 1. Consult the drawings and specifications of Division 26 and other trades for correlating information and lay out work so that it will coordinate with other trades. Verify dimensions and conditions (i.e., finished ceiling heights, footing and foundation elevations, beam depths, etc.) with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Notify the Architect/Engineer of any conflicts that can not be resolved, in the field, by affected trades. Replacement of work due to lack of coordination and failure to verify existing conditions will be completed at no cost to the Owner. 2. Where work must be replaced due to the failure of the Contractor to verify the conditions existing on the job, such replacement must be accomplished at no cost to the Owner. This applies to shop fabricated work as well as to work fabricated in place. 3. Throughout the course of the work, minor changes and adjustments to the installation may be requested by the Engineer. The Contractor shall make adjustments without additional cost to the Owner, where such adjustments are necessary to the proper installation and operation within the intent of the Contract Documents. This does not include work already completed. 4. Equipment outlines shown on detail plans of 1/4"=1'-0" scale or larger and/or dimensions indicated on the plans are limiting dimensions. Do not install any equipment that exceeds the equipment outlines shown or reduces indicated clearances. 5. Obtain exact location of connection to equipment, furnished by others, from the person furnishing the equipment. 6. Drawings and Specifications are complementary and what is called for in either is as binding as if called for in both. 7. Include the better quality, greater quantity or higher cost for an item or arrangement where a disagreement exists in the Drawings and Specifications. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Guarantee and maintain the stability of work and materials and keep same in perfect repair and condition for the period of one (1) year after the final completion of the work as evidenced by issuance of the final certificate by the Architect.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192 99% Owner Review
25 05 00-6
December 21, 2012 R11-1036.000
B. Defects of any kind due to faulty work or materials appearing during the above mentioned period must be immediately made good by the Contractor at his own expense to the entire satisfaction of the Owner and Architect and Engineer. Include damage to the finish or the building resulting from the original defect or repairs. C. Guarantee does not apply to injuries occurring after final acceptance and due to wind, fire, violence, abuse or carelessness or other Contractors or their employees or the agents of the Owner. D. Guarantee does not apply where other guarantees for different lengths of time are specified in other Sections. 1.12 ELECTRICAL A. All high and low voltage wiring necessary for the complete controls system installation and function is to be the entire responsibility of the controls contractor (Division 25). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER’S A. ‘Andover’ by Control Services of MN (UHL Co., Maple Grove, MN) B. Substitutions: None.
2.2
DESCRIPTION OF THE SYSTEM A. The District is currently controlled by an ‘Andover’ by Control Services of MN (UHL Co., Maple Grove, MN). It is the intent to extend and integrate the new systems/controls with the current system(s) in operation. B. The entire system is to be fully BACnet compatible.
2.3
DEMOLITION A. Remove salvageable materials and other items designated for reuse or relocation by the applicable trades and relocated to the new location. B. If the new location is not ready to receive the relocated materials, store and protect from damage until they can be incorporated into the new work. C. If the Owner is unable to forego the use of any existing items at the normal time for relocation, make all preparations for that work and then delay relocation until a time approved by the Owner or until other facilities are available to the Owner. D. Carefully remove, clean, salvage and preserve all materials indicated to be reused, or which will be needed for reuse to match existing work. E. Exercise extreme care in removals to prevent damage which would make materials unsuitable for reuse. F. Replace all damaged materials, which were shown, tagged or needed for reuse, with equivalent.
2.4
UNSALVAGEABLE MATERIALS A. Remove all unsalvageable materials in a manner that will avoid damage to materials or equipment which will remain. Completely remove from the site as approved by and scheduled with the Owner. B. Legally dispose of all unsalvageable materials away from the site.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192 99% Owner Review
25 05 00-7
December 21, 2012 R11-1036.000
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A. Continuity of Service: 1. Coordinate/schedule all work with the Owner to minimize any disruptions. Confine all interruptions to the smallest possible area. Provide temporary connections if required to provide continuity of service. 2. Inspect all areas affected by the interruptions and return all automatically controlled equipment, electrically operated equipment to the same operating condition prior to the interruption. B. Use of Facility: 1. Do not disturb normal use of the facility, except within the immediate construction area. Keep walks, driveways, entrances, etc. free and clear of equipment, material and debris. 2. Store all equipment and material in a place and manner that minimizes congestion and is approved by the Owner.
3.2
DEMOLITION A. The Drawings generally indicate the extent of demolition, removals, relocations and cutting. B. The Drawings are not to be construed as indicating all required work, nor indicating all conditions or details which might be encountered during progress of the work of this Contract. C. Examine all areas where demolition is to occur to determine the actual conditions and requirements. D. Demolish and remove existing construction as shown or indicated or as required to accomplish the work. E. Where new work is to be installed in or adjacent to existing construction or when existing work is to be replaced, remove or cut the existing construction as necessary to complete the work under the Contract. F. Execute the work with care. Remove and replace existing construction that is to remain which is loosened, cracked, or otherwise damaged or defaced, or is rendered unsuitable for its intended use, as a result of the work at no additional cost to the Owner. G. Clean demolition areas and remove debris, waste and rubbish from the building at the conclusion of each day's work. Transport debris and rubbish in a manner that prevents the spread of dust. Do not store or permit debris storage at the site. Do not burn or permit the burning of debris, rubbish or waste at the site. Keep adjacent areas unencumbered and clean. Keep all construction areas essentially broom clean. H. Based on a site inspection and the Contract Documents, the Contractor is responsible for the removal or rerouting of all anticipated mechanical work, exposed and concealed. I. Where unanticipated mechanical work is exposed during the removal of partitions, walls, floors or ceilings, the removal or rerouting of this work shall be accomplished by the Contractor under the direction of the Engineer. J. Patch or otherwise restore disturbed existing construction and surfaces. Patching or restoration shall be carried to natural breaks. Where existing construction is removed, cut or otherwise disturbed, patch all such disturbed and damaged surfaces.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192 99% Owner Review
25 05 00-8
December 21, 2012 R11-1036.000
K. Perform patching work by skilled mechanics experienced in the particular type of work involved. Conform to the standards of the Specifications where applicable, and where not specified, conform to the highest standards of the trade. L. Patch existing construction to match existing work, but always provide new materials and accomplish the work according to current standards. Examine existing surfaces before proceeding with the work. Report all conditions to the engineer, architect or owner, where existing materials, colors and finishes cannot be matched, but do not proceed until receiving instructions. M. Repair existing construction that has been damaged as a result of the work to the extent required to match existing, undamaged construction. N. All holes created by removal of existing systems, control wiring, tubing, etc., shall be patched and fire caulked. O. Where existing wall devices are removed patch and paint wall to match or provide stainless steel coverplate. P. Remove pneumatic lines back to main and cap. Owner and Contractor are to verify typical runtime of air compressor before work is started. 3.3
INSTALLATION A. Material and Workmanship 1. Provide new material and equipment, unless noted otherwise. Protect equipment and material from damage, dirt and the weather. 2. Provide the highest quality workmanship and perform all work only by skilled mechanics. Install material and equipment in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations, instructions and current standards. 3. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or workmanship not in accordance with the Contract Documents, before or after installation. B. Equipment: 1. Install material and equipment in accordance with the Manufacturer’s written instructions. C. Cutting and Patching: 1. Perform all cutting and patching necessary to work, unless specifically delegated to the General Contractor. Obtain special permission from the engineer before cutting structural members or finished material. Perform all patching in such a manner as to leave no visible trace and return the area affected to the condition of undisturbed work. Perform all patching by workers experienced, skilled, and licensed for the particular type of work involved. Inferior work will not be accepted. 2. Patch all holes left as a result of demolition of mechanical equipment and devices. 3. Drill all holes in masonry with rotary drill. Impact tools are not allowed. Core drill all holes in masonry and concrete for mechanical penetrations. Provide and dispose of all water required for core drilling. Coordinate with other trades to prevent damage from water. 4. Prevent the spread of dust, debris, and other material into adjacent areas. 5. Replace all ceiling tiles damaged during installation of work, with new tile. D. Painting:
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192 99% Owner Review
25 05 00-9
December 21, 2012 R11-1036.000
1. Refinish all mechanical equipment damaged during shipping and/or installation to its original condition. Remove all rust; prime, and paint per manufacturer's recommendations for finish equal to original. E. Record Drawings: 1. Provide Record Drawings in accordance with the requirements of Division 0 and Division 1. 2. Maintain a complete set of Record Drawings showing all modifications to the Contract Documents. Drawings will be stamped “Record Drawings” and used only for that purpose. 3. As work progresses, record all changes or deviations from the contract drawings in a neat and legible manner as follows: a. Record exact location and elevation of underground mechanical systems including changes in direction, cleanouts etc., by reference to building lines, curbs, walks, and other permanent reference points. b. Record routing of concealed and exposed above ground mechanical systems where it varies from the Contract Documents. 4. The Engineer may recommend withholding payment if Record Drawings are not being maintained. 5. Submit Record Drawings to the Engineer for review at completion of the Work. Submit final record drawings as part of the Operation and Maintenance Manual package after the completion of the project. 3.4
TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Do not use heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems provided in this scope of work for temporary heating, ventilating and air conditioning during construction.
3.5
PROTECTION A. Protect openings and equipment from obstruction, breakage, misuse, damage or blemishes. Protect materials and equipment immediately upon receipt at the job site or immediately after they have been removed from their shipping containers. Unless noted otherwise, keep them clean and undamaged until final acceptance of the entire Project by the Owner. When a portion of the building is occupied by the Owner before substantial completion of the entire Project, make arrangements to transfer responsibility for protection and housekeeping for the occupied portion. B. Contractor is responsible for any damage to mechanical equipment, materials or work until final acceptance of the entire project by the Owner.
3.6
CLEAN UP A. Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish, caused by his employees or work, at all times. Remove rubbish, tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials from and about the building, and leave work areas "broom clean" or its equivalent upon completion of the work. Clean mechanical equipment and remove temporary identification. B. In case of dispute, the Owner will remove the rubbish and charge the cost to the Contractor.
3.7
START-UP A. Perform testing, adjusting and balancing in accordance with that Section.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192 99% Owner Review
25 05 00-10
December 21, 2012 R11-1036.000
B. Operate equipment and systems in all their operating modes, to verify proper operation, prior to final field observation and Owner instructions. Notify the Engineer, in writing, that all systems have been tested and are functioning and operating properly. 3.8
TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING A. Provide assistance to Test, Adjusting and Balancing Contractor by making adjustments to system and system components required for achieving design performance. B. If acceptable performance of any test is not achieved, make the necessary corrections and the test shall be repeated until acceptable performance is achieved.
3.9
FINAL FIELD OBSERVATION A. A final field observation of the mechanical systems will be required before Contract Closeout. Request a final observation by the Engineer after all systems are fully completed and operational. The Engineer will schedule a field observation and generate a list of items to be corrected or completed before Contract Closeout. B. If the Engineer is requested to make a final field observation by the Contractor, and the Engineer finds the work is not complete enough to perform that observation, the Contractor will compensate the Engineer for his time. The Contractor will then perform the necessary work to complete the project and again request a Final Field Observation.
3.10 TRAINING A. Fully instruct the Owner's designated personnel in the operation of the system at the time it is put into service. Provide an application engineer to instruct Owner personnel of the systems and equipment. Training to be performed by factory-trained and authorized personnel. B. Operator’s training to include (but not limited to) such items as the following: modification of data displays, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data, execution of commands and request of logs. Provide this training to a minimum of four (4) persons of the Operating Staff. C. Provide sixteen (16) total hours of on-site training. D. Include documentation of instructions in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. E. Provide written documentation, signed by the installing contractor and two (2) Owner’s representatives. Documentation to include dates and hours when training was completed and persons attending the training. 3.11 UTILITY REBATES A. This Contractor will be responsible to secure, on behalf of the Owner, utility rebates associated with the controls design. This is to include all submittals to the utility companies including substantiation where required and making all necessary arrangements on behalf of the Owner. 3.12 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Submit to the Engineer two (2) Operating and Maintenance manuals. Submit in portfolio form neatly edited with similar equipment grouped, tabbed and indexed. Provide printed or typewritten materials. Provide the following in each manual:
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192 99% Owner Review
25 05 00-11
December 21, 2012 R11-1036.000
1. Shop drawings, approved manufacturer's bulletins, and other appropriate data from specific manufacturer of each piece of equipment furnished and/or installed. Shop drawings, manufacturer's bulletin, and other data shall be appropriate marked to reflect the "as-built" condition. Cross out or delete all information shown on shop drawings or literature not applying to this specific project. 2. Copies of manufacturer’s warranties 3. Operating instruction for equipment. 4. Wiring and installation instructions for equipment. 5. Recommended maintenance schedules and procedures for equipment. 6. Recommended trouble shooting procedures for equipment. 7. Equipment parts list. 8. Settings/adjustments/calibrations for systems as required. 9. Local equipment suppliers/reps names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 10. Equipment manufacturers names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 11. Sub-contractors names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 12. Test reports. 13. Certifications. 14. Test and balance reports. 15. System validation reports. 16. Statement from Contractor that all incomplete items noted in Engineer’s Final Field Observation Report has been completed. 17. Statement from Owner confirming completion of Training. 18. Refer to individual Sections in Division 25 for additional requirements. B. Record Drawings: Submit Record Drawings. C. Extra Materials: Refer to individual Specification Sections for extra materials to be provided to the Owner. D. System Startup: Refer to individual Specification Sections for system startup requirements. 3.13 ELECTRONIC AS-BUILTS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide an electronic copy on a CD-ROM of an approved copy of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. CD-ROM to be book-marked per specification section and equipment type. Format of the files are to be in PDF format. B. Provide an electronic copy on a CD-ROM of the approved as-built drawings. CD-ROM to be book-marked per sheet and the files are to be in PDF format.
END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192 99% Owner Review
25 05 00-12
December 21, 2012 R11-1036.000
SECTION 25 10 00 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION NETWORK EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. General product description.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 25 05 00 – Common Work Results for Integrated Automation. B. Section 25 95 00 – Integrated Automation Control Sequences for HVAC. C. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.
1.3
REFERENCES A. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. C. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for a complete and operating temperature control system, utilizing, direct digital controls, as shown on the drawings and as described herein. B. All labor, material and equipment necessary to meet the functional intent of the system, as specified herein and as shown on the drawings, shall be included. Drawings are diagrammatic only. Equipment and labor not specifically referred to herein or on the plans, that are required to meet the functional intent shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner.
1.5
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 25 05 00: Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide data for each system component and software module. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations, and trunk data conductors. 2. List connected data points, including connected control unit and input device. 3. Indicate system graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, and operator notations. 4. Show system configuration with peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams, modems, and interconnections. 5. Indicate description and sequence of operation of operating, user, and application software.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
D. Specification Compliance: Provide paragraph by paragraph specification compliance report. Report shall indicate for each numbered paragraph, how the proposed system meets the criteria of the paragraph. Format shall be: 1. Comply - without exception. 2. Qualify - meet the function intent. Identify all differences in specific functions stated and provide description of what is excluded or how the system will meet the function specified. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: manufactured components. 1.6
Indicate manufacturer's installation instructions for all
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 25 05 00 - Project Close-out procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including control units, thermostats, and sensors. 1. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences. 2. Include data specified in "Submittals" in final "Record Documents" form. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Include interconnection wiring diagrams complete field installed systems with identified and numbered, system components and devices. 2. Include keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. 3. Include inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances. D. Application Software Documentation: AutoCad blueprint documentation of the software application for each DDC controller. Documentation provided shall include block software flowcharts, showing the interconnection between each of the control algorithms and sequences of operation. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owners name and registered with manufacturer.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Installation, supervision, calibration and checkout of the system shall be by the sole representative or local branch office of the temperature control company. Bids by wholesalers, contractors and franchised dealers of any firm whose principal business is not that of manufacturing and installing environmental control systems are not acceptable. Installer specializing and experience in DDC control system installation for not less than five years. C. System: Composed of standard products of the manufacturer to insure ongoing parts availability and trained technical support. D. Service: Furnish proof of having company -trained servicemen available to handle service calls within four (4) hours of notification. Twenty-four (24) hour service capability, 365 days per year.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1.8
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products of the FMS shall be provided with the following agency approvals: 1. UL-916; Energy Management Systems 2. UL-873; Temperature Indication and Regulating Equipment 3. UL-864; Fire Signaling and Smoke Control Systems 4. CSA; Canadian Standards Association 5. FCC, Part 15, Subpart J, Class A Computing Devices B. Products shall be labeled with the appropriate approval markings. C. System installation shall comply with NFPA, NEMA, Local and National codes.
1.9
SEQUENCING A. Sequence work to provide sufficient time for test and balancing to be completed before Substantial Completion of Project. Provide written notification to Test and Balance Contractor that facility management system is sufficiently complete in order for him to perform his work. B. Provide copies of Point Verification and Sequence Verification to Engineer and TAB contractor. This will serve as written notification to the TAB contractor to begin testing, adjusting and balancing.
1.10 SCHEDULING A. Provide assistance during Test and Balancing phase of project. Refer to Section 23 05 93. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Section 25 05 00 - Warranties. B. Owner shall provide a dedicated voice grade telephone extension for remote communications during the Warranty period. Contractor shall provide and implement an auto-answer, audo-dial modem system for purposes of remote diagnostics and notification of desired expectations. C. Provide one year extended warranty and preventative maintenance agreement for the temperature control systems. Any manufacturing defects arising during this extended warranty period shall be corrected without cost to the Owner. The preventative maintenance agreement shall include a minimum of quarterly service visits include defective parts replacement and commence upon expiration of one year warranty required by Section 25 05 00. 1.12 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Provide service and maintenance of facility management system for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. B. Provide four complete inspections, one in each season for one year(s), to inspect, calibrate, and adjust controls as required, and submit written reports. 1.13 PROTECTION OF SOFTWARE RIGHTS A. Prior to delivery of software, the Owner and the party providing the software will enter into a software license agreement with provisions for the following: 1. Limiting use of software to equipment provided under these specifications. 2. Limiting copying. Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3. Preserving confidentiality. 4. Prohibiting transfer to a third party. 1.14 WORK INCLUDED A. The successful contractor is to supply a totally native BACnet-Web-based system, based on a distributed control system in accordance with this specification. The operator’s workstation, all building controllers, application controllers, and all input/output devices shall communicate using the protocols and network standards communicating through BACnet MS/TP communications protocol. B. Provide all necessary hardware and software to meet the system’s functional specifications. C. Prepare individual hardware layouts, interconnection drawings, and software configuration from project design data. D. Implement the detailed design for all analog and binary objects, system databases, graphic displays, logs, and management reports based on control descriptions, logic drawings, configuration data, and bid documents. E. Design, provide, and install all equipment cabinets, panels, data communication network cables needed, and all associated hardware. F. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between supplied cabinets, application controllers, and input/output devices. G. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between all operator’s terminals and peripheral devices (such as printers, etc.) supplied under this section. H. Provide complete manufacturer’s specifications for all items that are supplied. Include vendor name of every item supplied. I. Provide supervisory specialists and technicians at the job site to assist in all phases of system installation, startup, and commissioning. J. Provide a comprehensive operator and technician training program as described herein. K. Provide as-built documentation, operator’s terminal software, diagrams, and all other associated project operational documentation (such as technical manuals) on approved media, the sum total of which accurately represents the final system. L. Provide new sensors, dampers, valves, and install only new electronic actuators. No used components shall be used as any part or piece of installed system. 1.15 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. A distributed logic control system complete with all software and hardware functions shall be provided and installed. System shall be completely based on ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 1352001, BACnet. This system is to control all mechanical equipment, including all unitary equipment such as all air handlers, boilers, chillers, and any other listed equipment using native BACnet-compliant components. System and all software is to be web-based. B. The entire Facility Management and Control System (FMCS) shall be comprised of two components: 1. A network of interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers communicating on a BACnet communication network using MS/TP PHP or PUP EIA-485 network. Refer to 2.1 for approved manufacturers. Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2. A host computer running the District standard Graphic User Interface. This GUI shall communicate with the DDC components via BACnet, MS-TP, PHP, or PUP, EIA-485. C. Building controllers shall include complete energy management software, including scheduling building control strategies with optimum start and logging routines. All energy management software and firmware shall be resident in field hardware and shall not be dependent on the operator’s terminal. Operator’s terminal software is to be used for access to field-based energy management functions only. Provide zone-by-zone direct digital logic control of space temperature, scheduling, runtime accumulation, equipment alarm reporting, and override timers for after-hours usage. Network controller shall have Web User Interface services to
support many simultaneous users over intranet via standard web browser. D. All application controllers for every terminal unit air handler, all central plant equipment (Boilers, Chillers) and any other piece of controlled equipment shall be fully programmable. Application controllers shall be mounted next to controlled equipment and communicate with building controller via BACnet LAN, PHP or PUP EIA-485. All building and network controllers shall be compatible with existing IT network security software. E. Room sensors shall be architecturally pleasing, sense temperature, allow operator to override system and adjust temperature setpoint, and include a jack that allows the service technician to adjust any zone parameter. Include all wiring for sensor and field service tool. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS/INSTALLERS A. Andover (Uhl Company, Maple Grove, MN). B. Substitutions: None.
2.2
BUILDING AREA CONTROLLER (AC) A. The AC shall be capable of communicating to all specified Programmable Unitary Controllers (PUCs) and Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) without the addition of external components, and shall operate entirely independent of the Color Graphic Software (CGS) operator interface. B. The AC shall include seamless integration of all types of unitary controllers specified, facilitating connection of multiple networks, and providing a real-time multitasking environment for execution of high-level centralized energy management functions including: 1. Customized report generation. 2. Time-based trending 3. Maximum demand predictive algorithms 4. Central system optimization 5. Event-based trending C. Programming and database entry shall be object oriented in design, providing a uniform appearance between different types of input, output, setpoint, program and global variables D. Minimum two (2) device communication ports, permitting direct electrical connection of all specified unitary controllers and capability to operate at different communication speeds and protocols shall be provided.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
E. Future incremental expansion of the system shall be easily accomplished by addition of networkable controllers to the proposed system architecture. The AC shall permit upgrading through the addition of software drivers, to ASHRAE BACnet protocol within one year of release of the protocol at no cost. F. Hardware Requirements shall be as follows: 1. A parallel printer port with a DB25S connector 2. Minimum one (1) EIA-232D serial port providing connection of dumb or VT100 type terminal or direct connection to the CGS operator interface or additional serial printer 3. Minimum four (4) EIA-485 dual trunk serial ports, providing maximum flexibility and future expansion potential without the owner incurring additional cost. Each port shall have a plug-in socket connection, switchable biasing resistors and be provided with both optical and magnetic isolation. Communication speed to PUCs and ASCs shall be user definable between 9600 and 38,400 baud. a. The AC shall be capable of communicating with a minimum of 256 PUCs and ASCs without the addition of external components, and shall be independent of the CGS operator interface. 4. Hard disk drive, including hard disk controller with minimum 800 MB capacity and 60,000 hour MTBF. The hard disk shall be capable of withstanding ten (10) G shock during operation. Systems proposed that do not provide an integral hard disk drive must offer a stand-alone and portable hard disk drive to backup the AC. 5. Facility to accept an Ethernet card for integration of the BAS system into a LAN network. The Ethernet card shall be supplied by the BAS system manufacturer and be fully compatible with the owner's LAN network and be provided with both a BNC Thinnet connection and a DB15S AUI Thicknet connection. The AC software must currently support Ethernet or be easily upgradeable at no additional cost to the client. 6. 32-key, keypad and backlit LCD display with contrast control, to permit local interrogation of information and modification of control parameters. G. Software Requirements shall be as follows: 1. System software shall provide a real-time, multitasking environment comprising of a minimum 32 tasks. System operation shall employ industry standard MS-DOS for the reading and writing of files to and from the floppy drive/hard disk. 2. Tasks shall sequentially access the microprocessor for task completion or a maximum amount of time defined in the operating system. 3. Each EIA-485 port shall have a user specified communication baud rate to 38,400 baud. Each port shall have a multi-protocol capability as necessary to facilitate direct communication with all types of stand-alone controllers specified. 4. The AC shall as a minimum utilize Public Host Protocol (PHP), BACnet MS/TP or Public Unitary Protocol (PUP) to communicate with PUCs and ASCs. Communication protocols that are proprietary to the manufacturer are not acceptable.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00-6
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
5. Each EIA-485 port shall include a system map of the unique identification numbers for every stand-alone controller connected on the network. The map of networked controllers shall be capable of being viewed dynamically through any of the specified operator interface devices. Any networked controllers not responding or communicating shall be easily identified and an associated scan alarm shall be generated. H. Ethernet Communications shall be as follows: 1. Communication via Ethernet shall be performed at 10 Mb/s. Ethernet physical topology shall be compatible with IEEE 802.2 or 802.3 standard. The Ethernet LAN shall be Novell or IP compatible. Systems which are not Novell or IP compatible shall be rejected. 2. Ethernet software in conjunction with the AC resident Ethernet card shall operate on all industry standard physical media and include Thinnet, Thicknet and Fiber Optic network topologies. 3. The system shall be capable of communicating on Token Ring and ARCNet networks. I. Database requirements shall be as follows: 1. The object-oriented database shall allow a privileged user to create, modify, delete, and list the following types of named objects: a. Point names shall have a 24 alpha-numeric character descriptor and a minimum 64 character alpha-numeric character description associated with the point. The address of the PUCs or ASCs shall be user specified, together with channel, applicable engineering units, alarm class, object access privilege level, alarm and return messages. b. Point groups shall be created comprising a minimum 16 named objects, allowing the user to utilize the menu penetration technique to dynamically view and modify point parameters without requiring knowledge of the individual named point descriptors. c. Programs shall be written in a high-level, BASIC-type language. Program logic shall utilize a program reference block, permitting supervision of multiple typical mechanical systems through one program logic block. The program logic blocks shall be self documenting and contain comment statements to assist the user in understanding and modifying existing program logic. d. Alarm classes shall be associated with all named objects. A minimum of 256 alarm classes shall be provided, each class shall be defined by a minimum 3 character name. 1) Classes shall specify whether the incoming alarm is to be recorded in a general or class specific log and whether the alarms will require operator acknowledgment. e. Users shall refer to named user operators. Users shall have a password and a user privilege pattern which is compared with the object privilege pattern to determine access to any other named object. 1) The AC shall provide a language independent menu penetration technique via a direct connect VT100 operator terminal or via Virtual terminal emulation mode from the color graphic station or Ethernet operator interface terminal to create, modify, list or delete named objects within the AC database. A single keystroke shall be required to select a menu option. 2) The LCD front panel keypad display shall indicate current time, date and day of week. A code word shall be entered by the user to access desired information.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00-7
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3) The AC shall maintain separate logs of acknowledged and unacknowledged alarms received for each alarm class. The menu penetration system shall allow the user to list alarm class logs to archive, floppy disk or to delete alarms as required. J. The AC shall support the following types of trends: 1. Infinite trends shall commence sampling data on operator command or automatically scheduled to continuously trend data until similarly commanded to stop or when the maximum number of samples specified by the user is reached. The minimum number of trends available shall be 1000. 2. Circular trends shall continuously sample data when activated. When the last specified data entry is collected, the circular trend shall re-write over the oldest collected data entry. 3. Time anchored trends shall collect data at user specified time intervals. Anchor intervals shall vary between a minimum 1 minute, 15 minute, 30 minute, etc... through daily, weekly, monthly and yearly intervals. 4. Each trend shall have the capability of recording eight measured variables, comprising analog and/or digital values. Each trend shall have a user-specified capability of collecting average values as opposed to instantaneous values. The AC shall generate a trend alarm when trend data is not successfully retrieved. 5. Trended data shall be either displayed through a local operator interface terminal or the printer. The output format shall be user configurable between a numerical display or a strip chart display. The numerical display shall show sample reference, historical value, date and time. The strip chart display shall show the range of numerical values and all references and historical values together for each time interval and date. K. The AC shall include a job scheduler capable of performing the following functions on a scheduled time of day, day of week, month of year and yearly basis or immediately upon request: 1. Broadcast message: A user shall be able to specify the operator port number and send any alpha-numeric messages to the assigned operator port. 2. Data capture: The AC shall be capable of uploading data values in formats compatible with third party software such as Lotus 1-2-3, Excel and Quattro. Data values shall be stored on hard disk files and may be directly uploaded or downloaded to a host portable computer or desktop PC via a direct connect or Ethernet network connection. 3. Download/Upload: The AC shall upload/download individual files containing unitary controller programs and database. 4. Customized report generation: In addition to customized reports created through the applications programming language, the user may manually demand any specific report utilizing the report templates and output the report to the printer and/or the floppy/hard disk drive. 5. Import/Export database objects: All named objects, groups, engineering units and programs shall be capable of being defined on-line or off-line in a laptop or desktop PC. The import/export shall translate on-line to off-line text files and vice versa.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00-8
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
L. The AC shall support the creation of data tables comprising a user-specified number of numerical data values. These tables may reference nonlinear data or be constructed entirely through the application programming language. Data tables shall be capable of being transferred to user customized reports. 2.3
COLOR GRAPHIC SYSTEM (CGS) A. General: The color graphic system shall provide an intuitive, user friendly, mouse driven, operator system permitting the system operators with the authorized privilege access to a logical sequence of dynamic color graphic screens. The logical sequence of screens shall start with a campus layout, followed by an individual building floor plan layout, with graphical links to the equipment within the facility. The graphics shall follow the current District standards B. Communication Capabilities: The CGS shall be capable of speaking multiple protocols over various means. 1. Protocols and communications parameters: The CGS shall be capable of communicating with American Auto-Matrix protocols and other protocols available in the public domain. These protocols shall be available via various hardware connections. a. Public Unitary Protocol (PUP) shall be available via an EIA-485 connection at a minimum communication baud rate of 9600. A communication EIA-232 to EIA-485 converter such as the American Auto-Matrix CC/485 will be necessary for communication. b. Public Host Protocol (PHP) shall be available for communication via an EIA-232 connection at a minimum baud rate of 19200. This protocol shall also be available for modem communications via the PC onboard modem. The CGS shall accept any Windows configured modems and allow for various ports of communication. The CGS shall support multiple modems with the only limitation being the number of ports available on the PC. c. SDP/IPX and SDP/IP shall be available over an industry standard Ethernet connection. The speed and media settings shall be configured by the operating systems settings. d. ASHRAE/ANSI standard 135P BACnet MS/TP protocol shall be available for communications. 2. The CGS shall not be limited to protocols listed above and allow additional protocol drivers to be added, as they become available. 3. The CGS will support full Windows language capabilities and allow the user to view all information in multiple languages. C. Window parameters and peripheral settings: The CGS shall conform to all settings for sound, color schemes and peripheral hardware as configured in Windows. 1. The CGS shall operate on Microsoft Windows NT operating systems. 2. Window background colors and screen background colors shall conform to operating systems settings configured in the Windows Control Panel. 3. The CGS shall support sound cards that are supported by the operating system. All sound settings shall be configured in the operating systems control panel. 4. The CGS shall allow all printing functions to occur over all operating system configured printers including network printers.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00-9
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
5. The CGS shall accept any mouse device supported by the operating system. D. Point Database: The system shall maintain a database of all available system points via an Object Server (ObServer) 1. The ObServer shall be capable of supporting multiple host systems over various communications protocols. 2. The ObServer shall be capable of uploading point information from host panels for use in display assignment. This shall be user initiated. 3. All ObServer points shall be capable of read/write password access within each attribute of available point information. Security will also be provided for ObServer functions. 4. The CGS will allow the operator to store all point information on a single server to be accessed by multiple workstations. Multiple ObServers may be run concurrently on facility servers for distributed network traffic. Multiple ObServers will be able to access each other via the addition of the server’s IP address to the accessing ObServer. Points will not need to be duplicated within the accessing ObServer. Point information between servers will be a seamless operation and network speed shall only be limited by available bandwidth. 5. The ObServer will allow the operator to define alternate names to points within the system for familiarity with real mechanical system names. E. Graphic Screen Viewer: The graphic screen viewer will allow the operator to monitor the facility quickly via graphics that depict the facility layout and mechanical equipment. The viewer will provide real-time display of facility conditions. 1. Graphical Display Performance: The CGS will be capable of the following at a minimum a. The number of graphical screen shall only be limited by the amount of hard drive space on the workstation PC b. There shall be no limit to the amount of information fields displayed in a graphic other than the size of the monitor. c. Each graphic will be capable of refreshing up to 50 points of data within 5 seconds. d. The program will be capable of displaying multiple screens of updated information for simultaneous viewing of systems. e. The screen graphics will be capable of being stored on a single server or on multiple workstations. If stored on a single server, the CGS will allow multiple workstations to access the same graphic and view updated point information without loss of performance. 2. Graphic screens will be capable of the following display cells. Additional cells may be added, as they become available. a. Background screens will be capable of being displayed as bitmaps, GIFs or metafiles. The graphic program will allow the operator to resize the background screen without utilizing another program. b. The graphic builder will allow the operator to add text utilizing all available operating system fonts, colors and sizes. c. A scale cell will be capable of displaying scale information. The user will be able to define scaling attributes such as color, font and scale increments. The scale box size will be user defined. Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00-10
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
d. Binary (Digital) Cells: The user will be able to define graphical representations of digital values. The following cells will be available: 1) Button: the button will allow the user to define on off states utilizing a push button display. The user will have the option to display a depressed button or one that toggles when depressed 2) Text: the text cell will allow the user to display different text for binary displays. 3) Image cell: the image cell will allow the user to display an image based upon an input state 4) Movie play: the user will be able to play a movie based upon an input state. 5) Rotor Cell: the user will be able to display a rotor based on an input value e. Analog Cells: The user will be able to monitor and modify analog values via the following cells. 1) Numeric Cell: This will allow the user to display a numeric value 2) Level indicator: this cell will display the level of an analog value 3) Line graph: The user will be capable of displaying a line graph of an analog point. F. Alarms: The CGS shall be capable of displaying user configured alarms from field panels as well as generate alarms from the graphic screens. 1. Alarm Viewer: This will allow the user to display alarms that have been pre-configured within the field panel equipment. It will allow the user to assign colors to alarms, returns and exceptions. User definable *.wav files will be available as alarms are initiated. The alarm viewer will run in the tray and pop-up over any running application to alert the user of an alarm. The alarm viewer will also be capable of restricting alarm acknowledgement via multiple password levels. 2. Alarms configured within graphic screens: The CGS will be capable of allowing the user to configure screen alarms within the graphic screens. These alarms will be capable of launching alternate applications, launching alternate screens, playing wav, avi or ani files and full email capabilities. Alarms that are configured to initiate email shall utilize all email programs available to the operating system. G. Scheduling: The CGS shall be capable of scheduling equipment via assigned graphic screens or via Microsoft Outlook Scheduler. Scheduling shall be accomplished by dragging the point to be scheduled to the Outlook scheduler and highlighting the active days and/or times. The system will allow the operator to define occupancy information such as setpoints and start/stop times. H. Microsoft System Agent: The CGS shall be capable of utilizing the Microsoft System Agent for interface functions. The CGS will support at least the following Microsoft System Agent functions: 1. Voice recognition: the system shall be capable of utilizing the voice recognition commands available within System Agent to modify setpoints, change schedules and start/stop units. 2. Alarm reporting: The system shall be capable of utilizing the Microsoft System Agent to generate alarms to the graphical screens in multiple language formats. The user will be capable of configuring suggestions as to possible problems and probable solutions.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00-11
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
I. Trends: The CGS will be capable of displaying trends uploaded from field equipment. The uploads may occur due to pre-defined schedules or be user initiated. Trend data can be uploaded into spreadsheet programs such as Microsoft Excel for viewing. The CGS will also provide a cell that allows the user to display real-time data of a selected point. J. Help: The CGS will provide intuitive help screens with walk-through graphical displays of many common procedures. The help shall inform the user graphically via mouse cursor movement how to accomplish common tasks. All functions supported by the CGS will provide some form of at least text help screens. 2.4
CENTRAL PLANT AND AIR HANDLING CONTROLLERS A. Programmable Unitary Controllers (PUCs) 1. Each PUC shall be a dedicated, stand-alone, microprocessor-based, unitary controller designed to control the HVAC plant shown in the mechanical and electrical drawings, control sequences and point configurations detailed in this specification. a. The PUC shall utilize user programmable function modules and a user customized programming language as required to meet the functional intent of all control sequences on a stand-alone basis. The PUC shall be capable of communicating global and critical variables to other PUCs residing on the same network without the intervention of a higher level controller. 2. Universal inputs shall include the following minimum requirements: a. Eight (8) universal inputs per controller b. Configurable for 0-10 VDC, 0-20 mA, thermistor, or dry contact type input signals c. Maximum 500 millisec update time per input d. At least two (2) inputs shall be minimum 15-bit analog to digital resolution Manufacturers who cannot meet this resolution requirement shall provide Industrial grade Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs). e. Capable of digital input pulse rates to 10 Hz 3. Digital outputs shall include the following minimum requirements: a. Eight (8) relay or four (4) triac outputs per controller b. Form C contacts rated at 120 VAC 5 A dry contact or external c. Integral Hand-Auto-Off DIP switch block for Form C contacts d. LED status indication 4. Analog outputs shall include the following minimum requirements: a. Three (3) analog outputs per controller b. 0-10 VDC or 0-20 mA output signals c. Maximum 500 millisec update time per output d. 8-bit digital to analog resolution 5. Communication Networks:
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00-12
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
a. The PUC shall utilize 2-wire twisted shielded EIA-485 line signalling for communications to other PUCs, portable operator terminal (POT), color graphic operator station, or AC. b. PUCs shall communicate at speeds up to and including 38.4K baud and shall utilize a token passing scheme to accommodate concurrent communication with multiple network devices. c. Failure of one PUC shall not affect the operation of other PUCs on the network. 6. Nonvolatile Memory: a. All PUC's operating parameters, setpoints and schedules shall be stored in battery backed RAM, EEPROM or other nonvolatile memory. b. A minimum 6 KB RAM shall be built in to the PUC for customized control sequence programming. c. Program parameters shall be stored during a power outage for a minimum of 1 year. 7. Terminations: PUC terminations shall be plugable screw terminal blocks for connection of input and output signal wiring. Spade type connectors or insulation displacement connectors shall not be accepted. 8. Input Power: Input power requirements for the PUC shall be 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 20 VA maximum. The controller power supply shall be separate from any other used for motor control coils. 9. Operating Environment: The microprocessor board shall be suitably packaged in steel for protection against electrical transients and be capable of operating within environmental conditions of 32 - 122 F and 0 - 95% Rh, non-condensing. 10. Application Programming a. Application program sequences shall be accomplished by writing the specified sequence off-line using an ASCII text editor. The same BASIC-like language used in the AC shall be used in the PUCs. Programs shall be downloaded to the PUC prior to commissioning. All application programming provided to accomplish the sequence of operations described in this section shall be provided by the BAS control system manufacturer and proven in similar applications. The application programming language used in the PUC shall be the same applications programming language used in the higher level AC. b. The program language shall permit subroutines, single data arrays, arithmetical operations, multiple comment lines and complex algorithms to be implemented in full compliance with the sequences of operation. The program shall be capable of being compiled off-line and downloaded from the AC or portable laptop computer. The program shall reside in the nonvolatile battery backed-up RAM. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. B. Notify the owners' representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00-13
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. Do not begin work until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. 3.2
INSTALLATION A. The FMS shall provide all temperature control regulation and monitoring through its network of stand-alone Direct Digital Controllers (DDC). B. Furnish & install a temperature control system consisting of direct digital control of primary mechanical equipment and pneumatic control of terminal equipment. C. Install all interconnecting cable and network communications wiring between the direct digital control panels located in the mechanical equipment rooms. D. Provide the building owner the capability to communicate with this building from the off-site maintenance office. E. The building user shall be able to monitor and control all points connected to the system. F. Install control units and other hardware in position on permanent walls where not subject to excessive vibration. G. Install software in control units and in operator work station. Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and appropriate to sequence of operation. Refer to Section 15940. H. Provide with 120v AC, 15 amp dedicated emergency power circuit to each programmable control unit. I. Provide conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Division 26. J. Electrical material and installation shall be in accordance with appropriate requirements of Division 26.
3.3
LOCATION AND INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS A. Locate and install components for easy accessibility; in general, mount 48 inches above floor with minimum 3'-0" clear access space in front of units. Obtain approval on locations from owner’s representative prior to installation. B. All instruments, switches, transmitters, etc., shall be suitably wired and mounted to protect them from vibration, moisture and high or low temperatures. C. Identify all equipment and panels. Provide permanently mounted tags for all panels. D. Provide stainless steel or brass thermowells suitable for respective application and for installation under other sections—sized to suit pipe diameter without restricting flow.
3.4
POINT VERIFICATION A. Verify end-to-end operation of the system. B. Provide hard copy of an “All Points Summary Listing” of each part or system. C. Provide print screen of the process display showing real time dynamic point information for all points on the subsystem.
3.5
INTERLOCKING AND CONTROL WIRING A. Provide all interlock and control wiring. All wiring shall be installed neatly and professionally, in accordance with Electrical Specification and all national, state and local electrical codes.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00-14
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
B. Provide wiring as required by functions as specified and as recommended by equipment manufacturers, to serve specified control functions. Provide shielded low capacitance wire for all communications trunks. C. Control wiring shall not be installed in power circuit raceways. Magnetic starters and disconnect switches shall not be used as junction boxes. Provide auxiliary junction boxes as required. Coordinate location and arrangement of all control equipment with the owner's representative prior to rough-in.Each subsystem shall be performance verified as operational using temporary trends of each control loop. D. Provide auxiliary pilot duty relays on motor starters as required for control function. E. Provide power for all control components from nearest electrical control panel or as indicated on the electrical drawings—coordinate with electrical contractor. F. All control wiring in the mechanical, electrical, telephone and boiler rooms to be installed in raceways. All thermostats wiring will be installed in metal raceway and shall be the responsibility of this contractor. All other wiring to be installed neatly and inconspicuously per local code requirements. If local code allows, control wiring above accessible ceiling spaces may be run with plenum rated cable (without conduit). 3.6
DDC OBJECT TYPE SUMMARY A. Provide all database generation. B. Displays 1. System displays shall show all analog and binary object types within the system. They shall be logically laid out for easy use by the owner. Provide outside air temperature indication on all system displays associated with economizer cycles. C. Run Time Totalization 1. At a minimum, run time totalization shall be incorporated for each monitored supply fan, return fan, exhaust fan, hot water and chilled water pumps. Warning limits for each point shall be entered for alarm and or maintenance purposes. D. Trendlog 1. All binary and analog object types (including zones) shall have the capability to be automatically trended. E. Alarm 1. All analog inputs (High/Low Limits) and selected binary input alarm points shall be prioritized and routed (locally or remotely) with alarm message per owner's requirements. F. Database Save 1. Provide back-up database for all stand-alone application controllers on disk.
3.7
START-UP /TESTING A. The Facility Management System shall be started up in phases agreed to by the Owner. B. Prior to testing and verifying proper system operation, Contractor shall furnish the Owner and Engineer, for acceptance two (2) copies each of the start-up/testing procedure proposed. Owner and Engineer will review the check-out procedure prior to start-up/testing.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00-15
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. After the procedure is reviewed and after installation is complete and systems are ready to be placed into regular service, Contractor shall inform the Owner of this fact in writing. D. Contractor shall agree on a start-up date with Owner and Engineer. E. During start-up period Contractor shall have on-site qualified field technicians to place the system in operation, marking such tests, adjustments and changes as may be found necessary to insure successful operation of the installed equipment and systems. All tests shall be documented by the Contractor and certified, verifying that the tests have been performed and that all deficiencies have been corrected. All testing must be performed and all deficiencies corrected to Owner's satisfaction. 3.8
TRAINING A. Provide application engineer to instruct owner in operation of systems and equipment. B. Provide system operator’s training to include (but not limited to) such items as the following: modification of data displays, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data, execution of commands and request of logs. Provide this training to a minimum of 3 persons. C. Provide on-site training (a total of 16 hours) as part of this contract. D. Provide tuition for at least one individual for a one-week factory training class. If applicable, costs for travel, lodging and meals will be the responsibility of the Owner. E. Provide written documentation, signed by the installing contractor and three (3) owner’s representatives, documentation to include dates and hours when training was completed and persons attending the training.
3.9
DEMONSTRATION A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 25 05 00. B. Demonstrate complete operating system to owner's representative. C. Provide certificate stating that control system has been tested and adjusted for proper operation.
3.10 FIELD SERVICE A. Prepare and start logic control system under provisions of this section. B. Start-up and commission systems. Allow sufficient time for start-up and commissioning prior to placing control systems in permanent operation. C. Provide the capability for off-site monitoring at control contractor's local or main office. At a minimum, off-site facility shall be capable of system diagnostics and software download. Owner shall provide phone line for this service for 1 year or as specified. D. Provide Owner's Representative with spare parts list. Identify equipment critical to maintaining the integrity of the operating system.
END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 10 00-16
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 25 35 00 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION INSTRUMENTATION AND TERMINAL DEVICES FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Control Valves and Valve Operators B. Input/Output Sensors C. Thermostats
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 25 05 00- Common Work Results for Integrated Automation B. Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment C. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping: Temperature Sensor Sockets, Gauge Taps
Installation of Control Valves, Flow Switches,
D. Section 23 33 13 – Automatic Control Dampers E. Section 25 10 00 – Integrated Automation Network Equipment F. Section 25 95 00 – Integrated Automation Control Sequences for HVAC 1.3
REFERENCES A. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters B. ASME MC85.1 - Terminology for Automatic Control C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) D. NEMA DC 3 - Low-Voltage Room Thermostats E. NEMA EMC1 - Energy Management Systems Definitions F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code G. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems H. UL 873 – Temperature and Airflow Indicating Equipment
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide electronic and electric control systems consisting of end devices, control devices, operating devices, indicating devices, interface equipment and other apparatus and accessories required to operate mechanical systems, and to perform functions specified.
1.5
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 25 05 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide description and engineering data for each control system component. Include sizing as requested. Provide data for each system component and software module. C. Shop Drawings:
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 35 00-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1. Indicate complete operating data, system drawings, wiring diagrams, and written detailed operational description of sequences. 2. Submit schedule of valves indicating size, flow, and pressure drop for each valve. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide for all manufactured components. 1.6
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 25 05 00 - Project Closeout. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including panels, thermostats, and sensors. Accurately record actual location of control components, including panels, thermostats, and sensors. C. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include inspection period, cleaning methods, recommended cleaning materials, and calibration tolerances. E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate operating conditions after detailed check of systems at Date of Substantial Completion. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owners name and registered with manufacturer.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
1.8
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. or testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.9
SEQUENCING A. Sequence work to provide sufficient time for test and balancing to be completed before Substantial Completion of Project. B. Provide written notification to Test and Balance Contractor that facility management system is sufficiently complete in order for him to perform his work.
1.10 SCHEDULING A. Provide assistance during Test and Balancing phase of project. Refer to Section 23 05 93. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Section 25 05 00 - Warranties B. Provide two year warranty and preventative maintenance agreement for the temperature control systems. Any manufacturing defects arising during this extended warranty period shall be corrected without cost to the Owner. The preventative maintenance agreement shall include a minimum of quarterly service visits include defective parts replacement and commence upon expiration of one year warranty required by Section 25 05 00.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 35 00-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1.12 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Provide service and maintenance of control system for two years from Date of Substantial Completion. B. Provide four complete inspections, one in each season for two years to inspect, calibrate, and adjust controls as required, and submit written reports. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to Section 25 10 00.
2.2
CONTROL VALVES A. Ball Pattern: 1. Bronze body, stainless steel ball and stem, blow-out proof stem, TFE seats, graphite impregnated stem seals, adjustable stem packing gland. 2. Two-way bodies up to 3” rated for 600 psi WOG, cold, non-shock service. 3. Three-way bodies up to 2” rated for 400 psi WOG, cold, non-shock service. 4. Hydronic Systems: a. Size for 3 psig to 5 psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate. b. Two way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics, three way valves linear characteristics. Size two way valve operators to close valves against pump shut off head. B. Butterfly Pattern: 1. Iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat for service to 250° F wafer or lug ends, extended neck. 2. Hydronic Systems: a. Rate for service pressure of 125 psig at 250° F. b. Size for 1 psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate. C. Electronic Actuators: 1. Manufactured by Belimo. a. Substitutions: None. 2. Valves shall spring return to normal position as indicated on freeze, fire, or temperature protection. 3. Select operator for full shut off at maximum pump differential pressure. 4. Electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to actuator. 5. Spring return for power failure/safety application. Provide spring return for two position control and for fail safe operation. 6. Non-spring return with external manual gear release to allow manual positioning. 7. 0 to10 VDC or 0 to 20 mA control signal with 2 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA operating range. 2 to 10 VDC position feedback signal.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 35 00-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
8. External built-in switch to allow reversing of direction of rotation. D. Radiation Valves: 1. Bronze body, bronze trim, 2 or 3 port as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, union and threaded ends. 2. Rate for service pressure of 125 psig at 250° F. 3. Size for 3 psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate. 4. Two way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics, three way valves linear characteristics. Size two way valve operators to close valves against pump shut off head. 5. Operators (Modulating): Self contained, linear motorized actuator with approximately 3/4" stroke, 60 second full travel with transformer and SPDT contacts: 24 v DC, 6 watt maximum input. 2.3
ROOFTOP UNIT DAMPERS A. Dampers will be furnished integral with the rooftop units. Refer to Section 23 74 13. B. Electronic Actuators are to be furnished and field installed by this contractor. 1. Manufactured by Belimo. a. Substitutions: None.
2.4
INPUT/OUTPUT SENSORS A. Temperature: 1. Resistance temperature detectors with resistance tolerance of plus or minus 0.1% at 70° F, interchangeability less than plus or minus 0.2%, time constant of 13 seconds maximum for fluids and 200 seconds maximum for air. 2. Measuring current maximum 5 mA with maximum self-heat of 0.031° F/mW in fluids and 0.014° F/mW in air. 3. Provide 3 lead wires and shield for input bridge circuit. 4. Use insertion elements in ducts not affected by temperature stratification or smaller than one square meter. Use averaging elements where larger or prone to stratification sensor length 8’ or 16’ as required. 5. Insertion elements for liquids shall be with brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2”. 6. Room sensors: Locking cover. 7. Outside air sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct rays of sun. 8. Room security sensors: Stainless steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws. B. Humidity Sensors: 1. Room Sensors: Accuracy within 3% over the range of 20% to 60% RH. With locking cover, span of 10 to 60% relative humidity. 2. Outside Air Sensors: Accuracy within 2% over the range of 20% to 90% RH. With outside weather enclosure and mounting plate. C. Static Pressure Sensors:
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 35 00-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1. Unidirectional with ranges not exceeding 150% of maximum expected input. 2. Temperature compensates with typical thermal error or 0.06% of full scale in temperature range of 40 to 100° F. 3. Accuracy: One percent of full scale with repeatability 0.3%. 4. Output: 0 - 5 vdc with power at 12 to 28 vdc. D. Equipment Operation Sensors: 1. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Current sensing relay with current transformers, adjustable and set to 175% of rated motor current. E. Carbon Dioxide Detectors: 1. Wall or duct type; non-dispersive infrared, 0-2000 ppm, accuracy of +/-5% of reading or +/75ppm, repeatability of +/-20ppm, calibration once per year, less than one minute response time, automatic electronic zero adjustment. 2. Operating temperature range of 32-112F, operating humidity range of 0-99%RH, 20-30VAC, 18-30VDC, less than 2.5W consumption at 24VAC. 3. Analog output 0-10VDC, 4-20mA. 2.5
THERMOSTATS/TEMPERATURE SENSORS A. Electric Room Thermostats: 1. Type: NEMA DC 3, 24 volts, with setback/setup temperature control. 2. Service: Cooling only, heating only, cooling and heating, one or two step cooling, and one or two step heating, as required for each control sequence. 3. Covers: Locking with concealed setpoint, without thermometer. B. Line Voltage Thermostats: 1. Integral manual On/Off/Auto selector switch, single or two pole as required. 2. Dead band: Maximum 2° F. 3. Cover: Locking with setpoint indication, with thermometer. 4. Rating: Motor load. C. Room Thermostat Accessories: 1. Thermostat Covers: Brushed aluminum. 2. Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls. 3. Thermostat Guards: Metal mounted on separate base. D. Immersion Thermostat: 1. Remote bulb or bimetallic rod and tube type, proportional action with adjustable setpoint and adjustable throttling range. E. Airstream Thermostats: 1. Averaging service remote bulb element: Minimum 20’.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 35 00-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2.6
OUTSIDE AIR: AIRFLOW MEASURING STATION A. Provide Ebtron Silver Series, Air Monitor or Tek-Air probe and control panel/transmitter. Unit to be field calibrated and started up by a Manufacturers Representative. Unit to display cfm. Verify probe size and install per manufacturers recommendations.
2.7
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD) A. Manufacturers 1. ABB 2. Danfoss 3. Emerson 4. Substitutions: None. B. Description 1. Provide enclosed variable frequency controllers suitable for operating the indicated loads. Conform to requirements of NEMA ICS 3.1. C. Rating and operating characteristics 1. Modify the input voltage ratings for the specific project. 2. Rated Input Voltage: 460 volt +/-10%, 3 phase. 3. Motor Nameplate Voltage: 460 volts, 3 phase. 4. Input Frequency Operating Range: 60 Hz., plus 3 Hertz or minus 10 Hertz. 5. Displacement Power Factor: Between 1.0 and .95, lagging, over the entire range of operating speed and load. 6. Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: 95% 7. Harmonic Distortion of Input Voltage Waveform: 3% maximum at full load 8. Harmonic Distortion of Input Current Waveform: 10% maximum at full load. 9. Harmonic Attenuation: Provide line reactors as required to attenuate harmonic distortion. Refer to paragraph 1.3. 10. Current Limit Ratings: a. Slow Current Regulation: Adjustable to 125% (minimum) of variable torque current rating. b. Rapid Current Regulation: Adjustable to 170% (minimum) of variable torque current rating. c. Current Switch Off Limit: Fixed at 225% (minimum, instantaneous) of variable torque current rating. 11. Overload Rating: 110% of rated variable torque current rating for 1 minute every 10 minutes and140% of rate torque current rating for 2 seconds every 15 minutes. 12. Environmental Requirements: a. Operating Temperature: 0oC to +40oC (32oF to 104oF) without derating. b. Relative Humidity (operating and storage): 95% maximum non-condensing.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 35 00-6
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
c. Elevation: 3300’ maximum without derating. d. Acoustical Noise: Do not exceed audible noise level of 85 dBA measured a 3’ from the VFD within the VFD entire operating range. D. Design 1. Inverter Type: Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) with variable frequency and pulse width, transistorized-type design. Construct of modular rack assemblies to facilitate maintenance. 2. Rectifier: Six pulse, solid state, full-wave bridge rectified, sufficient to supply full load to inverter. 3. Cooling: Air cooling with replaceable filters. Exhaust air from top of unit. 4. Front Access: Provide modular design for major components accessible/replaceable from the front. E. Fabrication 1. Enclosure: NEMA 1 enclosure with dead front construction. Designed with front access for servicing adjustments and connections. Access through hinged doors equipped with latch handle and lock. 2. Enclosure Finish: Primed and painted inside and outside with semi-gloss enamel. 3. Identify internal wiring at each end of conductor. Provide cabinet grounding lug. F. Features and Accessories 1. Standard Features a. Ability to operate controller with motor disconnected from output. b. Design to attempt five automatic restarts following a fault condition before locking out and requiring manual restart. c. Capable of starting a rotating load and accelerate or decelerate to setpoint without tripping safety devices or damaging components. d. Equipped with automatic extended power ride through circuit for up to 5 cycles. e. RS-485 serial communication port standard. f. Individual motor overload protection for each motor controlled. 2. Display: Provide integral digital display to indicate input current or KW (True RMS values), output voltage, output frequency, elapsed time meter. 3. Status Indicators: Provide separate indicators for input power on, input power fault, overcurrent fault, overvoltage & undervoltage faults, ground-fault, overtemperature fault. 4. Adjustments: a. Volt per Hertz Adjustment: Plus or minus 10%. b. Minimum Output Frequency Adjustment: Field Adjustable, 4 - 40 Hertz. c. Maximum Output Frequency Adjustment: Field Adjustable, 40 - 90 Hertz. d. Current Limit Adjustment: 60 - 110% of rated. e. Acceleration Rate Adjustment (0 - 100% speed): Field adjustable, .5 - 30 seconds.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 35 00-7
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
f. Deceleration Rate Adjustment (0 - 100% speed): Field adjustable, 1 - 30 seconds. 5. Provide HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switch and digital manual speed control located on front of door. 6. Input Signals: Provide interface with any of the following control inputs: a. D.C. Analog Voltages: 0 - 5 VDC and 0 - 10 VDC. b. D.C. Analog Currents: 0 - 5 ma and 4 - 20 ma. c. Pneumatic signal: 3- 15 psi 7. Analog Output Signals: Two (2) analog outputs proportional to frequency, output voltage or output current. 8. Digital Output Signals: Two (2) digital relay outputs, form C contacts, rated 8 amps at 24 VDC and .4 amps at 250 VAC. 9. Safety Interlocks: Provide terminals for remote contact to inhibit starting under both manual and automatic mode. 10. Control Interlocks: Provide terminals for remote contact to allow starting in automatic mode. 11. Disconnecting Means: Include integral fused disconnect switch on the line side of the controller with provisions for padlocking. 12. Transient Protection: Include integral protection on the input line. G. Shaft Grounding Kit 1. Manufacturer: AEGIS. a. Substitutions: None. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verify that systems are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. C. Sequence work to ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar components in other systems. D. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems equipment such air handling unit.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Provide conduit and electrical wiring where required. Refer to Division 26. C. After completion of installation, test and adjust control equipment. Submit data showing set points and final adjustments of controls. D. Check and verify location of thermostats, humidistats and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. Locate 60” above floor. Align with lighting switches and humidistats
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 35 00-8
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
E. Mount outdoor reset thermostats and outdoor sensors indoors, with sensing elements outdoors with sun shield. F. Provide separable sockets for liquids and flanges for air bulb elements. Refer to Section 25 10 00. G. Provide guards on thermostats in entrances and where indicated. H. Mount control panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration free walls or free standing angle iron supports. One cabinet may accommodate more than one system in same equipment room. Provide engraved plastic nameplates for instruments and controls inside cabinet and engraved plastic nameplates on cabinet face. I. Install "hand/off/auto" selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in "hand" position. J. Provide conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Division 26. Electrical material and installation shall be in accordance with appropriate requirements of Division 26. 3.3
DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate complete operation of systems, including sequence of operation after Date of Substantial Completion. B. Demonstrate complete and operating system to Owner.
END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 35 00-9
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 25 95 00 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL SEQUENCES FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Sequence of operation for mechanical systems and components: 1. Rooftop units. 2. Exhaust fans. 3. Variable Speed Drives. 4. Miscellaneous points.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 25 05 00 – Common Work Results for Integrated Automation. B. Section 23 05 19 – Meters and Gages for HVA Piping: Thermometer sockets, gage taps. C. Section 23 20 13 - Hydronic Piping: Installation of control valves, flow switches, temperature sensor sockets, gage taps. D. Section 23 33 13 - Ductwork Accessories: Installation of automatic dampers. E. Section 25 10 00 – Integrated Automation Network Equipment. F. Section 25 35 00 – Integrated Automation Instrumentation and Terminal devices for HVAC.
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. This Section defines the manner and method by which controls function. Requirements for each type of control system operation are specified. Provide all equipment, devices, and system components for control system operation. Equipment, devices, and system components required for control systems are specified in Section 25 35 00. B. Provide electrical work required for sequences described in this section, unless stated otherwise. Provide electrical work in compliance with Division 26 requirements.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 25 05 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate mechanical system controlled and control system components. 1. Label with settings, adjustable range of control and limits. Include written description of control sequence. 2. Include flow diagrams for each control system, graphically depicting control logic. 3. Include draft copies of graphic displays indicating mechanical system components, control system components, and controlled function status and value.
1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 25 05 00 - Project Closeout.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and setpoints of controls, including changes to sequences made after submission of shop drawings. Use designations which match identification tags or labels on the installed equipment. 1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. or testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.8
SEQUENCING A. Sequence work to provide sufficient time for test and balancing to be completed before Substantial Completion of Project. B. Provide written notification to Test and Balance Contractor that automatic controls and sequence of control are sufficiently complete in order for him to perform his work.
1.9
SCHEDULING A. Provide assistance during Test and Balancing phase of project. Refer to Section 23 05 93.
1.10 WARRANTY A. Section 25 05 00 - Warranties. 1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Provide service and maintenance of control system for one from Date of Substantial Completion. B. Provide four complete inspections, one in each season for one years, to inspect, calibrate, and adjust controls as required, and submit written reports. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 2.1
ROOFTOP UNITS (SINGLEZONE, CONSTANT VOLUME, DX PACKAGED COOLING, HOT WATER HEATING AND ENERGY RECOVERY): A. Application: 1. Rooftop air handling units: RTU-36, 37, 38, 39 and 40. 2. Integrate with existing heat pump units. B. Time Schedule: Start and stop supply and return fans. Determine fan status by current sensors. Signal alarm if fan fails to start as commanded. C. Safety Devices:
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1. Freeze Protection: Stop supply and return fans and close outside air dampers if discharge air temperature falls below 40 degrees F; signal alarm. Provide a 180 second delay. Freeze stat is not to be energized unless fan is running. Provide a reset via the software to allow the operator to reset the system from the BAS workstation. Provide freezestat ‘status’ for monitoring. D. Delayed Damper: 1. Following the “morning warm-up” sequence and temperatures are satisfied, a damper restrictor is to be provided to obtain a slow-opening process of the outside air damper until the return air/mixed air temperatures reach setpoint. (Minimum 180 seconds.) E. Morning Warm-up: 1. Start the unit fans and hold the outdoor air dampers fully-closed and return dampers fullyopen. Lock-out the outdoor air dampers until the discharge temperature reaches 55 degrees F (adjustable). When the space temperature reaches the desired ‘occupied’ setpoint, the outdoor air dampers will be ‘enabled’ to start their respective ‘delayed damper’ sequence. 2. Cooling sequence to be locked-out. F. Economizer: 1. Economizer is to be available and have priority in both occupied heating and cooling modes. 2. Economizer ‘cooling’ and ‘heating’ mode is to have priority over CO2 control sequence. 3. When outside air temperature is below 55 degrees F: a. Modulate outside air damper and return damper to maintain a discharge air temperature (55F, adj). Discharge air temperature is to be reset by the space temperature sensor to satisfy the space comfort. b. Energy recovery bypass dampers are to be open (in full bypass) and energy recovery rotor to be off (rotating at a very low RPM). It is the intent that the wheel turns at all times to obtain at least a small volume of airflow through the wheel. 4. When the outside air temperature is between 55 and 79 degrees F, provide enthalpy control, compare return and outside air temperatures. If return air temperature is lower: a. Enable occupied cooling mode. 5. When the outside air temperature is between 55 and 79 degrees F, compare return and outside air temperatures. If return air temperature is higher: a. Modulate the outside air dampers open and close the return air dampers to maintain a discharge air temperature. Discharge air temperature is to be maintained at 55F (adj). b. Energy recovery bypass dampers are to be open (in full bypass) and energy recovery rotor to be off (rotating at a very low RPM). It is the intent that the wheel turns at all times to obtain at least a small volume of airflow through the wheel. 6. For outside air temperatures above 79 degrees F: a. Enable occupied cooling mode. G. Occupied Cooling: 1. Supply and return fans are to be on. 2. The Pre-Heating coil valve to be closed to coil (full coil bypass). Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3. When the outside air temperature is above 79 degrees F, drive the outside air damper to minimum position (10%) and open the return damper. 4. Energy recovery bypass dampers are to be closed. Energy recovery unit to be on and rotating. Modulate rotor speed in sequence with the cooling valves to maintain discharge air temperature setpoint. 5. Provide an interlock between the evaporator coil solenoid valves and the air-cooled condensing unit to not allow operation unless the supply fan is running. The units will be equipped with tandem scroll compressors. The ‘lead’ compressor will have digital scroll technology to allow capacity reduction. Integrate the controls to allow the lead compressor to operate to maintain discharge temperature. As the load increases, the ‘lag’ compressor is to be staged on with the digital scroll compressor staging accordingly. As the load decreases, the reverse sequence is to apply. 6. Provide four (4) space humidity sensors (separate from the space temperature sensors) and locate the sensors in four (4) separate rooms of the area in which the unit serves. Each of the sensors are to send a signal to obtain an average humidity reading/level for the area. On a rise in humidity (50% or higher), close the outdoor air dampers to a 10% minimum, stage the compressors to maintain a lower DAT, in sequence, to maintain a constant discharge temperature of 53F. The outdoor air dampers are to be modulated open to satisfy CO2 levels. This sequence will have priority over the occupied cooling sequence. As humidity levels are lowered and the sensors are satisfied, the reverse sequence is to apply and the occupied cooling sequence is to be engaged. 7. If CO2 levels in the space rise, modulate open the outdoor air dampers and close the return dampers, in sequence, as required to satisfy the CO2 sensor settings. Under this sequence, the outdoor air dampers are to be modulated open and not to exceed the cfm scheduled “minimum outside air cfm”. Economizer sequence is to have priority over CO2 sequence. H. Unoccupied Cooling: 1. Supply and return fans are to be off. 2. The DX cooling is to be off and locked-out. 3. The Pre-Heating coil valve to be closed to coil. 4. Energy recovery unit to be off and bypass dampers to be open. 5. Outside air damper to be closed, return damper to be open. 6. Relief/exhaust damper to be closed. I. Occupied Heating: 1. Supply and return fans are to be on. 2. Drive outside air damper to minimum position (10%), open return air damper. 3. Discharge air temperature sensor to modulate the preheating coil valve. The discharge air temperature sensor set point is to be reset by the space sensor calling for the most heat. The preheat coil discharge air temperature is not to be allowed to exceed 55F. Preheat coil to be controlled in sequence with the energy wheel.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
4. Energy recovery unit bypass dampers are to be closed. Energy recovery unit to be on. Ramp the rotor speed in sequence with the heating coil valves to maintain discharge air temperature setpoint. Provide a discharge air sensor downstream of the wheel which will ramp the wheel speed to allow frost control/defrost. When the outdoor air temperature is 55F or above (adjustable), the energy recovery unit is to be off and the bypass dampers are to be open (full bypass and rotating the wheel at a very low RPM). It is the intent that the wheel turns at all times to obtain at least a small volume of airflow through the wheel. 5. If CO2 levels in the space rise, modulate open the outdoor air dampers and close the return dampers, in sequence, as required to satisfy the CO2 sensor settings. Under this sequence, the outdoor air dampers are to be modulated open and not to exceed the cfm scheduled “minimum outside air cfm”. Economizer sequence is to have priority over CO2 sequence. 6. Cooling is to be locked-out. J. Unoccupied Heating: 1. Supply and return fans are to be off. 2. Outside air dampers are to be fully closed and return air dampers are to be open. 3. Relief/exhaust air dampers are to be fully-closed. 4. Energy recovery unit to be off and the bypass dampers are to be open. 5. The designated heat pump space sensor calling for heat (at a reduced temperature) is to cycle supply fan to maintain a reduced space temperature (adjustable). 6. Cooling is to be locked-out. K. Carbon Dioxide Sensor: 1. Return duct mounted carbon dioxide sensor to modulate open the outside air damper (to the CFM amount indicated on the schedules) and the return air damper to maintain no greater than 1000 PPM (adjustable) of carbon dioxide. In the heating and cooling modes when the sensor is satisfied at 1000 PPM, the sensor is to override the reset schedule (if temperatures are satisfied) and close the outdoor air dampers to a 10% minimum. In this mode, satisfying space temperature using outdoor air (economizer) is to have priority. This sequence is to be locked-out in unoccupied modes. 2. Carbon dioxide sensor is to be locked out when the system is in economizer mode in either heating or cooling occupied modes. L. Existing heat pump terminals: Provide all components necessary and factory or field mount components on each unit as necessary to integrate the existing controls serving each heat pump unit with the designated rooftop unit: 1. Each rooftop unit is to be linked on the graphics and controlled with it’s respective group of heat pump terminals that service the system to allow independent graphic control for each RTU/Heat pump system. 2. Integrate the existing controls to obtain five (5) new rooftop/heat pump systems. M. Building Pressure Relief (to be independently controlled): 1. Modulate outside air damper to maintain building pressure of +0.05” w.g. (adjustable), subject to freeze protection device.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2. Modulate, independently, the rooftop unit relief/exhaust dampers based on the building pressure. The unit-mounted relief/exhaust dampers are to be controlled reactively to the interior space pressure conditions. 3. Compare the interior space pressure with the outdoor static pressure. N. Miscellaneous: 1. Provide ‘occupied/unoccupied’ switching and ‘heat/cool’ switching capabilities. 2. Provide night setback capability. 3. Provide outside air measuring capability by utilizing a flow measuring station in the outside air duct. Provide outside air quantity in cubic feet per minute. O. Unit shall be provided with the following quantity of points: 1. Points list: • Supply fan start/stop (DO) • Supply fan status, current sensor (DI) • Return fan start/stop (DO) • Return fan status, current sensor (DI) • Energy Recovery unit start/stop (DO) • Energy Recovery rotor status, current sensor (DI) • Energy Recovery unit VSD modulation (AO) • Energy Recovery unit bypass damper, two-position (DO) • Preheat coil valve modulation (AO) • Cooling modulation (AO) 1st stage (digital scroll technology) • Cooling staging, start/stop (DO) 2nd stage • Discharge air temperature (AI) • Return air temperature (AI) • Mixed air temperature (AI) • Space Humidity (AI) - typical of four (4) sensors per system • Return duct carbon dioxide sensor (AI) • Outside air damper modulation (AO) • Return air damper modulation (AO) • Relief air damper modulation (AO) (independent control) • Interior Space pressure (AI) • Freeze stat control/safety (DI) • Freeze stat status, enable (AI) • Outside air CFM (AI) monitor only 2.2
EXHAUST FAN/PRV (SCHEDULE ACTIVATED) A. Application: New Power Roof Ventilator (PRV) 1. Local motor starter switch provided by Division 26. 2. Provide relays and wiring necessary for exhaust fan power interface. 3. ‘Enable/disable’ designated fan based on occupancy schedule (software adjustable). Units to be controlled in a ‘sweep on/sweep off’ mode. B. Fan unit to be provided with the following quantity of points: 1. Points list: Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00-6
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
• • 2.3
Fan enable/disable (DO) – typical for each unit Fan status, current sensor (DI) – typical for each unit
TRANSFER FAN/EXHAUST PRV (SCHEDULE ACTIVATED) A. Application: New Power Roof Ventilator (PRV) and existing transfer fan (XTF-81) 1. Local motor starter switch provided by Division 26. 2. Provide relays and wiring necessary for exhaust fan power interface. 3. Provide relays and wiring necessary for transfer fan power interface. 4. ‘Enable/disable’ designated fan and PRV based on occupancy schedule (software adjustable). Units to be controlled in a ‘sweep on/sweep off’ mode. Both the transfer fan and PRV are to be interlocked to operate simulataneously. B. Fan unit to be provided with the following quantity of points: 1. Points list: • Fan enable/disable (DO) – typical for each unit • Fan status, current sensor (DI) – typical for each unit
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS POINTS A. Provide the following general points to be used for all applicable equipment or general knowledge. Display values on BAS terminal upon demand. B. Points list: • Outside air temperature (AI) • Outside air humidity (AI) • Outside air dewpoint (AI) • Outdoor static pressure (AI)
2.5
NO OCCUPANCY/COOLING MODE: A. Sequence to be similar to ‘occupied cooling’ mode with the exception that the outdoor air (and relief/exhaust) dampers are to be 100% closed and the return dampers 100% open. This sequence would apply only when manually-activated by the system operator, the outdoor conditions are 80 degrees F or higher and the relative humidity is above 70%. Sequence is to be manually-de-activated by the system operator. B. When activated, the ‘unoccupied’ mode would follow the standard building time schedule program. The designated interior space humidity sensors are to remain in control and have priority. C. When all interior conditions (temperature and humidity) are satisfied, the system is to cycle off.
2.6
LIGHTING CONTROL A. Provide 24 VAC signal from the BAS extending to the lighting control relays. Relays will require momentary dry contact closure. B. Provide programmable on/off time of day operation for contactor. C. Provide programmable on/off/automatic for relays. D. Points list (Provide eight (8) points: • Lights on, per zone (DO) – four zones • Lights off, per zone (DO) – four zones Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00-7
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2.7
BUILDING ENERGY MONITORING A. Provide electric and natural gas monitoring with custom monthly energy reporting ability. The energy software is to be installed/added to the building operating workstation. B. Provide connection from the BAS and extend wiring to each of the electric and gas meters. Entire installation and connections are to be provided by this contractor.
END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
25 95 00-8
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
INDEX TO ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION NUMBER
SECTION NAME
26 01 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 01 05
SUBMITTALS, CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS, TRANING AND SPARE PARTS
26 01 10
SELECTIVE ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
26 01 20
TESTING AND ADJUSTMENTS TO ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 19
600 VOLT CONDUCTORS AND CABLE
26 05 24
CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT
26 05 29
SUPPORTING DEVICES
26 05 33
RACEWAY, FITTINGS, AND BOXES
26 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 09 24
DAYLIGHT SENSORS
26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
26 28 13
LOW VOLTAGE FUSES
26 28 16
SAFETY SWITCHES
26 29 13
MOTOR CONTROL
26 51 13
LIGHTING
26 53 00
EXIT SIGNS
DIVISION 28 – FIRE ALARM SECTION NUMBER
SECTION NAME
28 31 00
FIRE ALARM
END OF INDEX
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
Index-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 26 01 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 20: Testing and Adjustments to Electrical Systems
1.2
SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work consists of furnishing labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation of work shown in the Contract Documents and specified in Division 26. 2. Include all parts and labor which are incidental and necessary for a complete and operable installation even though not specifically mentioned in the Contract Documents. Such items include nuts, bolts, anchors, brackets, sleeves, offsets in conduit, fittings, relays, etc. 3. Some equipment and materials provided under Divisions 21, 22, 23, 25, 26, 27 and 28 may require composite work crews because of trade jurisdiction. Where this occurs, include in the bid this portion of the composite crew labor costs. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to review Divisions 21, 22, 23, 25, 26, 27 and 28 Contract Documents to determine where these composite crews are required. 4. Arrange with appropriate utility companies to provide temporary and permanent utility services as required and coordinate their installation with construction progress of this project. 5. Pay all fees and costs charged by utility company for installation of temporary utility services. 6. Obtain all temporary and permanent permits and licenses required in connection with this Division’s work. Pay all fees and expenses required for such permits and licenses. 7. Pay all fees and costs charged by utility companies for utility services. 8. Request inspections as required by regulating agencies and/or regulations. Pay all charges for inspections by regulating agencies of installations of plans specifications. 9. Include State and Local sales taxes in the bid. Keep accurate records of these taxes and furnish such records to the Owner upon request. 10. Provide the Owner with a certificate of final inspection and approval by enforcement authorities. B. Related Sections: 1. Divisions 0 and 1 apply to all work of Division 26 and are an integral part of this Section. Where the conditions specified are at variance with other Divisions, Section 26 01 00 takes precedence. Section 26 01 00 specifies conditions, procedures, equipment and material particular to the electrical work and applies to all electrical work of the Contract Documents.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 00-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2. Division 0 and 1 and Section 26 01 00 and all Addenda form a part of and apply to all contracts or sub-contracts relating to Division 26 work. Copy these documents to all Subcontractors receiving other Sections of Division 26. 3. Where a Specification Section refers to other Sections under the Article on Related Sections, this is done for Contractor’s convenience only. It shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibilities stated in other Sections of the Specifications, even though these Sections are not specifically referenced. The Contractor is responsible for all information contained in this Division’s Specifications as well as for information contained in all other Divisions. 1.3
ALTERNATES A. Refer to Bid Form and Instruction to Bidders.
1.4
REFERENCES A. Meet or exceed all current applicable codes, ordinances and regulations for all installations. Promptly notify the Engineer, in writing, if the contract documents appear to conflict with governing codes and regulations. Contractor assumes all responsibility and costs for correcting non-complying work installed without notifying the Engineer. B. Higher quality of workmanship and materials indicated in the Contract Documents takes precedence over that allowed in referenced codes and standards. C. Perform all work in compliance with the currently adopted version of the following codes and standards for this project: National Electric Code State and Local Electrical Codes International Building Code International Fire Code International Mechanical Code State and Local Building Codes and Ordinances State Industrial Commission Regulations State and Local Fire Codes and Regulations State and Local Mechanical Codes State Elevator Code Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations Americans with Disabilities Act Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards State Board of Health NFPA 101 Life Safety Code State Energy Code D. Use the Standard where referenced in the specifications by the following abbreviations: AIA: American Insurance Association AIA: American Institute of Architects ANSI: American National Standards Institute ASTM: American Society of Testing and Materials EPA: Environmental Protection Agency FM: Factory Mutual Insurance Association IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 00-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
IES: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America ICEA: International Cable Engineers Association NBS: National Bureau of Standards NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA: National Fire Protection Association NSC: National Safety Council UL: Underwriter's Laboratories 1.5
DEFINITIONS A. The terms defined below apply to all work included in Division 26. 1. The work – as defined in the 1997 AIA Document A201: “The term ‘Work’ means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.” 2. Furnish – to obtain in new condition ready for installation into the work. 3. Install – to store, set in place, connect and place into operation into the work. 4. Provide – to furnish and install. 5. Connect – to bring service to the equipment and make final attachment including necessary switches, outlets, boxes, terminations, etc. 6. Conduit – includes in addition to conduit, all fittings, pull boxes, hangers and other supports and accessories related to such conduit. 7. Concealed – hidden from sight in chases, furred spaces, shafts, hung ceilings, embedded in construction, in crawl spaces or buried. 8. Exposed: not installed underground nor concealed as defined above. 9. Building structure or building structural members - consists of steel columns, steel beams, steel joists (top chord and at panel points), concrete walls and concrete block walls. Metal decking, joist bridging and bottom chords of bar joists shall not be construed as building structure nor as a building structural member for the purpose of support. B. The drawing and specifications constitute the Contract Documents. Any item noted in the specification or shown on the drawings is included in the Contract Documents. C. All electrical details and drawings are diagrammatic, unless specifically noted. Field-verify all dimensions and notify the Engineer of any conflicts of discrepancies, in writing, prior to installation.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Initiate, maintain and supervise all safety precautions required with this work in accordance with the regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and other governing agencies. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not remove or disturb any asbestos containing materials from the project. Immediately stop work and notify the Owner if asbestos containing materials are suspected.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 00-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2. Do not dispose of any PCB containing materials. Disposal of all PCB containing materials will be the responsibility of the Owner. C. Provide new, first quality material for all products specified. Do not reuse materials unless indicated or approved by the Engineer. D. Comply with the NEC as applicable to the construction and installation of equipment specified in this section. E. Provide equipment specified in this section that has been listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. F. Comply with ANSI as applicable to equipment specified in this section. G. Comply with NEMA as applicable to equipment specified in this section. 1.7
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Inspections: 1. Before submitting a proposal on the work contemplated, examine the site of the proposed work and become thoroughly familiar with existing conditions and limitations. No extra compensation will be allowed because of misunderstanding as to the amount of work involved nor bidders lack of knowledge of existing conditions which could have been discovered or reasonably anticipated prior to bidding. 2. Conduits, pipes, ducts, lights, devices, speakers, etc., shown on the drawings as existing have been based on existing plans and casual site observations, and may not be installed as originally shown. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to visit the site and make exact determination of the existence, location and condition of such facilities prior to submitting a bid. B. Correlation of Work: 1. Consult the drawings and specifications of of all other Divisions for correlating information and lay out work so that it will coordinate with other trades. Verify dimensions and conditions (i.e., finished ceiling heights, footing and foundation elevations, beam depths, etc.) with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Notify the Architect/Engineer of any conflicts that cannot be resolved, in the field, by affected trades. Replacement of work due to lack of coordination and failure to verify existing conditions will be completed at no cost to the Owner. 2. Install all conduit, cable tray, busduct, equipment, etc. allowing proper code and maintenance clearances and to avoid blocking passageways and access panels. 3. Where work must be replaced due to the failure of the Contractor to verify the conditions existing on the job, such replacement must be accomplished at no cost to the Owner. This applies to shop fabricated work as well as to work fabricated in place. 4. Throughout the course of the work, minor changes and adjustments to the installation may be requested by the Engineer. The Contractor shall make adjustments without additional cost to the Owner, where such adjustments are necessary to the proper installation and operation within the intent of the Contract Documents. This does not include work already completed. 5. Equipment outlines shown on detail plans of 1/4"=1'-0" scale or larger and/or dimensions indicated on the plans are limiting dimensions. Do not install any equipment that exceeds the equipment outlines shown or reduces indicated clearances.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 00-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
6. Obtain exact location of connection to equipment, furnished by others, from the person furnishing the equipment. 7. Drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either on is as binding as if called for in both. 8. Include the better quality, greater quantity or higher cost for an item or arrangement where a disagreement exists in the drawings and specifications. 1.8
FIRESTOPPING A. Provide firestopping around all new penetrations, sleeves and openings through all partitions, walls and floors. B. Provide UL listed components installed by a certified and factory trained personnel.
1.9
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Refer to General Conditions and Requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
TAMPERPROOF HARDWARE A. Where tamperproof hardware is called out, provide torx head with center pin reject hardware for the following electrical work: 1. Light fixture housings 2. Covers to electrical enclosures, pullboxes, cabinets, junction boxes, wireways 3. Coverplates (both maximum security and stainless steel coverplates)
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
CONSTRUCTION LIGHTING & POWER SYSTEM - REMODELING A. Provide construction power and lighting that adheres to 2008 Article 590 – “Temporary Installations” B. See Division 1 for temporary electrical services. C. For remodeling work in the existing building, use existing building distribution systems for construction power. D. Replace all receptacles, switched, coverplates, etc., damaged by any Contractor during the course of construction. E. Materials furnished for the temporary light and power system remain Contractors property. Remove when there is no longer any need for temporary light and power or when directed by the Architect. F. Electrical energy costs shall be paid by the Owner.
3.2
PREPARATION A. Continuity of Service: 1. No Division 26 systems are to remain inactive at the end of the workday. Assure that the systems are all operational at the end of each workday. Coordinate temporary outages with the Owner.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 00-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2. Coordinate/schedule all work with the Owner to minimize any disruptions. Confine all interruptions to the smallest possible area. Provide temporary connections if required to provide continuity of service. 3. Inspect all areas affected by the interruptions and return all automatically controlled equipment, electrically operated equipment to the same operating condition prior to the interruption. B. Use of Facility: 1. Do not disturb normal use of the facility, except within the immediate construction area. Keep walks, driveways, entrances, etc. free and clear of equipment, material and debris. 2. Store all equipment and material in a place and manner that minimizes congestion and is approved by the Owner. 3.3
INSTALLATION A. Material and Workmanship 1. Provide new material and equipment, unless noted otherwise. Protect equipment and material from damage, dirt and the weather. 2. Provide the highest quality workmanship and perform all work only by skilled mechanics. Install material and equipment in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations, instructions and current NECA standards. 3. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or workmanship not in accordance with the specifications, before or after installation. B. Cutting and Patching: 1. Perform all cutting and patching necessary to work, unless specifically delegated to be performed under a different Division. 2. Obtain special permission from the Engineer before cutting structural members or finished material. 3. Perform all patching in a manner as to leave no visible trace and return the area affected to the condition of undisturbed work. Perform all patching by workers experienced, skilled, and licensed for the particular type of work involved. Inferior work will not be accepted. 4. Patch all holes left as a result of demolition of electrical equipment and devices. 5. Drill all holes in masonry with rotary drill. Impact tools are not allowed. Core drill all holes in masonry and concrete for electrical raceway. Provide and dispose of all water required for core drilling. Coordinate with other trades to prevent damage from water. 6. Prevent the spread of dust, debris, and other material into adjacent areas. 7. Replace all ceiling tiles damaged during installation of work, with new tile. C. Painting: 1. Refinish all electrical equipment damaged during shipping and/or installation to its original condition. Remove all rust; prime, and paint per manufacturer's recommendations for finish equal to original. 2. Paint all new raceway systems in exposed finished areas to match existing finish.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 00-6
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3.4
FIRESTOPPING A. Provide firestopping around all new penetrations, sleeves and openings through all partitions, walls and floors. B. Install firestopping on both sides of each partition, completely filling the void around the opening. C. Firestopping of interior of conduits and sleeves is by the contractor providing the cabling inside the conduit or sleeve.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Refer to Section 26 01 20: Testing and Adjustments to Electrical Systems. B. Final Inspection: 1. A final inspection of the electrical systems will be required before the Contract can be closed out. Request a final inspection by the Engineer after all systems are fully completed and operational. The Engineer will schedule an inspection and generate a list of items to be corrected or completed before Contract Closeout. If the Engineer is requested to make a final inspection by the Contractor, and the Engineer finds the work is not complete enough to perform that inspection, the Contractor will compensate the Engineer for his time. The Contractor will then perform the necessary work to complete the project and again request a Final Inspection.
3.6
CLEAN UP A. Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish, caused by his employees or work, at all times. Remove rubbish, tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials from and about the building, and leave work areas "broom clean" or its equivalent upon completion of the work. Clean electrical equipment and remove temporary identification. In case of dispute the Owner will remove the rubbish and charge the cost to the Contractor. B. After tests have been made and accepted clean light fixtures, panels and other equipment installed by the Contractor, leaving the entire work area in a clean and complete working order.
3.7
PROTECTION A. Cover openings and equipment, where set, to prevent obstruction to conduits, breakage, misuse, or disfigurement of equipment. Cover openings in equipment immediately upon uncrating or receipt at the job site and keep covered until permanent connection is made. B. Contractor is responsible for any damage to electrical equipment or materials until final acceptance of the entire project by the Owner. Keep all equipment clean materials until final acceptance of the entire project by the Owner. C. If a portion of the project is to be occupied by the Owner prior to Substantial Completion of the entire project make arrangements with the Owner to transfer responsibilities for protection and housekeeping. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 00-7
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 26 01 05 SUBMITTALS, CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS, TRAINING AND SPARE PARTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
PRIOR APPROVALS A. Submit approval form for each request for prior approval. B. Submit hard copy, bound, written requests to use unspecified items, to the Engineer, no later than ten (10) calendar days prior to the bid opening. Submit detailed information for proposed material or equipment specific to the project, clearly indicating all options included in the submittal. C. Accepted substitutions will be incorporated in an Addendum to the Contract Documents. D. Contractor is responsible for dimensional differences, electrical requirements and any other resulting changes, when using accepted substitutions. Contractor is responsible for any additional costs incurred as a result of substitutions, including other contractors and Architect/Engineer fees. E. Material and equipment not specified or accepted in an Addendum will be removed and replaced at no cost or inconvenience to the Owner.
1.2
PAY REQUEST COST BREAKDOWN A. Provide Schedule of Values for the utilization of submitting a “Pay Request”. Allocate appropriate share of overhead and profit to each item. Separate each item into labor and material. B. Submit cost breakdown on AIA document G703. Provide minimum breakdown as indicated below. Provide additional breakdown as required for clarity or requested by the Engineer. 1. General Conditions 2. Demolition 3. 600 V Conductors and Cables 4. Raceway, Fittings, and Boxes 5. Occupancy Sensors 6. Wiring Devices 7. Safety Switches 8. Motor Control Center 9. Light Fixtures 10. Lamps & Ballasts
1.3
SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES A. Submit in accordance with the Division 0 and Division 1. Submit drawings to the Engineer for review within 30 calendar days after award of Contract. B. Submit separately-bound documents for each submittal listed in the table at the end of this section. Combination submittals will be returned to the contractor without review. Do not combine submittals.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 05-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. Include project name, name of Architect, name of Engineer, contractor, sub-contractor, manufacture, supplier and sales representative, include name, address, and phone number for the sales representative. Clearly identify section number and description of equipment submitted. Shop drawings not including all of this information will be returned without review. D. Examine all shop drawings noting capacity, arrangement and physical dimensions. Clearly mark all relevant items on catalog data and cross-out unrelated information. Review and stamp shop drawing prior to submitting to the Engineer. E. Submit a minimum of six (6) sets of shop drawings. The Engineer will distribute as follows: 1. Engineer - One (1) copy. 2. Architect - One (1) copy. 3. General Contractor - Remaining copies (two copies to be incorporated into the O&M Manuals. F. All shop drawings must be reviewed and accepted by the Engineer prior to fabrication and installation. G. Shop Drawings will be reviewed by the Engineer, with one of the following actions checked on the submittal stamp: 1. NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN—Indicates the Submittal appears to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation. 2. MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED—Indicates that the Submittals, after noted corrections are made, would appear to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without an increase in Contract Sum or Time. 3. REJECTED—Indicates that the Submittal does not appear to conform to the specifications, and that a complete resubmittal is required. The Contractor shall not proceed with fabrication or procurement. 4. NO ENGINEER ACTION REQUIRED—Indicates the Contractor may proceed without review of the Submittal based on provisions of the Contract Documents. H. Allow a minimum of fourteen (14) calendar days for the Engineer to review the shop drawings. Time is from the receipt of drawings in the Engineers office until they are shipped out of the office. I. If the Engineer rejects (Make corrections noted/Submit corrected copy, Rejected/Submit specified item) two (2) times for the same section the Engineer will be compensated for the additional reviews. Compensation will be incorporated by Change Order and deducted from the Contractor’s application for payment. Contractor is responsible for delays caused by the resubmittal process. J. Refer to the end of this section for list of Shop Drawings required for this project. K. Provide all order service, commissioning, shop drawing preparation, on-site field-service and testing, etc. for all electrical equipment and materials through local representation
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 05-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1.4
CAD DRAWING FILES: A. The electrical CAD drawing files prepared by Hallberg Engineering, Inc. for this project are Instruments of Service of Hallberg Engineering, Inc. for use solely with respect to this project and will not be made available to the Contractor. B. Request CAD drawing files of Architectural floor plans, elevations, sections, etc directly from the Architect.
1.5
DEMONSTRATION / TRAINING A. Fully lubricate, charge, fill, etc. all equipment, per manufacture’s recommendation, prior to start-up. B. Operate equipment and systems in all their operating modes, to verify proper operation, prior to final inspection and Owner instructions. Notify the Engineer, in writing, that all systems have been tested and are functioning and operating properly. C. Fully instruct the Owner's designated operating in the operation of each electrical system at the time it is put into service. Provide instruction using competent instructors and factory-trained personnel. D. Include documentation of instructions in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. E. Obtain a written statement from the Owner that his designated personnel have been instructed. F. Refer to the end of this section for training requirements for each system
1.6
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: A. Submit to the Engineer two (2) Operating and Maintenance manuals. Submit in portfolio form neatly edited with similar equipment grouped, tabbed and indexed. Provide printed or typewritten materials. Provide the following in each manual: 1. Shop drawings, approved manufacturer's bulletins, and other appropriate data from specific manufacturer of each piece of equipment furnished and/or installed. Shop drawings, manufacturer's bulletin, and other data shall be appropriate marked to reflect the "as-built" condition. Cross out or delete all information shown on shop drawings or literature not applying to this specific project. 2. Copies of manufacturer’s warranties 3. Operating instruction for equipment. 4. Wiring and installation instructions for equipment. 5. Recommended maintenance schedules and procedures for equipment. 6. Recommended trouble shooting procedures for equipment. 7. Equipment parts list. 8. Settings/adjustments/calibrations for systems as required. 9. Adjustable circuit breaker and ground fault settings and field-testing procedures. 10. Local equipment suppliers/reps names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 11. Equipment manufacturers names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 12. Sub-contractors names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 13. Refer to individual Sections in Division 26 for additional requirements.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 05-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
14. Test reports. 1.7
RECORD DRAWINGS A. Provide record drawings in accordance with the requirements of Division 0, Division 1 and this section. B. Preparation of as-built drawings does not constitute authorization to make changes unknown to or unapproved by Owner or the Owners representative. C. As work progresses, in a neat and legible manner, record the following information on the record set of plans: 1. Update the contract documents to show all modifications including but not limited to Addendums, Change Orders, approved Proposal Requests and Architect’s Supplemental Instructions. Cut and paste original documents to the as-built set. 2. Indicate exact location and depth of underground feeders to panelboards, transformers, distribution panels, generators and motor control centers, complete from each end. Indicate the routing of the conduits as accurately as possible, showing elbows, sweeps, and turns. 3. Provide plans that indicate exact routing of outside underground feeders and services, showing dimensions from structural foundation walls or columns. Indicate depth and type of conduits. 4. Provide plans that indicate routing of conduit from outlet to outlet, routing of conduit underfloor, overhead, in walls or exposed, combining of circuits into a common conduit, exact sizes of conduits and conductors, revisions to circuit breaker quantity or arrangement in panelboards. 5. Record exact location and elevation of underground conduits dedicated to technology systems including backbone fiber conduits, telephone conduits and cable TV conduits. Where spare underground conduits are terminated underground (i.e. property line), indicate exact dimensions from two different points of the foundation wall corner or structural columns. 6. Indicate exact locations and depth of spare conduits stubbed from concrete pole bases. 7. Record routing of cable tray where it varies from the plans. 8. Record changes to branch circuit numbers on the plan when they deviate from the circuit numbers shown on the Contract Documents. 9. Include the locations of the following devices on the record drawings: a. Occupancy Sensor Power Packs (Section 26 09 23) mounted above ceilings. D. The Engineer will recommend withholding payment if as-built drawings are not being maintained on-site. E. Submit record drawings to the Engineer for review at completion of the Work. Submit final record drawings as part of the Operation and Maintenance Manual package after the completion of the project.
1.8
DOCUMENT TURNOVER A. Construction Documents CD’s, Owner and Operation Manuals (O&M’s), As-Builts, Specifications and other documents turned over at the completion of the projects shall be furnished to the Owner in both paper hard copy and digital Adobe PDF.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 05-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1. Construction Documents a. PDF Creation: Each roll of drawings shall be scanned or converted to PDF to one single PDF document. 1) Scanning: i) 200DPI Grayscale ii) Cropped to original size iii) Color corrected and despeckled b. Bookmarking: Each page of the PDF shall be bookmarked with the number and name of the sheet. c. Naming: The PDF shall be labeled: “Building Name_Year_Title_Spec_Type” 1) Name = Building Name 2) Year = Date of Documents 3) Title = “Addition” “Remodel,” etc… 4) CD = Construction Document 5) Type = Arch, Mech, Electrical Communications or a combination of the above 2. Specifications a. PDF Creation: All specifications shall be scanned or converted to one single PDF file. 1) Scanning: i) 200 DPI Grayscale b. Bookmarking: Not required. c. Naming: The PDF shall be labeled: “Building Name_Year_Title_Spec_Type” 1) Name = Building Name 2) Year = Date of Documents 3) Title = “Addition” “Remodel,” etc… 4) CD = Construction Document 5) Type = Arch, Mech, Electrical Communications or a combination of the above 3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals a. O & M’s shall be turned over by the Contractor. b. PDF Creation: All Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be scanned or converted to one single PDF file. 1) Scanning: i) 200 DPI Grayscale c. Bookmarking: Bookmarking of O & M Manuals shall be extensive.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 05-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1.9
WARRANTY A. Guarantee and maintain the stability of work and materials and keep same in perfect repair and condition for the period of one (1) year after the final completion of the work as evidenced by issuance of the final certificate by the Architect. B. Defects of any kind due to faulty work or materials appearing during the above mentioned period must be immediately made good by the Contractor at his own expense to the entire satisfaction of the Owner and Architect and Engineer. Include damage to the finish or the building resulting from the original defect or repairs. C. Guarantee does not apply to injuries occurring after final acceptance and due to wind, fire, violence, abuse or carelessness or other Contractors or their employees or the agents of the Owner. D. Guarantee does not apply where other guarantees for different lengths of time are specifically called for. E. Refer to the end of this section for a list of specific warranty items for each system.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 05-6
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
Wire and cable Surface Raceway Occupancy Sensors
Switchboards Distribution Panelboards Panelboards Wiring Devices Low Voltage Fuses
Safety Switches Combination Starters Motor Control Center MSS Overload Relays Phase Monitoring Relays Starters Ballasts
Lamps
Light Fixtures Emergency Lighting
Exit Signs
26 05 19 26 05 33 26 09 23
26 24 13 26 24 16 26 24 16 26 27 26 26 28 13
26 28 16 26 29 13 26 29 13 26 29 13 26 29 13 26 29 13 26 29 13 26 51 13
26 51 13
26 51 13 26 52 00
26 53 00
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
Equipment
Section
1.10 FORMS
Unit Equip:3 Yrs Battery Ballasts:5 yr 5 Yrs Unit / 10 yrs
5 Yrs
1 Yr parts &labor 5 Yrs sensor
Warranty (all 1year unless noted otherwise)
26 01 05-7
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Shop Dwgs Req’d? Yes Yes Yes
No
No No
No
No No No No No No No No
No No No No No
No No 2 Hrs
Owner Training
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
Yes
No Yes
No
No No No No No No No No
No No No No No
AHJ Cert. Req’d? No No No
No
No No
No
No No No No No No No No
No No No Yes No
System Testing and report required? Yes No Yes
No
No No
No No -(2) DT 1000sq ft -(2) power packs No No No No (3) Spare fuses of each size and type No No No No No No No -(10) T5HO ballasts -(20) 3-lamp T8 ballasts -(2) cases T5HO -(2) cases 32WT8 -(10) CF each size spec’d -(12) HID each type & size spec’d
Spare Parts
Equipment
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
Section
Owner Training
END OF SECTION
Warranty (all 1year unless noted otherwise) Pro-rated battery, lifetime LED
26 01 05-8
Shop Dwgs Req’d?
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
AHJ Cert. Req’d?
System Testing and report required?
Spare Parts
SECTION 26 01 10 SELECTIVE ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Sections 26 01 00 and all references contained therein form a part of this Section of the Specifications. B. This Section includes all labor, material, equipment and services necessary and incidental to complete all the selective and or complete demolition and removal of electrical systems in the areas of remodeling or affected by remodeling, and the rework and extension of electrical systems indirectly affected by electrical system served “downstream” from the demolished electrical systems. C. Coordinate demolition with the Owner’s asbestos abatement contractor to ensure that all required demolition is included in the project. Any demolition work not included in the asbestos abatement contractor’s work, but required for the project shall be included under this section by the Division 26 contractor. Coordinate work with the asbestos abatement contractor closely, especially where equipment or devices are noted on the plans to be reused or protected.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual Sections.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Examine the building to determine actual conditions and extent of work prior to bidding the project. Refer any unclear details or conflicts to the Architect/Engineer for clarification prior to bidding the drawings. B. Verify that field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings. C. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. D. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation. E. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION A. Coordinate phasing of the demolition work with the construction sequence schedule. B. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. C. Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company. D. Identify and provide new supporting means for existing electrical equipment such as low voltage cabling, conduits, boxes, pullboxes, conduit bodies, and conduit racks that will need additional support due to the demolition of the existing supports, including ceilings.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 10-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
E. Erect, and maintain temporary safeguards, including warning signs and lights and barricades for protection of the public, Owner, Contractor’s employees, and existing improvements to remain. F. Provide temporary emergency lighting and illuminated exit signage as required by the Building Official or AHJ. G. Electrical Service: Maintain existing system throughout construction in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify and obtain permission from Owner, Architect/Engineer at least 24 hours before partially or disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. H. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas. I. Perform noisy work before or after the Owner’s working hours to minimum disruption. J. Coordinate and sequence demolition so as not to cause shutdown of operation of surrounding areas. 3.3
DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Demolish electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings identified to be demolished. B. Demolish and extend existing electrical work under and this Section or as indicated on the Drawings. Remove devices, conduit, wire, boxes, and fastening devices to avoid any interference with new installation. C. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction or to maintain systems downstream from demolished area. D. Provide supports for all existing electrical equipment that was supported previously by demolished walls, floors, ceiling or other structures. Provide new supports from structural members not slated for demolition, prior to any demolition. E. Owner reserves the right of first refusal to obtain material shown to be removed under this contract. Items not retained by the Owner become the property of the Contractor and must be removed from the premises. F. Demolish and remove all electrical systems indicated for demolition. No portion of these systems may be abandoned in place. G. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. H. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit in walls, floors, or columns back to a point where patching can be adequately performed and patch surfaces. I. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed. J. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. K. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. L. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaries. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. M. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 10-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
N. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. O. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified. Relocate and reroute conduit and wiring as required for conduit concealed in walls or structure being altered as part of the remodeling. Maintain continuity to all devices in and downstream of remodeled work. P. Reroute existing raceway and wiring which is exposed due to removal of existing construction. Conceal new raceway and wiring and maintain operation. Q. If conductors are required to be removed from existing raceways, install with new conductors. R. Provide new coverplates throughout the remodeled areas. S. Dispose of fluorescent lamps, ballasts, and other hazardous materials in accordance with State and Federal regulations. 3.4
EXISTING PANELBOARDS A. Ring out circuits in existing panel affected by the Work. Where additional circuits are needed, reuse circuits available for reuse. Reuse breakers if possible. Provide new breakers for new equipment unless breakers are specifically noted on the plans to be reused. B. Tag unused circuits as spare and turn breakers and/or switches off. C. Where existing circuits are indicated to be reused, use sensing measuring devices to verify circuits feeding Project area are not in use. D. Remove existing wire no longer in use from panel to equipment. E. Provide new updated directories where more than three circuits have been modified or rewired. F. Where existing panels are indicated to be demolished, extend any remaining live circuits to the nearest suitable panelboard.
3.5
CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Prior to reinstallation of used equipment, thoroughly inspect each item and report any defects to the Engineer/Architect in writing. Instructions for corrective measures will be given at the time and the Contract amount adjusted accordingly. If no defects are reported, the material will be included under the contractor's one year guarantee. B. Warranty as outlined in Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”. C. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement. D. Luminaries: Where existing luminaries are indicated to be re-used, remove existing luminaries for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean all exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace non-functioning ballasts, and broken electrical parts. Provide new lamps. E. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.
3.6
INSTALLATION A. Install relocated materials and equipment as indicated on the drawings.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 10-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 10-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 26 01 20 TESTING AND ADJUSTMENTS TO ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Testing of electrical systems. B. Submissions of reports of tests.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A. Miscellaneous testing equipment as detailed.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Test the equipment and systems and demonstrate their proper operation to the Engineer. 1. Do not test equipment until it has been fully prepared, connected, and made ready for normal operation. Repair any equipment damaged by improper operation or testing at no cost to the Owner, before final inspection and acceptance.
3.2
FEEDER TESTING A. Megger all lighting and power circuit feeders. If insulation resistance on any circuit is less than 1 megohm, such circuits are to be considered defective and must be replaced. Submit test results for each phase of each feeder from the output report files of the tester. Document all readings and submit to the Engineer.
3.3
OVERALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEM A. Conduct voltage tests at the time of energization of the distribution system, in the presence of the Engineer and carry out such corrective measures as may be required. B. Adjust all systems and leave in proper operating condition. C. Test all wiring and leave free of defective installation and unintentional grounds. D. Balancing Three Phase Loads 1. Prior to turning the building over to the Owner turn on all equipment in the building including lighting and with an amprobe, read the current drawn on each hot leg of feeder supplying each distribution panel. If the current in any one leg varies more than 5% (plus or minus) from the arithmetic average of the current in all the hot legs, reconnect the branch circuits to obtain a balanced loading.
3.4
GROUNDING ELECTRODE TESTING A. Perform ground resistance testing in accordance with IEEE 142 at the main service grounding electrode.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 20-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3.5
OCCUPANCY SENSOR TESTING A. Upon completion of the installation phase, test and adjust each occupancy sensor to insure proper operation. B. General rooms and offices: Set the time delay to OFF after 15 minutes of inactivity. Set the sensitivity of each device to trip the lights ON from anywhere in the room, but not so sensitive to trigger the lights on from motion outside the room. C. Corridors and hallway: Set the time delay to OFF after 20 minutes of inactivity. Set the sensitivity of each device to trip the lights ON from anywhere in the corridor/hall. D. For dual technology sensors, set the sensor to maintain an ON condition if either technology is triggered from within the room after an initial ON. Set the device to initiate an ON condition only if both technologies sense motion from within the room. E. Test all operational features of the system at this time. F. Where required, make appropriate correction(s) and adjustments.
3.6
DAYLIGHT SENSOR TESTING A. Upon completion of the installation phase, test and adjust each daylight sensor to insure proper operation. B. Test all operational features of the system at this time. C. Where required, make appropriate correction(s) and adjustments. D. Specific adjustments: 1. At night (or with the shades closed) set a digital light meter at floor level, and while increasing the light level in the space, set the ON, OFF and deadband footcandle setpoints to the levels specified. E. Repeat adjustments for all spaces. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 01 20-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 26 05 19 600 VOLT CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 01 20: Testing and Adjustments to Electrical Systems C. This section includes these materials as defined by the 2008 NEC: 1. Multi-Wire Branch Circuit: (NEC Article 210.4) 2. Conductors for General Wiring (NEC Article 310) 3. Metal Clad Cable: Type MC (NEC Article 330)
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
WIRE A. Provide copper conductors with 90ºC insulation system, 600 volt rating, U.L. approved and listed for specific application. Aluminum conductors are not allowed B. Indoor, dry location, single conductor, insulated wire. 1. Provide THHN, THHW, THWN-2, XHHW, XHHW-2 insulation. 2. No. 12 AWG and No. 10 AWG: Provide solid or stranded conductors. 3. No. 8 AWG and larger: Provide stranded conductors. C. Underground or wet location, single conductor, insulated wire. 1. Provide THHW, THWN-2, XHHW, XHHW-2 insulation 2. No. 12 AWG and No. 10 AWG: Provide solid or stranded conductors. 3. No. 8 AWG and larger: Provide stranded conductors. D. Provide conductors for other systems as specified in the section in which they are described. E. Provide minimum No. 12 AWG conductor size, unless noted otherwise. F. Acceptable manufacturers 1. Southwire 2. Essex 3. Pre-approved equal.
2.2
CABLE A. Provide MC cable only where specifically allowed.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 19-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
B. Provide UL Listed cable. C. Provide copper phase, neutral and ground conductors. D. Provide factory assembly of one or more conductors enclosed in a metallic sheath that consists of a continuous corrugated aluminum tube conforming to the requirements for a single conductor insulated wire. E. Provide separate insulated ground wire(s) in each cable. F. Provide oversized neutral for circuits from Technology Panelboards (TVSS-grade panelboards). G. Approved manufacturers 1. Southwire 2. Alflex 3. AFC 4. pre-approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
WIRE INSTALLATION A. Encase all conductors in a continuous raceway system. B. Examine all wire before installation. Do not use any wire with insulation that is damaged in any way. C. Do not pull wire into the conduit until the conduit system is complete. Pull all conductors into raceway at the same time. D. Route one A phase conductor and one B phase conductor and one C phase conductor (and neutral and grounding conductors if applicable) within the same raceway for each of the parallel raceways. Provide identical length conductors for all phases and neutrals for each parallel feeder. E. Test all cable and wire for continuity and for shorts prior to energizing any circuits. F. Provide separate hot, neutral and ground conductors for each circuit wired to Technology Panelboards. G. Provide separate hot and neutral conductors for each multi-wire branch circuit. Do not share neutral conductors. H. Provide conductors color coded as follows: 1. 208/120 Volt Systems a. Phase A - Black. b. Phase B - Red. c. Phase C - Blue. d. Neutral - White. e. Ground - Green. I. All Conductors are No. 12 AWG copper unless indicated or specified otherwise.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 19-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
J. All conductor sizes indicated on the drawings are based on copper conductors. Do not substitute smaller conductors with higher temperature rated insulation. K. Maximum number of conductors in raceways and boxes shall conform to the requirements of the National Electrical Code. Neatly trim and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panels. 3.2
SPLICES, TAPS AND TERMINATIONS A. Splices to feeders and service entrance conductors are not permitted unless specifically noted on the plans. B. Provide "pigtail"type splices and taps in wire No. 8 AWG and smaller. Use "wire-nut" self insulating connectors. C. Use pressure or compression type connectors for all splices or taps in copper conductors. D. Do not splice conductors of dissimilar metals together. E. Use only compression type connectors for all splices, taps, and terminations using copper-clad aluminum or aluminum alloy conductors.
3.3
CABLE INSTALLATION A. Provide MC cable only where specifically allowed. B. Use MC cable only where approved as the maximum 6’ connection to a light fixture. C. Restriction on use. MC cable (beyond NEC Restrictions). 1. Home run to panel shall consist of approved conduit and wire. (Unless otherwise noted). 2. Do not install MC cable in block, brick walls, and in or under concrete slabs. 3. Route MC cable parallel and perpendicular to building structure. 4. Do not install MC cable within or supported from a communications cable tray/ladder. 5. Do not use MC cable in areas where cable would be exposed. 6. MC cable may be used for individual cable drops from a junction box to light fixtures. A maximum of 4 drops per junction box. Direct fixture to fixture connections are not allowed.
3.4
ADJUSTING AND TESTING A. Test all wiring and leave free of defective installation and unintentional grounds. B. Refer Section 26 01 20: “Testing and Adjustments to Electrical Systems”. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 19-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 26 05 24 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 21, 22, 23, 25 and 26 section making reference to electrical connections for equipment specified herein.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of electrical connections for equipment is indicated by drawings and schedules. Electrical connections are hereby defined to include connections used for providing electrical power to equipment. B. Applications of electrical power connections specified in this section include the following: 1. From electrical source to motor starters. 2. From motor starters to motors. 3. To lighting fixtures. 4. To miscellaneous equipment forming part of other divisions. 5. Transformer wiring and connections. C. Make electrical connections to all motors, appliances and other equipment and the associated control devices in accordance with the schedules on the drawings and as hereinafter specified. 1. In each case verify connections and physical data from approved shop drawing, manufacturers' wiring diagrams and/or detail drawings provided by relevant trade subcontractor. 2. Make connections to all motors and equipment furnished and set in place by others. Provide starters, manual controls and auxiliary equipment where indicated in schedules and specified herein. Provide all disconnect switches as indicated in schedules, specified herein and required by code. D. Electrical connections for equipment, not furnished as integral part of equipment, are specified in Division 21, 22, 23, 25 and 26 sections, and are work of this section. E. Motor starters and controllers, not furnished as integral part of equipment, are specified in applicable Division 26 sections. F. Refer to Division 21, 22, 23 and 25 sections for connection requirements for temperature control equipment. G. Junction boxes and disconnect switches required for connecting motors and other electrical units of equipment are specified in applicable Division 26 sections. H. Electrical identification for wire/cable conductors is specified in Division 26 section, "Electrical Identification".
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 24-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
I. Raceways and wires/cables required for connecting motors and other electrical units of equipment are specified in applicable Division 26 sections. J. Refer to sections of other Divisions for specific individual equipment power requirements. 1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of NEC as to type products used and installation of electrical power connections (terminals and splices), for junction boxes, motor starters, and disconnect switches. B. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA and ANSI/EIA standards pertaining to products and installation of electrical connections for equipment. C. Comply with UL Std 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper Conductors" including, but not limited to, tightening of electrical connectors to torque values indicated. Provide electrical connection products and materials which are listed and labeled by nationally recognized testing laboratories.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Provide complete assembly of materials, including but not limited to, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire-nuts, and other items and accessories as needed to complete splices and terminations for each electrical connection indicated. B. Raceways and Fittings: 1. Provide raceways and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) indicated for each type service. Provide products complying with Division 26 basic electrical materials and methods section "Raceways". C. Wires, Cables and Connectors: 1. Provide wires, cables, and connectors complying with Division 26 basic electrical materials and methods section "Wires and Cables".
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSPECTION A. Inspect area and conditions under which electrical connections for equipment are to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Install electrical connections as indicated; in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, and complying with applicable requirements of UL, NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate with work, including wires/cables, raceway and equipment installation, as necessary to properly interface installation of electrical connections for equipment with other work.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 24-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper interface between electrical power supplies and installed equipment. D. Cover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater insulation resistivity rating, than electrical insulation rating of those conductors being spliced. E. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket, and insulation properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated. Exercise care to avoid cutting through tapes which will remain on conductors. Also avoid "ringing" copper conductors while skinning wire. F. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate inspection, testing and maintenance. G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturers published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Accomplish tightening by utilizing proper torquing tools, including torque screwdriver, beam-type torque wrench, and ratchet wrench with adjustable torque settings. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not available, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with torquing values contained in UL's 486A. H. Provide flexible conduit for connection of motors and other electrical equipment where subject to movement and vibration. Refer to Section 26 05 33: “Raceways, Fittings, and Boxes” I. Fasten identification markers to each electrical power supply wire/cable conductor in accordance with “Section 26 05 53: Identification for Electrical Systems.” Affix markers on each terminal conductor, as close as possible to the point of connection. 3.3
CONNECTIONS TO TEMPERATURE CONTROL EQUIPMENT A. Make electrical connections as indicated in the plans and specifications to temperature control devices according to the manufacturer’s written instructions. Coordinate with Divisions 21, 22, 23 and 25.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of electrical connections, and after circuitry has been energized with rated power source, test connections to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Ensure that direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirement. Correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 24-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 26 05 29 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. 26 05 33: Raceways, Fittings, and Boxes C. 26 27 16: Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures D. 26 51 13: Lighting E. 26 52 00: Emergency Lighting F. 26 53 00: Exit Signs
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Types of supports, anchors, sleeves and seals specified in this section include the following: 1. Clevis hangers 2. Riser clamps 3. C-clamps 4. I-beam clamps 5. One-hole conduit straps 6. Two-hole conduit straps 7. Round steel rods 8. Expansion anchors 9. Toggle bolts 10. Wall and floor seals B. Supports, anchors and sleeves furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 26 sections.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide supporting devices, of types, sizes, and ratings required that are manufactured by firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of such devices. B. Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical supporting devices. C. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA std Pub No. FB 1, "Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies". D. Comply with National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation" pertaining to anchors, fasteners, hangers, supports and equipment mounting. E. Provide electrical components which are UL-listed and labeled.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 29-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Provide supporting devices; complying with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation; and as herein specified. Where more than one type of device meets indicated requirements, selection is Installers' option. B. Provide supports and anchors constructed of stainless steel or equivalent corrosion resistant material in chemical storage rooms. C. Provide supporting devices of types, sizes and materials indicated, and having the following construction features: 1. Provide clevis hangers for supporting 2" rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel; with 1/2" dia. hole for round steel rod. 2. Provide riser clamps for supporting metal conduit; black steel; with 2 bolts and nuts, and 4" ears. 3. Provide C-clamps of black malleable iron; 1/2" rod size. 4. Provide I-Beam clamps of galvanized steel, 1-1/4" x 3/6" stock; 3/8" cross bolt; flange width 2". 5. Provide one-hole conduit straps for supporting metal conduit; galvanized steel. 6. Provide two-hole conduit straps for supporting metal conduit; galvanized steel; 3/4" strap width. 7. Provide hexagon nuts for 1/2" rod size; galvanized steel. 8. Provide round steel rod of galvanized steel; 1/2" dia. D. Provide anchors of types, sizes and materials indicated; and having the following construction features: 1. Expansion Anchors: 1/2". 2. Toggle Bolts: Springhead; 3/16" x 4". E. Provide sleeves and seals, of types, sizes, and material indicated; having the following construction features: 1. Provide Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves 1 1/2" larger than O.D. of pipe. 2. Set all sleeves true to line, grade and position and plumb or level after concrete is poured. Correct any deviation from proper position. 3. Provide minimum of three (3) concrete anchors for Schedule 40 pipe sleeves. 4. Provide factory-assembled wall and floor seals. Provide watertight seals around conduit, pipe, or tubing passing through concrete below grad floors and wall. Construct with steel sleeves, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets and rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws. 5. Caulk spaces between pipe and floor sleeves inside the building with a waterproof caulking material. Caulk spaces between pipe and exterior partition sleeves with glass fiber insulation.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 29-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
6. Furnish sealable penetration pockets compatible with the building roofing system where conduits pass through the roof. Turn pockets over to the General Contractor. 7. Provide fire barriers around conduit, pipe, tubing, bus ducts and cables passing through smoke and fire rated floors and walls. Provide CP 25, 303 and PSS7904 Series by 3M, or "Flame-Safe" system by Thomas and Betts Corp for fire seals. 8. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide water-tight seals by Thunderline or preapproved equal. F. Provide U-channel strut system for supporting electrical equipment, 16-gage hot dip galvanized steel, or types and sizes indicated; construct with 9/16" dia. holes, 8" o.c. on top surface, with standard green finish, and with the following fittings which mate and match with U-channel: 1. Fixture hangers 2. Channel hangers 3. End caps 4. Beam Clamps 5. Wiring stud 6. Thinwall conduit clamps 7. Rigid conduit clamps 8. Conduit hangers 9. U-bolts G. Roof supports 1. Pipe Pier 2.2
FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES: A. Provide sleeves of one of the following: 1. Sheet-metal fabricated from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the following gages: 3" and smaller, 20 gage; 4" to 6", 16 gage; over 6", 14 gage. Sheet metal sleeves shall not be used for cable. 2. Steel-Pipe fabricated from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs. 3. Iron-Pipe fabricated from cast-iron or ductile-iron pipe; remove burrs. B. Provide fire barrier sleeve seals for sleeves located in floor and firewall. Provide fire barrier material as described above.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Install hanger, anchors and sleeves in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure supporting devices comply with requirements of NECA, NEC and ANSI/NEMA. Extend sleeves 3/4" above floor surface.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 29-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other work. C. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure. Support suspended conduit runs threaded rod and galvanized conduit hangers. Attach the hanger rod to concrete structural members with malleable iron inserts, to existing or precast concrete structural members with self-drilling anchors, to structural steel with steel "C" clamps, and to wood with suitable sized lag screws and angles. Support multiple parallel conduit runs on trapeze hangers constructed of steel rod hangers and structural channel. Include three (3) nuts jam-locked, on all threaded rod hangers, to rigidly support the conduit. Install supports with maximum spacings indicated. D. Support surface mounted conduit runs with galvanized pipe straps. Fasten pipe straps to masonry surfaces with self-drilling anchors or toggle bolts. Fasten pipe straps to wood or sheetmetal surfaces with pan head sheetmetal screws. E. Support wall mounted electrical equipment on 3/4" thick C-D exterior fir plywood painted with two (2) coats of ASA-49 gray enamel. F. Provide stainless steel screws where electrical equipment is mounted on or attached to fire treated plywood. Hold equipment away from the plywood with either plastic or stainless steel washers or spacers. G. Support all ceiling mounted receptacles with a listed tile bridge spanning the suspended ceiling grid, plus a 1/4" threaded rod anchored to a structurally sound member directly above the outlet box. H. Tighten sleeve seal nuts until sealing grommet have expanded to form water-tight seal. 3.2
LIGHT FIXTURE SUPPORTS A. Securely support all light fixtures directly from building structural members or 11/2” or larger steel ceiling framing channels. Use steel channel equivalent to Kindorf #6029 where it is necessary to span the building structural members for fixture support. Wood supporting members or wires will not be acceptable. Provide minimum ¼” diameter lag screws when anchoring into wood structural members. Penetrate wood structural members a minimum of 2” with all screws. Provide steel or lead, expandable type, anchors with minimum penetration of 11/2” when anchoring to concrete. B. DO NOT suspend any conduit, light fixtures, or ballasts from metal roof deck or from the ceiling suspension wires. Support all lay-in fixtures independent of the ceiling support system. Provide fastening clips on each corner of each fixture. C. Equip all fixtures using conduit stems with ball swivel hangers. In finished areas, provide canopies for the hangers. D. Support all surface mounted fluorescent fixtures with a minimum of one hanger per fixture plus one per row. Support individual fixtures with a minimum of two hangers. Attach fixture hangers to the ceiling grid per code. E. Support all suspended fluorescent fixtures with a minimum of two fixture hangers. Attach each END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 29-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS, FITTING, AND BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 05 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems C. Section 26 05 29: Supporting Devices D. Section 26 27 26: Wiring Devices E. Intermediate Metal Conduit (NEC Article 342). F. Rigid Metal Conduit (NEC Article 344). G. Flexible Metal Conduit (NEC Article 348). H. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (NEC Article 350). I. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (NEC Article 352). J. Electrical Metallic Tubing (NEC Article 358). K. Surface Metal Raceways (NEC Article 386) L. Surface Non-Metallic Raceways (NEC Article 388)
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”. B. Submit a coordinated, dimensioned plan drawing prior to installation that indicates the following information: 1. Routing of all underground feeders to-and-between all panelboards, switchboards and distribution panels. Indicate locations where feeders rise up through the floor and transition to overhead feeders. 2. Routing of all overhead feeders to panelboards, switchboards and distribution panels. Indicate locations of all pullboxes and sizes. 3. Routing of all underground conduits exterior to the building.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Steel Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC) and fittings. 1. Provide hot-dip galvanized or electro-galvanized (inside and outside) conduit having a bichromate finish conforming to UL standard UL-6. 2. Provide zinc coated, threaded type fittings, couplings, and bushings. B. PVC-coated Steel Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC) and fittings.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 23-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1. Provide hot dip galvanized or electro-galvanized rigid steel conduit. 2. 40 mil. PVC coated inside surface and outside surface. 3. Provide threaded type fittings, couplings and bushings with the same coating as the conduit. 4. Provide brush-on PVC touch-up compound. C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) and fittings. 1. Provide hot-dip galvanized steel conduit conforming to UL Standard 1242 and Federal Specification WW-C-581E. 2. Provide zinc coated, threaded type fittings, couplings, and bushings. D. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) and fittings. 1. Provide electro-galvanized tubing conforming to UL Standard UL797, with the interior having a smooth coating of aluminum lacquer or enamel. 2. Do not thread tubing. 3. Provide concrete-tight steel compression or set-screw type fittings, couplings and bushings. Cast or indentor type devices are not acceptable. E. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC) and fittings. 1. Provide Type U.A., hot-dip galvanized tubing conforming to U.L. Standard ULI. 2. Provide steel or malleable iron type fittings, couplings and bushings. Cast type devices are not acceptable. F. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC) and fittings. 1. Provide Type U.A. conduit covered with an extruded, polyvinyl chloride sheath. 2. Provide steel or malleable iron, water-tight type fittings, couplings, and bushings approved for use with liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. Cast type devices are not acceptable. G. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit (RNMC) and fittings. 1. Provide Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) rigid plastic conduit conforming to NEMA Specifications TC-2. 2. Provide plastic fittings, couplings, and bushings per manufacturer's recommendations for rigid non-metallic conduit, designed for use with solvent cement. 2.2
OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Provide galvanized code gauge metal outlet and junction boxes with screw-on covers of type, shape and size listed for each application. B. Provide gasketed covers in damp and dusty locations, and also where required to meet the listed use (i.e. wet locations). C. Provide cast metal boxes (FS and FD) for all locations where IMC and RMC is required under Section 26 05 33 under the Raceway Application Table. D. Provide 4" square minimum trade size square boxes for all outlet and junction boxes. Provide appropriate mudrings, tile rings or raised covers, depending on the application and allowable installation.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 23-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
E. Provide 3½” deep boxes where installed in masonry, including precast construction. Provide 2⅛” minimum deep boxes where installed in non-masonry locations. Shallower boxes (1½”, 1¼”) are allowed only at locations where the wall cavity depth does not permit deeper boxes to be installed concealed within the wall. F. Provide outlet boxes with green grounding pigtail pre-terminated to the interior of the box, to be used to ground the wiring device(s). G. Refer to other sections for additional outlet box requirements specific to other systems. H. Approved steel box manufacturers: 1. Raco 2. Steel City 3. Pre-approved equal I. Approved cast metal box manufacturers 1. Appleton 2. Crouse-Hinds 3. Killark 4. Bell 5. Red Dot 6. Pre-approved equal 2.3
INTERIOR PULLBOXES A. Provide listed metal boxes with removeable screw-on covers. B. Size pullboxes boxes to adhere to the NEC. C. Provide enclosures that have a NEMA rating that meet or exceed the environment in which they are installed. D. Approved manufacturers: 1. Hoffman Enclosures 2. Electro Mechanical Industries (EMI) 3. American Midwest Power (AMP) 4. Pre-approved equal
2.4
CONDUIT BODIES A. Provide malleable cast iron or aluminum conduit bodies of type, shape and size required to suit each installation and conduit system. Do not use conduit bodies for conduits larger than 1½” unless specifically allowed on the plans. B. Approved manufacturers 1. Appleton 2. Crouse-Hinds 3. Killark
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 23-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
4. Bell 5. Red Dot 6. Pre-approved equal 2.5
SURFACE RACEWAY – SINGLE CHANNEL A. Surface Metal Raceway 1. Single-channel, metal paintable two-piece raceway. 2. Matching fittings, coverplates, boxes, endcaps, connectors and accessories to provide a complete system. 3. Ivory-colored factory-painted raceway, boxes, fittings and hardware. 4. Listed for the rated voltage of the wiring installed in the raceway. 5. Approved Manufacturers: a. Wiremold 200/500/700 series b. Pre-approved equal
2.6
SURFACE RACEWAY WITH DIVIDER A. Surface Metal Raceway with Divider 1. Two-channel, metal paintable two-piece raceway. 2. Matching fittings, boxes, endcaps, connectors and accessories to provide a complete system. 3. Ivory-colored factory-painted raceway, boxes, fittings and hardware. 4. Listed for the rated voltage of the wiring installed in the raceways. 5. Provide stainless steel overlapping coverplates with duplex receptacle and technology outlets at locations along the length of the surface raceway assembly. Coordinate technology outlet type with Division 27. Match coverplates specified in Section 26 27 26: “Wiring Devices”. 6. Provide full-capacity elbows and entrance end fittings to allow maximum cable capacity for the technology cabling to be installed in the low voltage section of the raceway. 7. Provide “bridge” fittings at T’s and cross connections, in order to maintain isolation of low voltage technology cabling from line voltage wiring. 8. Approved Manufacturers: a. Wiremold 4000 series raceway with 4047 overlapping device plates, 4010DFC series elbows and 4075D series bridge fittings. b. Mono Systems SMS4200 with equivalent Wiremold accessories listed above. c. Pre-approved equal B. Surface Non-metallic Raceway with Divider 1. Raceway and all system components must be UL listed and exhibit non-flammable extinguishing characteristics. 2. Two-channel, two-piece design with base and snap-on cover. 3. Manufactured of a rigid PVC compound white in color and paintable.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 23-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
4. Matching fittings, boxes, endcaps, connectors and accessories to provide a complete system. 5. Listed for the rated voltage of the wiring installed in the raceways. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Panduit TG-70 series b. Wiremold 5400 series c. Pre-approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 26 05 29: “Supporting Devices” for supporting requirements. B. Install all line voltage (120, 208, 277 and 480 volts) conductors in a continuous raceway system. Refer to individual low voltage and communications specification sections for raceway requirements for non-line voltage wiring. C. Provide pull and junction boxes as required by the NEC. D. Provide minimum 3/4” conduit size for branch circuit homeruns. Provide minimum 1/2” conduit size everywhere else. E. Verify conduit sizes indicated on the plans prior to installation. Provide proper size conduit based on the NEC maximum fill requirements, including any derating factors. Where conduit sizes are indicated on the plans, it is a minimum size allowed and it is based on based on EMT usage. If other allowable types of conduits are used, it is the Contractor’s responsibility to provide the proper conduit size, including any grounding conductors and flexible connections to equipment. F. Do not route any conduits across rooftops, unless specifically allowed and noted on the plans to do so. If conduits are allowed to be routed across rooftops, install conductors in Rigid Metal Conduit and provide proper derating of the conductor ampacities to account for the high ambient temperature as required in NEC Art. 310-15. Mount on roof blocks specifically designed for the intended environment. G. Support all trapezes and all above-ground conduits from the building structure. Provide conduit supports, not to exceed 7’ 0”, for all conduit less than 1” in diameter. H. Route all horizontal raceway above water piping, where possible. I. Do not support conduit with wire, nylon ties, nor perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. J. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. K. Conceal all conduit work in new construction, except mechanical rooms. Conduit and boxes in mechanical spaces may be run exposed. Run all exposed conduit in a neat, workmanlike manner parallel to the building lines, tight to the wall and ceiling surfaces, and firmly support with conduit clamps or hangers. Provide one (1) hole mounting straps, minimum three (3) feet on center, for all surface conduit mounted on walls less than six (6) feet above finished floor. L. Do not run conduits in columns except to feed column mounted devices. Do not route conduit through structural slabs, beams, or columns, unless approved by the Structural Engineer. Do not route any conduit in any concrete topping.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 23-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
M. Place conduits at least 8" away from all hot piping and surfaces including domestic hot water lines. Do not route conduits through the same penetrations through floors and walls as mechanical piping unless noted otherwise or if approved by the Engineer. N. Do not mount conduit on mechanical equipment except where necessary to connect electrical devices mounted on the equipment. Provide flexible conduit in all runs "bridging" vibration mountings. O. Do not run conduit on or directly in front of access doors, removable panels, equipment removal spaces, control devices or other spaces necessary for normal maintenance and repair of the equipment. P. Install all exterior underground branch circuit conduits continuous from the source to the load. Do not install in-ground boxes as pull boxes. Oversize the conduits if required. Q. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. Install exterior underground conduits to drain away from the building. R. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion, contraction and deflection where conduits cross seismic, control and expansion joints. Avoid crossing expansion joints where possible. S. Cap or plug conduit ends during construction. Cap or plug ends of conduit that are to remain empty and make watertight. Clean and swab conduits prior to pulling in conductors. T. Provide nylon pull string in all empty conduit with a stamped plastic label indicating future use. U. Provide watertight seal, approved by the Architect, for all roof penetrations. V. Provide air tight seals for all raceway penetrating air plenums. Repair all damage to insulation and vapor barriers. Seal vapor barriers tight to conduit penetrating vapor barriers. W. Seal all conduit penetrations of smoke or fire rated walls or floors with intumescent type fire barriers, 3M or equal. X. Seal all conduits where they pass through exterior walls and where they enter exterior fixtures. Y. Seal all conduits where temperature differential between adjacent spaces is greater than 30 degrees Fahrenheit. 3.2
OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. Maintain accessibility to all outlet and junction boxes as required by the NEC. B. Provide recessed outlet boxes in all new construction, except mechanical rooms. Outlet boxes in mechanical rooms may be installed exposed. C. Provide concealed junction boxes in all new construction, except mechanical rooms. Junction boxes in mechanical rooms may be installed exposed. D. Mounting heights indicated on the drawings are from the center of the outlet box to the finished floor directly below the outlet. Exterior heights are from inside adjacent door, or if no door, from the first floor above grade, unless noted otherwise. E. Coordinate the location of all outlets with Architectural and Mechanical drawings before installation. Verify mounting heights and locations of all outlet boxes, including the following: 1. Outlets located on walls with baseboard radiation. Mount to the side of radiation covers. 2. Switch boxes at doors. Verify door swings. door if possible.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
Install switchboxes on the latch side of the
26 05 23-6
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3. Outlet boxes at casework. Mount outlet boxes above counters and above backsplashes. 4. Outlet boxes at undercounter refrigerators. Mount outlet boxes in the space reserved for the refrigerator. 5. Outlet boxes adjacent to marker boards or other wall-hung Architectural items. Verify top edge and bottom edge of wall-hung items and mount outlets on clear wallspace. F. Do not mount boxes back-to-back and nippled together. G. Do not use through-wall boxes unless specifically called out on the plans. H. Field-gangable boxes are not allowed. Provide manufactured, multi-gang boxes. I. Provide separate switch boxes for lighting dimmer switches to maintain full dimmer rating. J. Close openings in all outlet boxes during plaster and concrete work with plain paper or slip-on plastic or metal plates. K. Provide knockout closures to cap used knockout holes. L. Provide FS and FD boxes in wet, damp and exterior locations. M. Maintain vapor barriers around boxes and/or provide suitable boxes listed for use in vapor barriers. N. Provide air-tight seals for all boxes in air plenums that can allow air to pass through connecting conduit. Repair all damage to insulation and vapor barriers. O. Where boxes and concrete are installed in masonry, provide listed equipment or the means acceptable to the AHJ necessary to provide concrete-tight connections and boxes required by the NEC. 3.3
INTERIOR PULLBOX INSTALLATION A. Provide concealed pullboxes in all new construction, except mechanical rooms. Pullboxes in mechanical rooms may be installed exposed. B. Terminate all conduits at cabinets and boxes with locknuts and bushings. Provide insulating bushings on all conduit 1” and larger. C. Provide pull boxes in accessible locations. Provide accessiblility to the pullbox cover. Coordinate location of pull/junction boxes with other divisions (trades) prior to installation. Do not locate pull boxes in exposed finished spaces without the specific approval of the Engineer and Architect. D. Provide ½” clear space behind boxes when mounting in wet or damp locations.
3.4
CONDUIT BODY INSTALLATION A. Provide conduit bodies in accessible locations. Provide accessiblility to the cover. Coordinate location of conduit bodies with other divisions (trades) prior to installation. Do not locate conduit bodies in exposed finished spaces without the specific approval of the Engineer and Architect.
3.5
SURFACE RACEWAY INSTALLATION A. Coordinate frames with technology cabling installer, and provide the proper frame and coverplate.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 23-7
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
B. Provide surface raceway for lighting, power, low voltage systems and technology systems in finished areas of existing construction, or at other locations specifically called out on the plans. Surface raceway is not allowed in areas of new construction unless specifically called out on the plans. C. Verify routing of surface raceway with the Architect, Owner and Engineer prior to installation. Route surface raceway orthogonal to building lines. D. Provide the shortest lengths of surface raceway possible, following building lines. Route raceway into accessible ceiling space and/or accessible tunnel space. E. Unless specifically sized on the plans, use the smallest (cross-sectional area) size raceway for the use or number of conductors installed in the raceway. F. Provide bushing on raceways stubbed into ceiling spaces for technology cabling. G. Do not route surface raceway through walls or floors. H. Use manufacturer’s base and cover cutter to make field cuts to the raceway. I. Ground and bond all metal raceways. 3.6
IDENTIFICATION A. Provide identification of each junction box and pullbox located in accessible areas (i.e. above accessible ceilings) in accordance with Section 26 05 53: “Identification for Electrical Systems”
3.7
RACEWAY USAGE TABLE A. Refer to table on the following page for allowable usages of raceways and conduit. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 23-8
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
A
A
A A A A
Steel RMC A A A
Alum. RMC A
A A A
A A
A
A
PVCcoated RMC
A
A
A
IMC A
A
EMT A
A3
A2 A2 A2
FMC
A2 A2 A2
LFMC
A6
A4 A1 A
A1
RNMC
A5
Surface Metal Raceway
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
2
26 05 23-9
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
Provide PVC Coated RMC elbows for all elbows installed under and/or through concrete slabs on grade. Provide conduit minimum length of 18” and a maximum length of 48”. 3 Provide maximum 6’ long whip from outlet box located at building structure. 4 Provide concrete-encased ductbank with PVC-coated Steel RMC elbows. Steel RMC elbows not required if the entire elbow is encased in concrete. 5 Provide surface raceway only in areas of existing construction where recessed conduit and boxes are not possible. 6 Install raceway in non-plenum spaces only.
1
Application ↓ Dry, concealed interior locations not listed below Exposed exterior locations Exposed unfinished interior locations installed below 46” above finished floor Exposed unfinished interior locations installed above 46” above finished floor Underground or under concrete slabs on grade Inside exterior masonry wall cavities Wet Locations Exposed inside tunnels Motor Connections – dry locations Transformer Connections – dry locations Non-Transformer Vibrating Equipment – dry locations Motor Connections – wet or damp locations Transformer Connections – wet or damp locations Vibrating Equipment – wet or damp locations Lay-in light fixture connections Service entrance feeder Floorboxes in slab on grade Floorboxes in concrete topping above grade Exposed finished areas Voltages over 600 volts Lightning Protection System downlead conduits
Raceway Type
3.8 RACEWAY APPLICATION TABLE Legend: A=Acceptable; (blank) = Not Acceptable
A5
Surface Nonmetallic Raceway
SECTION 26 05 34 TECHNOLOGY RACEWAY SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 05 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems C. Section 26 05 29: Supporting Devices D. Section 26 05 33: Raceways, Fittings, and Boxes E. Section 26 05 36: Cable Trays F. Section 26 05 50: Floorboxes and Pokethroughs G. Section 27 13 00: Technology Cabling System H. Division 28
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”. B. Submit a coordinated, dimensioned plan drawing prior to installation that indicates the following information: 1. Routing of all underground conduits to-and-between data rooms. Indicate locations where conduits rise up through the floor and transition to overhead conduits. 2. Routing of exterior conduits used for utility entrance cables (CATV, Telephone, Fiber, Outside Plant cables, spares, etc.). 3. Routing of all overhead backbone conduits to-and between data rooms. Indicate locations of all pullboxes and sizes. C. Precast concrete 1. Submit a coordinated set of shop drawings with the precast manufacturer, that indicates technology outlet box locations, cabinet locations and conduit routing locations.
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide all labor and materials for a complete raceway system including some or all of the following components: 1. Outlet boxes 2. Conduit 3. Surface raceway and matching boxes 4. Sleeves and approved fireproofing 5. Pullboxes, pullstrings, bushings 6. Backboards
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 34-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
7. Grounding 1.4
CABLE TRAYS A. Refer to Section 26 05 36: “Cable Trays” for requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
OUTLET BOXES A. Provide 4” two-gang square boxes for each recessed outlet box. Provide 3½” deep masonry type in recessed masonry installations. B. Provide single gang mud or tile ring as required for all boxes. C. Refer to specification Section 26 05 33: “Raceways, Fittings and Boxes” for approved box manufacturers.
2.2
OUTLET DEVICES AND COVERPLATES A. Outlet devices and coverplates are provided under Section 27 13 00: “Technology Cabling System”. B. Provide blank coverplates meeting the requirements of Section 26 27 26: “Wiring Devices”.
2.3
SURFACE RACEWAY A. Provide a 2-section surface raceway with divider for all outlet boxes installed in areas of existing construction. Provide raceway as described in specification Section 26 05 33: “Racways, Fittings and Boxes” and as indicated on the drawings. B. Provide paintable metallic raceway. Provide ivory colored raceway.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Provide empty raceway system from each technology outlet box to accessible lay-in ceiling space. B. Rough-in requirements - New Construction 1. Accessible ceiling (lay-in grid) or accessible tunnel a. Provide an empty box with (1) 1” conduit stubbed into ceiling space or tunnel for each telephone outlet indicated on the drawings. b. Provide an empty box with (2) 1” conduits stubbed into ceiling space or tunnel for each voice/data outlet indicated on the drawings. c. Provide an empty box with (2) 1” conduits stubbed into ceiling space or tunnel for each data outlet indicated on the drawings. d. Provide an empty box with (2) 1” conduits stubbed into ceiling space or tunnel for each fiber optic outlet indicated on the drawings. 2. Inaccessible ceilings (plaster, spline, gypsum, security grid, plank, etc.) a. Provide an empty box with (1) 1” conduit routed to the nearest telephone backboard location for each telephone outlet, unless noted otherwise on the plans.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 34-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
b. Provide an empty box with (2) 1” conduits routed to the nearest communications closet backboard location for each voice/data outlet, unless noted otherwise on the plans. c. Provide an empty box with (2) 1” conduits routed to the nearest communications closet backboard location for each data outlet, unless noted otherwise on the plans. d. Provide an empty box with (2) 1” conduits routed to the nearest communications closet backboard location for each fiber optic outlet, unless noted otherwise on the plans. C. Rough-in requirements - Existing Construction 1. Accessible ceiling (lay-in grid) or accessible tunnel a. Provide a vertically mounted, surface raceway at each outlet device shown on the plan and details, either routed into ceiling space or tunnel. 2. Inaccessible ceilings (plaster, spline, gypsum, security grid, plank, etc.) a. Install surface raceway from the device location to corridor wall. Penetrate wall and route surface raceway as high as possible throughout the corridors to the backboard location. D. Provide a minimum of (2) 4” conduit sleeves between floors at each backboard location, unless noted otherwise. Provide a minimum of (4) 2” conduits from each backboard location to the accessible ceiling space in the corridor adjacent to the backboard location, unless noted otherwise. E. Provide at least one isolated grounding double duplex receptacle wired to a dedicated 120 volt, 20 amp circuit at each backboard location for Owner equipment. Provide a separate hot, neutral and ground conductor. Coordinate with the Owner or designated installer. Refer to the plans for additional information. F. Fireproof all sleeves with an approved fireproofing sealer to maintain the fire integrity of the slab or wall. Refer to Section 26 01 00: “Common Work Results for Electrical”. G. Bush all conduits. Provide a pullstring in each conduit. H. Permanently label the ends of each conduit stub with the Architectural room numbers, in order to identify each outlet box for the technology cable installer. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 34-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Refer to individual Division 26 sections. B. Section 28 50 10: Security Electronics Raceways
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES A. Minimum 1/8” thick laminated bakelite: White face with black lettering. B. Engrave characters with a minimum height of 1/4". C. Minimum plate size: 1” x 3.5”. Provide larger plate if necessary to fit all lettering on it. D. Approved manufacturers 1. Square D 2. Siemens 3. Cutler Hammer 4. General Electric 5. pre-approved equal
2.2
SERVICE IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES A. Provide signage per NEC Articles 110.22, 230.2(E) and 230.70(B) B. Provide nameplates on each main service disconnecting means describing what areas are served by the disconnecting means, and where the other disconnecting means are located.
2.3
EMERGENCY SOURCE IDENTIFICATION NAMPLATES A. Provide signage per NEC Article 700.8. B. Provide nameplates near each main service disconnecting means indicating that the building has an on-site generator and where it is located.
2.4
ARC FLASH WARNING SIGNS A. Provide Arc Flash warning signs on all electrical equipment as required by 2008 NEC 110-16: “Electrical equipment, such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels,meter socket enclosures, and motor control centers, that are in other than dwelling occupancies and are likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized shall be field marked to warn qualified persons of potential electric arc flash hazards. The marking shall be located so as to be clearly visible to qualified persons before examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the equipment.” B. Minimum size: 3½”x 5”; B302 polyester or vinyl with laminate overlay.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 53-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. Approved manufacturers 1. Brady 2. Seton 3. pre-approved 2.5
BOX IDENTIFICATION A. Approved manufacturers 1. Sharpie 2. Avery Marks-A-Lot 3. pre-approved equal
2.6
CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide stenciling of conduits located in accessible areas. B. Provide black epoxy spray paint and 1” high stenciled lettering.
2.7
COVERPLATE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide ¼” high engraved black-infilled lettering or laser etching when engraved coverplates are specified or noted on the plans. B. Approved manufacturers 1. Cooper 2. Pass and Seymour 3. Hubbell 4. Leviton 5. pre-approved equal
2.8
WARNING TAPE A. Provide 4” wide, detectable type yellow warning tape with black lettering “WARNING – UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL” above all underground conduits and ductbanks along the entire length.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES A. Provide identification plates on the following electrical equipment: 1. Each panelboard, distribution panel, switchboard, motor control center and switchgear. Provide the following information on each nameplate: panel name, voltage, wire configuration, feeder conduit size, phase wire size, neutral size, ground wire. Example:
TLP-1-1 208/120V, 3P4W 2”C - 3#2/0, #350 NEUT #4 GND, THWN
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 53-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2. Each overcurrent device in distribution panels, switchboards, motor control center and switchgear 3. Transformers 4. Disconnect switches (engrave per the equipment served) 5. Motor starter switches, motor starters, remote motor control stations (engrave per the equipment served) 6. Power factor correction capacitors 7. TVSS equipment cabinets 8. Contactor cabinets 9. Lighting control panels B. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. C. Install nameplates inside covers in finished areas using approved contact cement. D. Install nameplates outside covers in unfinished areas by mechanical fasteners (screws or rivets). 3.2
ARC FLASH WARNING SIGNS A. Provide signs suitable for the environment in which they are located: 1. Provide engraved plates with the physical specifications called out in paragraph 2.1 above for exterior equipment. 2. Provide laminated, pressure sensitive signs adhered to the outside covers of equipment in unfinished areas. 3. Provide laminated, pressure sensitive signs adhered to the inside covers of equipment in finished areas. B. Provide signs that indicate that an arc-flash hazard exists at this location, and that proper personnel protective equipment should be worn prior to serviving the equipment. Example:
!
WARNING
Arc Flash and Shock Hazard Appropriate PPE Required 3.3
BOX IDENTIFICATION A. Provide panel and circuit number(s) identification on the cover of all junction boxes and pullboxes located in accessible areas (i.e. above accessible ceilings). B. Provide clear, hand-printed lettering using black permanent marker.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 53-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. Perform stenciling after the building has been painted so that overspray from building painting does not cover up stenciling performed under this specification section. Re-label any boxes that have been painted over by the painter. 3.4
CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide stenciling of conduits and pullboxes of the following: 1. Medium Voltage and High Voltage feeder conduits and pullboxes 2. Panelboard, distribution panel, switchboard, motor control center and switchgear feeder conduits and pullboxes. 3. Service entrance conduits and pullboxes at the point of accessibility for cable TV, Telephone and Fiber Optic cables. 4. Lightning Protection System downlead conduits B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. C. Perform stenciling after the building has been painted so that overspray from building painting does not cover up stenciling performed under this section. D. Perform stenciling on 50’ centers, maximum, along entire accessible length of conduits
3.5
COVERPLATE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide engraving or laser-etching on the plate immediately above the wiring device, unless noted otherwise.
3.6
WARNING TAPE A. Install warning tape 8” below finished grade directly above the following electrical conduits: 1. Any concrete encased ductbank 2. Medium Voltage and High Voltage feeder conduits 3. Line voltage service-entrance feeders 4. Underground conduits to exterior light poles, signs, receptacles, bollards, and and power equipment (irrigation equipment, maintenance buildings, etc). 5. Service entrance conduits for cable TV, Telephone and Fiber Optic cables. B. Identify exact locations of underground conduits on the as-built documents. Indicate critical dimensions from the corners of the building. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 05 53-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 26 09 24 DAYLIGHT SENSORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 01 20: Testing and Adjustments to Electrical Systems C. Section 26 51 13: Lighting
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals Closeout Training and Spare Parts”. B. Submit a complete shop drawing package of the proposed system. C. Provide clearly legible shop drawings. D. Submit shop drawings in a neatly bound comb or three ring binder with protective covers. Indicate on the front cover the date submitted, project name, specification section number, electrical contractor's name, address, telephone number and the submitting equipment supplier’s address and telephone number. Allow enough clear area on the title sheet for shop drawing review stamps. E. Submit rough-in requirements including box sizes, conduits, mounting heights, etc. F. Submit wiring diagrams indicating all system components and the wiring necessary to connect the components. Indicate conduit sizes and wire counts and a legend indicating the type of wiring. G. Submit original drawings produced by the supplier/manufacturer. Submitting reproductions of the Contract Documents is not acceptable. H. Submit a material list showing quantity, manufacturer, type and description of each item being furnished. Indicate in a separate list, the quantity and description of all spare parts to be turned over to the Owner at the end of the project I. Submit original prints of the manufacturer product sheets with complete technical data for each item being provided. Circle, arrow or provide other permanent marking on each data sheet to clearly indicate the specific product included in the submittal. Remove or crosshatch out any product on the data sheets not applicable to the project or not being submitted for review. J. Submit physical and schematic drawings of special and custom components or hardware. K. Submit complete description of system operating sequence. L. Submit complete mounting details and instructions for all equipment to be installed. M. Submit complete operating description of the devices. Indicate how to make sensitivity and time delay adjustment to each type of device. N. Shop drawings not containing all the information listed above will be rejected without review.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 09 24-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Where daylight sensors are indicated on the plans or specified herein, provide all components, power packs, mounting hardware, brackets, wiring and terminations required to provide daylight harvesting of the selected light fixtures in the space located adjacent to the windows. B. Provide daylight sensors aimed at the proper location to ensure the desired operation. Verify proper placement with the daylight sensor manufacturer. C. Provide fail-ON configuration, whereby if the sensor or power pack fails, the lights will reach full brightness (type ‘A’ sensors) or will turn ON (type ‘B’ sensors).
1.4
SYSTEM OPERATION A. In rooms or areas where daylight sensors are indicated, provide the following operation: 1. During daylight hours, provide automatic, dimming of the the row of light fixtures located adjacent to the windows. 2. Configure the daylight sensors to ignore short durations of lower daylight levels (i.e. clouds passing in front of the sun). 3. Configure the daylight sensors to provided the minimum illumination at ambient light levels greater than or equal to 75 foot candles, ramping to a maximum light level at 20 footcandles.
1.5
UNIT PRICES A. Provide unit prices per Section 01 22 00: Unit Prices.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
DAYLIGHT SENSORS – ON/OFF A. Provide type ‘B’ ON/OFF type daylight sensors that adhere to the following minimum specifications: 1. Stand alone devices, not interconnected to the Lighting Control Equipment 2. Provides on/off control of selected fixtures identified on the plans. 3. Includes switching power pack to control light fixtures. 4. Semi-recessed ceiling mounted 5. Fresnel lens provides 60 degree minimum field of view 6. Provide two speed levels of automatic rate adjustment: 10 seconds and 60 seconds. 7. Adjustment range: 50 foot-candles to 1000 footcandles 8. Five (5) year warranty. 9. White in color. B. Approved Manufacturers 1. Wattstopper LS-100XB series 2. Novitas 01-PCI series 3. Sensor Switch CM-PC series 4. Douglas Lighting Controls WPC-5601 series
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 09 24-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
5. Lutron pre-approved equal PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Provide 100 hour continuous burn-in for all lamps connected to dimming ballasts, as recommended by the ballast and lamp manufacturers. B. Provide complete and operational system including all line voltage wiring, power packs, occupancy sensors, low voltage wiring, conduit, terminations, setup, testing, calibration, etc. C. Provide daylight sensor coverage at rooms and spaces shown on the plans. It is the intent of the plans and specifications to show all necessary occupancy sensors; however, because coverages vary from manufacturer to manufacturer and model to model, additional (or fewer) sensors may be required in each space. Coordinate locations and quantities with the manufacturer prior to installation. D. Verify the practical location of each daylight sensor prior to rough-in. Locations or applications that obviously will not provide the intended coverage or that have obstructions should be brought to the attention of the Engineer immediately. Changes required after the occupancy sensors are installed because of obstacles or other detrimental conditions that were obvious when the sensor was installed shall be done at no cost to the Owner. E. Locate the required power packs above the ceiling in the room served by the sensor(s), or in an adjacent space away from the finished area. Maintain accessibility to the power pack(s) as required by the NEC. F. Install and wire all equipment in accordance with this specification, project drawings and shop drawings. G. Provide all wiring, conduit, junction boxes and outlet boxes required for the system, including terminations to devices furnished by others. H. Install all wiring in concealed conduit in new construction. Provide surface raceway and boxes in finished areas of existing construction. Reuse existing conduit and boxes wherever possible. I. Provide color coded wiring throughout. Test all wiring for opens, shorts and grounds before system startup.
3.2
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS A. Refer to Section 26 01 20: Testing and Adjustments to Electrical Systems
3.3
TRAINING A. Provide a minimum of two (2) hours of on-site instruction and training to the person or persons so designated by the Owner.
3.4
FINAL CHECKOUT AND ACCEPTANCE A. Demonstrate the operation and use of the system to the Architect/Engineer, to the Owner's representative(s). B. Verify the following before scheduling the system demonstration: 1. The installation is complete. 2. The installation is fully operational.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 09 24-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. Verify the following before requesting final approval: 1. Owner training is complete. 2. As-built documentation is complete and turned over to the Engineer. D. Provide a letter to the Owner certifying that the installation is complete, fully operational and successfully tested. E. Final acceptance of the system will be given upon completion of all of the above requirements. 3.5
WARRANTY A. Provide a complete parts and labor warranty for the system, commencing on the date of final acceptance and continuing for a period of one (1) year. Provide all materials and labor required to correct any system malfunction or failure (determined not to be the result of negligence, abuse or misuse) at no charge to the Owner during this time period. Provide a five (5) year replacement warranty on daylight sensors. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 09 24-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 05 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems C. Section 26 05 33: Raceways, Fittings, and Boxes D. Section 26 27 19: Multi Outlet Assemblies E. Section 26 27 23: Indoor Power Poles
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
WIRING DEVICES A. Provide new wiring devices in each outlet indicated on the drawings. B. Provide all devices from one manufacturer. C. Provide ivory wiring devices for all receptacles connected to normal utility power. D. Provide toggle switches that adhere to the following specifications: 1. Federal Specification WS896-E. 2. Rated for 20 amperes, 120-277 volts unless noted otherwise. 3. NEMA WD1 standards. 4. UL listed. 5. Side and back wiring options. E. Approved toggle switch manufacturers/model numbers: 20A/120-277V Wall Switches Mfr.
1-pole
Cooper Hubbell P&S Leviton
2221 HBL1221 PS20AC1 1221-2
1-pole w/Pilot 2221PL HBL1221PL PS20AC1-RPL
1221-2PL
2-pole
3-way
4-way
2222 HBL1222 PS20AC2 1222-2
2223 HBL1223 PS20AC3 1223-2
2224 HBL1224 PS20AC4 1224-2
Keyed 1-pole 2221L HBL1221L PS20AC1-L
1221-2L
Mom. Contact 1995 HBL1557 1251 1257
F. Provide receptacles that adhere to the following specifications: 1. Federal Specification WC596. 2. UL listed. Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 27 26-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3. Side and back wiring options. 4. One piece solid brass ground strap with integral ground, except GFI receptacles. 5. NEMA 5-20R configuration, rated for 20 amperes at 125 volts, unless noted otherwise. Provide special purpose receptacles rated for the equipment used. 6. Provide TVSS (transient voltage surge suppression) receptacles that adhere to UL 1449 (second edition), UL 498 and ANSI/IEEE 62.41-1991. G. Approved standard receptacle manufacturers/model numbers:
2.2
Manufacturer Cooper Hubbell P&S
Simplex 5361 HBL5361 5361
Leviton
5361
Duplex 5362 HBL5362 5362A or PT5362A 5362
20A/125V Standard Receptacles GFI IG TVSS XGF20 IG5362 5362S GFR5352A IG5362 HBL5360SA 2094 IG6300 8300SP
Tamper Resistant TR8300 HBL8300SGA TR63H
8899
8300-SG
5362-IG
7380
COVERPLATES A. Interior Coverplates: Provide new coverplates over all boxes with the following minimum specifications: 1. All finished areas and unfinished areas with recessed boxes: Provide type 302 stainless steel with smooth satin finish. 2. Unfinished areas over surface mounted boxes: Provide raised metal cover to match the surface metal box. 3. Provide appropriate covers over special purpose receptacles. B. Exterior Coverplates: Provide new 2-gang, “while in use”, weatherproof coverplates for outlets and switches as indicated on the Drawings. Provide weatherproof boots for all dropcords as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Weatherproof switch coverplates: Cast aluminum or Lexan with cover and vinyl gasket for weatherproofing switch; or cast aluminum with lever and weatherproof gasket. 2. Weatherproof receptacle coverplates: Cast aluminum or Lexan with cover and vinyl gasket for weatherproofing receptacle. 3. Approved manufacturers: a. Red Dot 2CKD Series b. Leviton 5977-CL series c. Pass and Seymour WIU series d. Pre-approved equal 4. Weatherproof receptacle coverplates: Stainless steel with locking cover, P&S #WPH-8L or pre-approved equal.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 27 26-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
WIRING DEVICES A. Provide new devices for all outlets indicated. Provide individual GFI, isolated ground and surge suppression device for each duplex receptacle in ganged outlets. B. Wire each device by wrapping the conductors around the terminals and torquing the screw terminal tight. C. Mount all receptacles with the ground lug on the top. D. Replace all receptacles and plates that have been damaged, burned or discolored during construction, prior to Substantial Completion. E. Install wall plates after all painting has been completed. F. Mount wall mounted dimmers in separate boxes from switches. G. Test all wiring devices for continuity, proper polarity connections and grounding. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 27 26-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 26 28 13 LOW VOLTAGE FUSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 24 13: Switchboards C. Section 26 24 16: Panelboards D. Section 26 27 16: Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures E. Section 26 28 16: Safety Switches F. Section 26 29 13: Motor Control
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”. B. Submit "time-current data" with shop drawings for all fuses.
PART 2 EQUIPMENT 2.1
FUSES A. Provide fuses of the following types (Bussman used as reference): 1. 601 amps and larger: Time-delay type designed to hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 4 seconds and clear 20 times current in 0.01 seconds or less with interrupting ratings of 200,000 amperes RMS symmetrical and peak let-through current and energy letthrough values established by U.L. Standard for Class L fuses. Provide KRP-C fuses. 2. 600 amps and smaller: Dual-Element construction with interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes RMS symmetrical and peak let-thru current established by U.L. Standard for Class RK-1 fuses. Provide LPN-RK/LPS-RK. 3. Motor circuits: Protect all individual motor circuits with full load ampere rating (FLA) of 480 amperes or less with dual-element time-delay fuses. Provide LPN-RK/LPS-RK. Protect larger horsepower motors with time-delay fuses. Provide KRP-C fuses. Provide U.L. Class RK1, dual-element time-delay for all other motors. 4. Motor Controllers: Protect NEMA and IEC style motor controllers with dual-element, timedelay fuses to provide Type 2 coordination for the controller. Provide LPS-RK fuses. 5. Protect circuit breaker panels with U.L. Class RK1, Class L fuses. Provide LPN-RK, LPSRK, or KRP-C fuses. B. Class J fuses are not allowed. C. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Bussman 2. Ferraz-Shawmut
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 28 13-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3. Littelfuse 4. Pre-approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 2.2
FUSES A. Provide fuses for all equipment utilizing fused switches or fused safety switches. B. Verify proper size fuses for all equipment prior to ordering fuses.
2.3
SPARE PARTS A. Provide spare fuse cabinet per Section 26 27 16: “Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures”. B. Provide three (3) spare fuses of each size used. Place inside spare fuse cabinet. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 28 13-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 26 28 16 SAFETY SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 14 00 00: Conveying equipment (Elevators) B. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical C. Section 26 05 33: Raceways, Fittings, and Boxes D. Section 26 05 53: Identification for Electrical Systems E. Section 26 28 13: Low Voltage Fuses F. Section 26 29 13: Motor Control
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”. B. Submit a table (see Forms at the end of this section), listing all components by equipment tag with the following information indicated: 1. Safety Switch type, size, rating, enclosure type, switches poles, solid poles, HP rating 2. Fuse size and type (if fused) 3. Identification tag/nameplate
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
SAFETY SWITCHES (DISCONNECT SWITCHES) A. General requirements 1. Provide safety switches as disconnects for all utilization equipment as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide lockable handle with multiple hasps to allow proper lockout-tagout procedures. 3. Provide NEMA 3R enclosures when mounted outside. Provide bolt-on hub kit(s) for conduit connections in order to maintain NEMA 3R rating. 4. Provide NEMA 4X non-metallic KRYDON switch enclosure for all pool equipment. 5. Unless specifically noted otherwise, provide 3-pole with solid neutral bus for landing line and load side neutral conductors. 6. Provide proper size and quantity of lugs to terminate all phase conductors and neutral conductor. Neutral conductors may require more lugs, and a larger size. 7. Provide interior ground lug. B. Fused or unfused switch type 1. Provide heavy duty switch with quick-make, quick-break mechanism with positive interlock.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 28 13-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2. Hinged door with mechanical interlock in the ON position, with defeat mechanism. 3. Provide switch with switch mechanism suitable for the type and size fuses specified in Section 26 28 13: “Low Voltage Fuses”, whenever fused switches are required. 4. Provide horsepower rated disconnects, fully rated for load-break and load-make operation. 5. Provide service entrance rated switches where required. 6. Provide 200% neutral connection in the switch when serving a TVSS grade technology panelboard. Refer to the panelboard summary schedule on the plans, power riser diagram and/or Section 26 43 13: Transient Voltage Surge Supression Equipment. 7. Approved manufacturers: a. Cutler-Hammer DH series b. General Electric TH series c. Siemens Type VBII series d. Square-D Class 3110 series e. Allen Bradley 1494 series f. pre-approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Install safety switches with operator handle no higher than 6’-7” above finished floor in front of the safety switch unless otherwise allowed by the NEC. B. Mount safety switch as close to the equipment as possible. Provide unistrut rack if necessary. C. Do not mount safety switches on removeable panels on the equipment served. Coordinate location of safety switches with the equipment provider prior to installing the switch. D. Install safety switches with proper working clearances about the switch.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION A. Provide engraved nameplates as specified in Section 26 05 53: “Identification for Electrical Systems” on all safety switches. Label per the name of the device controlled unless noted otherwise on the plans.
3.3
FORMS A. Fill out the attached form with the information for each safety switch. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 28 13-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SAFETY SWITCHES FORM
Tag/ID or Equipment served by Safety Switch
Volts
Ampacity
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
Fused, Nonfused or Circuit breaker
NEMA Enclosure
26 28 13-3
Location of Safety Switch (Room #)
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 26 29 13 MOTOR CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 05 53: Identification for Electrical Systems C. Section 26 05 60: Concrete Pads for Electrical Equipment D. Section 26 27 26: Wiring Devices E. Section 26 28 13: Low Voltage Fuses F. Section 26 28 16: Safety Switches
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”. B. Indicate short circuit current ratings for all equipment. C. Motor Control Center Shop Drawings: Include front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions; conduit and entrance locations with requirements; nameplate legends; size and number of busbars per phase and ground; electrical characteristics including voltage, phase, amps, AIC rating, etc. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation and start-up of the product.
1.3
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All motors will be provided by the Contractor providing the equipment to be driven.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
GENERAL A. Provide equipment with a short circuit current rating equal to or larger than the available fault current at the source panel.
2.2
MANUAL STARTER SWITCHES - TYPE MSS A. Provide "on-off" toggle type manual starter switch with thermal overload protection for single phase motors. B. Provide each switch with a red pilot light indicating when motor is on. C. Provide switches located outdoors in a NEMA 4 enclosure and switches located indoors in a NEMA 1 enclosure unless indicated otherwise. D. Approved Manufacturers (surface mounted): 1. Allen-Bradley bulletin 600 TAX4/TAX5, with pilot light bulletin 600 TAX216/TAX109 2. Square D equivalent 3. Cutler Hammer equivalent
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 29 13-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
4. General Electric equivalent 5. Siemens equivalent E. Approved manufacturers (flush mounted): 1. Allen-Bradley bulletin 600 TXQ4/TXQ5, with pilot light bulletin 600 TQX216/TQX109 2. Square D equivalent 3. Cutler Hammer equivalent 4. General Electric equivalent 5. Siemens equivalent 2.3
MAGNETIC STARTERS A. Provide full voltage type starters and thermal overload protection and external manual reset for all three phase motors, unless indicated otherwise. B. Provide starters located indoors in NEMA 1 enclosure, and starters located outdoors in NEMA 3R enclosure unless indicated otherwise. C. Equip each starter with 120 volt coil, control power transformer, secondary fuse block and fuses, 1 set of spare N.O and 1 set of spare N.C. auxiliary contacts, red "ON" pilot light, and "HAND-OFF-AUTO" control switch. D. Provied additional aux contacts as required to allow power factor correction capacitors to be installed properly without modifications to the starter. E. Provide phase failure relays for all three-phase motors 3 HP and larger. F. Acceptable Manufacturers for magnetic starters: 1. Allen-Bradley Bull. 509 &512 2. Square D Class 8536 3. Cutler Hammer equivalent 4. General Electric equivalent 5. Siemens equivalent 6. pre-approved equal.
2.4
COMBINATION MAGNETIC STARTERS A. Provide unit with fused disconnect and magnetic starter as specified in paragraph 2.3. Provide disconnect with quick make-quick break mechanism and interlock so switch must be in off position before covers can be open. Provide disconnect handle capable of accepting padlocks. B. Provide phase failure relays for all three-phase motors 3 HP and larger. C. Acceptable manufacturers: As specified in paragraph 2.3.
2.5
PHASE FAILURE RELAYS A. Provide motor protection relay that sense phase loss, phase reversal, low voltage and voltage unbalance conditions for all three phase motors three (3) HP and larger. B. Provide auto-reset with time delay. C. Provide octal base plug-in type relays.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 29 13-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
D. Verify proper voltage for all relays. E. Approved manufacturers: 1. TimeMark Model #A-258 series 2. Allen Bradley #8135 3. Square D #8430MPS 4. SymCom Model 201A 5. Cutler Hammer / Eaton D65VMLP 6. pre-approved equal. 2.6
CONTROL STATIONS A. Provide HP rated toggle switches per Section 26 27 26 where toggle switches are called out to control equipment. B. Provide standard duty control stations in NEMA 1 enclosures, unless indicated otherwise. C. Provide flush mounted devices and plates in all finished areas. D. Acceptable manufacturers (surface mounted): 1. Allen Bradley (number indicated for reference) a. Momentary start-stop - 800S-2SA. b. Maintained start-stop - 800S-2SCM. c. Momentary start-stop with pilot light - 800S-2SAP. d. Maintained start-stop with pilot light - 800S-2SBMP. e. Momentary 3 unit - 800S-3S series. f. Hand-Off-Auto - 800S-R44SX. g. Hand-Off-Auto with pilot light - 800-R3SXP. 2. Cutler Hammer equivalents 3. General Electric equivalents 4. Siemens equivalents 5. Square D equivalents 6. Pre-approved equal. E. Acceptable manufacturers (flush mounted): 1. Allen Bradley (number indicated for reference) a. Momentary start-stop - 800S-2ASQ. b. Maintained start-stop - 800S-2BSMQ. c. Momentary start-stop with pilot light - 800S-2ASPQ. d. Maintained start-stop with pilot light - 800S-2BSMPQ. 2. Cutler Hammer equivalents
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 29 13-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3. General Electric equivalents 4. Siemens equivalents 5. Square D equivalents 6. pre-approved equal. 2.7
DISCONNECTS A. Provide disconnect switches as specified in Section 26 28 16: Safety Switches. B. Provide NEMA-3R enclosures for safety switches mounted outside. C. Provide NEMA 4X non-metallic safety switches when used in exposed unprotected exterior locations, or for pool equipment.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
WIRING A. Make connections to all motors and power equipment and leave equipment in working order. Check all motors for proper rotation. Tighten connectors and terminals in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations. B. Coordinate motor location, controls, wiring, etc. with other Divisions as required for proper interface. C. Make connections to control devices as indicated in the Drawings. Install all control devices in starter covers unless indicated otherwise. For remote mounted control devices and manual starter switches, surface mount devices in unfinished areas and flush mount devices in finished areas. D. Extend power and/or control wiring for roof mounted equipment to the equipment within the unit curb. Separate roof penetrations are not allowed.
3.2
OVERLOAD PROTECTION A. Provide properly sized overcurrent and overload protection for each motor called out to have overcurrent and overload protection. B. Measure the full load current and provide motor overload elements accordingly. Indicate the overload element manufacturer, type, and size of the inside cover of each starter. C. Submit complete list of “Motor and Starter Installation Data” to the Engineer prior to final completion. Include as a minimum the following information: Motor Name, Motor Location, Starter Location, Starter Type, Starter Manufacturer, Starter Model, Overload Type, Overload Size and Control Station Type and Model.
3.3
PHASE FAILURE RELAYS A. Install phase failure relays inside the starter enclosure including manual starter enclosures, magnetic motor starter enclosures, motor control center starter tubs, and combination starter/disconnect enclosures. B. Provide all required control wiring between relay and the starter.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 29 13-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3.4
SAFETY SWITCHES (DISCONNECTS) A. Provide a lockable disconnect mounted on or adjacent to each motor starter (including VFD’s) as required by NEC Article 430.102(A). B. Provide a lockable disconnect mounted on or adjacent to each motor as required by NEC Article 430.102(B).
3.5
IDENTIFICATION A. Provide engraved nameplates as specified in Section 26 05 53: “Identification for Electrical Systems” on all motor starter switches, magnetic starters, combination starters, contactors, disconnects, and control devices. Label per the name of the device controlled unless noted otherwise on the plans. Provide “SPARE” nameplates over spare equipment.
3.6
FORMS A. Fill out the attached form with the information for each motor control device. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 29 13-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
Volts
HP
RLA
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
Tag/ID or equipment served
MOTOR CONTROL SCHEDULE
• MSS • FVNR • VFD
Starter Type
26 29 13-6
Starter Size (NEMA)
Starter Location (Room #) Yes / No
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
Fused / NF
Combination Starter/Disc?
SECTION 26 51 13 LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 01 20: Testing and Adjustments to Electrical Systems C. Section 26 05 19: 600 Volt Conductors and Cables D. Section 26 09 21: Contactors E. Section 26 05 29: Supporting Devices F. Section 26 05 33: Raceways, Fitting and Boxes G. Section 26 09 23: Occupancy Sensors H. Section 26 09 24: Daylight Sensors I. Section 26 09 26: Miscellaneous Lighting Control Devices J. Section 26 09 25: Emergency Lighting Control Relay K. Section 26 52 00: Emergency Lighting L. Section 26 53 00: Exit Signs
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”. B. Submit shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each fixture assembled in alphabetical order by ‘type’. Submit manufacturer’s data including dimensioned drawings and photometric data prepared by an independent nationally recognized testing lab. C. Submit shop drawings for each ballast type as specified and/or indicated on the drawings. D. Additional requirements for all indirect linear lighting: 1. Submit scaled plan of each room or areas where the above types are used. Indicate fixture lengths, anchoring locations, feed points, internal wiring diagram of each fixture that shows all switchleg wiring any all low voltage dimming ballast wiring. 2. Identify each light fixture with type and room number used. Provide shipping label that identifies the room number and installation location of each light fixture. Include the plan described above in #1, inside each fixture box shipped to the site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
LIGHT FIXTURES A. Provide fixtures with lamps, for each outlet shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. See fixtures list on the plan. B. Provide U.L. approved fixtures.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 51 13-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. The type fixtures required are as noted by a capital letter on the Drawings. Contractor is solely responsible for the exact quantities. Due to the high quantity of linear light fixtures on this project, fixture types shown on the plans do not necessarily equate to an exact length or quantity of fixture; rather, the fixture designation shown on the plans refer to the type of fixture. It is the Contractors responsibility to provide the proper length and switching configuration in each room. D. Provide color stabilized clear virgin acrylic diffusers for interior fixtures. Provide a minimum thickness of 0.156" for all troffer lenses. E. Provide disconnects at each light fixture required to have a disconnect as required under the 2008 NEC 410.130(G). 2.2
FLUORESCENT BALLASTS – T8 AND COMPACT FLUORESCENT A. Provide fluorescent lamp ballasts with the following minimum specifications 1. Disconnecting means on the line side of the ballast to disconnect all hot and neutral conductors, as required by 2008 NEC Article 410.130(G). Provide either factory-installed disconnecting means, or provide field-installed disconnect inside the ballast channel. a. Approved field-installed disconnect 1) WAGO 873 2) Tyco/AMP Light-N-Lok CPGI series 3) T & B Sta-Kon LD2/LD3 series 2. Provide U.L. listed and labeled, C.B.M. approved ballasts. 3. Programmed Rapid Start technology to ensure longest lamp life. 4. Compact Fluorescent only: Series wired lamps for multiple lamp configurations, and plug-in lead connectors for all lamp leads 5. Class “P” rated with thermally activated automatic resetting protective devices sealed in housing. 6. Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less on 60 Hz modulated current. 7. Comply with FCC Rules Part 18 requirements governing electromagnetic and radio frequency interference 8. Complies with IEEE 587 for withstanding line transients, voltage regulation + 10 percent, light regulation + 10 percent. 9. Ballast Factor: 0.88 or higher. 10. Power Factor: greater than 95 percent 11. Sound rating: “A” 12. Minimum 5 year warranty including $10/ballast labor 13. Total Harmonic Distortion: <20% , but greater than 10%. 14. End-of-life lamp sensing for all Compact Fluorescent ballasts. B. Provide ballasts and lamps suitable for starting at a minimum starting temperature of -20 degrees F. when "cold weather" fixtures are indicated on the light fixture schedule or any fixture mounted on the exterior of the building.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 51 13-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. Approved manufacturers – T8 electronic ballasts 1. Advance Centium Program Rapid Start series 2. Universal Lighting Technologies Triad AccuStart series 3. Osram Quicktronic ProStart series D. Approved manufacturers – Compact Fluorescent 1. Motorola Gold edition 2. Robertson 3. Osram Quicktronic series 4. Universal Lighting Technologies 2.3
FLUORESCENT LAMPS – T8 A. Provide minimum 85 CRI for all fluorescent lamps. Provide 3500K color lamps for all fluorescent fixtures. B. Provide F032, F025 and F017 T8 lamps for all 4’, 3’ and 2’ fixtures, respectively, unless noted otherwise. C. Approved manufacturers: 1. GE Starcoat SPX 2. Phillips TL80 3. Osram Sylvania Octron 800XP
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Provide 100 hour initial burn in for all fluorescent lamps connected to dimmers or daylight sensors. Refer to Section 26 09 24: “Daylight Sensors”. B. Provide all hangers, rods, mounting brackets, supports, frames, etc. for proper and safe fixture installation. Install all fixtures in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations and instructions. Refer to Section 26 05 29: “Supporting Devices” for approved supporting methods. C. Provide fixtures complete with all auxiliaries required for proper, safe and distortion free installation in the various ceiling constructions in which they appear. Coordinate ceiling types with the Architectural drawings and provide compatible fixtures. D. Provide felt or fiberglass gaskets on all incandescent lighting fixtures where necessary to prevent light leakage at the ceiling line. E. Where master/slave or inboard/outboard switching is indicated, provide tandem-wired ballasts between light fixtures as required by the Minnesota Energy Code.
3.2
WIRING A. Wire all recessed lay-in fixtures with 6 feet of flexible metal conduit with Type "THHN/THWN" wire to the outlet box. Provide grounding type connectors for all conduit and cable.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 51 13-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
B. Provide outlet boxes adjacent to each recessed fixture outlet in suspended ceilings to permit each fixture to be adjusted to fit ceiling pattern and to permit "Feed Through" wiring. C. Provide conduit for all wiring to parking lot fixtures. 3.3
QUALITY CONTROL A. At the time of substantial completion, all fixtures must be installed and lamped with new lamps. Install all fixtures complete with lenses, diffusers, reflectors, louvers and other required accessories. Furnish a minimum of one case of replacement lamps for each type and size lamp used. Deliver replacement stock to the Owner’s storage space as directed by the Owner. B. Replace any damaged reflectors, diffusers, louvers or other components at no expense to the Owner. C. Clean all fixtures free of dust, finger prints, paint, etc.. D. Perform aiming and adjustment of all lighting fixtures in accordance with instructions issued by the Engineer. Adjust all directional type fixtures (interior and exterior) after dark under the direction of the Architect, Engineer, and/or Owner. E. Replace all defective ballasts within the guarantee period at no cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 51 13-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 26 53 00 EXIT SIGNS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. Section 26 01 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 01 20: Testing and Adjustments to Electrical Systems C. Section 26 05 19: 600 Volt Conductors and Cables D. Section 26 05 29: Supporting Devices E. Section 26 05 33: Raceways, Fitting and Boxes F. Section 26 51 13: Lighting G. Section 26 52 00: Emergency Lighting H. Emergency Systems (NEC Article 700) I. Life Safety Code (NFPA 101)
1.2
SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 26 01 05: “Submittals, Closeout Documents, Training and Spare Parts”.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
EXIT SIGNS A. Provide exit signs that adhere to the following minimum specifications: 1. 120 and 277 volt operation. 2. Multiple LED lamp source. 3. NFPA 101 and EPA/DEP Energy Star Compliant. 4. Green or red stenciled letters (refer to light fixture schedule) 5. Black or white housing (refer to light fixture schedule) 6. Brushed aluminum face (refer to light fixture schedule) 7. Cast aluminum housing, snap together design. 8. Universal mounting: right side (canopy), left side (canopy), top (canopy) and back. 9. Knockouts for chevrons, right and left. 10. Snap-in wiring connections to allow replacement of components without removing housing. B. For exit signs with battery back-up, provide the following additional minimum specifications: 1. Nickel cadmium batteries sized to provide 2 hours backup. 2. Integral solid state battery charger.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 53 00-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3. Low battery voltage protection 4. Provide pilot light and test switch. [Self-testing diagnostics] 5. AC “ON” indicator 6. UL 924 listed C. Approved Manufacturers 1. Refer to the light fixture schedule. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Prior to installation of exit signs, contact the Building Official and Fire Marshal to arrange a walk-through to discuss exit sign placement, approximately at the mid-point of construction. B. Provide exit signs at each exit and along the egress path. C. Mount exit signs to walls wherever possible. Where exit signs are shown to be installed to a lay-in ceiling, provide additional support from the building structure. Refer to Section 26 05 29: Supporting Devices for supporting requirements. D. Connect exit signs to an unswitched lighting circuit. Circuit can be shared with unit battery equipment provided under Section 26 52 00: Emergency Lighting. Provide handle lock on breaker. E. Connect exist signs to life safety circuit fed from the emergency generator. Provide handle lock on breaker.
3.2
VANDAL GUARDS A. Securely mount guards to structure using standard hardware with dedicated anchors. Refer to Section 26 05 29: “Supporting Devices”. B. Provide a minimum of four anchors (1 per corner), or additional if recommended by the guard manufacturer.
3.3
WARRANTY A. Provide a complete parts and labor warranty for the system, commencing on the date of final acceptance and continuing for a period of one year. Provide all materials and labor required to correct any system malfunction or failure (determined not to be the result of negligence, abuse or misuse) at no charge to the Owner during this time period. B. Provide these additional manufacturers warranties: 1. Provide a lifetime warranty on exit sign LED’s. 2. Provide 5 year warranty on the exit sign unit and electronics. 3. Provide 10 year pro-rated warranty on exit sign batteries. 4. Provide lifetime warranty on vandal wire guards. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
26 53 00-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 27 01 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
REFERENCES A. This section (27 01 00) is subject to all of the applicable provisions of the above-indicated sections. B. ASTM-E814, Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops
1.2
SCOPE A. The Provisions of this Section of the Specifications apply to all Sections of Division 27. B. All Conduit and sleeves are to be installed by Division 27 Contractor unless otherwise noted. C. Communications contractor is responsible for providing sleeves through fire rated walls if required but not shown on plans. D. Communications contractor will determine prior to bidding what services are to require a licensed electrician and is responsible to include the cost of any electrical work under the base bid for Division 27.
1.3
SUBMITTALS A. Submit material list in accordance with Section 27 01 00, describing all material furnished under Part 2 of this Specification. B. Submit shop drawings for materials listed in Part 2 of this specification in accordance with the requirements of Section 27 01 00.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide new, first quality material for all products specified. Do not reuse materials unless indicated or approved by the Engineer. B. Comply with the NEC as applicable to the construction and installation of equipment specified in this section. C. Provide equipment specified in this section that has been listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. D. Comply with ANSI as applicable to equipment specified in this section. E. Comply with NEMA as applicable to equipment specified in this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS A. Surface metal raceway and fittings. Provide Wiremold V500 one-piece steel surface metal raceway, and fittings to conceal cabling as required on existing walls. Provide Wiremold V5744S deep switch box for volume controls.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 01 00-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
RACEWAY INSTALLATION A. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. B. Run exposed conduit in a neat, workmanlike manner parallel to the building lines, tight to the wall and ceiling surfaces, and firmly support with conduit clamps or hangers. Provide two (2) hole mounting straps, minimum three (3) feet on center, for all surface conduit mounted on walls less than six (6) feet above finished floor. C. Do not run conduits in columns except to feed column-mounted devices. Do not route conduit through structural slabs, beams, or columns, unless approved by the Structural Engineer. D. Place conduits at least 8" away from all hot piping and surfaces including domestic hot water lines. E. Do not run conduit on or directly in front of access doors, removable panels, equipment removal spaces, control devices or other spaces necessary for normal maintenance and repair of the equipment. F. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. G. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion, contraction and deflection where conduits cross seismic, control and expansion joints. Avoid crossing expansion joints where possible. H. Cap or plug conduit ends during construction. Cap or plug ends of conduits that are to remain empty and make watertight. Clean and swab conduits prior to pulling in conductors. I. Provide nylon pull string in all empty conduits with a stamped plastic label indicating future use. J. Provide watertight seal, approved by the Architect, for all roof penetrations. K. Provide airtight seals for all raceway penetrating air plenums. Repair all damage to insulation and vapor barriers. Seal vapor barriers tight to conduit penetrating vapor barriers. L. Seal all conduit penetrations of smoke or fire rated walls or floors with intumescent type fire barriers, 3M or equal. M. Seal all conduits where they pass through exterior walls and where they enter exterior fixtures. N. Seal all conduits where temperature differential between adjacent spaces is greater than 30 degrees Fahrenheit.
3.2
SLEEVES A. Provide all sleeves through partitions as required to route cabling from interior rooms to the existing cable tray system. Provide EMT conduit sleeves, bushed on each end. B. Caulk spaces between pipe and floor sleeves inside the building with a waterproof caulking material. C. Seal all sleeved penetrations with intumescent type fire barriers, 3M or equal.
3.3
FIRESTOPPING A. Provide UL listed fire stopping around all sleeves.
B. Provide removable pillow “bag” type expanding fire stopping material at each penetration of the cable tray through a fire rated partition, and at each raceway not full to capacity. This will allow additional cables to be installed in the future. Akin Road Elementary School 27 01 00-2 January 15, 2013 Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192 R11-1036.000
C. Seal all sleeves or conduit penetrations of smoke or fire rated walls or floors with intumescent type fire barriers, 3M or equal. D. Perform fire stopping after all cabling has been installed. E. Provide firestopping pillows at cable entrance points to headend rooms located above the doorway as required to fill existing cable pathways. 3.4
WIRING A. Examine all wire before installation. Do not use any wire with insulation that is damaged in any way. B. Do not pull wire into the conduit until the conduit system is complete. Pull all conductors into raceway at the same time. C. Maximum number of conductors in raceways and boxes shall conform to the latest edition of the National Electrical Code. Neatly install wiring inside cable tray, equipment, and panels. D. Provide airtight seals for all wiring penetrating air plenums. Repair all damage to insulation and vapor barriers. Seal vapor barriers tight to wiring penetrating vapor barriers. Provide plenum rated cable, where indicated on the drawings or specified herein, for all cable routed in air plenums.
3.5
ADJUSTING AND TESTING A. Adjust and leave in proper operating condition. B. Test all wiring and leave free of defective installation and unintentional grounds. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 01 00-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 27 01 05 SUBMITTALS AND PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Technology cabling work description. a. Work consists of furnishing labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation of technology work shown in the Contract Documents and specified in Division 27. b. Include all parts and labor that are incidental and necessary for a complete and operable installation even though not specifically mentioned in the Contract Documents. Such items include nuts, bolts, anchors, brackets, sleeves, fittings, etc. c. Obtain all temporary and permanent permits and licenses required in connection with this Division’s work. Pay all fees and expenses required for such permits and licenses. d. Contractor is responsible for requesting any inspections as required by regulating agencies and/or regulations. Pay all charges for inspections by regulating agencies of installations of plans specifications. e. Include State and Local sales taxes in the bid. Keep accurate records of these taxes and furnish such records to the Owner upon request. f. Provide the Owner with a certificate of final inspection and approval by enforcement authorities as required. B. Related Sections: 1. Where a Specification Section refers to other Sections under the Article on Related Sections, this is done for Contractor’s convenience only. It shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibilities stated in other Sections of the Specifications, even though these Sections are not specifically referenced. The Contractor is responsible for all information contained in this Division’s Specifications as well as for information contained in all other Divisions.
1.2
REFERENCES A. Meet or exceed all current applicable codes, ordinances and regulations for all installations. Promptly notify the Engineer, in writing, if the contract documents appear to conflict with governing codes and regulations. Contractor assumes all responsibility and costs for correcting non-complying work installed without notifying the Engineer. B. Higher quality of workmanship and materials indicated in the Contract Documents takes precedence over that allowed in referenced codes and standards. C. Perform all work in compliance with the currently adopted version of the following codes and standards for this project: National Electric Code State and Local Electrical Codes
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 01 05-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
Uniform Building Codes State and Local Building Codes and Ordinances State Industrial Commission Regulations State and Local Fire Codes and Regulations State and Local Uniform Mechanical Codes Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations Americans with Disabilities Act Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards NFPA 101 Life Safety Code State Energy Code D. Use the Standard where referenced in the specifications by the following abbreviations: ADA: AIA: AIA: ANSI: ASTM: CCITT: FCC: EIA: EPA: FM: IEEE: IES: ICEA: ITU: ITU-T: NBS: NEMA: NFPA: NSC: RUS: TIA: UL: 1.3
Americans with Disabilities Act American Insurance Association American Institute of Engineers American National Standards Institute American Society of Testing and Materials International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee Federal Communications Commission Electronic Industries Association Environmental Protection Agency Factory Mutual Insurance Association Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Illuminating Engineering Society of North America International Cable Engineers Association International Telecommunications Union International Telecommunications Union-Telecommunications National Bureau of Standards National Electrical Manufacturers Association National Fire Protection Association National Safety Council Rural Utilities Services Telecommunications Industry Association Underwriter's Laboratories
DEFINITIONS A. The terms defined below apply to all work included in Division 27. 1. Furnish - to obtain, coordinate, submit the necessary drawings, and deliver to the job site in new condition ready for installation and guarantee. 2. Install - to receive at the job site, store, set in place, connect, and place in operation. 3. Provide - to furnish and install. 4. Connect - to bring service to the equipment and make final attachment including necessary switches, outlets, boxes, terminations, etc. 5. Conduit - includes, in addition to conduit, all fittings, pull boxes, hangers and other supports and accessories related to such conduit.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 01 05-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
6. Concealed - hidden from sight in chases, furred spaces, shafts, hung ceilings, embedded in construction, in crawl spaces or buried. 7. Exposed - neither installed underground nor concealed as defined above. 8. Building structure or building structural members - consists of steel columns, steel beams, steel joists (top chord and at panel points), concrete walls and concrete block walls. Metal decking, joist bridging and bottom chords of bar joists shall not be construed as building structure nor as a building structural member for the purpose of support. B. The drawing and specifications constitute the Contract Documents. Any item noted in the specification or shown on the drawings is included in the Contract Documents. C. All details and drawings are diagrammatic, unless specifically noted. Field verify all dimensions and notify the Engineer of any conflicts of discrepancies, in writing, prior to installation. 1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Substitutions 1. Submit written requests to use unspecified items, to the Engineer, no later than ten (10) calendar days prior to the bid opening. Requests must be submitted by a bidding Contractor only. Submit detailed information for proposed material or equipment. 2. Accepted substitutions will be incorporated in an Addendum to the Contract Documents. 3. Contractor is responsible for dimensional differences, electrical requirements and any other resulting changes, when using accepted substitutions. Contractor is responsible for any additional costs incurred as a result of substitutions, including other contractors and Engineer fees. 4. Material and equipment not specified or accepted in an Addendum will be removed and replaced at no cost or inconvenience to the Owner. B. List of Materials, Equipment and Sub-contractors 1. Submit a complete list of all materials, equipment, and sub-contractors, which are proposed to work on this project, to the Engineer within seven (7) calendar days of the award of contract or written notice to proceed. Submit list on form included at the end of this section. 2. Acceptance of items on the list is considered final, unless the Engineer requires additional information or submissions. Unacceptable items will be rejected and resubmitted. C. Shop Drawings and Samples 1. Submit in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1. Submit drawings to the Engineer for review within 30 calendar days after award of Contract. 2. Include project name, name of Engineer, contractor, sub-contractor, manufacture, supplier and sales representative, include name, address, and phone number for the sales representative. Clearly identify section number and description of equipment submitted. Shop drawings not including all of this information will be returned without review. 3. Examine all shop drawings noting capacity, arrangement and physical dimensions. Clearly mark all relevant items on catalog data and cross-out unrelated information. Review and stamp shop drawing prior to submitting to the Engineer.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 01 05-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
4. Shop drawings will be submitted with separately engineered riser/wiring/connection oneline diagrams and equipment elevations drawings for each facility. 5. Submit a minimum of Six (6) sets of shop drawings. The Engineer will distribute as follows: a. Engineer
- One (1) copy.
b. District
- One (1) copy.
c. Contractor
- Remaining copies (two copies to be incorporated into the O&M Manuals).
6. All shop drawings must be reviewed and accepted by the Engineer prior to fabrication and installation. 7. Shop Drawings will be reviewed by the Engineer, with one of the following actions checked on the submittal stamp: a. NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN—Indicates the Submittal appears to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation. b. MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED—Indicates that the Submittals, after noted corrections are made, would appear to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without an increase in Contract Sum or Time. c. REJECTED—Indicates that the Submittal does not appear to conform to the specifications, and that a complete re-submittal is required. The Contractor shall not proceed with fabrication or procurement. d. NO ENGINEER ACTION REQUIRED—Indicates the Contractor may proceed without review of the Submittal based on provisions of the Contract Documents. 8. Allow a minimum of fourteen (14) calendar days for the Engineer to review the shop drawings. Time is from the receipt of drawings in the Engineers office until they are shipped out of the office. 9. Submit shop drawings, bound separately by section, for the following equipment: Section 27 13 00
Description Technology Cabling
10. If the Engineer rejects (Make corrections noted/Submit corrected copy, Rejected/Submit specified item) two (2) times for the same section the Engineer will be compensated for the additional reviews. Compensation will be incorporated by Change Order and deducted from the Contractor’s application for payment. Contractor is responsible for delays caused by the re-submittal process. D. CADD Drawing Files: 1. The technology CADD drawing files prepared by Hallberg Engineering, Inc. for this Project are instruments of Hallberg Engineering, Inc. service for use solely with respect to this Project.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 01 05-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Initiate, maintain and supervise all safety precautions required with this work in accordance with the regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and other governing agencies. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not remove or disturb any asbestos containing materials from the project. Immediately stop work and notify the Owner if asbestos containing materials are suspected. 2. Do not dispose of any PCB containing materials. Disposal of all PCB containing materials will be the responsibility of the Owner.
1.6
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Correlation of Work: 1. Consult the drawings and specifications of Division 27 and other trades for correlating information and lay out work so that it will coordinate with other trades. Verify dimensions and conditions (i.e., finished ceiling heights, footing and foundation elevations, beam depths, etc.) with the existing Architectural and Structural drawings to be provided by Owner. Notify the Engineer of any conflicts that cannot be resolved, in the field, by affected trades. 2. Replacement work required due to a lack of coordination must be accomplished at no cost to the Owner. 3. Where work must be replaced due to the failure of the Contractor to verify the conditions existing on the job, such replacement must be accomplished at no cost to the Owner. This applies to shop fabricated work as well as to work fabricated in place. 4. Throughout the course of the work, the Engineer may request minor changes and adjustments to the installation. The Contractor shall make adjustments without additional cost to the Owner, where such adjustments are necessary to the proper installation and operation within the intent of the Contract Documents. This does not include work already completed. 5. Equipment outlines shown on detail plans of 1/4"=1'-0" scale or larger and/or dimensions indicated on the plans are limiting dimensions. Do not install any equipment that exceeds the equipment outlines shown or reduces indicated clearances. 6. Obtain exact location of connection to equipment, furnished by others, from the person furnishing the equipment. 7. Drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either on is as binding as if called for in both. 8. Include the better quality, greater quantity or higher cost for an item or arrangement where a disagreement exists in the drawings and specifications.
1.7
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Refer to General Conditions and Requirements.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 01 05-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1.8
WARRANTY A. Guarantee and maintain the stability of work and materials and keep same in perfect repair and condition for the period of one (1) year after the final completion of the work as evidenced by issuance of the final certificate by the Engineer. B. Defects of any kind due to faulty work or materials appearing during the above mentioned period must be immediately corrected by the Contractor at his own expense to the entire satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer. This includes damage to the finish or the building resulting from the original defect or repairs. C. Guarantee does not apply to injuries occurring after final acceptance and due to wind, fire, violence, abuse or carelessness or other Contractors or their employees or the agents of the Owner. D. Guarantee does not apply where other guarantees for different lengths of time are specifically called for.
PART 3 EXECUTION 2.1
INSTALLATION A. Material and Workmanship 1. Provide new material and equipment, unless noted otherwise. Protect equipment and material from damage, dirt and the weather. 2. Provide the highest quality workmanship and perform all work only by skilled installers. Install material and equipment in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations, instructions and current ANSI/EIA/TIA standards. 3. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or workmanship not in accordance with the specifications, before or after installation. B. Cutting and Patching: 1. Perform all cutting and patching necessary to work, unless specifically delegated to the General Contractor. Obtain special permission from the engineer before cutting structural members or finished material. Perform all patching in such a manner as to leave no visible trace and return the area affected to the condition of undisturbed work. Perform all patching by workers experienced, skilled, and licensed for the particular type of work involved. Inferior work will not be accepted. 2. Patch all holes left as a result of demolition of electrical equipment and devices. 3. Drill all holes in masonry with rotary drill. Impact tools are not allowed. Core drill all holes in masonry and concrete for electrical raceway. Provide and dispose of all water required for core drilling. Coordinate with other trades to prevent damage from water. 4. Prevent the spread of dust, debris, and other material into adjacent areas. 5. Replace all ceiling tiles damaged during installation of work with new tile. C. Painting: 1. Paint all new raceway systems in exposed finished areas (e.g. gymnasiums, lunch rooms, corridors, etc.) to match existing finish in accordance with Section 09900.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 01 05-6
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
D. Record Drawings: 1. Provide record drawings in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 1. Provide complete AutoCAD-generated plans saved on CD. 2. As work progresses, in a neat and legible manner, record all changes or deviations from the contract drawings as follows: a. Maintain a complete set of Record Drawings showing all modifications to the Contract Documents. b. Record exact location and elevation of underground feeders and empty conduit including changes in direction by reference to building lines, curbs, walks, and other permanent reference points. c. Record routing of concealed and exposed conduit and cable tray, where it varies from the Contract Documents. d. Contractor may purchase copies of the electrical drawings from the Engineer for $15.00 per sheet. Drawings will be stamped “Record Drawings” and used for recording the above information only. e. The Engineer may recommend withholding payment if record drawings are not being maintained. 3. Submit record drawings to the Engineer for review at completion of the Work. Submit final record drawings as part of the Operation and Maintenance Manual package after the completion of the project. 2.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Final Inspection: 1. A final inspection of the electrical systems will be required before the Contract can be closed out. Request a final inspection by the Engineer after all systems are fully completed and operational. The Engineer will schedule an inspection and generate a list of items to be corrected or completed before Contract Closeout. If the Engineer is requested to make a final inspection by the Contractor, and the Engineer finds the work is not complete enough to perform that inspection, the Contractor will compensate the Engineer for his time. The Contractor will then perform the necessary work to complete the project and again request a Final Inspection.
2.3
CLEAN UP A. The contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish, caused by his employees or work, at all times. Remove rubbish, tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials from and about the building, and leave work areas "broom clean" or its equivalent upon completion of the work. Clean electrical equipment and remove temporary identification. In case of dispute the Owner will remove the rubbish and charge the cost to the Contractor. B. After tests have been made and accepted clean light fixtures, panels and other equipment installed by the Contractor, leaving the entire work area in a clean and complete working order.
2.4
DEMONSTRATION A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals:
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 01 05-7
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
a. Provide two (2) of Operating and Maintenance manuals for Sections 27 13 00. Operating and Maintenance manuals are to be consolidated for all facilities receiving a new system. Submit to the Engineer for review and forwarding to the Owner. Submit in portfolio form neatly edited with similar equipment grouped, tabbed and indexed. Provide typewritten materials. Provide the following in each manual: 1) Shop drawings, approved manufacturer's bulletins, and other appropriate data from specific manufacturer of each piece of equipment furnished and/or installed. Shop drawings, manufacturer's bulletin, and other data shall be appropriately marked to reflect the "as-built" condition. Cross out or delete all information shown on shop drawings or literature not applying to this specific project. 2) Copies of manufacturer’s warranties 3) Operating instruction for equipment. 4) Wiring and installation instructions for equipment 5) Recommended maintenance schedules and procedures for equipment. 6) Recommended trouble shooting procedures for equipment 7) Equipment parts list 8) Settings/adjustments/calibrations for systems as required 9) Local equipment suppliers/reps names, addresses, and telephone numbers 10)Equipment manufacturers names, addresses, and telephone numbers 11)Sub-contractors names, addresses, and telephone numbers 12)Refer to individual Sections in Division 27 for additional requirements 13)Test reports 14)Record Drawings 2.5
PROTECTION A. Cover openings and equipment, where set, to prevent obstruction to conduits, breakage, misuse, or disfigurement of equipment. Cover openings in equipment immediately upon uncrating or receipt at the job site and keep covered until permanent connection is made. B. Contractor is responsible for any damage to electrical equipment or materials until final acceptance of the entire project by the Owner. Keep all equipment clean materials until final acceptance of the entire project by the Owner. C. If a portion of the project is to be occupied by the Owner prior to Substantial Completion of the entire project make arrangements with the Owner to transfer responsibilities for protection and housekeeping. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 01 05-8
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 27 13 00 TECHNOLOGY CABLING SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A. Remodeling of existing Elementary School requires installation of a new voice, data and video Category 6 horizontal distribution cabling and voice/data backbone systems as indicated on plans or specified herein. B. Provide all labor and materials necessary for a fully functional voice, data and video cabling horizontal distribution system as indicated on plans or specified elsewhere herein. C. Scheduling: The low voltage communications subcontractor is responsible for coordinating work with the General Contractor, Electrical Contractor, Architect and Engineer.
1.2
REFERENCES A. Section 26 05 33: Raceways, Fittings, and Boxes B. Section 26 05 34: Technology Raceway System C. Sections 27 01 00 and 27 01 05 and all references contained therein form a part of this section of the specifications.
1.3
CODES AND STANDARDS A. Install the system in conformance to the current versions of the following standards: 1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1: General Requirements 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling 3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard (April 2000) 4. ANSI/EIA/TIA-569
Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and spaces (June 2001)
5. ANSI/ TIA/EIA-606 The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings (February 1993) 6. ANSI/ TIA/EIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications (August 1994) 7. ISO/IEC 11801 Information Technology-General Cabling Practices 8. ASTM-E 814/UL 1479 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops 9. ASTM-E 119 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials 10. IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.4, IEEE 802.5, IEEE 802.6 and IEEE 802.12 (as applicable) B. BICSI’s Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) C. Federal Communications Commission D. Underwriters Laboratories Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 13 00-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
E. National Electric Code ANSI/NFPA-70, (Especially Articles 250, 770 and 800) F. Uniform Building Code G. Uniform Fire Code H. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code 1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide a system consisting of voice, data, and video cabling and devices as described herein and as shown on the plans including all outlet devices and cover plates, terminations, cabling, cable support, punch down blocks, patch panels, equipment racks, grounding, setup, labeling, testing, certification, etc. Raceway and boxes are provided under Section 16741. B. Provide a system that meets and exceeds the requirements of the following local area network standards: 1. IEEE 802.3 (10BaseT) 2. IEEE 802.5 (16Mbps Token Ring Networks) 3. 100Mbs TP-PMD 4. 100BaseT 5. 1000BaseT 6. 550 MHz Broadband 7. 155Mbps and 622 Mbps ATM C. Provide Category 6 unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable for data cabling, factory tested to 350 MHz. D. Provide testing and certification by the manufacturers of the equipment as an installed system that meets Category 6 standards for structured voice, data and video cabling systems, including the terminations and outlet devices. E. Provide a fiber optic backbone star configuration of cabling between each communications closet and the main communications closet. F. Provide true in-line rack-mounted Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) units in each communications rack or cabinet indicated on drawings or specified elsewhere herein. G. In the event of a discrepancy between drawings, details and specifications provide the greater quantity or quality of materials specified.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide an installer who is a Low Voltage/Power Limited Contractor trained in the installation of voice and extended performance data grade cable and equipment. Provide certificates of training for Voice and Data cabling per TIA/EIA-568-B.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and TIA/EIA-568B.3, for supervisors of installation personnel from a manufacturer of the equipment listed or an independent training company. Include a letter describing training program in the shop drawing submittals. B. Qualification of the Installer:
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 13 00-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1. Installer must have a minimum of five years experience in the installation of the specified system required by the contractor. Any proposed installer who cannot show evidence of such qualifications will be rejected. Provide services of a technician certified by the system equipment manufacturer to supervise installation, adjustments and tests of the system. 2. Before commencing work, submit data showing that the contractor/subcontractor has successfully installed low voltage systems of the same type and design as specified. Include the names, locations, and the contact name and telephone number of at least four (4) similar installations. Specify type and design for each system and furnish documentation that the system has performed satisfactorily for the preceding eighteen (18) months. 3. The contractor installing the structured cabling shall have a Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) – a designation obtained form Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI®) functioning as project manager to oversee the communications cabling installation. The Contractor’s RCDD/project manager shall complete the following minimum tasks: a. Review and submit Contractor’s shop drawings. b. Conduct, as a minimum, bi-weekly site visits to review the installation and progress of the structured cabling during construction; attend construction meetings and coordinate work with other trades and construction schedule as required by the General Contractor. c. Review and sign completed punch-list items. d. Review and submit Contractor’s as-built documentation. 4. Provide proof of at least 25% BICSI Certified Installers in their employ, or participation in an approved low-voltage apprenticeship program. 5. Provide a copy of the contractors Minnesota Alarm and Communication or Power Limited Contractors license. a. One licensed power limited technician is required for every 3 unlicensed persons assigned to the work. C. Manufacturer’s Representative 1. Provide the services of a representative or technician, licensed in the State of Minnesota, from the manufacturer of the systems, or a factory trained technician of the manufacturer of the system, experienced in the installation and operation of the type of system provided. Supervise installation, software documentation, adjustment, preliminary testing, final testing and certification of the system. Provide the required instruction to the Owner’s personnel in the system operation and maintenance. 1.6
SUBMITTALS A. For general requirements see Section 17010. B. Provide a complete shop-drawing package of the system. C. Provide clearly legible shop drawings. D. Submit shop drawings in a neatly bound comb or three ring binders with protective covers. Indicate on the front cover the date submitted, project name, specification section number, electrical contractor's name, address, telephone number and the submitting equipment supplier’s address and telephone number. Allow enough clear area on the title sheet for shop drawing review stamps.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 13 00-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
E. Provide a letter describing extended performance data cabling installation training program. F. Submit 1/8” scale reproducible sepia floor plans showing all rooms, stairways, corridors, and horizontal exits. Include all telephone and data outlet locations. Indicate all wire sizes and types, wire counts, conduit sizes and proposed routing through the building. G. Submit the following riser/wiring/connection diagrams: 1. Single line riser drawing indicating all system components and the vertical wiring necessary to connect the components. Indicate conduit sizes and wire counts and a legend indicating the type of wiring. 2. Indicate the cable routing of each cable, and the approximate anticipated length of each cable. H. Submit original drawings produced by the supplier/manufacturer. Submitting reproductions of the Contract Documents is not acceptable. I. Submit a material list showing quantity, manufacturer, type and description of each item being furnished. Indicate in a separate list quantity and description of all spare parts to be turned over to the Owner at the end of the project. J. Submit original prints of the manufacturer product sheets with complete technical data for each item being provided. Circle, arrow or provide other permanent marking on each data sheet to clearly indicate the specific product included in the submittal. Remove or crosshatch out any product on the data sheets not applicable to the project or not being submitted for review. K. Submit physical drawings of components. L. Submit a scaled drawing of each communications closet, indicating all components including equipment racks, patch panels, termination blocks, all wiring, cable management, etc. Coordinate placement of devices with other systems that share the communications closet. M. Shop drawings not containing all the information listed above will be rejected without review N. Submit product data sheets for the test equipment used, and the training certificates for the equipment. O. Submit manufacturer’s factory test data for the Category 6 cable. Perform the test using swept frequency testing per EIA/TIA 568A. Submit the test results in the following table: Frequency (MHz) .772 1 4 8 10 16 20 25 31.25 62.5 100 155 200 250
Attenuation (Max) dB/100m
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
NEXT (dB/100m)
ACR (dB/100m)
27 13 00-4
PS-NEXT (dB/100m)
PS-ACR (dB/100m)
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
300 350 400 450 500 550 Frequency (MHz) .772 1 4 8 10 16 20 25 31.25 62.5 100 155 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550
ELFEXT (Max) dB/100m
PS-ELFEXT (dB/100m)
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A. One manufacturer’s brand will be used for each component type throughout the building.
2.2
HORIZONTAL CABLING A. Provide voice and data cabling with the following minimum specifications: 1. Provide plenum rated cable 2. Provide blue colored jacket for all data cabling and white colored jacket for all voice cabling 3. 23 AWG copper, 4-pair, 100 ohm, unshielded twisted pairs 4. ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.2 Category 6 compliant 5. Maximum Attenuation:
33dB
@ 250MHz
6. Minimum NEXT:
38.3dB @ 250 MHz
7. Minimum ACR:
5.3dB
8. Minimum PSNEXT:
36.3dB @ 250 MHz
@ 250MHz
9. Minimum ELFEXT (worst pair): 19.8 dB @ 250 MHz Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 13 00-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
10. Minimum PSELFEXT:
16.8 dB @ 250 MHz
11. Minimum PS-ACR:
3.3 Db @ 250 MHz
12. Maximum Return Loss:
17.3dB @ 250 MHz
13. Maximum Propagation Delay:
538 ns/100 m
14. Maximum Delay Skew:
45 ns/100 m
15. Maximum Outside Diameter:
0.23 in (5.8 mm)
B. Approved manufacturers: 1. Hitachi, (p/n: 38891-8BL Blue or 38891-8WH White) 2. Superior Essex, CommScope/Uniprise, Mohawk/CDT or General Cable equals. 2.3
PATCH PANELS A. At each communications closet data install patch panels with the following specifications: 1. Provide standard 19” wide EIA rack mountable. 2. ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.2 Category 6 compliant (extended performance) 3. Modular construction; accepts the same modular outlets as the workstation end outlets. 4. Installation will use T568B pin/pair assignment. 5. Installation will be TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 category 6 compliant. 6. Front and rear cable management retainers with Velcro securing straps 7. Each patch panel will have a minimum of 24 modular ports per panel and a maximum of 48 modular ports. 8. Provide sufficient ports at each equipment rack to terminate 125% of the total number of data cables. B. Approved manufacturers: 1. Hubbell (p/n: P6E48U) 2. CommScope/Uniprise, Siemon, Leviton, Panduit, or Pre-approved equals.
2.4
HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGEMENT A. Provide 1RU and 2RU horizontal cable management between patch panels and other equipment as shown on plan details or specified elsewhere herein with the following specifications: 1. Provide standard 19” wide EIA rack mountable. 2. ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.2 Category 6 compliant (extended performance) 3. Installation will be TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 category 6 compliant. B. Approved manufacturers: 1. Hubbell (1RU - p/n: HC119CE3P; 2RU - p/n: HC219CE3P) 2. CPI/Chatsworth, CommScope/Uniprise, Siemon, Leviton, Panduit, or Pre-approved equals.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 13 00-6
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2.5
COPPER PATCH CABLES A. Provide copper voice and data patch cables (for use at the voice and data patch panel) with the following minimum specifications: 1. Standard non-plenum rated jacket 2. 24 AWG, 4 pair, unshielded twisted pairs 3. 8 pin, 8-conductor factory terminated terminations at each end. 4. T568B pin/pair assignment. 5. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 category 6 compliant, and factory tested prior to shipping. 6. Adheres to the same specifications as the horizontal data cables specified above. 7. UL listed. 8. Provide an equal distribution of 3-, 6-, and 8-foot long cables. 9. Provide one cable per each data cable, plus an additional 25% spare of each length. 10. Approved Manufacturer: Provide cables from the same manufacturer as the connectivity hardware. 11. Hubbell (p/n PCX6B03, PCX6B06, PCX6B08)
2.6
MODULAR JACKS A. Provide telephone (desk) and data outlet devices with the following specifications: 1. Plastic modular 8 pin, 8-conductor outlet jack with insulation displacement connectors (IDC) 2. ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.2 Category 6 compliant (extended performance) 3. T568B pin/pair wire map 4. Provide the following color scheme for outlet devices: a. Voice Modular Jacks: White b. Data Modular Jacks: Blue 5. Approved manufacturers: a. Hubbell (Voice: p/n HXJ6OW; Data: p/n HXJ6B) b. CommScope/Uniprise, Siemon, Leviton, Panduit, or Pre-approved equals B. Provide wall telephone outlet devices with the following specifications: 1. Stainless steel plate with mounting posts for mounting telephone 2. Integral modular 6-pin jack with insulation displacement connectors 3. ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.2 Category 6 compliant 4. Approved manufacturers: a. Hubbell (p/n P630SR1GJ6) b. Leviton, CommScope/Uniprise, Panduit, or pre-approved equals
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 13 00-7
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2.7
MODULAR MULTIMEDIA JACKS A. Provide the outlet devices as shown on plans: 1. F-Type Modules:
Female/Female snap-in connectors.
2. RCA Modules:
110 Punch down snap-in audio connectors.
3. S-Video Modules:
110 Punch down snap-in connectors.
4. Provide the following color scheme for outlet devices: a. F-Type Couplers:
White
b. RCA Connectors:
Black Housing, Insulators: Red (Left)/White (Right)
c. S-Video Connectors: Black B. Provide category 6 cables on all IDC/110 RCA or S-Video type connectors wherever called out on plans or elsewhere within the division 16 specification. C. Approved manufacturers: a. Hubbell (F-Type: p/n SFFX; RCA: p/n SFRC110R & p/n SFRC110W; S-Video: p/n SFSV110BK) b. CommScope/Uniprise, Siemon, Leviton, Panduit, or Pre-approved equals 2.8
OUTLET COVERPLATES A. Provide stainless steel cover plates to match the style and material of the cover plates described in Section 16050 for the following technology outlet devices: 1. Desk telephone outlets 2. Wall telephone outlets 3. Voice/Data outlets 4. Fiber optic data outlets 5. Combination Voice, Data and/or TV outlets 6. Television outlets 7. Multimedia, project and high/low television outlets 8. Future outlets (Provide blank cover plate) 9. Other outlets as shown on detail sheets B. Provide 3-gang inserts with technology devices indicated on detail drawings in all RFB9 floor boxes. C. Provide torx head screws with center pin reject for outlet box plates called out on the plans to be “tamperproof”. D. Provide stainless steel faceplates with label windows, or engraved, black in-filled stainless steel cover plates; for the purpose of identifying each outlet in the cable management software program described elsewhere herein. E. Provide stainless steel faceplates of the same manufacturer as the connectivity hardware. F. Approved Manufacturers:
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 13 00-8
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
1. Hubbell: (p/n: SSFL11,SSFL12,SSFL13,SSFL14) | (X indicates 1, 2, 3, 4 port etc.) 2. Hubbell, Leviton, Panduit, or pre-approved equal 2.9
WORKSTATION CABLES A. Provide workstation and telephone cables (for use between the workstation/telephones and voice/data wall outlets) with the following specifications: 1. Standard non-plenum rated jacket 2. 24 AWG, 4 pair, unshielded twisted pairs 3. 8-pin, 8-conductor factory terminated terminations at each end. 4. T568B pin/pair assignment 5. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 category 6 compliant, and factory tested prior to shipping. 6. Adheres to the same specifications as the voice cables specified above. 7. UL listed. 8. Provide an equal distribution of 6-foot long and 10 foot long data patch cables. 9. Provide one cable per each voice and data drop, plus an additional 10% spare of each length. Turn cables over to Owner. 10. Approved Manufacturer: Provide cables from the same manufacturer as the connectivity hardware. 11. Hubbell (p/n PCX6GY06, PCX6GY10)
2.10 CABLE MANAGEMENT HARDWARE A. Provide cable supports with the following specifications: 1. Designed to support Category 6 cables without compressing or kinking cables 2. Approved manufacturers a. Caddy CAT 21 and CAT32 b. B-Line BCH21 and BCH32 c. Mono-Systems H133A and H664A d. Pre-approved equal. B. Provide wire management at each communication closet backboard and equipment rack or cabinets consisting of at least the following components: 1. 1RU (1.75”) horizontal duct cable management (Hubbell: p/n HC119CE3H) mounted on front rails between modular patch panels at all communications relay racks, 4-post server racks and wall mounted cabinets. 2. 2RU (3.5”) horizontal duct cable management (Hubbell: p/n HC219CE3N) mounted on front rails between patch panels at all communications relay racks, 4-post server racks and wall mounted cabinets. 3. 3.25”W C-Channel Vertical Cable management (Hubbell: p/n VS76) attached to each side of equipment racks (either relay or 4-post server racks) or as shown on detail drawings. Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 13 00-9
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
4. Horizontal cable supports and organizers as required at the rear of all modular patch panels. 5. Vertical cable supports and organizers on each side of each equipment rack 6. Velcro fastening 7. Provide cable management that is the same as manufacturer of equipment cabinets. C. Approved manufacturers: 1. CPI/Chatsworth, Hubbell, Leviton, Panduit, CommScope/Uniprise, or Pre-approved equals. 2.11 CABLE MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE A. Provide cable management software compatible with network operating software and the cable testing results produced by the testing equipment. Provide system that identifies the following: 1. Station type 2. Test data from TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 test procedures for basic link and channel testing. 3. Cable type, tested performance and length of cable. 4. Location of outlet and termination point. 5. Connection at each communications closet. 6. Remarks, testing, faults, etc. B. The cable management software will be the product of the testing equipment used for link certification. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Provide a system installed in accordance to these specifications, specifications of agencies listed in references and the manufacturer. B. Install terminal blocks vertically plumb and securely fastened to the backboards. Route station cables in brackets, troughs and wire ways specifically designed for category 6 applications (e.g. “J” hooks) and fasten cables securely to prevent strain at the terminations. C. Install cables without violating the minimum bend radius (static and installation) recommended by the cable manufacturer. D. Utilize existing and new cable tray as shown on overall plan sheets E0.2 and E0.3 for routing of new technology cabling to new and existing technology rooms. E. Support all cable at 48” to 60” intervals using the category 6 “J” hooks specified elsewhere herein. Adhere to the manufacturer’s maximum fill for the cable support hardware. F. Maintain at least a 12” spacing from fluorescent light fixtures and other EMI/RFI noise sources. G. Terminate all data cables at patch panels modular jack IDC’s in the equipment rack in each communications closet. H. Terminate all voice cables at 110 blocks in the communications closets.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 13 00-10
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
I. Terminate all optical fiber cables at ceramic SC connectors in the fiber optic termination kit at each communications closet. J. Unless noted otherwise, route each horizontal voice, and data cable to the nearest communications closet on the same floor of the building. Determine shortest routing from outlet device to communications closet prior to installation. K. Provide 10 feet of cable slack at each communications closets to allow future reconfiguration of the closets. Provide wire management to organize the slack. L. Provide horizontal and vertical cable management hardware as shown on plan details and as specified elsewhere herein. M. Provide following additional connections at C3 Outlets shown on plans: 1. Audio left RCA connectors between each projector technology ceiling outlet and C3 outlets wherever shown on plans using category 6 cable and snap-in IDC modules to terminate. 2. Audio right RCA connectors between each projector technology ceiling outlet and C3 outlets using category 6 cable and snap-in IDC modules to terminate N. Refer to Section 16741 for grounding requirements at each communications closet. O. Coordinate placement of devices with other systems that share the communications rooms (i.e. house phone system, MATV system, Owner LAN equipment, etc.). P. Secure all cable routed to the equipment rack, patch panels, punch down blocks, etc, utilizing the cable management hardware. 3.2
IDENTIFICATION A. Provide identification of the following components and locations, as outlined in EIA/TIA-606: 1. Each end of each horizontal and backbone cable 2. Each individual outlet at the workstation 3. Each individual outlet at the patch panel or termination block 4. Each cross connect termination B. Provide a permanent labeling method for each component, from PC-based software specifically designed to label the components per EIA/TIA-606. Provide room identification tags based on the final room number system provided by the Owner. 1. Provide self-adhesive black lettering on white substrate. 2. Provide a cable labeling system for each cable so designed for the purpose of labeling cables. C. Approved labeling manufacturers: 1. W.H. Brady LabelMark WIN 2. Panduit Pan-Mark for Windows 3. Pre-approved equal
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 13 00-11
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3.3
COPPER CABLE TESTING A. All cables will be tested to the category indicated by the manufacturer on the jacket, and the cable specified herein for voice and data locations is category 6. The Contractor is responsible to provide testing according to the most current set of standards approved at time testing is conducted. B. Test 100% of the copper cable pairs as described in bulletin TIA/EIA-568-B.1 AND TIA/EIA568-B.2 up to 250 MHz. Record the results of the test with cable identification and provide as part of the as-built drawings and cable management software. Any cable that fails will be reterminated and retested. If the cable does not retest within specs after re-terminating, replace and retest the cable. C. Record test data records to the cable management software database. Database will be loaded with structured cabling information for each drop, room closet, general path, cable lengths and cross-connects. Provide data downloaded from the testing equipment to a PC, for all test data described below. D. Perform the following tests, as defined in TIA/EIA-568-B.1 AND TIA/EIA-568-B.2: 1. Basic link testing which includes the horizontal cabling, outlets and connectors on both ends, and 2 meters of cabling at each end. 2. Wire Map test to verify the proper pin out at each end, plus continuity, crossed pairs, reversed pairs, split pairs, etc. 3. Physical Length, using the numbering on the cable. “Electrical” length based on propagation delay measurements is not acceptable. 4. Attenuation for the channel and basic link. 5. NEXT (worst pair-to-pair) for the channel and basic link, at both ends. 6. Return Loss 7. ELFNEXT 8. Propagation Delay 9. Delay Skew E. Perform testing using one of the following testers: 1. Agilent Scope 350 2. Wavetek LT8600 3. Fluke DSP-4000 4. Microtest OMNI-Scanner2 5. Approved equal (submit data sheets and training certificate as part of the shop drawings).
3.4
TRAINING A. Provide a minimum of four (4) hours of on-site instruction and training to the person or persons so designated by the Owner. Demonstrate cable management software functions and features, and walk the Owner through the system, starting with the layout of equipment in each communications closet.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 13 00-12
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
3.5
WARRANTY A. Provide a 15-year manufacturer’s warrantee for the system for proper operation of any communications protocol designed to operate over the specified cabling system. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
27 13 00-13
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A. Fire Alarm System B. Interface to HVAC Systems
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide modifications to, and extensions of, the existing intelligent addressable fire alarm systems consisting of the addition of new duct-smoke detectors and control modules indicated on the drawings and the associated modifications to the existing system to support the new devices, including but not limited to: communications cards, indicating zone cards, power supplies and backup batteries, communication devices, raceway system, boxes, wiring, grounding and the associated labor, programming and testing.
1.3
SYSTEM OPERATION A. Provide an adjustable alarm verification feature (as allowed in NFPA 72) to reduce the number of false alarms. Provide a system with programmable acknowledge time delay and reset time periods, within the allowable limits set by UL for the system. The activation of any system smoke detector shall initiate an alarm verification operation whereby the panel will reset the activated detector and wait for a second alarm activation. If, within one (1) minute after resetting, a second alarm is reported from the same or any other smoke detector, the system shall process the alarm as described previously. If no second alarm occurs within one minute, the system shall resume normal operation. The alarm verification shall operate only on smoke detector alarms. Other activated initiating device shall be processed immediately. The alarm verification operation shall be selectable by zone or addressable point. Each time a detector initiates an alarm verification operation, it shall be recorded into the alarm verification historical log. B. The control panel shall have the capability to display the number of times (tally) a zone, or addressable point, has gone into a verification mode. Should this smoke verification tally reach a pre-programmed number, a trouble condition shall occur. C. Alarm verification zones shall be able to be divided into eight separate groups whereby only verification zones from the same group will confirm the first activation and cause the alarm sequence to occur. D. Provide the following sequence of events after the main control panel has determined that an alarm condition exists within the building, and the alarm has been verified: 1. Sound the alarm notification signal at the main control panel and all remote annunciators. 2. Display in plain English the description of the location of the device in alarm at the main control panel and each remote annunciator. 3. Activate all audible and visual indicating devices in the associated indicating zone within the building. Activate all audible alarm indicating devices in a synchronous temporal pattern and all visual indicating devices in a one (1) hertz synchronous flash pattern until silenced by the alarm silence switch at the control panel or remote annunciator.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00-1
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
4. Close the domestic water shutoff solenoids at the sprinkler service(s) if water flow is detected by any sprinkler flow switch. 5. Release all self closing and automatically closing devices powered by the fire alarm system within the building. 6. Shut off any monitored HVAC system if smoke is detected by the associated HVAC unit duct detector. 7. Initiate the communication/modem device to transmit the point-specific information to the off-site monitoring station. 8. Recall the elevator cab if any elevator lobby, elevator equipment room, or top of hoistway smoke detector goes into alarm according to the following sequence: a. If the alarmed detector is in the elevator equipment room, top of hoistway, or in the elevator lobby on any floor other than the main level of egress, the elevator cab shall be recalled to the main level of egress. b. If the alarmed detector is in the elevator lobby on the main egress level, the elevator cab shall be recalled to the predetermined alternate recall level as determined by the local authority having jurisdiction. 9. Store the event in the history log. E. Provide the following sequence of events after the main control panel has determined that a trouble condition exists within the building: 1. Sound the trouble notification signal in the main control panel and all remote annunciators. 2. Display in plain English the description of the location of the device in trouble at the main control panel and each remote annunciator. 3. Store the event in the history log. F. Provide the following sequence of events after the main control panel determined that a supervisory condition exists within the building: 1. Sound the trouble notification signal in the main control panel and all remote annunciators. 2. Display in plain English the description of the location of the supervisory signal at the main control panel and each remote annunciator. 3. Store the event in the history log. G. Provide an interface to the building sprinkler system siamese connection indicating device on a separate indicating circuit. Provide alarm indication at the indicating circuit whenever waterflow is detected. Provide a separate keyswitch at the main control panel to silence the indicating device. H. If sprinkler waterflow is detected by the kitchen hood waterflow switch, the system shall shutoff electric power to the following: 1. Electric appliances located under the hood. 2. The exhaust fans serving the hood. 3. The electric gas solenoid valve. A general building alarm shall not initiate equipment shutoff.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00-2
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
I. The following system conditions shall initiate the communicator to transmit the point-specific information to the remote monitoring location: 1. Sprinkler waterflow alarm. 2. Sprinkler valve position switch supervisory alarm. 3. Any fire pump supervisory, trouble or alarm condition. 4. Any fire alarm condition initiated by a manual pull station. 5. Any verified automatic detector alarm. J. The following system conditions shall not initiate the communicator to transmit the alarm information to the remote monitoring location: 1. Smoke duct detectors required for HVAC unit shutdown. 2. Detectors required for the automatic release of fire doors. 3. Detectors required for the automatic release of combination fire/smoke dampers. 4. Detectors located within each dwelling unit. 5. Detectors used for elevator recall. 6. Detectors used for elevator power shutoff. 7. Detectors used for kitchen equipment power shutoff. K. Automatic detectors at the following locations shall initiate a trouble signal, not a general alarm: 1. Smoke duct detectors required for HVAC unit shutdown. 2. Detectors required for the automatic closure of fire doors and fire shutters. 3. Detectors required for the automatic closure of fire/smoke dampers. 4. Detectors located in elevator lobbies and machine rooms required for the recall of elevators. L. Provide green LED and the word NORMAL on the LCD display if the system is in its normal operating mode, and no alarms or faults exist in the system. M. A manual evacuation (drill) switch shall be provided to operate the alarm indicating appliances without causing other control circuits to be activated. However, should a true alarm occur, alarm functions would occur as described previously. N. The actuation of the "enable walk test" program at the control panel shall activate the "Walk Test" mode of the system which shall cause the following to occur: 1. The city circuit connection shall be bypassed. 2. Control relay functions shall be bypassed. 3. The control panel shall show trouble condition. 4. The alarm activation of any initiation device shall cause the audible signals to code a number of pulses to match the zone number. 5. The panel shall automatically reset itself after signaling is complete. 6. Any momentary opening of an initiating or indicating appliance circuit wiring shall cause the audible signals to sound for 4 seconds indicating a trouble condition. Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00-3
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
7. The system shall have the capacity of 8 distinctive walk test groups, such that only a portion of the system need be disabled during testing. O. The control panel shall maintain a moving average of the sensor's smoke chamber value to automatically compensate (move the threshold) for dust and dirty conditions that could affect detection operations. The system shall automatically maintain a constant smoke obscuration sensitivity for each sensor (via the floating threshold) by compensating for environmental factors. Photoelectric smoke detector smoke obscuration sensitivity shall be adjustable to within 0.2% of either limit of the UL window (0.2% to 4.0%) to compensate for any environment. P. The system shall automatically indicate when an individual sensor needs cleaning. When a sensor's average value reaches a predetermined level, a "DIRTY SENSOR" trouble condition shall be audibly and visibly indicated at the control panel for the individual sensor. Additionally, the LED on the sensor base shall glow steady giving a visible indication at the sensor location. If a "DIRTY SENSOR" is left unattended, and its average value increases to a second predetermined value, an "EXCESSIVELY DIRTY SENSOR" trouble condition shall be indicated at the control panel for the individual sensor. To prevent false alarms, these "DIRTY" conditions shall in no way decrease the amount of smoke obscuration necessary for system activation. For scheduling of maintenance, the control panel shall be able to generate an "ALMOST DIRTY" indication for any sensor approaching a "DIRTY" trouble condition. This report shall generate a list of sensor approaching a "DIRTY" trouble condition. This report shall generate a list of sensors requiring cleaning in advance of any trouble indication. Q. The control panel shall continuously perform an automatic self-test routine on each sensor which will functionally check sensor electronics and ensure the accuracy of the values being transmitted to the control panel. Any sensor that fails this test shall indicate a "SELF TEST ABNORMAL" trouble condition with the sensor location at the control panel. R. An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall have the capability to manually access the following information for each sensor: 1. Primary status 2. Device type 3. Present average value 4. Present sensitivity selected 5. Peak detection values 6. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.) S. An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall have the capability to manually control the following for each sensor: 1. Clear peak detection values 2. Enable or disable the point 3. Clear verification tally 4. Establish alarm sensitivity 5. Control a sensor's relay driver output
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00-4
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
T. It shall be possible to program the control panel to automatically change the sensitivity settings of each sensor based on time-of-day and day-of-week. There shall be five (5) sensitivity settings available for each sensor. U. The control panel shall have the capability of being programmed for a pre-alarm or two-stage function. This function allows an indication to occur when, for example, a 3% sensor reaches a threshold of 1.5% smoke obscuration. V. Adjust the sensitivity of the elevator lobby smoke detectors to maximum sensitivity. W. A minimum of 1000 individually identified smoke detectors, in addition to other addressable devices, as well as conventional initiating device and notification appliance circuits, shall be supported within a single control panel. 1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Submit qualifications of the system installer as specified in this section. B. Submit a complete shop drawing package of the proposed system. C. Provide clearly legible shop drawings. D. Submit shop drawings in a neatly bound comb or three ring binder with protective covers. Indicate on the front cover the date submitted, project name, specification section number, electrical contractor's name, address, telephone number and the submitting equipment supplier’s address and telephone number. Allow enough clear area on the title sheet for shop drawing review stamps. E. Submit 1/8” scale reproducible sepia floor plans showing all rooms, stairways, corridors, horizontal exits, controlled HVAC units, sprinkler flow and control valves, and all fire alarm system components. The drawings shall include exact wire counts and types, and point address information for each device. Single line for walls may be used. F. Submit the following riser/wiring/connection diagrams: 1. Single line riser drawing indicating all system components and the vertical wiring necessary to connect the components. Indicate conduit sizes and wire counts and a legend indicating the type of wiring. 2. Functional block diagram showing initiating device wiring, loop communications wiring, annunciator wiring, power supply wiring, indicating device wiring, power supply wiring, battery wiring, communications/modem wiring, etc. It is not necessary to show every initiating and indicating device on the riser diagram, but illustrate the wiring and connection of each type of device on each addressable loop. Indicate on the diagram the quantity of devices on each loop and the maximum allowable quantity of devices on each loop (to determine the number of spare addresses for future expansion). 3. Wiring diagrams showing wiring and terminations between HVAC fan units and the fire alarm system. 4. Wiring diagrams showing wiring and terminations between combination fire/smoke dampers and the fire alarm system. 5. Wiring diagrams showing wiring and terminations between self closing and automatically closing devices and the fire alarm system.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00-5
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
6. Wiring diagrams showing wiring and terminations between sprinkler system flow switches, valve position switches, dry pipe low pressure monitoring switches, etc., and the fire alarm system. 7. Wiring diagrams showing wiring and terminations to elevator controllers for primary and secondary recall functions. 8. Branch circuit wiring to the main control panel, sub-panels, and other devices in the system requiring 120 volt power. G. Submit original drawings produced by the supplier/manufacturer. Submitting reproductions of the Contract Documents is not acceptable. H. Submit a material list showing quantity, manufacturer, type and description of each item being furnished. Indicate in a separate list, the quantity and description of all spare parts to be turned over to the Owner at the end of the project. I. Submit original prints of the manufacturer product sheets with complete technical data for each item being provided. Circle, arrow or provide other permanent marking on each data sheet to clearly indicate the specific product included in the submittal. Remove or crosshatch out any product on the data sheets not applicable to the project or not being submitted for review. J. Submit physical and schematic drawings of special and custom components or hardware. K. Submit power supply sizing and battery sizing calculations showing total fire alarm system power draw in the supervisory and alarm conditions. L. Submit complete description of system operating sequence. M. Submit voltage drop calculations for indicating devices. N. Submit complete mounting details and instructions for all equipment to be installed. O. Submit complete description of system operating sequence. P. Shop drawings not containing all the information listed above will be rejected without review. 1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Only manufacturers that provide complete engineering, technical and support services to properly complete the project as designed are allowed. B. Provide the following, prepared by the manufacturer and supplier: 1. Certification of project and drawings. 2. Project management as required by Engineer and Owner. 3. Complete project testing and training to Engineers and Owners satisfaction. 4. Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) Certification. 5. Service personnel to be NICET Level II Certified. 6. Maintained inventory levels to provide service parts as required by the specification. C. Provide fire alarm and detection systems conforming to the requirements of the latest edition of the following National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) publications including all amendments to these publications: 1. 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00-6
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2. 70: National Electrical Code, including Article 760. 3. 71: Protective Signaling Systems. 4. 72: National Fire Alarm Code. 5. 101: Life Safety Code. D. Construct and install all fire alarm and fire detection equipment in accordance with the following publications: 1. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): a. 38 Manually Activated Signaling Boxes for Use with Fire Protection Signaling Systems. b. 268 and 268A Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. c. 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. d. 464 Audible Signal Appliances. e. 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. f. 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. g. 1971 Visual Signaling Appliances for the Hearing Impaired. 2. Americans with Disabilities Act. 3. International Fire Code (IFC). 4. International Mechanical Code (UMC). 5. International Building Code (IBC). 6. State Building Code 7. Minnesota Amendments to the IBC, IMC and IFC. 8. Local (City) Codes E. Provide components that are listed and cross listed as a product of a single fire alarm system manufacturer by Underwriter’s Laboratory, Inc. (U.L.) and bear the “U.L.” label. Provide control equipment listed under U.L. category UOJZ as a single control unit. F. Qualifications of the Installer: 1. Before commencing work, submit data showing that the contractor/subcontractor has successfully installed fire alarm systems of the same type and design as specified. Include the names, locations, and the contact name and telephone number of at least six (6) such installations completed by the installer. Specify type and design for each system and furnish documentation that the system has performed satisfactorily for the preceding eighteen (18) months. 2. Provide evidence of completion of the required manufacturers’ training and experience by the contractor or have NICET Level II (or higher), Certified Fire Alarm or Special Hazard Associate Engineering Technician(s), as applicable, in their employ. 3. Installed system to be certified by Underwriter’s Laboratories for a period of five (5) years. The system must be covered by a maintenance contract, during this five (5) year term, by a U.L. certified service company. Installing contractor/subcontractor to furnish proof of qualification and listing to perform this service. Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00-7
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
4. Experience of Installer: Accomplish installation by a Contractor with a minimum of five years experience in the installation of the specified fire alarm system. Any proposed installer who cannot show evidence of such qualifications will be rejected. G. Manufacturer's Representative 1. Provide the services of a representative or technician licensed in the State of Minnesota from the manufacturer of the system, or a factory trained technician of the manufacturer of the system, experienced in the installation and operation of the type of system provided. Supervise installation, software documentation, adjustment, preliminary testing, final testing and certification of the system. Provide the required instruction to the Owner's personnel in the system operation, maintenance and programming. 1.6
ZONING A. Initiating zones 1. Provide one initiating zone for each initiating device. 2. Provide a fire alarm control panel that supports at least 1000 automatic intelligent detectors. Provide loading of each loop card adhering to the following specifications: a. Load each loop card with the equal quantity of initiating points (e.g. if three loop cards are required for the system, load each loop card with 33% of the total number of system points, and homerun back to the main panel with the loop wiring ). b. Load each loop card to a maximum of 80% of the total number of initiating points possible for the loop card. B. Indicating zones 1. Provide one indicating zone for the interior indicating devices, and one indicating zone for the exterior sprinkler waterflow indicating device. 2. Provide 25% spare capacity on each interior indicating circuit for future indicating devices.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A. Equipment supplied by manufacturers as listed herein are considered approved for bidding on this project. Where specific models are referred to, the intent is to establish a minimum level of features and performance. B. Systems manufactured by the following are approved for bidding purposes on this project. Approval for installation is subject to review and approval of shop drawings. 1. Existing Simplex 4005 series
2.2
STANDBY BATTERIES A. Provide standby batteries as required for new devices in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72 that are appropriately sized to operate the fire alarm system for a minimum of twentyfour (24) hours and then operating all indicating units for at least five (5) minutes after the 24 hours, plus an additional 10% spare capacity. B. Provide battery charger sized to fully charge all standby batteries within eight (8) hours after a full discharge cycle.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00-8
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
C. Provide maintenance-free, sealed gel cell or sealed lead-acid batteries. Batteries which vent gases are not acceptable. D. Mount batteries inside the main control panel enclosure on the bottom. Separate battery enclosures are not acceptable. E. Provide monitoring of batteries, charger and associated wiring from the main control panel. F. Provide a voltmeter and ammeter to indicate battery voltage and charging current through the front LCD display on the fire alarm control panel. 2.3
INTELLIGENT AUTOMATIC PHOTOELECTRONIC SMOKE DETECTORS A. Provide automatic photoelectronic smoke sensors with the following specifications: 1. Utilizes light scattering principle from an internal infrared LED light source and reports the percent obscuration to the main control panel. 2. Factory set threshold at a nominal 1.5% light obscuration per foot (set via the main control panel) 3. Operates +14 to +120 degree F temperature, 10% to 93% humidity range. 4. Operates on single twisted pair cable. 5. Self-compensating drift compensation for maximum stability (set via the main control panel). 6. Integral red LED visible to the eye from below the detector to indicate an alarm condition and to indicate the polling pulse from the main control panel. 7. Mounts to base by twist locking motion. 8. U.L. 268 listed. B. Provide detector base with addressable communications module. C. Provide unique address assignment for each detector, either through DIP switches located in the communication module or assigned by the main control panel.
2.4
INTELLIGENT PHOTOELECTRONIC DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS A. Provide automatic photoelectronic duct smoke sensors with the following specifications: 1. Utilizes light scattering principle from an internal infrared LED light source and reports the percent obscuration to the main control panel. 2. Factory set threshold at a nominal 1.5% light obscuration per foot (set via main control panel) 3. Self-compensating drift compensation for maximum stability (set via main control panel). 4. Operates at air velocities from 300-4000 ft/min, +32 to +120 degree F operating temperature, 10%-93% humidity range. 5. Operates on single twisted pair cable. 6. Smoke chamber blocks particles larger than 200 microns. 7. Integral red LED visible to the eye from outside the detector housing to indicate an alarm condition and to indicate the polling pulse from the main control panel. 8. Mounts to housing/base by twist locking motion.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00-9
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
9. U.L. 268 listed. B. Provide detector base with addressable communications module. C. Provide unique address assignment for each detector, either through DIP switches located in the communication module or assigned by the main control panel. D. Provide HVAC duct-mounted housing and sampling tubes of the proper length to sample the entire width of the HVAC duct. Provide additional duct smoke detectors as required for ducts wider than the longest sampling tube recommended by the fire alarm manufacturer. E. Provide addressable control module and associated relay rated at 10 amps for connection to HVAC unit starter circuit for fan motor shutdown. Provide unique address assignment for each control module, either through DIP switches located in the control module or assigned by the main control panel. F. Provide addressable control module and associated relay for connection to combination smoke/fire dampers. Provide unique address assignment for each control module, either through DIP switches located in the control module or assigned by the main control panel. G. Provide remote test station for each duct detector in a readily accessible location near the unit. Provide engraved label on remote test station denoting the location, HVAC unit number, “RETURN” , damper location, etc. as required to identify the detector’s location and function. 2.5
ALARM INDICATING STROBES A. Provide alarm indicating strobes with the following specifications: 1. Semi-flush mounting to 4-inch square electrical box 2. 24 VDC operation powered from the main control panel. 3. In rooms larger than 1600 square feet a. Minimum 120 candela when measured on axis b. Rated for wall mount applications per UL 1971 at a minimum of 110 candela effective intensity. 4. Non-assembly rooms and corridors a. Minimum 75 candela when measured on axis b. Rated for wall mount applications per UL 1971 at a minimum of 15 candela effective intensity. 5. One to three flashes per second with a one (1) hertz synchronous flash pattern in accordance with ADA. 6. Red with white “Fire” lettering. Vandal-proof polycarbonate lens. 7. Supervised wiring 8. U.L. 1971 listed, ADA compliant
2.6
ALARM INDICATING HORN/STROBE UNIT A. Provide horn/strobe units with the following specifications: 1. Temporal sounding pattern of ½ to 1 sec ON, followed by ½ to 1 second OFF for three cycles, followed by a 1½ to 2 second OFF period for no less that 180 seconds.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00-10
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
2. Semi-flush mounting to 4-inch square electrical box 3. 24 VDC operation powered from the main control panel. 4. A minimum 90 dB output at 10 feet on axis. 5. Strobe light with the specifications of the strobe unit specified elsewhere in this section. 6. Red with white “Fire” lettering. Vandal-proof polycarbonate lens. 7. Supervised wiring 8. U.L. 1971 listed , ADA compliant 2.7
SYSTEM WIRE AND CABLE A. Provide all conductors and cables in conformance with the National Electrical Code Section 760-30. B. Size all initiating and indicating circuit wiring as recommended by the system manufacturer. Provide minimum 14 AWG size for indicating and control circuits, and 18 AWG for initiating circuits. C. Provide shielded cable to minimize RFI if recommended by the manufacturer. D. Provide maximum individual circuit voltage drop of 15% at the most distant device; or less if necessary to meet the manufacturer’s operating voltage range for all devices.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Provide a complete and fully operational fire alarm and detection system as described herein and as shown on the drawings. B. Install and wire all equipment in accordance with this specification, project drawings and shop drawings. C. Provide all wiring, conduit, junction boxes and outlet boxes required for the system, including terminations to initiating, indicating and control devices furnished by others. D. Install all wiring in concealed conduit in new construction. Provide surface raceway and boxes in finished areas of existing construction. Reuse existing conduit and boxes wherever possible. E. Paint all junction boxes red and label “Fire Alarm”. F. Provide plain English description of the location of each initiating device (zone). Coordinate wording of each device with the Owner. G. Provide a laminated floor plan showing all device locations, addresses and plain-English description of the location. Mount the plan adjacent to the annunciator panel in the building Engineer’s office. H. Provide color coded wiring throughout. Test all wiring for opens, shorts and grounds before system startup. I. Terminate all fire alarm wiring at terminal strips at the main control panel and all annunciator panels. Identify each cable with a number corresponding to a wiring diagram to be submitted in the O&M manuals. Neatly arrange of cabling around the sides of the cabinets to facilitate servicing of equipment and modules.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00-11
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
J. Provide the required system programming. Coordinate with the Owner all plain English address points, alarm verification presets, passwords, communication dialer protocol information, etc. K. Coordinate the installation of the fire alarm system with Division 23. Verify locations of sprinkler waterflow switches and valve position switch locations with Division 23. Provide wiring and make terminations to sprinkler waterflow devices and valve position switches being installed by Division 23. L. Coordinate the installation of the fire alarm system with Division 23. Verify locations of smoke damper and EP switch locations with Division 23. Provide wiring and make terminations to EP switches being installed by Division 23. M. Provide and install power to magnetic door holders, including wiring and connections through the associated smoke detector. Wire existing magnetic door holder wiring through the associated smoke detector base for automatic closure if the smoke detector senses smoke. N. Mount end-of-line resistors in separate junction box located near the last device in the circuit or in last device. Clearly and permanently label "EOL RESISTOR" at each junction box cover plates and/or devices containing EOL resistors. O. Provide one 3/4 inch conduit and telephone cable from main fire alarm control panel to the telephone terminal board for tie-in to remote monitoring company. Verify location with Owner. P. Provide and connect wiring from the duct smoke detector control modules to associated motor controllers. Q. Install smoke detectors after the site is free from abnormal dust and dirt conditions, or provide manufacturer-approved protective cover over the device until the site is clean. R. Provide permanent labels for controls and indicators. S. Provide Form C relays where required to control line voltage equipment. T. Mount fire alarm devices to electrical boxes. U. Locate automatic detectors a minimum of 36 inches away from supply air diffusers. 3.2
PLENUM CABLE INSTALLATION A. Plenum rated conductors are to be installed above accessible, suspended ceilings. Provide conduit for all exposed areas. Where provided utilize cable trays. Do not utilize cable trays provided for voice/data cabling. B. Provide bushings on all conduit drops to outlet boxes for devices installed in walls. C. Route all cables to avoid access panels on equipment and in ceiling. D. Support all cable at 5’ intervals using “J” hooks. Fasten “J” hooks to building structure. Adhere to the manufacturer’s maximum fill for the cable support hardware. Bundle cables to eliminate sagging between “J” hooks. Install “J” hooks to eliminate sagging on ceilings, ducts, pipes, etc. E. Install cables without violating the minimum bend radius recommended by the cable manufacturer. F. Maintain at least a 12” spacing from fluorescent light fixtures and other EMI/RFI noise sources.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00-12
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
G. No splices are allowed in individual runs of cables. If splices are required due to the construction schedule then splices are to be made within junction boxes. Notify engineer for inspection of junction boxes prior to installation of ceiling tiles. H. Maintain conductor shields at each connection point and tie to ground. Conductor shields are to be continuous throughout the entire run of cable. I. Provide test results indicating continuity of conductor shields. Replace all cables where shields have become nicked or cut. J. Terminate all conductors in flush outlet boxes behind devices. Provide stress relief. Provide grommets where cables enter HVAC equipment. K. Provide red plenum cable for fire alarm systems. 3.3
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS A. Upon completion of the installation phase, test and adjust the system to insure proper operation. B. Test all operational features of the system at this time. C. Where required, make appropriate correction(s) and adjustments.
3.4
AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION A. Provide to the Engineer two (2) complete as-built manuals assembled in loose-leaf binders containing the following: 1. As-built system functional block diagrams. 2. Corrected copies of approved shop drawings 3. As-built system wiring diagram. 4. List indicating each device, location, address, label, etc. 5. Final operating sequence (step by step) for the system as tested and accepted by the Fire Marshal. 6. Hard copy printout of the complete fire alarm operating program, and a CD-ROM disk with programming software as written and customized for this project. 7. System operation manuals. 8. System maintenance manuals. 9. Name, address and phone number of the responsible service organization.
3.5
FINAL CHECKOUT AND ACCEPTANCE A. Demonstrate the operation and use of the system to the Architect/Engineer, to the Owner's representative(s) and the Fire Marshal. B. Verify the following before scheduling the system demonstration: 1. System installation is complete. 2. System is fully operational. C. Verify the following before requesting final approval: 1. Owner training is complete. 2. As-built documentation is complete and turned over to the Engineer.
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00-13
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
D. Provide a letter to the Owner certifying that the installation is complete, fully operational and successfully tested. E. Final acceptance of the system will be given upon completion of all of the above requirements. 3.6
SYSTEM GUARANTEE A. Provide a complete parts and labor warranty for the system, commencing on the date of final acceptance and continuing for a period of one (1) year. Provide all materials and labor required to correct any system malfunction or failure (determined not to be the result of negligence, abuse or misuse) at no charge to the Owner during this time period.
3.7
MAINTENANCE A. Maintain a local service organization which is available to perform testing, inspection, repair and maintenance service on the system. B. Make available to the Owner a maintenance contract proposal, from the system supplier to provide a minimum of two (2) inspections and test per year in compliance with NFPA-72 guidelines. END OF SECTION
Akin Road Elementary School Farmington Public Schools, ISD #192
28 31 00-14
January 15, 2013 R11-1036.000
